FT9Y-B1390 (7)FT1A Series

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualSAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Confirm that the delivered product is what you have ordered. Read this manual to make sure of correct operation.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS• Be certain to read this manual carefully before performing installation, wiring, or maintenance work, or operating
the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-*.
• The SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-* has been manufactured with careful regard toquality. However, if you intend to use this product in applications where failure of this equipment may result indamage to property or injury, ensure that it used in conjunction with appropriate fail-safe backup equipment.
• In this manual, safety precautions are categorized in order of importance to Warning and Caution:
Warning notices are used to emphasize that improper operation may cause severe
personal injury or death.
Caution notices are used where inattention might cause personal injury or damage toequipment.

• When using the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-*, and FT1A-*14SA-* in applications that require a highdegree of safety such as nuclear equipment, railways, aircraft, medical equipment, and vehicles, giveconsideration to measures such as the addition of fail-safes and backup functions. In addition, we ask that you
contact your IDEC sales office to confirm the safety of the application according to the specifications and similar
documents.
• Turn off the power to the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-* before installation,
removal, wiring, maintenance, and inspection of the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* andFT1A-*14SA-*. Failure to turn power off may cause electrical shock or fire hazard.
• Special expertise is required to install, wire, configure, and operate the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*,FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-*. People without such expertise must not use the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*,FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-*.
• The SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-* uses an LCD (liquid crystal display) as adisplay device. The liquid inside the LCD is harmful to the skin. If the LCD is broken and the liquid attaches toyour skin or clothes, wash the liquid off using soap, and consult a doctor immediately.
• Emergency and interlocking circuits must be configured outside of the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* andFT1A-*14SA-*.
• If relays in the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-* output circuits should fail, outputs may
remain at on or off state. For output signals which may cause serious accidents, configure monitor circuits outside theSmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-*.
• The SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-* self-diagnostic function may detect internal circuitor program errors, stop programs, and turn outputs off. Configure circuits so that the system containing the
SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-* are not jeopardized when outputs turn off.
• Do not use the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-*’s internal touch switches for an
emergency circuit. If the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-* failed, the external
equipment connected to the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-* will no longer beprotected, and serious injury to operators and equipment damage may be caused.

Preface-1

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualSAFETY PRECAUTIONS• Prevent the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-* from falling while moving ortransporting, otherwise damage or malfunction of the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* andFT1A-*14SA-* will result.
• Use the product within the environmental limits given in the catalog and manual. Use of the product in hightemperature or high-humidity environments, or in locations where it is exposed to condensation, corrosive gasor large shock loads can create the risk of electrocution and fire.
• The SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-* are designed for use in pollution degree 2.
Use the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-* in environments of pollution degree 2.
(based on the IEC60664-1 rating)• Install the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-* according to the instructions. Improper
installation will result in falling, failure, electrical shock, fire hazard, or malfunction of the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*,FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-*.
• Prevent metal fragments or wire chips from dropping inside the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* andFT1A-*14SA-* housing. Ingress of such fragments and chips may cause fire hazard, damage, and malfunction.
• Use a power supply of the rated value. Using a wrong power supply may cause fire hazard.
• The SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-* uses “PS2 of EN61131” as DC power supply.
(based on the IEC/EN61131 rating)• Use wire of a proper size to meet the voltage and current requirements.
• Use an IEC 60127-approved fuse on the output circuit and the power line outside the FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* andFT1A-*14SA-*. This is required when equipment containing the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* andFT1A-*14SA-* is destined for Europe.
• Use an EU-approved circuit breaker. This is required when equipment containing the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*,FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-* is destined for Europe.
• Make sure of safety before starting and stopping the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* andFT1A-*14SA-*. Incorrect operation of the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-* may
cause mechanical damage or accidents.
• Use the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-* in a local area network if you download or
upload the project data via the Ethernet port.
• The touch panel of the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-* is made of glass, and will
break if exposed to excessive shock. Take due care when handling it.
• When more than one button is pressed at the same time, due to the detection characteristics of an analog type
touch panel, only the gravity center of the pressed area is sensed and the unit assumes that only one button ispressed. Thus, when more than one button is pressed simultaneously, the resulting operation is not guaranteed.
• The screen becomes blank when the backlight is burnt out; however, the touch panel remains enabled. Incorrect
touch panel operation will occur when operating the touch panel when the backlight appears to be turned off
but is actually burnt out. Note that this erroneous operation may result in damage.
• Do not push hard or scratch the touch panel and protection sheet with a hard object such as a tool, because
they are damaged easily.
• At temperatures over the rated operating temperature, the clock accuracy is affected. Adjust the clock before use.
• For applications which require clock accuracy, adjust the clock periodically.
• Do not install the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-* in areas subjected to strong
ultraviolet rays, since ultraviolet rays may impair the quality of the LCD.
• Do not attempt to disassemble, repair or modify the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* andFT1A-*14SA-*. This can create the risk of fire or electrocution.
• When disposing of the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-*, do so as an industrial
waste.
• Do not switch off the power or pull out the USB flash drive while it is being accessed, as this may result in
destruction of the stored data. If the data on the USB flash drive is corrupted, format the USB flash drive.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Preface-2

Revision history

Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-in Batteries in EU Member StatesNote) The following symbol mark only applies to EU countries.
This symbol mark means that batteries and accumulators, at their end-of life, should be
disposed of separately from your household waste.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, this chemical symbol meansthat the battery or accumulator contains a heavy metal at a certain concentration. This will be
indicated as follows :Hg : mercury (0.0005%), Cd : cadmium (0.002%), Pd : lead (0.004%)
In the European Union there are separate collection systems for used batteries and accumulators.
Please dispose of batteries and accumulators correctly in accordance with each country or local
regulation.

Revision history
March 2013:

First Edition

August 2013:

Second Edition

June 2014:

Third Edition

February 2015:

Fourth Edition

March 2016:

Fifth Edition

January 2017:

Sixth Edition

May 2019:

Seventh Edition

December 2019:

Eighth Edition

Caution• The contents of this manual and the WindO/I-NV3 and WindLDR applications are copyright, and all rights arereserved by IDEC Corporation. Unauthorized duplication, reproduction, sales, transfers, or leasing is prohibited.
• The contents of this manual and the WindO/I-NV3 and WindLDR applications are subject to change without notice.
• IDEC Corporation accepts no responsibility for circumstances arising from the use of this manual or the
WindO/I-NV3 and WindLDR applications.
• Please contact your vendor or IDEC Corporation with any problems regarding the operation of this product.

Trademarks
WindO/I, WindLDR, WindCFG, SmartAXIS and MICRO/I are registered trademarks of IDEC CORPORATION in JAPAN.
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation of the United States, other countries, or both.
Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
All other company names and product names used in this manual or the WindO/I-NV3 application are trademarks of
their respective owners.

Regarding laws and compatible standards
This product adheres to the laws and compatible standards of all countries involved as shown below.
European laws and standards
This product complies with the following EU directives.
• Low Voltage Directive• EMC Directive
To comply with these directives, this product has been designed and evaluated on the basis of the followinginternational and European standard.
• IEC/EN 61131-2: 2007 (excluding the Lite digital I/O status indicators)
North American regulations/standards
This product has obtained the following certification from UL.
• UL508• CSA C22.2 No.142• ANSI/ISA 12.12.01• CAN/CSA C22.2 No.213

Preface-3

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualRegarding laws and compatible standards

Marine Standard
This product complies with the following the Marine Standard. (FT1A Version V120 or later)• ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)• DNV (Det Norske Veritas)• LR (Lloyd’s Register)• NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)(Touch is not allowed to be installed on open decks.)
When using the Touch as the Marine Standard Approved Products, attach a ferrite core (ZCAT3035-1330
manufactured by TDK Corporation) to the power cables (2 turns), the cable for each communication port (2 turns).
And attach a ferrite core (ZCAT3035-1330 manufactured by TDK Corporation) to the cable for communication
cartridge (2turns).
For details on the compatible standards and EU Directives, contact the distributor from which you purchased thisproduct or visit our web site.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Preface-4

Preface

PrefaceThis user’s manual describes entire functions, specifications, installation, and operation basics of the SmartAXIS. Also
included are powerful communications of the SmartAXIS and troubleshooting procedures.
This manual describes SmartAXIS Touch (SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-*) andWindO/I-NV3 software. The information includes drawing tools, setup procedures, and how to configure all Touch
operator interfaces.
This user's manual describes the operation and handling of the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* andFT1A-*14SA-*. Please read it carefully and ensure that you fully understand the functions and performance of theSmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-* and the WindO/I-NV3 software.
Read the following materials as necessary for your particular application.
Type No.

References

Content

FT9Y-B1390

SmartAXIS Touch User's
Manual(This document)

Describes the hardware specifications of the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*,FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-*.

FT9Y-B1382

SmartAXIS Ladder
Programming Manual

Describes basic operations for ladder programming, instructions formonitoring on the SmartAXIS, available devices and instruction lists, anddetails of each instruction.

FT9Y-B1386

SmartAXIS FBDProgramming Manual

Describes basic operations for function block programming, available
devices and function block lists, and details of each function block.

External Device Setup Manual

Describes the connection procedures and available devices for various
communication including the PLC-Link communication, O/I Link
communication,
and DM Link communication.

WindO/I-NV3 Help

Describes programming for the SmartAXIS Touch series, and usage
instructions for the WindO/I-NV3 software.

WindLDR Help

Describes usage instructions for WindLDR, programming software for the
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite series.

Character Table (PDF)

A list of fonts can be used with the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*,FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-* and WindO/I-NV3. For restrictions on
using the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-*,refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-5.

This manual describes the FT1A Series SmartAXIS Touch and the WindO/I-NV3 software.
Unless otherwise specified, SmartAXIS refers to the FT1A Series SmartAXIS Touch.
For the FT1A Series SmartAXIS Pro and the FT1A Series SmartAXIS Lite, refer to the “SmartAXIS Pro/Lite User's
Manual”.

Preface-5

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualSymbols Used in this Document

Symbols Used in this Document
This manual uses the following symbols to facilitate description.

Symbols……

Useful information relating to a function……

Information that requires special attention. Failure to operate the product in accordance with
the information provided can lead to serious injury or damage.

……

Indicates the chapter/page of related reference information.

OK……

Screen buttons are indicated by bold text or by using the actual graphic icon.

SHIFT, A……

Keyboard keys are indicated by the keyboard inscription in capital letters or enclosed insquare brackets.

****

……

Controls are indicated by bold text.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Preface-6

Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Terminology Used in this Manual

Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Terminology Used in this Manual
Item

Description

SmartAXIS

Another name for the SmartAXIS FT1A Series.

Touch

The generic term for the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*, FT1A-*14KA-* and FT1A-*14SA-*.

Touch (relay output type)The generic term for the SmartAXIS FT1A-*12RA-*.

Touch (transistor output type)The generic term for the SmartAXIS FT1A-*14KA-* and the FT1A-*14SA-*.

Pro

The generic term for the FT1A Series that includes an LCD, excluding the Touch.

Lite

The generic term for the FT1A Series that does not include an LCD, excluding the
Touch.

MICRO/I

Generic term used to refer to the O/I Touchscreen HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/
2F/2S/3F/4F.

External device

Generic term used to refer to a PLC or micro computer that is connected to andcommunicates with the Touch.

FBD

The abbreviation for "function block diagram".

FB

Function block
For example, the AND (logical AND) function block is written as AND FB.

Device Address

Memory that is capable of storing values in unit of bits or words loaded on the Touchand external device.

System Area

Device area that is pre-allocated for exchanging screen management, error information,and clock data between the Touch and external device.

PLC Link Communication

A communication method that performs communication with the external device
according to the setting of the screen and without a program.

DM Link Communication

A communication method that reads to or writes from the Touch device from acomputer or microcomputer board.

User Communication

A communication method which performs communication with external devices such as
barcode readers and inverters.

No External Devices

A method that is capable of operating the Touch independently without connecting toexternal device.

O/I Link

A connection format that enables connections of up to 16 units of Touch with highspeed communication of 115,200bps.

O/I Link Master

The Touch unit that is directly connected to external device on the O/I Link network.

O/I Link Slave

The Touch units that are not directly connected to external device on the O/I Link
network.

WindO/I-NV3

Software for creating projects and data of the Touch.

WindLDR

This is the editor for the control functions of the Touch. It is launched from
WindO/I-NV3. Operations for creating ladder program or FBD Program are similar to
those of the WindLDR PLC programming software for the Pro and Lite.

WindCFG

This system configuration tool intuitively implements optimized settings for devices andsystem configurations through a combination of PLCs, operator interfaces, and otherperipheral equipment by selecting icons and dragging and dropping them.

Project

Data including image data required for operating the Touch, which is created with
WindO/I-NV3 software.

Manager

WindO/I-NV3 provides tools to manage pictures, text and script etc. With the Managers,
you can create and manage them in your project.

Setup

Generic term used to refer to the common settings in the project.

Project Settings

Basic settings of operation in the Setup settings.

Alarm Log

A function where the Touch collects log data of alarms.

Data Log

A function where the Touch collects data of device addresses.

ScriptA script is an executable list of commands created by a simple programming language.

Control function

The control function by ladder program or FBD program created with WindLDR.

Text GroupA group of 16 texts maximum that is in order to dynamically switch the character
displayed on the Touch according to the value of device.

Windows Font
Maintenance Communication

Text fonts that can be displayed on the Windows OS on which the WindO/I-NV3 isrunning.
Communications between the WindO/I-NV3 and Touch using a dedicated protocol.

Device Monitor

A special Popup Screen on the Touch on which value of device can be displayed orchanged.

System Screen

Pre-allocated screen dedicated for performing initial setting of the Touch, self-diagnosis,
and clearing the log data etc.

Preface-7

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualAbbreviations, Generic Terms, and Terminology Used in this Manual

Item

Description

External memory

For the Touch, a USB flash drive.

Window

Screens that are loaded on to the Base Screen, including Popup Screen and Device
Monitor.

Drawings

Define as as non functional content (i.e. shape, picture, text).

Parts

Define as functional content (i.e. button, pilot lamp, commands, etc.)

ObjectDefine as combination of Drawings and Parts placed on WindO/I-NV3 edit screen.

Touch Switch

A part that operates a function by pressing parts that have been placed on the screen.

Standard Keypad

Keypad that is displayed when operating Numerical and Character Input parts whenStandard is selected under Type in the Keypad menu for Numerical and Character
Input parts.

Keep Device

Generic term for internal devices that are not reset when operation is started. Even
after the power is turned off, the values are retained by the battery.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Preface-8

Contents

Contents
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .................................................................................Preface-1
Revision history ............................................................................................Preface-3
Caution........................................................................................................Preface-3
Trademarks..................................................................................................Preface-3
Regarding laws and compatible standards ......................................................Preface-3
Preface ........................................................................................................Preface-5
Symbols Used in this Document.....................................................................Preface-6
Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Terminology Used in this Manual ................Preface-7

Chapter 1
1

General Information for SmartAXIS
About the SmartAXIS .............................................................................................1-1
1.1
1.2
1.3

2
3
4

Chapter 2
1

About the WindO/I-NV3 .........................................................................................1-5
Operating Modes ...................................................................................................1-6
Flow from Screen and Ladder Program or FBD Program Creation to Run Operation ....1-7

WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
WindO/I-NV3 Specifications....................................................................................2-1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4

2

Configuring the Work Environment .................................................................2-56
Customizing the Workspace ...........................................................................2-59

WindO/I-NV3 Common Operations and Settings.....................................................2-61
5.1
5.2

Preface -9Application Menu Command List .....................................................................2-37
Quick Access Toolbar .....................................................................................2-38
Ribbon Command List....................................................................................2-41
Windows Displayed in the Workspace .............................................................2-49
Status Bar.....................................................................................................2-53

Customizing WindO/I-NV3 ....................................................................................2-56
4.1
4.2

5

Starting WindO/I-NV3....................................................................................2-33
Exiting WindO/I-NV3 .....................................................................................2-35

Configuration & Functions ....................................................................................2-36
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5

4

Available Data ................................................................................................ 2-1
Available Text................................................................................................. 2-5
Available Number of Colors ............................................................................2-18
Available Image Files .....................................................................................2-18

Starting and Exiting WindO/I-NV3 .........................................................................2-33
2.1
2.2

3

Type Numbers................................................................................................ 1-1
Features for the Touch.................................................................................... 1-2
Special Functions for the Touch ....................................................................... 1-3

Device Address Settings.................................................................................2-61
Setting Conditional Expressions ......................................................................2-63

SmartAXIS Touch User's ManualContents

Chapter 3
1

Project
Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data........................................................................ 3-1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7

2
3

Project Settings Configuration Procedure .............................................................. 3-18
Project Settings Dialog Box.................................................................................. 3-19
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11

4

System Tab................................................................................................... 3-19
Communication Interface Tab.........................................................................3-27
Communication Driver Tab ............................................................................. 3-32
Communication Driver Network Tab................................................................ 3-34
Communication Driver Extension Tab ..............................................................3-36
O/I Link Tab ................................................................................................. 3-37
User Communication Tab ............................................................................... 3-38
External Memory Tab.....................................................................................3-40
Autorun Tab..................................................................................................3-41
Project Details Tab ........................................................................................3-42
Contents Tab ................................................................................................3-44

Special Functions ................................................................................................ 3-45
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17
4.18
4.19
4.20
4.21

5

Creating New Project Data ...............................................................................3-1
Opening Project Data ......................................................................................3-4
Saving Project Data.........................................................................................3-5
Printing Project Data .......................................................................................3-7
Comparing Project Data................................................................................. 3-13
Changing Project Settings ..............................................................................3-14
Closing Project Data ...................................................................................... 3-17

Function Area Settings Configuration Procedure...............................................3-46
Stop Input .................................................................................................... 3-48
Reset Input ..................................................................................................3-49
Run/Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error ................................................... 3-51
Run/Stop Selection at Power Up ..................................................................... 3-52
Keep and Clear Control Devices......................................................................3-53
High-Speed Counter ...................................................................................... 3-55
Catch Input ..................................................................................................3-72
Interrupt Input .............................................................................................3-74
Frequency Measurement................................................................................3-77
Input Filter ................................................................................................... 3-79
Analog Input................................................................................................. 3-81
Timer Interrupt .............................................................................................3-84
Analog Output .............................................................................................. 3-86
Analog Cartridge ...........................................................................................3-88
Ladder Monitor .............................................................................................3-97
Watchdog Timer Setting ................................................................................3-98
Daylight Savings Time ................................................................................. 3-100
Clock Function ............................................................................................ 3-101
Connection Settings .................................................................................... 3-104
Remote Host List......................................................................................... 3-106

Project Restrictions ............................................................................................3-108
5.1
5.2

Download Restrictions ................................................................................. 3-108
Maximum Number of External Devices .......................................................... 3-108

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

Preface -10

Contents

Chapter 4
1

ScreenScreen Overview ...................................................................................................4-1
1.1
1.2

2

Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens .....................................................4-2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7

3

1
2

Overview ..............................................................................................................5-1
Drawing Objects ....................................................................................................5-2
Shapes .......................................................................................................... 5-2
Picture........................................................................................................... 5-2
Text .............................................................................................................. 5-2

Part Types.............................................................................................................5-3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5

Preface -11

What You Can Do with Library Screens ...........................................................4-29
Creating a Library Screen...............................................................................4-30
Using a Library Screen ...................................................................................4-31
Deleting Library Screens ................................................................................4-33
Exporting Library Screens ..............................................................................4-34
Importing Library Screens ..............................................................................4-35

Drawings and Parts

2.1
2.2
2.3

3

Screen Number Restrictions ...........................................................................4-27
Maximum Number of Parts.............................................................................4-27
Maximum Number of External Device Address .................................................4-28
Vertical Installation Restrictions ......................................................................4-28

Using Library Screens ..........................................................................................4-29
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6

Chapter 5

Popup Screen Settings ...................................................................................4-22
Popup Screen Configuration ...........................................................................4-25
Standard Keypad Popup Screen ......................................................................4-26

Screen Restrictions ..............................................................................................4-27
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4

6

Base Screen Settings .....................................................................................4-14
Displaying Layered Base Screens ....................................................................4-18
Operating When Drawing Objects and Parts Overlap ........................................4-20

Popup Screen ......................................................................................................4-22
4.1
4.2
4.3

5

Creating Screens ............................................................................................ 4-2
Opening Screens ............................................................................................ 4-2
Saving Screens............................................................................................... 4-4
Closing Screens.............................................................................................. 4-6
Duplicating Screens ........................................................................................ 4-8
Deleting Screens ...........................................................................................4-10
Reusing Screens............................................................................................4-12

Base Screen ........................................................................................................4-14
3.1
3.2
3.3

4

Screen Types ................................................................................................. 4-1
Screen Size .................................................................................................... 4-1

Buttons ......................................................................................................... 5-3
Lamps ........................................................................................................... 5-3
Data Displays ................................................................................................. 5-3
Charts ........................................................................................................... 5-3
Commands .................................................................................................... 5-4

SmartAXIS Touch User's ManualContents

Chapter 6
1

Drawings
Shapes................................................................................................................. 6-1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9

2

Picture ............................................................................................................... 6-23
2.1
2.2

3

1

Bit Button............................................................................................................. 7-1

How the Keypad is Used ................................................................................7-90
Keypad Configuration Procedure..................................................................... 7-91
Properties of Keypad Dialog Box..................................................................... 7-92

Selector Switch ................................................................................................... 7-94
7.1
7.2
7.3

8

How the Multi-Button is Used .........................................................................7-68
Multi-Button Configuration Procedure ............................................................. 7-69
Properties of Multi-Button Dialog Box..............................................................7-70

Keypad .............................................................................................................. 7-90
6.1
6.2
6.3

7

How the Key Button is Used...........................................................................7-49
Key Button Configuration Procedure ............................................................... 7-50
Properties of Key Button Dialog Box ............................................................... 7-51
Key Buttons ..................................................................................................7-63
Key Browser ................................................................................................. 7-66

Multi-Button ....................................................................................................... 7-68
5.1
5.2
5.3

6

How the Goto Screen Button is Used ..............................................................7-35
Goto Screen Button Configuration Procedure ................................................... 7-36
Properties of Goto Screen Button Dialog Box ................................................... 7-37

Key Button ......................................................................................................... 7-49
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5

5

How the Word Button is Used ........................................................................ 7-17
Word Button Configuration Procedure ............................................................. 7-20
Properties of Word Button Dialog Box ............................................................. 7-21

Goto Screen Button............................................................................................. 7-35
3.1
3.2
3.3

4

How the Bit Button is Used ..............................................................................7-1
Bit Button Configuration Procedure...................................................................7-3
Properties of Bit Button Dialog Box ...................................................................7-4

Word Button....................................................................................................... 7-17
2.1
2.2
2.3

3

Text Configuration Procedure .........................................................................6-25
Properties of Text dialog box.......................................................................... 6-26

Buttons
1.1
1.2
1.3

2

Picture Configuration Procedure ..................................................................... 6-23
Properties of Picture Dialog Box ..................................................................... 6-24

Text ................................................................................................................... 6-25
3.1
3.2

Chapter 7

Line ...............................................................................................................6-1
Polyline ..........................................................................................................6-3
Polygon ..........................................................................................................6-5
Rectangle .......................................................................................................6-7
Circle/Ellipse ................................................................................................. 6-10
Arc...............................................................................................................6-13
Pie ...............................................................................................................6-15
Equilateral Polygons ...................................................................................... 6-18
Fill ...............................................................................................................6-21

How the Selector Switch is Used .................................................................... 7-94
Selector Switch Configuration Procedure .........................................................7-95
Properties of Selector Switch Dialog Box .........................................................7-96

Potentiometer....................................................................................................7-109
8.1

How the Potentiometer is Used .................................................................... 7-109

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

Preface -12

Contents

8.2
8.3

Chapter 81

Lamps
Pilot Lamps ...........................................................................................................8-1
1.1
1.2
1.3

2

1

Numerical Input ....................................................................................................9-1

How the Alarm Log Display is Used.................................................................9-99
Alarm Log Display Configuration Procedure ................................................... 9-100
Properties of Alarm Log Display Dialog Box ................................................... 9-101

Numerical Display .............................................................................................. 9-114
8.1
8.2

Preface -13

How the Alarm List Display is Used .................................................................9-83
Alarm List Display Configuration Procedure......................................................9-84
Properties of Alarm List Display Dialog Box......................................................9-85

Alarm Log Display................................................................................................9-99
7.1
7.2
7.3

8

How the Message Switching Display is Used ....................................................9-70
Message Switching Display Configuration Procedure.........................................9-71
Properties of Message Switching Display Dialog Box.........................................9-72

Alarm List Display ................................................................................................9-83
6.1
6.2
6.3

7

How the Message Display is Used ...................................................................9-53
Message Display Configuration Procedure .......................................................9-55
Properties of Message Display Dialog Box........................................................9-56
String Data Storage Method ...........................................................................9-69

Message Switching Display ...................................................................................9-70
5.1
5.2
5.3

6

How the Picture Display is Used .....................................................................9-40
Picture Display Configuration Procedure ..........................................................9-42
Properties of Picture Display Dialog Box ..........................................................9-43

Message Display ..................................................................................................9-53
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4

5

How the Character Input is Used ....................................................................9-23
Character Input Configuration Procedure.........................................................9-24
Properties of Character Input Dialog Box.........................................................9-25
How to Enter Text .........................................................................................9-37
String Data Storage Method ...........................................................................9-38
Advanced Usage............................................................................................9-39

Picture Display ....................................................................................................9-40
3.1
3.2
3.3

4

How the Numerical Input is Used .................................................................... 9-1
Numerical Input Configuration Procedure ......................................................... 9-2
Properties of Numerical Input Dialog Box ......................................................... 9-3
How to Enter Values ......................................................................................9-21
Advanced Usage............................................................................................9-22

Character Input ...................................................................................................9-23
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6

3

How the Multi-State Lamp is Used ..................................................................8-14
Multi-State Lamp Configuration Procedure.......................................................8-15
Properties of Multi-State Lamp Dialog Box.......................................................8-16

Data Displays
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5

2

How the Pilot Lamp is Used............................................................................. 8-1
Pilot Lamp Configuration Procedure ................................................................. 8-2
Properties of Pilot Lamp Dialog Box ................................................................. 8-3

Multi-State Lamps................................................................................................8-14
2.1
2.2
2.3

Chapter 9

Potentiometer Configuration Procedure ......................................................... 7-110
Properties of Potentiometer Dialog Box ......................................................... 7-111

How the Numerical Display is Used ............................................................... 9-114
Numerical Display Configuration Procedure ................................................... 9-115

SmartAXIS Touch User's ManualContents

8.3

9

Calendar ...........................................................................................................9-129
9.1
9.2
9.3

Chapter 10
1

Bar Chart ........................................................................................................... 10-1

1

Bit Write Command............................................................................................. 11-1

How the Script Command is Used................................................................. 11-25
Script Command Configuration Procedure ..................................................... 11-26
Properties of Script Command Dialog Box ..................................................... 11-27

Multi-Command .................................................................................................11-31
5.1
5.2
5.3

6

How the Goto Screen Command is Used ....................................................... 11-18
Goto Screen Command Configuration Procedure............................................ 11-19
Properties of Goto Screen Command Dialog Box............................................ 11-20

Script Command ................................................................................................11-25
4.1
4.2
4.3

5

How the Word Write Command is Used........................................................... 11-9
Word Write Command Configuration Procedure ............................................. 11-11
Properties of Word Write Command Dialog Box ............................................. 11-12

Goto Screen Command.......................................................................................11-18
3.1
3.2
3.3

4

How the Bit Write Command is Used ..............................................................11-1
Bit Write Command Configuration Procedure ................................................... 11-3
Properties of Bit Write Command Dialog Box ................................................... 11-4

Word Write Command ......................................................................................... 11-9
2.1
2.2
2.3

3

How the Meter is Used ................................................................................ 10-48
Meter Configuration Procedure ..................................................................... 10-49
Properties of Meter Dialog Box ..................................................................... 10-50

Commands
1.1
1.2
1.3

2

How the Pie Chart is Used ........................................................................... 10-39
Pie Chart Configuration Procedure ................................................................ 10-40
Properties of Pie Chart Dialog Box ................................................................ 10-41

Meter................................................................................................................10-48
4.1
4.2
4.3

Chapter 11

How the Line Chart is Used.......................................................................... 10-19
Line Chart Configuration Procedure .............................................................. 10-20
Properties of Line Chart Dialog Box............................................................... 10-21

Pie Chart ...........................................................................................................10-39
3.1
3.2
3.3

4

How the Bar Chart is Used ............................................................................. 10-1
Bar Chart Configuration Procedure.................................................................. 10-2
Properties of Bar Chart Dialog Box.................................................................. 10-3

Line Chart .........................................................................................................10-19
2.1
2.2
2.3

3

How the Calendar is Used ............................................................................ 9-129
Calendar Configuration Procedure ................................................................ 9-130
Properties of Calendar Dialog Box................................................................. 9-131

Charts
1.1
1.2
1.3

2

Properties of Numerical Display Dialog Box ................................................... 9-116

How the Multi-Command is Used.................................................................. 11-31
Multi-Command Configuration Procedure ...................................................... 11-32
Properties of Multi-Command Dialog Box ...................................................... 11-33

Timer................................................................................................................11-46
6.1
6.2
6.3

How the Timer is Used ................................................................................ 11-46
Timer Configuration Procedure ..................................................................... 11-47
Properties of Timer Dialog Box ..................................................................... 11-48

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

Preface -14

Contents

Chapter 12

Control Function

1

Control Function Actions ......................................................................................12-1

2

Ladder Program...................................................................................................12-4

1.1
2.1
2.2

3

1

Overview ............................................................................................................13-1

4.3
4.4

1

Overview ............................................................................................................14-1

Data Log Settings Dialog Box ....................................................................... 14-12
Individual Settings Dialog Box ...................................................................... 14-14

Using the Data .................................................................................................. 14-25
4.1
4.2
4.3

Preface -15

Configuring the Sampling Condition and Devices for Sampling Data ..................14-8

Data Log Settings Dialog Box.............................................................................. 14-12
3.1
3.2

4

How the Data Log Function is Used ................................................................14-1
Sampling Values of Devices............................................................................14-3
Data Configuration ........................................................................................14-5
Saving and Deleting Data...............................................................................14-6
Using the Data ..............................................................................................14-7

Data Log Function Configuration Procedure ...........................................................14-8
2.1

3

Displaying Saved Data with the Alarm Log Display ......................................... 13-25
Displaying Registered Messages with the Alarm List Display According to theActive Alarm ............................................................................................... 13-27
Make a Sound of the Buzzer and Flash the Screen when an Alarm has
Occurred .................................................................................................... 13-30
Saving Data as a CSV File ............................................................................ 13-32

Data Log Function
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5

2

Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box...................................................................... 13-13

Using Data and Detected Alarms......................................................................... 13-25
4.1
4.2

Chapter 14

Configuring the Devices to Monitor and the Alarm Detection Condition............ 13-10

Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box ............................................................................ 13-13
3.1

4

How the Alarm Log Function is Used...............................................................13-1
Alarm States .................................................................................................13-3
Sampling Data ..............................................................................................13-4
Data Configuration ........................................................................................13-5
Saving and Deleting Data...............................................................................13-7
Using Data and Detected Alarms ....................................................................13-9

Alarm Log Function Configuration Procedure........................................................ 13-10
2.1

3Overview .................................................................................................... 12-46
Remote I/O Master...................................................................................... 12-47

Alarm Log Function
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6

2

Basic Operation for WindLDR ....................................................................... 12-32
FB Reference .............................................................................................. 12-40

Remote I/O ....................................................................................................... 12-46
4.1
4.2

Chapter 13

Basic Operation for WindLDR .........................................................................12-4
Instructions Reference ................................................................................. 12-14

FBD Program..................................................................................................... 12-32
3.1
3.2

4

Actions and Operations of Ladder Program and FBD Program ...........................12-1

Display the Data in the Line Chart ................................................................ 14-25
Displaying Data as Numerical Values............................................................. 14-27
Saving Data as a CSV File ............................................................................ 14-37

SmartAXIS Touch User's ManualContents

Chapter 15
1

Operation Log Function
Overview............................................................................................................ 15-1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5

2

Operation Log Function Configuration Procedure ................................................... 15-8
2.1

3

1

Overview............................................................................................................ 16-1

1

Overview............................................................................................................ 17-1

1

Overview............................................................................................................ 18-1

Configuring Recipe Function Operations and Devices .......................................18-4

Recipe Settings Dialog Box .................................................................................. 18-8
3.1
3.2

4

How the Recipe Function is Used.................................................................... 18-1
Data for Recipes ...........................................................................................18-2
Data Configuration ........................................................................................18-3

Recipe Function Configuration Procedure .............................................................. 18-4
2.1

3

Displaying the Counted Operation Count on a Numerical Display .................... 17-11
Notifying with a Beep when the Counted Operation Time Reaches theThreshold ................................................................................................... 17-14

Recipe Function
1.1
1.2
1.3

2

Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box....................................................17-6
Individual Settings Dialog Box ........................................................................ 17-8

Using the Data ..................................................................................................17-11
4.1
4.2

Chapter 18

Counting Operation Time and Operation Count................................................ 17-4

Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box ......................................................... 17-6
3.1
3.2

4

How the Preventive Maintenance Function is Used........................................... 17-1
Counting the Operation Time and Operation Count ..........................................17-2
Thresholds.................................................................................................... 17-3

Preventive Maintenance Function Configuration Procedure ..................................... 17-4
2.1

3

Data Storage Area Management Dialog Box ....................................................16-4

Preventive Maintenance Function
1.1
1.2
1.3

2

What is the Data Storage Area?......................................................................16-1
Data Storage Area......................................................................................... 16-2

Data Storage Area Configuration Procedure .......................................................... 16-3
Data Storage Area Management Dialog Box .......................................................... 16-4
3.1

Chapter 17

Saving the Data as a CSV File ...................................................................... 15-17

Data Storage Area
1.1
1.2

2
3

Operation Log Settings Dialog Box................................................................ 15-10

Using the Data ..................................................................................................15-17
4.1

Chapter 16

Configuring the Events and the Condition for Recording ................................... 15-8

Operation Log Settings Dialog Box ......................................................................15-10
3.1

4

How the Operation Log Function is Used.........................................................15-1
Recorded Events ...........................................................................................15-3
Data Configuration ........................................................................................15-4
Saving and Deleting Data ..............................................................................15-6
Using the Data.............................................................................................. 15-7

Recipe Settings Dialog Box............................................................................. 18-8
Individual Settings Dialog Box ...................................................................... 18-10

Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes................................................................18-14

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

Preface -16

Contents

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4

Chapter 19
1

Text Group
Overview ............................................................................................................19-1
1.1
1.2

2

1

About the Script Function .....................................................................................20-1

Control Statements...................................................................................... 20-22
Relational Operators .................................................................................... 20-28
Logical Operators ........................................................................................ 20-30
Arithmetic Operators ................................................................................... 20-31
Bitwise Operators ........................................................................................ 20-32
Bit Functions............................................................................................... 20-34
Word Functions ........................................................................................... 20-35

Important Notes ................................................................................................ 20-51
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4

Preface -17

Format List ................................................................................................. 20-14

Script Coding Examples...................................................................................... 20-22
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7

6

Setting procedures for Global Script.............................................................. 20-12

Script Definition Method..................................................................................... 20-14
4.1

5

Script Registration Procedure .........................................................................20-5
Script Manager..............................................................................................20-7
Script Editor..................................................................................................20-8

Global Script ..................................................................................................... 20-12
3.1

4

Overview of the Script Function......................................................................20-1
Types and Trigger Conditions of the Script for HMI Function .............................20-2
Data Type of the Script ..................................................................................20-3
Script Error of HMI Function...........................................................................20-4

Editing and Management of the Script...................................................................20-5
2.1
2.2
2.3

3

Text Manager.............................................................................................. 19-12
Text Group Settings Dialog Box .................................................................... 19-15

Script
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4

2

Creating Text Groups .....................................................................................19-3
Registering Text ............................................................................................19-5
Switching the Displayed Language by Value of Device.................................... 19-10

Text Manager .................................................................................................... 19-12
3.1
3.2

Chapter 20

How the Text Group Function is Used .............................................................19-1
Functions that Support Text Groups ................................................................19-2

Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure.......................................................19-3
2.1
2.2
2.3

3

Editing Recipe Data ..................................................................................... 18-14
Creating Recipe Files ................................................................................... 18-17
Editing Recipe Files...................................................................................... 18-21
Deleting Recipe Files ................................................................................... 18-22

Important Notes Regarding the While Definition ............................................ 20-51
Number of Devices That Can Be Used........................................................... 20-51
Write Delay................................................................................................. 20-52
About the Priority of the Operator................................................................. 20-53

SmartAXIS Touch User's ManualContents

Chapter 21
1

User Accounts and the Security Function
Overview............................................................................................................ 21-1
1.1
1.2
1.3

2

Security Function Configuration Procedure ............................................................ 21-8
2.1
2.2
2.3

3

1

PLC Link Communication ..................................................................................... 22-1

1Communicating with the Touch ............................................................................ 23-1

Downloading Project Data to the Touch ........................................................ 23-11
Download Dialog Box .................................................................................. 23-13
Downloading Files to an External Memory Inserted in the Touch..................... 23-16

Uploading..........................................................................................................23-18
3.1
3.2

4

How the Online Function is Used .................................................................... 23-1
Connect Touch to a Computer ........................................................................ 23-4
Change Communication Settings .................................................................... 23-5

Downloading .....................................................................................................23-11
2.1
2.2
2.3

3

Overview ...................................................................................................... 22-7
User Communication Settings Procedure .........................................................22-8
Protocol Manager ........................................................................................ 22-21
Example of User Communication Settings ..................................................... 22-68
Compatible USB Bar Code Readers ............................................................... 22-73
Connection Diagram for User Communication................................................ 22-73

Online Function
1.1
1.2
1.3

2

Overview ...................................................................................................... 22-6
No External devices Settings .......................................................................... 22-6

User Communication ........................................................................................... 22-7
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6

Chapter 23

Overview ...................................................................................................... 22-4
DM Link Communication Settings ...................................................................22-5

No External Devices ............................................................................................ 22-6
4.1
4.2

5

Overview ...................................................................................................... 22-3
O/I Link Communication Settings ...................................................................22-3

DM Link Communication ...................................................................................... 22-4
3.1
3.2

4

Overview ...................................................................................................... 22-1
PLC Link Communication Settings...................................................................22-2

O/I Link Communication...................................................................................... 22-3
2.1
2.2

3

Entering the Password on the Touch............................................................. 21-36
Entering the Password in WindO/I-NV3......................................................... 21-38

Communication
1.1
1.2

2

User Accounts Dialog Box ............................................................................ 21-30

Password Input..................................................................................................21-36
4.1
4.2

Chapter 22

Creating and Editing User Accounts ................................................................ 21-8
Adding and Editing Security Groups .............................................................. 21-15
Protecting the Display and Operation of Screens and Parts ............................. 21-18

User Accounts Dialog Box ...................................................................................21-30
3.1

4

User Accounts............................................................................................... 21-1
Protecting Data .............................................................................................21-2
Protecting Displays and Operations.................................................................21-5

Upload Project Data from the Touch ............................................................. 23-18
Upload Dialog Box....................................................................................... 23-21

Clear.................................................................................................................23-22
4.1

Clear Data from the Touch ........................................................................... 23-22
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

Preface -18

Contents

4.2

5Formatting ........................................................................................................ 23-26
5.1

6

1

Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3...............................................................................24-1

1

1

Project Transfer Function......................................................................................25-1

USB Flash Drives .................................................................................................26-1
How the USB Flash Drive Function is Used ......................................................26-1
Specifications ................................................................................................26-1
File Structure ................................................................................................26-2
Reading/Writing Data ....................................................................................26-3
Setting the External Memory Folder .............................................................. 26-12
Deleting Files on the USB Flash Drive............................................................ 26-13
Formatting the USB Flash Drive .................................................................... 26-14
USB Popup Screen Function ......................................................................... 26-15
Precautions................................................................................................. 26-17

USB Autorun Function ........................................................................................ 26-18
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4

Preface -19

How the Project Transfer Function is Used.......................................................25-1
Project Data Transfer Procedures....................................................................25-1
Converting Project Data for Transfer ...............................................................25-2
Using Key Buttons, Multi-Buttons, or Multi-Commands to Transfer Project Data..25-5
Precautions...................................................................................................25-6

External Memory Devices
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9

2

How the Monitoring Function is Used ............................................................ 24-18
Device Monitor ............................................................................................ 24-19
Ladder Monitor............................................................................................ 24-23

Data Transfer Function
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5

Chapter 26

How the Monitor Function in WindO/I-NV3 is Used ..........................................24-1
Debugging in WindO/I-NV3............................................................................24-4
Display the Value of Device in Popup ............................................................ 24-16
Highlighting Objects While Satisfying Conditions ............................................ 24-16
Switching the Screen of the Touch ................................................................ 24-17
Open Current Screens.................................................................................. 24-17

Monitoring on the Touch .................................................................................... 24-18
2.1
2.2
2.3

Chapter 25

Displaying System Information ..................................................................... 23-27
Target Information Dialog Box...................................................................... 23-29

Monitor Function
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6

2

Formatting an External Memory Inserted in the Touch.................................... 23-26

System Information ........................................................................................... 23-27
6.1
6.2

Chapter 24

Deleting Data from an External Memory Inserted in the Touch........................ 23-24

Overview of the USB Autorun Function ......................................................... 26-18
USB Autorun Function Configuration Procedure ............................................. 26-19
Creating a USB Autorun Definition File .......................................................... 26-22
USB Autorun Function Security ..................................................................... 26-26

SmartAXIS Touch User's ManualContents

Chapter 27
1

Internal Devices
Bit Devices ......................................................................................................... 27-1
1.1
1.2

2

Word Devices ..................................................................................................... 27-9
2.1
2.2

Chapter 28
1

Maintenance Screen............................................................................................ 28-1

1

Initial Setting ................................................................................................28-5
Clock Setting ................................................................................................28-9
Run.............................................................................................................. 28-9
System Info. (System Information) .................................................................28-9
Top Page .................................................................................................... 28-10
Self Diag. (Self Diagnosis)............................................................................ 28-10

SmartAXIS Specifications
Touch ................................................................................................................ 29-1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11

2

System Mode Screens.................................................................................... 28-3
Names and Layout of Setup Menus.................................................................28-4

Settings ............................................................................................................. 28-5
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6

Chapter 29

Maintenance Screen Overview........................................................................ 28-1
Displaying the Maintenance Screen.................................................................28-2
Adjusting Screen Brightness...........................................................................28-2

System Mode Overview ....................................................................................... 28-3
2.1
2.2

3

HMI Device Addresses ...................................................................................27-9
Control Device Addresses............................................................................. 27-12

Touch Setup
1.1
1.2
1.3

2

HMI Device Addresses ...................................................................................27-1
Control Device Addresses............................................................................... 27-4

Packing Contents .......................................................................................... 29-1
Type Number ................................................................................................29-2
Part Names................................................................................................... 29-3
External Interfaces ........................................................................................29-5
Specifications.............................................................................................. 29-14
Dimensions................................................................................................. 29-16
Installation ................................................................................................. 29-18
Attaching Cartridges (FT1A-*14KA/SA only) .................................................. 29-22
Wiring ........................................................................................................ 29-23
USB Cable Lock Pin Attachment.................................................................... 29-24
Maintenance and Inspection ........................................................................ 29-26

Analog Cartridge................................................................................................29-29
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7

Packing Contents ........................................................................................ 29-29
Type Number .............................................................................................. 29-29
Part Names................................................................................................. 29-29
Specifications.............................................................................................. 29-30
Dimensions................................................................................................. 29-32
Installation ................................................................................................. 29-32
Wiring ........................................................................................................ 29-33

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

Preface -20

Contents

Chapter 30
1Troubleshooting
Error Messages....................................................................................................30-1
1.1
1.2

2

Error Information.................................................................................................30-3
2.1
2.2

3

Errors Displayed on the Screen.......................................................................30-1
Low Battery Voltage ......................................................................................30-2
General Error Codes ......................................................................................30-3
Program Execution Error ................................................................................30-5

Handling Problems...............................................................................................30-6
3.1
3.2
3.3

When You Cannot Download Project Data .......................................................30-6
When the Backlight is OFF and the Buzzer Sounds...........................................30-6
When a Problem Occurs with a Control Function..............................................30-7

Appendix
1
2
3
4
5
6

Color Number Correspondence Table...................................................................... A-1
View Browser ....................................................................................................... A-2
Color Palette ........................................................................................................ A-3
Pattern Palette ..................................................................................................... A-4
Text Alignment ..................................................................................................... A-5
Ladder Program.................................................................................................... A-8
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5

7

Processing in One Scan................................................................................... A-8
Executing Program Instructions ....................................................................... A-8
Breakdown of END Processing Time................................................................. A-8
Execution Times for Instructions...................................................................... A-9
Instruction Bytes ...........................................................................................A-11

FBD Program.......................................................................................................A-13
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5

Processing in One Scan..................................................................................A-13
FBD Program Processing ................................................................................A-13
Breakdown of Scan End Processing Time ........................................................A-13
FB Execution Time.........................................................................................A-14
FBD Program Limitation .................................................................................A-15

Index

Preface -21

SmartAXIS Touch User's ManualGeneral Information for SmartAXIS

Chapter 1

1

About the SmartAXISThe SmartAXIS is available in three types: the SmartAXIS Touch, the SmartAXIS Pro, and the SmartAXIS Lite. The
SmartAXIS Touch is equipped with the HMI functions of an operator interface and PLC control functions. In addition
to the functions of control and communication as a PLC, the SmartAXIS Pro is equipped with an LCD and operation
buttons on the front of the module. The SmartAXIS Lite is equipped with the various control and communication
functions as a PLC. This document describes the SmartAXIS Touch. Unless otherwise specified, SmartAXIS refers to
FT1A Series SmartAXIS Touch. For the SmartAXIS Pro and Lite, refer to the "SmartAXIS Pro/Lite User's Manual".
The Touch is a small-size programmable controller that is fully equipped with powerful basic functions, various
communication functions and HMI functions of an operator interface. Use WindO/I-NV3 for creating and managing
screens and data to used with the Touch.

1.1 Type Numbers
The notation for SmartAXIS Touch type numbers is as follows.

FT1A - M 12 R A - W
Body color

W: Light gray
B: Dark gray
S: Silver

Power supply type A: DC power type (24V DC)
Output type

R: Relay output
K: Transistor output (sink output)
S: Transistor output (source output)

Inputs/outputs

12: 12 I/O points
14: 14 I/O points

LCD

M: Monochrome LCD models
C: Color LCD models

FT1A: Type number

For a list of models, refer to Chapter 29 “SmartAXIS Specifications”.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1-1

General Information for SmartAXISThis chapter describes SmartAXIS functions and system configuration examples.

11 About the SmartAXIS

1.2 Features for the Touch
This section describes the features of the Touch.
The Touch is high-performance programmable controller in a compact package and is equipped with high speed
counters. The Touch enables you to build optimum systems to automate factories or control production lines.
■ Powerful display functions
The Touch is equipped with an LCD and the same display functions as the MICRO/I. You can monitor and modify
values of devices and monitor basic instructions.
Also, by creating screens and programming control functions, you can display the current time, bar charts, scrolling
messages, or simple text on the LCD screen.
■ 32-bit and Floating Point Data Types
For arithmetic commands, it is possible to unsigned 32-bit (D: double word) and signed 32-bit (L: long) arithmetic
processes, and floating point (F: float) arithmetic processes.
■ Supports Various Languages
Japanese, Roman, Chinese, Taiwanese, Central European, Baltic, and Cyrillic, languages are all supported. In addition
to the included fonts you can also use any of the Windows fonts on your computer.

1-2

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 About the SmartAXIS

1

1.3 Special Functions for the Touch● I/O Related Functions■ Catch Input
The catch input allows it to receive short input pulses from sensors without regard to the scan time. A maximum offour catch inputs can be used.
■ Input Filter
The input filter can be adjusted according to the width of input signals to reject input noises. Selectable input filter
values to pass input signals are 0 millisecond, and 3 through 15 milliseconds in 1 millisecond increments.
■ Interrupt Input
The interrupt input can be used to call an interrupt program to respond to an external input that requires a response
faster than the scan time. A maximum of four interrupt inputs can be used. This can only be used when ladderprogram is selected as the programming language for control function.
■ Stop and Reset Inputs
Stop input is a function to stop the ladder program or FBD program operation for the Touch. Reset input is a function
to stop the ladder program or FBD program operation for the Touch and clear the value of control devices. Any input
terminal on the Touch can be designated as a stop or reset input to control the Touch operation.
■ Analog Input
Analog input of 0 to 10V DC or 4 to 20 mA can be converted to a digital value of 0 to 1000. A maximum of two inputs
can be used as analog inputs.
■ Analog Output
Analog output converts a digital value between 0 and 1000 to analog value of 0 to 10V DC or 4 to 20 mA and outputs
it. A maximum of two outputs can be used as analog outputs.
■ Remote I/O
When the number of Touch inputs and outputs is insufficient, the number of inputs and outputs can be expanded toa maximum of 156 points by connecting the SmartAXIS Pro/Lite as remote I/O slaves. With the remote I/O function,
the analog inputs on the SmartAXIS that are connected as remote I/O slaves can also be used.
■ Expanded Analog I/O
Expanded analog I/O allows the Touch to handle analog inputs for voltage, current, thermocouples, and Resistancethermometer outputs for voltage and current by using analog cartridges. The Touch can be expanded to a maximumof four analog inputs and outputs.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1-3

General Information for SmartAXISThis section describes the functions of the Touch.

1 About the SmartAXIS● Pulse I/O Functions■ High-speed Counter
This function counts high-speed pulse inputs that cannot be measured in normal ladder program or FBD program
processing.
Use this function for applications such as positioning control with a rotary encoder or motor control. The Touch canuse singlephase high-speed counters and two-phase high-speed counters. A maximum of four single-phase highspeed counters and a maximum of one two-phase high-speed counters can be used simultaneously.
Example: Controlling a motor by counting two-phase pulse input with a high-speed counter

Pulse motor
Rotaryencoder

High-speed pulse input

Two-phase pulses

Touch■ Frequency Measurement
This function measures the frequency of pulses input to an input terminal. The frequencies of a maximum of one
input can be measured.
● Convenient Functions■ Calendar/Clock
The Touch features a real-time clock on-board. Using the calendar and clock function, the Touch can operateaccording to the current date and time. These functions can be used to control time schedule for lighting or air
conditioning equipments.
■ Security function
The project in the Touch can be protected against reading and/or writing by including a password in the project. Thisfunction is effective for security of projects.
■ “Keep” or “Clear” Designation of Touch Data
Internal relays, shift register bits, counter current values, and data register values of the control devices can be
designated to be kept or cleared when the Touch is powered down. All or a specified range of these devices can be
designated as keep or clear types.
■ RUN/STOP Selection at Startup when “Keep” Data is Broken
When data to be kept such as “keep” designated counter values are broken while the Touch is powered down, theuser can select whether the ladder program starts to run or not to prevent undesirable operation at the next startup.
■ Log Data
The function allows values of devices to be logged under specified sampling conditions. The sampled values ofdevices are saved in internal memory along with the time of sampling.
■ Timer Interrupt
The timer interrupt can be used to call an interrupt program at a predetermined interval of time without being
affected by the scan time. This can only be used when ladder program is selected as the programming language forcontrol function.
■ PID control
PID control performs temperature control and other types of control using a PID (proportional, integral, derivative)arithmetic algorithm. PID control can be performed by automatically calculating the optimal PID value using the auto
tuning function.
This can only be used when ladder program is selected as the programming language for control function.

1-4

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 About the WindO/I-NV3

2

1

About the WindO/I-NV3

Using WindO/I-NV3, you create a project and then download it to the Touch, to build the interface necessary for
operation.

Download
Computer

Touch
UploadUSB flash drive

Download
UploadSmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1-5

General Information for SmartAXIS

WindO/I-NV3 is software that is exclusively designed for operation with the Touch, for specifying settings andcreating screens and the ladder program or FBD program. The set of data made up of settings, created screens, andladder program or FBD program is called a project.

3 Operating Modes

3

Operating Modes
The Touch includes multiple modes, so you switch between modes as and when necessary. These modes are called
operating modes. The functions and the operations and conditions for switching are as follows.
Functions

Conditions required forswitching to the modeThis is the mode at the time of executing project
data. The created screen is displayed and the ladderprogram or FBD program is executed.

• Turn ON the power to the Touch.
• Press Run on the Top Page in the System
Mode.
• The download of the project data iscompleted.

System Mode

Perform initial settings, clock settings, self-diagnosis,
etc. for the Touch.

• Press down for 3 seconds or more at the top
left corner of the screen to display the
Maintenance screen, and then press
System Mode.
• Using the screen switching button, multibuttons, screen switch or multi commands,
switch to the System Mode.
• All data is cleared using WindO/I-NV3.
• Write the System Area 1 Display screen
number (address+0) to FFFFh.

Monitor Mode

Monitor Mode is used for monitoring values ofdevices using WindO/I-NV3.
While in Monitor mode, the words "Monitor mode"
flash at the bottom left of the screen of the Touch.

On the WindO/I-NV3 Online tab, in the
Monitor group, click Start Monitor.

Data Transfer

Transferring data between a computer and the
Touch.

• Download project data.

Mode

Run Mode• When switched to System Mode, operation of the Touch stops.
• To display the Maintenance Screen by pressing down for 3 seconds or more at the top left of the screen,
the Enable Maintenance check box from the System Settings tab of the Project Settings dialog box
must be checked.
For details about Maintenance Mode, refer to Chapter 28 “1 Maintenance Screen” on page 28-1.

1-6

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Flow from Screen and Ladder Program or FBD Program Creation to Run Operation

4

Flow from Screen and Ladder Program or FBD Program Creation to Run Operation

General Information for SmartAXIS

The following flowchart describes the sequence of step from the screen and the ladder program or FBD program
creation for the Touch to the Run operation.

1

Launch the WindO/I-NV3( refer to Chapter 2 “2.1 Starting WindO/I-NV3” on page 2-33)

2Creating a Project, Screen and Ladder Program or FBD Program
Creating a new project ( refer to Chapter 3 “1.1 Creating New Project Data” on page 3-1)↓
• Creating new screens ( refer to Chapter 4 “2.1 Creating Screens” on page 4-2)
• Selecting the programming language and creating the program- Creating new ladder program ( refer to Chapter 12 “Creating Ladder Program” on page 12-5)- Creating new FBD program ( refer to Chapter 12 “Creating FBD Program” on page 12-33)

Modifying the project5

Troubleshooting( refer to Chapter 30 “Troubleshooting” on page 30-1)

3

Downloading the project( refer to Chapter 23 “2 Downloading” on page 23-11)

4

Debug
(refer to Chapter 24 “Monitor Function” on page 24-1)

6RUN

1 Launch WindO/I-NV3
Launch WindO/I-NV3.

2 Creating a Project, Screen and ladder program or FBD program
Create a project and performing various settings.
Create display screens and ladder program or FBD program.

3 Downloading the project
Connect the computer to the Touch using a USB cable or Ethernet cable, and download the created project data to
the internal memory of the Touch.

4 Debug
Using the monitor function, you can correct created project data while confirming actual actions.

5 Troubleshooting
If there is a module or communication-related problem with the Touch, or a problem with the screen settings, theladder program or the FBD program, an appropriate message is displayed at the top of the screen.
In addition, error information is saved to a special data register. By referring to this information and repeatedly
correcting the project, downloading, and debugging, the project can be completed.

6 RUN
Starting communication with the external device and execute various functions according to the project settings.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1

1-7

4 Flow from Screen and Ladder Program or FBD Program Creation to Run Operation

1-8

SmartAXIS Touch User's ManualWindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

Chapter 2

This chapter describes the minimum system requirements for WindO/I-NV3, how to start and exit it, and theconfiguration of its screens and menus.

WindO/I-NV3 Specifications

1.1 Available Data
● Data types
Data type is the format of the data related to the minimum and maximum values of data that can be processed by apart and handling of negative and real numbers.
Data types and data ranges that can be used on the Touch and WindO/I-NV3 are listed below.
Required word
count

Data type

Processable data range

BIN16 (+)

1

0 to 65535

BIN16 (+/-)

1-32768 to 32767

BIN32 (+)

2

0 to 4294967295

BIN32 (+/-)

2-2147483648 to 2147483647

BCD4

1

-999 to 9999

BCD8

2

-9999999 to 99999999

float322-3.4x1038 to -1.18x10-38,

0, 1.18x10-38 to 3.4x1038

WindLDR data types are displayed as follows: BIN16(+) as W (word), BIN16(+/-) as I (integer), BIN32(+)
as D (double word), BIN32(+/-) as L (long), and float32 as F (float).
● Numeric value handling by data type
Data stored in devices is handled as described below.
Data type

Data handlingbit
15

1 wordbit
0

BIN16 (+)

Data is handled as an unsigned 16-bit integer.

bit
15

1 wordbit
0

BIN16 (+/-)

Data is handled as an signed 16-bit integer.
If the sign bit (bit 15) is 1, the value is two’s complement.

Sign bitbit
31

Upper word

Lower word

bit
0

bit
31

Upper word

Lower wordbit0

BIN32 (+)

BIN32 (+/-)
Sign bit

Handled as a signed 32-bit integer with the starting address as
the lower word.
If the sign bit (bit 31) is 1, the value is two’s complement.

Data is handled as a four digit (16-bit) binary-coded decimalvalue.
3rd
2nd
1st
Each four bits from bit 0 to bit 11 is handled as the absolute
Sign Absolute value value for the 1st to 3rd digit.
Bit 12 to bit 15 is handled as the minus sign (-) when its value isF (hex) and it is handled as the absolute value for the 4th digit
when 0 to 9 (hex).

bit
15

BCD4

Handled as an unsigned 32-bit integer with the starting address
as the lower word.

1 wordbit
0

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-1

WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

12

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications

Data type

Data handling
bit
31

7th

BCD8

Lower word

Upper word
6th

Sign

5th

4th

3rd

2nd

bit
0
1st

Absolute value

Data is handled as an eight digit (32-bit) binary-coded decimalvalue.
Each four bits from bit 0 to bit 27 is handled as the absolutevalue for the 1st to 7th digit.
Bit 28 to bit 31 is handled as the minus sign (-) when its value isF (hex) and it is handled as the absolute value for the 8th digit
when 0 to 9 (hex).

Data is handled as a 32-bit floating-point real number. The number of significant digits is 6 digits. The
floating-point type data format conforms to the IEEE (The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers)
standard for the single precision storage format as explained next.

Single precision floating-point values in IEEE 754 (32 bits)
Single precision floating-point values in IEEE 754 are expressed with a total of 32 bits (2 words) using 1 bit
for the sign s, 8 bits for the exponent e, and 23 bits for the significand f. The sign bit indicates the sign ofthe expressed value (positive or negative). The exponent is an 8 bit signed integer with a value from -128
to 127.

float32

bit
31

bit
30

bit
23

s

e (exponent) [bit 30 to 23]

bit
22

bit
0

f (significand) [bit 22 to 0]+127

Represents after the decimal of 1.xxx

Sign bit (0: positive, 1: negative)

Example:se
0 01111101

f
10000000000000000000000

1.1×2

-2

If all bits are 0, the value is “0”.

The internal representation of float32 is described here, but the data for float32 (floating-point real
numbers) is handled with a special bit configuration, so do not directly access the bits.
Example: Data handling
Data type

Storing 0FFF (hex) in LDR10
bit
15

Storing FFFF (hex) in LDR10
bit
15

bit
0

LDR10

0000111111111111

BIN16 (+)

1111 111111111111

0FFF (Hex)

FFFF (Hex)

0FFF (hex) is handled as 4095 (dec).

FFFF (hex) is handled as 65535 (dec).

bit
15

bit
15

bit
0

LDR10

0000 1111 1111 1111

BIN16 (+/-)

Data type

+

2-2

bit
0

LDR10

1111 1111 1111 1111−

0FFF (Hex)

FFFF (Hex)

0FFF (hex) is handled as 4095 (dec).

Sign bit is 1, so FFFF (hex) is two’s complement,
handled as -1 (dec).

Storing 0FFF (hex) in LDR10, FFFF (hex) in
LDR11

Storing FFFF (hex) in LDR10, FFFF (hex) in
LDR11

bit
31

BIN32 (+)

bit
0

LDR10

LDR11

LDR10

bit
31

bit
0

LDR11

LDR10

bit
0

1111 1111111111111111111111111111

00001111111111111111111111111111
0FFFFFFF (Hex)FFFFFFFF (Hex)0FFFFFFF (hex) is handled as 268435455 (dec).

FFFFFFFF (hex) is handled as 4294967295 (dec).

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications

Data type

Storing 0FFF (hex) in LDR10, FFFF (hex) in
LDR11
bit
31

LDR10

bit
31

bit
0

LDR10

2

bit
0

−

0FFFFFFF (Hex)FFFFFFFF (Hex)

The sign bit is 0, so the positive number 0FFFFFFF(hex) is handled as 268435455 (dec).

Sign bit is 1, so two’s complement of the negative
number FFFFFFFF (hex), handled as -1 (dec).

Storing 5678 (hex) in LDR10, 1234 (hex) in
LDR11

Storing F765 (hex) in LDR10, 4321 (hex) in
LDR11

bit
31

LDR10

LDR11

bit
0

bit
31

00010010001101000101011001111000

BCD8

+

Data typebit
01111 0111 0110 0101 0100 0011 0010 0001

2345678 (Hex)−

The sign is 1 (hex), so the binary-coded decimalvalue of the positive number 2345678 (hex),
handled as 12345678 (dec).

LDR10

LDR11

7654321 (Hex)

The sign is F (hex), so the binary-coded decimalvalue of the negative number 7654321 (hex),
handled as -7654321 (dec).

Storing 0000 (hex) in LDR10, BFA0 (hex) in LDR11
LDR11
BFA0 (Hex)
bit
31

LDR10
0000 (Hex)bit bit
23 22

bit
0

10111111101000000000000000000000

float32

Sign
1

Exponent
01111111

Significand
01000000000000000000000

20+21+22+23+24+25+26 = 127 2-2 = 0.25
Negative−1.25×2127-127 = −1.25
In the data types BIN32 (+), BIN32 (+/-), BCD8, and float32, two words (upper word and lower word) areused for a single value. The Touch and external device communicate data in device addresses in one word
units, so when the upper word and lower word are sent in separate packets, the value may have alreadychanged when the data for both words is received, which may cause an unexpected result.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-3

WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

+

LDR11

11111111111111111111111111111111

00001111111111111111111111111111

BIN32 (+/-)

Data type

LDR11

Storing FFFF (hex) in LDR10, FFFF (hex) in
LDR11

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications● Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings
The indirect specification of a device address means to add a value (indirect value) to the address of the configured
device and use that address as the actual read source or write destination. You can change the read source or write
destination address just by changing this indirect value.
Indirect read
Add the indirect value to the address of the configured device as the read source and read the value of device specified
indirectly.
Example: To read a value of device specified indirectly into LDR200
When the device address configured as the read source is LDR10 and the indirect value’s device address is
D21, if 4 (indirect value: 4) is set in D21, the device address of the value actually read is LDR14.
Device configured as read source
Indirect value
D21
4
4 words
Indirect value’s device
Device with actually read value

LDR10
LDR11
LDR12
LDR13
LDR14

100
200
300
400
500

Read
LDR200500

Indirect write
Add the indirect value to the address of the configured device as the write destination and write to the value of device
specified indirectly.
Example: To write the value in LDR20 to an indirectly specified device
When the device address configured as the write destination is LDR100 and the indirect value’s device address
is D20, if 3 (indirect value: 3) is set in D20, the device address of the value actually written is LDR103.
Device configured as write source
Indirect value
D20
3
Indirect value’s device

3 words

Device with actually written value

LDR100LDR101LDR102LDR103

100
200
300
1000

Write
LDR20

1000

Parts you can indirectly read and indirectly write
Indirect readIndirect write

Word Button

Part

YES

YES

Multi-Button

YES

YES

Numerical Input

YES

YES

Character Input

YES

YES

Numerical Display

YES

NO

Word Write Command

YES

YES

Script Command

YES

YES

Multi-Command

YES

YES

• Enter the value for indirect values as the data type BIN16 (+). Indirect values can be set in the range of
0 to 32767. If you enter a value for the indirect value outside this range, the value before the indirect
value changes is maintained when reading. When writing, “Device range error” is displayed.
In scripts however, enter a value for the data type set in the script.
• For indirect device reading, decide the read source address after the indirect value changes and after the screenchanges, and then read the value of device. For external device addresses, communication to read the value of
device from a external device takes time, so if data is transfered or arithmetic operations are executed before
the indirect read is finished, processing cannot be executed and the following error is displayed.

2-4Word Button, Word Write Command:

Indirect device error

Script Command:

Script error

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications

1.2 Available Text
● Font2

The Touch can display multiple fonts by installing them. In addition to the fonts installed on the Touch, all Windows
fonts displayed on your computer can be used on the display.
Font

Description

Fonts installed in the Touch

Fonts to be pre-loaded on the Touch.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Korean, Taiwanese, Central European, Baltic and Cyrillic
fonts can be installed on the Touch.
The installed fonts installed can be changed as needed using WindO/I-NV3, whichhelps save and efficiently operate the user capacity.

Windows Font

All fonts used on the computer can be displayed on the Touch.
The Windows fonts allow you to display expressive characters on the Touch screen as
needed.
Windows fonts are downloaded as part of the project data.

In addition, the Touch has a function that switches between two or more text groups dynamically. With this function,
the registration text of buttons can be switched to different languages according to the conditions.
For details, refer to Chapter 19 “Text Group” on page 19-1.

Text ID : 1

External device

Group 1: JapaneseGroup 2: English

目標達成

Goal reached 䗴ᡆⴤḽGroup 3: Chinese

Touch

D100 :

1

目標達成

D100 :

2

Goal reached

D100 :

3

䗴ᡆⴤḽ

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-5

WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

Supported Languages

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications

Installed Fonts in the Touch

Standard
Fonts

Optional
Fonts

Font Name

Code System

Japanese

JIS 8-bit code
JIS level-1 andlevel-2 kanji sets

Language
Japanese

EnglishISO 8859-1 (Latin1)

Icelandic, Irish, Italian, English, Dutch, Swedish, Spanish, Danish,
German, Norwegian, Portuguese, Finnish, Faeroese, French

Japanese large
font(first standard)

JIS level-1 kanji set* Install this font to achieve a sharper display of enlarged JIS
level-1 kanji set.
Refer to “High-quality Fonts” on page 2-9.

Japanese large
font(secondstandard)

JIS level-2 kanji set* Install this font to achieve a sharper display of enlarged JIS
level-2 kanji set.
Refer to “High-quality Fonts” on page 2-9.

Chinese

GB2312ChineseKorean

KSC5601

KoreanTaiwanese

BIG5

Taiwanese

European large
font

ISO 8859-1 (Latin1)* Install this font to achieve a sharper display of enlarged
European fonts.
Refer to “High-quality Fonts” on page 2-9.

Central European

ANSI1250

Czech, Hungarian, Polish, Slovak, Slovene

BalticANSI1257

Estonian, Latvian, Lithuanian, Greenlandic, Lappish

Cyrillic

ANSI1251

Bulgarian, Belarusian, Ukrainian, Serbian, Macedonian, Russian• Japanese, European, and European large font are factory-installed.
The standard fonts cannot be replaced; however, the optional fonts can be downloaded from the
WindO/I-NV3.
• The Touch displays the single-byte parts of Chinese, Taiwanese, and Korean with ISO 8859-1, andsupports Hangul characters only in the double-byte part of Korean.

2-6

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications

Available Fonts for Parts
Windows Font

Bit Button

YES

YES

Word Button

YES

YES

Buttons

Goto Screen Button

YES

YES

Key Button

YES

YES

KeypadYES

YES

Selector Switch

YES

YES*3

Lamps

Pilot Lamp

YES

YES

Multi-State Lamp

YES

YES

Numerical Input

YES

NO

Character Input

YES

NO

Message Display

YES

YES*2*3

Data Displays

Message Switching Display

YES

YES*3

Alarm List Display

YES

YES*3

Alarm Log Display

YES

YES*3

Numerical Display

YES

NO

Calendar

YES

NO

ChartsBar Chart

YES

YES*3

Line Chart

YES

YES*3

Description

2
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

Touch installed Font*1Parts*1 To use a Touch-installed font, the font should be downloaded from the WindO/I-NV3 in advance.
*2 Windows font can be used for fixed text only. Only the Touch-installed font can be used for the read device data code for the
Message Display.
*3 Windows font can be used only when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-7

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications

Font Size
Font Name

Optional Fonts

Code System

Size

Japanese large font (first standard)

JIS level-1 kanji set

477KB

Japanese large font (second standard)

JIS level-2 kanji set

424KB

Chinese

GB2312

238KB

Korean

KSC5601

109KB

Taiwanese

BIG5

422KB

European large font

ISO 8859-1 (Latin1)

102KB

Central European

ANSI1250

6KB

BalticANSI1257

6KB

Cyrillic

ANSI1251

6KB

The download size of font data is adjusted in multiples of 128KB.
The download size of font data is 128KB when the font size is 0KB or 128KB and smaller.
Example: When downloading Japanese large font (level-1 kanji set), Chinese, and European large fonts:
Font
Japanese large font (first standard)

Size
477KB

Chinese238KB

European large font

102KB

Total size of the font data

817KB

Download size of font data

896KB (817KB is adjusted in multiples of 128KB.)

Example: When downloading Chinese and Korean fonts:
Font

Size

Chinese

238KB

Korean109KB

Total size of the font data

347KB

Download size of font data

384KB (347KB is adjusted in multiples of 128KB.)

Example: When downloading all fonts:
Font

2-8

Size

Japanese large font (first standard)

477KB

Japanese large font (second standard)

424KB

Chinese

238KB

Korean109KB

Taiwanese

422KB

European large font

102KB

Central European

6KB

Baltic6KB

Cyrillic

6KB

Total size of the font data

1790KB

Download size of font data

1792KB (1790KB is adjusted in multiples of 128KB.)

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications● High-quality Fonts
The high-quality fonts are the Japanese large fonts (first standard/second standard), and European fonts.

Scaled text with a background color is replaced and displayed with these fonts for a more attractive look.
High-quality European Font Display (Size 8x16)
W

0.5

1

2

3

4

5

6

H
0.5
1
2
3

4

5

6

7

8

W
7

8

H
0.5
1
2
3

4

5

6

7

8

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-92
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

If you download high-quality fonts and select Use large font on the System tab in the Project Setting dialog box, theTouch can replace some of the optional fonts with the high-quality fonts.

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications

High-quality Japanese Font Display (Size 8x16)
W
0.5

1

2

3

4

5

H
0.5
1
2
3

4

5

6

7

8

W
7

8

H
0.5
1
2
3

4

5

6

7

8

2-10

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual6

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications

High-quality Japanese Font Display (Size 16x16)
W
0.5

1

2

3

4

5

2

6

H
0.5
1

WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

W
7

8

H
0.5
1
2

3

4

5

6

7

8

• When the high-quality fonts have not been downloaded into the Touch, the standard fonts are used even
if Use large font is selected.
• When the Character Input part display font size is 8x16, high-quality fonts are not displayed even if Uselarge font is selected.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-11

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications● Windows Font
Selecting Windows Font for the Font property gives you access to all of the fonts installed on your computer for use
on Drawings and Parts. This allows you to display fonts and languages that are not installed on the Touch.

Windows Font Settings
Windows Font settings are made in the Font Settings dialog box.

1 Click Change in the Windows Font group on the properties dialog box for Drawings, Parts, or on Text Manager.

2 Set each item, and then click OK.
■ FontSelect the font to use.
■ Font style
Select italic, bold, or other style.
■ SizeSelect the size of the text.
■ SampleShows a preview using the specified font.
■ Character Pitch
Specify character spacing from 0 to 100.
■ Space between lines
Specify line spacing from 0 to 100.
■ Script
Select the character set code.
• The right end of the text may have missing dots if Font style is set to Italic. You can remedy this byadding an extra space at the end of the line.
• An alternate font will be used if the Project Data uses a font that does not exist on the computer. Thismeans that text will appear differently if the Project Data is opened on another computer.
• The same font may also appear differently for different OS versions.

2-12

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications

Using Windows Fonts
This section describes how to use Windows Fonts.
Selecting Windows Font for the Font property dialog box for the Text from the Drawings and Parts disables
the following options:2• Style:The style set under Windows Font will be used.

• Magnification:

The width by height magnification will be set to 1 x 1. Note, Magnification can beselected on the Message Display, Message Switching Display, and Alarm List Display
parts, but will not be reflected on the actual text displayed. To use scrolling on theseparts, adjust the display area for text using Magnification.

WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

To register and use a Windows Font in Text Manager
Applicable
Drawings
Applicable
Parts

Text
Buttons

Bit Button, Word Button, Goto Screen Button, Key Button, Keypad, Selector Switch

Lamps

Pilot Lamp, Multi-State Lamp

Data Displays

Message Display, Message Switching Display, Alarm List Display, Alarm Log Display

ChartsBar Chart, Line Chart

1 Select the Use Text Manager check box on the Properties dialog box for the Text from the Drawings and Parts.
• The Use Text Manager check box may appear in different locations depending on the part. This table showswhere to find this property:
Part

Location

Text

Properties of Text dialog box

Bit Button, Word Button, Goto Screen Button, Key Button,
Selector Switch, Pilot Lamp, Multi-State Lamp

Registration Text tab

KeypadProperties of Keypad dialog box

Message Display

General tab

Message Switching Display

Message tab

Bar Chart, Line Chart

Scale tab

• The Alarm List Display and Alarm Log Display parts are designed to use the text registered in Text Manager so the
Use Text Manager check box is not shown.

2 Specify the Text ID for the Windows Font set in Text Manager.
• Using the Text ID for the Windows Font set in Text Manager disables these settings in the Properties
dialog box:
- Align Text:

Multiple lines of text are shown aligned center-left when Center is selected. Text isshown with right-indented left-aligned when Right is selected.
With right-indented left-aligned formatting, the line containing the most number ofcharacters is aligned on the right end while the other lines are aligned to the left
end of that line.
Aligns text to left end of line with most characters

Aligns text to right end of line with most characters- Vertical Writing:

Horizontal writing is used.

• The maximum number for the unit in the Numerical Input and Numerical Display parts is 4 characters.
The fifth character and any characters beyond that will appear outside the part.
• In the Message Display, variable text “\@” appears as is.
• With the Alarm List Display and Alarm Log Display, line spacing is not automatically adjusted based on
the size of the text. Adjust it using the Line Spacing property on the Format tab.
• If text containing a carriage return is used for a label on a Bar or Line Chart, or for an Alarm List Display
or Alarm Log Display part, it will appear truncated after the carriage return if a non-Windows Font isused. The entire text, including the carriage return, is shown when using a Windows Font.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-13

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications

To select a font in the Properties dialog box
Applicable
Drawings
Applicable
Parts

Text
Buttons

Bit Button, Word Button, Goto Screen Button, Key Button, Keypad

Lamps

Pilot Lamp, Multi-State Lamp

Select Windows for Font on the Properties dialog box for the Text from the Drawings or Parts.
The Font property may appear in different locations depending on the part. This table shows where to find thisproperty:Part

Location

Text

Properties of Text dialog box

Bit Button, Word Button, Goto Screen Button, Key Button, Pilot Lamp, MultiState Lamp

Registration Text tab

KeypadProperties of Keypad dialog box● Character Code Table
Using the Character Code Table
Example: Finding the character code for the character “a” in the table.
Upper 4 bits of the code (hexadecimal)

Lower 4 bits of the code (hexadecimal)

The upper four bits of the code are hexadecimal 6.
The lower four bits of the code are hexadecimal 1.
Therefore, the character code for "a" is as follows.

"a": 6 1
Lower 4 bits
Upper 4 bits

For other fonts and two-byte characters, refer to the table of the relevant code system.
Japanese (two-byte characters): JIS first standard/second standard, Chinese: GB2312, Taiwanese: BIG5,
Korean (Hangul character): KSC5601

2-14

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications

European Font (ISO 8859-1)

2
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

Central European Font (ANSI 1250)

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-15

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications

Baltic Font (ANSI 1257)

Cyrillic Font (ANSI 1251)

2-16

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications

Japanese Font (JIS X0201)

2
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

Control Codes
Refer to the following table when using control codes in User Communications.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-17

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications

1.3 Available Number of Colors
The available number of colors that can be used on the WindO/I-NV3 are listed below.
Model
Color LCD models
Monochrome LCD models

TargetNumber of colors

Picture Manager

65,536 colors

Properties of Drawings and Parts

256 colors

Picture Manager

8 shadesProperties of Drawings and Parts

8 shades1.4 Available Image Files• The supported formats for image files displayed on the Touch are BMP (bit map files) and NMF (NV Metafile).
• The NMF (NV Metafile) format is used for the drawing objects created on the editing screen of WindO/I-NV3.
Graphics can be created by selecting a drawing object on the editing screen and clicking Export as NV Metafile
from the popup menu.
• Picture Manager supports WME (Windows Metafile), DXF, and ICO (icon files) formats. These files are converted by
Picture Manager into bitmap files.
• The Touch cannot handle image files that are larger than the size of the screen. Images that exceed thescreen size are not displayed.
• The Numerical Input, Character Input, Message Display, Message Switching Display, Numerical Display,
Calendar, and Meter cannot correctly display pictures that use a transparent color.
● About Picture Manager
Picture Manager is an application for managing graphic elements used for part diagrams and drawings.
• When saving, deleting, or reducing graphic elements, the following operations are displayed in Picture Manager.
- On the View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Picture Manager).
- Double click Picture Manager in the Project window.
• To set up the Picture from the Drawings, click on the editing screen where the Picture is positioned to display
Picture Manager.
• If setting a graphic for a positioned object, display Picture Manager from the Properties dialog box.
If Picture Manager is displayed from the Properties dialog box of an object on the screen when setting the
Picture, Reduce, Delete, and Export are disabled.

2-18

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications● Saving graphic elements in Picture Manager
This section describes how to save drawing objects in Picture Manager. Saved graphic elements can be used for part
diagrams and drawings.
Saving image files

2
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

1 Click Import in Picture Manager.
The Open dialog box is displayed.

When managing graphic elements by category, click
the Category list, and select it.

(Create New Category) to create a new category in

2 Specify the image file, and then click Open.

Detailed settings can be made using Options from the Open dialog box. Click Options to toggle between
showing and hiding the items. For details, refer to “Open Dialog Box Options” on page 2-28.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-19

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications

The graphic element is saved in Picture Manager. The name of the image file becomes the picture name.

(Picture name)Even when the image is saved to a different category, if a graphic element of the same name is alreadysaved in that category, a confirmation message to overwrite the file is displayed.
• Click Yes to overwrite the image.
After overwriting, the image is saved in the list of the selected category, and the previous image is deleted
from the list.
Example: The graphic element "Picture00" is saved in the category "Pic_Lib."
If the graphic element "Picture00.bmp" is saved to the category "NewBook1," the new image"Picture00" is saved to "NewBook1," and the image named "Picture00" that was previously in"Pic_Lib" is deleted.
• Click No to stop saving the graphic element.

2-20

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications

Selecting graphic elements from Symbol Factory

1 Click Symbol Factory in Picture Manager.
Symbol Factory is displayed.

2
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

When managing graphic elements by category, click
the Category list, and select it.

(Create New Category) to create a new category in

2 Select a category of graphic elements from Categories.
A list showing pictures in the category selected from Symbols is displayed.

Click Options to display the Symbol Options dialog box, which can be used to modify fill color andbackground color, and to flip or rotate shapes. The settings made here are applied to all the graphic
elements in Symbol Factory.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-21

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications

3 Select a graphic element from Symbols, and then click Copy.
The Picture Name Setting dialog box is displayed.

4 Enter the name of the graphic in Picture Name.
The maximum number is 256 characters.
You cannot use the following characters in the picture name.
\/:,;*?"<>|

Detailed settings can be made using Options from the Picture Name Setting dialog box. Click Options totoggle between showing and hiding the items. For details, refer to “Picture Name Setting dialog box” onpage 2-32.

5 Click OK.

The graphic element is saved in Picture Manager.

If a picture contains transparency or a picture is imported with the option of enabling the transparency, thetransparency range is displayed in magenta (R: 255, G: 4, B: 255).

2-22

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications

Saving drawing objects drawn on the editing screen
Drawing objects drawn on the editing screen are saved as pictures, in NMF (NV Metafile) format in Picture Manager.

2

1 Select and right-click the drawing object, then click Copy to Picture Manager.

WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

The Picture Name Setting dialog box is displayed.

Grouped drawing objects can be saved to Picture Manager as a single picture.

2 Enter the name of the drawing object in Picture Name.
The maximum number is 256 characters.
You cannot use the following characters in the picture name.
\/:,;*?"<>|

Detailed settings can be made using Options from the Picture Name Setting dialog box. Click Options totoggle between showing and hiding the items. For details, refer to “Picture Name Setting dialog box” onpage 2-32.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-23

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications

3 Click OK.

The drawing object is saved in Picture Manager.

If a picture contains transparency or a picture is imported with the option of enabling the transparency, thetransparency range is displayed in magenta (R: 255, G: 4, B: 255).

2-24

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications● Saving pictures as image files
To use a picture saved in Picture Manager on another computer, save the picture as an image file.

2

1 Select a picture to export, and then click Export.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.

• To select multiple pictures, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.
• To save as an image file in NMF (NV Metafile) format, select and right-click the drawing object drawn on
the editing screen, then click Export as NV Metafile.

2 Specify the save location in Save in, and then click Save.
The picture name is entered as File name.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-25

WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

When Picture Manager is called from the Properties dialog box of an object arranged on the screen, Export
is not enabled.

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications● Managing Pictures
This section describes items and buttons in Picture Manager, Symbol Factory, and the Picture Name Setting dialog
box.
Picture Manager
Pictures used in pictures of part diagrams and drawings are managed using Picture Manager.

(Category)(Category list)(Picture list)(Image)(Picture name)■(Create New Category)
Creates a new category in the category list.
The default category name is "NewBookn" (n: Number).

■(Delete Category)
Deletes a category from the category list.

■(Rename Category)
Changes the name of the category selected in the category list. The maximum number is 256 characters.
You cannot use the following characters in the category name.
\/:,;*?"<>|■(Delete)Deletes the picture selected in the picture list. Pictures that are used in project or parts cannot be deleted.

■(Reduce)
Deletes all the pictures not used in the project from the pictures saved in the picture list.

■(View)
Change how items appear in the picture list. Click2-26

to select Thumbnails or Details.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications■ (Category List)
Selects a category to save to when saving pictures.
When selecting a picture, select the category in which the arranged picture is saved.
The only default category is "Pic_Lib." To add a category, click
The name of the category is displayed.

■ (Picture list)
The saved pictures are displayed as a list of images.
(Image):An image of the picture is displayed. If a picture contains transparency or a picture is importedwith the option of enabling the transparency, the transparency range is displayed in magenta(R: 255, G: 4, B: 255).

(Picture Name):

The name of the picture is displayed.

■ Import
Save pictures in Picture Manager. Click this button to display the Open dialog box. For details, refer to “Saving image
files” on page 2-19.
Supported file formats are as follows. When selecting images that are not in a bitmap file format, the image isconverted to a bitmap before saving.
• BMP (bitmap file)• WMF (Windows Metafile)• DXF and JPEG
• ICO (icon files)• NMF (NV Metafile)
When saving image files in DXF format, take note of the following points.
• Compatible with AutoCAD Ver. 2.2 to 2002. Compatibility with AutoCAD LT97 is confirmed by IDEC.
• If TrueType fonts are used, there is no garbling of text when Japanese is included in files. SHX format is
not supported.
• Errors may occur in conversion of coordinates, resulting in displacement of position. In addition, if animage is greatly reduced when resizing at the time of saving, lines in the picture may disappear.
• If either the height or width is set to 0 when saving, the aspect ratio is preserved with reference to theother dimension.
To save images in NMF format without conversion to bitmap file format, select and right-click the picture on
the editing screen, and then click Copy to Picture Manager from the popup menu. For details, refer to“Saving drawing objects drawn on the editing screen” on page 2-23.
■ Export
Saves a picture selected in the picture list in BMP (bitmap) or NMF (NV Metafile) format, according to file type. Clickthis button to display the Save As dialog box. For details, refer to “Saving pictures as image files” on page 2-25.
Saved graphics can be saved using Import.
■ Symbol Factory
Display the Symbol Factory images. You can select an image provided by Symbol Factory on your project data. For
details, refer to “Symbol Factory” on page 2-29.
■ Advanced
Displays detailed information about pictures selected in the picture list.
(Picture Name):

Displays the picture name.

(File Type):

Displays the file type.

Image Size (W×H): Displays the size of the picture (W×H) in pixels
File Size:

Displays the size of the file (KB).

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-27

WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations(Category):

2(Create New Category).

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications■ Select
Closes Picture Manager and sets the picture selected in the picture list.
■ CloseCloses Picture Manager.
Open Dialog Box Options
Specify advanced settings when saving image files.

(Option items)(Color before conversion)(Color after conversion)■ Options <<Toggles between showing and hiding the option items.
■ Apply Dithering
Selects this check box to perform dithering (error diffusion method) on images.
This function enables some images with tonal gradations and photo-like pictures to be rendered more beautifully
when they are saved.
■ Color Exchange
Selects this check box to convert the color of the picture.
From: Specifies color before conversion. Click this button to display the Color Settings dialog box. Specify the color,
and then click OK.
to:Selects the color after conversion (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades). Click this button to display the
Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette. Transparent can also be selected.
If a color conversion to transparent is done when the monitor used for WindO/I-NV3 is a 16-bit color or256-color display, even colors other than the color specified in (Color before conversion) may appear
transparent. However, on the Touch they will appear normally.

2-28

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications

Symbol Factory
Symbol Factory is an English-version library tool that offers 5,000 images.

2
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

For details, see online help for Symbol Factory.

■ Preview
Image size (W×H in pixels) and preview of the picture are displayed.
■ Categories
The images supplied by Symbol Factory are divided into categories. Selects categories of pictures saved in PictureManager.
■ Symbols
The pictures in the selected category are displayed in a list. Selects a picture saved in Picture Manager.
■ CopyCopy a picture selected from the Symbols to Picture Manager. Click this button to display the Picture Name Setting
dialog box.
■ Options
Modify the fill and background color and flip or rotate shapes. Click this button to display the Symbol Options dialog
box.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-29

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications

Symbol Options Dialog Box
Modify the fill color and background color, and to flip or rotate shapes. The settings made here are applied to all thegraphic elements in Symbol Factory.

■ Fill Color
Fill Color Mode: Select from the following picture color conversion methods.

Fill Color:

Original:

The color of the image is not changed.

Shaded:The image filled with different shades of the color selected in Fill Color (for a 3D
effect).

Solid:The image is filled uniformly in the color selected in Fill Color.

Hollow:

All color is deleted.

Selects the color used for Shaded or Solid modes. Click this button to display the Color Settings
dialog box. Select a color from the Color Palette.
This option can only be set when Shaded or Solid are selected as the Fill Color Mode.
Original

ShadedSolid

Hollow■ Orientation
Flip:

Select from the following flipping methods.
None:

The image is not flipped.

Horizontal: The image is flipped horizontally.
Vertical

The image is flipped vertically.

Both

The image is flipped both horizontally and vertically.

None

2-30

Horizontal

VerticalSmartAXIS Touch User's ManualBoth1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications

Rotation:

Select from the following rotation methods.
The image is not rotated.

90:

The image is rotated 90° counterclockwise.

180:

The image is rotated 180° counterclockwise.

270:

The image is rotated 270° counterclockwise.

None

90

2
180

270

■ Background Color
Selects the background color of the image when saving an image in Picture Manager or exporting an image using
Export Symbol from the File menu. Click this button to display the Color Settings dialog box. Select a color from theColor Palette.
When exporting an image in VML or SVG format by clicking Export Symbol from the File menu, thissetting is not applied.
■ OK
Saves the setting to close the Symbol Options dialog box.
■ Cancel
Closes the Symbol Options dialog box without saving the setting.
■ Defaults
Set options are returned to their default values.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-31

WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

0:

1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications

Picture Name Setting dialog box
Specifies a name for images saved in Picture Manager.

(Option items)(Color before conversion)(Color after conversion)■ Image
An image of the picture is displayed.
■ Picture nameEnter a name for the picture. The maximum number is 256 characters.
You cannot use the following characters in the picture name.
\/:,;*?"<>|■ Options <<Toggles between showing and hiding the option items.
■ OK
Saves the image in Picture Manager.
■ CancelStops saving the image.
■ Apply Dithering
Select this check box to perform dithering (error diffusion method) on images.
This function enables some images with tonal gradations and photo-like pictures to be rendered more beautifully
when they are saved.
■ Color Exchange
Select this check box to convert the color of the picture.
From: Specifies color before conversion. Click this button to display the Color Settings dialog box. Specify the color,
and then click OK.
to:Selects the color after conversion (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades). Click this button to display the
Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette. Transparent can also be selected.
• To make the background color of the picture saved from Symbol Factory transparent, set (Color Before
Conversion) and Background Color in the Symbol Options dialog box to R: 254, G: 254, B: 254.
• When the monitor used for WindO/I-NV3 is a 16-bit color or 256-color display, there is a risk that one ormore of the following phenemona occurs.
- When a color conversion to transparent is done, even colors other than the color specified in (Color
Before Conversion) may appear transparent. However, on the Touch they will appear normally.
- If converting a background color in Symbol Factory, an image that is copied to the clipboard may haveits colors reduced to the number of colors displayed by the computer monitor. For this reason, the color
setting will not match and the color conversion will not be performed.
Save the image again after changing the background color to another color in Symbol Factory.
For example, if the default color (R: 254, G: 254, B: 254) in (Color before conversion) is used, andBackground Color in Symbol Options dialog box is set to R: 254, G: 254, B: 254, the number ofmonitor colors will match, even if it's 256, so the color conversion will be performed.

2-32

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Starting and Exiting WindO/I-NV3

2

Starting and Exiting WindO/I-NV3

2
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

2.1 Starting WindO/I-NV3■ Windows 10
Click Start, click All Apps, click IDEC Automation Organizer, and then click WindOI-NV3.
■ Windows 8
Click WindOI-NV3 in the tiles on the Start screen.
■ Windows 7
Click Start, click Programs, click IDEC Automation Organizer, and then click WindOI-NV3.
WindO/I-NV3 starts.

You can also start WindO/I-NV3 by double-clicking the WindO/I-NV3 icon on the desktop.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-33

2 Starting and Exiting WindO/I-NV3● Automation Organizer Updater dialog box
The Automation Organizer Updater dialog box is a feature that keeps WindO/I-NV3 up to date.
If a new version of Automation Organizer is released, the Automation Organizer Updater dialog box is displayed when
WindO/I-NV3 starts.

In order to display the Automation Organizer Updater dialog box, your computer must be connected to theInternet.

■ Available Updates
Date:
Information:Shows the date the software was released.
Shows the software's title and version.
Click on this link to connect to IDEC's download site.
The software can be updated by downloading and running the latest version.

■ Description
This area shows the details of the latest changes in the software.

■ Preference
The Update Preference dialog box is displayed when this button is clicked.
To update information when WindO/I-NV3 starts, check this check box.
The Automation Organizer Updater dialog box will be displayed when there is an update.

■ CloseCloses the Automation Organizer Updater dialog box and start WindO/I-NV3.

2-34

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Starting and Exiting WindO/I-NV3● Project Recovery dialog box
The Project Recovery dialog box is a feature to restore edited project data if your computer crashes while you wereediting. With this feature, you can return crashed the project to its last-saved state and restore project data that was
being edited. The Project Recovery dialog box is displayed if there is crashed project data when WindO/I-NV3 starts.

WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations■ (Recovery data list)
This list shows recoverable data for a crashed project.
Project Name:

Shows the project name.

Last Save Time:

Shows the date and time when the data was last saved.

■ OpenSelect the recovery data from the list, and then click this button to open the project data. The recovery data is deleted
when the project data is saved.
■ Delete
Deletes the recovery data.
■ Cancel
Closes the Project Recovery dialog box.
Recovery data is not deleted. The Project Recovery dialog box will be displayed again the next time WindO/I-NV3
starts.
If WindO/I-NV3 crashes in a state where you edit a screen and perform Save Screens after saving the
project data, the screen is not saved in the project data. Select the recovery data with the Project Recovery
dialog box and recover the project data.

2.2 Exiting WindO/I-NV3
Clickand then click Exit WindO/I-NV3.

WindO/I-NV3 ends.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2

2-35

3 Configuration & Functions

3

Configuration & Functions
This section describes the names and functions that make up WindO/I-NV3.
Quick access toolbar

Title barApplication menu
RibbonWorkspace

Editing window

Right click menu

Status bar■ Title bar
The title bar shows the name of the project being edited and the name of this software, “WindO/I-NV3”.
■ Application menu
The application menu displays commands for handling project data such as commands for creating new project data,
opening project data, and saving project data. For details, refer to “3.1 Application Menu Command List” on page 2-37.
■ Quick access toolbar
The quick access toolbar is an area where you can locate commands that you use frequently. You can customize thistoolbar by adding or deleting buttons. For details, refer to “3.2 Quick Access Toolbar” on page 2-38.
■ RibbonThe ribbon shows commands for creating project data and transferring data to the Touch. Common commands are
separated into their own tabs, so you can quickly execute. For details, refer to “3.3 Ribbon Command List” on page 2-41.
■ Workspace
The workspace is the area where the Project window, the Object List window, the Screen List window, the Part
List window, and the Toolbox window are located. You can change the position and method for displaying windows
in the workspace. For details, refer to “3.4 Windows Displayed in the Workspace” on page 2-49.
■ Editing window
The editing window is the area for editing Base Screens, Popup Screens, and Library Screens.
■ Right click menu
The right click menu is a popup menu that is displayed when right clicking the mouse on drawing objects and parts ina list. It displays context sensitive commands.
■ Status bar
The status bar shows information such as the type number, communication driver, project data size, and cursor
position. You can change the items displayed on the status bar. For details, refer to “3.5 Status Bar” on page 2-53.

2-36

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Configuration & Functions

3.1 Application Menu Command List
Commands that can be executed from the application button are listed below.
Command

Open

Interactive Quick Start

Creates project data by configuring settings displayed in dialog boxes step by
step.

From Templates

Creates project data using templates provided with WindO/I-NV3.

WindO/I-NV3 Project

Opens project data that has already been created.

Other Formats

Opens project data uploaded from a Touch with Downloader and project data
saved in the Downloader format.

Save
Save As

Saves the project data being edited.
WindO/I-NV3 Project

Saves the project data being edited with a new name.

Other Formats

Converts the project data being edited to data that can be used with
Downloader and saves it.

Print

Prints the contents of the project data being edited.

Close

Closes the project data being edited.

Recent Projects

Shows the list of recently used project data, up to a maximum of ten items.

WindO/I-NV3 Options

Customizes WindO/I-NV3 and configures the work environment.

Exit WindO/I-NV3

Exits WindO/I-NV3.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-37

WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

New

2

Description

3 Configuration & Functions

3.2 Quick Access Toolbar● Quick access toolbar buttons and menus
Click on a quick access toolbar button or click on ▼ to the right of a button and then click on the displayed command
to execute that command.
Quick access toolbar● Customizing the quick access toolbar
If you click the(Customize Quick Access Toolbar) button, the Customize Quick Access Toolbar menu is displayed.

You can change the quick access toolbar to any desired settings.
■ Changing the buttons displayed on the quick access toolbar
Select only the buttons you want to display on the quick access toolbar.

■ More Commands
You can add or delete quick access toolbar commands.

1 Clickon the quick access toolbar and then click More Commands.

The Customize dialog box is displayed.

2-38

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Configuration & Functions

2 Add or delete commands.

2
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

To add a command
1
2

Select the command to add in Choose commands from.
Click on the command to add from the list and then click Add>>.
The command is added.

To delete a command
Click the command to delete and then click Remove.
The command is deleted.
If you right click a command on the quick access toolbar and click Remove from Quick Access Toolbar,
that quick access toolbar command can be deleted.
• To change the order of the commands, click a command and then click ▲ or ▼ .
• To return to the quick access toolbar to its default settings, click Reset.
■ Show Below the Ribbon
You can change the position of the quick access toolbar to be located below the ribbon.
Clickon the quick access toolbar and then click Show Below the Ribbon.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-39

3 Configuration & Functions

The quick access toolbar moves below the ribbon.

You can also change the quick access toolbar display position to be below the ribbon with the following
methods.
• Right click the quick access toolbar or the ribbon and then click Show Quick Access Toolbar Below
the Ribbon.
• Select the Show Quick Access Toolbar below the Ribbon check box on the Customize dialog box.
To return the quick access toolbar to its original position, click, and then click Show Above the Ribbon.

You can also return the quick access toolbar to its original position with the following methods.
• Right click the quick access toolbar or the ribbon and then click Show Quick Access Toolbar Above
the Ribbon.
• Select the Show Quick Access Toolbar below the Ribbon check box on the Customize dialog box.
■ Minimize the Ribbon
You can change the format of the ribbon to be displayed only as tabs.
Clickon the quick access toolbar and then check Minimize the Ribbon.

The ribbon is displayed as only tabs.

Click on a tab to display its commands.

To return the ribbon to its original state, clickmark.

, and then click on the Minimize the Ribbon to remove the check

You can also change the ribbon to be displayed as only tabs with the following methods.
• Right click the quick access toolbar or the ribbon and then click Minimize the Ribbon.
• Double click a tab.

2-40

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Configuration & Functions

3.3 Ribbon Command List
● HomeHome is where basic operations are performed such as creating a new screen, editing, and downloading project data.

2■ Clipboard

WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

Command

Description

Paste

Pastes the contents of the clipboard.

Cut

Cuts the selected object from the editing window and copies it to the clipboard.

Copy

Copies the selected object to the clipboard.

Duplicate

Duplicates the selected object.

■ Screens
Command
New

Open

Description

Base Screen

Adds a new Base Screen.

Popup Screen

Adds a new Popup Screen.

Library Screen

Creates a new Library Screen.

Base Screen

Opens a Base Screen that has already been created.

Popup Screen

Opens a Popup Screen that has already been created.

Library Screen

Opens a Library Screen that has already been created.

Open Previous Screen

Opens a screen number before the currently selected screen.

Open Next Screen

Opens a screen number after the currently selected screen.

DeleteDeletes the selected screen.

Reuse

Copies another project’s screens.

■ Drawings
Command

ShapesDescription

Line

Draws a line.

Polyline

Draws a polyline.

PolygonDraws a polygon.

Rectangle

Draws a rectangle.

Circle/Ellipse

Draws a circle or ellipse.

Arc

Draws an arc.

Pie

Draws a pie.

Equilateral Polygons

Draws equilateral polygons (equilateral triangle, equilateral diamond, equilateral
pentagon, equilateral hexagon, equilateral octagon).

Fill

Fills the region with the same color as the fill start point with the specified color
and pattern.

PictureInserts a picture.

Text

Inserts text.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual2-41

3 Configuration & Functions■ Parts
Command

Buttons

Lamps

Data Displays

ChartsCommands

2-42

Description

Bit Button

Inserts a Bit Button.

Word Button

Inserts a Word Button.

Goto Screen Button

Inserts a Goto Screen Button.

Key Button

Inserts a Key Button.

Multi-Button

Inserts a Multi-Button.

KeypadInserts a Keypad.

Selector Switch

Inserts a Selector Switch.

Potentiometer

Inserts a Potentiometer.

Pilot Lamp

Inserts a Pilot Lamp.

Multi-State Lamp

Inserts a Multi-State Lamp.

Numerical Input

Inserts a Numerical Input.

Character Input

Inserts a Character Input.

Picture Display

Inserts a Picture Display.

Message Display

Inserts a Message Display.

Message Switching Display

Inserts a Message Switching Display.

Alarm List Display

Inserts an Alarm List Display.

Alarm Log Display

Inserts an Alarm Log Display.

Numerical Display

Inserts a Numerical Display.

CalendarInserts a Calendar.

Bar Chart

Inserts a Bar Chart.

Line Chart

Inserts a Line Chart.

Pie Chart

Inserts a Pie Chart.

Meter

Inserts a Meter.

Bit Write Command

Inserts a Bit Write Command.

Word Write Command

Inserts a Word Write Command.

Goto Screen Command

Inserts a Goto Screen Command.

Script Command

Inserts a Script Command.

Multi-Command

Inserts a Multi-Command.

Timer

Inserts a Timer.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Configuration & Functions■ EditingCommandMoves the selected object to the front.

Send to Back

Moves the selected object to the back.

Group

Groups multiple objects.

Ungroup

Cancels the group.

Align

RotateAlign Left

Aligns selected objects to the left.

Align Center

Aligns selected objects to the center.

Align Right

Aligns selected objects to the right.

Align Top

Aligns selected objects to the top.

Align Middle

Aligns selected objects to the middle.

Align Bottom

Aligns selected objects to the bottom.

Make Horizontal
Spacing Equal

Aligns selected objects to be equally spaced horizontally.

Make Vertical Spacing
Equal

Aligns selected objects to be equally spaced vertically.

Rotate Right 90°

Rotates selected drawing objects 90° to the right.

Rotate Left 90°

Rotates selected drawing objects 90° to the left.

Flip Vertical

Flips selected drawing objects vertically.

Flip Horizontal

Flips selected drawing objects horizontally.

2
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

Arrange

Description

Bring to Front

Replace

Automatically replaces a specified device address with a separate device
address.

SelectSelects objects in the editing window.

AutoResize

Automatically changes the text size to the object’s size and display
region.

Increment Address

Enables or disables the increment address function.
A specific value is added to the value of the object’s device address when
pasting and duplicating parts.

■ Project
Command

Download

UploadCompareDescription

Project Data

Downloads project data to the Touch.

Files to External Memory

Stops the Touch and then downloads Recipe files (CSV file) to theexternal memory inserted in the Touch. The Touch resumes runningwhen files have finished downloading.

Files to External Memory
while running

Downloads Recipe files (CSV file) to the external memory inserted in the
Touch without stopping it.

Project Data

Uploads project data from the Touch.

Stored Data in External
MemoryUploads data from the External Memory Folder for the currently running
project.

Compare Projects

Compares the screen data and scripts in an existing project with the
project data currently being edited and displays the results of thatcomparison.

Re-verify

Updates the comparison results to the most latest state.

Target Info.

Displays version information for the Touch runtime system and project
information.

Comm.Setup

Configures the communication target and communication conditions
between the target and the Touch or between the computer and the
Touch.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-43

3 Configuration & Functions● Configuration
Configuration is where you configure the system settings for the Touch that will use the project data being edited.
■ System Setup
Command

Description

Project

Configures Touch operations and functions.

Alarm Log

Configures the alarm log.

Data Log

Configures the data log.

Operation Log

Configures the operation log.

Data Storage Area

Changes the allocation of the data storage area.

Preventive MaintenanceConfigures the preventative maintenance function.

RecipeConfigures recipes.

Text Group

Configures text groups.

Global Script

Configures one global script.

■ ProtectCommand

Description

User Accounts

Configures security function, user accounts, and passwords.

● Online
Online is where you download created project data and files to the Touch, where you upload data from the Touch,and where you perform monitoring.
■ Transfer
Command

Download

UploadDescription

Project Data

Downloads project data to the Touch.

Files to External Memory

Stops the Touch and then downloads Recipe files (CSV file) to theexternal memory inserted in the Touch. The Touch resumes runningwhen files have finished downloading.

Files to External Memory whilerunning

Downloads Recipe files (CSV file) to the external memory inserted in
the Touch without stopping it.

Project Data

Uploads project data from the Touch.

Stored Data in External Memory

Uploads data from the External Memory Folder for the currently
running project.

■ TouchCommand

Description
Displays version information for the Touch runtime system and project
information.

Target Info.

Clear

Format2-44

All

Clears all of the data stored in the internal memory on the Touch.

Alarm Log Data

Clears all of the alarm log data stored in the internal memory on the Touch.

Data Log Data

Clears all of the data log data stored in the internal memory on the Touch.

Operation Log Data

Clears all of the operation log data stored in the internal memory on the Touch.

Data of all Device
Addresses

Clears the data of all device addresses.

Stored Data in External
MemoryClears data saved to the external memory inserted in the Touch.
Formats the external memory inserted in the Touch.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Configuration & Functions■ Monitors
CommandStart/Stop Monitor

Description

2

Connects the Touch to the external device and starts monitoring. This
command also stops monitoring.
Shows or hides the Screen Monitor window.

Object List

Displays a value of device in a popup and emphasizes the object that is
satisfying the trigger condition in the object list or script editor.

CustomShows or hides the Custom Monitor window.

Batch

Shows or hides the Batch Monitor window.

External Devices

Shows or hides the External Device Monitor window during 1:N
communication.

Back

Returns to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before the screen
was changed.

Forward

Advances to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before thescreen was changed with the Back command.

Go to ScreenFirst Screen

Switches to the Base Screen with the smallest screen number in the project data.

Previous Screen

Switches to the Base Screen with a screen number one smaller than the Base
Screen currently displayed. If the screen numbers are not consecutive
numbers, this command switches to the closest number.

Screen Number

Switches to the Base Screen with a specified number.

Next Screen

Switches to the Base Screen with a screen number one larger than the Base
Screen currently displayed. If the screen numbers are not consecutive
numbers, this command switches to the closest number.

Last Screen

Switches to the Base Screen with the largest screen number in the project
data.

Open Current Screens

Opens a monitored screen in the editing window.

■ Communication
Command
Setup

Description
Configures the communication target and communication conditions between
the target and the Touch or between the computer and the Touch.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-45

WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

Screens

3 Configuration & Functions● View
View is where you can switch the workspace display and display the Tag Editor, Screen Diagram, and various managers.
You can configure the items displayed in the editing window.
■ Workspace
Command

Description

ToolboxShows the Toolbox window. This window displays Parts and Drawings.

Project Window

Shows the Project window. This window displays the saved screens and project
related information.

Screen List

Shows the Screen List window. The window displays the screens saved in the
project as thumbnails.

Object List

Shows the Object List window. This window displays all of the graphics and parts
placed in an editing screen.

Part List

Shows the Part List window. This window displays the list of part images.

Tag Editor

Shows the Tag Editor. This window displays the list of registered device address, tag
name, and comments.

Screen Diagram

Shows the Screen Diagram. This window displays the Overlapping Screen
information, and the screen numbers and titles of the screens linked by the Goto
Screen Button, the Goto Screen Command, the Numerical Input, the Character
Input, the Alarm List Display and the Alarm Log Display.

Comparison Result

Shows the Comparison Result window. This window displays the results of thatcomparison of projects.

Picture Manager

Shows Picture Manager. Manages the registered images for project use.

Text Manager

Shows Text Manager. Manages registered text which can be used for Text, Part objects,
title of Popup Screen, messages with Alarm List Display and Alarm Log Display.

Script Manager

Shows Script Manager. Manages registered scripts for project use.

Protocol Manager

Shows Protocol Manager. Manages protocols created.

Control Function

Start up WindLDR. This is an editor for performing various control function settingsand creating ladder programs or FBD programs.

■ Show/Hide
Command
Part Name

Shows or hides drawing object names and part names.

Device Address

Shows or hides device addresses and tag names.

Trigger Condition

Shows or hides trigger conditions.

Commands

Shows or hides the dotted frame for commands.

Popup Screen

Shows or hides a Popup Screen’s number, display frame, and the part name of thepart calling that Popup Screen.

Overlay Screens

Shows or hides the configured overlay screens.

Security Group
Gridlines

2-46

Description

Display
Input

Shows or hides the display security group set for parts.
Shows or hides the input security group set for parts.
Shows or hides the gridlines in the editing window.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Configuration & Functions■ Screens
Command

Description

Focus Order
Reset

Returns the displayed images to the default images.

ON/OFF State

Switches between the ON image and the OFF image for buttons and lamps.

Previous State

Changes the image for the displayed part to the previous state.

State Number

Changes the image for the displayed part to the image for the part with thespecified number.

Next State

Changes the image for the displayed part to the next state.

Text Group

Changes the displayed text to the text of the specified text group.

Active User

Displays only the parts that correspond to the specified user.

■ ZoomCommand
Zoom

Description
Changes the magnification of the editing window.

■ Window
CommandClose All

Description
Closes all editing windows.

● Format
Format is where you change the style of drawing objects, arrange objects, and change their size.
■ Shape Style
Command
1 dot

Description
Sets the line width to one dot.

2 dots

Sets the line width to two dots.

3 dots

Sets the line width to three dots.

5 dots

Sets the line width to five dots.

Solid

Sets the line to solid.

Dot

Sets the line to dotted.

Dash

Sets the line to dashes.

Long Dash

Sets the line to long dashes.

Long Dash Dot

Sets the line to long dash dot.

Long Dash Dot Dot

Sets the line to long dash dot dot.

Pattern

Changes the pattern.

Foreground Color

Changes the pattern’s foreground color.

Background Color

Changes the pattern’s background color.

■ Text Style
Command

Description

Regular

Sets the text style to regular.

Bold

Sets the text style to bold.

Shadow

Gives the text a shadow.

Text Color

Changes the text color.

Text Background Color

Displays the text as if it were highlighted with a highlighter.

Shadow Color

Changes the color of the shadow added to text given a shadow.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

State

Changes the order to move the focus with Numerical Input and Character Input.

2-47

3 Configuration & Functions■ Arrange
Command

Description

X-coordinate

Changes the X-coordinate of the selected object.

Y-coordinate

Changes the Y-coordinate of the selected object.

Bring to Front

Moves selected object to the front.

Send to Back

Moves selected object to the back.

Group

Groups selected objects so they can be handled as a single object.

UngroupRestores a grouped object to its individual objects.

Rotate Right 90°

Rotates selected objects right 90°.

Rotate Left 90°

Rotates selected objects left 90°.

Flip Vertical

Vertically flips selected objects.

Flip Horizontal

Horizontally flips selected objects.

Align Left

Aligns selected objects to the left.

Align Center

Aligns selected objects to the center.

Align Right

Aligns selected objects to the right.

Align Top

Aligns selected objects to the top.

Align Middle

Aligns selected objects to the middle.

Align Bottom

Aligns selected objects to the bottom.

Make Horizontal Spacing
Equal

Arranges selected objects to be equally spaced horizontally.

Make Vertical Spacing
Equal

Arranges selected objects to be equally spaced vertically.

■ SizeCommand

2-48

Description

Width

Changes the width of the selected object.

HeightChanges the height of the selected object.

Make Same Width

Makes the selected objects a uniform width.

Make Same Height

Makes the selected objects a uniform height.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Configuration & Functions

3.4 Windows Displayed in the Workspace● Changing the position of windows

2

You can change the display position of the window by dragging and dropping the title bar of the window or its tab todisable docking. Windows that are not docked are called floating windows.
• If you drag the title bar of the workspace window, you can move all the docked windows together.
Title bar

Drag and drop

• If you drag the tab of a workspace window, you can move just the selected window.

Drag and drop

Tab

Docking windows
You can dock a floating window to WindO/I-NV3’s left, right, top, or bottom frame or a separate window.

1 Drag the window’s title bar or tab.
The

(Docking) icon is displayed.

Docking icon

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-49

WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

Disabling docking

3 Configuration & Functions

When the mouse cursor gets close to a
(Docking) icon while dragging the title bar or tab, the(Docking) icon turns blue and the location to dock the window is displayed.

Window docking location

2 Drop the title bar or tab on the(Docking) icon to dock that window to WindO/I-NV3’s left, right, top, or bottom

frame or a separate window.

• If the workspace window is dropped on thebottom frame.

• If a floating window is dropped on theframe or a docked window.

2-50(Docking) icon, it is docked to WindO/I-NV3’s left, right, top, or(Docking) icon, it is docked to WindO/I-NV3’s left, right, top, or bottom

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Configuration & Functions• If you put the mouse cursor on another window while dragging a floating windows title bar, theis displayed. Drop the title bar on thedisplayed window with the tabs.

(Docking) icon

(Docking) icon to dock the floating window to that window. Change the

WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations● Changing the display method of windows
Auto HideIf the workspace window is docked, you can change the window to automatically hide and show only its tabs.
Click the(Auto Hide) icon to change the window to show only its tabs.
Tabs

Auto Hide icon

The window is displayed when you bring the mouse cursor close to the tabs.
Mouse cursor• Click(Auto Hide) to secure the window in place.

• Click(Close) to close the window.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2

2-51

3 Configuration & Functions

The editing windows are displayed side by side.
When multiple editing windows are open, you can display those windows side by side.
Drag the tab of the editing window to display side by side and drop it where theicon is displayed.

The editing windows are displayed side by side.
Tab

Drag and drop

• You can change the active editing windows by clicking on
editing window.

• Click

2-52(Close) to close the active editing window.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manualor(Active Files) and selecting the3 Configuration & Functions

3.5 Status Bar
Mode

Data Size

Snap to Grid

Grid Settings

Communication Driver
Preview

Zoom

Position

WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

Type Number

2

Text Group

Active User

Zoom Slider

Zoom Out button

Zoom In button● Status bar items■ ModeThis section of the status bar shows WindO/I-NV3’s current mode.
■ Type NumberThis section of the status bar shows the Touch type set in the project data being edited.
■ Communication DriverThis section of the status bar shows the communication driver set in the project data being edited.
■ Data Size
This section of the status bar shows the download data file size for the project data being edited.
When you save the project, the display is updated with the latest information.
■ Position
This section of the status bar shows the X- and Y-coordinates of the mouse cursor in the editing window.
■ Text Group
This section of the status bar shows the current text group. The text displayed in the editing window changes
according to the displayed text group.
To change the text group, click ▼ and select the text group.
■ Active User
This section of the status bar shows the active user. You can hide or show objects in the editing window according to
the security group of the displayed user.
To change the active user, click ▼ and select the user.
■ Snap to Grid
Click

to align objects to the grid.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-53

3 Configuration & Functions■ Grid Settings
You can change the style and spacing of the grid displayed in the editing window.
Click

to display the Grid Settings dialog box. Configure the items, and then click OK.

Interval:

Aligns the gridlines to the specified spacing.
Enter the spacing for the gridlines in Horizontal and Vertical.

Style:

Select the grid style with Dot or Line.

Color:

Select the grid color.
Click this button to open the color palette. Select the color with the color palette.

■ Preview
You can preview an edited screen.
Click

to open the preview window.

(ON/OFF): Click the button to switch between the OFF image and ON image for buttons and lamps.
Copy:

You can save the image displayed in the preview window as a bitmap image file by clicking Copy.
The preview display and the actual screen displayed on the Touch may differ.
For example, the image for overlay screens in the preview display is always shown in front. However, whendrawings and parts overlap on the actual screen, parts are always shown in front irregardless of the orderof overlay screens.

2-54

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Configuration & Functions■ ZoomZoom shows the magnification of the editing window.
Click Zoom on the status bar to display the Zoom dialog box.

WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

Specify:2

You can specify the zoom magnification (50% to 400%).
You can also specify the zoom magnification by dragging the zoom slider or clicking

and.

● Customizing the status bar
You can change the commands displayed on the status bar.
Right click the status bar and check only the commands you want to display on the status bar.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-55

4 Customizing WindO/I-NV3

4

Customizing WindO/I-NV3

4.1 Configuring the Work Environment
You can configure WindO/I-NV3 settings such as mode and options when editing screens, the path when selecting files,
and the path for automatic backups. The settings configured here are saved even when you exit WindO/I-NV3.
The procedure for configuring the work environment is shown below.

1 Click

and then click WindO/I-NV3 Options.

The WindO/I-NV3 Options dialog box is displayed.

2 Change the settings on each tab as desired.

2-56

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Customizing WindO/I-NV3● Edit tab■ Mode Settings
When placing a part on the screen, select whether or not to display the part’s Properties dialog box.

2

Settings First:

Displays the part’s Properties dialog box. This mode is for creating the screen while configuring theProperties for the parts.

■ Properties Setting
Select whether or not to display the Properties dialog box for parts in the Advanced mode.
Basic:

Displays the Properties dialog box in Basic mode to use only basic functions.

Advanced:

Displays the Properties dialog box in Advanced mode so that all functions can be used.

You can also change the mode by clicking Advanced or Basic in the Properties dialog box for parts.

■ Enable Increment Address
When copying or duplicating parts, select this check box to add a specified value (-999 to 999) to the device address
set for the original part before pasting it to the screen.
■ Enable Increment Station No.
When copying or duplicating parts, select this check box to add a specified value (-999 to 999) to the device station
number set for the original part before pasting it to the screen.
This option can only be configured if the communication driver Connection is 1:N Communication.
■ Enable Text Auto Resizing
Select this box to automatically change the text size according to a change in part size.
■ Minimize the properties dialog box by clicking Preview button
Select this box to minimize an object's Properties dialog box when you click Preview on its properties dialog box.
■ Auto-change IME
Select this box to enter characters other than alphanumeric characters using the input method editor (IME) in text
boxes for entering device addresses.
You cannot enter full-width characters in text boxes that only accept alphanumeric input, even if the IME isenabled.
Select this box to use full-width characters in tag names in the device address settings.
■ Bit Number Symbol
Select the separator for addresses and bits. When manually entering device address, you can enter either separator,
but they will be displayed using the symbol selected here.
Dot (WindLDR Format):

Separates the address and bit with a dot.
Example: LDR100.00

Dash (WindO/I-NV3 Format):

Separates the address and bit with a dash.
Example: LDR100-0■ Workspace Setup
Displays the Workspace Setup dialog box. You can configure items displayed in the workspace window. For details,
refer to “4.2 Customizing the Workspace” on page 2-59.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-57

WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

Placement First: The part’s Properties dialog box is not displayed. This mode is for placing the parts on the screen
and finishing the screen’s design first.

4 Customizing WindO/I-NV3● General tab■ Default Path
Specifies the path when saving project data and opening files.
Click

to display the Select Path dialog box. Select the folder, and then click OK.

■ Save option
Automatic Save Every:
Backup Save in:

Select this check box to automatically backup the project data at fixed time intervals (1 to
120 minutes).
Specifies the location to save the backup data.
Click

to display the Select Path dialog box. Select a folder, and then click OK.

Backup data is deleted when the project data is closed.

2-58

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Customizing WindO/I-NV3■ Font Assignment
This option specifies the text font in the Properties dialog box for objects to display in text boxes and messages todisplay on the screen.

Font Assignment configures the fonts displayed in WindO/I-NV3. Fonts displayed on the Touch are notchanged. To display the same font on the Touch as the font displayed in WindO/I-NV3, select Windows Fontin the Properties dialog box for objects or Font setting in Text Manager.
For details, refer to “Windows Font” on page 2-12.
:

4.2 Customizing the Workspace
You can change the windows that are displayed in the workspace with the Workspace Setup dialog box.
● Screen List tab
This tab changes the Screen List window display.

■ ZoomSelect the zoom magnification for the thumbnails displayed in the Screen List window from the following.
100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400● Object List tab
This tab changes the items displayed in the Object List window.

■ List Items
Shows the list of items that can be displayed in the Object List window.
■ Add
Adds an item to Display Items.
Select an item in List Items, and then click this button to add it to Display Items.
■ Delete
Deletes an item from Display Items.
Select an item in Display Items, and then click this button.
■ Display Items
Shows the list of items that are displayed in the Object List window.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-59

2WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

Select a Font in Settings, and then click Change Font to display the Font Settings dialog box. Select the font touse, and then click OK.

4 Customizing WindO/I-NV3■ Up
Shifts the selected item upward in the Display Items list.
■ Down
Shifts the selected item downward in the Display Items list.
● Parts List tab
This tab changes the items displayed in the Part List window.

■ Show Image Name
Select this box to display the image name for parts in the Part List window.

2-60

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 WindO/I-NV3 Common Operations and Settings

5

WindO/I-NV3 Common Operations and Settings

2

This section describes common settings when creating project data.

WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

5.1 Device Address Settings
Device addresses are memory on the Touch and external devices that can store values in bit or word units.
By setting device addresses to parts and functions, you can control the screen display and operation of parts.
Device addresses are specified by combining the device type and address in the following formats.
Dot (WindLDR Format):

Device type

Address .

Dash (WindO/I-NV3 Format):

Device type

Address - Bit

Bit

Address and bit separator
The device address can be directly entered or it can be set with the Device Address Settings dialog box.
● Direct entry
Enter a device address with the keyboard following the basic format.
To enter the bit (0 to 15) for a word device, enter the address, the bit separator “.” or “-”, and the bit. You can enter
the address with either separator, but it is displayed according to the Bit Number Symbol setting. Bit Number
Symbol is set on the Edit tab of the WindO/I-NV3 Options dialog box.
● Specifying a device address with the Device Address Settings dialog box
To display the Device Address Settings dialog box, click
Use this dialog box to set the device address.

to the right of the text box for setting the device address.

■ TargetSelect the device that includes the device address to set from Touch or External Device.
■ Station No.
Specify the station number for the external device. The range that can be specified varies based on thecommunication driver selected.
This option can only be set when 1:N Communication is selected on the Connection of the Select Communication
Driver dialog box or the Change Communication Driver dialog box.
■ Device Type
Select the device type.
The list only shows device types that can be used.
■ Address
Specify the address. The range that can be set varies based on the device type selected.
■ Bit
Specify the bit (0 to 15) of the word device when a word device is selected in Device.
■ Tag Name
Shows the tag names configured for the selected device address.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-61

5 WindO/I-NV3 Common Operations and Settings■ Comment
Shows the comments configured for the selected device address.
■ Tag Editor
Opens the Tag Editor.
With the Tag Editor, you can display the list of device addresses used in the project data being edited and configure
tag names and comments for device addresses.
Tag names and comments configured in the Tag Editor can be used in WindLDR and WindCFG.

2-62

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 WindO/I-NV3 Common Operations and Settings

5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions
Specify conditional expressions with Condition on the Trigger Condition tab.

2

Conditional expressions are specified by combining data and operators using the following basic format.

● Direct entry
Enter the conditional expression with the keyboard.
• There is no limit on data or operators. However, the maximum number is 480 characters.

to... (within 480 characters)• To enter a device address for data, always enclose it with “[” and “]”.
Example:[LDR100] == 10• To flip bits, enter “~” before the data.
• Parentheses “(” and “)” can be used.

)(()• Operator priority is the same as scripts. For details, refer to Chapter 20 “6.4 About the Priority of the Operator” onpage 20-53.
● Configuring conditional expressions with the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box
You can easily configure a basic conditional expression using the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box.
• Up to a maximum of five items of data can be used.

to• To flip the bits in data, select the Not check box.
• Operator priority is the same as scripts. For details, refer to Chapter 20 “6.4 About the Priority of the Operator” onpage 20-53.

1 Click Condition

to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box.

2 Click Value or Device and enter a value or device address.
To flip the bits in data, select the Not box.

3 Select the operator.
4 Click the next Value or Device and enter a value or device address.
To flip the bits in data, select the Not box.

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the necessary number of conditions.
If you display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box after directly entering a conditional expression, that
expression will be reflected in the dialog box. However, if you entered an expression that cannot bereflected, the portion of the expression that could not be reflected is deleted when you click OK and close
the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-63

WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations

Directly enter the conditional expression or specify it with the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box.

5 WindO/I-NV3 Common Operations and Settings● Data and operations that can be configured
Data
You can specify these types and values of data for conditional expressions.
Item
Value
DeviceDescription
Set a constant number as data.
The range that can be set differs according to the selected data type.
For details, refer to “Data types” on page 2-1.
Set a device address for a bit device or a word device that stores the value to be handled as data.

Operators
Specify the type of arithmetic operation to execute on the data. (In the table below,
hand number,indicates the right-hand number.)Operator

Relational
operators*1

Bitwiseoperators

Logicaloperators*1

Supported
deviceBit
Worddevice device

Details+

Arithmetic
operators

indicates the operator’s left-

Addition

Adds
Subtracts-

Subtraction*

Multiplication

Multiplies/

Division

Divides

%

and

NO

.

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

.

NO

YES

ModuloCalculates the remainder after dividing

NO

YES

==

Equal toCompares if

is equal to

YES

YES

!=

Not equal toCompares if

is not equal to

YES

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

from

.

and
by

.
by

.

.
.

Greater thanor equal toLess than orequal toCompares if

is equal or greater thanCompares if

is equal or less than>Greater thanCompares if

is greater than<Less thanCompares if&

Bitwise AND

Calculates the logical product (AND) of each bit in|

Bitwise OR

Calculates the logical sum (OR) of each bit in^

Bitwise XOR(exclusive OR)

Calculates the exclusive logical sum (XOR) of each bit of.

~

Bitwise NOT

Flips the logic of each bits of.
For word device and fixed values, 0 will be 65535 and 65535 will be 0.
For bit device, 0 will be 1, and 1 will be 0.

YES

YES

<<

Left shift

Shifts each bit of

NO

YES

>>

Right shift

NO

YES

&&

Logical AND

NO

YES

||

Logical OR

Shifts each bit of
to right forbit(s).
Calculates the logical product (AND) of a conditional expression
and a conditional expression.
Calculates the logical sum (OR) of a conditional expression and aconditional expression.

NO

YES

>=
<=

is less than

.
.

.
.

to left for

and
and

.
.
and

bit(s).

• You cannot select logical operators in the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box.
• You cannot mix bit devices and word devices in a conditional expression.
• As a basic rule, conditional expressions are calculated in order from the left, but when multiple arithmetic
operations are combined, they are calculated according to the operator priority.
For [D10] == [D11] + [D12] * 2 + [D13], the expression is calculated in the following order.
D10

==

D11

+

D12

*

2

+

D13

1
2
3
4
For the operator priority, refer to Chapter 20 “6.4 About the Priority of the Operator” on page 20-53.
*1 Returns 1 if satisfied or 0 if not satisfied.

2-64

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 WindO/I-NV3 Common Operations and Settings● Setting and operation examples
Settings
Trigger Condition Settings
dialog box

Direct entry

2

ActionData Op. Data
M0 == M1

The condition is satisfied if the values ofM0 and M1 are equal.

[M0] == [M1] & [M2]

Data Op. Data Op. Data
M0 == M1&
M2

The condition is satisfied if the result of
the AND operation on M1 and M2 isequal to M0.

[M0] == ~[M1]Data Op. Data
M0
&
M1
Not

The condition is satisfied if the result offlipping the bits in M1 is equal to M0.

1234 == [D0]

Data Op. Data
1234 == D0

The condition is satisfied if the value ofD0 equals 1234.

100 <= [D0] + [D1] + [D2] + [D3]

Data Op. Data Op. Data
100 <= D0+
D1
Op. Data Op. Data
+
D2
+
D3

The condition is satisfied if the result of
adding the values of D0 through D3 is
100 or greater.

0 != [D0] % 10

Data Op. Data Op. Data
0
!=
D0
%
10

The condition is satisfied if the value ofthe remainder after D0 is divided by 10
does not equal 0 (the value of D10
cannot be entirely divided by 10).

[D0] == ~[D1] & ~[D2] & [D3] &[D4]

Data Op. Data Op. Data
D0 == D1 == D2
Not
Not
Op. Data Op. Data
&
D3
&
D4

The condition is satisfied if the logicalAND operation on the flipped bits of D1,
the flipped bits of D2, the value of D3,
and the value of D4 is equal to D0.

[D10] + [D11] == [D12] + [D13]

Data Op. Data Op. Data
D10 + D11 == D12
Op. Data+ D13

The condition is satisfied if the result of
adding the values of D12 and D13 isequal to the result of adding the values
D10 and D11.

[D10] == [D11] + [D12] * 2 +[D13]Data Op. Data Op. Data
D10 == D11 + D12
Op. Data Op. Data
*
+ D13
2

The condition is satisfied if the result of
adding the values of D11, D12 multipliedby two, and D13 is equal to the value of
D10.

100 <= [D0] + [D1] + [D2] + [D3]
+ [D4] + [D5] + [D6]+ [D7](This expression cannot be
configured in the Trigger
Condition Settings dialog box
because it has over 6 items ofdata.)

The condition is satisfied if the result of
adding the values of D0 through D7 is
100 or greater.

1 == ([M0] && [M1]) || ([M2] && [M3])(This expression cannot be
configured on the Trigger
Condition Settings dialog box
because it uses logical operatorsand it contains parentheses“(” and “)”.)The condition is satisfied if the logical OR
operation on the result of the logical AND
operation on M0 and M1 and the result of
the logical AND operation on M2 and M3
is equal to 1.

[LDR10] + [LDR11] == [LDR12] *([LDR13] + [LDR14])(This expression cannot be
configured on the Trigger
Condition Settings dialog box
because it mixes bitwise
operators and logical operators
or it contains parentheses“(” and “)”.)The condition is satisfied if the result ofmultiplying the value of LDR12 by the
result of adding the values of LDR13 andLDR14 is equal to the result of adding
the values of LDR10 and LDR11.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2-65

WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations[M0] == [M1]

5 WindO/I-NV3 Common Operations and Settings

2-66

SmartAXIS Touch User's ManualChapter 3

Project

The settings and screen data required to run the Touch are contained in a data structure called a Project. You must
create a project using WindO/I-NV3 and WindLDR, which is an editor to set control function, started from WindO/INV3 before creating the screens and configuring the settings for the Touch. This chapter describes the various
settings required to create a project.

Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data

Project

1

1.1 Creating New Project Data
● Create new project data by using the interactive quick start
You can create project data by following displayed dialog boxes and configuring settings step by step.

1 Click, and then click New.

A New Project dialog box is displayed.

2 Enter the project name, and then click Next.
The Select Product Series dialog box is displayed.

• You cannot use the following characters in the project name.
\/:,;*?“<>|• You cannot create project data in read-only folders or in WindO/I-NV3’s working folders (temporary
folders that start with “~”).

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual33-1

1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data

3 Select Product Series, Type Number, and Installation, and then click Next.
The Select Communication Driver dialog box is displayed.

■ Product Series
Select the Touch type.
■ Type Number
A list of type numbers associated with the selected Touch is displayed. Select the type number to use.
■ Installation
Select the Touch installation direction from the following options.
Horizontal, Vertical (Counter Clockwise), Vertical (Clockwise), Horizontal (Flip)
You can go back to previous step to change the setting by clicking Previous.

4 Select Manufacturer, Protocol, and Connection, and then click Next.
The Project Settings dialog box is displayed.

■ Manufacturer
Select the manufacturer name of the external device used.
■ Protocol
Shows the communication driver list for the select manufacturer. Select the communication driver to use.
■ Connection
Select the connection according to the number of external devices.
1:1 Communication:

The Touch is connected to a single external device.

1:N Communication:

The Touch is connected to multiple external devices.

You can go back to previous step to change the settings by clicking Previous.

3-2

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data

5 Configure the settings on each tab as necessary, and then click OK.
For details about the Project Settings dialog box, refer to “3 Project Settings Dialog Box” on page 3-19.

3Project• The Project Settings dialog box can also be accessed using the following methods.
- Click Project on the Configuration tab- Double click Project Settings in the Project window• You can go back to previous step to change the settings by clicking Previous.
This concludes creating project data.
Next you will create a screen. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “3.1 Base Screen Settings” on page 4-14.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-31 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data

1.2 Opening Project Data
● Opening project data
You can open project data that has already been created.

1 Click, and then click Open.

The Open dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the file, and then click Open.

If a password has been configured for the project data, the Enter Password screen will be displayed. Selectthe user name and enter its password. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security
Function” on page 21-1.
Next you will open a screen. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “2.2 Opening Screens” on page 4-2.

Click

3-4

, and then click project data on the Recent Projects list to open a project data.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data

1.3 Saving Project Data
● Saving project data
You can save the project data being edited.
Click

3

, and then click Save.

Project

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-5

1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data

● Saving project data with a different name
You can save the project data being edited with a different name.

1 Click, and then click Save As.

The Save As dialog box is displayed.

2 Enter the project name, and then click Save.

• You cannot use the following characters in the project name.
\/:,;*?“<>|• You cannot create project data in read-only folders or in WindO/I-NV3’s working folders (temporary
folders that start with “~”).

3-6

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data

1.4 Printing Project Data
You can print the settings for the project data being edited and its screen images.

1 Click, and then click Print.

3

The Print dialog box is displayed.

Project

2 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-7

1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data

● Print Tab■ Printer
Name:

Select a printer connected to the computer or Save As RTF file on disk.
You can output an RTF-formatted file by selecting Save As RTF file on disk.
Set path of RTF file:

When outputting an RTF-formatted file, click this button to display the
Save As dialog box. Specify the saved location, file name, and thenclick OK.

Status:Shows the current status of the printer.

Type:

Shows the manufacturer and model of the printer.

Location:Shows the destination or the location to save the file.

Comment:

Shows a comment entered in the Printer Properties dialog box.

■ Print Range
Select the items you want to print.
Project Settings:

Prints the project settings.

Screen Settings:

Prints the screen settings, a list of the parts on the screen, and a screen image. The details are
configured on the Screen tab.

Part List:

Prints the settings for all parts used in the project.

Device List:

Prints the settings for all devices used in the project.

Picture List:

Prints the images and settings for drawing objects registered in Picture Manager. The details are
configured on the Picture tab.

Library List:

Prints the settings and images for Library Screens. The details are configured on the Library tab.

Text List:

Prints all the text registered in Text Manager.

Script List:

Prints all the scripts registered in Script Manager.

Protocol List:

Prints the settings for Protocols registered in Protocol Manager. The details are configured on the
Protocol tab.

When the following items are selected, their tabs are displayed.
Item

Reference

Screen Settings“Screen Tab” on page 3-9

Picture List

“Picture Tab” on page 3-10

Library List

“Library Tab” on page 3-11

Protocol List

“Protocol Tab” on page 3-12

■ Copies
Number of copies: Enter the number of copies to print (1 to 100).
■ Printing Font
Displays the Font dialog box. You can change the font used when printing.

3-8

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data

● Screen Tab

3
Project■ TypeSelect the screens to print from the following items.
All, Base Screen, Popup Screen■ Range
Select the screens to print from the selected type of screen.
All:

Prints all the screens.

Current Screen:

Prints the selected editing window screen.

Selected Screens:

Prints the selected screens. The selected screens are displayed in a list.
Add:

Adds a screen to the list.
Click Add to display the Open Screens dialog box. Select Screen Type,select the screen in Screen List, and then click OK to add the screen to
the list.

Delete:Deletes the screen from the list.
Select the screen in the list, and then click Delete.

■ ImageState:

Changes the state of the parts for printing. Select the state from the following items.
OFF, ON, ON, OFF (Both)

Zoom:

Prints the screen image at the specified magnification (20% to 400%).

Invert white and black:Select this to print the screen by inverting the colors so white is black and black is white.

Overlay Screens:

Select this to print the screen by displaying overlay screens.

Show Part Name:

Select this to print the screen by displaying part names.

Show Device Address:

Select this to print the screen by displaying device addresses.

■ Screen image only
Prints only the screen type, number, and screen image.
■ Detailed List of Parts
Prints part settings for each screen. This can only be selected when Screen image only is cleared.
■ Device List
Prints device settings for each address. This can only be selected when Screen image only is cleared.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-9

1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data

● Picture Tab■ NameShows a list of selected drawing object names.
Add:

Adds a drawing object to the list.
Click this button to display Picture Manager. Select a picture, and then click Select to add it to thelist.

Delete:Deletes a picture from the list.
Select the picture name, and then click this button.

■ ZoomPrints the picture at the specified magnification (20% to 400%).

3-10

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data

● Library Tab

3
Project■ NameShows a list of selected library names.
Add:

Adds a library to the list.
Click this button to display the Select Library for Print dialog box. Select a library and then click
OK to add it to the list.

Delete:Deletes a library from the list.
Select a library name and click this button.

■ ZoomPrints the library image at the specified magnification (20% to 400%).

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-11

1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data

● Protocol Tab■ NameShows a list of selected Protocol names.
Add:

Adds a Protocol to the list.
Click this button to display Protocol Manager. Select a protocol, and then click Select to add it to
the list.

Delete:Deletes a protocol from the list.
Select a protocol name, and then click this button.

3-12

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data

1.5 Comparing Project Data
Compares project data during editing with the screens and scripts of saved projects.

1 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click Compare.
The Open dialog box is displayed.

3
Project

2 Select a file to compare with, then click Open.

The Comparison Result window is displayed.

Comparison results are displayed using colored text.
Blue:

Complete match

Red:

Different content

Green: Only saved in the open project
Gray:

Only saved in the comparison project
To compare with the comparison project data again, click the arrow to the right of Compare from theProject group of the Home tab, then click Recompare.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-13

1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data

1.6 Changing Project Settings● Changing Product Series
Changes the product series set in the project data being edited.

1 Click Change Product Series on the status bar.
The Change Product Series dialog box is displayed.

2 Select Product Series, Type Number, and Installation, and then click OK.
The Destination path for Convert dialog box is displayed.

3 Specify the save location and file name, and then click Save.
The data conversion process begins.

4 When the data is finished being converted, click Close.

Color settings (color data) are not converted.

3-14

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data

● Changing Communication Drivers
This section shows how to change the communication driver set in the project data being edited.

1 Click Change Communication Driver on the status bar.
The Change Communication Driver dialog box is displayed.

3
Project

2 Select Manufacturer, Protocol, and Connection, and then click OK.
The confirmation message is displayed.

3 Check the message, and then click OK.
The Destination path for Convert dialog box is displayed.

4 Specify the save location and file name, and then click Save.
The data conversion process begins.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-15

1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data

5 When the data is finished being converted, click Close.

If there are no devices that correspond to the external device used in the current project data after
changing the communication driver, the items set with those devices are blank.

3-16

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data

1.7 Closing Project Data
You can close the project data being edited.
Click, and then click Close.

3
Project
If the project data being edited has not been saved, a confirmation message for saving the project data isdisplayed.

• Click Yes to save the project data and close it.
• Click No to close the project data without saving changes.
• Click Cancel to stop saving the project data.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-17

2 Project Settings Configuration Procedure

2

Project Settings Configuration Procedure
The Project Settings dialog box is used to configure Touch operations and functions for the project overall.
This section describes the configuration procedure for project settings.

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.
The Project Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

3-18

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3

Project Settings Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the Project Settings dialog box.

3

3.1 System Tab

Project

The System tab is used to configure Touch operations.

■ Screen No. Format
Selects the type of data to use for the System Area 1 Display screen number (address+0) as BCD or BIN.
Default Screen: Specifies the screen number of the Base Screen to display first when the Touch is turned on (0 to3000). When 0 is specified, the Touch is in the screen waiting state. Write a screen number toSystem Area 1 Display screen number (address+0) or specify the default screen number from 1 to3000.
■ Start Time (sec)Specifies the time from when the Touch power is turned on until communications start with the external device (0 to9999 seconds).
■ Auto Backlight OFF
Select this check box to turn off the backlight when the Touch is untouched for an extended period of time. To turnon the backlight, touch the screen or write 1 to System Area 1 Auto Backlight OFF bit (address+1, bit 5) or System
Area 1 Screen display bit (address+1, bit 7).
Time (min):Specifies the time from when the Touch is last used to when the backlight isturned off (1 to 9999).

Light ON with Screen Changing:

When the backlight is turned off with this function, select this check box to turn on
the backlight when the screen is switched.
This option can only be configured when the Auto Backlight OFF check box isselected.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-19

3 Project Settings Dialog Box■ Touch Sound
Select this check box to play a sound when the screen is pressed.
Control by Device*1:

Select this check box to control the touch sound with a value of device.
This option can only be configured when Touch Sound is selected.
(Device):Specifies the word device that controls the touch sound.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings”
on page 2-61.
The control over a touch sound with a value of device is as follows.
0: Do not play the touch sound.
1: Play the touch sound.
2: Play a shortened touch sound.

■ Enable MaintenanceSelect this check box to display the maintenance screen during operation. The methods for displaying themaintenance screen are as follows.
Press the upper-left corner of the Touch screen for three seconds or more.
If the Base Screen is switched before three seconds have elapsed, the load operation for the maintenance screen will
be canceled. Please press the screen again.
Touch
Press and holdthree or more seconds■ Use Large Font
Select this check box to display text on the Touch in high-quality fonts. The Japanese or European font is replacedwith the high-quality fonts depending on the magnification.
To use high-quality fonts, the fonts must be downloaded to the Touch at the same time as the project. To download
fonts, click Options in the Download dialog box to display the Options dialog box. Select the Download additional
fonts check box, select the check boxes of the high-quality fonts to use (Japanese large font (First standard),
Japanese large font (Second standard), European large font), and then click OK.
For details on high-quality fonts, refer to Chapter 2 “High-quality Fonts” on page 2-9.
■ Enable Two-point Push
Select this check box to enable two-point push for touch switches. When two-point push is enabled, the bottom
switch and the switch above it operate in order.
On an analog touch panel, this function operates two overlapping switches when the two are pressed. This is not afunction to simultaneously operate two touch switches when they are both pressed.

■ Enable Low Battery Warning
Select this check box to display a warning when the backup battery is dead.
■ Show script error*1
Select this check box to display an error message on the screen when a script error occurs.
Script error information is saved to the HMI special registers (LSD 52 and LSD 53). For details, refer to
Chapter 20 “1.4 Script Error of HMI Function” on page 20-4.
■ Blink #TP/#CP on the Touch screen when the value in TP/CP is modified
Select this check box to flash the message "TP/CP" on the screen when the preset value of the timmer or the counterin control devices change. For details on "TP/CP" displayed on the screen, refer to Chapter 30 “ TP/CP” on page 30-2.
*1 Advanced mode only

3-20

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box■ System Language
Selects the display language for the Maintenance Screen, Device Monitor, Adjust Brightness Screen*2, and Adjust
Brightness/Contrast Screen*3 as English or Japanese.
For details, refer to Chapter 28 “1 Maintenance Screen” on page 28-1.

■ Storage Method of String Data*1
Selects the handling method for text entered with the Character Input and values of devices read by the Message Display.
from Upper byte:

The values of devices are read from and written to the upper byte.
Example: When the text ABCDE is entered with the Character Input and written to thedestination device LDR100
DeviceLDR100LDR101LDR102

Stored value
Upper byte
Lower byte
'A' = 41 (hex)'B' = 42 (hex)'C' = 43 (hex)'D' = 44 (hex)'E' = 45 (hex)0
NULL terminating characterfrom Lower byte:

The values of devices are read from and written to the lower byte.
Example: When the text ABCDE is entered with the Character Input and written to thedestination device LDR100
DeviceLDR100LDR101LDR102

Stored value
Upper byte
Lower byte
'B' = 42 (hex)'A' = 41 (hex)'D' = 44 (hex)'C' = 43 (hex)0'E' = 45 (hex)
NULL terminating character

When handling strings, 0 is written to the device as the NULL terminating character and treated as the endof the string.
■ Storage Method of 32-bit Numerical Data*1
Selects the handling method for the values of devices when BIN32(+), BIN32(+/-), BCD8, or float32 is selected
for Data Type from the following.
This setting only applies to word devices. When the bit devices in control devices are handled as words, this setting isalways from Lower word.
from Upper word (Excludes bit devices handled as words):
Values of the word device are read from and written to the upper word.
Example: When Data Type for the Numerical Input is BIN32(+) and the numerical value
12345678 (hex) was entered and written to destination device LDR100
DeviceLDR100LDR101from Lower word:

Stored value
1234 (hex)5678 (hex)Upper word
Lower word

For word devices and bit devices handled as words, values of devices are read from andwritten to the lower word.
Example: When Data Type for the Numerical Input is BIN32(+) and the numerical value
12345678 (hex) was entered and written to destination device LDR100
DeviceLDR100LDR101

Stored value
5678 (hex)1234 (hex)Upper word
Lower word

*1 Advanced mode only
*2 Color LCD models only
*3 Monochrome LCD models only

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-21

3Project■ Start from 0 in Always Entry Mode of Numerical Input*1
Select this check box to display 0 when a Numerical Input that has the Always Entry Mode check box selected on
the General tab is displayed on the screen. When this check box is cleared, the value of device is displayed.
This option is reflected for all Numerical Inputs configured in the project.

3 Project Settings Dialog Box■ Execution Time of Control Function (msec)
Specifies the execution time for control function (5 to 1,000).
For details, refer to Chapter 12 “Execution Period” on page 12-2.
■ Use System Area
The System Area is an area of predetermined devices to control the screen, communicate error and time information
between the Touch and the external device. Select this check box to use the System Area. For details, refer to“System Area” on page 3-23.
Device:Specifies the word device to use as the System Area. The System Area is allocated starting from theconfigured device address.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Use System Area 3, 4:

Select this check box to use System Area 3 and 4.

Clear Keypad bit in System Area automatically*1:

Select this check box to automatically set the System Area 2
Numerical Input setting and Character Input setting bits to 0 after
they have been set to 1.
The System Area 2 bits cleared by this function are as follows.
Numerical Input setting complete (address+3, bit 0)
Numerical Input setting cancel (address+3, bit 1)
Character Input setting complete (address+3, bit 5)
Character Input setting cancel (address+3, bit 6)■ Blinking Cycle
Selects the blinking cycle (displaying a drawing object by switching it on and off at a fixed interval) as 1.0 sec or 0.5
sec.
■ Watch Dog*1
Select this check box to monitor whether or not the Touch and the external device are communicating by writing a set
value (00FF (hex)) at a fixed interval.
Device:Specifies the word device to write the value.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Time (sec):

Specifies the interval to write the value (1 to 65535).

■ Disable Switch*1
Select this check box to enable and disable touch switches with a value of device.
Touch switches are enabled when the value of device is 1. They are disabled when the value of device is 0.
Device:Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device that is read to enable or disable touch switches.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

■ Use Device Cache*1
Select this check box to execute processing by reading all the values of external devices configured for a screen whenswitching the Base Screen or when displaying a Popup Screen. On the Touch, written values are reflected regardlessof this option.
■ Start Part with synchronous*1
Select this check box to operate commands and HMI Special Internal Relays LSM1, LSM2, LSM3, and LSM5 after
reading all the values of external devices configured on the screen.
When this check box is cleared, all processing is immediately executed when the screen is displayed.

*1 Advanced mode only

3-22

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box● System Area
Overview
The area of predetermined devices to control the screen and communicate error information and time information
between the Touch and the external device is called the System Area.
The System Area on the Touch is as follows.
System Area

Number of word addresses

3

User Access2

Read and write

System Area 2

2

Write

System Area 3

4

Read

System Area 4

4

Write

Project

System Area 1

To use System Area 1 and 2, select the Use System Area check box on the Project Settings dialog box. To use
System Area 3 and 4, select the Use System Area 3, 4 check box.
Specify the word device to use as the System Area in Device to allocate the System Area starting at the configured
device address.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
Example: When Device is configured as LDR100(Starting address) LDR100+1 LDR101

System Area 1+2 LDR102+3 LDR103

System Area 2+4 LDR104+5 LDR105+6 LDR106+7 LDR107+8 LDR108+9 LDR109+10 LDR110+11 LDR111

System Area 3

System Area 4

System Area 1
This area configures the Touch display, beep, and clearing bits.
Address+0Bit

0 to 15

Function

Display screen number

Description
This bit stores the number of the screen being displayed. Write avalue to this bit to change the screen to that number. Immediately
after the power is turned on, the value configured by Default
Screen in the Project Settings dialog box is stored here.
If the screen number does not exist in the project data, an error
message (No screen data) is displayed. However, when 0 is written
to this bit, the screen is not switched and no error message isdisplayed.
This bit stores the illumination state of the backlight. Write a value tothis bit to change the state.

0

Backlight

0:Off
Turns the backlight off.

1:

On
Turns the backlight on.

This bit stores the screen blink state (1 sec. cycle). Write a value tothis bit to change the state. This bit is 0 immediately after the poweris turned on.

+1

1

Blink backlight (1 sec. cycle)0:

Do not blink
Stop blinking the screen and turn it on.

1:

Blink
Blinks the screen in one second intervals.
When Blink backlight (1 sec. cycle) (address+1, bit 1) and Blinkbacklight (0.5 sec. cycle) (address+1, bit 2) are both 1, thescreen blinks at one second intervals.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-23

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

Address

Bit

Function

Description
This bit stores the screen blink state (0.5 sec. cycle). Write a value tothis bit to change the state. This bit is 0 immediately after the poweris turned on.

2

Blink backlight(0.5 sec. cycle)0:

Do not blink
Stop blinking the screen and turn it on.

1:

Blink
Blinks the screen in 0.5 second intervals.
When Blink backlight (1 sec. cycle) (address+1, bit 1) and Blinkbacklight (0.5 sec. cycle) (address+1, bit 2) are both 1, thescreen blinks at one second intervals.

This bit stores the color of backlight. Write a value to this bit tochange the color.
Monochrome LCD models

3 to 4

Backlight color

00:

Reserved

01:

White

10:

Red

11:

Pink

Color LCD models
01:

White

00, 10 and 11: Reserved
This bit stores whether or not the function to automatically turn off
the backlight is enabled when the Auto Backlight OFF check box isselected in the Project Settings dialog box. Write a value to this bit tochange the state. This bit turns 0 immediately after power is turned
on.
+1

5

Auto Backlight OFF

0:

EnabledAutomatically turns off the backlight when the Touch is unused
for an extended period of time.

1:

Disabled
Does not automatically turn off the backlight when the Touchis unused for an extended period of time. The backlight turns
on if the value changes to 1 when the backlight is off.

This bit stores the beep state. Write a value to this bit to change thestate. This bit turns 0 immediately after power is turned on.
6

0:

Stop
Stops continuous beeping.

1:

Beep
Starts continuous beeping.

7

Screen display

8

Reserved

9

Clear error

Write 1 to this bit to clear the error information bit (System Area 2
address+2). This bit automatically changes to 0 when processing isfinished.

10

Numerical Input settingclear

Write 1 to this bit to clear the Numerical Input setting complete bit(System Area 2 address+3, bit 0) and the Numerical Input setting
cancel bit (System Area 2 address+3, bit 1). This bit automaticallychanges to 0 when processing is finished.

11

Character Input settingclear

Write 1 to this bit to clear the Character Input setting complete bit(System Area 2 address+3, bit 5) and the Character Input setting
cancel bit (System Area 2 address+3, bit 6). This bit automaticallychanges to 0 when processing is finished.

12 to 15

3-24

Beep

The function is the same as for Backlight (address+1, bit0)

Reserved

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

System Area 2This area stores Touch states and error information. These bits turn 0 immediately after power is turned on.
Address

Bit
0 to 2

Description

Reserved

3

Communication error

4

Reserved

3This bit changes to 1 when a communication error occurs incommunication with external device using Serial Interface 1(SIO1).

5

Arithmetic error

This bit changes to 1 when executing the following arithmetic
operations.
• A value other than 0 to 9 is used when the data type is BCD4
or BCD8• Dividing by zero
• When there is an inconsistency in the bar chart maximum,
minimum, or origin setting, or the full range is 0
• When there is an inconsistency in the line chart maximum,
minimum, or origin setting, or the full range is 0

6

Device range error

This bit changes to 1 when writing a value to a device that falls
outside its range or when exceeding the restrictions on thenumber of configured devices.

7

Clock IC error

This bit changes to 1 when the Touch internal clock stops.

8, 9

Reserved

10

Script error

This bit changes to 1 when an error occurs during script
execution. Error details are stored in HMI Special Data Registers
LSD52 and LSD53. For details, refer to Chapter 20 “1.4 Script
Error of HMI Function” on page 20-4.

11

USB flash drive access error

If an error occurs when accessing an inserted USB flash drive,the value of this bit becomes 1.

12, 13

Reserved
This bit changes to 1 when the backup battery is dead or low
and the data sampled by the log functions and the HMI Keep
Registers and HMI Keep Relays are cleared.

14

Backup data error

15

Reserved

0

Numerical Input setting
complete

This bit changes to 1 when finished entering a numerical value
with the Numerical Input. Write 0 to Numerical Input setting
clear (address+1, bit 10) to clear this bit.

1

Numerical Input setting
cancelThis bit changes to 1 when entering a numerical value with the
Numerical Input was canceled. Write 0 to Numerical Input
setting clear (address+1, bit 10) to clear this bit.

2

Backlight auto off running

The value of this bit changes to 1 when Auto Backlight OFF isconfigured and the backlight was turned off by this function. To
configure Auto Backlight OFF, select the Auto Backlight OFF
check box on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
This bit automatically changes to 0 when the backlight turns on.

3

Reserved

4

Transferring recipe

This bit changes to 1 when transferring recipe data. This bit
automatically changes to 0 when the transfer is finished.

5

Character Input setting
complete

This bit changes to 1 when finished entering text with theCharacter Input. Write 0 to Character Input setting clear(address+1, bit 11) to clear this bit.

6

Character Input setting cancel

This bit changes to 1 when entering text with the Character
Input is canceled. Write 0 to Character Input setting clear(address+1, bit 11) to clear this bit.

+3

7 to 15

Reserved

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-25

Project+2Function3 Project Settings Dialog Box

System Area 3This area is for changing the Touch internal clock data.
Address
+4
+5
+6

+7

Bit

Function

Description

0 to 7Clock data MonthEnter Month (01 to 12) as a 2 digit BCD.

8 to 15

Clock data Year

Enter Year (00 to 99) as a 2 digit BCD.

0 to 7Clock data HourEnter Hour (00 to 23) as a 2 digit BCD.

8 to 15

Clock data Day

Enter Day (01 to 31) as a 2 digit BCD.

0 to 7Clock data Second

Enter Second (00 to 59) as a 2 digit BCD.

8 to 15

Clock data MinuteEnter Minute (00 to 59) as a 2 digit BCD.

0 to 14

Reserved

Enter 0 in the reserved area.

15

UpdateWrite 1 to this bit to write the entered data (address+4 to +6, bits
0 to 15) to the Touch internal clock data.

When the value of the update bit (address+7, bit 15) becomes 1, the clock data is updated as a whole.
Year, month, day, hour, minute, and second cannot be set individually.
System Area 4This area reads the Touch internal clock data in one minute intervals.
Address

Bit

Function

0 to 7Clock data Month

These bits store the current Month (01 to 12) value as a 2 digit
BCD.

8 to 15

Clock data Year

These bits store the current Year (00 to 99) value as a 2 digit
BCD.

0 to 7Clock data Hour

These bits store the current Hour (00 to 23) value as a 2 digit
BCD.

8 to 15

Clock data Day

These bits store the current Day (01 to 31) value as a 2 digit
BCD.

0 to 7

Reserved

8 to 15

Clock data Minute

These bits store the current Touch internal clock data Minute (00to 59).

0 to 3Clock data Day of Week

These bits store the current Day of Week value as a 2 digit BCD.
00: Sunday
01: Monday
02: Tuesday
03: Wednesday
04: Thursday
05: Friday
06: Saturday

4 to 15

Reserved

+8

+9

+10

+11

3-26

Description

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.2 Communication Interface Tab
The Communication Interface tab is used to configure the functions used by the Touch communication interfaces.

3
Project■ Interface Configuration
It displays the communication interfaces and Protocols to use. The settings in the Interface Settings changes
according to the selected item from this list. The supported Protocols for each communication interface are as follows.
ProtocolItem

Communication Interface

User
MaintenanceCommunication
Communication
1 to 3External Device
Communication

O/I Link
MasterO/I Link
Slave

RS232C

YES

NO

NO

YES

NO

RS422/485

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

Port

Serial Interface

Ethernet

Ethernet Interface

YES

NO

NO

YES

YES

USB2

USB Interface TypeA

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

USB1

USB Interface Mini-B

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-27

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

Functions Available with the Serial Interface
The following functions can be used with the serial interface.
• Barcode reader connection
 Refer to Chapter 22 “5 User Communication” on page 22-7.
Functions Available with the Ethernet Interface
The following functions can be used with the Ethernet interface.
• Online Refer to Chapter 23 “Online Function” on page 23-1.
• Debug Refer to Chapter 24 “Monitor Function” on page 24-1.
Functions Available with the USB Interface
The following functions can be used with a USB interface.
• Online Refer to Chapter 23 “Online Function” on page 23-1.
• Debug Refer to Chapter 24 “Monitor Function” on page 24-1.
• Barcode reader connection
 Refer to Chapter 22 “5 User Communication” on page 22-7.
■ Interface Settings
The items that can be configured vary based on the communication interface selected under Interface
Configuration.
When Port is selected under Interface Configuration

3-28

Protocol:Selects the Protocol to use with the serial interface (RS232C) from the following.
N/A, External Device Communication, User Communication 1, User Communication 2,
User Communication 3
Selects the protocol to use with the serial interface (RS422/485) from the following.
N/A, External Device Communication, O/I Link Master, O/I Link Slave, User
Communication 1, User Communication 2, User Communication 3
This communication interface is not used when N/A is selected.

Baud Rate:

Selects the communication speed with the external device from the following.
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, 187500
The baud rate that can be configured varies based on Protocol.

Data Bits:

Selects the data length as 7 or 8.
This option can only be configured when External Device Communication, User
Communication 1, User Communication 2, or User Communication 3 is selected forProtocol.

Stop Bits:

Selects the stop bits as 1 or 2.
This option can only be configured when External Device Communication, User
Communication 1, User Communication 2, or User Communication 3 is selected forProtocol.

Parity:Selects the parity from the following.
None, Odd, Even
This option can only be configured when External Device Communication, User
Communication 1, User Communication 2, or User Communication 3 is selected forProtocol.

Flow Control:

Selects the flow control method as None or ER according to the external device being used.
This option can only be configured when External Device Communication is selected forProtocol.

Serial Interface:

Selects the standard for the serial interface to use from the following.
RS232C, RS422/485 2-wire, RS422/485 4-wire
RS422/485 4-wire can only be configured when User Communication 1, User
Communication 2, or User Communication 3 is selected for Protocol.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

When Ethernet is selected under Interface Configuration
Example: To communicate with two Touchs and a computer via Ethernet
Set Touch A, Touch B, and the computer all to the same values: subnet mask 255.255.255.0, default
gateway 192.168.0.24.
Set the IP addresses to values that do not conflict: Touch A IP address 192.168.0.1, Touch B IP address
192.168.0.2, computer IP address 192.168.0.3.
Local network
Touch A

Touch B
External device

IP address
Subnet mask
Default gateway

ComputerExternal device

192.168.0.2
255.255.255.0
192.168.0.24

192.168.0.1
255.255.255.0
192.168.0.24

Project

Ethernet communication

192.168.0.3
255.255.255.0
192.168.0.24• Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway according to the local network environment being
used. When Automatically obtain the IP address is selected, the network settings are automaticallyassigned from the DHCP server on the local network environment being used.
• Settings assigned from the DHCP server can be checked on the Top Page in the System Mode.
• When Automatically obtain the IP address is selected, it make take some time to acquire the
network settings. If the download fails, increase the timeout time on the Home tab, in the Projectgroup, in Comm.Setup. For details, refer to Chapter 23 “1.3 Change Communication Settings” on page
23-5.
Protocol:N/A or External Device Communication. Varies based on theCommunication Driver selected for Protocol.

Automatically obtain the IP address (DHCP).: Automatically sets the network when connected to a network.
Use the following IP address:

Manually specifies the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
IP Address:

Specifies the IP address. (Default: 0.0.0.0)
The format is “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. “xxx” stands for anumeric value from 0 to 255.
When connecting multiple devices to the same
network, make sure to assign each device a unique IP
address.

Subnet Mask:

Specifies the subnet mask. (Default: 0.0.0.0)
The format is “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. “xxx” stands for anumeric value from 0 to 255.
This value must be the same for all devices.

Default Gateway: Specifies the default gateway. (Default: 0.0.0.0)
The format is “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. “xxx” stands for anumeric value from 0 to 255.
Set this value when using a router. Leave the value
blank when not required.
Forbid Maintenance Communication:

Select this check box to prohibit maintenance communication via
Ethernet communication.

About Networking Terminology
IP Address:

The number allocated to identify devices connected to an IP network suchas the Internet or an intranet. The IP address is the address of eachindividual device on a network.

Subnet Mask:

The subnet mask is used to indicate the position of the division between the
network address portion and the host address portion of an IP address.

Default Gateway:

The device such as a computer or a router that represents the gateway used
when accessing devices outside the network to which the device belongs.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3

3-29

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

When Protocol1, Protocol2, or Protocol3 is selected for Ethernet under Interface Configuration
Protocol:Selects the user communication to configure for the selected Protocol from the following.
User Communication 1, User Communication 2, User Communication 3

Operation Mode:
Selects the operation mode when performing user communication with the Ethernet interface.
TCP Client:

The Touch operates as a TCP client and the external device operates as a TCP server. The
Touch connects to the TCP server and sends and receives data.

TCP Server:

The Touch operates as a TCP server and the external device operates as a TCP client. The
Touch creates a listening port as a TCP server and waits for connections from TCP clients.
After a connection, it sends and receives data with the TCP client.

Target:Configures the IP address and port number for the external device.
These options can only be configured when TCP Client is selected for Operation Mode.
IP Address: Specifies the IP address for the target.
The format is “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. “xxx” stands for a numeric value from 0 to
255.
When connecting multiple devices to the same network, make sure to assign
each device a unique IP address.
Port No.:Specifies the port number for the target (0 to 65535).

Change IP Address and Port Number by Device:
Select this check box and specify a word device to change the target's IP
address and port number during operation. You can only specify an internal
device. During the start of operation, the Touch writes the values configured
by IP Address and Port No. to this device. After the start of operation, thevalue of device is read and the target is changed.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-61.
Example: When IP Address is set to 192.168.1.1, Port No. is 2105, and thedevice is LDR100
LDR100LDR101LDR102LDR103LDR104

Touch:

2105
192
168
1
1

Port number

IP address

Configures the Touch listening port number.
These options can only be configured when TCP Server is selected for Operation Mode.
Port No.

Specifies the Touch listening port number (0 to 65535).
The port numbers that cannot be used are as follows.
• Port numbers already used by the Touch: port number 2537 (formaintenance communication), 2538 (for pass-through), 2101 (for FC4A
direct connection pass-through)• When MODBUS/TCP Server is selected for Communication Driver,Port Number on the displayed Communication Driver Extension tab

3-30

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box• The connection status for TCP clients and the TCP server can be checked with the value of the HMI
Special Data Registers (LSD). The connection is disconnected when 0. The connection is connected when1.
LSD67-0: Connection status for User Communication 1 set to Ethernet interface

3

LSD67-1: Connection status for User Communication 2 set to Ethernet interface

Project

LSD67-2: Connection status for User Communication 3 set to Ethernet interface• To forcibly disconnect the connection with TCP clients and the TCP server, set the value of the HMI
Special Data Registers (LSD) from 0 to 1.
LSD68-0: User Communication 1 set to Ethernet interface
LSD68-1: User Communication 2 set to Ethernet interface
LSD68-2: User Communication 3 set to Ethernet interface• For TCP client and TCP server, make a 1:1 connection between the Touch and the external device for one
user communication setting.
• When the Change IP Address and Port Number by Device check box is selected, the changed IP
address and port number are reflected when data is next sent.
When USB2 is selected under Interface Configuration
Protocol:Selects the Protocol used by the USB interface Type A from the following.
N/A, User Communication 1, User Communication 2, User Communication 3
This communication interface is not used when N/A is selected.

When USB1 is selected under Interface Configuration
Protocol:N/A is displayed.
This communication interface is used for maintenance communication.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-31

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.3 Communication Driver Tab
The Communication Driver tab is used to configure the communication driver for the external device configured in
the current project data.

■ Product Series
Shows the Touch model configured in the current project data.
■ Manufacturer
Shows the external device manufacturer configured in the current project data.
■ Protocol
Shows the communication driver name configured in the current project data.
■ External Device
These options configure the communication driver to use. For details, refer to the "External Device Setup Manual".
Transmission Wait (x 10 msec): Specifies the transmission interval for communication commands (0 to 255).

3-32

Time Out (x 100 msec):

Specifies the time to wait for a response from the external device (1 to 255).

Retry Cycles:

Specifies the number of times to execute a reconnection when the Touch cannot
communicate with the external device. When the number of reconnect attempts
reaches the number of times set here, a communication error is displayed.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box■ Ignore communication errors and continue operation
Select this check box to continue Touch operation even when a communication error occurs.
This option is only displayed when the communication driver Connection is 1:N Communication.
Display error message:

Select this check box to display an error message (communication error) when acommunication error occurs and operation continues. Ack is displayed on the error
message (communication error).

Auto retry:

Select this check box to automatically retry communication from the Touch to the station
number where the communication error occurred when a communication error occurs
and operation continues.
All other communication stops while retrying.

To manually retry communication, clear the Auto retry check box.
To retry all station numbers, write 1 in bit 1 (initialize) of the device address configured by Batch
monitoring the communication error information for all Station Numbers.
To individually retry communication, write 1 in bit 0 (connection setting) of the device address configured by
Monitoring communication error information for each station number, individually.
Batch monitoring the communication error information for all Station Numbers:
Specifies the device that stores communication error information for all station numbers.
Only the HMI devices can be configured for this option.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
The information stored as error information is as follows. For details, refer to the"External Device Setup Manual".
• Initialization• Conditions under which the error occurred• Read error log• Write error log
Monitoring communication error information for each station number, individually:
Specifies the device that stores communication error information for each station
number. Only the HMI devices can be configured for this option.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
This error information utilizes a maximum of 256 devices. Use caution so that the usedaddresses do not overlap with other addresses.
The information stored as error information is as follows. For details, refer to the"External Device Setup Manual".
• Connection settings• Conditions under which the error occurred• Read error log• Write error log

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-33

3Project

When the Ignore communication errors and continue operation check box iscleared, Ack is not displayed on the error message.

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.4 Communication Driver Network Tab
The Communication Driver Network tab is used to configure the information for external devices connected by
Ethernet communication. This tab is displayed when a communication driver is selected that supports Ethernet
communication.

■ Network List
Edits the settings for the external devices.
Station No.:Shows the station number of external device. Double clicking the cell displays the Communication
Driver Network Settings dialog box.

IP Address:

Shows the IP address of the external device. (Default: 192.168.0.1)
Double clicking the cell allows you to specify the external device's IP address.
The format is “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. “xxx” stands for a numeric value from 0 to 255.
When connecting multiple devices to the same network, make sure to assign each device a unique IP
address.

Port No.:Shows the port number of external device. (Default: 2101)
Double clicking the cell allows you to specify the external device's port number (0 to 65535).

■ EditConfigures the IP address and port number for the selected station number. Select a station number, and then click
this button to display the Communication Driver Network Settings dialog box.
■ Clear
Returns the settings for the selected station number to the defaults.
You can change the IP address of the station numbers for the external devices using the System Screen. In
the Top Page in the System Screen, press Initial Setting, Comm. I/F, Ext. IP Address in order.

3-34

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box● Communications Driver Network Settings Dialog Box
To communicate with an external device by using Ethernet communication, specify the Ethernet settings (IP address,
port number) for the destination external device. The settings other than IP Address and Port vary based on theexternal device. For details, refer to the External Device Setup Manual.
Example: MODBUS/TCP Client is selected for Communication Driver3
Project■ IP Address
Specifies the IP address of the destination external device.
The format is “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. “xxx” stands for a numeric value from 0 to 255.
When connecting multiple devices to the same network, make sure to assign each device a unique IP address.
■ PortSpecifies the port number (0 to 65,535) of the destination external device.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-35

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.5 Communication Driver Extension Tab
The Communication Driver Extension tab is used to configure the communication driver extension settings.
These settings vary based on the external device. This tab is displayed when communication driver extension settings
are required. For details, refer to the "External Device Setup Manual".

3-36

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.6 O/I Link Tab
The O/I Link tab configures the slave stations to connect to when the Touch is used as the O/I Link Communication
master. It configures the O/I Link station when the Touch is used as a slave. For details, refer to Chapter 22 “2 O/I
Link Communication” on page 22-3. These options can only be configured when O/I Link Master or O/I Link
Slave is selected for Protocol under Interface Settings on the Communication Interface tab.

3
Project■ O/I Link Type
Selects the slave station (Slave1 to Slave15).
This option can only be configured when O/I Link Slave is selected for Protocol under Interface Settings on theCommunication Interface tab.
■ Slave Settings
Select the check boxes for the slave stations to connect to.
This option can only be configured when O/I Link Master is selected for Protocol under Interface Settings on
the Communication Interface tab.
The slave stations to connect to when the Touch is used as an O/I Link Communication Master are enabled
after the project is downloaded. The slave station number when the Touch is used as a slave is also enabled
after the project is downloaded.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-37

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.7 User Communication Tab
The User Communication tab is used to configure communication with external devices such as barcode readers.
For details, refer to Chapter 22 “5 User Communication” on page 22-7. This option can only be configured when User
Communication 1, User Communication 2, or User Communication 3 is selected for Protocol underInterface Settings on the Communication Interface tab.

■ Settings
Edits the user communication settings. You can use up to three user communication settings.
User Communication:Shows the user communication number.

Protocol Name:

Shows Protocol Name configured in the User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box.

■ EditRegisters or changes the selected user communication settings. Select a user communication number, and then click
this button to display the User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box.
■ Browse
Selects a Protocol to use as user communication with Protocol Manager. Click this button to display Protocol Manager.
■ Remove
Removes the Protocol selected under User Communication from the list.

3-38

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box■ Protocol
Shows the Protocol defined as the selected user communication.
Shows the number for managing the Protocol settings. Double clicking the cell displays theCommand Settings dialog box.

Type:

Shows the type of command. Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box.

Completed:

Shows the send or receive complete report device. Double clicking the cell displays theCommand Settings dialog box.

Status:Shows the destination device for the send or receive size and error information. Double clicking
the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box.

Trigger Type:Shows the trigger type to execute the script. Double clicking the cell displays the Command
Settings dialog box.

Trigger Condition:

The displayed content varies based on Trigger Type.
Rising-edge, Falling-edge, While ON, or While OFF: Shows the bit device that is thecondition. Double clicking the cell
displays the Command Settings
dialog box.
While satisfying the condition or Satisfy thecondition:Shows the conditional expression.

Fixed Period:

Shows the period.

Comment:

Shows the command comment. Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog
box.

Size:

Shows the command size in bytes. Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings
dialog box.

■ Command
Shows the command settings for the selected Protocol. Double clicking the cell displays the Data Settings dialog box.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-39

3ProjectNo.:3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.8 External Memory Tab
The External Memory tab is used to configure the destination folder on the external memory inserted in the Touch.

■ External Memory Folder
Enter the folder name for the folder in the external memory to use on the Touch within 8 alphanumeric charactersusing upper-case alphabetic characters (A to Z) and numbers (0 to 9). The default External Memory Folder name is“HGDATA01” .
All the data sampled with the log functions is saved in this External Memory Folder. For details on the external
memory, refer to Chapter 26 “1 USB Flash Drives” on page 26-1.
• You cannot use the following characters in the folder name.
\ / : , ;* ? “ < > |• After operation starts, the folders created in the External Memory Folder and the file names cannot bechanged.
■ Remove Files
Select this check box to erase the files saved in the External Memory Folder.
All Alarm Log files:

Select this check box to erase all the Alarm Log data saved in folder. The folder name is"ALARMLOG".

All Data Log files:

Select this check box to erase all the Data Log data saved in folder. The folder name is"DATALOG".

All Operation Log files:

Select this check box to erase all the Operation Log data saved in all folders. The folder
name is "OPERATIONLOG".

Trigger Device:

Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition to delete the files.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

3-40

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.9 Autorun Tab
The Autorun tab is used to configure the USB flash drive autorun functions when inserted in the Touch. For details
on USB flash drives, refer to Chapter 26 “1 USB Flash Drives” on page 26-1.

3
Project■ Enable USB Autorun
Select this check box to enable the USB Autorun function.
The USB Autorun function automatically displays a menu screen from which the user can execute predefinedcommands when a USB flash drive is inserted in the Touch.
■ Open Popup Screen when USB flash drive is inserted
Select this check box to display a Popup Screen when a USB flash drive is inserted in the Touch.
Screen No.:
Coordinates X, Y:

Specifies the Popup Screen number (1 to 3015) to display when a USB flash drive is inserted in
the Touch.
Specifies the coordinates to display the Popup Screen.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the X and Y coordinates are the upper-leftcorner of the Popup Screen.
The units and range for the display coordinates are as follows.
Specify the coordinates in 1 dot units.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-41

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.10 Project Details Tab
The Project Details tab displays and configures project data information.

■ Project Name
Shows the current project name. To change the project name, enter a new project name. The maximum number is
50 characters.
You cannot use the following characters in the project name.
\/:,;*?“<>|■ Project Folder SizeShows the total size of the current project data.
■ Download Data SizeShows the total size of the data and the total size of only the image files when the current project data is
downloaded.
■ Location
Shows the save location for the current project data.
■ Created
Shows the date and time the current project data was created.
■ Modified
Shows the date and time the current project data was last saved.
■ Accessed
Shows the date and time the current project data was opened.
■ UserEnter the name of the creator. The maximum number is 40 characters.
■ Comment
Enter a comment for the project data. The maximum number is 40 characters.

3-42

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box■ Language
Selects the language to use for the system information from the following. This option is also reflected in the project
name displayed in the system information on the Touch's System Screen.
European, Japanese, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic
The display type for dates and times varies based on the selected language.

3

Japanese: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic: MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS

Project

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-43

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.11 Contents Tab
The Contents tab is used to enter a comment for the project data.

■ Description
Enter a comment for the project data. The maximum number is 511 characters. A newline is counted as two
characters.
The content in Description is erased when the project is uploaded.

3-44

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions

4

Special Functions
This chapter describes the Touch special functions, how to configure them, and examples of their use.

3

● Function List
Overview

Stop input

The ladder program or FBD program operation can be stopped with a
specified input.

Reset input

The values of the control devices can be cleared with a specified input.

Run/stop selection atmemory backup error

Whether to start or stop the ladder program or FBD program operation
when the Touch is powered up after the "keep" data in the RAM has
been lost can be specified.

Run/stop selection at powerup

Whether to start or stop the ladder program or FBD program operation
regardless of the M8000 status when the Touch is powered up can be
specified.

Keep and clear devices

Whether to clear or keep the device values, such as counter current
values, when the ladder program operation starts running can be
specified.

High-speed counter

The high-speed counters can be used to count input pulses from rotary
encoders or proximity switches regardless of the scan time.

Catch input

The catch input can be used to receive short pulses from sensors
regardless of the scan time.

Interrupt input

When a quick response to an external input is required, such as inpositioning control, the interrupt input can call a subroutine to execute
an interrupt program.

Frequency measurement

The pulse frequency of input signals to input terminals can be counted
regardless of the scan time.

Input filter

The input filter rejects short input pulses when the Touch is used with
input signals containing noises.

Analog input

Analog voltage inputs, such as inputs from pressure sensors, can beread and stored in special data registers as digital values.

Timer interrupt

When executing the same program repeatedly regardless of the scantime is required, the timer interrupt can call a subroutine to execute aninterrupt program at specified time interval.

Analog output

Analog values of voltage and current can be output.

Analog cartridge

Analog signals can be received or analog values can be output with theanalog cartridge attached to the Touch (transistor output type).

Ladder Monitor

Settings for running the Ladder Monitor on the LCD

Watchdog timer
settings

The watchdog timer monitors the operation and the watchdog timepreset value can be changed.

Daylight savings time

The internal clock can automatically be adjusted according to theconfigured daylight saving time period.

Remote I/O

The number of inputs and outputs can be expanded by connecting the
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite as remote I/O slave.

Clock function

The Touch can operate according to the current date and time and be
used in applications, such as lighting or air conditioning.

Setup location

Function area
settings

Instructions or FB

When the setting of control function is changed, save the project data. If project data is saved on
WindO/I-NV3, the setting of control function is also saved.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-45

Project

Function name

4 Special Functions

4.1 Function Area Settings Configuration Procedure
The function area settings are the environment settings for the Touch. The operation of the Touch when powered
and communication port settings are configured in Function Area Settings.
This section describes the configuration procedure for the Function Area Settings.

1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Control Function).

WindLDR starts.

2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click a button for special functions.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 Change the settings as necessary.

3-46

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions● Function Description
Run/Stop Control• Stop input• Reset input• Run/stop selection at memory backup error• Run/stop selection at power up
These functions keep or clear Control devices (the contents of memory) when a ladderprogram or FBD program starts operation. The values of the following devices can be
configured to be kept or cleared.

Input & Output
Configuration• Internal relays• Shift registers• Counters• Data registers
These options configure the special functions such as the external input filter settings andthe high-speed counter.

Cartridges• High-speed counter• Catch input• Interrupt input• Frequency measurement• Input filter• Analog input• Timer interrupt• Analog output
Configure the function to use the cartridge of the Touch.

LCD Settings• Analog cartridge
Configure the LCD settings for the Touch.

Self Diagnostic
Calendar & ClockConnection Settings• Ladder Monitor
These settings configure the watchdog timer that monitors the operating status of the
Touch.
The Touch is equipped with an internal clock and its calendar data (year, month, day, dayof the week) and clock data (hour, minute, second) which can be used in a ladder program
or FBD program. Daylight savings time can also be configured for the internal clock.
Configure the communication mode for using the remote I/O function with the Touch.
• Remote I/O Master

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-47

3Project

Memory Backup

These functions run or stop the ladder program or FBD program when the Touch is turned
on, when an error occurs, or when an external input turns on.

4 Special Functions

4.2 Stop Input
This section describes the function on how a ladder program or FBD program for the Touch can be stopped withexternal input.
● Function Description
This function stops execution of a ladder program or FBD program for the Touch by means of an external input, such as acontrol panel switch.
The normal external inputs of the Touch are set as stop inputs.
When a stop input is set to ON, the ladder program or FBD program is stopped during execution. When a stop input
is set to OFF, the ladder program or FBD program executes from the top.
RUN/Stop State

RUN
STOP

Start Control(M8000)ON
OFF
ON

Stop Input
OFF

*1

*2

The external inputs that can be set as stop inputs are I0 to I7.
While a reset input is ON, a ladder program or FBD program is stopped. For details of reset inputs, refer to“4.3 Reset Input” on page 3-49.
● Procedure
1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Control Function) .

WindLDR starts.

2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Run/Stop Control.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 Select the Use Stop Input check box.

4 Designate an external input (ex. I0) as a stop input.
5 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.
If I0 is set to ON after a ladder program or FBD program is downloaded, these programs will stop.
*1 Even when M8000 (start control) is OFF, if a stop input is OFF, the Touch will remain in the RUN state.
*2 Even when a stop input is OFF, since M8000 (start control) is OFF, the program will not go into RUN state.

3-48

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions

4.3 Reset Input
This section describes the function for clearing the values of the Touch devices by means of external input.
● Function Description
This function clears execution of the Touch control devices by means of an external input, such as a control panel
switch. The normal external inputs of the Touch are set as reset inputs.

To set the reset input to OFF and execute the ladder program or FBD program once again, it is necessary that M8000
is ON and that stop inputs are OFF (if a stop input is set).
If these conditions are not satisfied, then even if the reset input is OFF, program execution will remain stopped andthe ladder program or FBD program will not execute.
The external inputs that can be set as reset inputs are I0 to I7.
● Procedure

1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Control Function).

WindLDR starts.

2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Run/Stop Control.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 Select the Use Reset Input check box.

4 Designate an external input (ex. I1) as a reset input.
5 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.
If I1 is set to ON after a ladder program or FBD program is downloaded, these programs will stop and the value of thecontrol device will be cleared.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-49

Project

If a reset input is ON, the ladder program or FBD program stops during execution and all control devices and generalerrors are cleared, except for special internal relays and special data registers. When a reset input is set to OFF, theladder program or FBD program executes from the top.

3

4 Special Functions

The state of each data item at the time of RUN, STOP, and Reset are as follows.
Internal relays, Shiftregister bits, Counters,
and Data register values

Specialinternal
relay

Specialdata
register

Notmaintained
data
registerTimercurrent
value

Operation

OutputRUN

Programoperation

Programoperation

Programoperation

Programoperation

Programoperation

Programoperation

Programoperation

STOP

OFF

Maintained

Maintained

Refer toChapter 27.

Maintained

Maintained

Maintained

STOP → RUN

Maintained

Maintained

ClearedMaintained

Maintained

Maintained

Initialized

Reset (whenreset input isturned on)

OFF

ClearedClearedMaintained

Maintained

ClearedClearedPower OFFOFF

Maintained

Maintained

Refer toChapter 27.

Maintained

ClearedCleared

Keep
Clear
designation designation
range
range

Keep settings and clear settings for the internal relays, shift registers, counters, and data registers of control devices
are configured using the Function Area Settings tab. For details about keep settings and clear settings, refer to“4.6 Keep and Clear Control Devices” on page 3-53.

3-50

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions

4.4 Run/Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error
This section describes the function for setting the state of ladder programs or FBD programs when memory backup
error is occurred.

• Thanks to a lithium-ion battery the RUN/STOP (M8000) state of the Touch immediately before it ispowered OFF is retained, so when it is powered ON again, the Touch will operate in accordance with thispreserved RUN/STOP state.
• If the Touch is powered ON after this retained data is lost, following a long period of disuse, for example, amemory backup error occurs and the value of special internal relay M8000 (start control) is lost.
• The data backup period is approximately 30 days when the backup battery is fully charged. After the
backup period is exceeded, the retained data will be lost from the Touch.
• If a keep data error occurs when Run/Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error issues a STOP
instruction, the Touch stops running. To start operation of the Touch, set the Touch to RUN using the
Touch. For details, refer to Chapter 12 “Executing and Stopping Ladder Programs or FBD Programs” onpage 12-3.
• When a memory backup error occurs, an error code is stored in special data register D8005 (general errorcode). For details, refer to Chapter 30 “2.1 General Error Codes” on page 30-3.
● Procedure

1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Control Function) .

WindLDR starts.

2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Run/Stop Control.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 Click Run under the Run/Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error.

4 Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-51

3Project● Function Description
If the Touch is powered OFF and left unused for long periods, resulting in a depleted backup battery, values ofdevices, current time, and other data retained by the Touch are lost. If power is supplied to the Touch when it has
lost this retained data, a memory backup error occurs. The state of the ladder program or FBD program when such amemory backup error occurs can be selected.
If there is any risk of unforeseen actions occurring when the Touch is run while in this state (after memory backup
error is occurred), set to STOP. If the Touch is always operated regardless of whether a memory backup error occurs,
because there is no means to run ladder programs or FBD programs where it is located or for a similar reason, selected
to RUN.

4 Special Functions

4.5 Run/Stop Selection at Power Up
This section describes the function for selecting the state of ladder programs or FBD programs when the Touch isturned on.
● Feature Description
The state of ladder programs or FBD programs when the Touch is turned on is determined by the value of special
internal relay M8000 (start control).
Configuration

Operation

Keep Run/Stop State at Power
Down

Starts running the Touch with the ladder program or FBD program in the state at power
down when the Touch is powered up.

Run (M8000 is turned on)

Turns ON M8000 and starts running the Touch and the ladder program or FBD program
when the Touch is powered up.

Stop (M8000 is turned off)

Turns OFF M8000, starts running the Touch and stops the ladder program or FBD
program when the Touch is powered up.

• When the memory backup error occurs, the Touch is started or stopped according to Run/Stop
Selection at Memory Backup Error regardless of Run/Stop Selection at Power Up.
• Stop inputs and reset inputs have a higher priority than RUN/STOP Selection at Power Up.
● Procedure

1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Control Function).

WindLDR starts.

2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Run/Stop Control.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 Click Keep Run/Stop State at Power Down, Run or Stop under the Run/Stop Selection at Power Up.

4 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.

3-52

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions

4.6 Keep and Clear Control Devices
This section describes the function for retaining or clearing the Touch Control devices.

● Procedure

1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Control Function) .

WindLDR starts.

2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Memory Backup.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 Click the buttons under Internal Relay, Shift Register, Counter, and Data Register to Clear all, Keep all, or Keep/Clear
Specified Range as required.

To specify a clear/keep range, enter an upper limit and lower limit for the range.

4 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-53

3Project● Feature Description
Devices that can issue instructions to retain or clear data are internal relays, shift registers, counter current values,
and data registers. Relays and registers issued with clear instructions are cleared when operation starts. Values in the
powered OFF state are retained until power is turned on and operation starts.

4 Special Functions● Designation
The settings and actions for each control device are as follows.
■ Internal Relay (M)Configuration

Operation

Clear All

All internal relays are cleared when the Touch starts operation.

Keep AllThe states of all internal relays are retained while the Touch is powered OFF.

Keep Specified Range

The states of all internal relays are retained while the Touch is powered OFF.
Internal relays outside the specified range are cleared when operation starts.

• The default setting is Clear All.
■ Shift Register (R)Configuration

Operation

Clear AllAll shift registers are cleared when the Touch starts operation.

Keep AllThe states of all shift registers are retained while the Touch is powered OFF.

Keep Specified Range

The states of all shift registers are retained while the Touch is powered OFF.
Shift registers outside the specified range are cleared when operation starts.

• The default setting is Clear All.
■ Counter (C)Configuration

Operation

Keep AllCounter current values are retained when the Touch is powered OFF.

Clear AllAll counter current values are cleared when the Touch starts operation.

Clear Specified Range

Only counter current values within the specified range are cleared when the Touch
starts operation. Counter current values outside the specified range are retained.

• The default setting is Keep All.
■ Data Register (D)Configuration

Operation

Keep All

Data register values are retained when the Touch is powered OFF.

Clear AllAll data register values are cleared when the Touch starts operation.

Clear Specified Range

Only data register values within the specified range are cleared when the Touch starts
operation. Data register values outside the specified range are retained.

• The default setting is Keep All.
• Relays and registers specified under Clear All or Clear Specified Range are cleared when the Touch
starts operation. Values in the powered OFF state are retained until power is turned on and operation
starts.
• It is not possible to configure keep/clear settings for special data registers. This action is equivalent tothat of Keep All.
• It is not possible to configure keep/clear settings for special internal relays. For details about actions whenpower is cut or operation is stopped, refer to Chapter 27 “Special Internal Relay (M)” on page 27-5

3-54

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions

4.7 High-Speed Counter
This section describes the high-speed counter for counting high-speed pulses from devices such as rotary encoders
and proximity switches.

Ladder program:

WindLDR function area settings and settings for data registers, special internal relays, andspecial data registers

FBD program:

WindLDR function area settings and high-speed counter function block (HSC FB) settings
For details on the HSC FB, refer to Chapter 18 "The special FB" - "HSC (High-speed Counter)" in
the "SmartAXIS FBD Programming Manual".

Application example
This application example punches holes into a roll of paper at a regular interval.
The two pulses (A-phase, B-phase) that carry the phase difference output from the rotary encoder are counted by the
Touch two-phase high-speed counter.
When the current value reaches the preset value, the specified external output turns on and the perforator punches ahole in the roll of paper.
Paper roll
Paper feed roller
Perforator
Pulse motor

Rotaryencoder

Two-phase pulses

SmartAXIS

High-speed pulse input

Output when count matches

High-speed counter operation modes
The high-speed counter has the following two operation modes.
• Single-phase high-speed counter• Two-phase high-speed counter
High-speed counting modes
The high-speed counter has the following three counting modes.
• Adding counter (single-phase high-speed counter)• 2-edge count (two-phase high-speed counter)• 4-edge count (two-phase high-speed counter)
Example: The input allocation when external input group 1 is specified as a two-phase high-speed counter
External input

I0

I1

I2

↓

↓

↓

High-speed counterA-phaseB-phaseExternal clear input (Z-phase)

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-55

3Project● Feature Description
The high-speed counter is a function that counts high-speed pulses which cannot be read in the execution of a normal
ladder program or FBD program. The high-speed counter has a comparator function to compare the current value
and a preset value (target value). When the current value and the preset value match, an external output is turned onor an interrupt program is executed. However, the interrupt program can only be used when ladder program isselected as the programming language.
The high-speed counter has a single-phase high-speed counter and a two-phase high-speed counter.
To use the high-speed counter, function area settings, data registers, special internal relays, and special dataregisters must be configured.
To use the high-speed counter, the following settings are required.

4 Special Functions● High-speed Counter External Inputs
The 12-I/O type can only use a maximum of four single-phase high-speed counters and a maximum of one dualphase high-speed counter.
■ Single-phase high-speed counter
The 12-I/O type cannot use external inputs I0 and I1 as single-phase high-speed counters.
Group

1

2

3

4

5

External input

I0

I1

I2

I3

I4

I5

Single-phasehigh-speed
counter––

Pulse input

Pulse input

Pulse input

Pulse input■ Two-phase high-speed counter
External inputs I0/I1 (group 1) can be used as two-phase high-speed counters. External inputs I2 can be used asexternal clear inputs for group 1. In this situation, external inputs I2 cannot be used as single-phase high-speed
counters.
Group
External input
Two-phase
high-speed
counter1
I0

I1

Pulse input(A-phase)

Pulse input(B-phase)

2

3

4

5

I2

I3

I4

I5

–

–

–

External clear
input*1(Z-phase)*1 If not used as the external clear input (Z-phase), group 2 can be used as single-phase high-speed counters.

3-56

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions● High-Speed Counter Operation
The high-speed counter turns on an external output or executes an interrupt program when the current value
matches the preset value (target value).
The high-speed counter has two operation modes, single-phase high-speed counter and two-phase high-speed
counter.

3

For how to configure the function to turn on an external output, refer to “Comparison Actions” on page 3-59.

Group 2, group 3, group 4, group 5 single-phase high-speed counter• These groups only support adding counter.
• These groups support 10 kHz maximum pulse input and are capable of counting from 0 to 4,294,967,295 (32 bits).
• When the current value and the preset value match or an overflow occurs, an external output turns on or aninterrupt program is executed.
• These groups only support the reset input via a special internal relay. When the reset is executed, the current value
returns to the reset value specified by the special data registers.
Counting mode
Adding counter

Frequency
Group 2, 3, 4, 5: 10 kHz■ Two-phase high-speed counter
Group 1 two-phase high-speed counter• The two-phase high-speed counter counts by the phase difference between the A-phase and B-phase pulse input.
• These groups support 5 kHz maximum pulse input and are capable of counting from 0 to 4,294,967,295 (32 bits).
• Even higher speed counting is possible by specifying 2-edge count or 4-edge count.
• When the current value and the preset value match or an overflow or underflow occurs, an external output turns onor an interrupt program is executed.
• These groups support resetting the current value by the reset special internal relay or external clear input (Zphase). When the reset is executed, the current value returns to the reset value specified by the special dataregisters.
Group
Group 1Frequency
2-edge count: 5kHz
4-edge count: 2.5kHz

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-57

Project■ Single-phase high-speed counter4 Special Functions● Counting mode
The high-speed counter has the following three counting modes.
■ Adding counter (single-phase high-speed counter)
The adding counter counts up with the rise in pulse input.
Pulse input(I2, I3, I4, I5)

10

Current value

11

12

13

14

■ 2-edge count (two-phase high-speed counter)
This counter counts by the phase difference between A-phase and B-phase pulse input. When A-phase precedes Bphase, the counter counts up with the rise and fall of B-phase. When B-phase precedes A-phase, the counter counts
down with the rise and fall of B-phase.

A-phaseB-phaseCurrent
value

0

1

2

3

4

3

2

1

0

■ 4-edge count (two-phase high-speed counter)
This counter counts by the phase difference between A-phase and B-phase pulse input. When A-phase precedes Bphase, the counter counts up with the rise and fall of A-phase and B-phase. When B-phase precedes A-phase, thecounter counts down with the rise and fall of A-phase and B-phase.

A-phaseB-phaseCurrent
value

3-58

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

7

6

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5

4

3

2

1

0

4 Special Functions● Comparison Actions
The operating condition when comparing values is configured in the WindLDR High-speed Counter Settings,
under Comparison Action.
The action when comparing values is Comparison Output or Interrupt Program, so specify an external output
number or label number when comparing. However, the interrupt program can only be used when ladder program isselected as the programming language.
Operation■ Preset value storage locations
The preset values during high-speed counter operation are stored as 2 words in special data registers.
Group

1(I0 to I1)

2
(I2)

3
(I3)

4
(I4)

5
(I5)

Preset Value(Upper word)

D8052

D8058

D8070

D8136

D8142

Preset Value(Lower word)

D8053

D8059

D8071

D8137

D8143

Read/Write

R/W

Specify the data registers to store the preset values in WindLDR and store those preset values in the ladder program or
FBD program. Specify the starting address of the data registers to allocate the data registers to the individual settings in
the comparison settings. When the high-speed counter is executed, the preset value with the number stored in Current
Preset Value Number is active. The active preset value number for each comparison is stored in Current Preset Value
Number and the next active preset value number is automatically stored in Next Preset Value Number. By changing
the value of Next Preset Value Number in the ladder program or FBD program, the next active preset value number
can be changed. The active preset value is stored for each group in the special data registers shown in the table above.
Example: Group 1, number of preset values is 3, set to device address D0000

When the current value matches preset value 1, Current Preset Value Number becomes 2 and 3 is stored in Next
Preset Value Number.
When the device address is configured as D0000, Current Preset Value Number is stored in D0001 and Next
Preset Value Number is stored in D0002.
For the group 1 preset value, the value of the data registers (D0004, D0005) allocated to preset value number 1 isstored in D8052 and D8053 as shown in the table above and it is compared to the current value.
Counting stateCount
Before action

Current Preset Value0
Number (D0001)
Next Preset Value
1
Number (D0002)
Before the count action, set the Next
Preset Value Number and preset value 1
to 3 to the count values with the initialize
pulse in ladder program or FBD program.

Current value andpreset value 3
matchedCurrent value andpreset value 2
matchedCurrent value andpreset value 1
matchedCount
Action start
→

1

→

2

→

3

→

1

→

2

→

3

→

1

→

2

Preset value 1 is set
to Current Preset
Value Number

Preset value 2
is set.

Preset value 3
is set.

RepeatOnce again,preset value 1 isset.

When the Next Preset Value Number preset value becomes active, the high-speed counter preset value during execution
does not change, even when the preset value for that preset value number is changed. When the current value and the current
preset value match, the preset value with the number stored in Next Preset Value Number becomes active. Changes to the
Next Preset Value Number data register must be performed before the preset value becomes active.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-59

3Project

When the preset value and the current value are compared and the values match, the specified output is turned on or
the interrupt program is executed.
A maximum of six high-speed counter preset values can be configured. For one preset value, the current value iscompared with the same preset value each time.
When multiple preset values are configured, the preset value is changed each time the current value and preset value match.
For example, if four preset values are configured, when preset value 1 matches the current value, the comparison
subject changes to preset value 2 → 3 → 4 in order.
When the final preset value 4 matches the current value, the preset value returns to preset value 1 and the values are compared.

4 Special Functions

Comparison operation flow
The comparison operation flow is as follows.

1 Start (Run) the Touch.
For the first scan, Next Preset Value Number is set to the number for preset value 1 with the initialize pulse.
For the second scan, an I/O refresh is performed in END processing and the value of Next Preset Value Number istransferred to Current Preset Value Number.
The content of Next Preset Value Number becomes the preset value n + 1 ("2" in this example).
When the number of preset values is 1, Next Preset Value Number is always "1".
The data register that stores the preset value (target value).
Specify the starting address.
The outputs (external outputs) when the values match.
Transfer

The preset value with the number that became active isthe comparison subject with the current value and isstored in the special data registers.
Example: For group 1
Storage destination for the preset value that became active.
Stored by group.
Group

Group 1
(I0 to I1)

Preset Value(Upper word)

D8052

Preset Value(Lower word)

D8053

Read/Write

R/W

2 Start the high-speed counter count operation.
Turn on the gate input to start the count operation.

3 Compare the Current Preset Value Number preset value and the current value. When the current value and thepreset value match, the next number for the preset value becomes active and the high-speed counter continues
counting.
Execute Comparison Output or Interrupt Program. (Comparison Output in this example)• Turn on the comparison (special internal relay) for only one scan.
• Overwrite Current Preset Value Number with Next Preset Value Number and start the count with the preset
value for Current Preset Value Number.
• Add 1 to Next Preset Value Number.

4 When the procedure is executed up to preset value 6, repeat again from the beginning with preset value 1.
The Current Preset Value Number data register cannot be written to. It is read-only.
Next Preset Value Number and Preset Value 1 to Preset Value 6 can be read and written to.

3-60

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions● Procedure
To use the high-speed counter, a normal input must be specified as Two-phase High-speed Counter or Singlephase High-speed Counter in the Function Area Settings tab. Inputs I0 to I7 on the Touch can be selected as
normal input, high-speed counter, catch input, interrupt input, and frequency measurement.
When using normal input, catch input, interrupt input, or frequency measurement, high-speed counter cannot be
used. The interrupt input can only be used when ladder program is selected as the programming language.

1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Control Function).

Project

WindLDR starts.

3

2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input & Output Configuration.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 Select Two-phase High-speed Counter or Single-phase High-speed Counter for the group to use the high-speed counter.
The High-speed Counter Settings dialog box is displayed.

4 Configure the operation mode and the counting mode, and then click OK.
To use comparison actions, configure the comparison settings.

5 Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-61

4 Special Functions● Settings■ Operation Mode
Inputs for group 2, group 3, group 4 and group 5 can only be used as single-phase high-speed counters.
When group 1 is selected as the high-speed counter, group 2 (I2) can be used as clear input.
■ Counting Mode (single-phase high-speed counter)
The adding counter can only be used for group 2, group 3, group 4 and group 5 high-speed counters.
Adding Counter
The adding counter counts up with the rise in pulse input.
■ Counting Mode (two-phase high-speed counter)
When the two-phase high-speed counter is specified for Operation Mode for group 1, the counting mode can beselected as 2-edge count or 4-edge count. The two-phase counter cannot be used for the group 2, group 3, group
4 and group 5 high-speed counters.
2-edge countThis counter counts at double the frequency of the input pulse.
This counter counts by the phase difference between the A-phase and B-phase pulse input. When A-phase precedes
B-phase, the counter counts up with the rise and fall of B-phase. When B-phase precedes A-phase, the countercounts down with the rise and fall of B-phase.
4-edge countThis counter counts at quadruple the frequency of the input pulse.
This counter counts by the phase difference between A-phase and B-phase pulse input. When A-phase precedes Bphase, the counter counts up with the rise and fall of A-phase and B-phase. When B-phase precedes A-phase, thecounter counts down with the rise and fall of A-phase and B-phase.
■ Comparison Action
The comparison action is a function that compares the high-speed counter's current value with a preset value (target
value).
It can use either the comparison output or an interrupt program. However, the interrupt program can only be used
when ladder program is selected as the programming language.
• When Comparison Output is selected, the specified external output is turned on when the current value and thepreset value match.
• When Interrupt Program is selected, the subroutine program with the specified label number is executed as theinterrupt program when the current value and the preset value match.
Overflow and underflow can also be used for the comparison conditions.
For details on the comparison actions, refer to “Comparison Actions” on page 3-59.
■ Comparison Settings
When using the comparison output or the interrupt program as the comparison action for the high-speed counter,
configure the external output number or the label number when there is a match. A maximum of six preset values canbe specified for Number of Comparisons (preset value number 1 to 6).
Tag Name
Specify the Tag name which is allocated to the starting address of the data register region to store the preset values.
Device Address
Shows the address of the data register specified by the tag name.
Number of Comparisons
You can configure a maximum of six preset values (target values) for the comparison action.
• The preset value becomes active by the END processing in the second scan after the Touch starts
operation. Store Preset Value in the data registers with initialize pulse M8120 input.
• When the preset value (special data register) is changed before the comparison, the preset value
currently being used for the comparison is discarded in the program's END processing, and thecomparison is performed with the newly configured preset value.
OutputWhen a comparison action is selected, these are the external outputs specified for preset value 1 to 6.
The external outputs that can be used as comparison outputs are Q0 to Q3.

3-62

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions

Overflow
Select this check box to use overflow in the comparison action conditions (when the current value exceeds
4,294,967,295).
Underflow
Select this check box to use underflow in the comparison action conditions (when the current value falls below 0).

■ KeepAfter the current value matches the preset value, select to reset the current value to a reset value or to keep thevalue. Select this check box to keep the current value.
■ Use HSC Reset Input
Select this check box to reset the current value to a reset value with external input (high-speed counter reset input).
High-speed counter reset input can only be specified for group 1.
Group

External input

Group 1

I2

When high-speed counter reset input is turned on, the current value is reset to a reset value.
If high-speed counter reset input is not used, I2 is normal input.
■ Keep the current value at the time of power OFF
Select this check box to maintain the current values that have been kept with the backup battery when the Touch isturned on. This setting can be set for each group of Special Inputs. If this check box is cleared, the current values
change to 0.

High-speed counter devices
The high-speed counter operates according to special internal relay and special data register settings. While the highspeed counter is operating, the current value, control output, and operating status value are reflected in the special
internal relays and special data registers with each scan.
The high-speed counter start and stop control signals and the current value, preset values, and reset values areallocated to the special internal relays and special data registers.

Device allocation table
The devices used by the high-speed counter are as follows.
Special internal relay list
Group1
(I0 to I1)

2
(I2)

3
(I3)

4
(I4)

5
(I5)

Comparison
Output Reset

M8030

M8040

M8055

M8166

M8173

Gate Input

M8031

M8041

M8056

M8167

M8174

Reset Input

M8032

M8042

M8057

M8170

M8175

Reset Status

M8033

–

–

–

–

Comparison ON
Status

M8034

M8043

M8060

M8171

M8176

Overflow

M8035

M8044

M8061

M8172

M8177

Underflow

M8036

–

–

–

–

Count Direction
Flag

M8037

–

–

–

–

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

Read/Write

R/W

R

3-63

3
Project

When the comparison action is Comparison Output and either a preset value, overflow, or underflow has
been enabled as a comparison condition, the text box to enter the comparison output is enabled. The
comparison output can be specified for each of these match conditions.

4 Special Functions

Special data register list
Group1
(I0 to I1)

2
(I2)

3
(I3)

4
(I4)

5
(I5)

Current Value(Upper word)

D8050

D8056

D8068

D8134

D8140

Current Value(Lower word)

D8051

D8057

D8069

D8135

D8141

Preset Value(Upper word)

D8052

D8058

D8070

D8136

D8142

Preset Value(Lower word)

D8053

D8059

D8071

D8137

D8143

Reset Value(Upper word)

D8054

D8060

D8072

D8138

D8144

Reset Value(Lower word)

D8055

D8061

D8073

D8139

D8145

Read/Write

R

R/W

When using the devices above with instructions or FB where the data type unit can be specified, specify the data typeas double word (D). When the 32-bit data storage setting in the function area settings is set to from Lower Word,
the lower word is stored in the first device.
■ Start/stop high-speed counter
The high-speed counter can be started and stopped per group by turning the gate input on or off.
Group

1
(I0 to I1)

2
(I2)

3
(I3)

4
(I4)

5
(I5)

Read/Write

Gate Input

M8031

M8041

M8056

M8167

M8174

R/W

■ Current value storage locations
The current value for the single-phase high-speed counter is stored in special data registers as 2 words per group.
Group1(I0 to I1)

2
(I2)

3
(I3)

4
(I4)

5
(I5)

Current Value(Upper word)

D8050

D8056

D8068

D8134

D8140

Current Value(Lower word)

D8051

D8057

D8069

D8135

D8141

Read/Write

R

When the 32-bit data storage setting in the function area settings is set to from Lower Word, the lower word isstored in the first device.
■ Comparison ON status
When the current value and the preset value match, the special internal relay turns on for only one scan.
Group

1(I0 to I1)

2
(I2)

3
(I3)

4
(I4)

5
(I5)

Read/Write

Comparison ON
Status

M8034

M8043

M8060

M8171

M8176

R

■ Overflow
When the current value exceeds 4,294,967,295, the special internal relay turns on for only one scan. When thecurrent value overflows, it becomes 0.
Group

1(I0 to I1)

2
(I2)

3
(I3)

4
(I4)

5
(I5)

Read/Write

Overflow

M8035

M8044

M8061

M8172

M8177

R

■ Underflow
When the current value falls below 0, the special internal relay turns on for only one scan. When the current value
underflows, it becomes 4,294,967,295.

3-64

Group

1
(I0 to I1)

2
(I2)

3
(I3)

4
(I4)

5
(I5)

Read/Write

Underflow

M8036

–

–

–

–

R

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions■ Comparison output reset
When the special internal relay turns on, the comparison output selected on High-speed Counter Settings turns off.
Group

1
(I0 to I1)

2
(I2)

3
(I3)

4
(I4)

5
(I5)

Read/Write

Comparison
Output Reset

M8030

M8040

M8055

M8166

M8173

R/W

3
Project■ Reset input
When reset input is turned on, the current value returns to the reset value.
Reset input
Current value

N-1

N

N+1

Reset value (initial value)

Group

1
(I0 to I1)

2
(I2)

3
(I3)

4
(I4)

5
(I5)

Read/Write

Reset Input

M8032

M8042

M8057

M8170

M8175

R/W

■ Preset value, reset value storage locations
The preset value and the reset value for the high-speed counter are stored in special data registers as 2 words.
Group

1(I0 to I1)

2
(I2)

3
(I3)

4
(I4)

5
(I5)

Preset Value(Upper word)

D8052

D8058

D8070

D8136

D8142

Preset Value(Lower word)

D8053

D8059

D8071

D8137

D8143

Reset Value(Upper word)

D8054

D8060

D8072

D8138

D8144

Reset Value(Lower word)

D8055

D8061

D8073

D8139

D8145

Read/Write

R/W

When the 32-bit data storage setting in the function area settings is set to from Lower Word, the lower word isstored in the first device.
■ HSC reset input and reset status
When the HSC reset input is enabled in group 1, turn on HSC reset input I2 to return the current value to the reset
value.
In this situation, reset status turns on for only one scan.
HSC reset input

Reset status

Current valueGroup
HSC Reset Input
Reset Status

One scanN-1

N1(I0 to I1)

N+1

2
(I2)

Reset value (initial value)

3
(I3)

4
(I4)

5
(I5)

Read/Write

I2

–

–

–

–

–

M8033

–

–

–

–

R

To use the reset input with group 1 single-phase high-speed counter, use I2 (group 2). When not using I2 as a reset
input, it can be used as normal input, high-speed counters, catch input, interrupt input, or frequency measurements.
■ Count direction flag
These special internal relays maintain whether group 1 current value count is being added or subtracted.
When these special internal relays are on, they indicate addition. When they are off, they indicate subtraction.
Group

1(I0 to I1)

2
(I2)

3
(I3)

4
(I4)

5
(I5)

Read/Write

Count Direction
Flag

M8037

–

–

–

–

R

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-65

4 Special Functions● Timing chart 1
Single-phase high-speed counter (group 5) timing chart
Operating conditions
One preset value is used, and when the values match, output Q1 turns on and the current value is kept.
Overflow and underflow are not used.
Current value (D8140, D8141)

Reset value=2(D8144, D8145)

14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

Pulse input

I5

Reset input

M8175

Gate input

M8174

Preset value 1=6(D8142, D8143)

One scan

M8176
Preset value
Comparison ON status
Preset value 1
Comparison output

Q1

Comparison output
reset

M8173

Reset

1 When reset input (M8175) turns on, the reset value (D8144, D8155) is stored in the current value (D8140, D8141).
2 When gate input (M8174) turns on, the counting begins.
3 When the current value (D8140, D8141) and preset value 1 (D8142, D8143) match, the preset value 1 comparison

output (Q1) and Comparison ON status (M8176) turn on. When the Keep check box is selected in the settings in the
WindLDR High-speed Counter Settings, the current value is kept.

4 Q1 maintains the on state until comparison output reset (M8173) turns on. Preset value Comparison ON status(M8176) turns on for only one scan.

5 When the gate output turns off, counting stops.
High-speed counter usage precautions
The high-speed counter starts the count operation with the following two conditions.
• The Touch starts operation.
• The gate input is turned on.
To start the count operation, turn the gate input on from off when the Touch is running. When the gate
input is already on when the Touch is stopped, the count operation starts when the Touch is switched fromstop to run.
When a ladder program or FBD program is downloaded during the count operation, the count operation
stops. The count operation will restart by setting the Touch to run.

3-66

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions● Timing chart 2
Two-phase high-speed counter (group 1) timing chart
Operating conditions
The counting mode is set to 2-edge count and reset input (I2) is used.
Two preset values are used, and when preset value 1 matches, output Q1 turns on and the current value is kept.
When preset value 2 matches, output Q2 turns on and the current value is cleared.

Project

Overflow and underflow are not used.
Current value

Preset value 2=14

Preset value 1=8

Reset value=4(D8554, D8555)

14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

A-phaseI0

B-phase

I1

Reset input

I2

Reset status

M8033

Gate input

M8031

Q1

Preset value 2
Comparison output

Q2

Comparison output
reset

M8030

1

1
1

0

UP

DOWN

One scanPreset value
Comparison ON status M8034
Preset value 1
Comparison output

3

One scanOne scan

Reset
Reset

1 When reset input (I2) turns on, the reset value (D8054, D8055) is stored in the current value (D8050, D8051).
In this situation, reset status (M8033) turns on for only one scan.

2 When gate input (M8031) turns on, counting begins.
3 When A-phase pulse (I0) precedes B-phase pulse (I1), the count goes up. When B-phase pulse (I1) precedes A-phase
pulse (I0), the count goes down.

4 When the current value and preset value 1 (D8052, D8053) match, the preset value 1 comparison output (Q1) andsetting value match (M8034) turn on.
When preset value 1 matches, preset value 2 is stored in the preset value (D8052, D8053) as the new preset value
and counting continues.

5 The preset value 1 comparison output (Q1) maintains the on state until comparison output reset (M8030) turns on.
M8034 turns on for only one scan.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-67

4 Special Functions● Example 1
Using the single-phase high-speed counter in the ladder program, this example program turns on external output Q2 when
1,000 pulses are input.
Application description
When pulses are input to input I0 and the count reaches 1,000, output Q2 is turned on.

1 In the WindLDR, on the Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click the Input Configuration.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the Single-phase High-speed Counter for Group 2.
The High-speed Counter Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 Configure the settings as follows, and then click OK.
External input: Group 2 (I2)

Operation Mode

: Single-phase High-speed Counter

Counting Mode

: Adding Counter

Comparison Action: Comparison Output

Comparison Settings
Tag Name/Device Address: D0000 (data register)

Number of Comparisons:1Comparison output: Q2 (external output when matched)Comparison1 (D4)

: 0 (upper word)

Comparison1 (D5)

: 1,000 (lower word)

Keep: Cleared

Reset value (D8054): 0 (upper word)

Reset value (D8055): 0 (lower word)

Overflow: Cleared

Underflow: Cleared

Use HSC Reset Input: Cleared

Keep the current value at the time of power OFF : OFF

3-68

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions

Ladder program
M8120 (initialize pulse) is a special internal relay that turns on for one scan when the Touch runs.
MOV(D)

S11000

D1D0004

REP

S10

D1D8054REP

MOV(W) S11

D1D0002

REP

M8120
MOV(D)

1st scanStore 1,000 in preset value 1 (D0004, D0005)

3Store the reset value in D8054, D8055

Project

Store 1 in the next preset value number (D0002)
Turn off gate input (M8031)

M8031
Turn off M0000
M0000

M0000

M8031

3rd scanDetect the rising edge of M0000, turn on gate input (M8031)
Start high-speed counter counting in the END processing
after the 3rd scan is executed

2nd scan
M8120

M0000

M8032

Detect the falling edge of the initialize pulse, M0000 and M8032 turn on
Initialize the current value with the reset value in the END processing
after the 2nd scan is executed
M8032 (reset input) is a special internal relay that stores the preset
value (D8054, D8055) in the current value (D8050, D8051).

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-69

4 Special Functions● Example 2
Using the two-phase high-speed counter, the pulses from a rotary encoder are input to the Touch and a continuous
workpiece is marked at a regular interval.
Application description• The rotary encoder pulses are input to input I0. A
continuous sheet of paper is marked (holes arepunched) at a regular interval (every 2,700
pulses).

Paper roll

Paper feed roller• The rotary encoder is directly connected to thepaper feed roller, and output pulses are counted
by the high-speed counter and controlled.
• The cycle time is the time to count 2,700 pulses.
When the hole punch time is 0.5 seconds, theoperation condition is 2,700 pulse count time >0.5 seconds.

Perforator
Rotary encoder

Touch

1 In the WindLDR, on the Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click the Input Configuration.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the Two-phase High-speed Counter for Group 1.
The High-speed Counter Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 Configure the settings as follows, and then click OK.
External input: Group 1 (I0 to I1)

Operation Mode

: Two-phase High-speed Counter

Counting Mode

: 4 Edge Count

Comparison Action: Comparison Output

Comparison Settings
Tag Name/Device Address: D0000 (data register)

Number of Comparisons:1Comparison output: Q2 (external output when matched)Comparison1 (D0004): 0 (upper word)

Comparison1 (D0005): 2,700 (lower word)

Keep: Cleared

Reset value (D8054): 0 (upper word)

Reset value (D8055): 0 (lower word)

Overflow: Cleared

Underflow: Cleared

Use HSC Reset Input: Cleared

Keep the current value at the time of power OFF : ON

3-70

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions

Program
M8120 (initialize pulse) is a special internal relay that turns on for one scan when the Touch runs.
MOV(D)

S12700

D1D0004

REP

S10

D1D8054REP

MOV(W) S11

D1D0002

REP

M8120
MOV(D)

1st scanStore 2,700 in preset value 1 (D0004, D0005)

3
Project

Store 0 in the reset value (D8054, D8055)

Store 1 in the next preset value number (D0002)
Turn off gate input (M8031)

M8031

Turn off M0000
M0000

SOTU
M0000

M8031

3rd scanDetect the rising edge of M0000, turn on gate input (M8031)
Start high-speed counter counting in the END processing after the 3rd
scan is executed

2nd scan
SOTD
M8120

M0000

M8032

TIM T05M8030

Q2

Detect the falling edge of the initialize pulse, M0000 and M8032 turn on
Initialize the current value with the reset value in the END processing
after the 2nd scan is executed
M8032 (reset input) is a special internal relay that stores the reset
value (D8054, D8055) in the current value (D8050, D8051).
When the current value becomes 2,700 pulses, comparison
output Q2 turns on
The timer starts and comparison output reset (M8030) turns on after
five seconds

Current value
Preset value 1=2,700
2,700 pulses
Reset value 0

Comparison output Q2
Perforation time: 0.5 seconds

In this example, Z-phase reset input is not used.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-71

4 Special Functions

4.8 Catch Input
This section explains catch inputs, which reliably capture short pulses such as sensor signals.
● Feature Description
Catch inputs are used to capture short pulses that change within the timeframe of a single scan. If catch inputs areused, ON/OFF states are stored in special internal relays (M8091 to M8094) corresponding to each group of external
inputs, in accordance with the state of the external inputs during the time of one scan, and these signals can be used
as input conditions. When a pulse is captured, the special internal relays turns ON or OFF during a single scan. If thepulse is captured again during the next scan, the special internal relays will again turn ON/OFF during the scan.
To use catch inputs, specify Catch Input for the external input group that uses catch inputs under Function Area
Settings in WindLDR.
Catching Rising Edge of Input Pulse*1

Actual Input
Catch Input Relay(M8090-M8095)

1 scan time
END
Processed

Catching Falling Edge of Input Pulse*1

Actual Input
Catch Input Relay(M8090-M8095)

END
1 scan time
Processed

Catch Input Specifications
Minimum Turn ON Pulse Width: 50 μsec/Minimum Turn OFF Pulse Width: 50 μsec

● Input
The Touch inputs can be configured as normal inputs, high-speed counters, catch inputs, interrupt inputs, or
frequency measurement. To use catch inputs, specify Catch Input for the applicable group under Function Area
Settings.
Group

1

2

3

4

5

External Input

I0

I1

I2

I3

I4

I5

Catch Input––

Catch Input

Catch Input

Catch Input

Catch Input

The states of external inputs assigned to catch inputs are stored in the following special internal relays for eachgroup. (Read Only)Group

Catch Input

Special Internal Relay for Catch Input

Group 2

I2

M8091

Group 3

I3

M8093

Group 4

I4

M8094

Group 5

I5

M8095

The 12-I/O type cannot use external inputs I6 and I7 as catch inputs on Touch.
Input filter settings have no effect on the catch inputs.

*1 When two or more pulses enter within one scan, subsequent pulses are ignored.

3-72

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions● Procedure

1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Control Function).

WindLDR starts.

3
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 Select Catch Input in the Groups 1 through 6 pull-down list boxes.
The Catch Input dialog box is displayed.

4 Select Catch Input Rising Edge or Catch Input Falling Edge in the pull-down list, and then click OK.

5 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.
● Example: Maintaining Catch Input
When a catch input is received, the catch input relay assigned to a catch input is turned on for only one scan.
This example demonstrates a program to maintain a catch input status for more than one scan.
Input I2 is designated as a catch input using the
Function Area Settings.
M8091

M0000

M0001

M0000

When input I2 is turned on, special internal relay
M8091 is turned on, and M0000 is maintained in
the self-holding circuit.
When NC input M1 is turned off, the self-holding
circuit is unlatched, and M0 is turned off.
M0 is used as an input condition for thesubsequent program instructions.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-73

Project

2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input & Output Configuration.

4 Special Functions

4.9 Interrupt Input
This section explains interrupt inputs, which can be used to interrupt execution of a ladder program by means of an
external input to execute a subroutine.
The interrupt input can only be used when ladder program is selected as the programming language.
● Feature Description
In the processing of normal ladder programs, execution proceeds iteratively from beginning to end, but if an interrupt
input is used, ladder program execution can be temporarily paused in order to execute a subroutine, irrespective ofscans. With an interrupt input, a subroutine of predetermined label No. is run as an interrupt program when theexternal input is turned ON. When processing of the subroutine program is ended, execution of the interrupt program
resumes. Up to 4 interrupt inputs can be set for external input groups 2 to 5.

● Function Specification
The Touch inputs can be configured as normal inputs, high-speed counters, catch inputs, interrupt inputs, or
frequency measurement. To use catch inputs, specify Interrupt Input for the applicable group under Function Area
Settings.
Jump destination label Nos. are stored in special data registers (D8033 to D8035, D8037, D8038).
Whether or not an interrupt input is allowed can be checked by the interrupt input state of the special internal relay(ON: Allowed, OFF: Prohibited).
Group

1

2

3

4

5

External Input

I0

I1

I2

I3

I4

I5

Interrupt input––Interrupt
inputInterrupt
inputInterrupt
inputInterrupt
input

Special Data Register(Jump Destination Label No.)

–

–

D8033

D8035

D8037

D8038

Special Internal Relay(Interrupt Input Status):
Read only

–

–

M8071

M8073

M8074

M8075

The 12-I/O type cannot use external inputs I6 and I7 as interrupt inputs on Touch.
● Disable and Enable Interrupts
The interrupt inputs I2, I3, I4, and I5 and timer interrupt are normally enabled while the Touch is running, and canalso be individually disabled using the DI instruction or enabled using the EI instruction. When interrupt inputs I2, I3,
I4, and I5 are enabled, special internal relay are turned on, respectively. For details, refer to Chapter 16 "Interrupt
Control Instructions" in "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual".
When the Touch starts operation, interrupt inputs are set to the interrupt allowed state.
● Notes for Using Interrupt Inputs and Timer Interrupt:• When using an interrupt input or timer interrupt, separate the interrupt program from the main program using the
END instruction at the end of the main program.
• When an interrupt program calls another subroutine, a maximum of 3 subroutine calls can be nested. If more than
3 calls are nested, a ladder program execution error occurs.
• When using an interrupt input or timer interrupt, include the label number of the interrupt program to be executed
when an interrupt occurs. The label numbers stored in data registers D8033 through D8035, D8037, and D8038
specify the interrupt programs for interrupt inputs I2, I3, I4, and I5 and timer interrupt, respectively.
• When more than one interrupt input is turned on at the same time, interrupt program execution is given priority to
inputs I2, I3, I4 and I5, in that order. If an interrupt is initiated while another interrupt program is executed, thesubsequent interrupt program is executed after the prior interrupt is completed. Multiple interrupt programs cannot
be executed simultaneously.
• Make sure that the execution time of the interrupt program is shorter than interrupt intervals sufficiently.
• Interrupt programs cannot use some instructions. For details, refer to Chapter 12 “2.2 Instructions Reference” onpage 12-14.

3-74

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions● Procedure

1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Control Function).

WindLDR starts.

3
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 Select Interrupt Input in the Groups 1 through 6 pull-down list boxes.
The Interrupt Input dialog box is displayed.

4 Select Interrupt Input Rising Edge, Interrupt Input Falling Edge or Interrupt Both Edges in the pull-down
list, and then click OK.

5 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-75

Project

2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input & Output Configuration.

4 Special Functions● Example: Interrupt Input
The following example demonstrates a program using the interrupt input function, with input I2 designated as aninterrupt input. When the interrupt input is turned on, the input I0 status is immediately transferred to output Q0
using the IOREF (I/O refresh) instruction before the END instruction is executed.
M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay.
D8033 stores 0 to designate jump destination label 0 for
interrupt input I2.

The interrupt program is separated from the main program by
the END instruction.
When input I2 is on, program execution jumps to label 0.
M8125 is the in-operation output special internal relay.
IOREF immediately reads input I0 status to internal relay
M0300.

,

4

4

M0300 turns on or off the output Q0 internal memory.
Another IOREF immediately writes the output Q0 internal
memory status to actual output Q0.
Program execution returns to the main program.
Insert LRET at the end of the subroutine to return to the main
program.

To change input/output information during execution of an interrupt program, use the IOREF (Input/Output
Refresh) instruction. The IOREF instruction is used to freely change input/output data before the END scan.
For details, refer to Chapter 15 "Refresh Instructions" in "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual".

3-76

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions

4.10 Frequency Measurement
This section describes frequency measurement, which measures the input frequency.

● Function Specification
The Touch inputs can be configured as normal input, high-speed counters, catch input, interrupt input, and frequency
measurement. To use frequency measurement, specify the relevant group as Frequency Measurement in
Function Area Settings tab.
The frequency measurement results are stored in the following special data registers. (Read-only)
Any one of Groups 2, 3, 4, or 5 can be freely set.
Inputs I6 and I7 cannot be used for frequency measurement.
Group

1

2

3

4

5

External Input

I0

I2

I3

I4

I5

–

D8056

D8068

D8134

D8140

–

D8057

D8069

D8135

D8141

Upper
Frequency
word
measurement
value (32 bits) Lower
word
Frequency measurement
range

200Hz to 10kHz

Measurement errorLess than ±1%(Truncated after the decimal point)

Calculation cycle

Each scan time

If the input pulse cycle is longer than the scan time, the measurement results are updated at pulse cycle + 1
scan time.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-77

3Project● Feature Description
These input pulses are processed in hardware, so frequencies can be measured with no relation to the scan time.
Groups that do not use frequency measurement can be used as normal inputs, high-speed counters, catch input, orinterrupt input. The measurement results are stored in special data registers and being updated with each scan.

4 Special Functions● Procedure
To use frequency measurement, you must configure it in the Function Area Settings and download the ladderprogram or FBD program to the Touch. Frequency measurements will start when you download the ladder program
or FBD program and set the Touch to run.

1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Control Function).

WindLDR starts.

2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input & Output Configuration.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 Specify Frequency Measurement for the group to use frequency measurement.

4 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.

3-78

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions

4.11 Input Filter
The input filter function is used to reject input noises. The catch input function described in the preceding section isused to read short input pulses to special internal relays.
● Feature Description
The input filter rejects short input pulses when the Touch is used with input signals containing noises.

3

Chattering Input signals

Input Filter Values and Input Operation
Depending on the selected values, the input filter has three response areas to reject or pass input signals.
• Input signals: Input signals do not pass the filter (selected filter value minus 2 milliseconds).

• Pass area

: Input signals pass the filter (selected filter value).

• Indefinite area

: Input signals may be rejected or passed.

The input filter rejects inputs shorter than the selected input filter value minus 2 milliseconds.
Example: Input Filter
To reject input pulses of 6 milliseconds or less, select input filter value of 8 milliseconds. Then input pulses of 8
milliseconds plus one scan time are accepted correctly at the END processing.
6 msecRejected

8 msecIndefinite

Accepted• Signals that pass through input filters are not necessarily captured as inputs. Normal inputs require apulse width of the filter value plus one scan time to receive input signals.
• If external inputs are set as high-speed counters, interrupt inputs, frequency measurement, or analog
inputs, input filters are disabled.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-79

Project

Different input filter values can be selected for inputs I0 through I7 in four groups using the Function Area Settings.
Selectable input filter values to pass input signals are 0 millisecond, and 3 through 15 milliseconds in 1 millisecond
increments. Default value is 3 milliseconds for all inputs I0 through I7. Inputs I10 and above on Touch are provided
with a fixed filter of 3 milliseconds.

4 Special Functions● Procedure

1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Control Function).

WindLDR starts.

2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input & Output Configuration.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 If an input to which an input filter is applied is not a normal input, select Normal Input in the corresponding group.
4 Select an input filter value for each group of inputs.

The columns displayed next toI0000 indicate I0 to I7.

5 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.

3-80

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions

4.12 Analog Input
This section describes how to configure analog input signals such as those from pressure sensors.
● Feature Description
The Touch is equipped with two analog inputs.

3

The FT1A-*12RA-* accepts analog input of 0 to 10V DC by converting it to 0 to 1000 digital values.

● Applicable Models
The type analog input that can be used varies based on the model.
FT1A-*14KA-*
FT1A-*14SA-*

FT1A-*12RA-*

0 to 10 V

YES

YES

4 to 20 mA

YES

NO

Analog input● Storage Locations for the Analog Input Value and Analog Input Status
The Touch has two embedded analog inputs. The digitally converted analog input values are stored in special dataregisters (D8040 and D8041: read-only) as values between 0 and 1,000. The analog input status is also stored in
special data registers (D8042, D8043, and D8077: read-only). These values are updated with each scan.
Analog input terminal

AI0

AI1

Special data register that stores the analog input value

D8040

D8041

Special data registers that store the analog input status

D8077
D8042

D8077
D8043

■ Analog Input Status (D8077)
If the analog input signal exceeds 11 V or 21 mA, the corresponding bit of D8077 turns on to indicate overflow. For
details, refer to Chapter 27 “2.2 Control Device Addresses” on page 27-12.
■ Analog Input Status (D8042, D8043)
Details on the analog input status (D8042, D8043) are as follows.
StatusDescription

Analog input value0

Operating normally

Current analog input value

1

Converting data (occurs only once during the initialconversion when the power is turned on)

Undefined value

2

Initializing

0

3

Parameter setting error

Correct value immediately before the error
occurred4

Reserved

5

Wiring fault (out of maximum range)
Analog input signals exceed 11 V, or 21 mA

Maximum

6

Wiring fault (out of minimum range, open current loop)
Analog input signals fall below 2 mA

Minimum

7 to 65535―

Reserved―

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-81

Project

The FT1A-*14KA-* and the FT1A-*14SA-* accepts analog input of 0 to 10V DC or 4 to 20 mA by converting it to 0 to1000 digital values. The converted analog input values are stored in special data registers. Inputs that are notspecified as analog inputs are digital inputs. For the on or off judgment threshold value when digital input is specified,refer to Chapter 29 “SmartAXIS Specifications” on page 29-1.

4 Special Functions● Analog Input Filter
The analog input data is averaged by the specified filter count. This can reduce rapid fluctuations in analog input.
The larger the filter value set, the slower the tracking of the change in analog input becomes.
Count

Description0

No filtering

1 to 255

The input value is set as the average value of n samples of analog input value. (n: Count)

When filtering, the input value is calculated with the equation below.
Total analog input values for filter count (n) worth of scans
Filter count n

Analog input value after filtering =● Analog Input Allocation

3-82

Input

I0

...

I5

I6

I7

Analog input terminal

–

–

–

AI0

AI1

Special data register that stores
analog input value

–

–

–

D8040

D8041

Special data registers that store
analog input status

–

–

–

D8077
D8042

D8077
D8043

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions● Procedure
To use analog input, you must configure the Function Area Settings tab and download the ladder program or FBD
program to the Touch.

1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Control Function).

WindLDR starts.

3
Project

2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input & Output Configuration.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 Under Type for the external input to use as an analog input, select Analog.
4 Under Filter (times), specify the number of times to filter, and under Signal Type, select 0 to 10V DC or
4 to 20mA DC.

Click Default to set all the external inputs to digital.

5 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-83

4 Special Functions

4.13 Timer Interrupt
This section describes the timer interrupt that executes the interrupt program at a regular time interval.
The timer interrupt can only be used when ladder program is selected as the programming language.
● Feature Description
The timer interrupt is a function that executes a subroutine program with a predetermined label number as theinterrupt program at a regular time interval. The Function Area Settings dialog box is used to enable the timer
interrupt and to specify the interval, from 10 to 140 milliseconds, to execute the timer interrupt. When the timer
interrupt is enabled, the program execution jumps to the jump destination label number stored in special data register
D8036 repeatedly while the Touch is running.
D8036

Timer Interrupt Jump Destination Label No.

R/W

A label is the starting address of the program branch to jump to, and it is specified by the LABEL instruction.

● Disable and Enable Interrupts
The timer interrupt is normally enabled while the Touch is running, and can also be individually disabled using the DI
instruction or enabled using the EI instruction. When timer interrupt is enabled, Touch is turned on. When disabled,
Touch is turned off.
For details, refer to Chapter 16 "Interrupt Control Instructions" in "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual".
● Notes for Using Timer Interrupt and Interrupt Inputs• When using a timer interrupt or interrupt input, separate the interrupt program from the main program using the
END instruction at the end of the main program.
• When an interrupt program calls another subroutine, a maximum of 3 subroutine calls can be nested. If more than
3 calls are nested, a ladder program execution error occurs.
• The label numbers stored in data registers D8036 specify the interrupt programs for interrupt inputs I2, I3, I4, andI5 and timer interrupt, respectively.
• If an interrupt is initiated while another interrupt program is executed, the subsequent interrupt program is
executed after the prior interrupt is completed. Multiple interrupt programs cannot be executed simultaneously.
• Make sure that the execution time of the interrupt program is shorter than interrupt intervals sufficiently.
• Interrupt programs cannot use some instructions. For details, refer to Chapter 12 “2.2 Instructions Reference” onpage 12-14.

3-84

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions● Procedure
To use timer interrupt, you must configure it in the Function Area Settings in WindLDR and download the ladderprogram to the Touch.

1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Control Function).

WindLDR starts.

3
Project

2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input & Output Configuration.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 Select the Use Timer Interrupt check box.

4 Specify an interval to execute the timer interrupt.
5 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.
● Example: Timer Interrupt
The following example demonstrates a program of using the timer interrupt function. The Function Area Settingsmust also be completed to use the timer interrupt function as described on the preceding page.
MOV(W)
M8120

S1 –
0

D1 –
D8036

REP

M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay.
D8036 stores 0 to designate jump destination label 0 for timer
interrupt.

Main Program
END
LABEL
0
Interrupt Program
LRET

The interrupt program is separated from the main program by the
END instruction.
While the SmartAXIS is running, program execution jumps to label
0 repeatedly at intervals selected in the Function Area Settings.
Each time the interrupt program is completed, program execution
returns to the main program at the address where timer interrupt
occurred.
Insert LRET at the end of the subroutine to return to the main
program.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-85

4 Special Functions

4.14 Analog Output
This section describes how to configure analog output signals for voltage and current.
● Feature Description
The FT1A-*14KA-* and the FT1A-*14SA-* are equipped with two analog outputs. This function converts 0 to 10 V DC
or 4 to 20 mA analog signals into 0 to 1, 000 increment and stored in special data registers.
The FT1A-*12RA-* does not have analog output function.
In the cases below, the minimum value of analog output is written to the special data registers for the
analog outputs.
• When the Touch is reset, such as when the Touch is powered up.
• When Ladder program or FBD program is in STOP state and M8025 (Maintain Outputs While Program
Operation Stopped) is OFF.
● Applicable Models
FT1A-*14KA-*
FT1A-*14SA-*

FT1A-*12RA-*

0 to 10 V

YES–

4 to 20 mA

YES–

Analog output● Storage Location for the Analog Output Value and Status
The analog output values (0 to 1,000) stored in the special data registers (D8044 and D8045) are converted to analog
signals by the scan end processing in the ladder program or FBD program, and then output from AQ0 and AQ1. The
analog output status is also stored in special data registers (D8046 and D8047: read-only). These values are updatedwith each scan.
Analog output terminal

AQ0

AQ1

Analog output value

D8044

D8045

Analog output status

D8046

D8047

■ Analog Output Status (D8046, D8047)
Details on the analog output status are as follows.
StatusDescription

Analog output signal

0Operating normally

1

Reserved

2

Initializing

0 V / 4 mA

3Parameter setting error

Analog output value immediately before theerror occurred

4 to 9Current analog output value–

Reserved–

10

Set to unused for the Signal Type–11

Analog outputs unsupported model (FT1A-*12RA-*) has
been selected–

Reserved–

12 to 65535

For input FB and output FB in FBD programs, only analog value input (AI FB) is supported. Analog value
output is not supported. To output analog values in FBD programs, store the analog output value in therelevant special data register (D8044, D8045, D8176, D8177, D8186, D8187) using script programming.

3-86

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions● Procedure
To use analog output, you must configure it in the Function Area Settings tab and download the ladder program or
FBD program to the Touch.

1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Control Function).

WindLDR starts.

3
Project

2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input & Output Configuration.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 Under Signal Type for the external output to use as the analog output, select 0 to 10V DC or 4 to 20mA DC.

4 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-87

4 Special Functions

4.15 Analog Cartridge
This section describes the analog cartridge settings.
● Feature Description
The FT1A-*14KA-* and the FT1A-*14SA-* are equipped with two slots used for attaching analog cartridges. A
maximum of two analog cartridges can be used, and by attaching these analog cartridges, the Touch can be
expanded to a maximum of 2in/6out, 4in/4out, or 6in/2out analog I/O.
Select the analog cartridges for the external devices and set the operation mode. The analog value and analog status
for each channel are stored in special data registers.
In the cases below, the minimum value of analog output is written to the special data registers for the
analog outputs.
• When the Touch is reset, such as when the Touch is powered up.
• When Ladder program or FBD program is in STOP state and M8025 (Maintain Outputs While Program
Operation Stopped) is OFF.

• Always turn the Touch off before removing or installing the analog cartridge. If the analog cartridge is insertedor removed with the power on, there is a risk of the product failure. Touch operation cannot be guaranteed.
• The analog cartridge may be damaged if dropped. Be careful not to drop it when removing it.
• Correctly attach the analog cartridges in the slots.
● Applicable Models
Only the FT1A-*14KA-* and the FT1A-*14SA-* are capable of supporting analog cartridges.
The FT1A-*12RA-* does not support analog cartridges.
FT1A-*14KA-*
FT1A-*14SA-*

FT1A-*12RA-*

FC6A-PJ2AYES–

FC6A-PJ2CPYES–

FC6A-PK2AV

YES–

FC6A-PK2AW

YES–

Analog cartridge● Analog Cartridge Specifications• The analog cartridges are available in the analog input type and analog output type.
The analog input type is called the analog input cartridge, and the analog output type is called the analog output
cartridge.
• The analog input cartridge is available in two types, voltage/ current input type (FC6A-PJ2A) and temperature input
type(FC6A-PJ2CP). A single analog input cartridge has two analog inputs, and each channel can be set to adifferent operation mode.
• The analog output cartridge is available in two types, voltage output type (FC6A-PK2AV) and current output type
(FC6A-PK2AW). A single analog output cartridge has two analog outputs, and the operation mode is common toboth.
• To use an analog cartridge, it must be configured in the Function Area Settings tab in Control Functions.
• The analog input/output value for each analog cartridge channel are stored in special data registers. For details,
refer to “Storage Location for the Analog Value and Analog Status” on page 3-92.

3-88

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions

Type Number Configuration
The type, number of analog inputs or outputs, and operation modes by analog cartridge type number are as follows.
Type No.

Type

Number ofpointsOperation mode
Voltage

FC6A-PJ2A

Analog input

2 points

Thermocouple
FC6A-PJ2CP

Analog input

2 points

Resistancethermometer(RTD)

0 to 10V DC
0 to 20 mA

3

4,096 increments (12bit)

Project

Current

Digital Resolution

4 to 20 mA
Type K

15,000 increments (14bit)

Type J

12,000 increments (14bit)

Type R

17,600 increments (15bit)

Type S

17,600 increments (15bit)

Type B

18,200 increments (15bit)

Type E

10,000 increments (14bit)

Type T

6,000 increments (13bit)

Type N

15,000 increments (14bit)

Type C23,150 increments (15bit)

Pt100

10,500 increments (14bit)

Pt10008,000 increments (13bit)

Ni100

2,400 increments (12bit)

Ni10002,400 increments (12bit)

FC6A-PK2AV

Analog output

2 points

Voltage0 to 10V DC

4,096 increments (12bit)

FC6A-PK2AW

Analog output

2 points

Current

4 to 20 mA

4,096 increments (12bit)

Checking the Version Number
The analog cartridge version number is printed on the side of the analog cartridge in the location in the following
diagram. The performance and functionality of the analog cartridge will differ by its version, so check the version
number before use.

LOT
No
MAD .14X
S125
E
V100 IN JAPA 25
N

LOT No.xxxxxxxxx
MADE IN JAPAN
V100

Version Number

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-89

4 Special Functions● Analog I/O Allocation
The analog inputs or analog outputs expanded by using an analog cartridge are allocated as follows.
Analog cartridge

Touch

Port 1

Port 2Channel

–

–

CH0

CH1

CH0

CH1

Analog number (AI/AQ)

0

1

2

3

4

5

Allocation example
Example 1: When an analog input cartridge is attached to analog cartridge port 1 and an analog output cartridge is
attached to analog cartridge port 2
Analog cartridge

Touch

Port 1

Port 2Channel

–

–

CH0

CH1

CH0

CH1

Analog input

AI0

AI1

AI2

AI3

–

–

Analog output

AQ0

AQ1

–

–

AQ4

AQ5

Example 2: When an analog input cartridge is only attached to analog cartridge port 2
Analog cartridge

Touch

3-90

Port 1

Port 2Channel

–

–

CH0

CH1

CH0

CH1

Analog input

AI0

AI1

–

–

AI4

AI5

Analog output

AQ0

AQ1

–

–

–

–

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions● Operation Setup Parameters
The analog cartridge settings are configured for each channel.
The setup parameters include the operation mode, filter, data type, minimum and maximum values, data, and status.
Operation mode
The operation mode that can be selected varies based on the analog cartridge model. Select the analog cartridge that
corresponds to the user application and set the operation mode.

3

For details on the operation modes, refer to “Analog Cartridge Specifications” on page 3-88.

Project

Filter
The analog input of analog cartridge reaches approximately 99% of analog input in the specified filter time byfiltering. You can decrease rapid fluctuations in the analog input by setting the filter time, but increasing the filter
time makes tracking for fluctuations in the analog input slower.
Analog cartridge (FC6A-PJ2A) input filter example
Filter time: 100 (ms)10090Analog input data (%)
after filtering

80

Reaches approximately 99% of the analog
input in the specified filter time (100 ms).

70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

Elapsed time (ms)Description

Filter time (ms)Description0

No filtering

50 to 50000

Set the analog input filter time in 50 ms increments.
Approximately 99% of the analog input is reached in the specified filter time by filtering.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-91

4 Special Functions

Data typeThe analog value can be handled in the range of the specified data type (minimum to maximum values). The datatypes are as follows.
Data Type

Description

Binary data

Analog values can be handled in the range of 0 to 4,095.

Optional range

Analog values can be handled in the range of minimum to maximum values. The minimum andmaximum values can be set in the range of -32,768 to 32,767. For the minimum and maximum
values, refer to the analog value linear conversion minimum and maximum.

Celsius
Fahrenheit

Analog values can be handled in the linear conversion range of the temperature sensor set in thedata type.
For details, refer to the analog input value linear conversion range when set to Celsius or
Fahrenheit.

Analog Value Linear Conversion Minimum and Maximum
When Data Type is set to Optional range, these values set the minimum and maximum values when performing alinear conversion of the analog value. The minimum and maximum values can be set to any value in the range of 32,768 to 32,767. However, the minimum value must be set to a value smaller than the maximum value.
Analog Input Value Linear Conversion Range When Set to Celsius or Fahrenheit
When data type is set to Celsius or Fahrenheit, the analog input value is linearly converted in the range in thefollowing table.
Celsius

Fahrenheit

Operation mode

Temperature(°C)

Analog input
value

Temperature(°F)

Analog input
valueType K-200 to 1,300-2000 to 13,000-328 to 2,372-3280 to 23,720

Type J-200 to 1,000-2000 to 10,000-328 to 1,832-3280 to 18,320

Type R

0 to 1,760

0 to 17,600

32 to 3,200

320 to 32,000Type S

0 to 1,760

0 to 17,600

32 to 3,200

320 to 32,000

Thermocouple

Resistancethermometer(RTD)

Type B

0 to 1,820

0 to 18,200

32 to 3,308

320 to 33,080

Type E-200 to 800-2000 to 8,000-328 to 1,472-3280 to 14,720

Type T-200 to 400-2000 to 4,000-328 to 752-3280 to 7,520

Type N-200 to 1,300-2000 to 13,000-328 to 2,372-3280 to 23,720

Type C

0 to 2,315

0 to 23,150

32 to 4,199

320 to 41,990

Pt100-200 to 850-2000 to 8,500-328 to 1,562-3280 to 15,620

Pt1000-200 to 600-2000 to 6,000-328 to 1,112-3280 to 11,120

Ni100-60 to 180-600 to 1,800-76 to 356-760 to 3,560

Ni1000-60 to 180-600 to 1,800-76 to 356-760 to 3,560

Storage Location for the Analog Value and Analog Status
The special data registers that store the analog value and analog status for the analog inputs or analog outputs
expanded by using an analog cartridge are allocated as follows. These values are updated with each scan.
Analog input terminal/analog output terminal

AI2/AQ2

AI3/AQ3

AI4/AQ4

AI5/AQ5

Analog value

D8176

D8177

D8186

D8187

Analog status

D8178

D8179

D8188

D8189

• The value of special data registers for channels that are not used is undefined.
• If the filter is enabled on an analog input, the value after being filtered is stored in the special dataregister.
• The analog value and analog status are updated in the scan end processing. The special data registervalues are updated regardless of whether the Touch is stopped or running.

3-92

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions

Analog status
The operational status of the analog input or analog output is indicated for each channel. If the status is 0, this means
the value is normal as an analog value.
■ Analog input
Description

Analog input
value

3
Project

Status0Operating normally

Current analog
input value

1

Converting data (occurs fro approximately 500 ms after the power is turned on and after theuser program is downloaded.)

Undefined value

2

Initializing0

3 to 4

Reserved–

Wiring error (out of the maximum ranger)
For V100*1: 10.0 V or higher
Voltage

DC 0 to 10 V

For V201*1 and later: 10.2 V or
higherFor V100*1: 20.0 mA or higher

DC 4 to 20 mA
5Signal typecurrent

For V201*1 and later: 20.32 mA or
higherMaximum value

For V100*1: 20.0 mA or higher
DC 0 to 20 mA

Thermocouple/
Resistancethermometer (RTD)

For V201*1 and later: 20.4 mA or
higher

The input maximum value or greater. The maximum value
varies by the signal type. For details, refer to “Analog Input
Value Linear Conversion Range When Set to Celsius or
Fahrenheit” on page 3-92.

Wiring error (out of the maximum ranger, open current loop)
For V100*1: 0 V or lower
Voltage

DC 0 to 10 V

For V201*1 and later: -0.2 V orlower
For V100*1: 4.0 mA or lower

DC 4 to 20 mA
6

Signal typecurrent

For V201*1 and later: 3.68 mA or
lower

Minimum value*1

For V100 : 0 mA or lower
DC 0 to 20 mA

Thermocouple/
Resistancethermometer (RTD)

For V201*1 and later: 0 mA or
lower

The input minimum value or smaller. The minimum value
varies by the signal type. For details, refer to “Analog Input
Value Linear Conversion Range When Set to Celsius or
Fahrenheit” on page 3-92.

7

Reserved

8

The setting in the ladder program/ FBD program differs from the attached analog cartridge

Undefined value–

9

The analog cartridge has not been attachedUndefined value

10

The analog cartridge has been attached, but it is set to unused for the Type

Undefined value

11

Analog cartridge unsupported model (FT1A-*12RA-*) has been selected

Undefined value

12 to
65535

Reserved–*1 The analog cartridge version number is printed on the side of the analog cartridge. For details, see “Checking the Version
Number” on page 3-89.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-93

4 Special Functions■ Analog output
Status0

Description
Operating normally

Analog output signal
Current analog output value

1

Reserved

2

Initializing

0 V / 4 mA

3Parameter setting error

Analog output value immediately
before the error occurred

4 to 7–

Reserved–

8

The setting in the ladder program or FBD program differs from the attachedanalog cartridge

9

The analog cartridge has not been attached10

The analog cartridge has been attached, but it is set to unused for the Type 0 V / 4 mA

11

Analog cartridge unsupported model (FT1A-*12RA-*) has been selected–

Reserved

–

12 to
65535

0 V / 4 mA–

For input FB and output FB in FBD programs, only analog value input (AI FB) is supported. Analog value
output is not supported. To output analog values in FBD programs, store the analog output value in therelevant special data register (D8044, D8045, D8176, D8177, D8186, D8187) using a script.

3-94

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions● Procedure
To use analog cartridges, you must configure it in the Function Area Settings tab and download the ladderprogram or FBD program to the Touch.

1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Control Function).

WindLDR starts.

3
Project

2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Cartridges.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 Under Type for the Slot where the analog cartridge is connected, select the type of analog cartridge.

4 Click Configure for the Slot where the analog cartridge is connected.
The Analog Parameters Configuration dialog is displayed. All of the parameters for the analog cartridge can be
configured in this dialog box. The detailed settings vary based on the type of analog cartridge.

5 Enter the filter preset value.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-95

4 Special Functions

6 Under Signal Type, select analog input type for each channel.

7 Under Data Type, select the data type for each channel.

8 If Optional range is selected for Data Type, set the minimum and maximum of analog value for each channel inthe range of -32,768 to 32,767.

9 Click OK to close the Analog Parameters Configuration dialog box.
10 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.

3-96

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions

4.16 Ladder Monitor
This section describes the function to monitor the ladder program on the LCD of the Touch.
The program monitor on the Touch is only enabled when ladder program is selected as the programming language.

You can display the details of instruction parameters or switch the on/off state of contacts using the operation buttons.
The ladder program can be monitored regardless of the Run/Stop status of the Touch.
• The default value of the previously monitored ladder line number is one.
• The previously monitored ladder line number is lost at the following conditions:- Touch is powered up.
- A project is downloaded to the Touch.
In order to monitor the ladder program on the LCD of the Touch, you need to configure settings using WindLDR.
There are two restrictions in creating the ladder programs that can be displayed on the LCD. Create ladder programs
considering those restrictions.
• A maximum of four ladder lines can be programmed in each ladder circuit.
• A maximum of eleven instructions can be programmed in each ladder line.
● Procedure

1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Control Function).

WindLDR starts.

2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click LCD Settings.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 Select the Enable ladder program monitoring on FT1A check box.

4 Click the OK button.
This concludes configuring the settings.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-97

3Project● Feature Description
Two lines of the ladder program stored in the ROM can be displayed on the LCD. You can show the ladder program at
the specified line number by specifying it using the operation buttons. The Touch saves the monitored ladder line whenladder program monitoring is finished, and you can resume to monitor the ladder program from the same ladder line.

4 Special Functions

4.17 Watchdog Timer SettingThis section describes watchdog timer setting with monitoring the operation state of the Touch.
● Feature Description
A watchdog error occurs when the processing time for one scan exceeds the allowed time while the ladder program
or FBD program is running.
If a watchdog error occurs, the system is reset with the purpose of returning the system to normal operation.
If the watchdog error occurs frequently, you can assume that there is a hardware problem and that the Touch
requires replacement.
Some of the reasons why a watchdog timer will occur are problems with the Touch hardware and the length of theprocessing time in the ladder program. If the processing time for one scan of the ladder program exceeds the time
configured for the watchdog timer on the ladder program, place a NOP (no operation) instruction in the ladderprogram. The watchdog timer is reset when the NOP instruction is executed.
For FBD program, the watchdog timer cannot be reset in the program.
Watchdog timer setting time
The watchdog timer setting time can be changed in the function area settings. Decide on the watchdog timer setting
time in either of the following two ways.
• Decide by user system specification
Determine the maximum on time (milliseconds) so the output signals do not stay on if the Touch loses control andset that value as the watchdog timer setting time. However, if the ladder program processing time takes longer
than the design specification, use an NOP (no operation) instruction in the ladder program. For example, when thewatchdog timer is set to 100 milliseconds and the maximum value for one scan is 120 milliseconds on the ladderprogram, insert an NOP instruction in the ladder logic program to ensure that the error does not occur.
• Match the ladder program processing time
Check the maximum value for one scan (D8024) and set the watchdog timer value as a value with a safety margin
added to the maximum value.
Select the watch dog timer setting between 100 milliseconds and 5,000 milliseconds. The default time is 400
milliseconds.
When changing the watchdog timer setting value, select an appropriate value that fully takes into
consideration the safety of the system.
The ladder program or FBD program execution time can be checked with the value of LSD38.

3-98

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions● Procedure

1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Control Function).

WindLDR starts.

3
Project

2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Self Diagnostic.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 Select the preset value for watchdog timer.

4 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-99

4 Special Functions

4.18 Daylight Savings Time
This section describes the function that automatically adjusts the Touch real time clock according to the daylightsavings time settings.
● Feature Description
For regions where the Touch is used that implement daylight savings time, this function can automatically adjust the
Touch clock using the daylight savings time settings. When the time becomes the daylight savings time start time, theclock is set an hour forward. When the time becomes the the daylight savings time end time, the clock is set an hourback.
The Touch adjusts the clock for daylight savings time on the start day and the end day. However, the clock is also
adjusted for daylight savings time under the following conditions.
• When a ladder program or FBD program was downloaded to the Touch.
• When the Touch power is turned on.
When the current time of the Touch internal clock is set using System Area or special data registers, the time is not
adjusted for daylight savings time, even if the time after it was set is within the daylight savings time period. Set theclock to the time adjusted for daylight savings time. The set date and time becomes the date and time after being
adjusted for daylight savings time.
● Procedure
Configure daylight savings time on the Touch.

1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Control Function).

WindLDR starts.

2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Calendar & Clock.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 Select the Enable Daylight Saving Time check box.

4 Configure the start time and the end time. Specify the region using the Region list box.
If you select Custom, you are able to select any desired start time and end time.
RegionStart time
User specified

User specified

USA or Canada

March, 2nd Sunday, 2:00 AM

November, 1st Sunday, 2:00 AM

EuropeMarch, last Sunday, 1:00 AM

October, last Sunday, 1:00 AM

Australia

October, 1st Sunday, 2:00 AM

April, 1st Sunday, 3:00 AM

5 Click OK.

This concludes configuring the settings.

3-100

End time

CustomSmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions

4.19 Clock Function
This section describes the internal clock function on the Touch.

Function

Description

Read clock

The current time (calendar, clock) is updated every 500 milliseconds and automaticallystored in the special data registers.

Set clockSets the current time (calendar, clock). Uses the System Area or special data registers.

Adjust function

When clock data adjust flag M8021 is turned on from off, the seconds for the current time
are rounded up or rounded down based on 30 seconds to correct the seconds data for theinternal clock.
If the current seconds are between 0 and 29 seconds, the seconds are set to 0 when M8021
is turned on from off.
If the current seconds are between 30 and 59 seconds, the minutes are set to + 1 and theseconds are set to 0 when M8021 is turned on from off.
M8013:

This relay turns on if clock write processing or a clock adjust processing could
not be executed normally.

M8014:

This relay turns on if an error occurs while calendar/clock data is read fromthe internal clock to the special data registers (D8008 to D8014).

Calendar/clock error● Adjusting the Date and Time with WindLDR
Set the current time on the Touch with WindLDR.
Procedure

1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Control Function).

WindLDR starts.

2 On the WindLDR Monitor tab, click Monitor.
WindLDR enters monitor mode.

3 On the Online tab, in the PLC group, click Status.
The PLC Status dialog box is displayed.

4 Click Change for Calendar.
The Set Calendar and Time dialog box is displayed. The current time on the computer is displayed in the dialog box as
the initial value. The settings can also be changed as necessary.

5 Click OK.
The date and time configured in the dialog box is written to the Touch.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-101

3
Project● Feature Description
This function enable you to control time based applications such as lighting or air conditioning equipment using thecurrent time data stored in special data registers. The internal clock data is backed up by a secondary lithium battery.
The current time is reset when the backup data is lost, so the current time will need to be set again.

4 Special Functions● Adjusting the Date and Time with Ladder Program or FBD Program
The current time can be set on the Touch by using special data registers D8015 to D8021. Undefined values are
stored in special data registers D8015 to D8021. Always store an appropriate value before turning on M8016, M8017,
or M8020.
■ Calendar Data Write Flag (M8016)
After writing data to special data registers D8015 to D8018, turn M8016 on to set the internal clock with the data in
D8015 to D8018 as the calendar data (year, month, day, day of the week).
■ Clock Data Write Flag (M8017)
After writing data to special data registers D8019 to D8021, turn M8017 on to set the internal clock with the data in
D8019 to D8021 as the clock data (hour, minute, second).
■ Calendar/Clock Data Write Flag (M8020)
After writing data to special data registers D8015 to D8021, turn M8020 on to set the internal clock with the data in
D8015 to D8021 as the calendar data (year, month, day, day of the week) and the clock data (hour, minute, second).

Calendar and clock data storage locations
The calendar/clock data is stored in the following special data registers.
Special dataregister

Description

Range

D8008

Year

0 to 99

D8009

Month

1 to 12Day

1 to 31

Day of the week

0 to 6Hour

0 to 23

D8013

Minute0 to 59

D8014

Second0 to 59

D8015

Year

0 to 99

D8016

Month

1 to 12Day

1 to 31

D8010

Calendar/Clock
Current Data
(Read only)

D8011
D8012

D8017

Calendar/ClockNew Data(Write only)

D8018

Day of the week

0 to 6Hour

0 to 23

D8020

Minute0 to 59

D8021

Second0 to 59

D8019

Setting timing

Every 500 msec
If the scan time is 500 msec
or longer, D8008 to D8014 are
updated with each scan.

–

For the day of the week data, the values below are stored in the special data registers.

3-102

Day of theweek

SundayMondayTuesday

WednesdayThursdayFridaySaturday

Value

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions● Example ladder program 1
This example sets the calendar and clock in a ladder program.
If you turn on M8020 with the new calendar/clock data set in the write-only data registers D8015 to D8021, theinternal clock on the Touch is updated with the current time (calendar, clock). In this example, the Touch internal
clock is set to 9:35:00 on Tuesday February 21, 2012.
S1 –
12

D1 –
D0000

REP

MOV(W)

S1 –
2

D1 –
D0001

REP

MOV(W)

S1 –
21

D1 –
D0002

REP

MOV(W)

S1 –
2

D1 –
D0003

REP

MOV(W)

S1 –
9

D1 –
D0004

REP

MOV(W)

S1 –
35

D1 –
D0005

REP

MOV(W)

S1 –
0

D1 –
D0006

REP

MOV(W)

S1 R
D0000

D1 R
D8015

REP
4

M8120

SOTU
I0000

M0000
SOTU

MOV(W)

I0001

S1 R
D0004

D1 R
D8019

REP
3

M0001

M0000

M8120 is the initialize pulse that turns on for only one scanat the start of operation.
When the Touch starts operating, the new calendar/clock
data is stored in D0000 to D0006 with the MOV (move)
instruction.

When external input I0000 turns on, the new calendar datais stored in special data registers D8015 to D8018.
Internal relay M0000 turns on for one scan only.
When external input I1 turns on, the new clock data isstored in special data registers D8019 to D8021.
Internal relay M0001 turns on for one scan only.
When external input M0000 or M0001 turns on, M8020
turns on and the calendar/clock data is written to theinternal clock.
(M8020: Calendar/Clock Data Write Flag)

M8020

M0001
MOV(W)
M8125

S1 R
D8008

D1 R
D0010

REP
7

M8125 is a special internal relay that is always on during
operation.
While the Touch is running, the current time (calendar,
clock) is stored in D0010 to D0016 with the MOV
instruction.

● Example ladder program 2
When I1 turns on, the seconds on the internal clock are corrected to 0 seconds.

SOTU
I1

M8021

When input I1 turns on, clock data adjust flag M8021 turns on to correct the seconds on the internal clock.
The internal clock backup time is approximately 30 days (25°C TYP). If the power loss time exceeds the
backup time, the retained clock data is lost and the current time is initialized as 00:00:00 on January 1,
2000.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-103

3
Project

MOV(W)

4 Special Functions

4.20 Connection Settings
This section describes the configurations of client/server communication for TCP/IP communication related to the
SmartAXIS control function.
● Feature Description
The SmartAXIS control function is capable of performing remote I/O communication over the Ethernet port using amaximum of three connections.
The connection settings required for performing communication are configured in the Function Area Settings dialog
box.
The remote I/O master can be configured for a maximum of three connections as the communication mode used witheach connection.
For details on the remote I/O function, refer to Chapter 12 “4 Remote I/O” on page 12-46.
● Connection Status Information and Connected IP Address
The connection status with an external device can be confirmed with special internal relays M8110 to M8112. The
When a connection is established with the server, the corresponding special internal relay is turned on. When theconnection is disconnected, the corresponding special internal relay is turned off. The IP addresses of the devices canbe confirmed with special data registers D8110 to D8121.
■ Status Information
Special internal
relay

Description

M8110

Connection 1 Status

M8111

Connection 2 Status

M8112

Connection 3 Status

While a connection is established with the server
or client device, the special internal relay will be
on. When no connection is established, it will be
off.

Read/writeR■ Connected IP Addresses
Special dataregister

3-104

Description

D8110 to D8113

Connection 1
Connected IP Address

D8114 to D8117

Connection 2
Connected IP Address

D8118 to D8121

Connection 3
Connected IP Address

The IP address is stored in the corresponding
special data registers as follows.
Example: IP Address: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd,
D8110=aaa, D8111=bbb, D8112=ccc, D8113=ddd

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

Read/writeR4 Special Functions● Procedure
To perform remote I/O communication using a connection, you must configure the Function Area Settings tab anddownload the ladder program or FBD program to the Touch.

1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Control Function).

WindLDR starts.

3
Project

2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Connection Settings.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 Select Communication Mode for the connection to use.
The settings dialog box for the set communication mode is displayed.
As an example here, Communication Mode is set to Remote I/O Master.
Configure the communication mode allocated to a maximum of three connections.
Set connections that are not used to Unused.

4 Specify the parameters.

5 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-105

4 Special Functions

4.21 Remote Host List
This section describes the remote host list to register and manage the external devices (remote hosts) tocommunicate with on the network.
● Feature Description
When using the following Ethernet communication functions on the Touch, you must register the connections tocommunicate with as remote hosts.
• Remote I/O master
When a remote host is registered, a remote host number is automatically allocated to it.
When using the function listed above, specify the remote host number as the device to communicate with.
● Procedure

1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Control Function).

WindLDR starts.

2 On the WindLDR Project window, double-click Remote Host List.
The Remote Host List dialog box is displayed.
If the Project window is not displayed, on the View tab, in the Workspace group, click Project Window
to display the Project window on the left side of the screen.

3 Click New.
The Remote Host dialog box is displayed.

3-106

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Special Functions

4 Enter the items on the Remote Host dialog.
The Remote Host dialog box is displayed.

3
Project

The remote host is composed of two elements, IP Address and Port.
IP Address:

Specify the remote host with an IP address. The Touch performs communication by establishing aconnection to the specified IP address and port number.

Port:

Specify the port number used in TCP/IP communication.

Comment:

The comment for the remote host can be assigned. The contents or the length of the comment has
no effect on communication.

5 Click Add.
The remote host is registered and reflected in the remote host list.
To register another remote host, repeat the procedure in steps 4 and 5.

6 When you have finished registering all of the remote hosts, click Close.
7 Click(Close).

The Remote Host List dialog box closes.

This concludes configuring the settings.
To delete a registered remote host, select the remote host to delete in the Remote Host List dialog box,
and click Delete.
Once a remote host is deleted, the remote host numbers of the following remote hosts are changed.
This will affect the operation of remote I/O masters that refer to these remote host numbers.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3-107

5 Project Restrictions

5

Project Restrictions

5.1 Download Restrictions■ Project Data Size
The size of the project data that can be downloaded to the Touch is approx. 5 MB max (including additional fonts).
• To check the project data size, on the Home tab, in the Project group, click Target Info. The Target
Information dialog box is displayed. The project data size can be checked with Memory Space (byte)
under Target Runtime Information.
• The project data size varies based on the fonts downloaded to the Touch. For details, refer to Chapter 2“Font Size” on page 2-8.
■ Number of Parts
The number of parts that can be downloaded to the Touch are as follows.
Parts

Number of parts

Total number of Bit Buttons, Word Buttons, Goto Screen Buttons, Multi Buttons, Key Buttons

32,000 max.

Selector switches

200 max.

5.2 Maximum Number of External Devices■ Project
The maximum number of external devices used in global script trigger conditions, user communication trigger
conditions, and global scripts that can be used in a single set of project data is 100 devices.
If the same device address is used in multiple device settings, the number of used devices is counted asone. It is not counted as one device per device setting.
■ Data Log Settings
A maximum of 128 external devices can be used in the Data Log settings.
Even if the same device address is used in multiple device settings, the number of used devices is counted
as one device for each device setting.
■ Scripts
The restrictions on the number of external devices that can be used in a single script are as follows.
Item

Number of devices

Destination external devices

64 max.

Source external devices

64 max.

If the same device address is used in multiple device settings, the number of used devices is counted asone. It is not counted as one device per device setting.

3-108

SmartAXIS Touch User's ManualScreen

Chapter 4This chapter provides an overview of the Touch screen and describes how to setup and operate the screen.

1

Screen Overview

1.1 Screen Types

4

The types of screens can be created with the WindO/I-NV3 are given below.

ScreenTouch

1230
Base Screen

7

8

9

CLR

4

5

6

CAN

1

2

3
ENT

1230

0

.

Popup Screen
7

8

9

4

5

6

1

2

3

CLR
CAN
ENT

0

1230

7

8

9

CLR

4

5

6

CAN

1

2

3

.

Maintenance Screen

ENT0

Screen Type
Base Screen

Screens that canbe created with
WindO/I-NV3

Popup Screen

Screen No.

Description

1 to 3,000

The screen that is displayed when the Touch is in Run Mode. Drawing
objects and functional parts can be created mainly on this screen which
is displayed on the Touch.

1 to 3,015

The Popup Screen that is displayed on the Base Screen when the
Touch is in Run Mode. The size and coordinates of the screen can be
specified and this screen can also be moved on the Base Screen.
A Popup Screen for the standard Keypad*1 will automatically be createdin screen numbers 3,001 to 3,015.

Library Screen

Screenprovided by the
Touch

.

Maintenance
Screen–The screen that registers often used drawing objects and parts to theset WindO/I-NV3. References the registered screen while the project isbeing edited and can copy and appropriate drawing objects and parts
from the screen.
This screen is not included in project data.

–

Using the screen that is displayed when the Touch is in Run Mode, you
can switch from Run Mode to System Mode and load a screen to adjust
Device Monitor and screen brightness.
For details, refer to Chapter 28 “1 Maintenance Screen” on page 28-1.

1.2 Screen Size
The size of the Base Screen is equal the size of the Touch screen. The Base Screen size is 240 x 100 dots.

*1 The Keypad that is displayed when operating Numerical and Character Input parts when Standard is selected under Typein the Keypad menu for Numerical and Character Input parts.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4-1

2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens2

Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens

2.1 Creating ScreensThis section describes how to create Base Screens and Popup Screens.
● Creating a screen

1 On the Home tab, in the Screens group, click the arrow under New.
2 Click Base Screen or Popup Screen.
The Screen Properties dialog box is displayed.

To edit the properties for a Base Screen or Popup Screen that has already been created, double click an areain the editing window with no objects.

3 Change the settings on each tab as necessary, and then click OK.

2.2 Opening Screens● Opening a screen
You can open a single screen that has already been created.
Double click the screen to open in the Project window.

If you right click a screen in the Project window and then click Open Screens, the Open Screens dialog box
is displayed.

4-2

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens● Opening specific screens
You can open multiple screens as a group.

1 On the Home tab, in the Screens group, click the arrow to the right of Open.
2 Click the Base Screen or the Popup Screen.
The Open Screens dialog box is displayed.

4
ScreenIf you right click a screen folder in the Project window and then click Open Screens, the Open Screens
dialog box is displayed.

3 Click the screens to open in Screen List, and then click OK.
To select multiple screens, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

■ Screen Type
Select the type of screen to open from the following items. The selected screen type is displayed in Screen List.
All, Base Screen, Popup Screen■ Screen List
This list shows screens that have already been created.
● Opening the previous or next screen
You can open the screen with the previous screen number or the next screen number of the screen displayed in theactive editing window.

To open the screen with the previous screen number, click(Open Previous Screen) in the Screens group on the

Home tab. To open the screen with the next screen number, click

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual(Open Next Screen).

4-3

2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens

2.3 Saving Screens● Saving a screen
You can save a single screen.
Right click the screen to save in the Project window, and then click Save Screens.

● Saving only specific screens
You can save multiple screens as a group.

1 Right click a screen folder in the Project window, and then click Save Screens.
The Save Screens dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the screens to save in Screen List, and then click OK.
To select multiple screens, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

■ Screen Type
Select the type of screen to save from the following items. The selected screen type is displayed in Screen List.
All, Base Screen, Popup Screen

4-4

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens■ Screen List
This list shows the screens being edited.
■ Select All
Selects all the screens displayed in Screen List.
● Saving a screen with a different screen number
You can save the screen being edited with a different screen number.

1 Right click a screen in the Project window, and then click Save Screen As.

4The Save Screen As dialog box is displayed.

Screen2 Specify the screen number after saving, and then click OK.

■ New No.
Specify the screen number (Base Screen: 1 to 3000, Popup Screen: 1 to 3015) after saving.
■ Screen Title
Enter or change the screen title. The maximum number is 40 characters.
■ Screen List
This list shows screens that have already been created.
If you specify an existing screen number and then click OK, an overwrite confirmation message is displayed.
• Click Yes to overwrite the screen.
• Click No to stop saving the screen.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4-5

2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens

2.4 Closing Screens● Closing the displayed screen
You can close the active editing window.
Clickin the upper-right of the editing window.

● Closing all screens
You can close all the editing windows.
On the View tab, in the Window group, click Close All.

4-6

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens● Closing a specific screen
You can close multiple editing windows as a group.

1 Right click a screen folder in the Project window, and then click Close Screens.
The Close Screens dialog box is displayed.

4
Screen2 Click the screens to close in Screen List, and then click OK.
To select multiple screens, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

■ Screen Type
Select the type of screen to close from the following items. The selected screen type is displayed in Screen List.
All, Base Screen, Popup Screen■ Screen List
This list shows the screens being edited.
■ Select All
Selects all the screens displayed in Screen List.
If you specify an unsaved screen and then click OK, a save confirmation message is displayed.
• Click Yes to save the screen and close it.
• Click No to close the screen without saving the changes.
• Click Cancel to stop saving the screen.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4-7

2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens

2.5 Duplicating Screens
You can copy a screen that has already been created to create a new screen.

1 Right click a screen folder or screen in the Project window, and then click Duplicate Screens.
The Duplicate Screens dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the screens to copy in Screen List.
To select multiple screens, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

3 Specify Screen No. for the new screen and the Number of copies to duplicate, and then click OK.

■ Screen Type
Select the type of screen to duplicate from the following items. The selected screen type is displayed in Screen List.
All, Base Screen, Popup Screen■ Screen List
This list shows screens that have already been created.
■ Screen No.
Specify the screen number (Base Screen: 1 to 3000, Popup Screen: 1 to 3015) for the new screen.
■ Number of copies
Specify the number of screens to copy (Base Screen: 1 to 2999, Popup Screen: 1 to 3014).

4-8

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens• If multiple screens are selected in Screen List or if the Number of copies is 2 or more, consecutive
screen numbers are added to the screens starting with the number specified in Screen No..
Example: When a screen with screen number of 1 is selected in Screen List, the Number of copies is
3, and Screen No. is 100 is selected, then the screen numbers after duplication are “100”,“101”, “102”.
Screen No.: 1
Number of copies: 3
Screen No.: 100
Screen List’s numbers: 1

99

Screen No.: 100
99
Copy

4

Screen No.: 101

Screen99

Screen No.: 102
99

Example: When screens with screen numbers 3 and 5 are selected in Screen List, the Number ofcopies is 2, and Screen No. is 100 is selected, then the screen numbers after duplication are“100” and “102” for the screens duplicated from screen number 3 and “101” and “103” for thescreens duplicated from screen number 5.
Screen No.: 399

Number of copies: 2
Screen No.: 100
Screen List’s numbers: 3, 5

Screen No.: 5
Full

Screen No.: 100
99
Copy

Screen No.: 101
Copy
Full

Screen No.: 102
99

Screen No.: 103
Full• If a screen number already exists after copying and you click OK on the Duplicate Screens dialog box, anoverwrite confirmation message is displayed.
- Click Yes to overwrite the screen with the number displayed in the confirmation message.
- Click Yes To All to overwrite all the screens.
- Click No to display the next confirmation message without copying the screen with the number
displayed in the confirmation message.
- Click Cancel to stop copying screens.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4-9

2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens

2.6 Deleting Screens● Deleting a screen
You can delete a single screen.

1 Right click the screen to delete in the Project window, and then click Delete Screens.
A delete confirmation message is displayed.

2 Click Yes.
The screen is deleted.
Click No or Cancel to stop deleting the screen.

● Deleting specific screens
You can delete multiple screens as a group.

1 On the Home tab, in the Screens group, click Delete.
The Delete Screens dialog box is displayed.

If you right click a screen folder in the Project window and then click Delete Screens, the Delete Screens
dialog box is displayed.

4-10

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens

2 Click the screens to delete in Screen List, and then click OK.
A delete confirmation message is displayed.
To select multiple screens, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

4
Screen■ Screen Type
Select the type of screen to delete from the following items. The selected screen type is displayed in Screen List.
All, Base Screen, Popup Screen■ Screen List
This list shows screens that have already been created.
■ Select All
Selects all the screens displayed in Screen List.

3 Click Yes or Yes To All.
• Click Yes to delete the screen with the number displayed in the confirmation message. When deleting multiple
screens, the next message to confirm deleting a screen is displayed.
• Click Yes To All to delete all the screens without displaying the confirmation message.
• Click No to display the next message to confirm deleting a screen without deleting the screen with the number
displayed in the confirmation message.
• Click Cancel to stop deleting screens.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4-11

2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens

2.7 Reusing Screens
You can copy screens from other project data.

1 On the Home tab, in the Screens group, click Reuse.

If you right click a screen folder or screen in the Project window and then click Reuse Screens, the Opendialog box is displayed.

2 Select project data that includes the screens to copy, and then click OK.
The Open Screens dialog box is displayed.

If a password has been configured for the project data, the Password Screen will be displayed. Select username and enter password.
For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 21-1.

3 Click the screens to copy in Screen List, and then click OK.
To select multiple screens, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

■ Screen Type
Select the type of screen to copy from the following items. The selected screen type is displayed in Screen List.
All, Base Screen, Popup Screen■ Screen List
This list shows screens included in the source project data.

4-12

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens

If the screen number of the screen to copy, a picture included in the screen, a text ID, or a script ID alreadyexists in the project data being edited, an overwrite message is displayed.
• Click Yes to overwrite the item displayed in the confirmation message. If there are multiple redundant
items, a confirmation message is displayed for each of those items.
• Click Yes To All to overwrite all of the picture numbers, pictures, text IDs, and script IDs.
• Click No to display a dialog box for each setting. Change the item to a unique screen number or ID
number, and then click OK.
• Click Cancel to stop overwriting the displayed in the confirmation message. If there are multiple
redundant items, a confirmation message is displayed for each of those items.

4
ScreenSmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4-13

3 Base Screen

3

Base Screen
The screen that is displayed when the Touch is in Run Mode. This screen places drawing objects and parts on the baseand creates a screen that is displayed on the Touch.

3.1 Base Screen Settings● General Tab■ Screen Type
Select Base Screen as the screen type.
You can only select the screen type when creating a new screen.
■ No.
Enter the Base Screen’s screen number (1 to 3000).
■ TitleEnter the Base Screen’s title. The maximum number is 40 characters.
■ SizeShows the screen size. You cannot change the size of Base Screens.
■ Screen List
This list shows screens that have already been created. It is only displayed when creating a new screen.

4-14

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Base Screen● Options Tab

4
Screen■ Background Color
Select the screen’s background color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades). Click this button to open the color
palette. Select color with the color palette.
When Overlay with Base Screen is configured, the background color for the Base Screen specified as the
background is displayed.
■ Backlight color*1
Select the backlight color for the screen from the following options.
“White”, “Red”, “Pink”■ Overlay with Base Screen
Configure this section to display the Base Screen by overlaying screens.
1 to 5:

Select these to display the Base Screen by overlaying screens.

No.:

Enter the overlay screen’s screen number (1 to 3000).

Coordinates X, Y:

Specify the display location of the overlay screen in coordinates. The coordinates can be set in
the range (Screen size - 1 dot).
The origin is the upper-left corner of the screen and the X- and Y-coordinates correspond to theupper-left corner of the overlay window.
X(0, 0)
Base Screen
Y
Overlay screen*1 Monochrome LCD models only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4-15

3 Base Screen■ Display the Order of Overlapping Screens
You can select the display order of the Base Screen and the overlay screens.
Example:To display the Base Screen being edited as the background

Overlay screen(5 screens max)Base Screen being edited

Example: To display the Base Screen being edited above overlay screen: 3

Base Screen being edited
Overlay screen: 3■ Blink
Select one of the following items as the setting when the screen is blinking.
None:

Displays the screen.

Blink (1 sec cycle):

The screen display is blinked in one second intervals.

Blink (0.5 sec cycle):

The screen display is blinked in half second intervals.

Backlight OFF:Turns off the backlight until the screen is touched or until System Area 1 (address+1, bit 0 or
bit 7) is set to 1.

■ Focus Order
Sets the focus order for Numerical Input and Character Input. The focus order is the order the focus moves between
Numerical Input or Character Input when the user presses the ENT key. Text can be input in Numerical Input or
Character Input that has focus. The focus order number starts from 0.
Vertical:The focus moves vertically from top to bottom.

Horizontal:

The focus moves horizontally from left to right.

Custom:Sets the desired order for moving the focus.
On the View tab, in the Screens group, click Focus Order, and then click the parts in theorder to move the focus.
The focus moves in the following order when Numerical Input and Character Input on the screen is not aligned
to the left or top.
Vertical1

Horizontal

1234
4

1

67
3

5
4

2

2

1234

67

890

5
Y-axis up to down

3890
X-axis left to right

4-16

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Base Screen■ Security Group
Select the security group to restrict the screen display.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the User Accounts dialog box.
None:

Any user can open this screen.

Administrator, Operator,
Reader, (Created security group):

Only a selected user can open this screen.

For details about the security function, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4-17

4
ScreenClick
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group in the Security Group Settings
dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups”
on page 21-15.

3 Base Screen

3.2 Displaying Layered Base Screens
It is possible to layer and display multiple Base Screens. The coordinates and display order for layered screens can be
set on the screen that will serve as the base. The maximum number of layered screens is five screens.
■ Coordinates
Using the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left area of the layered screen become the X and Y
coordinates.
X(0, 0)
Base Screen
Y
Overlay screen■ Display Order
This allows you to select the order of display for the screen that will serve as the base and layered screens.
Example:Displaying a Base Screen that is currently being edited as the bottom most layer
Overlay screen(5 screens max)Base Screen being edited

Example: Displaying a Base Screen currently being edited on the layered screen: 3.

Base Screen being edited
Overlay screen: 3

For details about how to configure these settings, refer to “3.1 Base Screen Settings” on page 4-14.
Example: When Base Screen: 100 which has a clock placed in it is used as a layered screen, Base Screen:1 which isdisplayed as the base and Base Screen: 2 will be displayed as follows:
Layered Screen

Base Screen: 1
Displayed as
the base

Base Screen: 100

Base Screen: 2

130

110

100
120
11/Feb./22 Tue. 12:00

Layering

Layering

Display for Base Screen: 1
130

Display for Base Screen: 2

110

100
120
11/Feb./22 Tue. 12:00

4-18

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

11/Feb./22 Tue. 12:00

Displayed as
the base3 Base Screen• Layered screens that have been set as layered screens will not be displayed on the screen that isdisplayed as the base.
Example: Layering and displaying Base Screen: 100 on Base Screen: 1
Layering and displaying Base Screen: 101 on Base Screen: 100
Base Screen: 101
Layered Screen0

Layered Screen

Base Screen: 1
Displayed as
the base

4

Base Screen: 100

Screen130
100
120
11/Feb./22 Tue. 12:00

Layering
Display for Base Screen: 100
0Layering
Display for Base Screen: 1

0

130

130

100

100

120

120
11/Feb./22 Tue. 12:00

11/Feb./22 Tue. 12:00

11/Feb./22 Tue. 12:00

Layered Screen (Base Screen:101) is displayed.

Layered Screen (BaseScreen: 101) is not
displayed.

• Drawing objects and parts from layered screens may not display properly when placed outside of thedisplayed area.
Displayed as the baseLayered Screen
Outside of the display area

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4-19

3 Base Screen

3.3 Operating When Drawing Objects and Parts Overlap
Place drawing objects and parts or parts with other parts so that they do not overlap.
When drawing objects and parts are placed or the screens are layered, if the drawing objects and parts haveoverlapped, the following behaviors will occur.
● When Drawing Objects and Parts Overlap
The parts will always be displayed on the foremost layer.
Example: A case where Base Screen: 2 is layered with base: 1 as the bottom most layer, and the Numerical Display
belonging to Base Screen: 1 and a drawing object belonging to Base Screen: 2 overlap.
Base Screen: 1

Base Screen: 21234

Layering
Display for Base Screen: 1

1234
The Numerical Display for Base Screen: 1 is displayed in front● When Parts Overlap
The following behaviors will occur when data or updated parts are displayed in front.
Example: Base Screen: 2 is layered with base: 1 as the bottom most layer, and the Numerical Display belonging to Base
Screen: 1 and Numerical Display belonging to Base Screen: 2 overlap.
Base Screen: 1

Base Screen: 2

1234

567

Layering
Display for Base Screen: 1
The Numerical Display for Base Screen: 1 and 2 is unchanged
Base Screen: 25671234567

1234

Base Screen: 1

The Numerical Display for Base Screen: 2 is displayed in front
The Numerical Display for Base Screen: 1 is changed
The Numerical Display for Base Screen: 2 is unchanged

The numericalvalue changes

9999567
The Numerical Display for Base Screen: 1 is displayed in front

For the Message Display, Message Switching Display, and Alarm List Display, when the Scroll check box isselected on the Format tab, the display is not correctly displayed when a part overlaps it.

4-20

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Base Screen● When touch switches have overlapped
Pressing the touch switch activates the touch switch of the bottom most Base Screen and displays it in front.
Example: A case where Base Screen: 2 is layered with base: 1 as the bottom most layer (Touch switch two-point
push: disabled)
Base Screen: 1

Base Screen: 2

4
ScreenLayering
Display for Base Screen: 1
The switch for Base Screen: 1 and 2 has not been pressed

The switch for Base Screen: 2 is displayed in front

Press the switch for Base Screen: 2

The switch for Base Screen: 1 activates
The switch for Base Screen: 2 does not activate
The switch for Base Screen: 1 is displayed in front

When touch switch two-point push is enabled, the touch switches will be activated and the display will be
updated in order starting from the switch located one layer above the bottom-most switch. Touch switch twopoint push is selecting the check box labeled Enable Two-point Push under the System tab in the Project
Settings dialog box.

The touch switch two-point push is a function performed on the analog touch panel that activates bothswitches when two overlapped touch switches have been pressed. There is no function that activates bothswitches simultaneously when two switches have been pressed.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4-21

4 Popup Screen

4

Popup Screen
The Popup Screen that is displayed on the Base Screen when the Touch is in Run Mode. The size and coordinates of thescreen can be specified and this screen can also be moved on the Base Screen.

4.1 Popup Screen Settings● General Tab■ Screen Type
Select Popup Screen for the screen type.
You can only select the screen type when creating a new screen.
■ No.
Enter the Popup Screen’s screen number (1 to 3015).
However, screen numbers 3001 to 3015 are Popup Screens for standard Keypads for Numerical Input and Character
Input.
■ FontSelect the font to use for the title from the following choices:Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic
This option can only be selected when Use Text Manager is cleared.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this to use text registered in Text Manager for the screen title.
However, the text color is white, not the color set in Text Manager.
■ Text ID
Specify the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) to use text registered in Text Manager. Click
Manager.

to display Text

This option can only be set when Use Text Manager is selected.
■ TitleEnter the Popup Screen’s title. The maximum number is 40 characters. This title is displayed in the Popup Screen’s title
bar.
This option can only be entered when Use Text Manager is cleared.
To enter Unicode text, click
dialog box, and then click OK.

4-22

to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the text in the Unicode Input

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Popup Screen■ SizeWidth, Height: Specify the width (40 dots to Base Screen width) and the height (40 dots to Base Screen height) of the
Popup Screen.
■ Screen List
This list shows screens that have already been created. It is only displayed when creating a new screen.
● Options Tab

4
Screen■ Background Color
Select the screen’s background color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades). Click this button to open the color
palette. Select the color with the color palette.
■ Superimpose
Displays the Popup Screen’s background as completely transparent. The screen underneath the popup screen can beseen.
If you select Superimpose, the buttons underneath the Popup Screen set to superimpose are active.

■ Title Bar
Select this to display the title bar on the Popup Screen. The text set in Title on the General tab is displayed in the title
bar.
The title bar is not displayed if superimpose is set.
Move Button:

Select this to display the(Move) button on the title bar.

Close Button:

Select this to display the(Close) button on the title bar.

■ Close while changing Base Screen
Select this to close the displayed Popup Screen when changing the Base Screen.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4-23

4 Popup Screen■ Focus Order
Sets the focus order for Numerical Input and Character Input. The focus order is the order the focus moves between
Numerical Input or Character Input when the user presses the ENT key. Text can be input in Numerical Input or
Character Input that has focus. The focus order number starts from 0.
Vertical:The focus moves vertically from top to bottom.

Horizontal:

The focus moves horizontally from left to right.

Custom:Sets the desired order for moving the focus.
On the View tab, in the Screens group, click Focus Order, and then click the parts in the order tomove the focus.
The focus moves in the following order when Numerical Input and Character Input on the screen is not aligned
to the left or top.
Vertical1

Horizontal

1234
4

1

67
3

5
4

2

2

1234

67

890

5
Y-axis up to down

3890
X-axis left to right■ Security Group
Select a security group to restrict displaying the screen.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the User Accounts dialog box.
None:

Any user can open this screen.

Administrator, Operator,
Reader, (Created security group):

Only selected users can open this screen.

Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security Group Settings
dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups”
on page 21-15.
For details about the security function, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.

4-24

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Popup Screen

4.2 Popup Screen Configuration
Title Bar
Move Button

Close Button

Screen Display Area

4
Screen■ Title Bar
Displays buttons and the title of the Popup Screen.
Pressing the title bar of the screen allows you to move the screen to the front.
Touch

Touch

Touch

When there is a title bar on the Popup Screen, touch switches that are within 20 dots of the title bar will not
respond.
■(Move)
Moves the Popup Screen.

1 Press

2 Press the position where the.

screen will be moved to.

Touch

3 The screen will move the position
that was pressed.

Touch

Touch

The location that was touched will
become the location of.

• The Popup Screen can be moved in the range where

can be displayed.

• The Popup Screen will be moved in units of 1 dot.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4-25

4 Popup Screen■(Close)Closes the Popup Screen.

■ Screen Display Area
The area where drawing objects and parts are placed.

4.3 Standard Keypad Popup Screen
A Popup Screen that places a regular Keypad used for Numerical and Character Input on screen numbers 3001 to 3015
with the WindO/I-NV3.
Decimal (Number Value) Keypad

Uppercase (Alphabet) Keypad• The Standard Keypad Popup Screen can also place drawing objects and parts in the same manner as
Popup Screen numbers 1 to 3000.
• Screen numbers 3001 to 3015 are screen numbers that are empty when a new project has been created
and are handled as normal Popup Screens.
• Deleting a Standard Keypad Popup Screen and recreating a new Popup Screen of the same screen
number will place the same Keypad.

4-26

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Screen Restrictions

5

Screen Restrictions

5.1 Screen Number Restrictions
The number of screens and layered screens that can be created in a single project and the number of Popup Screensthat can be displayed on the Base Screen are as follows:

4
Item

Screen■ Base Screen
Number of screens

Number of screens that can be created

3,000 max.

Number of layered screens

5 max.

■ Popup Screen
Item

Number of screens

Number of screens that can be created

3,015 max.

Number of screens that can be displayed on the Base Screen

3 max. (Including the Device Monitor and Ladder
Monitor*1)

5.2 Maximum Number of Parts■ Number of Parts That Can be Placed on a Single Screen
ScreenNumber of Parts

Base Screen

960 max.

Popup Screen

480 max.

■ Number of Parts That Can be Displayed on a Single Screen
In addition to the currently displayed Base Screen, this includes layered screens and currently displayed Popup Screens.
Parts

Number of Parts

Alarm List Display, Alarm Log Display

Limit to 1. Either one but can't be both.

Numerical Inputs and Character Inputs in a constant state of
input

Limit to 1. Either one but can't be both.

Potentiometer

32 max.

Numerical Input

255 max.

Character Input

255 max.

*1 The maintenance screen is not included.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4-27

5 Screen Restrictions

5.3 Maximum Number of External Device Address
The number of write-destination devices for usable external device addresses and the number of read-source devices
from the external device addresses differ depending on the screen type.

■ Base Screen (Includes Layered Screens)
External Device Address

Number of Devices

Write-destination Device

512 max.

Read-source Devices

256 max.

■ Popup Screen
External Device Address

Number of Devices

Write-destination Device

128 max.

Read-source Devices

64 max.

If the same device address is used in multiple device settings, the used number of devices will be counted as
one device. It will not be counted as one point per device setting.

5.4 Vertical Installation Restrictions
Even if you choose for them to be installed and displayed vertically, the next screen will be the same as horizontal
installation and display.
• System Mode
• Maintenance Screen• Brightness/contrast adjustment screen*1, brightness adjustment screen*2• Password Screen*1 Monochrome LCD models only
*2 Color LCD models only

4-28

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6 Using Library Screens

6

Using Library Screens

6.1 What You Can Do with Library ScreensCreating Library Screens

Library 1

Library 2

Library 3

Project data 1
Copying drawing objects andparts on Library Screen

Project data 2

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Project data 34-29

4Screen

A Library Screen is a screen where you can register frequently used drawing objects, parts, and operations in
WindO/I-NV3. These screens can be accessed while editing project data. You can quickly create screens by using Library
Screens.
To copy Library Screens to other computers and use them as common Library Screens, use the import and exportfunctions.

6 Using Library Screens

6.2 Creating a Library Screen
1 On the Home tab, in the Screens group, click ▼ under New.
2 Click the Library Screen.
The Create Library dialog box is displayed.

3 Enter a name in New Library and then click OK.
The Library Screen is displayed.

■ New LibraryEnter the name for the Library Screen. Maximum number is 40 characters.
You cannot use the following characters in the library name.
.\/:*?"<>|■ Library List
This list displays the registered Library Screens.

4 Configure parts and drawing objects in the Library Screen and create the screen.

4-30

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6 Using Library Screens

5 When you are finished creating the Library Screen, clickin the upper right of the screen.

A save confirmation message is displayed.

6 Click Yes.
This saves the Library Screen and then closes it.
Click No to close the Library Screen without saving it.
Click Cancel to return to the editing window without saving the Library Screen.

4
Screen6.3 Using a Library Screen
Open a registered Library Screen to use for creating a Base Screen or Popup Screen.

1 On the Home tab, in the Screens group, click ▼ to the right of Open.
2 Click the Library Screen.
The Open Library dialog box is displayed.

3 Select the Library Screen and then click OK.
To select multiple screens,

Shift

key + click the specific screens or

Ctrl

key + click the specific screens.

■ Library List
This list displays registered Library Screens.
■ Delete
Deletes the Library Screen selected in Library List.
■ Import
Imports an exported Library Screen.
■ Export
Exports the Library Screen selected in Library List.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4-31

6 Using Library Screens

4 Drag and drop or copy and paste objects to use from the Library Screen to the screen being edited.

Drag and drop

Editing Screen

Library Screen

You can re-edit objects placed on the edited screen from the Library Screen.

4-32

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6 Using Library Screens

6.4 Deleting Library Screens
You can delete multiple Library Screens as a group.

1 On the Home tab, in the Screens group, click ▼ to the right of Open.
2 Click the Library Screen.
The Open Library dialog box is displayed.

4
Screen3 Select the Library Screen to delete in Library List and then click Delete.
A delete confirmation message is displayed.
To select multiple screens,

Shift

key + click the specific screens or

Ctrl

key + click the specific screens.

4 Click Yes or Yes To All.
• Click Yes to delete the Library Screen with the library name displayed in the confirmation message. When deleting
multiple Library Screens, the next message to confirm deleting a Library Screen is displayed.
• Click Yes to All to delete all the Library Screens without displaying the confirmation message.
• Click No to display the next message to confirm deleting a Library Screen without deleting the Library Screen withthe library name displayed in the confirmation message. You will return to the editing window when finishedconfirming all the Library Screens.
• Click Cancel to stop deleting Library Screens and return to the editing window.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4-33

6 Using Library Screens

6.5 Exporting Library Screens
To use created Library Screens on another computer, export those Library Screens.

1 On the Home tab, in the Screens group, click ▼ to the right of Open.
2 Click the Library Screen.
The Open Library dialog box is displayed.

3 Select the Library Screens to export in Library List and then click Export.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.
To select multiple screens,

Shift

key + click the specific screens or

4 Specify Save in and click Save.

4-34

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualCtrl

key + click the specific screens.

6 Using Library Screens

6.6 Importing Library Screens
To use Library Screens created on another computer, import those exported Library Screens into WindO/I-NV3.

1 On the Home tab, in the Screens group, click ▼ to the right of Open.
2 Click the Library Screen.
The Open Library dialog box is displayed.

4
Screen3 Click Import.
The Open dialog box is displayed.

4 Select a Library Screen file (*.r2f) and click Open.
The imported Library Screen is displayed in Library List.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4-35

6 Using Library Screens

4-36

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualChapter 5

Drawings and Parts

This chapter contains an overview of drawings and parts that are used when creating a screen and a description of
the types of drawings and parts.

1

Overview
Drawings and parts are used by placing them on Base Screens and Popup Screens.
Drawings include objects such as straight lines, polygons, circles, pictures, and static text.

5

Touch

Text

Drawings and Parts

Equilateral Triangle
Line

CautionPolyline
PictureParts are objects that generate a variety of events when triggered by a change in the values of devices or by touch.
Touch

Numerical Input

External device

D10:

80

D11:

25

D12:

2

D13:

0

D14:

0

D15:

0

Numerical Display
0

80
25
2

Line Chart
Picture Display

Tank 1

Empty

Message Display
Pilot Lamp
Selector Switch

Touch
External device

D10:

99

D11:

82

D12:

5

D13:

1

D14:

1

D15:

1

0

99
82
5

Parts changed to reflectchanges in the values of devices

Tank 1

Full

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5-1

2 Drawing Objects

2

Drawing Objects
This section describes the drawing objects that can be drawn in WindO/I-NV3.

2.1 Shapes
ShapesBasic Shapes

Line

Function
Draws a line.

Polyline

Draws a polyline.

PolygonDraws an object that connects two or more vertices with straight lines.

Rectangle

Draws a rectangle.

Circle/Ellipse

Draws a circle or ellipse.

Arc

Draws an elliptical arc.

Pie

Draws a pie.

Equilateral Polygon

Draws a equilateral polygon. (triangle, diamond, pentagon, hexagon, or octagon)

Paint

Paints the closed region of the drawing object.

2.2 Picture
Loads drawing objects that are registered in Picture Manager onto the edit screen.

2.3 Text
Draws text. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
Loads text that is registered in Text Manager.

5-2

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Part Types

3

Part Types
This section describes the parts that can be used on the Touch.

3.1 Buttons
Part

Description
Writes a 0 or 1 to a bit device.

Word Button

Writes a value to a word device. Can be used to indirectly specify the destination address orto perform operations on the written value.

Goto Screen Button

Switches to another screen or displays a window.

Key Button

Performs a variety of functions including uploading and downloading, copying files, andoperating other parts.

Multi-Button

Executes multiple commands at once.

KeypadA part comprised of Key Buttons. Enters numbers and characters into numerical orcharacter input parts.

Selector Switch

Writes a 0 or 1 to a bit device. This is an exclusive control that only writes a single value as
1 and all other values as 0.

Potentiometer

Writes a value selected by pressing a slider button to a word device.

3.2 Lamps
Part

Description

Pilot Lamp

Displays images. Switches the displayed image according to the value of a bit device.

Multi-State Lamp

Displays images. Switches the displayed image according to the value of a word device.

3.3 Data Displays
Part

Description

Numerical Input

Uses either a Keypad or Key Button to write entered numbers.

Character Input

Uses either a Keypad or Key Button to write the character code for entered characters.

Picture Display

Displays images. Switches, moves or enlarges/reduces the displayed image according to thevalue of a word device, the bit status within a word device or at a fixed period.

Message Display

Loads fixed text strings and values of word device as character codes and displays them on
the screen.

Message Switching Display

Switches the displayed fixed text string according to the value of a word device or the bit
status within a word device.

Alarm List Display

Switches the displayed fixed text string according to the value of device. Can display alarms
and multiple fixed text strings.

Alarm Log Display

Displays the alarm log stored in the internal memory of the Touch.

Numerical Display

Displays the numerical in the specified format.

Calendar

Displays the date and time using the Touch's calendar data.

3.4 Charts
Part

Description

Bar Chart

Displays values of devices in a Bar Chart.

Line Chart

Displays data logs and values of devices in a Line Chart.

Pie Chart

Displays values of devices in a Pie Chart.

Meter

Displays values of devices using a needle gauge.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5-3

5Drawings and Parts

Bit Button

3 Part Types

3.5 Commands
Part

5-4

Description

Bit Write Command

Writes a 0 or 1 to a bit device when certain trigger conditions are satisfied.

Word Write Command

Writes a value to a word device when certain trigger conditions are satisfied. Can be used toindirectly specify the destination address or to perform operations on the written value.

Goto Screen Command

Switches to another screen or displays a window when certain trigger conditions are
satisfied.

Script Command

Executes a script when certain trigger conditions are satisfied.

Multi-Command

Executes multiple commands at once when certain trigger conditions are satisfied.

Timer

Starts a countdown when certain trigger conditions are satisfied, and writes 1 to an internal
device (HMI Timer Relay LTC) after the set time has elapsed.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualChapter 6

Drawings

This chapter describes the procedures for drawing with shapes and the procedures for configuring pictures and text.

1

Shapes

1.1 Line● Line Drawing Procedure
This section describes the procedure for drawing lines.

1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click
The mouse cursor changes to(Line) under Basic Shapes.

(pencil).

6
Drawings

2 Click and hold the mouse button at the location (starting point) to start drawing the line on the edit screen.
3 Drag the mouse to the ending point location.
A line is drawn that connects the starting point and ending point.

Drag
Starting
point

Endingpoint

To change the style of the drawn line, perform one of the following operations.
• Double click the line to open the Properties dialog box• Select the line and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab• Select the line and right click to display the popup menu

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6-1

1 Shapes● Properties of Line Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

■ Line Width
Selects the line width for the line from the following.
1 dot, 2 dots, 3 dots, 5 dots
3 dots and 5 dots can only be configured when Solid is selected for Line Type.
■ Line Type
Selects the line type for the line from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be configured when 1 dot or 2 dots
is selected for Line Width.
■ Line Color
Selects the line color for the line (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Blink
Select this check box to make the line blink.
The blink interval is specified with Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Point1, Point2
X, Y:

Specifies the starting point and ending point of the line in coordinates.
The upper-left corner of the screen is the origin.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)YLine
Starting
point Ending
point

6-2

ScreenSmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Shapes

1.2 Polyline● Polyline Drawing Procedure
This section describes the procedure for drawing polylines.

1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click
The mouse cursor changes to(Polyline) under Basic Shapes.

(pencil).

6
Drawings

2 Click at the location (starting point) to start drawing the polyline on the edit screen.
3 Click the corner point locations in order.
A line is drawn that connects the starting point and the various corner point locations in the order that they werecreated.

4 Double click at the ending point location.
A line is drawn that connects the last corner point and the ending point.

Starting
point

Cornerpoint

Cornerpoint

Endingpoint

The maximum number of corner points in a polyline, including the starting point and the ending point, is
300 points.
• To change the style of the drawn polyline, perform one of the following operations.
- Double click the polyline to open the Properties dialog box- Select the polyline and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab- Select the polyline and right click to display the popup menu
• To change the starting point, corner points, or the ending point of the drawn polyline, select the polyline
and right click on it, and then click Reshape.

is displayed on the polyline. Draglocation. Double click the edit screen or press theto the desired

key to finish changing the shape.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6-3

1 Shapes● Properties of Polyline Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

■ Line Width
Selects the line width for the polyline from the following.
1 dot, 2 dots, 3 dots, 5 dots
3 dots and 5 dots can only be configured when Solid is selected for Line Type.
■ Line Type
Selects the line type for the polyline from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be configured when 1 dot or 2 dots
is selected for Line Width.
■ Line Color
Selects the line color for the polyline (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Blink
Select this check box to make the polyline blink.
The blink interval is specified with Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Coordinates
X, Y:Specifies the display position of the polyline in coordinates.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the rectangle thatcircumscribes the polyline is the X and Y coordinates.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)Y

Polyline
Screen■ SizeW, H:

Specifies the size of the polyline in width and height.
W:

1 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

1 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

HeightPolyline
Screen6-4

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Shapes

1.3 Polygon● Polygon Drawing Procedure
This section describes the procedure for drawing polygons.

1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click
The mouse cursor changes to(Polygon) under Basic Shapes.

(pencil).

6
Drawings

2 Click at the location (starting point) to start drawing the polygon on the edit screen.
3 Click the corner point locations in order.
A line is drawn that connects the starting point and the various corner point locations in the order that they werecreated.

4 Double click at the ending point location.
A polygon is drawn with the starting point and ending point connected.

Cornerpoint

Starting
point

Cornerpoint

Endingpoint• To change the style of the drawn polygon, perform one of the following operations.
- Double click the polygon to open the Properties dialog box- Select the polygon and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab- Select the polygon and right click to display the popup menu
• To change the starting point, corner points, or the ending point of the drawn polygon, select the polygon
and right click on it, and then click Reshape.

is displayed on the polygon. Draglocation. Double click the edit screen or press theto the desired

key to finish changing the shape.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6-5

1 Shapes● Properties of Polygon Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

■ Line Width
Selects the line width for the polygon from the following.
1 dot, 2 dots, 3 dots, 5 dots
3 dots and 5 dots can only be configured when Solid is selected for Line Type.
■ Line Type
Selects the line type for the polygon from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be configured when 1 dot or 2 dots
is selected for Line Width.
■ Foreground Color, Background Color
Selects the foreground color and the background color to use for the polygon (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8
shades).
Click either button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Pattern
Selects the pattern for the polygon.
Click this button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
■ Blink
Select this check box to make the polygon blink.
The blink interval is specified with Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Coordinates
X, Y:Specifies the display position of the polygon in coordinates.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the rectangle thatcircumscribes the polygon is the X and Y coordinates.
X:
0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:
0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Polygon■ SizeW, H:

Specifies the size of the polygon in width and height.
W:
1 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:
1 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

ScreenHeight6-6

PolygonSmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Shapes

1.4 Rectangle● Rectangle Drawing Procedure
This section describes the procedure for drawing rectangles.

1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click
The mouse cursor changes to(Rectangle) under Basic Shapes.

(pencil).

6
Drawings

2 Click and hold the mouse button at the location (starting point) to start drawing the rectangle on the edit screen.
3 Drag the mouse to the ending point location so that location becomes the opposite angle of the rectangle.
A rectangle is drawn with the starting point and ending point set to opposite angles.
Starting
point

Drag

Endingpoint

To change the style of the drawn rectangle, perform one of the following operations.
• Double click the rectangle to open the Properties dialog box• Select the rectangle and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab• Select the rectangle and right click to display the popup menu

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6-7

1 Shapes● Properties of Rectangle Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

■ Line Width
Selects the line width for the rectangle from the following.
1 dot, 3 dots, 5 dots
3 dots and 5 dots can only be configured when Solid is selected for Line Type.
■ Line Type
Selects the line type for the rectangle from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be configured when 1 dot is selectedfor Line Width.
■ Foreground Color, Background Color
Selects the foreground color and the background color to use for the rectangle (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8
shades).
Click either button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Pattern
Selects the pattern for the rectangle.
Click this button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
■ Blink
Select this check box to make the rectangle blink.
The blink interval is specified with Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Round Type
Selects the style of the rectangle's corners from the following.
None, Curve, Straight
None

Curve

Straight■ Round RadiusSpecifies the rounding radius (1 to 200). However, the range that can be configured is where round radius x 2 is avalue smaller than Size W and Size H.
This option can only be configured when Curve or Straight is selected for Round Type.

6-8

For Curve

For StraightRound RadiusRound Radius

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Shapes■ Shadow
Selects the style of shadow attached to the rectangle from the following. This option draws the rectangle in a threedimensional manner.
None, Convex, Concave
This option can only be configured when 1 dot is selected for Line Width and Solid is selected for Line Type.
None

ConvexConcave■ Coordinates
X, Y:Specifies the display position of the rectangle in coordinates.

X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Rectangle■ SizeW, H:

Specifies the size of the rectangle in width and height.
W:

1 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

1 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

ScreenHeightRectangle

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6-9

6Drawings

With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the rectangle is the X
and Y coordinates.

1 Shapes

1.5 Circle/Ellipse● Circle/Ellipse Drawing Procedure
This section describes the procedure for drawing circles and ellipses.

1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click
The mouse cursor changes to(Circle/Ellipse) under Basic Shapes.

(pencil).

2 Click and hold the mouse button at the location (starting point) to start drawing the circle or ellipse on the edit
screen.

3 Drag the mouse to the ending point location so that location becomes the opposite angle of the rectangle.
A circle or ellipse is drawn that inscribes the rectangle made from the opposite angles of the starting point and theending point.

Starting
point

Drag

Endingpoint

To change the style of the drawn circle or ellipse, perform one of the following operations.
• Double click the circle or ellipse to open the Properties dialog box• Select the circle or ellipse and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab• Select the circle or ellipse and right click to display the popup menu

6-10

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Shapes● Properties of Circle/Ellipse Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

6
Drawings■ Line Width
Selects the line width for the circle or ellipse from the following.
1 dot, 3 dots, 5 dots
3 dots and 5 dots can only be configured when Solid is selected for Line Type.
■ Line Type
Selects the line type for the circle or ellipse from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be configured when 1 dot is selectedfor Line Width.
■ Foreground Color, Background Color
Selects the foreground color and the background color to use for the circle or ellipse (color: 256 colors, monochrome:
8 shades).
Click either button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Pattern
Selects the pattern for the circle or ellipse.
Click this button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
■ Blink
Select this check box to make the circle or ellipse blink.
The blink interval is specified with Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Shadow
Selects the style of shadow attached to the circle or ellipse from the following. This option draws the circle or ellipse
in a three-dimensional manner.
None, Convex, Concave
This option can only be configured when 1 dot is selected for Line Width and Solid is selected for Line Type.
ConvexConvexSmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Concave

6-11

1 Shapes■ Coordinates
X, Y:Specifies the display position of the circle or ellipse in coordinates.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the rectangle thatcircumscribes the circle or ellipse is the X and Y coordinates.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Circle/ellipse■ SizeW, H:

Specifies the size of the circle or ellipse in width and height.
W:

3 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

3 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

ScreenHeight6-12

Circle/ellipse

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Shapes

1.6 Arc● Arc Drawing Procedure
This section describes the procedure for drawing arcs.

1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click
The mouse cursor changes to(Arc) under Basic Shapes.

(pencil).

6
3 Drag the mouse to the ending point location so that location becomes the opposite angle of the rectangle.
An arc is drawn that inscribes the rectangle made from the opposite angles of the starting point and the ending point.

Starting
point

Drag

Endingpoint• To change the style of the drawn arc, perform one of the following operations.
- Double click the arc to open the Properties dialog box- Select the arc and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab- Select the arc and right click to display the popup menu
• To change the starting point or the ending point of the drawn arc, select the arc and right click on it, andthen click Reshape.
screen or press theis displayed on the arc. Dragto the desired location. Double click the edit

key to finish changing the shape.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6-13

Drawings

2 Click and hold the mouse button at the location (starting point) to start drawing the arc on the edit screen.

1 Shapes● Properties of Arc Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

■ Line Width
Selects the line width for the arc from the following.
1 dot, 3 dots, 5 dots
3 dots and 5 dots can only be configured when Solid is selected for Line Type.
■ Line Type
Selects the line type for the arc from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be configured when 1 dot is selectedfor Line Width.
■ Line Color
Selects the line color for the arc (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Blink
Select this check box to make the arc blink.
The blink interval is specified with Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Coordinates
X, Y:Specifies the display position of the arc in coordinates.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the rectangle thatcircumscribes the arc is the X and Y coordinates.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenArcY■ SizeW, H:

Specifies the size of the arc in width and height.
W:

3 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

3 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

Height

6-14

ScreenArc

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Shapes

1.7 Pie● Pie Drawing Procedure
This section describes the procedure for drawing pies.

1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click
The mouse cursor changes to(Pie) under Basic Shapes.

(pencil).

6
3 Drag the mouse to the ending point location so that location becomes the opposite angle of the rectangle.
A pie is drawn that inscribes the rectangle made from the opposite angles of the starting point and the ending point.

Starting
point

Drag

Endingpoint• To change the style of the drawn pie, perform one of the following operations.
- Double click the pie to open the Properties dialog box- Select the pie and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab- Select the pie and right click to display the popup menu
• To change the central angle of the drawn pie, select the pie and right click on it, and then click Reshape.
is displayed on the pie. Dragto the desired location. Double click the edit screen or press the

key to finish changing the shape.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6-15

Drawings

2 Click and hold the mouse button at the location (starting point) to start drawing the pie on the edit screen.

1 Shapes● Properties of Pie Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

■ Line Width
Selects the line width for the pie from the following.
1 dot, 3 dots, 5 dots
3 dots and 5 dots can only be configured when Solid is selected for Line Type.
■ Line Type
Selects the line type for the pie from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be configured when 1 dot is selectedfor Line Width.
■ Foreground Color, Background Color
Selects the foreground color and the background color to use for the pie (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click either button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Pattern
Selects the pattern for the pie.
Click this button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
■ Blink
Select this check box to make the pie blink.
The blink interval is specified with Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Coordinates
X, Y:Specifies the display position of the pie in coordinates.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the rectangle thatcircumscribes the circle with the same center as the pie is the X and Y coordinates.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
Y

6-16

ScreenPie

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Shapes■ SizeW, H:

Specifies the size of the pie in width and height.
W:

3 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

3 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

ScreenHeightPie

6
Drawings

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6-17

1 Shapes

1.8 Equilateral Polygons● Equilateral Polygons Drawing Procedure
This section describes the procedure to draw equilateral polygons (equilateral triangle, equilateral diamond,
equilateral pentagon, equilateral hexagon, equilateral octagon).

1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click
Diamond),
Polygons.

(Equilateral Pentagon),

The mouse cursor changes to(Equilateral Hexagon), or(Equilateral Triangle),(Equilateral(Equilateral Octagon) under Equilateral(pencil).

2 Click and hold the mouse button at the location (starting point) on the edit screen to start drawing the square that will
circumscribe the equilateral polygon.

3 Drag the mouse to the ending point location so that location becomes the opposite angle of the square.
An equilateral polygon is drawn that inscribes the square made from the opposite angles of the starting point and theending point.
Starting
point

Drag

Endingpoint

To change the style of the drawn square, perform one of the following operations.
• Double click the square to open the Properties dialog box• Select the square and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab• Select the square and right click to display the popup menu

6-18

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Shapes● Properties of Equilateral Polygon Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

6
Drawings■ Line Width
Selects the line width for the equilateral polygon from the following.
1 dot, 2 dots, 3 dots, 5 dots
3 dots and 5 dots can only be configured when Solid is selected for Line Type.
■ Line Type
Selects the line type for the equilateral polygon from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be configured when 1 dot or 2 dots
is selected for Line Width.
■ Foreground Color, Background Color
Selects the foreground color and the background color to use for the equilateral polygon (color: 256 colors,monochrome: 8 shades).
Click either button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Pattern
Selects the pattern for the equilateral polygon.
Click this button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
■ Blink
Select this check box to make the equilateral polygon blink.
The blink interval is specified with Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Coordinates
X, Y:Specifies the display position of the equilateral polygon in coordinates.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the square thatcircumscribes the equilateral polygon is the X and Y coordinates.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)Y

ScreenEquilateral polygon

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6-19

1 Shapes■ SizeW, H:

Specifies the size of the equilateral polygon in width and height.
W:

1 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

1 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

ScreenHeight6-20

Equilateral polygon

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Shapes

1.9 Fill● Fill Configuration Procedure
This section describes the fill configuration procedure.

1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click
The mouse cursor changes to(Fill) under Fill.

(pencil).

6
The section where multiple shapes overlap is filled with the Foreground Color, Background Color, and Patternof the shape last drawn or the shape that last had its style changed. The clicked location is the fill starting point.

Fill starting point• To change the fill style, perform one of the following operations.
- Double click the fill starting point to open the Properties dialog box- Select the fill starting point and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab- Select the fill starting point and right click to display the popup menu
• If you move the fill starting point, the closed region where it was moved to is filled.

Fill starting point

Fill starting point• To select the fill starting point, clickon the edit screen or select Fill on the Object List window.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6-21

Drawings

2 Click on a section where multiple shapes overlap on the edit screen.

1 Shapes● Properties of Fill Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

■ Foreground Color, Background Color
Selects the foreground color and the background color to fill with (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click either button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Pattern
Selects the pattern to fill with.
Click this button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
■ Coordinates
X, Y:Specifies the display position of the fill start position in coordinates.
The upper-left corner of the screen is the origin.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

6-22

Fill start point

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Picture

2

Picture2.1 Picture Configuration Procedure
This section describes the picture configuration procedure.

1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Picture.
The mouse cursor changes to(picture).

6
Drawings

2 Click the location on the edit screen to place the picture.
Picture Manager is displayed.

3 Select a picture, and then click Select.
The selected picture, is placed on the screen.

To change the picture that was placed on the screen, perform one of the following operations.
• Double click the picture to open the Properties dialog box, and then click Browse• Replace the picture in Picture Manager

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6-23

2 Picture

2.2 Properties of Picture Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

■ Browse
Changes the picture placed on the screen. Click this button to display Picture Manager.
■ Blink
Select this check box to make the picture blink.
The blink interval is specified with Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Coordinates
X, Y:Specifies the display position of the picture in coordinates.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the rectangle thatcircumscribes the picture is the X and Y coordinates.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Picture■ SizeW, H:

Specifies the size of the picture in width and height.
W:

1 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

1 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

ScreenHeight6-24

PictureSmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Text3

Text

3.1 Text Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for text.

1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Text.
The mouse cursor changes to(text).

6
Drawings

2 Click the location on the edit screen to place the text.
The Properties of Text dialog box is displayed.

3 Enter the text to display in Text and configure the options as necessary.
The maximum number is 3,750 characters.

4 Click OK.
The text is placed on the screen.
To change the style of the text placed on the screen, perform one of the following operations. You canchange the entered text in the Properties dialog box.
• Double click the text to open the Properties dialog box• Select the text and select the style with Text Style on the Format tab• Select the text and right click to display the popup menu

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6-25

3 Text

3.2 Properties of Text dialog box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

■ FontSelects the font to use to display text from the following.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic, Windows
This option can only be configured if the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
■ StyleSelects the style of text from the following.
Regular, Bold, Shadow
This option can only be configured when Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central
European, Baltic, or Cyrillic is selected for Font.
■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-5.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects text alignment in the vertical direction.
Top, Center, Bottom
Top when the Vertical Writing check box is selected.
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-5.
■ Vertical Writing
Select this check box to display text vertically.
This option can only be configured when Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central
European, Baltic, or Cyrillic is selected for Font.
When the Vertical Writing check box is selected, take care about the following points. This is applicablefor installations of Windows that support East Asian characters.
• When there is a mixture of double-byte and single-byte characters, the half-width characters are leftaligned.
Aligned toleft edge• Dashes are displayed horizontally. Symbols representing voiced and semi-voiced sounds of single-bytecharacters are shown as follows.
Horizontal
display
Next
characters

6-26

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Text■ Windows Font
Configures the font to use as the Windows Font.
Select Windows for Font to display the current settings. To change the settings, click Change to display the Font
Settings dialog box.
This option can only be configured if the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-12.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box to use text registered in Text Manager.
■ Text ID
Specifies the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) when using text registered in Text Manager.
Click

to display Text Manager.

This option can only be configured when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.

6

The characters that can be entered vary based on the font selected by Font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2
Available Text” on page 2-5.
This option can only be configured if the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
• To enter Unicode characters, click
to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the characters in
the Unicode Input dialog box, and then click OK.
• A newline is counted as two characters.
■ Text Color
Selects the color for the displayed text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Magnification
W, H:
Selects the zoom factor for characters (0.5, 1 to 8).
This option can only be configured when Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central
European, Baltic, or Cyrillic is selected for Font.
■ Background Color
Selects the background color for the text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Animation
Selects whether or not to make the text blink.
Normal:The text does not blink.

Blink:The text blinks.

■ Shadow Color
Selects the shadow color for the text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
This option can only be configured when Shadow is selected for Style.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6-27

Drawings■ TextEnter the text to display. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.

3 Text■ Coordinates
X, Y:Specifies the display position of the text or the text area in coordinates.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the rectangle thatcircumscribes the text or the upper-left corner of the text area is the X and Y coordinates.
When the Use Text Area check box is cleared, the coordinates are for the text. When the Use Text
Area check box is selected, the coordinates are for the text area.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
When Use Text Area is cleared

When Use Text Area is selectedXX(0, 0)
Y(0, 0)

IDEC

Y

Text

IDEC

ScreenText area

Screen■ Use Text Area
Select this check box to specify a text area and adjust the display position of the text with the specified text area.
W, H:

Specifies the size of the text area in width and height.
W:

1 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

1 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

HeightIDEC

Text area

Screen6-28

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualChapter 7

Buttons

This chapter describes the setup for the button parts and related Touch operations.

1

Bit Button

1.1 How the Bit Button is Used
Writes a 0 or 1 to a bit device.
Touch

External device

0

7

1

Buttons■ Set
Pressing the button writes a 1 to the
bit device.

Press
Operation andview

ReleasePress

Release

Initial image

Action

Write

Write

1

1

Data written■ ResetPressing the button writes a 0 to the
bit device.

Press
Operation andview

ActionReleasePress

Release

Initial image

Write

Write

0

0

Data written

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-1

1 Bit Button■ Momentary
Pressing the button writes a 1 to the
bit device.
Releasing the button writes a 0 to the
bit device.

Operation and
view

Press

ReleasePress

Release

Write

Write

Write

Write

1

0

1

0

Initial image

ActionData written

Pressing and holding the button until the screen changes causes a 0 to be written to the bit device.
■ Alternate
Each press of the button alternately
writes a 1 or 0 to the bit device.

Press
Operation andview

ReleasePress

Release

Initial image

Action

Write

Write

1

0

Data written■ Toggle
Pressing the button inverts the valueof the bit device.
If the value of the bit device is 0 itchanges to 1, and vice versa.

Press
Operation andview

ReleasePress

Release

Initial image

ActionToggleToggle■ MovePressing the button writes the value
in the source bit device to the value inthe destination bit device.

Press
Operation andview

Action7-2

ReleasePress

Initial image

Move

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualMove

Release1 Bit Button

1.2 Bit Button Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Bit Buttons.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Bit Button.

7

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Bit Button.

Buttons

3 Double-click the dropped Bit Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-3

1 Bit Button

1.3 Properties of Bit Button Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ >>OFF Text, >>ON Text
Applies the text entered in the Part Name field to the Text field under the OFF or ON fields on the Registration
Text tab. This is used as the Registration Text when the button is OFF or ON.
To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON, select the Set by State check box on theRegistration Text tab. If left unchecked, the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state isdisplayed for the ON state as well.
■ Action Mode
Select the behavior of the button from the following:Set:

Pressing the button writes a 1 to the bit device.
Press
Operation andview

Data written

Write

Write

1

1

ReleasePressing the button writes a 0 to the bit device.
Press
Operation andview

ActionData written

7-4

Press

Initial image

ActionReset:

Release

ReleasePress

Initial image

Write

Write

0

0

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Release1 Bit Button

Momentary:

Pressing the button writes a 1 to the bit device.
Releasing the button writes a 0 to the bit device.

Operation and
view

Press

ReleasePress

Release

Write

Write

Write

Write

1

0

1

0

Initial image

ActionData written

Pressing and holding the button until the screen changes causes a 0 to be written to the bit device.

Alternate:

Each press of the button alternately writes a 1 or 0 to the bit device.
Press

7

Release

Initial image

ActionData written

Toggle:Press

Buttons

Operation andview

Release

Write

Write

1

0

Pressing the button inverts the value of the bit device.
If the value of the bit device is 0 it changes to 1, and vice versa.
Press
Operation and
view

Press

Release

Initial image

ActionMove:

ReleaseToggleTogglePressing the button writes the value in the source bit device to the value in the destination bit
device.
Press
Operation andview

ActionReleasePress

Release

Initial image

Move

Move

■ Destination Device
Specify the destination bit device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-5

1 Bit Button*1■ WriteSpecify the number of bit devices (1 to 64) at the destination.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Set or Reset.
Example: This fills a contiguous block of bit devices with the same value.
M0 1
M1 1

Action Mode: Set
Destination Device: M0
Write: 5

M2 1
M3 1
M4 1

If the bit in a word device is specified, the same value is written to same bit of contiguous word devices.
bit
15

bit
0

D0 1

Action Mode: Set
Destination Device: D0-15
Write: 5

D1 1
D2 1
D3 1
D4 1

■ Source Data
Specifies the device that stores the data to be written.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
Device:Specify the source bit device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Transfer:

Specify the number of bit devices (1 to 64) to transfer.

Example: This button writes the values in a contiguous block of bit devices to a contiguous block of devices at thedestination.
Device: LM0
Destination Device: M0
Transfer: 4

LM0 1

M0 1

LM1 0

M1 0

LM2 0

M2 0

LM3 1

M3 1

*1 Advanced mode only

7-6

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Bit Button■ View Switching Method*1
Select how to display the ON/OFF status of the button.
Button:Pressing the button changes the drawing object displayed.

Device:The drawing objects assigned to the OFF and ON states are displayed when the value of device is 0
and 1, respectively. Specifies the device used to switch the drawing object display.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

No Image:

The button is not displayed on the screen. The button appears as a dashed line frame on the edit
screen. Pressing the corresponding area on the Touch activates the assigned function. If No Imageis selected, the settings for View and Registration Text are disabled.

Selecting Device in View Switching Method allows you to create an illuminated pushbutton.
The illuminated pushbutton switches state (or image) according to ON or OFF state of the device address,
allowing you to display the state of a device that is being operated.

Touch

External device0

OFF image:
M0

ON image:
View Switching Method (Device): M01
M0*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-7

7
Buttons

Example: When you set an external device address M0 as Device in View Switching Method, if the valueof M0 changes, the display image will switch according to the value of M0 even if the button is notpressed.

1 Bit Button● View Tab
Only Coordinates and Size can be configured when No Image is selected for View Switching Method on the
General tab.

■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard:

Uses the default graphics contained within WindO/I-NV3.

Picture:Uses an image file saved in Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.4 Available Image Files” on page 2-18.

■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser or Picture Manager, depending on the setting for Image Type.
■ OFF button, ON button
Displays the graphic when ON or OFF. Clicking the ON button or OFF button switches the image displayed on the
View tab.
■ OFF, ON
Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF.
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors,monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the standard graphic.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.

■ Blink
Select this check box if blinking is desired (alternating ON and OFF) when a part is ON.
Blink

ON image

OFF image

7-8

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Bit Button■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H:

Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
20 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (Base Screen vertical size)

7
Buttons

W:

Width

ScreenHeightParts

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-9

1 Bit Button● Registration Text Tab
These options can only be configured when Button or Device is selected for View Switching Method on the
General tab.

■ FontSelects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic, Windows
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page
2-5.
■ StyleSelects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Magnification
W, H:
Selects the magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for text display.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects text alignment in the vertical direction.
Top, Center, Bottom
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-5.
■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-5.
■ Set by State
Select this check box if displaying different text when ON and OFF.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for text display.

7-10

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Bit Button■ OFF, ON
Text:

Inputs characters to be displayed on parts. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-5.
When entering Unicode characters click
to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the charactersusing the Unicode Input dialog box then click OK.

Text ID:

Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000) when using the text registered in Text Manager.
Click

to display Text Manager.

Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
Text Color:

Selects the color of the text displayed on the part (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Windows Font:

Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font.

Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-12.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-11

7
Buttons

Select Windows using Font to display the current setting. To change the setting, click Change todisplay the Font dialog box.

1 Bit Button● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Input Condition
The Button is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Button is disabled and not operational
while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON and Device is LM0
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational.
Touch
Button
Does notoperateLM0: 0ConditionNotsatisfied

LM0: 1

Condition
Satisfied

ButtonOperates

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following.
Always Enabled: The Button is always enabled.

Button state
Always Enabled

While ON:

Enables the Button when the value of device is 1.
1

Value of Device
0

Button state
Disabled

7-12

EnabledDisabled

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

EnabledEnabledDisabled

1 Bit Button

While OFF:

Enables the Button when the value of device is 0.
1

Value of Device
0

Button state
EnabledDisabled

EnabledDisabled

Disabled

EnabledWhile satisfying the condition:
Enables the Button when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

7

Button state

Data Type:

EnabledDisabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device:Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-63.

Comment:

Enter a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-13

Buttons

Disabled

1 Bit Button● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ ON delay
Select this check box to use the ON delay function.
Time (x100 msec): Specify the length of time that the button must be held down before activation by selecting avalue from 0 to 600 (units of 10 milliseconds).
The button activates after it is held down for a specified period of time.
Touch

Touch
Button
Does notoperateButtonOperates

Hold down for three seconds

This feature protects against mistaken operation by ensuring that the button will not be activated if touched
accidentally.
■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display:

Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.

Input:

Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.

7-14

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Bit Button

Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:

User Name

Security Group

User1

User2

User3

None

Group AGroup A, Group B

Touch

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart
Display: Group A

Numerical Display
Display: None

Button
Display: Group A
Input: Group B

For User1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.

7

If the Password Screen is now opened and User2 logs in, Group A parts are displayed.

Password
User2

130



Touch

ENT

A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2.

Group A parts are
not displayed to User1.
User1

130

130

********

Buttons

Touch

Touch

Group A parts are
displayed to User2.
User2

Since the display security group is Group A, User2 can view the buttons. But since the input security group is Group B,
User2 cannot operate the buttons.
Suppose that the Password Screen is now opened and User3 logs in to the system. Group A buttons can be displayed,and Group B buttons can be operated.
Touch

Touch

Password
User3

130
130

Touch

130



********A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

ENT

ButtonButtonCannot operate

User2

For User2,
Group A parts are displayed but
Group B parts cannot be operated.

Can operate

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User3.
User3

For User3,
Group A parts are displayed andGroup B parts can be operated.

■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the Touch makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the Touch, select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the System tabof the Project Settings dialog box.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-15

1 Bit Button● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Enter a comment comments about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Button on the editing screen

7-16

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Word Button2

Word Button

2.1 How the Word Button is Used
Writes a value to a word device. Can be used to indirectly specify the destination address or to perform operations on
the written value.
• Pressing the button writes a constant value to a word device.
Touch

External device

D1=

0

Value

100

Destination word device

7

D1=

Buttons

Write

100→D1

100

100• Pressing the button writes the value of device address to a word device.
Touch

External device

D0=

123

D1=

0

D0=

123

Value in device

Destination word device

Move

D0→D1

D1=

123

• Pressing the button performs arithmetic on the value to write before writing it to a word device.
Touch

D0+D1→D2

External device

D0=

100

Value to write

D1=

23

Operator value

D2=

0

Destination word device

D0=

100

D1=

23

D2=

123

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Add
Write

7-17

2 Word Button■ Set
Pressing the button writes a constantvalue to a word device.

Press
Operation andview

ReleasePress

Release

Initial image

Action

Write

Write

Data written

Value

Value

■ MovePressing the button writes the value inthe source device to the destination
word device.

Press

Operation andview

ReleasePress

Release

Initial image

ActionData written

Write

Write

Value in device

Value in device■ Momentary
Pressing the button writes theconstant value of ON data to a word
device.
Releasing the button writes theconstant value of OFF data to a word
device.

Press

ReleasePress

ReleaseAction

Write

Write

Write

Write

Data written

ON data

OFF data

ON data

OFF data

Operation andview

Initial image

Pressing and holding the button until the screen changes causes the OFF data to be written to the word
device.
■ Alternate
Each press of the button alternately
writes the fixed value of ON data and
OFF data to the word device.

Press
Operation and
view

7-18

ReleasePress

Initial image

Action

Write

Write

Data written

ON data

OFF data

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Release2 Word Button■ Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, XOR
Pressing the button performs
arithmetic on the value in a reference
device and a constant value or thevalue in a device address and writes
the result to a word device.

Example: Add (Addition)
Pressing the button adds thevalue in the Source 1 to theSource 2 value and writes
the sum in the word device.

Press
Operation andview

ReleasePress

Initial image

ActionArithmetic
operation
↓
Write

Write

Data written

ResultResultValue ofReference Device
Data

ReleaseArithmetic
operation
↓

100

200

300

400

500

50

40

30

20

10

Press

ReleasePress

Release

Initial image

Addition

Addition
ActionValue of
Destination Device0

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

↓

↓

Write

Write

240

240

420

7
Buttons

Operation and
view

420

7-19

2 Word Button

2.2 Word Button Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Word Buttons.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Word Button.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Word Button.
3 Double-click the dropped Word Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.

7-20

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Word Button

2.3 Properties of Word Button Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab

7
Buttons■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ >>OFF Text, >>ON Text
Applies the text entered in the Part Name field to the Text field under the OFF or ON fields on the Registration
Text tab. This is used as the Registration Text when the button is OFF or ON.
To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON, select the Set by State check box on theRegistration Text tab. If left unchecked, the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state isdisplayed for the ON state as well.
■ Action Mode
Select the behavior of the button from the following:Set:

Pressing the button writes a constant value to a word device.
Press
Operation and
view

Move:

ReleasePress

Release

Initial image

Action

Write

Write

Data written

Value

Value

Pressing the button writes the value in the source device to the destination word device.
Press

Operation andview

ActionData written

ReleasePress

Release

Initial image

Write

Write

Value in device

Value in device

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-21

2 Word Button

Momentary:

Pressing the button writes the constant value of ON data to a word device.
Releasing the button writes the constant value of OFF data to a word device.
Press

ReleasePress

ReleaseAction

Write

Write

Write

Write

Data written

ON data

OFF data

ON data

OFF data

Operation andview

Initial image

Pressing and holding the button until the screen changes causes the OFF data to be written to the word
device.
Alternate:

Each press of the button alternately writes the fixed value of ON data and OFF data to the word
device.
Press
Operation andview

ReleasePress

Release

Initial image

Action

Write

Write

Data written

ON data

OFF data

Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, XOR:
Pressing the button performs arithmetic on the value in a reference device and a constant valueor the value in a device address and writes the result to a word device.
Press
Operation andview

ReleasePress

Release

Initial image

ActionArithmetic
operation↓

Arithmetic
operation
↓

Write

Write

Data written

ResultResultExample: Add (Addition)
Pressing the button adds the value in the Source 1 to the Source 2 value and writes
the sum in the word device.
Value ofReference Device
Data

100

200

300

400

500

50

40

30

20

10

Press

ReleasePress

ReleaseOperation andview
Initial image

Addition

Addition
ActionValue of
Destination Device

7-22

0

↓

↓

Write

Write

240

240

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

420

420

2 Word Button■ Data Type
Select the data type handled by the operation selected for Action Mode.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
BIN16(+) and BIN32(+) can only be set if Action Mode is set to OR, AND, or XOR.
BIN16(+) and BIN32(+) can only be set if Action Mode is set to Move. Because the number of devices
to transfer is specified in Advanced mode, you do not need to set Data Type.
If BCD4, BCD8 or float32 is selected and the arithmetic data contains a value inexpressible in BCD, a 1 iswritten to System Area 2 Arithmetic error bit (address+2, bit 5) and an error message is displayed.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “Arithmetic error” on page 3-25.
■ Source 1
Specify the source word device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, or XOR.

7

Value:

Buttons■ Source Data
Select the data handled by the operation selected for Action Mode.
Use a constant.
Only a Value can be handled if Action Mode is set to Set, Momentary, or Alternate.
If Action Mode is set to Momentary or Alternate, the value in the ON Data is written when the button
is ON, and the value in the OFF Data is written when the button is OFF.
Hexadecimal:
Device:Select this check box to enter the ON Data and OFF Data values inhexadecimal.

Use a word device.
Specify the device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
Use Reference Device*1: Select this check box and specify a device to change the source word device
according to the value of the specified device.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings” on page
2-4.
Transfer*1:

Specify the number of word devices (1 to 64) to transfer.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
Example: If Transfer is set to 2 and Write is set to 3, the same data in 2
continuous word devices will be written to the destination device 3 times.
Device: LDR0
Transfer: 2
Destination Device: D100
Write: 3

LDR0

999

D100

999

LDR1

1000

D101

1000

D102

999

D103

1000

D104

999

D105

1000

*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-23

2 Word Button■ Destination Device
Destination Device:

Specify the destination word device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Use Reference Device*1: Select this check box and specify a device to change the destination word device according
to the value of the specified device.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings” on page 2-4.
Write

*1

:

Specify the number of word devices (1 to 64) at the destination.
For Move, specify how many times to write.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Set, Momentary, Alternate, or
Move.
Example: If Data Type is set to BIN16(+) and Write is set to 5, the same data will be
written to 5 continuous word addresses.
Data Type: BIN16(+)
Source Data: 12345
Destination Device: LDR10
Write: 5

LDR10 12345
LDR11 12345
LDR12 12345

5 words

LDR13 12345
LDR14 12345

Example: If Data Type is set to BIN32(+) and Write is set to 5, the same data will be
written to a total of 10 word addresses (2 words 5 times).
Data Type: BIN32(+)
Source Data: 987654
Destination Device: LDR10
Write: 5

LDR11

LDR10

987654
LDR13

LDR12

987654
LDR15

LDR14

987654
LDR17

LDR16

987654
LDR19

LDR18

987654*1 Advanced mode only

7-24

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

10 words

2 Word Button■ View Switching Method*1
Select how to display the ON/OFF status of the button.
Button:Pressing the button changes the drawing object displayed.

Device:The drawing objects assigned to the OFF and ON states are displayed when the value of device is 0
and 1, respectively. Specifies the device used to switch the drawing object display.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

No Image:

The button is not displayed on the screen. The button appears as a dashed line frame on the edit
screen. Pressing the corresponding area on the Touch activates the assigned function. If No Imageis selected, the settings for View and Registration Text are disabled.

Selecting Device in View Switching Method allows you to create an illuminated pushbutton.
The illuminated pushbutton switches state (or image) according to ON or OFF state of the device address,
allowing you to display the state of a device that is being operated.

Touch

External device0

OFF image:
M0

ON image:
View Switching Method (Device): M01
M0*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-25

7Buttons

Example: When you set an external device address M0 as Device in View Switching Method, if the valueof M0 changes, the display image will switched according to the value of M0 even if the button is
not pressed.

2 Word Button● View Tab
Only Coordinates and Size can be configured when No Image is selected for View Switching Method on the
General tab.

■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard:

Uses the default graphics contained within WindO/I-NV3.

Picture:Uses an image file saved in Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.4 Available Image Files” on page 2-18.

■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser or Picture Manager, depending on the setting for Image Type.
■ OFF button, ON button
Displays the graphic when ON or OFF. Clicking the ON button or OFF button switches the image displayed on the
View tab.
■ OFF, ON
Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF.
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors,monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the standard graphic.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.

■ Blink
Select this check box if blinking is desired (alternating ON and OFF) when a part is ON.
Blink

ON image

OFF image

7-26

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Word Button■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H:

Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
20 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (Base Screen vertical size)

7
Buttons

W:

Width

ScreenHeightParts

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-27

2 Word Button● Registration Text Tab
These options can only be configured when Button or Device is selected for View Switching Method on the
General tab.

■ FontSelects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic, Windows
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page
2-5.
■ StyleSelects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Magnification
W, H:
Selects the magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for text display.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects text alignment in the vertical direction.
Top, Center, Bottom
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-5.
■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-5.
■ Set by State
Select this check box if displaying different text when ON and OFF.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for text display.

7-28

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Word Button■ OFF, ON
Text:

Inputs characters to be displayed on parts. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-5.
When entering Unicode characters click
to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the charactersusing the Unicode Input dialog box then click OK.

Text ID:

Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000) when using the text registered in Text Manager.
Click

to display Text Manager.

Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
Text Color:

Selects the color of the text displayed on the part (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Windows Font:

Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font.

Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-12.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-29

7Buttons

Select Windows using Font to display the current setting. To change the setting, click Change todisplay the Font dialog box.

2 Word Button● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Input Condition
The Button is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Button is disabled and not operational
while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON and Device is LM0
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational.
Touch
Button
Does notoperateLM0: 0ConditionNotsatisfied

LM0: 1

Condition
Satisfied

ButtonOperates

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following.
Always Enabled: The Button is always enabled.

Button state
Always Enabled

While ON:

Enables the Button when the value of device is 1.
1

Value of Device
0

Button state
Disabled

7-30

EnabledDisabled

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

EnabledEnabledDisabled

2 Word Button

While OFF:

Enables the Button when the value of device is 0.
1

Value of Device
0

Button state
EnabledDisabled

EnabledDisabled

Disabled

EnabledWhile satisfying the condition:
Enables the Button when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

7

Button state

Data Type:

EnabledDisabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device:Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-63.

Comment:

Enter a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-31

Buttons

Disabled

2 Word Button● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ ON delay
Select this check box to use the ON delay function.
Time (x100 msec): Specify the length of time that the button must be held down before activation by selecting avalue from 0 to 600 (units of 10 milliseconds).
The button activates after it is held down for a specified period of time.
Touch

Touch
Button
Does notoperateButtonOperates

Hold down for three seconds

This feature protects against mistaken operation by ensuring that the button will not be activated if touched
accidentally.
■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display:

Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.

Input:

Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.

7-32

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Word Button

Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:

User Name

Security Group

User1

User2

User3

None

Group AGroup A, Group B

Touch

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart
Display: Group A

Numerical Display
Display: None

Button
Display: Group A
Input: Group B

For User1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.

7

If the Password Screen is now opened and User2 logs in, Group A parts are displayed.

Password
User2

130



Touch

ENT

A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2.

Group A parts are
not displayed to User1.
User1

130

130

********

Buttons

Touch

Touch

Group A parts are
displayed to User2.
User2

Since the display security group is Group A, User2 can view the buttons. But since the input security group is Group B,
User2 cannot operate the buttons.
Suppose that the Password Screen is now opened and User3 logs in to the system. Group A buttons can be displayed,and Group B buttons can be operated.
Touch

Touch

Password
User3

130
130

Touch

130



********A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

ENT

ButtonButtonCannot operate

User2

For User2,
Group A parts are displayed but
Group B parts cannot be operated.

Can operate

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User3.
User3

For User3,
Group A parts are displayed andGroup B parts can be operated.

■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the Touch makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the Touch, select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the System tabof the Project Settings dialog box.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-33

2 Word Button● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Button on the editing screen

7-34

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Goto Screen Button

3

Goto Screen Button

3.1 How the Goto Screen Button is Used
Switches to another screen or displays a window.
• Pressing the button switches between Base Screens.
Touch

Touch

130

Tank 1
Full

Touch

Touch

Touch

D51

123

D51

123

D52

456

D52

456

D53

0

D53

0

999

Touch

999

• Pressing the button switches to the System Mode.
Touch

Touch

6<67(002'(7233$*(

130

5XQ

0DLQ0HQX

-8/)5,
,3$GG

'+&3%5,*+71(66

• Pressing the button resets the current screen.
Touch

Touch

130

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

0

7-35

7
Buttons• Pressing the button opens and closes other windows (such as the Popup Screen, Device Monitor, Ladder Monitor,
Password Screen, and Adjust Contrast Screen).

3 Goto Screen Button

3.2 Goto Screen Button Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Goto Screen Buttons.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Goto Screen Button.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Goto Screen Button.
3 Double-click the dropped Goto Screen Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.

7-36

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Goto Screen Button

3.3 Properties of Goto Screen Button Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab

7
Buttons■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ >>OFF Text, >>ON Text
Applies the text entered in the Part Name field to the Text field under the OFF or ON fields on the Registration
Text tab. This is used as the Registration Text when the button is OFF or ON.
To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON, select the Set by State check box on theRegistration Text tab. If left unchecked, the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state isdisplayed for the ON state as well.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-37

3 Goto Screen Button■ Action Mode
Select the behavior of the button from the following:
Back to previous Screen:

Switches to the previous screen. Returns to up to 16 earlier screens.

Switch to Base Screen:

Switches between Base Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “3 Base Screen” onpage 4-14.

Open Popup Screen:

Opens a Popup Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “4 Popup Screen” on page 422.

Close Popup Screen:

Closes a Popup Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “4 Popup Screen” on page 422.

Open Device Monitor Screen:

Opens the Device Monitor Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Device
Monitor” on page 24-19.

Close Device Monitor Screen:

Closes the Device Monitor Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Device
Monitor” on page 24-19.

Open Ladder Monitor:

Opens the Ladder Monitor. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.3 Ladder Monitor” onpage 24-23.

Close Ladder Monitor:

Closes the Ladder Monitor. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.3 Ladder Monitor” onpage 24-23.

Open Password Screen:

Opens the Password Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “4.1 Entering the
Password on the Touch” on page 21-36.

Close Password Screen:

Closes the Password Screen. For details, refer to CChapter 21 “4.1 Entering the
Password on the Touch” on page 21-36.

Open Adjust contrast Screen:

Opens the Adjust contrast Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 28 “1.3 Adjusting
Screen Brightness” on page 28-2.

Close Adjust contrast Screen:

Closes the Adjust contrast Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 28 “1.3 Adjusting
Screen Brightness” on page 28-2.

Switch to System Mode:

Switches to the Top Page in the System Mode. For details, refer to Chapter 28 “2System Mode Overview” on page 28-3.

Reset current screen:

Resets the current Base Screen.

• Open Ladder Monitor and Close Ladder Monitor can only operate when ladder program is selected
as the programming language in control function.
• When the current Base Screen is reset using the Reset current screen function, the window andinternal devices restart as if the Base Screens were switched.

7-38

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Goto Screen Button■ Goto Screen
Screen No.:

If Action Mode is set to Switch to Base Screen, specify the Base Screen number to switch to(from 1 to 3,000). If Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen or Close Popup Screen,
specify the number of the Popup Screen to open or close (from 1 to 3,015).
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Switch to Base Screen, Open Popup
Screen, or Close Popup Screen.
Use Reference Device*1:

Select this check box and specify a device to specify the screen number
using the value of the specified device.

Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For thedevice address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-61.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup
Screen or Close Popup Screen.
Coordinates X, Y: Specify the coordinates on the Base Screen for displaying a window.
X and Y specify the upper left corner of the window using the upper left corner of the screen as theorigin.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen, Open Device
Monitor Screen, Open Password Screen, Open Adjust contrast Screen, or Open Movie
File Screen.
Select this check box and specify a device to specify the coordinates
using the value of the specified device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For thedevice address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-61.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup
Screen.
■ View Switching Method*1
Select how to display the ON/OFF status of the button.
Button:Device:Pressing the button changes the drawing object displayed.
The drawing objects assigned to the OFF and ON states are displayed when the value of device is
0 and 1, respectively. Specifies the device used to switch the drawing object display.

No Image:

Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
The button is not displayed on the screen. The button appears as a dashed line frame on the edit
screen. Pressing the corresponding area on the Touch activates the assigned function. If No
Image is selected, the settings for View and Registration Text are disabled.

Selecting Device in View Switching Method allows you to create an illuminated pushbutton.
The illuminated pushbutton switches state (or image) according to ON or OFF state of the device address,
allowing you to display the state of a device that is being operated.
Example: When you set an external device address M0 as Device in View Switching Method, if the valueof M0 changes, the display image will switched according to the value of M0 even if the button is notpressed.
TouchExternal device0

OFF image:
M0

ON image:
View Switching Method (Device): M01
M0*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-39

Buttons

Use Reference Device*1:

7

3 Goto Screen Button● View Tab
Only Coordinates and Size can be configured when No Image is selected for View Switching Method on the
General tab.

■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard:

Uses the default graphics contained within WindO/I-NV3.

Picture:Uses an image file saved in Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.4 Available Image Files” on page 2-18.

■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser or Picture Manager, depending on the setting for Image Type.
■ OFF button, ON button
Displays the graphic when ON or OFF. Clicking the ON button or OFF button switches the image displayed on the
View tab.
■ OFF, ON
Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF.
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors,monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the standard graphic.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.

■ Blink
Select this check box if blinking is desired (alternating ON and OFF) when a part is ON.
Blink

ON image

OFF image

7-40

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Goto Screen Button■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H:

Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
20 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (Base Screen vertical size)

7
Buttons

W:

Width

ScreenHeightParts

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-41

3 Goto Screen Button● Registration Text Tab
These options can only be configured when Button or Device is selected for View Switching Method on the
General tab.

■ FontSelects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic, Windows
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page
2-5.
■ StyleSelects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Magnification
W, H:
Selects the magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for text display.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects text alignment in the vertical direction.
Top, Center, Bottom
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-5.
■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-5.
■ Set by State
Select this check box if displaying different text when ON and OFF.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for text display.

7-42

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Goto Screen Button■ OFF, ON
Text:

Inputs characters to be displayed on parts. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-5.
When entering Unicode characters click
to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the charactersusing the Unicode Input dialog box then click OK.

Text ID:

Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000) when using the text registered in Text Manager.
Click

to display Text Manager.

Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
Text Color:

Selects the color of the text displayed on the part (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Windows Font:

Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font.

Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-12.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-43

7Buttons

Select Windows using Font to display the current setting. To change the setting, click Change todisplay the Font dialog box.

3 Goto Screen Button● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Input Condition
The Button is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Button is disabled and not operational
while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON and Device is LM0
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational.
Touch
Button
Does notoperateLM0: 0ConditionNotsatisfied

LM0: 1

Condition
Satisfied

ButtonOperates

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following.
Always Enabled: The Button is always enabled.

Button state
Always Enabled

While ON:

Enables the Button when the value of device is 1.
1

Value of Device
0

Button state
Disabled

7-44

EnabledDisabled

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

EnabledEnabledDisabled

3 Goto Screen Button

While OFF:

Enables the Button when the value of device is 0.
1

Value of Device
0

Button state
EnabledDisabled

EnabledDisabled

Disabled

EnabledWhile satisfying the condition:
Enables the Button when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

7

Button state

Data Type:

EnabledDisabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device:Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-63.

Comment:

Enter a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-45

Buttons

Disabled

3 Goto Screen Button● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ ON delay
Select this check box to use the ON delay function.
Time (x100 msec): Specify the length of time that the button must be held down before activation by selecting avalue from 0 to 600 (units of 10 milliseconds).
The button activates after it is held down for a specified period of time.
Touch

Touch
Button
Does notoperateButtonOperates

Hold down for three seconds

This feature protects against mistaken operation by ensuring that the button will not be activated if touched
accidentally.
■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display:

Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.

Input:

Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.

7-46

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Goto Screen Button

Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:

User Name

Security Group

User1

User2

User3

None

Group AGroup A, Group B

Touch

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart
Display: Group A

Numerical Display
Display: None

Button
Display: Group A
Input: Group B

For User1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.

7

If the Password Screen is now opened and User2 logs in, Group A parts are displayed.

Password
User2

130



Touch

ENT

A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2.

Group A parts are
not displayed to User1.
User1

130

130

********

Buttons

Touch

Touch

Group A parts are
displayed to User2.
User2

Since the display security group is Group A, User2 can view the buttons. But since the input security group is Group B,
User2 cannot operate the buttons.
Suppose that the Password Screen is now opened and User3 logs in to the system. Group A buttons can be displayed,and Group B buttons can be operated.
Touch

Touch

Password
User3

130
130

Touch

130



********A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

ENT

ButtonButtonCannot operate

User2

For User2,
Group A parts are displayed but
Group B parts cannot be operated.

Can operate

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User3.
User3

For User3,
Group A parts are displayed andGroup B parts can be operated.

■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the Touch makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the Touch, select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the System tabof the Project Settings dialog box.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-47

3 Goto Screen Button● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Button on the editing screen

7-48

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Key Button

4

Key Button

4.1 How the Key Button is Used
Performs a variety of functions including uploading and downloading project files, and operating other parts.
• Entering numbers in the Numerical Input
Touch

1230

7
Buttons• Entering characters in the Character Input
Touch• Operating the Alarm List Display or Alarm Log Display
Show focus.

Move focus.

Display reference screen.

REV

Time

REV

Time

REV

Time

09:15 Motor fault

Up

09:15 Motor fault

Up

09:15 Motor fault

Up

1 fault
09:15Pump
Motor
fault

10:02 Pump1 fault

Dwn

10:02 Pump1 fault

Dwn

10:02 Pump1 fault

Dwn

10:02 Pump1 fault

10:28 High pressureDel

10:28 High pressureDel

10:28 High pressureDel

13:02 Pump 1 fault

Ref.

13:02 Pump 1 fault

Ref.

13:02 Pump 1 fault

Ref.

Time

Message

Message

Message

Message

REV
UpPump 1 output low
Dwn
Press Stop, check the air,
Del
10:28
pressure
thenHighpress
Start.
Ref.
13:02 Pump 1 fault Air Press.
0000
Stop
Start
2
kg/m

Key Button

Reference screen

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-49

4 Key Button

4.2 Key Button Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Key Buttons.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Key Button.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Key Button.
3 Double-click the dropped Key Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.

7-50

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Key Button

4.3 Properties of Key Button Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.
● General Tab(Key)

Displays settings
applicable to theselected key.

7
Buttons■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ >>OFF Text, >>ON Text
Applies the text entered in the Part Name field to the Text field under the OFF or ON fields on the Registration
Text tab. This is used as the Registration Text when the button is OFF or ON.
To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON, select the Set by State check box on theRegistration Text tab. If left unchecked, the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state isdisplayed for the ON state as well.
■ Key Type
Select the function for the Key Button.
Language:

Switches the display of the key that is displayed when Keypad is selected in Key Browser. These
languages are available:
Japanese, European, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.

Browse:Opens the Key Browser when clicked. Select a key.
For details, refer to “4.5 Key Browser” on page 7-66.

(Key):

Displays the name of the key selected using the Key Browser.
• When you select a key, the label for that key is assigned as the Registration Text.
• The function of Key button will affect on the next scan when the trigger condition is satisfied.

The settings explained below appear depending on the type of key selected.
■ Popup Screen No.
The Alt key switches the current Popup Screen used as a Keypad when this button is pressed.
Specify the Popup Screen number to open a Keypad for.
This setting is enabled only if Alt was selected using the Key Browser.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-51

4 Key Button■ Scroll Size
Key Buttons Pg. Up and Pg. Dwn scroll the list up and down, respectively. Key Buttons Fcs. Up and Fcs. Dwn movethe focus up and down, respectively. This settings specifies the number of pages or lines (1 to 1023 lines) to scroll or
move the focus per each press of the button.
This setting is enabled only if Pg. Up, Pg. Dwn, Fcs. Up, and Fcs. Dwn are selected using the Key Browser.

■ Transfer Setting
Key Buttons Download Project and Upload Project perform the data transfer function specified by their names.
These settings specify the source, data to be transfered, and destination.
This setting is enabled only if one of these keys is selected after clicking Data Transfer in the Key Browser.
If Download Project is selected.

Source:This is set to the USB flash drive on which the project file to transfer (.ZNV) was saved.
File Path:

Specify the path to the project file (.ZNV) to transfer. The maximum number is 247
characters.
Example: Where “FT_DEMO_1.ZNV” is a project file saved on the root directory of a USB
flash drive:
FT_DEMO_1.ZNV

If Upload Project is selected.

Destination: Specify where to save the project uploaded from Touch. The location is the USB flash drive.
Folder Path: Specify the path to the folder where the uploaded project file will be saved. The
maximum number is 247 characters.
Example: To save it to the folder “Uploaded_Project” on a USB flash drive:
Uploaded_Project

7-52

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Key Button■ View Switching Method*1
Select how to display the ON/OFF status of the button.
Button:Pressing the button changes the drawing object displayed.

Device:The drawing objects assigned to the OFF and ON states are displayed when the value of device is 0
and 1, respectively. Specifies the device used to switch the drawing object display.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

No Image:

The button is not displayed on the screen. The button appears as a dashed line frame on the edit
screen. Pressing the corresponding area on the Touch activates the assigned function. If No Imageis selected, the settings for View and Registration Text are disabled.

Selecting Device in View Switching Method allows you to create an illuminated pushbutton.
The illuminated pushbutton switches state (or image) according to ON or OFF state of the device address,
allowing you to display the state of a device that is being operated.

Touch

External device0

OFF image:
M0

ON image:
View Switching Method (Device): M01
M0*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-53

7
Buttons

Example: When you set an external device address M0 as Device in View Switching Method, if the valueof M0 changes, the display image will switched according to the value of M0 even if the button is
not pressed.

4 Key Button● View Tab
Only Coordinates and Size can be configured when No Image is selected for View Switching Method on the
General tab.

■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard:

Uses the default graphic for WindO/I-NV3.

Picture:Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.4 Available Image Files” on page 2-18.

■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser or Picture Manager, depending on the setting for Image Type.
■ OFF button, ON button
Displays the graphic when ON or OFF. Clicking the ON button or OFF button switches the image displayed on the
View tab.
■ OFF, ON
Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF.
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors,monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the standard graphic.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.

■ Blink
Select this check box if blinking is desired (alternating ON and OFF) when a part is ON.
Blink

ON image

OFF image

7-54

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Key Button■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H:

Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
20 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (Base Screen vertical size)

7
Buttons

W:

Width

ScreenHeightParts

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-55

4 Key Button● Registration Text Tab
These options can only be configured when Button or Device is selected for View Switching Method on the
General tab.

■ FontSelects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic, Windows
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page
2-5.
■ StyleSelects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Magnification
W, H:
Selects the magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for text display.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects text alignment in the vertical direction.
Top, Center, Bottom
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-5.
■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-5.
■ Set by State
Select this check box if displaying different text when ON and OFF.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for text display.

7-56

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Key Button■ OFF, ON
Text:

Inputs characters to be displayed on parts. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-5.
When entering Unicode characters click
to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the charactersusing the Unicode Input dialog box then click OK.

Text ID:

Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000) when using the text registered in Text Manager.
Click

to display Text Manager.

Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
Text Color:

Selects the color of the text displayed on the part (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Windows Font:

Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font.

Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-12.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-57

7
Buttons

Select Windows using Font to display the current setting. To change the setting, click Change todisplay the Font dialog box.

4 Key Button● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Input Condition
The Button is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Button is disabled and not operational
while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON and Device is LM0
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational.
Touch
Button
Does notoperateLM0: 0ConditionNotsatisfied

LM0: 1

Condition
Satisfied

ButtonOperates

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following.
Always Enabled: The Button is always enabled.

Button state
Always Enabled

While ON:

Enables the Button when the value of device is 1.
1

Value of Device
0

Button state
Disabled

7-58

EnabledDisabled

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

EnabledEnabledDisabled

4 Key Button

While OFF:

Enables the Button when the value of device is 0.
1

Value of Device
0

Button state
EnabledDisabled

EnabledDisabled

Disabled

EnabledWhile satisfying the condition:
Enables the Button when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

7

Button state

Data Type:

EnabledDisabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device:Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-63.

Comment:

Enter a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-59

Buttons

Disabled

4 Key Button● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ ON delay
Select this check box to use the ON delay function.
Time (x100 msec): Specify the length of time that the button must be held down before activation by selecting avalue from 0 to 600 (units of 10 milliseconds).
The button activates after it is held down for a specified period of time.
Touch

Touch
Button
Does notoperateButtonOperates

Hold down for three seconds

This feature protects against mistaken operation by ensuring that the button will not be activated if touched
accidentally.
■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display:

Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.

Input:

Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.

7-60

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Key Button

Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:

User Name

Security Group

User1

User2

User3

None

Group AGroup A, Group B

Touch

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart
Display: Group A

Numerical Display
Display: None

Button
Display: Group A
Input: Group B

For User1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.

7

If the Password Screen is now opened and User2 logs in, Group A parts are displayed.

Password
User2

130



Touch

ENT

A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2.

Group A parts are
not displayed to User1.
User1

130

130

********

Buttons

Touch

Touch

Group A parts are
displayed to User2.
User2

Since the display security group is Group A, User2 can view the buttons. But since the input security group is Group B,
User2 cannot operate the buttons.
Suppose that the Password Screen is now opened and User3 logs in to the system. Group A buttons can be displayed,and Group B buttons can be operated.
Touch

Touch

Password
User3

130
130

Touch

130



********A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

ENT

ButtonButtonCannot operate

User2

For User2,
Group A parts are displayed but
Group B parts cannot be operated.

Can operate

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User3.
User3

For User3,
Group A parts are displayed andGroup B parts can be operated.

■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the Touch makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the Touch, select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the System tabof the Project Settings dialog box.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-61

4 Key Button● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Button on the editing screen

7-62

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Key Button

4.4 Key Buttons● For Keypad
These keys can be used for Numerical Input and Character Input:■ Numerical Input Keypad
Key

Operation
Inputs a decimal point.

0 to 9Inputs a number from 0 to 9.

A to F

Inputs a character from A to F.

+/-

Toggles the sign.

CAN

Clears the data input thus far and cancels the input. Closes the Popup Screen that is opened as
the Keypad, if this key is placed on it.

CLR

Clears the data input thus far and stands by for further input.

BS

Deletes the character to the left of the character at the cursor position.

ENT

Writes the characters input as a numeric value to a device. After the data is written, the focus
can be moved according to the Focus Order setting. Focus Order can be set on the Options
tab of the Screen Properties dialog box.

< Fcs.

Moves the focus one item before the current one as per the Focus Order setting. Focus
Order can be set on the Options tab of the Screen Properties dialog box.

Fcs. >

Moves the focus one item after the current one as per the Focus Order setting. Focus Ordercan be set on the Options tab of the Screen Properties dialog box.

Alt

The Alt key switches the Popup Screen opened as a Keypad. Closes the Popup Screen that is
opened as the Keypad and opens another Popup Screen as the Keypad.

The Alt key can be used, for instance, to switch between a decimal and a hexadecimal Keypad.

■ Character Input Keypad
Key

Operation!

Inputs a !.

"Inputs a ".

#Inputs a #.

$Inputs a $.

%Inputs a %.

&.

Inputs a &.

'Inputs a '.

(Inputs a (.

)

Inputs a ).

*Inputs a *.

+Inputs a +.

,Inputs a ,.

-Inputs a -.

.

Inputs a .

/Inputs a /.

0 to 9Inputs a number from 0 to 9.

:

Inputs a :.

;Inputs a ;.

<Inputs a <.

=Inputs a =.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-63

7
Buttons.

4 Key Button

Key

Operation>

Inputs a >.

?

Inputs a ?.

@Inputs a @.

A to Z

Inputs a character from A to Z.

[

Inputs a [.

\Inputs a \.

]Inputs a ].

^Inputs a ^.

_Inputs a _.

'Inputs a '.

a to zInputs a character from a to z.

{

Inputs a {.

|Inputs a |.

}Inputs a }.

˜

Inputs a ˜.

(Keys dependent on
Language setting)

Inputs the text displayed according to the language selected in the Language setting. For a listof the characters input using these keys, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-5.

CAN

Clears the data input thus far and cancels the input. Closes the Popup Screen if it is opened asa Keypad.

CLR

Clears the data input thus far and stands by for further input.

DEL

Deletes the character at the cursor.

BS

Deletes the character to the left the cursor.

ENT

Writes the text input in ASCII code form to a device. After the data is written, the focus can be
moved according to the Focus Order setting. Focus Order can be set on the Options tab of
the Screen Properties dialog box.

SP

Inputs a space.

Cur. >

Moves the cursor right.

< Cur.

Moves the cursor left.

< Fcs.

Moves the focus one item before the current one as per the Focus Order setting. Focus
Order can be set on the Options tab of the Screen Properties dialog box.

Fcs. >

Moves the focus one item after the current one as per the Focus Order setting. Focus Ordercan be set on the Options tab of the Screen Properties dialog box.

Alt

The Alt key switches the Popup Screen opened as a Keypad. Closes the Popup Screen that is
opened as the Keypad and opens another Popup Screen as the Keypad.

Press and hold the < Cur. and Cur. > keys for more than one second to cause it to move repeatedly.

The Alt key can be used, for instance, to switch between Keypads for lower case and upper case letters.

7-64

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Key Button● For Data Transfer Keys
These keys can be used to execute Data Transfer functions.
Key

Operation

Download Project

Downloads a project file (ZNV format) saved on an external memory to the Touch.

Upload Project

Uploads the project used for operation on the Touch and saves the project file (ZNV format) toan external memory.

For details about Data Transfer functions, refer to Chapter 25 “Data Transfer Function” on page 25-1.
● For Alarm Displays
These keys can be used for the Alarm List Display and Alarm Log Display parts.
■ Alarm List Display
Key

Operation
Scrolls up the number of lines (1 to 1023) specified in Scroll Size.

Pg. Dwn

Scrolls down the number of lines (1 to 1023) specified in Scroll Size.

Fcs. Up

Moves the focus the number of lines (1 to 1023) specified in Scroll Size. The current point offocus can be shown by pressing REVERSE.

Fcs. Dwn

Moves the focus the number of lines (1 to 1023) specified in Scroll Size. The current point offocus can be shown by pressing REVERSE.

REVERSE

Toggles the focus between show and hide.

Ref.

The reference screen appears.

Press and hold the Pg. Up, Pg. Dwn, < Cur., and Cur. > keys for more than one second to move thefocus repeatedly.
■ Alarm Log Display
Key

Operation

Fcs. Up

Moves the focus the number of lines (1 to 1023) specified in Scroll Size. The current point offocus can be shown by pressing REVERSE.

Fcs. Dwn

Moves the focus the number of lines (1 to 1023) specified in Scroll Size. The current point offocus can be shown by pressing REVERSE.

REVERSE

Toggles the focus between show and hide.

CHECK

Shows the date and time the alarm that has focus was confirmed.

All Chk.

Shows the date and time that all alarms were confirmed.

Del.

Clears the alarm that has focus.

Del. All

Clears all alarms.

Ref.

Shows the reference screen for the alarm that has focus.

Stop Buzzer and Screen
Flashing

Stops the sound of the buzzer and screen flashing when an alarm occurs.

Press and hold the Fcs. Up and Fcs. Dwn keys for more than one second to move the focus repeatedly.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-65

7Buttons

Pg. Up4 Key Button

4.5 Key Browser
Select the key using the Key Browser. The Key Browser closes when a key is selected. The name of the key is shownin Key Type. Settings that apply to the selected key are displayed.
When you select a key, the label for that key is assigned as the Registration Text.
Select the key type from the following uses:
Keypad, Data Transfer, Alarm Display■ Keypad
These buttons are used for Numerical Input and Character Input:■ Data Transfer
These buttons are used to execute Data Transfer functions.

7-66

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Key Button■ Alarm Display
These buttons are used to manipulate the Alarm List Display and Alarm Log Display parts.

7
Buttons

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-67

5 Multi-Button

5

Multi-Button

5.1 How the Multi-Button is Used
Executes multiple commands at once.
These commands can be assigned to a Multi-Button.
Command

Description

Bit Write

Writes a 0 or 1 to the specified bit device when pressed.

Word Write

Writes a value to a word device when pressed. You can specify the destination address indirectly, andperform arithmetic on the value to be written.

Goto Screen

Switches screens or opens other windows when pressed.

Key

Performs downloads or uploads when pressed. Also used to manipulate other parts.

ScriptExecutes a script when pressed.

• Pressing the button writes a 1 to a bit device, and the value in a word device to another device.

0
Touch

1

External device

D0=

123

D0=

123

Move

D1=

0

D1=

• When the button is pressed, executes the script and switches the Base Screen
Touch

Executes the script// Script A[D 100] = [D 100] + 1;
if ([D 100] >= 50){[D 100] = 0;}

7-68

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual1235 Multi-Button

5.2 Multi-Button Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Multi-Buttons.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Multi-Button.

7
Buttons

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Multi-Button.
3 Double-click the dropped Multi-Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-69

5 Multi-Button

5.3 Properties of Multi-Button Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ >>OFF Text, >>ON Text
Applies the text entered in the Part Name field to the Text field under the OFF or ON fields on the Registration
Text tab. This is used as the Registration Text when the button is OFF or ON.
To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON, select the Set by State check box on theRegistration Text tab. If left unchecked, the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state isdisplayed for the ON state as well.
■ Action Mode
Select the Action Mode for the Multi-Button: Momentary or Alternate.
Momentary:

The button turns ON when pressed, and OFF when released.

Operation andview

ReleasePress

Release

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Initial image

ActionAlternate:

Press

The button switches between ON and OFF each time it is pressed.
?

Press
Operation andview

Action7-70

ReleasePress

Initial image

ON

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualOFF

Release5 Multi-Button■ Multi-Function
Use this grid to add or edit commands to execute when the Multi-Button is pressed.
Function List:

Lists the commands to be executed.
Command Type:Shows the command type.

Command Name:

Shows the command name.

Device:Shows the setting when one of the following Command Type is selected.
Shows the destination device for the Bit Write and Word Write commands.
Shows the screen number when Goto Screen is set to Switch to Base
Screen, Open Popup Screen, or Close Popup Screen.
Shows the script ID for the Script command.

Command Type: Select the command to add.

Add:

Bit Write:

Writes a 0 or 1 to the bit device or bit of the word device. For details, refer to“Properties of Bit Write for Multi-Functions dialog box” on page 7-73.

Word Write:

Writes a value to a word device. Can be used to indirectly specify the destination
address or to perform operations on the written value. For details, refer to“Properties of Word Write for Multi-Functions dialog box” on page 7-74.

Goto Screen:

Switches to another screen or displays a window. For details, refer to “Properties
of Goto Screen for Multi-Functions dialog box” on page 7-76.

Key:

Performs a variety of functions including uploading and downloading, copying
files, and operating other parts. For details, refer to “Properties of Key for MultiFunctions dialog box” on page 7-78.

Script:Executes the script. For details, refer to “Properties of Script for Multi-Functions
dialog box” on page 7-80.

Adds a command to the list. A maximum of 32 commands may be added.
Click this button to display the Properties dialog box for the command selected from Command
Type.

Edit:

Changes a command in the list.
Click this button to display the Properties dialog box for the command selected in Function List.

Delete:Deletes a command from the list.
Select the command in the list, and then click this button.

Copy:

Copies a command in the list.
Select a command in the list, and then click this button. A copy of the selected command is added
to the end of the list.

Up:

Shifts the selected command upward in the list.

Down:

Shifts the selected command downward in the list.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-71

7
Buttons• Executes only the Goto Screen command at the end of the Function List when multiple Switch to Base
Screen type commands are set for Action Mode.
• Goto Screen commands are not executed from top to bottom as they appear in the Function List.
Rather, they are executed at the end of the scan of the Touch when the Multi-Button is pressed.
• If multiple Key commands are set, only the first and second Key commands in the Function List are
executed. The third and following Key commands are not executed. Also, only the first Key command thatspecifies a Data Transfer function in the Function List is executed if multiple Key commands are set.
• The function of Key command will affect on the next scan when the trigger condition is satisfied.

5 Multi-Button■ View Switching Method*1
Select how to display the ON/OFF status of the button.
Button:Pressing the button changes the drawing object displayed.

Device:The drawing objects assigned to the OFF and ON states are displayed when the value of device is 0
and 1, respectively. Specifies the device used to switch the drawing object display.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

No Image:

The button is not displayed on the screen. The button appears as a dashed line frame on the edit
screen. Pressing the corresponding area on the Touch activates the assigned function. If No Imageis selected, the settings for View and Registration Text are disabled.

Selecting Device in View Switching Method allows you to create an illuminated pushbutton.
The illuminated pushbutton switches state (or image) according to ON or OFF state of the device address,
allowing you to display the state of a device that is being operated.
Example: When you set an external device address M0 as Device in View Switching Method, if the valueof M0 changes, the display image will switched according to the value of M0 even if the button is
not pressed.
Touch

External device0

OFF image:
M0

ON image:
View Switching Method (Device): M01
M0*1 Advanced mode only

7-72

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Multi-Button

Properties of Bit Write for Multi-Functions dialog box
Sets the Bit Write command for the Multi-Button.

■ Command NameEnter a name for the command. The maximum number is 20 characters.

7
Buttons■ Action Mode
Select the behavior of the Multi-Button from the following:Set:

Pressing the button writes a 1 to the bit device.

Reset:

Pressing the button writes a 0 to the bit device.

Set & Reset:

Pressing the button writes a 1 to the bit device.
Releasing the button writes a 0 to the bit device.

Toggle:Pressing the button inverts the value of the bit device.
If the value of the bit device is 0 it changes to 1, and vice versa.

Move:

Pressing the button writes the value in the source bit device to the value in the destination bit
device.
For details about the Action Mode, refer to “Action Mode” on page 7-4. However, Set & Reset for theMulti-Button has the same function as Momentary for the Bit Button.

■ Destination Device
Specify the destination bit device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
■ Write*1
Specify the number of bit devices (1 to 64) at the destination.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Set or Reset. For details, refer to “Write” on page 7-6.
■ Source Data
Specifies the device that stores the data to be written.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move. For details, refer to “Source Data” on page 7-6.
Device:Specify the source bit device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Transfer:

Specify the number of bit devices (1 to 64) to transfer.

*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-73

5 Multi-Button

Properties of Word Write for Multi-Functions dialog box
Sets the Word Write command for the Multi-Button.

■ Command NameEnter a name for the command. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Action Mode
Select the behavior of the Multi-Button from the following:Set:

Pressing the button writes a constant value to a word device.

Move:

Pressing the button writes the value in the source device to the destination word device.

Set ON & OFF Data:

Pressing the button writes the constant value of ON data to a word device.
Releasing the button writes the constant value of OFF data to a word device.

Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, XOR:
Pressing the button performs arithmetic on the value in a reference device and a constantvalue or the value in a device address and writes the result to a word device.
For details about the Action Mode, refer to “Action Mode” on page 7-21. However, Set ON & OFF Datafor the Multi-Button has the same function as Momentary for the Word Button.
■ Data Type
Select the data type handled by the operation selected for Action Mode.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
BIN16(+) and BIN32(+) can only be set if Action Mode is set to OR, AND, or XOR.
BIN16(+) and BIN32(+) can only be set if Action Mode is set to Move. Because the number of devices
to transfer is specified in Advanced mode, you do not need to set Data Type.
If BCD4, BCD8 or float32 is selected and the arithmetic data contains a value inexpressible in BCD, a 1 iswritten to System Area 2 Arithmetic error bit (address+2, bit 5) and an error message is displayed.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “Arithmetic error” on page 3-25.
■ Source 1
Specify the source word device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, or XOR.

7-74

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Multi-Button■ Source Data
Select the data handled by the operation selected for Action Mode.
Value:

Use a constant.
Only a Value can be handled if Action Mode is set to Set or Set ON & OFF Data.
If Action Mode is set to Set ON & OFF Data, the value in the ON Data is written when the button isON, and the value in the OFF Data is written when the button is OFF.
Hexadecimal:

Device:Select this check box to enter the ON Data and OFF Data values inhexadecimal.

Use a word device.
Specify the device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
Use Reference Device*1:

Select this check box and specify a device to change the source word device
according to the value of the specified device.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.

Transfer*1:

Specify the number of word devices (1 to 64) to transfer.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
For details, refer to “Transfer” on page 7-23.

■ Destination Device
Destination Device:

Specify the destination word device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Use Reference Device*1: Select this check box and specify a device to change the destination word device according
to the value of the specified device.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings” on page 2-4.
Write*1:

Specify the number of word devices (1 to 64) at the destination.
For Move, specify how many times to write.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Set, Move, or Set ON & OFF Data.
For details, refer to “Write” on page 7-24.

*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-75

7Buttons

For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings” onpage 2-4.

5 Multi-Button

Properties of Goto Screen for Multi-Functions dialog box
Sets the Goto Screen command for the Multi-Button.

■ Command NameEnter a name for the command. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Action Mode
Select the behavior of the Multi-Button from the following:
Back to previous Screen:

Switches to the previous screen. Returns to up to 16 earlier screens.

Switch to Base Screen:

Switches between Base Screen.

Open Popup Screen:

Opens a Popup Screen.

Close Popup Screen:

Closes a Popup Screen.

Open Device Monitor Screen:

Opens the Device Monitor Screen.

Close Device Monitor Screen:

Closes the Device Monitor Screen.

Open Ladder Monitor:

Opens the Ladder Monitor.

Close Ladder Monitor:

Closes the Ladder Monitor.

Open Password Screen:

Opens the Password Screen.

Close Password Screen:

Closes the Password Screen.

Open Adjust contrast Screen:

Opens the Adjust contrast Screen.

Close Adjust contrast Screen:

Closes the Adjust contrast Screen.

Switch to System Mode:

Switches to the Top Page in the System Mode.

Reset current screen:

Resets the current Base Screen.

• Open Ladder Monitor and Close Ladder Monitor can only operate when ladder program is selected
as the programming language in control function.
• When the current Base Screen is reset using the Reset current screen function, the window andinternal devices restart as if the Base Screens were switched.

7-76

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Multi-Button■ Goto Screen
Screen No.:

If Action Mode is set to Switch to Base Screen, specify the Base Screen number to switch to(from 1 to 3,000). If Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen or Close Popup Screen,
specify the number of the Popup Screen to open or close (from 1 to 3,015).
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Switch to Base Screen, Open Popup
Screen, or Close Popup Screen.
Use Reference Device*1:

Select this check box and specify a device to specify the screen
number using the value of the specified device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For thedevice address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-61.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup
Screen or Close Popup Screen.

Coordinates X, Y: Specify the coordinates on the Base Screen for displaying a window.
X and Y specify the upper left corner of the window using the upper left corner of the screen as
the origin.

Use Reference Device*1:

Select this check box and specify a device to specify the coordinates
using the value of the specified device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For thedevice address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-61.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup
Screen.

With the HG2F/2S/3F/4F, window display coordinates are automatically adjusted to a position in multiples of
20 dots.

*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-77

Buttons

This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen, Open Device
Monitor Screen, Open Password Screen, Open Adjust contrast Screen, or Open Movie
File Screen.

75 Multi-Button

Properties of Key for Multi-Functions dialog box
Sets the Key command for the Multi-Button.

(Key)

Displays settings
applicable to theselected key.

■ Command NameEnter a name for the command. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Key Type
Select the function for the Key command.
Language:

Switches the display of the key that is displayed when Keypad is selected in Key Browser. These
languages are available:
Japanese, European, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.

Browse:Opens the Key Browser when clicked. Select a key.
For details, refer to “4.5 Key Browser” on page 7-66.

(Key):

Displays the name of the key selected using the Key Browser.
• When you select a key, the label for that key is assigned as the Registration Text.
• The function of Key command will affect on the next scan when the trigger condition is satisfied.

The settings explained below appear depending on the type of key selected.
■ Popup Screen No.
The Alt key switches the current Popup Screen used as a Keypad when this button is pressed.
Specify the Popup Screen number to open a Keypad for.
This setting is enabled only if Alt was selected using the Key Browser.

■ Scroll Size
Key Buttons Pg. Up and Pg. Dwn scroll the list up and down, respectively. Key Buttons Fcs. Up and Fcs. Dwn movethe focus up and down, respectively. This settings specifies the number of pages or lines (1 to 1023 lines) to scroll or
move the focus per each press of the button.
This setting is enabled only if Pg. Up, Pg. Dwn, Fcs. Up, and Fcs. Dwn are selected using the Key Browser.

7-78

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Multi-Button■ Transfer Setting
Key commands Download Project and Upload Project perform the data transfer function specified by theirnames.
These settings specify the source, data to be transfered, and destination.
This setting is enabled only if one of these keys is selected after clicking Data Transfer in the Key Browser.
If Download Project is selected.

7
Buttons

Source:This is set to the USB flash drive on which the project file to transfer (.ZNV) was saved.
File Path:

Specify the path to the project file (.ZNV) to transfer. The maximum number is 247
characters.
Example: Where “FT_DEMO_1.ZNV” is a project file saved on the root directory of a USB
flash drive:
FT_DEMO_1.ZNV

If Upload Project is selected.

Source:Specify where to save the project uploaded from Touch. The location is the USB flash drive.
File Path:

Specify the path to the folder where the uploaded project file will be saved. The maximum
number is 247 characters.
Example: To save it to the folder “Uploaded_Project” on a USB flash drive:
Uploaded_Project

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-79

5 Multi-Button

Properties of Script for Multi-Functions dialog box
Sets the script command for the Multi-Button.

(Script)■ Command NameEnter a name for the command. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Script ID
Specify the script ID (1 to 32,000) of the script to operate.
Script Manager will open whenis clicked. Select a script from the script list.

For details, refer to Chapter 20 “2.2 Script Manager” on page 20-7.
■ Script Name
Displays the name of the script selected in Script Manager.
■ (Script)
Displays the contents of the script selected in Script Manager.
Once this area is double clicked, the Script Editor will open and editing can be done.
For details, refer to Chapter 20 “2.3 Script Editor” on page 20-8.

7-80

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Multi-Button● View Tab
Only Coordinates and Size can be configured when No Image is selected for View Switching Method on the
General tab.

7
Buttons■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard:

Uses the default graphics contained within WindO/I-NV3.

Picture:Uses an image file saved in Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.4 Available Image Files” on page 2-18.

■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser or Picture Manager, depending on the setting for Image Type.
■ OFF button, ON button
Displays the graphic when ON or OFF. Clicking the ON button or OFF button switches the image displayed on the
View tab.
■ OFF, ON
Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF.
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors,monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the standard graphic.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.

■ Blink
Select this check box if blinking is desired (alternating ON and OFF) when a part is ON.
Blink

ON image

OFF image

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-81

5 Multi-Button■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H:

Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

20 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

ScreenHeight

7-82

Parts

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Multi-Button● Registration Text Tab
These options can only be configured when Button or Device is selected for View Switching Method on the
General tab.

7
Buttons■ FontSelects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic, Windows
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page
2-5.
■ StyleSelects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Magnification
W, H:
Selects the magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for text display.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects text alignment in the vertical direction.
Top, Center, Bottom
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-5.
■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-5.
■ Set by State
Select this check box if displaying different text when ON and OFF.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for text display.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-83

5 Multi-Button■ OFF, ON
Text:

Inputs characters to be displayed on parts. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-5.
When entering Unicode characters click
to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the charactersusing the Unicode Input dialog box then click OK.

Text ID:

Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000) when using the text registered in Text Manager.
Click

to display Text Manager.

Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
Text Color:

Selects the color of the text displayed on the part (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Windows Font:

Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font.
Select Windows using Font to display the current setting. To change the setting, click Change todisplay the Font dialog box.
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-12.

7-84

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Multi-Button● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

7
Buttons■ Input Condition
The Button is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Button is disabled and not operational
while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON and Device is LM0
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational.
Touch
Button
Does notoperateLM0: 0ConditionNotsatisfied

LM0: 1

Condition
Satisfied

ButtonOperates

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following.
Always Enabled: The Button is always enabled.

Button state
Always Enabled

While ON:

Enables the Button when the value of device is 1.
1

Value of Device
0

Button state
Disabled

EnabledDisabled

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

EnabledEnabledDisabled

7-85

5 Multi-Button

While OFF:

Enables the Button when the value of device is 0.
1

Value of Device
0

Button state
EnabledDisabled

EnabledDisabled

Disabled

EnabledEnabledEnabledWhile satisfying the condition:
Enables the Button when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

Button state
Disabled

Data Type:

EnabledDisabled

Disabled

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device:Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-63.

Comment:

7-86

Enter a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Multi-Button● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

7
Buttons■ ON delay
Select this check box to use the ON delay function.
Time (x100 msec): Specify the length of time that the button must be held down before activation by selecting avalue from 0 to 600 (units of 10 milliseconds).
The button activates after it is held down for a specified period of time.
Touch

Touch
Button
Does notoperateButtonOperates

Hold down for three seconds

This feature protects against mistaken operation by ensuring that the button will not be activated if touched
accidentally.
■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display:

Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.

Input:

Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-87

5 Multi-Button

Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:

User Name

Security Group

User1

User2

User3

None

Group AGroup A, Group B

Touch

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart
Display: Group A

Numerical Display
Display: None

Button
Display: Group A
Input: Group B

For User1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and User2 logs in, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch

Touch

Password
User2

130



Touch

ENT

A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2.

Group A parts are
not displayed to User1.
User1

130

130

********

Group A parts are
displayed to User2.
User2

Since the display security group is Group A, User2 can view the buttons. But since the input security group is Group B,
User2 cannot operate the buttons.
Suppose that the Password Screen is now opened and User3 logs in to the system. Group A buttons can be displayed,and Group B buttons can be operated.
Touch

Touch

Password
User3

130
130

Touch

130



********A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

ENT

ButtonButtonCannot operate

User2

For User2,
Group A parts are displayed but
Group B parts cannot be operated.

Can operate

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User3.
User3

For User3,
Group A parts are displayed andGroup B parts can be operated.

■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the Touch makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the Touch, select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the System tabof the Project Settings dialog box.

7-88

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Multi-Button● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

7
Buttons■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Button on the editing screen

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-89

6 Keypad

6

Keypad

6.1 How the Keypad is Used
A part comprised of Key Buttons. Enters numbers and characters into Numerical or Character Input parts.
• Entering numbers in the Numerical Input
Touch

1230

Numerical Input

Keypad• Entering characters in the Character Input
Touch

Character Input

KeypadDo not use the Keypad part with the Goto Screen Button or a combination of Goto Screen Commands. For
details, refer to “4 Key Button” on page 7-49.

7-90

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6 Keypad

6.2 Keypad Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Keypads.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Keypad.

7
Buttons

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Keypad.
3 Double-click the dropped Keypad and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Keypad Properties dialog box is displayed until OK is clicked.
 Refer to “6.3 Properties of Keypad Dialog Box” on page 7-92.
After OK on the Keypad Properties dialog box is clicked, double clicking the Keypad thereafter displays theProperties dialog box for the Key Buttons as a group.
This allows editing of settings common to each button.
• View: “View Tab” on page 7-54
• Registration Text: “Registration Text Tab” on page 7-56
• Options: “Options Tab” on page 7-60
The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode. To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-91

6 Keypad

6.3 Properties of Keypad Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

■ Browse
Select a prebuilt Keypad within WindO/I-NV3.
Displays the Standard Browser when clicked. Select numeric keys or character keys registered in the Standard
Browser.
■ Button
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Select the foreground and background color to use for the Keypad (color: 256 colors,monochrome: 8 shades).
Displays the Color Palette when the Color button is clicked. Select a color from the Color
Palette.
Pattern:

Select a pattern to use for the Keypad.
Displays the Pattern Palette when the Pattern button is clicked. Select a pattern from thePattern Palette.

■ Registration Text
Font:

Select one of the following fonts to use for the text on the buttons.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2
Available Text” on page 2-5.

Style:

Select a character style: Regular or Bold.

Magnification W, H: Select the zoom factor (0.5, 1 to 8) to use on the text.
This setting is only enabled when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese,
Korean, Central European, Baltic or Cyrillic.
Text Color:

Select the text color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Displays the Color Palette when the Color button is clicked. Select a color from the Color Palette.

■ Coordinates
X, Y:Specify the display coordinates of the Keypad.
X and Y specify the upper left corner of the Keypad using the upper left corner of the screen as
the origin.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)Y

ScreenKeypad7-92

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6 Keypad■ SizeW, H:

Specify the size of the Keypad by specifying width and height.
W:

20 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

ScreenHeightKeypad7
Buttons

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-93

7 Selector Switch

7

Selector Switch

7.1 How the Selector Switch is Used
Writes a 0 or 1 to a bit device. This is an exclusive control that only writes a single value as 1 and all other values as 0.
• Switching between two Run Modes (Manual and Auto)
Knob
Automatic
L-button

Auto

ManualR-button

Ch1

Ch2

Automatic

Auto

ManualManualAuto

Press L-button toswitch to Auto.

Operatemanually

ManualPress R-button toswitch to Manual.

• Switching between three Run Modes (Filling - Stop - Discharge)
Knob

F

S

D

L-button

R-button

Ch1

Ch2

F

S

D

Press L-button toswitch to Filling.

7-94

F

S

D

Switch to Stop.
(The operation varies basedon the switch type.)

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Ch3

F

S

D

Press R-button toswitch to Discharge.

7 Selector Switch

7.2 Selector Switch Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Selector Switch buttons.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Selector Switch.

7
Buttons

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Selector Switch.
3 Double-click the dropped Selector Switch and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-95

7 Selector Switch

7.3 Properties of Selector Switch Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Switch TypeThe 2-notch action is as follows.
• When the knob is at Ch1 (left), pressing the right button switches the selector knob to Ch2 (right).
During this action, the device for Ch1 is set to 0 and Ch2 is set to 1.
• When the knob is at Ch2 (right), pressing the left button switches the selector knob to Ch1 (left).
During this action, the device for Ch1 is set to 1 and Ch2 is set to 0.
The 3-notch action is as follows.
• The knob behaves as follows for 3-Notch No-return, 3-Notch R-return, and 3-Notch L-return button:- Press R-button: knob switches from Ch1 (left) -> Ch2 (middle) -> Ch3 (right), in that order.
- Press L-button: knob switches from Ch3 (right) -> Ch2 (middle) -> Ch1 (left), in that order.
• Switching the knob writes 1 to the device for the new knob position, and 0 to the devices for the other twochannels.
Whether the knob returns and the direction it returns depends on the switch type.
Select the switch type from the following.
2-Notch No-return:The knob does not return when the operator's finger is released.
Press R-button

ReleasePress L-button

Operationand view
Default state

ActionData Ch1
written Ch2

7-96

Write

Write

0

1

1

0

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Release7 Selector Switch

2-Notch R-return:

After the knob switches from Ch1 to Ch2, it returns to Ch1 when the R-button is released.
Press

Release

Write

Write

0

1

1

0

Operationand view
Default state

ActionData Ch1
written Ch22-Notch L-return:

After the knob switches from Ch2 to Ch1, it returns to Ch2 when the L-button is released.
Press

Release7
Buttons

Operationand view
Default state

Action

Write

Write

1

0

0

1

Data Ch1
written Ch23-Notch No-return:The knob does not return when the operator's finger is released.
Press R-button

ReleasePress L-button

ReleasePress L-button

ReleaseOperationand view
Default state

Action3-Notch R-return:

Write

Write

Write

Ch1
Data
written Ch2

0

0

1

0

1

0

Ch3

1

0

0

• If the knob is switched to Ch3, it returns to Ch2 when the button is released.
• If the knob is switched to Ch1, or from Ch1 to Ch2, it stays where it is even if the button isreleased.
Press R-button

ReleasePress L-button

Action

Write

Write

Write

Write

Ch1

0

0

1

0

Data
written Ch2

0

1

0

1

Ch3

1

0

0

0

ReleasePress R-button

ReleaseOperationand view
Default state

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-97

7 Selector Switch

3-Notch L-return:• If the knob is switched to Ch1, it returns to Ch2 when the button is released.
• If the knob is switched to Ch2, or from Ch3 to Ch2, it stays where it is even if the button isreleased.
Press R-button

ReleasePress L-button

ReleasePress L-button

ReleaseOperationand view
Default state

Action

Write

Write

Write

Write

Ch1
Data
Ch2
written

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

Ch3

1

0

0

0

3-Notch Both-return: If the knob is switched to Ch1 or Ch3, it returns to Ch2 when the button is released.
Press R-button

ReleasePress L-button

Release

Write

Write

Write

Write

Ch1
Data
written Ch2

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

Ch3

1

0

0

0

Operationand view
Default state

Action■ NotchRegister and edit the settings for each notch to each channel.
Use Text Manager:

Select this check box to use the text registered in Text Manager as the Registration
Text for each channel.

(List of Notch settings): This list shows the notch settings for each channel.
No.:

Shows the channel to be output. The number of notches selected in the Switch
Type determines the number of channels.
Double clicking the cell displays the Notch Settings dialog box where you can edit thenotch settings. For details, refer to “Notch Settings dialog box” on page 7-100.

Device: Shows the destination bit device or bit in the destination word device.
Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address Settings dialog box where youcan edit the device address. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Set:

7-98

Text:

Shows the Registration Text for the channel.
Double clicking the cell displays the Unicode Input dialog box where you can edit theRegistration Text.
If you select the Use Text Manager check box, the text ID is shown. Double
clicking the cell displays Text Manager where you can edit the text.

Color:

Shows the color of the Registration Text for the channel.
Double clicking the cell displays Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Registers or changes the notch settings. Selecting a number that has already been registeredchanges the existing notch settings.
Clicking Set displays the Notch Settings dialog box where you can configure the notch. For
details, refer to “Notch Settings dialog box” on page 7-100.
Notches are always registered from Ch1.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7 Selector Switch

Insert:Inserts a notch setting entry above the currently selected position.
Select the channel number from the list where you want to insert the notch setting, and thenclick Insert. This displays the Notch Settings dialog box where you can configure the notch.
The notch settings at the point of insertion shift down one line. Notch settings cannot be
inserted if all channel numbers have a notch setting.

Remove:Deletes the registered notch setting from the list.
Select the channel number in the list, and then click Remove.

Default Position:

Selects the default position of the knob when the Touch starts operation and the Selector
Switch is first displayed on the screen.
Makes Ch1 the default knob position. Writes 1 to the device
configured for Ch1, writes 0 to the devices configured for theother channels.

Ch2:

Makes Ch2 the default knob position. Writes 1 to the device
configured for Ch2, writes 0 to the devices configured for theother channels.

Ch3:

Makes Ch3 the default knob position. Writes 1 to the device
configured for Ch3, writes 0 to the devices configured for theother channels.

Read from Destination Device:

The position of the knob is determined by the value of
device.

The default knob position is fixed for these two switch types because of the return functionality.
2- Notch R-return: Ch1
2-Note L-return, 3-Notch Both-return: Ch2• If Default Position is Ch1, Ch2, or Ch3, the position of the knob does not change even if the value inthe device configured for the channel changes, unless the change is caused by the buttons on the
Selector Switch. If Default Position is Read from Destination Device, the position of the knobchanges according to the value of device configured for the channel.
• When a Selector Switch is redisplayed immediately after switching the screen or when a hidden Selector
Switch is redisplayed, values are not written to the destination devices for the channels.
• If the value in the device used to determine the default knob position contains an illegal value, the knob
will be shown as follows:- 2- Notch No-return: Ch1- 3-Notch: Ch2

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-99

7Buttons

Ch1:

7 Selector Switch

Notch Settings dialog box
This dialog configures a notch for a channel. If the channel has already been set with a notch, the setting isoverwritten.

■ Destination Device
Specify the destination bit device or bit in the destination word device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
■ TextEnter the Registration Text for the channel.
The characters that can be entered depends on the font selected for Font on the Format tab. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-5.
To enter Unicode characters, click
to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the characters in the
Unicode Input dialog box, and then click OK.
■ Text ID
To use the text registered in Text Manager as the Registration Text for the channel, specify the ID number from 1 to
32,000.
Click

to display Text Manager.

This setting is only enabled if you select the Use Text Manager check box.
■ Text Color
Select the Registration Text color for the channel (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Displays the Color Palette when the Color button is clicked. Select a color from the Color Palette.

7-100

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7 Selector Switch● View Tab

7
Buttons■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser.
■ KnobSelects the knob color of the Selector Switch (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Knob■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:

Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from theColor Palette.

Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern fromthe Pattern Palette.

Flange■ Switch
Foreground Color, Background Color:

Selects the foreground and background colors of the buttons (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from theColor Palette.

Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the button.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern fromthe Pattern Palette.

Buttons

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-101

7 Selector Switch■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H:

Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

20 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

ScreenHeight

7-102

Parts

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7 Selector Switch● Format Tab

7
Buttons■ FontSelects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page
2-5.
■ StyleSelects Regular or Bold for text style.
■ Magnification
W, H:
Selects the magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for text display.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-103

7 Selector Switch● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Input Condition
The Selector Switch is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Selector Switch is disabled and notoperational while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON and Device is LM0
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Selector Switch is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Selector Switch is operational.
Touch
Button
Does notoperateLM0: 0ConditionNotsatisfied

LM0: 1

Condition
Satisfied

ButtonOperates

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Selector Switch from the following.
Always Enabled: The Selector Switch is always enabled.

Selector Switch
state
EnabledWhile ON:

Enables the Selector Switch when the value of device is 1.
1

Value of Device0

Selector
Switch state
Disabled

7-104

EnabledSmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Disabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

7 Selector Switch

While OFF:

Enables the Selector Switch when the value of device is 0.
1

Value of Device0

Selector
Switch state
EnabledDisabled

EnabledDisabled

Disabled

EnabledWhile satisfying the condition:
Enables the Selector Switch when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

7

Selector
Switch state

Data Type:

EnabledDisabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device:Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-63.

Comment:

Enter a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-105

Buttons

Disabled

7 Selector Switch● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display:

Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.

Input:

Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.

7-106

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7 Selector Switch

Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:

User Name

Security Group

User1

User2

User3

None

Group AGroup A, Group B

Touch

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart
Display: Group A

Numerical Display
Display: None

Button
Display: Group A
Input: Group B

For User1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.

7

If the Password Screen is now opened and User2 logs in, Group A parts are displayed.

Password
User2

130



Touch

ENT

A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2.

Group A parts are
not displayed to User1.
User1

130

130

********

Buttons

Touch

Touch

Group A parts are
displayed to User2.
User2

Since the display security group is Group A, User2 can view the buttons. But since the input security group is Group B,
User2 cannot operate the buttons.
Suppose that the Password Screen is now opened and User3 logs in to the system. Group A buttons can be displayed,and Group B buttons can be operated.
Touch

Touch

Password
User3

130
130

Touch

130



********A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

ENT

ButtonButtonCannot operate

User2

For User2,
Group A parts are displayed but
Group B parts cannot be operated.

Can operate

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User3.
User3

For User3,
Group A parts are displayed andGroup B parts can be operated.

■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the Touch makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the Touch, select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the System tab of
the Project Settings dialog box.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-107

7 Selector Switch● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Selector Switch on the editing screen

7-108

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

8 Potentiometer

8

Potentiometer

8.1 How the Potentiometer is Used
Writes a value to a word device by pressing a slider button.
• The slider display position increases and decreases while the button is depressed. The value of the slider at thedisplayed position is written to the device when the button is released.
Touch

External device

Value of slider at
displayed position

0
D0 :

0

7
Buttons

Value of slider at
displayed position

105
D0 :

0

Value of slider at
displayed position
Write to device

127

D0 :

127

Default state

Press R-button

ReleasePress L-button

ReleaseStop

Moves right

Stop

Moves left

Stop

Operationand view

SliderValue
ActionIncreases

Decreases
Write

Write

The slider indicates the value written to the device. When the value is increased or decreased, the slider display
position also changes.
The slider moves between a user-defined minimum and maximum value.
The input value increases and decreases while the button is depressed. The value of the slider at the displayed
position is written to the device when the button is released.
The slider display position does not change when the value of Destination Device changes unless it waschanged by the Potentiometer buttons. However, immediately after the screen is switched and immediately
after the part is displayed on the screen, the slider is displayed at the position specified by the value of
Destination Device.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-109

8 Potentiometer

8.2 Potentiometer Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Potentiometer parts.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Potentiometer.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Potentiometer.
3 Double-click the dropped Potentiometer and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.

7-110

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

8 Potentiometer

8.3 Properties of Potentiometer Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab

7
Buttons■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Data Type
Select the data type handled by the Potentiometer.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ MinimumSpecify the minimum value that can be entered. The minimum value varies based on the data type.
■ MaximumSpecify the maximum value that can be entered. The maximum value varies based on the data type.
■ Destination Device
Specify the destination word device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-111

8 Potentiometer● View Tab■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser.
■ Slider Color
Selects the slider color of the Potentiometer (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Slider■ Plate Color
Selects the plate color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:

Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from theColor Palette.

Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern fromthe Pattern Palette.
Flange7-112

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

8 Potentiometer■ Switch
Foreground Color, Background Color:

Selects the foreground and background colors of the buttons (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from theColor Palette.

Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the button.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern fromthe Pattern Palette.
Buttons■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H:

Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

20 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

ScreenHeight7
Buttons

X:

Parts

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-113

8 Potentiometer● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Input Condition
The Potentiometer is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Potentiometer is disabled and notoperational while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON and Device is LM0
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Potentiometer is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Potentiometer is operational.
Touch
Button
Does notoperateLM0: 0ConditionNotsatisfied

LM0: 1

Condition
Satisfied

ButtonOperates

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Potentiometer from the following.
Always Enabled: The Potentiometer is always enabled.

Potentiometer
state
EnabledWhile ON:

Enables the Potentiometer when the value of device is 1.
1

Value of Device0

Potentiometer
state
Disabled

7-114

EnabledDisabled

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

EnabledEnabledDisabled

8 Potentiometer

While OFF:

Enables the Potentiometer when the value of device is 0.
1

Value of Device0

Potentiometer
state
EnabledDisabled

EnabledDisabled

Disabled

EnabledWhile satisfying the condition:
Enables the Potentiometer when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

7

Potentiometer
state

Data Type:

EnabledDisabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device:Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-63.

Comment:

Enter a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-115

Buttons

Disabled

8 Potentiometer● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display:

Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.

Input:

Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.

7-116

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

8 Potentiometer

Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:

User Name

Security Group

User1

User2

User3

None

Group AGroup A, Group B

Touch

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart
Display: Group A

Numerical Display
Display: None

Button
Display: Group A
Input: Group B

For User1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.

7

If the Password Screen is now opened and User2 logs in, Group A parts are displayed.

Password
User2

130



Touch

ENT

A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2.

Group A parts are
not displayed to User1.
User1

130

130

********

Buttons

Touch

Touch

Group A parts are
displayed to User2.
User2

Since the display security group is Group A, User2 can view the buttons. But since the input security group is Group B,
User2 cannot operate the buttons.
Suppose that the Password Screen is now opened and User3 logs in to the system. Group A buttons can be displayed,and Group B buttons can be operated.
Touch

Touch

Password
User3

130
130

Touch

130



********A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

ENT

ButtonButtonCannot operate

User2

For User2,
Group A parts are displayed but
Group B parts cannot be operated.

Can operate

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User3.
User3

For User3,
Group A parts are displayed andGroup B parts can be operated.

■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the Touch makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the Touch, select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the System tabof the Project Settings dialog box.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7-117

8 Potentiometer● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Potentiometer on the editing screen

7-118

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualChapter 8

Lamps

This chapter describes the setup for the lamp parts and related Touch operations.

1

Pilot Lamps

1.1 How the Pilot Lamp is Used
Pilot Lamp parts display drawing objects. The value of a bit device is used to switch the drawing object displayed.
• Switch and display pictures by the values of devices

0

Touch

External device

8

1

Lamps

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

8-1

1 Pilot Lamps

1.2 Pilot Lamp Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Pilot Lamps.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Lamps, and then click Pilot Lamp.

2 Click a point on the Edit screen where you want to place the Pilot Lamp.
3 Double-click the dropped Pilot Lamp and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.

8-2

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Pilot Lamps

1.3 Properties of Pilot Lamp Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.
● General Tab

8
Lamps

■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ >>OFF Text, >>ON Text
Applies the text entered in the Part Name field to the Text field under the OFF or ON fields on the Registration
Text tab. This is used as the Registration Text when the lamp is OFF or ON.
To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON, select the Set by State check box on theRegistration Text tab. If left unchecked, the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state isdisplayed for the ON state as well.
■ Action Mode
Select the action when the part is ON.
No Blink (only ON): Displays the drawing object for the ON state when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Blink (ON + Blink): When the condition is satisfied and the value of the trigger device is 1, the object blinks(alternates between the drawing object for the ON and OFF states at fixed time interval). The
blinking interval can be set with the Blinking Cycle setting on the System tab of the Project
Settings dialog box.
Blink Trigger Device: Specify the bit device to cause the lamp to blink.
The lamp blinks when the value of device is 1. The action for No Blink
applies when the value is 0.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-61.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

8-3

1 Pilot Lamps

Example: When Action Mode is Blink (ON + Blink), Blink Trigger Device is M0, and on the Trigger Conditiontab, Trigger Type is While ON, Device is LM0
Trigger Condition: Device LM0 value

0

1

1

0

Action Mode: Value in trigger device M0

0

0

1

1

Displays OFF
drawing object

Displays ON
drawing object

Blinking

Displays OFF
drawing object

Displayed drawing object

ActionThe lamp will neither turn on or blink if the trigger conditions are not met. Lamp trigger conditions are
configured on the Trigger Condition tab.

8-4

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Pilot Lamps● View Tab

8
Lamps

■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard:

Uses the default graphic for WindO/I-NV3.

Picture:Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.4 Available Image Files” on page 2-18.

■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser or Picture Manager, depending on the setting for Image Type.
■ OFF button, ON button
Displays the graphic when ON or OFF. Clicking the ON button or OFF button switches the image displayed on the
View tab.
■ OFF, ON
Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF.
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors,monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the standard graphic.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.

■ Not Display Image*1
Select this check box to display no drawing object in the OFF state.
If the Not Display Image check box is selected:• The Recover Background function will always be enabled.
• Text set as registration text for the OFF state will be displayed.

*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

8-5

1 Pilot Lamps■ Recover Background*1
Select this check box to recover the background of the area where the picture had been displayed after the picture isswitched. When this check box is cleared, the background is filled with the screen's Background Color.
When parts or drawings are arranged so they overlap the background of the Pilot Lamp (below), the background ofparts and drawings is displayed as follows if the Pilot Lamp picture is hidden.
Pilot Lamp
Drawing

Check box cleared

Check box selected

The screen is filled with
Background Color, so

Since background parts andbackground parts anddrawings are redrawn, theydrawings are missing.

return to their original state.

Can only be set when Picture is selected for Image Type.
However, when the background part is the Alarm List Display, Alarm Log Display, bar chart, line chart, or pie chart,
the missing sections will remain.
If the Recover Background check box is selected, the number of parts that can be placed on a single
screen decreases. If an error message appears when the Picture Display is displayed on the Touch, clear
the Recover Background check box or reduce the number of parts.
■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H:

Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

5 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

5 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

ScreenHeightParts*1 Advanced mode only

8-6

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Pilot Lamps● Registration Text Tab

8
Lamps

■ FontSelects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic, Windows
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page
2-5.
■ StyleSelects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Magnification
W, H:
Selects the magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for text display.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects text alignment in the vertical direction.
Top, Center, Bottom
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-5.
■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-5.
■ Set by State
Select this check box if displaying different text when ON and OFF.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for text display.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

8-7

1 Pilot Lamps■ OFF, ON
Text:

Inputs characters to be displayed on parts. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-5.
When entering Unicode characters click
to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the charactersusing the Unicode Input dialog box then click OK.

Text ID:

Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000) when using the text registered in Text Manager.
Click

to display Text Manager.

Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
Text Color:

Selects the color of the text displayed on the part (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Windows Font:

Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font.
Select Windows using Font to display the current setting. To change the setting, click Change todisplay the Font dialog box.
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-12.

8-8

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Pilot Lamps● Trigger Condition Tab

8Lamps
The Pilot Lamp is on while the condition is satisfied, and it is off while the condition is not satisfied. The Pilot Lamp
displays the ON graphic when on and it displays the OFF graphic when off.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON and Device is LM0
When LM0 is 0, condition is not satisfied, so Lamp displays OFF graphic.
When LM0 is 1, condition is satisfied, so Lamp displays OFF graphic.
Touch

LM0: 0Condition
Not satisfied

Lamp
Displays OFF graphic

LM0: 1

Condition
Satisfied

Lamp
Displays ON graphic■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to turn on the Pilot Lamp from the following.
While ON:

Turns on the Pilot Lamp when the value of device is 1.
1

Value of Device
0

Pilot Lamp status

Off

On

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Off

On

On

Off

8-9

1 Pilot Lamps

While OFF:Turns on the Pilot Lamp when the value of device is 0.
1

Value of Device
0

Pilot Lamp status

On

Off

On

Off

Off

On

On

Off

While satisfying the condition: Turns on the Pilot Lamp when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

Pilot Lamp status

Off

On

Off

On

■ Data Type
Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the on condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as the on condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
■ Condition
Specifies the conditional expression for the on condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-63.
■ Comment
Enter a comment for the on condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

8-10

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Pilot Lamps● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

8
Lamps

■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display:

Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

8-11

1 Pilot Lamps

Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:

User Name

Security Group

User1

User2

None

Group A
Touch

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart
Display: Group A

Numerical Display
Display: None

Button
Display: Group A

For User 1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 2 of Group A, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch

Touch

130

PasswordUser2********A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

Group A parts are
not displayed to User1.
User1

8-12

Touch

130

130
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualGroup A parts are
displayed to User2.
User2

1 Pilot Lamps● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

8
Lamps

■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Pilot Lamp on the editing screen

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

8-13

2 Multi-State Lamps

2

Multi-State Lamps

2.1 How the Multi-State Lamp is Used
Multi-state lamp parts display drawing objects. The value of a specified word device is used to switch the drawing
object to be displayed.
• Switch and display pictures by the values of devices

External device
bit3

Touch

bit15

bit3

bit0

D0

bit0

D0= 0100

State: 2

bit3

bit0

D0= 0001

bit3

bit0

D0= 0010

bit3

bit0

D0= 0100

8-14

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualState: 1

State: 02 Multi-State Lamps

2.2 Multi-State Lamp Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Multi-State Lamps.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Lamps, and then click Multi-State Lamp.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Multi-State Lamp.
3 Double-click the dropped Multi-State Lamp and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

8
Lamps

The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

8-15

2 Multi-State Lamps

2.3 Properties of Multi-State Lamp Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.
● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Switching Method
Specify the method to switch drawing objects from the following:
Bit:

Switches the drawing object displayed, according to the status of the bits.
Example: When Bit is selected and the bits of trigger device D0 are allocated to the following pictures.
bit15

bit3

bit0

Trigger device D0 value

PictureState: 2

State: 1

State: 0

Switches the picture to display according to the status of the bits.
If multiple bits are 1, display
the picture for the lowest
order bit.
Trigger device D0
bit state

0001

0010

0100

State: 0

State: 1

State: 2

1000

1110

1100

State: 1

State: 2

Picture to display

Action

Display picture Display picture Display picture
for bit 0

for bit 1

for bit 2

No picture

Display picture Display picture
for bit 1

If all bits in the device are 0 or if a bitwith no associated picture becomes 1,
display nothing.

8-16

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

for bit 2

2 Multi-State Lamps

Value:

Switches the drawing object displayed, according to the value of the device.
Example: When Value is selected and the values of Trigger Device D0 are allocated to the following
pictures.
Trigger device D0 value

0

1

2

State: 0

State: 1

State: 2

PictureSwitches the picture to display according to the value of the device.
Trigger device D0 value

0

1

2

State: 0

State: 1

State: 2

3

Picture to display

Action Display picture for 0 Display picture for 1 Display picture for 2

If the value of device
has no picture associatedNo picturewith it, display nothing.

■ Trigger Device
Specifies the word device to use as the condition for switching the drawing object.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

8-17

8
Lamps

Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

2 Multi-State Lamps● View Tab■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard:

Uses the default graphic for WindO/I-NV3.

Picture:Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.4 Available Image Files” on page 2-18.

■ Recover Background*1
Select this check box to recover the background of the area where the picture had been displayed after the picture isswitched. When this check box is cleared, the background is filled with the screen's Background Color.
When parts or drawings are arranged so they overlap the background of the Multi-State Lamp (below), thebackground of parts and drawings is displayed as follows if the Multi-State Lamp picture is hidden.
Multi-State Lamp
Drawing

Check box cleared

Check box selected

The screen is filled with
Background Color, so

Since background parts andbackground parts anddrawings are redrawn, theydrawings are missing.

return to their original state.

Can only be set when Picture is selected for Image Type.
However, when the background part is the Alarm List Display, Alarm Log Display, bar chart, line chart, or pie chart,
the missing sections will remain.
If the Recover Background check box is selected, the number of parts that can be placed on a single
screen decreases. If an error message appears when the Multi-State Lamp is displayed on the Touch, clear
the Recover Background check box or reduce the number of parts.

*1 Advanced mode only

8-18

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Multi-State Lamps■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H:

Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

5 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

5 to (Base Screen vertical size)

8

Width

Lamps

ScreenHeightParts

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

8-19

2 Multi-State Lamps● Registration Text Tab■ FontSelects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic, Windows
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page
2-5.
■ StyleSelects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Magnification
W, H:
Selects the magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for text display.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects text alignment in the vertical direction.
Top, Center, Bottom
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-5.
■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-5.
■ Set by State
Select this check box if displaying different text when ON and OFF.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for text display.

8-20

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Multi-State Lamps● State Tab

8
Lamps

■ Number of StatesSpecify the number of drawing objects (1 to 16) to display by switching.
■ Settings
Lists the state settings. The list shows various settings such as the state number and file name for the drawing object.
State:

Shows the state number. Double clicking the cell displays the State Settings dialog box where
you can edit the state settings. For details, refer to “State Settings dialog box” on page 8-22.

Image:

Shows the name or a file name for a drawing object. Double clicking the cell opens the View
Browser if Standard is selected under Image Type on the View tab, or Picture Manager if
Picture is selected. This allows you to change the drawing object to display.

Text:

Shows the registration text. Double clicking the cell displays the Unicode Input dialog box. If you
selected the Use Text Manager check box on the Registration Text tab, the Text Manager
dialog box will appear. This allows you to change the registration text.

Fg.Color, Bg.Color:

Shows the foreground and background colors (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades) for
standard images. Double clicking the cell opens the Color Palette where you can change theforeground and background colors. This setting can only be changed if Image Type is set toStandard on the View tab.

Pattern:

Shows the pattern for standard images. Double clicking the cell opens the Pattern Palette where
you can change the pattern of the image. This setting can only be changed if Image Type is set
to Standard on the View tab.

Text Color

Shows the color of the registration text. Double clicking the cell opens the Color Palette where
you can change the color of the text.

Blink:

Indicates whether to display the drawing object blinking or constantly lit. Double clicking the cell
toggles between Y for yes and N for no.

Windows Font:

Shows the currently set Windows Font. Double clicking the cell displays the Font Settings dialog
box where you can change the Windows Font. This setting can only be changed when
Windows is selected for Font on the Registration Text tab.

Set:

Registers the state settings to the list. If you select a state number that is already registered,that number is overwritten with the new settings.
Click this button to display the State Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “State Settings
dialog box” on page 8-22.

Insert:Inserts the settings in the position selected on the list.
Select a state number in the list, and then click this button to display the State Settings dialog
box. The settings at the insertion point shift down one line. Settings cannot be inserted if allstate numbers are configured.

Remove:Deletes the registered settings from the list.
Select a state number, and then click this button to delete the selected settings from the list.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

8-21

2 Multi-State Lamps■ Image
Shows the image for the state number selected in the Settings list.
■ Copy to next State
Select this check box to register or change all state settings at once.
This option copies the current settings to all state numbers after the selected state number when the settings are set
or changed.
State Settings dialog box
This dialog box sets the drawing object and registration text to display.

■ Image
Browse:Select the drawing object to use for the lamp part. Clicking this button opens the View Browser
if Standard is selected under Image Type on the View tab, or Picture Manager if Picture isselected.

Image:

Shows the selected drawing object.

■ TextEnter the text to display. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
The characters that can be entered depends on the font selected for Font on the Registration Text tab. For details,
refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-5.
This setting is only enabled when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared on the Registration Text tab.
■ Text ID
To use the text registered in Text Manager, specify the ID number from 1 to 32000.
This setting is only enabled when the Use Text Manager check box is selected on the Registration Text tab.
■ Color
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Select the foreground and background color to use for standard images (color: 256 colors,monochrome: 8 shades).
Clicking either button opens the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Select the pattern for a standard image. Clicking this button opens the Pattern Palette. Select apattern from the Pattern Palette.

Text Color:

Select the text color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades) for the registration text.
Clicking this button opens the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Blink:

Select this check box to cause the image to blink (alternately display the ON and OFF drawing
object at fixed time interval).
The blinking interval can be set with the Blinking Cycle setting on the System tab of the
Project Settings dialog box.

■ Windows Font
Specify the Windows Font to use.
The current settings are displayed by selecting Windows in the Font property on the Registration Text tab. To
change the settings, click Change to display the Font Settings dialog box.
The text ID setting is only enabled if the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-12.

8-22

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Multi-State Lamps● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

8
Lamps

■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display:

Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

8-23

2 Multi-State Lamps

Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:

User Name

Security Group

User1

User2

None

Group A
Touch

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart
Display: Group A

Numerical Display
Display: None

Button
Display: Group A

For User 1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 2 of Group A, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch

Touch

130

PasswordUser2********A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

Group A parts are
not displayed to User1.
User1

8-24

Touch

130

130
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualGroup A parts are
displayed to User2.
User2

2 Multi-State Lamps● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

8
Lamps

■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Multi-State Lamp on the editing screen

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

8-25

2 Multi-State Lamps

8-26

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualChapter 9

Data Displays

This chapter describes how to configure the Data Display parts and their operation on the Touch.

1

Numerical Input

1.1 How the Numerical Input is Used
The Numerical Input features a display mode that displays the current value of device and an entry mode that entersa value using the keypad or key buttons and writes that value to a device. When the part is displayed on the screen,
the Numerical Input is in display mode. To enter a value by pressing the keypad or key buttons, touch the Numerical
Input to switch it to entry mode. In entry mode, the value of device is displayed until a value is entered.
The Numerical Input can perform the following functions.
• Write a value entered with the keypad or key buttons to a device
Touch

External device

Numerical Input
999

D100:

999

Standard keypad

999

9Data Displays• Display the current value of device
Touch

External device

1234

D100:

1234

• Enter and display decimal numbers
Touch

12.30

External device

12.30
12.3

• Display the entered value as * (asterisk)
Touch

****

External device

****
****

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-1

1 Numerical Input

1.2 Numerical Input Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Numerical Inputs.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Numerical Input.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Numerical Input.
3 Double-click the dropped Numerical Input and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Data Over tab, Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.

9-2

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Numerical Input

1.3 Properties of Numerical Input Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.
● General Tab

9■ Keypad
Configures the keypad for entering values in the Numerical Input.
Use as Display for Keypad*1:
Type:

Screen No.:

Select this check box to only use the Numerical Input as a part to display thevalue entered with the keypad.

According to the location where the keypad is configured, selects the type from the following.
Standard:

Uses the standard keypad. The standard keypad is the keypad configured as
the Popup Screen for the standard keypad (screen number 3000 to 3015).
This is the keypad for the type configured by Display Type.

Popup:

Uses a keypad configured as a Popup Screen.

Current Screen:

Uses the keypad configured on the same screen as the Numerical Input.

Specifies the screen number of the Popup Screen configured as the keypad (1 to 3015).
This option can only be configured if Popup is selected for Type.

Adjust location automatically:

Select this check box to display the Popup Screen configured as the keypad ina location where it will not overlap the Numerical Input.
This option can only be configured if Standard or Popup is selected forType.

Coordinates X, Y: Specifies the display location of the Popup Screen configured as the keypad.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the X and Y coordinates are the upper-leftcorner of the Popup Screen.
This option can only be configured when Popup is selected for Type and the Adjust location
automatically check box is cleared.
Specify the coordinates in 1 dot units.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)

*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-3

Data Displays■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.

1 Numerical Input■ Display Type
Selects the display type for the value as Decimal or Hexadecimal.
■ Data Format
Data Type:

Selects the type of data for the value.
The data type that can be configured differs according to Display Type. For the datatypes that can be configured, see the table for Digits.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Digits:Specifies the digits to display. The range of digits that can be set varies based on thedisplay type and data type. The digits that can be set are as follows.
Display Type

Data Type

Digits

BIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-)
Decimal display

Hexadecimal
display

Display Floating Point:

1 to 5

BIN32 (+), BIN32 (+/-)

1 to 10BCD4

1 to 4BCD8

1 to 8float32

1 to 10

BIN16 (+)

1 to 4

BIN32 (+)

1 to 8

Select this check box to display the decimal point.

If Data Type is BIN16(+), BIN16(+/-), BIN32(+), BIN32(+/-), BCD4, or BCD8 and the Display
Floating Point check box is selected, a decimal value will be displayed on the Numerical Input when adecimal value is entered on the keypad in entry mode, but an integer is written to the device. In display
mode, source data is an integer, but the value is displayed with a decimal point added at the number offloating digits configured for the Numerical Input.
However, if float32 is selected for Data Type, both the destination data and the source data are decimalvalues.
Example: When Display Type is configured as Decimal, Data Type is BIN16(+), the Display Floating
Point check box is selected, Digits is 5, Floating Digits is 3, and Destination Device is D100
Touch

D100:

12.34512.345

Floating Digits:

External device

12345

Specifies the number of digits for the fractional part of the decimal value out of thenumber of digits specified by Digits.
This option can only be configured when the Display Floating Point check box isselected. The range of digits that can be set for the fractional part varies based on thedisplay type and data type. The range of digits that can be set for the fractional part is asfollows.
Display Type

Decimal display

Hexadecimal
display

9-4

Data Type

Floating Digits

BIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-)

1 to Digits

BIN32 (+), BIN32 (+/-)

1 to Digits

BCD4

1 to Digits

BCD8

1 to Digits

float32

1 to 8

BIN16 (+)--

BIN32 (+)--

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Numerical Input

Floating Symbol*1:

Selects the decimal point symbol from the following.
.(dot), :(colon), ;(semicolon), ,(comma), /(slash)This option can only be configured when the Display Floating Point check box isselected.
Example:When Digits is 4 and Floating Digits is 2
When Floating Symbol is .(dot)

12.34

When Floating Symbol is /(slash)

12/34

Floating Symbol is not reflected on the standard keypad. To change the decimal point symbol on thestandard keypad, please change the keypad button.
Suppress Zeros:

Select this check box to hide “0” for the upper digits of the integer part.
Example:Not Display Sign:

Suppress Zeros selected:

1234

Suppress Zeros cleared:

00001234

Select this check box to hide the - (negative) symbol when displaying negative values.
This option can only be configured when Data Type is BCD4, BCD8, or float32.

■ Input Method
These options specify the destination for entered values.
Destination Device:

Specifies the word device to write the entered value to.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Use Reference Device*1:

Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
For details on indirect writing, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write
Settings” on page 2-4.
■ Always Entry Mode*1
Select this check box to enter values by pressing the keypad and key buttons without touching the Numerical Input
displayed on the screen.
To display 0 on the Numerical Input until a value is entered, select the Start from 0 in Always Entry Mode of
Numerical Input check box on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box. To display the value of device,clear the Start from 0 in Always Entry Mode of Numerical Input check box.
This option can only be configured if Current Screen is selected for Type.
Example: When the Always Entry Mode check box is selected and the Start from 0 in Always Entry Mode of
Numerical Input check box is selected on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box
Enter a value

Press ENT

999

999

0

Operations and display

ActionValue of Destination Device

Display 0(Entry mode)
1234

Display value being entered Write value to device(Entry mode)(Entry mode)
1234

999

Not displayed on Numerical Input.

Only one Numerical Input or one Character Input set to Always Entry Mode can be configured on a single
screen.
*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-5

9Data Displays

Select this check box and specify a device to change the destination word device by thevalue of this device.

1 Numerical Input

Example: When the Always Entry Mode check box is cleared
Press Numerical Input

1234

Enter a value

Press ENT

1234

999

1234

999

Operations anddisplayEnter 999

Action

Display value of
device(Display mode)

Display focus(Entry mode)

Display value of
device(Entry mode)

Write value to device(Entry mode)

Display value of
device(Display mode)

1234

1234

1234

999

999

Value of
Destination Device■ Focus is moved by ENT button*1
When multiple Numerical Inputs are configured on the screen, select this check box to continue entering values oneach of the Numerical Inputs.
Each time ENT is pressed, the focus moves between the Numerical Inputs according to Focus Order. On the Viewtab, in the Screens group, click Focus Order, and then click the Numerical Inputs in the order to move the focus.
Example: When Numerical Input A and B are configured and the Focus is moved by ENT button check box for
Numerical Input A is selected and the Focus is moved by ENT button check box for Numerical Input B isclearedPress Numerical Input A

Enter a value

Press ENTEnter a value

Press ENT

A

1234

1234

1234

999

999

999

999

999

B

567

567

567

567

567

567

333

333

1234

999

999

567

333

333

Operations
and display

Move focus from
Numerical Input A to B

Numerical Input A Display value of device
Action(Display mode)

Display focus(Entry mode)

Display value of device Write value of device Display value of device(Entry mode)(Entry mode)(Display mode)

Numerical Input B Display value of device
Action (Display mode)
Numerical Input A
Value of
Destination Device
Numerical Input B
Value of
Destination Device

Display focus(Entry mode)

1234

1234

1234

999

999

999

999

999

567

567

567

567

567

567

333

333

*1 Advanced mode only

9-6

Display value of device Write value to device Display value of device(Entry mode)(Entry mode)(Display mode)

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Numerical Input■ Update the display by ENT button*1
Select this check box to display the current value unchanged and update the display when a value is entered and ENT
is pressed.
When this check box is cleared, the display updates with each press of a number button to display the number being
entered.
Press Numerical Input

Numerical Input

1234

Enter a value

Press ENT

1234

1234

999

1234

999

999

999

Keypad display
Operations and display

ActionValue of Destination Device
Numerical Input display
Keypad display

Display value of device Write value to device Display value of device(Entry mode)(Entry mode)(Display mode)

Display value of device(Display mode)

Display focus(Entry mode)

1234

1234

1234

999

999

1234

1234

1234

999

999

-

1234

999

999

-

9

*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-7

Data Displays

When a value outside the input range is entered and ENT is pressed, “?” is shown in the display. The value
is not written to the device.

1 Numerical Input● View Tab■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the View Browser.
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate color of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard graphic (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
Flange9-8

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Numerical Input■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H:

Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

20 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

9

ScreenParts

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Data Displays

Height9-9

1 Numerical Input● Format Tab■ SizeSelects the text size as 8x16 or 16x16.
■ StyleSelects Regular or Bold for text style.
■ Magnification
W, H:

Selects text magnification (0.5, 1 to 8).

■ Align Text
Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following.
Left, Center, Right
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-5.
■ Text Color
Selects the color of displayed text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
This option can configure the text color in display mode and in entry mode. However, for Entry Mode text color canbe set only when the Reverse check box is cleared.
■ Reverse
Select this check box to reverse the text color and plate color during display mode when in entry mode.

9-10

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Numerical Input■ Display Numerical Value with “*” *1
Select this check box to display the entered value as * (asterisks).
Nothing is displayed if the value of device is 0 when this check box is selected and the Suppress Zeros check box isselected on the General tab. When this check box is selected in entry mode, nothing is displayed until a value isentered from the key buttons or keypad. If ENT is pressed with nothing displayed, 0 is written to the destination
device.
■ With Unit*1
Select this check box to display units or other characters at the end of a number. Displayed characters must be
registered in Text Manager. The displayed text color will be as set for Text Color under the Format tab.
Text ID:

Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000).
Click

Text:

to display Text Manager.

Displays the characters of the specified Text ID.
• The maximum number that can be displayed with this function is 4 characters. The fifth and subsequentcharacters of a character string are not displayed. However, if Windows Font is set for the specified Text
ID characters all the characters are displayed.
• If a carriage return (CR) is included the characters after the CR are not displayed.

9
Data Displays*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-11

1 Numerical Input● Data Over Tab
The Data Over tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Range
Select data type.
Value:

Specifies the minimum and/or the maximum as a constant.

Device:Specifies the minimum and/or the maximum as a value of word device.

Specifies the allowable range of values to enter or display.
Minimum, Maximum:

Select these check boxes to specify the minimum and/or maximum.
The minimum and maximum that can be specified when Value is selected vary based on thedata type selected with Data Format on the General tab. For details on data types, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
When Device is selected, these options specify the source word devices.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

• Select BIN16(+), BIN16(+/-), BIN32(+), BIN32(+/-), BCD4 or BCD8 for Data Type under the
General tab, and to display a fractional number specify the values of Minimum and Maximum as aninteger.
Example: To set a value of “1.25” for the upper limit, enter “125”.
• If the value of device to display exceeds the data range that can be processed for the data type selectedunder Data Format on the General tab, “?” is displayed.
• If the entered value exceeds the allowable range or if it exceeds the data range that can be processed forthe data type selected under Data Format on the General tab, “?” is displayed and the value is not
written to the device.

9-12

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Numerical Input■ When Data Over
These options configure the operation of the part when the value entered with the keypad exceeds the allowable
range.
These options can only be configured when the Minimum or Maximum check boxes are selected under Range.
Report:Select this check box and specify the report device to write 1 in this device when the entered data or
the value of device to display exceeds the allowable range.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Example: If you attempt to enter “140”, which is higher than the maximum of “100”, or “-10”, which is lower than theminimum of “0”, the value is not written and “?” is displayed. 1 is written to When Data Over report
device LM0.
0
Range: Value

80

0

80

80

10

?????

10

10

?????

Minimum: 0
Maximum: 100
When Data Over
Report: Selected

Operations
anddisplay

Report device: LM0Entered data

80

Written data

80

Data over notification: LM0

0

140

10

-10

9

10
1

0

1

Data Displays

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-13

1 Numerical Input● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Input Condition
The Numerical Input is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Numerical Input is disabled andnot operational while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON, Device is LM0
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Numerical Input is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Numerical Input is operational.
Touch

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0123

LM0: 1

123

Not
operational

Operational

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Numerical Input from the following.
Always Enabled: The Numerical Input is always enabled.

123

Numerical Input
state
Always Enabled

While ON:

Enables the Numerical Input when the value of device is 1.
1

Value of Device
0

123

123

123

123

123

123

Disabled

EnabledDisabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

Numerical Input
state

9-14

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Numerical Input

While OFF:

Enables the Numerical Input when the value of device is 0.
1

Value of Device
0

123

123

123

123

123

123

EnabledDisabled

EnabledDisabled

Disabled

EnabledNumerical Input
state

While satisfying the condition:
Enables the Numerical Input when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

123

123

123

123

123

123

Disabled

EnabledDisabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

Numerical Input
state

Data Type:

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-63.

Comment:

Enter a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-15

Data Displays

Device:9

1 Numerical Input● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Security Groups
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display:

Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.

Input:

Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.

9-16

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Numerical Input

Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:

User Name

Security Group

User1

User2

User3

None

Group AGroup A, Group B

Touch

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart
Display: Group A

Numerical Display
Display: None

999

Numerical Input
Display: Group A
Input: Group B

For User 1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 2 of Group A, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch

Touch

Touch

Password

130



User2

130

********

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2.

Group A parts are
not displayed to User1.

9

999

User2

Data Displays

User1

130

ENT

A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

Group A parts are
displayed to User2.

Since the display security group is Group A, User 2 (of Group A) can view the buttons. But since the input security
group is Group B, User 2 cannot operate the buttons.
Suppose that the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 3, who is part of both Group A andGroup B. Group A buttons can be displayed, and Group B buttons can be operated.
Touch

Touch

Password

130
130

User3

130



********A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

User2

Touch

ENT

999

999

999

ButtonButtonCannot operate

Can operate

For User2,
Group A parts are displayed but
Group B parts cannot be operated.

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User3.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

User3

For User3,
Group A parts are displayed andGroup B parts can be operated.

9-17

1 Numerical Input■ Input with Arithmetic Operation
To apply arithmetic operations to values entered using a keypad and writing the results, select this check box andinput the arithmetic formula.
Example: To divide the value of device when entered by 60
External device

Touch

42000÷60

Numerical Input
Destination Device: D0
Input with Arithmetic Operation: @/60

42000

D0

700
Write value ofentered value
divided by 60■ Display with Arithmetic Operation
To apply arithmetic operations to values of devices and writing the results, select this check box and input thearithmetic formula.
Example: To multiple the value of device when displayed by 60
External device

Touch

1234×60

Numerical Input
Destination Device: D0
Display with Arithmetic Operation: @*60

74040

D0

1234
Display value
multiplied by 60 for
the value of device

Arithmetic Formulas
Arithmetic formulas can be specified by freely combining multiple kinds of data and operators in the following format.
Data

Operator

Data

to
Data

Operator

Data

Operator

Data

Operator

Data

Operator

Data

Operator

Data...(up to 120 characters)• There is no limit on the number of data items or number of operators. However, the maximum number is 120
characters.
• Round brackets can be used.
Data
Item

Description@

The device on which the arithmetic operation is performed is specified in the arithmetic formula. Only
1 device can be set for an arithmetic operation.
The device is as specified for Destination Device under the General tab.

Value

Sets the constant values for the arithmetic formula.
The values that can be set depend on the data type selected using Data Format under the Generaltab. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

DeviceSpecifies the bit device or word device for the arithmetic formula.

Operators

Specify the type of arithmetic operation to be performed on the data. The operator priority is the same as for scripts.
For details, refer to Chapter 20 “6.4 About the Priority of the Operator” on page 20-53.
Item

Description
Sets the arithmetic operators.

Arithmetic
operators

9-18+

Addition

Adds-

Subtraction

Subtracts

from*Multiplication

Multiplies

and/Division

Divides%ModuloCalculates remainder after dividing

and

.

by

.
.
.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manualby.

1 Numerical Input

Item

Description
Sets the bit operator.

Bit operator&

Logical AND

Calculates the logical product (AND) of each bit of|

Logical OR

Calculates the logical sum (OR) of each bit of^

Logical XOR(exclusive OR)

Calculates the exclusive logical sum (XOR) of each bit of.

<<Left shift

Shifts each bit of

to left bybit(s).

>>

Right shift

Shifts each bit of

to right bybit(s).

and
and

.
.
and

Examples of Arithmetic Formula Input
Input Examples

To perform the arithmetic operation and input the result, add 1 to the value entered using the
Keypad and write the result to the device.

@+1

To perform the arithmetic operation and display the result, add 1 to the value of device and display
the result.

[LDR 0] + @ +100

To perform the arithmetic operation and input the result, add the value of LDR0 to the value enteredusing the Keypad and add 100, and write the result to the device.
To perform the arithmetic operation and display the result, add the value of LDR0 to the value of
device and add 100, then display the result.
To perform the arithmetic operation and input the result, write the logical AND operation of the value
entered using the Keypad and 3 to the device.
To perform the arithmetic operation and display the result, a logical AND operation of the value of
device and 3 is displayed.

■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the Touch makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the Touch, select the Enable Touch Sound check box on the System tab in
the Project Settings dialog box.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-19

9Data Displays@&3

Description

1 Numerical Input● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Numerical Input on the editing screen

9-20

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Numerical Input

1.4 How to Enter Values
Use the keypad or key buttons to write a value to a device with the Numerical Input. The input methods are as
follows.
■ Pressing the Numerical Input and Entering Values from the Standard Keypad
Arrange a Numerical Input on the screen and in its properties dialog box, on the General tab, under Keypad, selectStandard for Type.
Touch
Display value of device(Display mode)

External device

1234

D100:

1234

D100:

1234

Press Numerical Input

Display standard keypadDisplay value of device(Entry mode)

1234
999

Enter "999"9
Data Displays

Display value of device(Entry mode)

Write value
to device

999
999

D100:

999

D100:

999

Press ENT
Close standard keypadDisplay value of device(Display mode)

999

When the following operations are performed, entry mode is canceled and the current value of device isdisplayed in the Numerical Input. To enter a value, press the Numerical Input again to set it to entry mode.
• CAN is pressed.
• When the Focus is moved by ENT button check box on the General tab is cleared, a value waswritten to the device by pressing ENT.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-21

1 Numerical Input■ Without Pressing the Numerical Input, Directly Entering Values from a Keypad on the Same Screen
Arrange a Numerical Input and a keypad on the same screen. In the properties dialog box for the Numerical Input, on
the General tab, under Keypad, select Current Screen for Type and select the Always Entry Mode check box.
Touch
Display value of device(Entry mode)

External device

1234

D100:

1234

D100:

999

D100:

999

Enter "999"

Display value of device(Entry mode)

999

Write value
to device

Press ENT

Display value of device(Entry mode)

999

1.5 Advanced Usage● Using the System Area
• When finished entering a value by pressing ENT, 1 is written to the System Area 2 Numerical Input setting
complete bit (address+3, bit 0).
If the System Area 2 Numerical Input setting complete bit (address+3, bit 0) is set to another function's
execution condition, that function can be executed when ENT is pressed.
Example: To simultaneously close a Popup Screen when ENT is pressed
In the Properties of Goto Screen Command dialog box, on the General tab, select Close Popup
Screen for Action Mode. On the Trigger Condition tab, select Rising-edge for Trigger
Type, and configure Device as the System Area 2 Numerical Input setting complete bit(address+3, bit 0).
• When CAN is pressed, entry mode is canceled and 1 is written to the System Area 2 Numerical Input setting cancel
bit (address+3, bit 1). However, if the keypad is closed by pressing(close) on the Popup Screen's title bar oranother Numerical Input is pressed before finished entering the value by pressing ENT, entry mode is canceled and1 is not written to the System Area 2 Numerical Input setting cancel bit (address+3, bit 1).
• To clear the System Area 2 Numerical Input setting complete bit or the Numerical Input setting cancel bit, write 1
to System Area 1 Numerical Input setting clear bit (address+1, bit 10). To automatically clear these bits when the
Numerical Input keypad is pressed in entry mode, select the Clear Keypad bit in System Area automaticallycheck box on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.

9-22

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Character Input

2

Character Input

2.1 How the Character Input is Used
The Character Input features a display mode that displays the character codes in current values of devices as text andan entry mode that enters text using the keypad or key buttons and writes the character codes for the entered text todevices. When the part is displayed on the screen, the Character Input is in display mode. To enter text by pressing
the keypad or key buttons, touch the Character Input to switch it to entry mode.
The Character Input can perform the following functions.
• Write the character codes for text entered with the keypad or key buttons to devices
Touch

External device

Character Input

D100 : ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)FT SERIESStandard keypad

D101 : ‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)FT SERIES_

D102 : ‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)
D103 : ‘I’ ‘E’ 4945(Hex)
D104 : ‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)• Display the character codes in current values of devices as text
Touch

9
Data Displays

External device

D100 : ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)FT SERIES

D101 : ‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)
D102 : ‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)
D103 : ‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4945(Hex)
D104 : ‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)• Display entered text as * (asterisk)
Touch

****

External device

****
****

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-23

2 Character Input

2.2 Character Input Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Character Inputs.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Character Input.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Character Input.
3 Double-click the dropped Character Input and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.

9-24

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Character Input

2.3 Properties of Character Input Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.
● General Tab

9
Data Displays■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Keypad
Configures the keypad for entering text in the Character Input.
Use as Display for Keypad*1:
Type:

Screen No.:

Select this check box to only use the Character Input as a part to display the
text entered with the keypad.

According to the location where the keypad is configured, selects the type from the following.
Standard:

Uses the standard keypad. The standard keypad is the keypad configured as
the Popup Screen for the standard keypad (screen number 3000 to 3015).

Popup:

Uses a keypad configured as a Popup Screen.

Current Screen:

Uses the keypad configured on the same screen as the Character Input.

Specifies the screen number of the Popup Screen configured as the keypad (1 to 3015).
This option can only be configured if Popup is selected for Type.

Adjust location automatically:

Select this check box to display the Popup Screen configured as the keypad in alocation where it will not overlap the Character Input.
This option can only be configured if Standard or Popup is selected for Type.

Coordinates X, Y: Specifies the display location of the Popup Screen configured as the keypad.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the X and Y coordinates are the upper-leftcorner of the Popup Screen.
This option can only be configured when Popup is selected for Type and the Adjust location
automatically check box is cleared.
Specify the coordinates in 1 dot units.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)

*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-25

2 Character Input■ Data Format
Specifies the digits to display.
Input Digits:

Specifies the number of digits that can be entered with the Character Input (1 to 127).

Display Digits:

Specifies the number of digits that can be displayed in the Character Input display (1 to 100).

■ Input Method
These options configure the destination for the character codes for the entered text.
Destination Device:

Specifies the destination word device for the character codes for the entered text.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Use Reference Device*1:

Select this check box and specify a device to change the destination word device by thevalue of this device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
For details on indirect writing, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write
Settings” on page 2-4.

■ Always Entry Mode*1
Select this check box to enter text by directly pressing the keypad and key buttons without touching the Character
Input displayed on the screen.
This option can only be configured if Current Screen is selected for Type.
Example: When the Always Entry mode check box is selected

FT_

Press CLR

Enter text

Press ENT

_

IDEC_

IDEC_

Deletes text

Enter IDEC

Operations
and display

ActionValue of
Destination Device

Display values of devices
as text (Entry mode)‘F’‘T’ 4654(Hex)Write character codes to
Display text being
entered (Entry mode) devices (Entry mode)

Display only focus(Entry mode)‘F’‘T’ 4654(Hex)‘F’‘T’ 4654(Hex)‘ I ’ ‘D’ 4944(Hex)‘E’‘C’ 4543(Hex)

Only one Numerical Input or one Character Input set to Always Entry Mode can be configured on a single
screen.
Example: When the Always Entry Mode check box is cleared
Press Character Input

FT

FT_

Press CLR

Enter text

Press ENT

_

IDEC_

IDEC_

Deletes text

Enter IDECIDEC

Operations
and display

ActionValue of
Destination Device

Display values of devices
as text (Display mode)‘F’‘T’ 4654(Hex)Display focus(Entry mode)‘F’‘T’ 4654(Hex)Display only focus(Entry mode)‘F’‘T’ 4654(Hex)Write character codes to Display values of devices
Display text being
as text (Display mode)
entered (Entry mode) devices (Entry mode)‘F’*1 Advanced mode only

9-26

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual‘T’ 4654(Hex)‘ I ’ ‘D’ 4944(Hex)‘ I ’ ‘D’ 4844(Hex)

‘E’

‘E’

‘C’ 4543(Hex)‘C’ 4543(Hex)2 Character Input■ Focus is moved by ENT button*1
When multiple Character Inputs are configured on the screen, select this check box to continue entering text on eachof the Character Inputs.
Each time ENT is pressed, the focus moves between the Character Inputs according to Focus Order. On the Viewtab, in the Screens group, click Focus Order, and then click the Character Inputs in the order to move the focus.
Example: When Character Input A and B are configured and the Focus is moved by ENT button check box for
Character Input A is selected and the Focus is moved by ENT button check box for Character Input B isclearedPress Character Input A
A

FT

B

MICRO

Enter text

FT_
MICRO

FT_

Enter text

Press ENTFT_FT SERIES_

MICRO

MICRO

FT SERIES_FT SERIES_FT SERIESFT SERIESMICRO_MICRO_MICRO SMART_MICRO_

Press ENT

Press ENTFT SERIESFT SERIESMICRO SMART_MICRO SMART

MICRO SMART_

Operations anddisplay

Move focus from
Character Input A to B
Character Input A Display values of devices
Action as text (Display mode)
Character Input B Display values of devices
Action as text (Display mode)‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)Display focus(Entry mode)

Display text being
entered (Entry mode)

Display focus(Entry mode)‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)Character Input A
Value of
Destiation Device

Display text being
entered (Entry mode)

Write character codes to Display values of devices
devices (Entry mode)as text (Display mode)‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4945(Hex)‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4945(Hex)‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4945(Hex)‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4945(Hex)‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4945(Hex)‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)‘M’ ‘ I ’ 4D49(Hex)‘M’ ‘ I ’ 4D49(Hex)‘M’ ‘ I ’ 4D49(Hex)‘M’ ‘ I ’ 4D49(Hex)‘M’ ‘ I ’ 4D49(Hex)‘M’ ‘ I ’ 4D49(Hex)‘M’ ‘ I ’ 4D49(Hex)‘M’ ‘ I ’ 4D49(Hex)‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex)‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex)‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex)‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex)‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex)‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex)‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex)‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex)‘O’ (NULL) 4100(Hex)‘O’ (NULL) 4100(Hex)‘O’ (NULL) 4100(Hex)‘O’ (NULL) 4100(Hex)‘O’ (NULL) 4100(Hex)‘O’ (NULL) 4100(Hex)‘O’ ‘ ’ 4120(Hex)‘O’ ‘ ’ 4120(Hex)‘S’ ‘M’ 534D(Hex)‘S’ ‘M’ 534D(Hex)‘A’ ‘R’ 4152(Hex)‘A’ ‘R’ 4152(Hex)‘T’ (NULL) 5400(Hex)‘T’ (NULL) 5400(Hex)■ Update the display by ENT button*1
Select this check box to display the current text unchanged and update the display when text is entered and ENT ispressed.
When this check box is cleared, the display updates with each press of a character button to display the character
being entered.
Press Character Input
FT

FT_

FT_

Enter text

Press ENTFT_FT SERIES_FT SERIES_FT SERIESFT SERIES_

Operations anddisplay

Action

Display values of devices
as text (Display mode)(Entry mode)‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)Display focus

Display text being Write character codes to Display values of devices
entered (Entry mode) devices (Entry mode)as text (Display mode)‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)Value of
Destination Device

Character Input
display
Keypad display‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4943(Hex)‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4943(Hex)‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)

FT

FT

FT

FT SERIESFT SERIES

Hide

FT

FT SERIESFT SERIES

Hide*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-27

9Data Displays

Character Input B
Value of
Destiation Device

Write character codes to Display values of devices
devices (Entry mode)as text (Display mode)2 Character Input● View Tab■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the View Browser.
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate color of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard graphic (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
Flange9-28

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Character Input■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H:

Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

20 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

9

ScreenParts

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Data Displays

Height9-29

2 Character Input● Format Tab■ FontSelects the font for displaying text from the following.
Japanese, European, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page
2-5.
■ SizeSelects the text size as 8x16 or 16x16.
■ StyleSelects Regular or Bold for text style.
■ Magnification
W, H:

Selects text magnification (0.5, 1 to 8).

■ Align Text
Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following.
Left, Center, Right
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-5.
■ Text Color
Selects the color of displayed text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
This option can configure the text color in display mode and in entry mode. However, for Entry Mode text color canbe set only when the Reverse check box is cleared.
■ Reverse
Select this check box to reverse the text color and plate color during display mode when in entry mode.

9-30

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Character Input■ Display Character with “*”*1
Select this check box to display the entered characters as * (asterisks).
If this check box is selected, nothing is displayed until a value is entered from the key buttons or keypad when the
Character Input is in entry mode. If ENT is pressed with nothing displayed, 0 is written to the destination device.
■ Change Font with Device*1
Select this check box to change the font to display the text with a value of device.
The keypad (Popup Screen) can also be changed when Standard or Popup is selected for Type under Keypad on
the General tab.
Trigger Device:

Specifies the word device (2 words) to use as the condition to change the font.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

1st word

Font number

2nd word

3rd word

Font number

1. Japanese
2. European
6. Central European
7. Baltic
8. Cyrillic

Popup ScreenNo.

1 to 3015

Popup Screen No.

*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-31

9Data Displays

Example: With Trigger Device set to D100, to enter Central European text from Popup Screen
100 using a Character Input for entering European text from the standard keypad(Popup Screen 3003)
Write 6 to D100 and 100 to D101.

2 Character Input● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Input Condition
The Character Input is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Character Input is disabled andnot operational while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON, Device is LM0
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Character Input is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Character Input is operational.
Touch

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0IDEC

LM0: 1

IDEC

Not
operational

Operational

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Character Input from the following.
Always Enabled: The Character Input is always enabled.

IDEC

Character Input
state
Always Enabled

While ON:

Enables the Character Input when the value of device is 1.
1

Value of Device
0

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

Disabled

EnabledDisabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

Character Input
state

9-32

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Character Input

While OFF:

Enables the Character Input when the value of device is 0.
1

Value of Device
0

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

EnabledDisabled

EnabledDisabled

Disabled

EnabledCharacter Input
state

While satisfying the condition:
Enables the Character Input when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

Disabled

EnabledDisabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

Character Input
state

Data Type:

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-63.

Comment:

Enter a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-33

Data Displays

Device:9

2 Character Input● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Security Groups
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display:

Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.

Input:

Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.

9-34

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Character Input

Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:

User Name

Security Group

User1

User2

User3

None

Group AGroup A, Group B

Touch

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart
Display: Group A

Numerical Display
Display: None

FT SERIES

Character Input
Display: Group A
Input: Group B

For User 1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 2 of Group A, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch

Touch

Touch

PasswordENT

A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2.

Group A parts are
not displayed to User1.

9

FT SERIES

User2

Data Displays

User1

130

130



User2

********

Group A parts are
displayed to User2.

Since the display security group is Group A, User 2 (of Group A) can view the buttons. But since the input security
group is Group B, User 2 cannot operate the buttons.
Suppose that the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 3, who is part of both Group A andGroup B. Group A buttons can be displayed, and Group B buttons can be operated.
Touch

Touch

Password

130
130

User3

A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

FT SERIES

130

********

User2

Touch

ENT

FT SERIES_FT SERIESFT SERIES_

ButtonButtonCannot operate

Can operate

For User2,
Group A parts are displayed but
Group B parts cannot be operated.

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User3.
User3

For User3,
Group A parts are displayed andGroup B parts can be operated.

■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the Touch makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the Touch, select the Enable Touch Sound check box on the System tab in
the Project Settings dialog box.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-35

2 Character Input● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Character Input on the editing screen

9-36

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Character Input

2.4 How to Enter Text
Use the keypad or key buttons to write character codes to devices with the Character Input. The input methods are as
follows.
■ Pressing the Character Input and Entering Text from the Standard Keypad
Arrange a Character Input on the screen and in its properties dialog box, on the General tab, under Keypad, selectStandard for Type.
Touch
Display values of device as text
(Display mode)

External device

FT

D100 : ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)

Press Character Input

Display standard keypadDisplay values of device as text
(Entry mode)FT_FT SERIE

D100 : ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)Enter text as"FT SERIES"

9
Write text charactercodes to devices

FT SERIES_

Data Displays

Display values of device as text
(Entry mode)

D100 : ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)
D101 : ‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)FT SERIES_

D102 : ‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)
D103 : ‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4945(Hex)
Press ENT

D104 : ‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)Close standard keypadDisplay values of device as text
(Display mode)

FT SERIES

D100 : ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)
D101 : ‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)
D102 : ‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)
D103 : ‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4945(Hex)
D104 : ‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)When the following operations are performed, entry mode is canceled and the current values of devices are
displayed as character codes on the Character Input. To enter text, press the Character Input again to
select it and set it to entry mode.
• CAN is pressed.
• When the Focus is moved by ENT button check box on the General tab is cleared, a value waswritten to the device by pressing ENT.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-37

2 Character Input■ Without Pressing the Character Input, Directly Entering Text from a Keypad on the Same Screen
Arrange a Character Input and a keypad on the same screen. In the properties dialog box for the Character Input, on
the General tab, under Keypad, select Current Screen for Type and select the Always Entry Mode check box.
Touch
Display values of device as text
(Entry mode)

External device

FT_

D100 : ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)Enter text as"FT SERIES"

Display values of device as text
(Entry mode)

FT SERIES_

Write text charactercodes to devices

D100 : ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)
D101 : ‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)
D102 : ‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)

Press ENT

D103 : ‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4945(Hex)
D104 : ‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)Display values of device as text
(Entry mode)

D100 : ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)FT SERIES

D101 : ‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)
D102 : ‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)
D103 : ‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4945(Hex)
D104 : ‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)■ Changing the Language and Entering Text
Select the Change Font with Device check box on the Format tab in the properties dialog box.
It is convenient to use this setting together with the text group settings.
The font and Popup Screen with this setting will change simultaneously with the text group change and text can beentered with the same font as the text group.
Select the Use Dynamic Text check box in the Text Group Settings dialog box and specify the same device in
Trigger Device as the Trigger Device for this setting.

2.5 String Data Storage Method
The entered text is stored in the upper byte and lower byte according to the Storage Method of String Data
setting. Storage Method of String Data is configured on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “3.1 System Tab” on page 3-19.
Example: When the destination device is LDR100 and the entered text is ABCDE• When from Upper byte is selected for Storage Method of String Data
DeviceLDR100LDR101LDR102

Stored value
Upper byte
Lower byte
'A' = 41 (Hex)'B' = 42 (Hex)'C' = 43 (Hex)'D' = 44 (Hex)'E' = 45 (Hex)0
NULL terminating character• When from Lower byte is selected for Storage Method of String Data
DeviceLDR100LDR101LDR102

Stored value
Upper byte
Lower byte
'B' = 42 (Hex)'A' = 41 (Hex)'D' = 44 (Hex)'C' = 43 (Hex)0'E' = 45 (Hex)NULL terminating character

When handling strings, 0 is written to the device as the NULL terminating character and treated as the endof the string.

9-38

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Character Input

2.6 Advanced Usage● Using the System Area
• When finished entering text by pressing ENT, 1 is written to the System Area 2 Character Input setting complete bit(address+3, bit 5).
• When CAN is pressed, entry mode is canceled and 1 is written to the System Area 2 Character Input setting cancel
bit (address+3, bit 6). However, if the keypad is closed by pressing(close) on the Popup Screen's title bar oranother Character Input is pressed and selected before finished entering the text by pressing ENT, entry mode iscanceled and 1 is not written to the System Area 2 Character Input setting cancel bit (address+3, bit 5).
• To clear the System Area 2 Character Input setting complete bit or the Character Input setting cancel bit, write 1 toSystem Area 1 Character Input setting clear bit (address+1, bit 11). To automatically clear these bits when the
Character Input keypad is pressed in entry mode, select the Clear Keypad bit in System Area automaticallycheck box on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.

9
Data Displays

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-39

3 Picture Display

3

Picture Display

3.1 How the Picture Display is Used
The Picture Display displays pictures. It can change, move, or scale the displayed picture according to values of devices.
• Switch and display pictures by values of devices

External device
bit3

D0=

Touch

bit15

D0

0100

bit3

9-40

bit0

0010

bit3

D0=

bit0

0001

bit3

D0=

bit0

bit0

Pic2

D0=

bit3

bit0

0100

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Pic1

Pic0

3 Picture Display• Move the picture position by values of devices
External device

X-coordinate D100=

0

Y-coordinate D101=

0

X-coordinate D100=

108

Y-coordinate D101=

45

X-coordinate D100=

216

Y-coordinate D101=

90

Touch

Display picture at X 0, Y 0

Move picture to X 108, Y 45

Move picture to X 216, Y 90

9External device

Width D100=

120

Height D101=

50

Data Displays• Scale the size of the picture by values of devices and display it
Touch

Scale picture to
W 120, H 50

Width D100=

216

Height D101=

90
Scale picture to
W 216, H 90

Width D100=

24

Shrink picture to

Height D101=

10

W 24, H 10

When the size of pictures to switch differs and the Dynamic Size check box is cleared, all the pictures are
displayed with the same size as Pic0.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-41

3 Picture Display

3.2 Picture Display Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Picture Displays.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Picture Display.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Picture Display.
3 Double-click the dropped Picture Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.

9-42

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Picture Display

3.3 Properties of Picture Display Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.
● General Tab

9■ Switching Method
Specifies the method for switching pictures to display from the following. Register pictures in Picture List on the
View tab.
Bit:

Switches the picture to display according to the status of bits in a device.
Example: When Bit is selected and the bits of trigger device D0 are allocated to the following
pictures.
bit15

bit3

bit0

Trigger device D0

Picture

Pic2

Pic1

Pic0

Switches the picture to display according to the status of the bits.
If multiple bits are 1, display
the picture for the lowest
order bit.
Trigger device D0
bit state

0001

0010

0100

Pic 0

Pic 1

Pic 2

1000

1110

1100

Pic 1

Pic 2

Picture to display

Action

Display picture Display picture Display picture
for bit 0

for bit 1

for bit 2

No picture

Display picture Display picture
for bit 1

for bit 2

If all bits in the device are 0 or if a bitwith no associated picture becomes 1,
display nothing.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-43

Data Displays■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.

3 Picture Display

Value:

Switches the picture to display according to the value of device.
Example: When Value is selected and the values of Trigger Device D0 are allocated to thefollowing pictures.
Trigger device D0 value

0

1

2

Pic0

Pic1

Pic2

PictureSwitches the picture to display according to the value of device.
0

1

2

Pic 0

Pic 1

Pic 2

Trigger device D0 value

3

Picture to display

Action Display picture for 0 Display picture for 1 Display picture for 2

Trigger Device:

If the value of device hasno picture associatedNo picturewith it, display nothing.

Specifies the word device to use as the condition for switching pictures.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-61.
This option can only be configured when Bit or Value is selected.

When the size of pictures to switch differs and the Dynamic Size check box is cleared, all the pictures are
displayed with the same size as Pic0.
■ Blink
Select this check box to flash the displayed pictures.
■ Dynamic Position*1
Select this check box to move and display the picture by specifying the coordinates of the picture as values of devices.
X Point: Specifies the word device that is the X-coordinate of the picture.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
Y Point: Specifies the word device that is the Y-coordinate of the picture.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
Example: When the X-coordinate is D100 and the Y-coordinate is D101
The picture is moved to the values of D100 and D101.
Value of X-coordinate device
D100
Value of Y-coordinate device
D101

0
Position of picture to display

0

108

216

0

45

90

0

216

108

45
90

*1 Advanced mode only

9-44

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Picture Display■ Dynamic Size*1
Select this check box to scale the picture by specifying the size of the picture as values of devices.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
Width:

Specifies the word device that is the width of the picture.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Height: Specifies the word device that is the height of the picture.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
Example: When the width device is D100 and the height device is D101
The picture is displayed with its size scaled to the values of D100 and D101.
Value of Width device D100

24

120

216

Value of Height device D101

10

50

90

24
10
Size of picture to display

120

216

50

9

90

When moving and scaling pictures, set the values of devices so the picture is not moved or scaled outside
the screen's display area.

*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-45

Data Displays

When the size of pictures to switch differs and the Dynamic Size check box is cleared, all the pictures are
displayed with the same size as Pic0.

3 Picture Display● View Tab

Pic number■ Picture List
Registers the pictures to display on the Picture Display. The picture number (Pic number) and the file name of theregistered picture are displayed in the list.
Set:

Registers a picture to the list. If you select a Pic number with a picture that is already registered, that
number is overwritten with the new picture.
Select a Pic number on the list, and then click this button to display Picture Manager. Specify the picture to
register with Picture Manager.
Insert:Inserts the picture in the position selected on the list.
Select the Pic number on the list at the position to insert the picture, and then click this button to display
Picture Manager. Specify the picture to insert. The picture at the insertion point shifts one Pic number
down. The picture cannot be inserted when pictures are registered to all the Pic numbers.
Remove: Deletes the registered picture from the list.
Select a Pic number on the list, and then click this button to delete the selected picture from the list.
Up:
Shifts the selected settings upward in the list.
Down:
Shifts the selected settings downward in the list.
Recover Background*1:
Select this check box to recover the background of the area where the picture had been displayed after the
picture is switched. When this check box is cleared, the background is filled with the screen's Background
Color.
When parts or drawings are arranged so they overlap the background of the Picture Display (below), thebackground of parts and drawings is displayed as follows if the Picture Display picture is hidden.
Picture Display
Drawing

Check box cleared

Check box selected

The screen is filled withSince background parts

Background Color, so

and drawings arebackground parts andredrawn, they return todrawings are missing.

their original state.

However, when the background part is the Alarm List Display, Alarm Log Display, bar chart, line chart, or
pie chart, the missing sections will remain.
*1 Advanced mode only

9-46

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Picture Display

If the Recover Background check box is selected, the number of parts that can be placed on a single
screen decreases. If an error message appears when the Picture Display is displayed on the Touch screen,clear the Recover Background check box or reduce the number of parts.
• When the Dynamic Position check box or the Dynamic Size check box is selected on the General tab,the Recover Background check box cannot be selected.
• When the Recover Background check box and the Blink check box on the General tab are selected,
the picture is repeatedly displayed and hidden.

■ Image
Displays picture for the Pic number that has been selected in the Picture List.
■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)

9
Data DisplaysX(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H:

Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

2 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

2 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

ScreenHeightParts

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-47

3 Picture Display● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

The Picture Display is enabled while the condition is satisfied, and it is disabled while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON, Device is LM0
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Picture Display does not display the picture.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Picture Display displays the picture.
Touch

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0Hide
pictureLM0: 1Show
picture■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to enable the Picture Display from the following.
Always Enabled: The Picture Display is always enabled.
Data

Pic0

Pic1

Pic2

Pic0

Pic1

Pic2

Pic0

UpdateUpdateUpdateUpdateUpdateUpdateUpdateDisplay

9-48

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Picture Display

While ON:

Enables the Picture Display when the value of device is 1.
Example: When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Picture data
Data

Pic0

Pic1

Pic2

Pic0

Pic1

Pic2

Pic0

Do not update

UpdateDo not update

UpdateUpdateUpdateDo not update

1
Value of Device
0

Display

While OFF:

Enables the Picture Display when the value of device is 0.
Example: When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Picture data
Data

Pic0

Pic1

Pic2

Pic0

Pic1

Pic2

Pic0

UpdateDo not update

UpdateDo not update

Do not update

Do not update

Update1
Value of Device
0

Display

9
Data Displays

While satisfying the condition:
Enables the Picture Display when the condition is satisfied.
Example: When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Picture data
Data

Pic0

Pic1

Pic2

Pic0

Pic1

Pic2

Pic0

Do not update

UpdateDo not update

UpdateUpdateUpdateDo not update

Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

Display■ Data Type
Selects the data type handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-63.
■ Comment
Enter a comment about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-49

3 Picture Display● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display:

Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.

9-50

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Picture Display

Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:

User Name

Security Group

User1

User2

None

Group A
Touch

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart
Display: Group A

Numerical Display
Display: None

Button
Display: Group A

For User 1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 2 of Group A, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch

Touch

130

PasswordUser2********A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

User1

130

130

9

ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Data Displays

Group A parts are
not displayed to User1.

Touch

Group A parts are
displayed to User2.
User2

9-51

3 Picture Display● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Picture Display on the editing screen

9-52

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Message Display

4

Message Display

4.1 How the Message Display is Used
The Message Display is used to constantly display messages registered in advance and to display text read fromvalues of word devices as character codes.
The Message Display can perform the following functions.
• Display messages
Touch

Goal reached• Display text according to value of devices
Touch
External device
D100 : ‘1’ ‘2’ 3132(Hex)Message details

Goal

Goal 1234K

Always show

D102 : ‘K’ (NULL) 4B00(Hex)

Data Displays

D101 : ‘3’ ‘4’ 3334(Hex)9\Show according tovalue of devices

D100 : ‘5’ ‘6’ 3536(Hex)

Goal 5678K

D101 : ‘7’ ‘8’ 3738(Hex)
D102 : ‘K’ (NULL) 4B00(Hex)

D100 : (NULL) ‘1’ 0031(Hex)Goal

D101 : ‘2’ ‘3’ 3233(Hex)
D102 : ‘K’ (NULL) 4B00(Hex)

D100‘1’ ‘2’ 3132(Hex)‘5’ ‘6’ 3536(Hex)(NULL)

Value of Reference D101
DevicesD102‘3’ ‘4’ 3334(Hex)‘7’ ‘8’ 3738(Hex)‘2’ ‘3’ 3233(Hex)‘K’ (NULL) 4B00(Hex)‘K’‘M’(NULL) 4B00(Hex)‘K’ (NULL) 4B00(Hex)

Goal

Goal 5678K

Goal

Display always shown text and text

Display always shown text and text

Display only always shown text

shown according to value of device

shown according to value of device

Do not show if upper byte of the Reference

Display

Action1234K‘1’ 0031(Hex)

Device starting address is 00 (NULL)

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-53

4 Message Display• Scroll messages
Touch
Message details

Line ALine A : 1234K pcs.

Line B : 5678K pcs.

A : 1234K pcs.

pcs.

Line B

8K pcs.

• Change the message and plate color according to a value of device
Touch
External device
Upper byte

D0 :FT SERIES

0xF7 0x00

Lower byte

FT SERIES

Plate color

Text color

Upper byte

Lower byte

D0 :0xF7 0x90

0xF7 0x90
Plate color

9-54

Lower byte

0xF7 0x00

Upper byte

D0 :Lower byte

Upper byte

D0 :SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Text color

4 Message Display

4.2 Message Display Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Message Displays.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Message Display.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Message Display.
3 Double-click the dropped Message Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

9
Data Displays

The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-55

4 Message Display

4.3 Properties of Message Display Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.
● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box to use text registered in Text Manager.
■ Text ID
Specifies the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) when using text registered in Text Manager.
Click

to display Text Manager.

This option can only be configured when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
To read values of word devices as character codes with text registered in Text Manager and display it astext, enter “\@” (1 to 8) in Text for the Text ID at the position to display the value of device as text. The
channels configured under Data are allocated in order from the first “\@”. The text is displayed according to
the values of devices in order from the first reference device.
However, in the following situations “\@” is not handled as text to display according to values of devices andis displayed unchanged.
• When Font is Windows for Text ID configured in Text Manager• When the number of “\@” configured in Text for Text ID is greater than the number of channels
configured with devices(Text for the character codes corresponding to the values of devices is only displayed for the number ofchannels in order from the beginning.)

9-56

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Message Display■ Message
Enter the text to display. The maximum number is 610 characters. You can enter multi-line messages by inserting a
newline. To configure text to display according to values of devices, enter “\@” (1 to 8) at the location to read thevalues of word devices as character codes and display them as text. The channels configured under Data areallocated in order from the first “\@”. The text is displayed according to the values of devices in order from the firstreference device.
Example: The device configured in Ch1 is allocated to the first “\@”. The device configured in Ch2 is allocated to thesecond “\@”.
Goal

\

Ch1

Now

\

Ch2

Always show Show according to values of devices

The characters that can be entered vary based on to the font selected for Font on the Format tab. For details, refer
to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-5.
This option can only be configured if the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
• To enter Unicode characters, click
to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the characters in
the Unicode Input dialog box, and then click OK.
• To display the backslash (\), enter a backslash (\) before the backslash (\).
Example:\\(Settings):

Reference Device:

Lists the settings for the text to display according to values of devices.
No.:

Shows the channel numbers (Ch1 to Ch8).

Device:Shows the reference device configured for the channel.

Words:

Shows the number of words used by the reference device.

Specifies the word device that stores the values read as character codes.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
Set the values of devices to the character codes for the language used. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “Character Code Table” on page 2-14.

Words:

Specifies the number of words for the length of the text to display (1 to 64). Values of devices
for the configured amount of words are read as character codes starting from the device
address set by Reference Device. 2 single-byte characters can be displayed by 1 word.

Set:

Registers the settings for the text to display according to values of devices to the list. If you
select a number that is already registered, that number is overwritten with the new settings.
Select a Ch number on the list, and then click this button to register the Reference Device
and Words settings.
Always register the settings from Ch1.

Insert:Inserts the settings in the position selected on the list.
Select a Ch number on the list, and then click this button to insert the Reference Device andWords settings. The settings at the insertion point shift down one line. Settings cannot be
inserted if all the Ch numbers are configured.

Remove:Deletes the registered settings from the list.
Select a Ch number, and then click this button to delete the selected settings from the list.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9
Data Displays■ DataThese options are used to register or edit the devices with values to read as character codes.

9-57

4 Message Display● View Tab■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the View Browser.
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate color of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard graphic (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
Flange9-58

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Message Display■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H:

Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

5 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

5 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

9

ScreenParts

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Data Displays

Height9-59

4 Message Display● Format Tab■ FontSelects the font for displaying text from the following.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page
2-5.
■ StyleSelects Regular or Bold for text style.
■ Magnification
W, H:

Selects text magnification (0.5, 1 to 8).

■ Align Text Vertical
Selects the text alignment in the vertical direction from the following.
Top, Center, Bottom, Center-Top
Set to Center when the Vertical Writing check box is selected.
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-5.
■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following.
Left, Center, Right
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-5.

9-60

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Message Display■ Vertical Writing
Select this check box when displaying text vertically.
When the Vertical Writing check box is selected, take care about the following points. This is applicablefor Windows supports East Asian characters.
• When there is a mixture of double-byte and single-byte characters, the half-width characters are leftaligned.
Aligned toleft edge• Dashes are displayed horizontally. Symbols representing voiced and semi-voiced sounds of single-bytecharacters are shown as follows.
Horizontal
display
Next
characters

2 single-byte chars. 1 double-byte char.
Dotted line frame is
2 chars. High■ Align Text depending on the length of the Displayed message*1
Select this check box to align text as standard to the number of characters that will be displayed.
When cleared, the maximum number of characters (set number of words) is always aligned as standard.
Example: When there are 2 characters of text to always display on the first line, 6 characters of text to always display
on the second line and 6 characters of text (3 words) to display according to values of device, Align Text
Horizontal is set to Center, and the text to display according to values of device is blank (when only 6
characters are always displayed on the second line)
Check box: Selected
1st line text :2nd line text :

AB

Blank

AB
AB C D E F

AB CD E F

Check box: Cleared

AB
AB C D E F

Always show Show according tovalues of device

Characters to show

Maximum characters■ Text Color
Selects the color of displayed text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-61

9Data Displays• When using text displayed according to values of devices, the characters are counted as single-bytecharacters and the display area for the characters is indicated by dotted lines. Therefore, when the text
to display according to values of devices is double-byte characters, the display area actually required
differs from the area indicated by the dotted lines.
Example: When 1 word of text to display according to values of devices is set to vertical writing, thevertical size of the dotted lines is displayed as 2 single-byte characters.

4 Message Display■ Scroll*1
Select this check box to enable scrolling display displaying of messages.
Speed (1: Fastest): Sets the scrolling speed (1 to 10). 1 is fastest, 10 is slowest.
When the Scroll check box is selected operation is follows.
• Messages that include CRs are displayed without the CRs.
• Messages scroll in the direction in which the text is drawn.
• When the text displayed according to values of devices, the text color, or the displayed text changes, themessage is scrolled from the beginning.
When the Scroll check box is selected, take care about the following points.
• This setting is only enabled when the Enable check box in the Blink group box on the Option tab iscleared.
• The number of parts that can be arranged on a single screen decreases. If the Touch displays an error
message, clear the Scroll check box, or reduce the number of parts on the screen.
• When the scan time of the Touch is long, scrolling speed may become slow.

*1 Advanced mode only

9-62

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Message Display● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

9

Example: When Trigger Type is While ON, Device is LM0
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Message Display does not display the message.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Message Display displays the message.
Touch

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

Hide

LM0: 0LM0: 1Show
FT SERIES■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to enable the Message Display from the following.
Always Enabled: The Message Display is always enabled.

FT SERIES

Message Display
state
Always show message

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-63

Data Displays

The Message Display is enabled while the condition is satisfied, and it is disabled while the condition is not satisfied.
When disabled, the plate and flange are displayed, but the message is not displayed.

4 Message Display

While ON:

Enables the Message Display when the value of device is 1.
Example: When While not satisfying the condition is Not display message.
1
Value of Device

0
FT SERIESFT SERIESFT SERIESFT SERIES

Show
messageShow
messageShow
message

Message Display
state

While OFF:Hide
messageShow
messageHidemessageHidemessage

Enables the Message Display when the value of device is 0.
Example: When While not satisfying the condition is Not display message.
1
Value of Device

0
FT SERIESFT SERIESFT SERIES

Message Switching
Display stateShow
messageHidemessageShow
messageHidemessageHidemessageHidemessageShow
message

While satisfying the condition:
Enables the Message Display when the condition is satisfied.
Example: When While not satisfying the condition is Not display message.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied
FT SERIESFT SERIESFT SERIESFT SERIES

Show
messageShow
messageShow
message

Message Display
state

Hide
messageShow
messageHidemessageHidemessage■ Data Type
Selects the data type handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-63.
■ Comment
Enter a comment about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.

9-64

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Message Display● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

9
Data Displays■ Change Color by Device
Switches the message or plate color.
External device

Touch

DeviceUpper byte

Upper byte
Lower byte

Upper byte

D0 0 x F 7 0 x 0 0

FT SERIES

D0= 0 x F 7 0 x 0 0

Lower byte

Plate color

Text color

Upper byte

Lower byte

D0 0 x F 7 0 x 9 0

FT SERIES

D0= 0 x F 7 0 x 9 0

Lower byte

Plate color

Text color

Enable:Select this check box to switch the color of the message or plate depending on
the value of device.

Device:Specifies the word device that stores the color data for the message or plate.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-61.
Color data assignments that are stored to devices are given below.
DeviceAddress
Address+1

bit
15

Upper byte

bit bit
8 7

Plate color

Lower byte

bit0

Text color

Plate color when blinking Text color when blinking

This uses address+1 to specify the text color and plate color when the Enable
check box has been selected.
For color data, refer to Appendix “1 Color Number Correspondence Table” onpage A-1.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-65

4 Message Display■ Blink
Flashes the message or plate color.
Trigger device

External device

Touch

0

FT SERIESFlashing

1

FT SERIESFT SERIESFT SERIES

Enable:Turn this check box on to make messages flash.

Trigger device:

Specifies the bit device that wlll be used as a condition to trigger flashing.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
When the value of device is 0, the color specified in Text Color on the Format tab or in Plate
Color on the View tab will be displayed.
When the value of device is 1, the color displayed when the device is 0 and the color specified in
Text Color or Plate Color will be displayed alternately.
Flash intervals are set in Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.

Text Color:

This selects the color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades) of text when flashing.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
This can be set only when the Enable check box is cleared.

Plate Color:

This selects the plate color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades) when flashing.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
This can be set only when the Enable check box is cleared.

Text Color and Plate Color are specified in Device under Change Color by Device when the Enable
check box has been selected in both Blink and Change Color by Device.
Example: When the Device is D0
DeviceUpper byte

Lower byte

D0= 0 x F 7 0 x 0 0

External device

Touch

Lower byte

D0 0 x F 7 0 x 0 0

D1= 0 x 2 3 0 x F 7
Trigger device

Upper byte

FT SERIES

0

Plate Color Text Color

Flashing

Text Color
Plate ColorFT SERIES

1FT SERIESFT SERIESText color when blinking
Plate color when blinking
Upper byte

Lower byte

D1 0 x 2 3 0 x F 7
Plate color
Text color
when blinking when blinking

9-66

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Message Display■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display:

Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.

Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:

User Name
Security Group

User1

User2

None

Group A
Touch

130

9

Numerical Display
Display: None

Data Displays

Line Chart and Bar Chart
Display: Group A

Button
Display: Group A

For User 1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 2 of Group A, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch

Touch

130

PasswordUser2********A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

Group A parts are
not displayed to User1.
User1

Touch

130

130
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualGroup A parts are
displayed to User2.
User2

9-67

4 Message Display● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Message Display on the editing screen

9-68

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Message Display

4.4 String Data Storage Method
The values of devices read as character codes are stored in the upper byte and lower byte of words according to the
Storage Method of String Data setting. Storage Method of String Data is configured on the System tab in the
Project Settings dialog box.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “3.1 System Tab” on page 3-19.
Example: When reference device D100 = 3132 (Hex), D101 = 3334 (Hex), D102 = 3500 (Hex)• When from Upper byte is selected for Storage Method of String DataStored value
Upper byte
Lower byte
31 (Hex)
32 (Hex)
33 (Hex)
34 (Hex)
35 (Hex)0

Device
D100
D101
D102

Displayed string
12
34
5

NULL terminating character• When from Lower byte is selected for Storage Method of String Data

D100
D101
D102

Displayed string

NULL terminating character

9

21
43

Data Displays

Stored value
Upper byte
Lower byte
32 (Hex)
31 (Hex)
34 (Hex)
33 (Hex)035 (Hex)

DeviceWhen handling values of devices as charactercodes, 0 is handled as the NULL terminating
character to end the string. Therefore, when theupper byte is 0, nothing is displayed.

• When handling values of devices as character codes, 0 is handled as the NULL terminating character toend the string. Therefore, when the upper byte is 0, nothing is displayed.
• To display only a single character, set the lower byte to 0.
Example:To display a single-byte 7‘7’3700(Hex)

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-69

5 Message Switching Display

5

Message Switching Display

5.1 How the Message Switching Display is Used
The Message Switching Display is used to switch the displayed message according to the value of a word device.

External device
bit3

D0=

D0=

bit3

D0=

9-70

DryingHeating

bit0

0100

bit0

Message details

Msg1

DryingHeating

Msg2

Cooling

Msg0

bit0

0010

bit3

D0

bit0

0001

bit3

bit15

Touch

Cooling

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Message Switching Display

5.2 Message Switching Display Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Message Switching Displays.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Message Switching Display.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Message Switching Display.
3 Double-click the dropped Message Switching Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

9
Data Displays

The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-71

5 Message Switching Display

5.3 Properties of Message Switching Display Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.
● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Switching Method
Selects the method for switching message to display from the following. Messages are registered in Settings on the
Message tab.
Bit:

Switches the message to display according to the status of bits in a device.
Example: When Bit is selected and the bits of trigger device D0 are allocated to the following messages.
bit15

bit3

bit0

Trigger Device D0
Message
Msg0

Drying

Msg1

Heating

Msg2

Cooling

Switches the message to display according to the status of the bits.
If multiple bits are 1, display the message forthe lowest order bit.
Trigger Device D0
bit state

Message to display

Action

1000

0001

0010

0100

DryingHeating

CoolingHeating

Msg0

Msg1

Msg2

Msg1

Display Msg0

Display Msg1

Display Msg2

No message

If all bits in the device are 0 or if a bit withno associated message becomes 1, display
nothing.

9-72

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual1110

Display Msg1

5 Message Switching Display

Value:

Switches the message to display according to the value of device.
Example: When Value is selected and the value of Trigger Device D0 are allocated to the following
messages.
Message details
Trigger Device D0 value 0 : Msg0

Drying

1 : Msg1

Heating

2 : Msg2

Cooling

Switches the message to display according to the value of device.
Trigger Device D0 value

Message to display

Action30

12DryingHeating

Cooling

Msg0

Msg1

Msg2

Display Msg0

Display Msg1

Display Msg2

No message

If the value of device has no message
associated with it, display nothing.

■ Trigger Device
Specifies the word device to use as the condition for switching messages.

9

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-73

Data Displays

Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

5 Message Switching Display● Message Tab■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box to use text registered in Text Manager.
■ Settings
Lists the message settings.
No.:

Shows the message number (Msg number).
The number of messages that can be registered varies based on Switching Method on the
General tab.
Bit:

Msg0 to Msg15

Value:

Msg0 to Msg999

Message:

Shows the registered message.

Change:Shows Y when the Change Color check box is selected. Shows N when the check box iscleared.

Text:

Shows the text color of the message.

Plate:

Shows the plate color.

■ Text ID
Specifies the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) when using text registered in Text Manager.
Click

to display Text Manager.

This option can only be configured when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
■ Message
Enter the text to display. The maximum number is 3,750 characters. You can enter multi-line messages by inserting a
newline.
The characters that can be entered vary based on the font selected for Font on the Format tab. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-5.
This option can only be configured if the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
• To enter Unicode characters, click
to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the characters in
the Unicode Input dialog box, and then click OK.
• To display the backslash (\), enter a backslash (\) before the backslash (\).
Example: \\9-74

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Message Switching Display■ Change Color
Select this check box to configure Text Color and Plate Color per Msg number.
Text Color:

Selects the text color for the messages when configuring the text color per Msg number (color:
256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Plate Color:

Selects the plate color for the messages when configuring the plate color per Msg number(color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).

Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
When this check box is cleared, the colors are configured by Text Color on the Format tab and Plate Color on the
View tab.
■ Set
Registers the message and color settings to the list. If you select a Msg number that is already registered, that
number is overwritten with the new settings.
Select a Msg number on the list, and then click this button to register the Message and Change Color settings.
■ Insert
Inserts the message and color settings in the position selected on the list.
Select a Msg number on the list, and then click this button to insert the Message and Change Color settings. The
settings at the insertion point shift down one line. Settings cannot be inserted if all Msg numbers are configured.
■ Remove
Deletes the registered settings from the list.

9

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Data Displays

Select a Msg number, and then click this button to delete the selected settings from the list.

9-75

5 Message Switching Display● View Tab■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the View Browser.
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate color of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard graphic (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
Flange9-76

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Message Switching Display■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H:

Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

5 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

5 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

9

ScreenParts

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Data Displays

Height9-77

5 Message Switching Display● Format Tab■ FontSelects the font for displaying text from the following.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page
2-5.
■ StyleSelects Regular or Bold for text style.
■ Magnification
W, H:

Selects text magnification (0.5, 1 to 8).

■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following.
Left, Center, Right
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-5.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects the text alignment in the vertical direction from the following.
Top, Center, Bottom, Center-Top
Set to Center when the Vertical Writing check box is selected.
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-5.

9-78

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Message Switching Display■ Vertical Writing
Select this check box when displaying text vertically.
When the Vertical Writing check box is selected, take care about the following points. This is applicablefor Windows supports East Asian characters.
• When there is a mixture of double-byte and single-byte characters, the half-width characters are leftaligned.
Aligned toleft edge• Dashes are displayed horizontally. Symbols representing voiced and semi-voiced sounds of single-bytecharacters are shown as follows.
Horizontal
display
Next
characters■ Text Color
Selects the color of displayed text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).

9

Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Data Displays■ Scroll*1
Select this check box to enable scrolling display displaying of messages.
Speed (1: Fastest): Sets the scrolling speed (1 to 10). 1 is fastest, 10 is slowest.
When the Scroll check box is selected operation is follows.
• Messages that include CRs are displayed without the CRs.
• Messages scroll in the direction in which the text is drawn.
• When the message is switched, the message is scrolled from the beginning.
When the Scroll check box is selected, take care about the following points.
• The number of parts that can be arranged on a single screen decreases. If the Touch displays an error
message, clear the Scroll check box, or reduce the number of parts on the screen.
• When the scan time of the Touch is long, scrolling speed may become slow.

*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-79

5 Message Switching Display● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display:

Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.

9-80

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Message Switching Display

Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:

User Name

Security Group

User1

User2

None

Group A
Touch

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart
Display: Group A

Numerical Display
Display: None

Button
Display: Group A

For User 1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 2 of Group A, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch

Touch

130

PasswordUser2********A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

User1

130

130

9

ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Data Displays

Group A parts are
not displayed to User1.

Touch

Group A parts are
displayed to User2.
User2

9-81

5 Message Switching Display● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Message Switching Display on the editing screen

9-82

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6 Alarm List Display

6

Alarm List Display

6.1 How the Alarm List Display is Used
The Alarm List Display works with the Alarm Log function to display messages for active alarms and to display
multiple messages according to values of devices in a list.
• List currently active alarms out of the alarms configured in the Alarm Log settings
Message

D0-0 :
D0-1 :
D0-2 :
D0-3 :

Touch

External device

Current fault

ID1 Current fault
ID2 Pump fault
ID3 High pressure
ID4 Low air pressure

Pg. UpPg. Dwn

0

1

0

1

D0-0
Alarm occurred

D0-0

D0-1

Pump fault
Low air pressure

Pg. UpD0-1
Alarm occurred

9

Pg. Dwn

1

Data Displays0

D0-3
Alarm occurred

D0-3• Display multiple messages according to values of devices
External device
bit3

Touch
bit15

bit0
Setting 1 : 100

D0=

0001

Pg. Up

bit3

bit0

D0

Pg. Dwn

Message
ID1 Setting 1 : 100
ID2 Setting 2 : 200
ID3 Setting 3 : 300

bit3

D0=

bit0

0111

Setting 1 : 100
Setting 2 : 200
Setting 3 : 300

Pg. UpPg. Dwn• Only one Alarm List Display or Alarm Log Display can be configured on a single screen.
• When the active alarm is displayed on the Alarm List Display, the message disappears from the list when
the alarm is recovered from regardless of the Lock/Unlock setting. To display the alarm message until it
can be checked, use the Alarm Log Display. Lock/Unlock is configured on the Channel tab in the Alarm
Log Settings dialog box.
• For the key buttons used with the Alarm List Display, refer to Chapter 7 “Alarm List Display” on page 7-65.
• The number of the message (channel when using the Alarm function) that has focus on the Alarm List
Display is stored in HMI Special Data Register LSD50.
• The information about where on the list the message that has focus is displayed, out of all the messages
displayed on the Alarm List Display, is stored in HMI Special Data Register LSD56.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-83

6 Alarm List Display

6.2 Alarm List Display Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Alarm List Display.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Alarm List Display.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Alarm List Display.
3 Double-click the dropped Alarm List Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.

9-84

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6 Alarm List Display

6.3 Properties of Alarm List Display Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.
● General Tab

9■ Message Settings
Selects the method for switching message to display.
Use Alarm Log Settings:

Displays messages for the active alarms. The alarms are configured by the Alarm Log
settings.
Alarm Log Settings:

New Message List:

Displays the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.

Displays the messages registered in Text Manager according to the state of bits in thetrigger device configured on the List tab.

Example: When Use Alarm Log Settings is selected, the Source (device to monitor) configured by the Alarm Log
function is D0, and the following messages are allocated to the channels
Message

D0-0 : ID1 Current fault
SourceD0-1 : ID2 Pump fault
D0-2 : ID3 High pressure
D0-3 : ID4 Low air pressure

The active alarm messages are displayed.
D0-0

1

0

1

1

0

Source bit state D0-1

0

1

0

1

0

D0-2

0

1

1

1

0

D0-3

0

0

1

1

0

Current fault

Pg. UpMessage to display
Pg. Dwn

Action

Display ID1

Pump fault
High pressure

Pg. UpPg. Dwn

Display ID2, ID3

Current fault
High pressure
Low air pressure

Pg. UpPg. Dwn

Display ID1, ID3,
ID4

Current fault
Pump fault
High pressure
Low air pressure

Pg. UpPg. UpPg. Dwn

Pg. Dwn

Display ID1, ID2,
ID3, ID4

No message

If all bits in the device are 0 or if a bit with no associatedmessage becomes 1, display nothing.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-85

Data Displays■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.

6 Alarm List Display

Example: When New Message List is selected and the bits of Trigger Device D0 are allocated to the following
messages.
bit15

bit3

bit0

Trigger Device D0
Message
ID1 Setting 1 : 100
ID2 Setting 2 : 200
ID3 Setting 3 : 300

The messages are displayed according to the state of the bits.
Trigger Device D00001

bit state

Message to display

Setting 1 : 100

0110

Pg. UpSetting 2 : 200
Setting 3 : 300

Pg. Dwn

Action

Display ID1

0111

0101

Pg. UpSetting 1 : 100
Setting 3 : 300

Pg. UpPg. Dwn

Pg. Dwn

Display ID2, ID3

Display ID1, ID3

Setting 1 : 100
Setting 2 : 200
Setting 3 : 300

0000

Pg. UpPg. UpPg. Dwn

Pg. Dwn

Display ID1, ID2,
ID3

No message

If all bits in the device are 0 or if a bit with no associatedmessage becomes 1, display nothing.

■ Display Type
Selects whether or not to simultaneously display multiple messages.
List:

Simultaneously displays multiple messages.
Trigger Device D00111

bit state

Message to display

ActionSort:

Setting 1 : 100
Setting 2 : 200
Setting 3 : 300

Pg. UpPg. Dwn

Display ID1, ID2,
ID3

Selects the display order when displaying multiple messages.
Old and New can only be configured when the Use Alarm Log Settings check box is selected.
Ascending:

Sorts the list in alphabetic order from A to Z.

Descending: Sorts the list in alphabetic order from Z to A.

One Line:

Old:

Sorts the list in order from oldest to newest.

New:

Sorts the list in order from newest to oldest.

Displays only a single message.
When multiple bits are 1, the message for the lowest order bit is displayed.
Trigger Device D0
bit state

Message to display

0111

Setting 1 : 100

Pg. UpPg. Dwn

Action

Display ID1■ Monitor Number of Displayed messages
Select this check box to count the number of displayed messages.
This option can only be configured when the New Message List check box is selected.
(Destination device): Specifies the word device to write the number of displayed messages to.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

9-86

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6 Alarm List Display● List Tab
The List tab is only displayed when New Message List is selected for Message Settings on the General tab.

(Block settings)

9

Configures the devices that trigger messages to display and message switching as blocks (0 to 64).
1 block is composed of 16 channels. 1 device bit can be monitored for each channel. The maximum numberof device bits that can be monitored is 16 for each block.
■ Start Text ID
Specifies the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) of the message to display. The text ID numbers are sequentiallyconfigured for all channels from the first block starting with the ID number configured here. Click
Manager.

to display Text

■ Device Setting Method
Selects the trigger device setting method.
Serial:The trigger devices after the block number selected in the block settings are configured withsequential addresses.

Random:Configures trigger devices for each block number.

■ (Block settings)
Registers and edits the messages to display for each block channel.
Block No.:Shows the block numbers in the amount specified by Number of Blocks.
Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “Individual
Settings Dialog Box” on page 9-88.

Trigger Device:Shows the word device to use as the condition to display messages.
Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
When Serial is selected for Device Setting Method, the trigger devices for block numbers after
the selected block number are automatically configured with the configured trigger device as thestarting address.

No. of Reg. Text: Shows the number of messages registered to the block.
Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “Individual
Settings Dialog Box” on page 9-88.
Edit:

Changes the block settings in list.
Select a block number in the list, and then click this button to display the Individual Settings dialog
box. For details, refer to “Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 9-88.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-87

Data Displays■ Number of Blocks

6 Alarm List Display

Insert:Inserts the block settings in the position selected on the list.
Select the block number at the position to insert the settings in the list, and then click this button todisplay the Individual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page
9-88.
The settings at the insertion point shift down one line. Settings cannot be inserted if all blocknumbers are configured.

Delete:Deletes the registered settings from the list.
Select a block number on the list, and then click this button to delete the selected settings from the list.

Individual Settings Dialog Box
The Individual Settings dialog box is used to configure the conditions to display the messages.

(Settings)■ Trigger Device
Specifies the word device to use as the condition to display messages. The bit of the word device corresponds to themessage numbers.
Example: When the number of blocks is 1 and D0 is specified as the trigger device
Message number 1-0 device bit is D0-0, message number 1-1 device bit is D0-1, up to message number
1-15 device bit which is D0-15.
Msg. No.

Block 116 channels

Device bit

1-0
1-1
1-2

D0-0
D0-1
D0-2

1-14
1-15

D0-14
D0-15

Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
When Serial is selected for Device Setting Method on the List tab, the trigger devices for block numbers after theblock number being registered or edited are automatically changed with the configured trigger device as the starting
address.
■ (Settings)
Msg. No.:

Displayed as (Block No.)-(Message No.).

Alarm function:

Selects whether or not to use the alarm function. Double clicking the cell switches between
Enable and Disable.

NO/NC:

9-88

Enable:Monitors the state of the device bit configured for the channel and displays the message.

Disable:The device bit is not monitored and the message is not displayed.

Selects the alarm detection condition. Double clicking the cell switches between NO and NC.
NO:

Displays the message when the monitored bit changes from 0 to 1.

NC:

Displays the message when the monitored bit changes from 1 to 0.

Text ID:

Shows the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) to use for the message.
The text ID is sequentially configured starting with the text ID configured by Start Text ID on
the List tab.

Text:

Shows the text for the specified text ID.
Only shows the first line of text when the text registered to the text ID has multiple lines.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6 Alarm List Display● View Tab

9■ Plate Color
Selects the plate (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color■ Line Color
When lines are displayed, select the check box and select line color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Lines■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange (color: 256 colors, monochrome:
8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern
Palette.
FlangeSmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-89

Data Displays■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the View Browser.

6 Alarm List Display■ Buttons
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the buttons (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from theColor Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the button.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern fromthe Pattern Palette.
Buttons

Can be set only when there are grouped Key Buttons.

■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H:

Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

20 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

ScreenHeight

9-90

Parts

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6 Alarm List Display● Format Tab

9■ Magnification
W, H:

Selects text magnification (0.5, 1 to 8).

■ Display with Same Text Color
To set the text color for all messages to the same color, select this check box and select the text color to display(color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
When this check box is cleared, the color for messages is the text color configured in Text Manager.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-91

Data Displays■ StyleSelects Regular or Bold for text style.

6 Alarm List Display■ Line Spacing*1
Selects the specification method for line spacing in the list and configures the line spacing.
Set with Number of Lines:
Specifies the number of lines for the message to display for one alarm line.
Number of Lines:

Enter the number of lines (1 to 10). To completely display a message that
contains newlines, a number of lines that is equal to or greater than the numberof message lines is required.

When you enter a value in Number of Lines, Height (dots) is automatically calculated according
to the display area.
The relationship between the number of lines and the height (dots) is height (dots) = number oflines x magnification H x 16.
Number of Lines Magnification H

1

×

1

Height× 16 = 16 dots

Number of Lines Magnification H

2

×

1

Height× 16 = 32 dots

Number of Lines Magnification H

3

×

1

Current fault
Pump fault

When the message is 2 lines,
2nd line is not shown.
Number of Lines Magnification H

Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault
has occurred

3

×

2

Height× 16 = 96 dots

Height× 16 = 48 dots

Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault
has occurred

Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault
has occurred

Since the alarm line spacing is adjusted with the number of lines for the message fixed, this option isconvenient to use when displaying multi-line messages.
Set with Dots: Specifies the line spacing for the message to display for one alarm line in dots.
Height (dots):

Enter the height (8 to 160). To completely display a message, a height equal toor greater than Magnification H x 16 dots x the number of message lines isrequired.

When Magnification H is 1
To display a one-line message, 1 x 16 = 16 dots, a height of 16 dots or higher is required.
Height16 dots

Current fault has occurred
Pump fault has occurred

To display a two-line message, 2 x 16 = 32 dots, a height of 32 dots or higher is required.
Height32 dots

Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault
has occurred

Height16 dots

Current fault
Pump fault

When the message is two lines,
The second line is not shown.

When Magnification H is 2
To display a one-line message, 1 x 32 = 32 dots, a height of 32 dots or higher is required.
Height32 dots

Current fault has occurred
Pump fault has occurred

To display a two-line message, 2 x 32 = 64 dots, a height of 64 dots or higher is required.
Height64 dots

HeightCurrent fault
has occurred
Pump fault
has occurred

32 dots

Current fault
Pump fault*1 Advanced mode only

9-92

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

When the message is two lines,
The second line is not shown.

6 Alarm List Display■ Scroll*1
Select this check box to enable scrolling display displaying of messages.
Can only be set when One Line is selected for Display Type under the General tab.
Speed (1: Fastest): Sets the scrolling speed (1 to 10). 1 is fastest, 10 is slowest.
When the Scroll check box is selected operation is follows.
• Messages that include CRs are displayed without the CRs.
• Messages scroll in the direction in which the text is drawn.
• When the text displayed according to values of devices, the text color, the displayed text, or the alarmstate changes, the message is scrolled from the beginning.
When the Scroll check box is selected, take care about the following points.
• The number of parts that can be arranged on a single screen decreases. If the Touch displays an error
message, clear the Scroll check box, or reduce the number of parts on the screen.
• When the scan time of the Touch is long, scrolling speed may become slow.

9
Data Displays*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-93

6 Alarm List Display● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

(Reference screen list)■ Reference Screen
The Options tab is used to configure the reference screen. The reference screen is a Base Screen or Popup Screen
associated with each individual message. The reference screen is displayed when the key button Ref. is pressed.
1. Select a message displayedon the Alarm List Display

2. Press the key button Ref.

Reference screen opens

Motor fault

REV

Motor fault

REV

Motor fault

REV

Pump1 fault

Up

Pump1 fault

Up

Pump
1 fault
Pump1
fault

Up

High pressure

DwnHigh pressure

DwnHigh pressure

Del

Pump 1 fault

Pump 1 fault

Ref.

Del

Pump 1 output low
Dwn
Press Stop, check the air,DelPump
1 fault
thenpress Start.

Ref.

Stop

Key buttons Up and Dwn

Key button Ref.

Start

Air Press.
Ref.
0000
kg/m2

Reference screen

When displaying a reference screen, select either Base Screen or Popup Screen as the reference screen type.
When not displaying a reference, select Not Use.
This can only be set when New Message List has been selected in Message Settings on the General tab. When
Use Alarm Log Settings has been selected, the screen type will become the one selected in Reference Screen on
the Channel tab in the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.
■ Coordinates
X, Y:Specifies the coordinates to display the reference screen.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the X and Y coordinates are the upper-left corner ofthe reference screen.
This option can only be configured when Base Screen or Popup Screen is selected for Reference
Screen.
Specify the coordinates in 1 dot units.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)

9-94

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6 Alarm List Display■ Screen No. Setting Method
Selects the setting method for the screen numbers on the reference screen list.
Serial:Continuously and automatically specifies screen numbers (1 to 3000) that are at or below theselected message number.
Example 1: When screen number “100” has been entered for message number 1-0.

Screen numbers “100”, “101”, “102”....are automatically specified in order from message
number 1-0.
Example 2: When screen number “200” has been entered for message number 1-5.

9Random:Specifies a reference screen number (1 to 3000) for each message number.

■ (Reference Screen List)
Displays a list reference screen numbers and screen titles that have been set to messages.
Message No.:

Displays the message number.

Screen No.:

Displays the reference screen number.
The screen number can be set according to the Screen No. Setting Method. The screen number is
specified in the screen number input dialog box that appears after double clicking on a cell. Enter ascreen number (1 to 3000) into Screen No. and then click OK.

When there is not screen for the specified screen number a message confirming the creation of a newscreen will appear.
If Yes is clicked, a screen will be created. If No is clicked, creating a screen is cancelled.
Title:

Displays the title of a reference screen.
When editing a title, editing is performed in the Enter Title dialog box that appears after double
clicking on a cell. Edit the title and then click OK. The maximum number is 40 characters.

The title can be edited only when the screen number has already been set.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-95

Data Displays

Message numbers 1-0 to 1-4 are left unchanged and screen numbers “200”, “201”,“202”....are automatically specified in order from message number 1-5.

6 Alarm List Display■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display:

Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.

Input:

Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
• The security group for input can only be configured when there are grouped key buttons.
• For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” onpage 21-1.

Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:

User Name

Security Group

User1

User2

User3

None

Group AGroup A, Group B

Touch

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart
Display: Group A

Numerical Display
Display: None

Button
Display: Group A
Input: Group B

For User 1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 2 of Group A, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch

Touch

130

PasswordUser2********A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

Group A parts are
not displayed to User1.
User1

9-96

Touch

130

130
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualGroup A parts are
displayed to User2.
User2

6 Alarm List Display

Since the display security group is Group A, User 2 (of Group A) can view the buttons. But since the input security
group is Group B, User 2 cannot operate the buttons.
Suppose that the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 3, who is part of both Group A andGroup B. Group A buttons can be displayed, and Group B buttons can be operated.
Touch

Touch

Password
User3

130
130

Touch

130



********A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

ENT

ButtonButtonCannot operate

User2

For User2,
Group A parts are displayed but
Group B parts cannot be operated.

Can operate

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User3.
User3

For User3,
Group A parts are displayed andGroup B parts can be operated.

9
Data Displays

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-97

6 Alarm List Display● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Alarm List Display on the editing screen

9-98

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7 Alarm Log Display

7

Alarm Log Display

7.1 How the Alarm Log Display is Used
The Alarm Log Display displays Alarm Log data saved in the data storage area.
• List the message, the occurrence time, recovery time, and confirmation time for the alarms that have occurred
Touch
External device01

Occurrence

Message

Recovered

Confirmed

12/01 12 : 00

Current fault

12 : 53

12 : 54

Fcs. Up

Fcs. Dwn

Ref.

12 : 00
Alarm occurred

12 : 00
REVERSE1

0

12 : 53

Recovered

12 : 54

Confirmed

12 : 53

Occurrence
12/01 12 : 00

Message Recovered Confirmed
Current fault

12 : 53

12 : 54

Occurrence time

Confirmation time

Message

Recovery time
REVERSE

Fcs.UpFcs.Dwn

9

Ref.

Data Displays• Display the reference screen for alarms that have occurredShow focus

Move focus

Display reference screen

REV

Time

REV

Time

REV

Time

09:15 Motor fault

Up

09:15 Motor fault

Up

09:15 Motor fault

Up

1 fault
09:15Pump
Motor
fault

10:02 Pump1 fault

Dwn

10:02 Pump1 fault

Dwn

10:02 Pump1 fault

Dwn

10:02 Pump1 fault

10:28 High pressureDel

10:28 High pressureDel

10:28 High pressureDel

13:02 Pump 1 fault

Ref.

13:02 Pump 1 fault

Ref.

13:02 Pump 1 fault

Ref.

Time

Message

Message

Message

Message

REV
UpPump 1 output low
Dwn
Press Stop, check the air,
Del
10:28
pressure
thenHighpress
Start.
Ref.
13:02 Pump 1 fault Air Press.
0000
Stop
Start
2
kg/m

Key Button

Reference screen

Only one Alarm List Display or Alarm Log Display can be configured on a single screen.

• For the key buttons used with the Alarm Log Display, refer to Chapter 7 “Alarm Log Display” on page 7-65.
• When the Operate the Alarm on List directly check box on the General tab in the Properties of Alarm
Log Display dialog box is selected, a displayed alarm can be given focus by pressing it on the list.
• The number of lines from the start line to the selected line of the message displayed on the Alarm Log
Display is stored in HMI Special Data Register LSD56.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-99

7 Alarm Log Display

7.2 Alarm Log Display Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Alarm Log Display.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Alarm Log Display.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Alarm Log Display.
3 Double-click the dropped Alarm Log Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.

9-100

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7 Alarm Log Display

7.3 Properties of Alarm Log Display Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.
● General Tab

9
Data Displays■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Default Settings
These options configure the default settings when the Alarm Log Display is displayed.
Start Line No.:Specifies what number alarm to display when multiple alarms have occurred.
The range that can be specified is 1 to 5,011.

Sort:

Selects the display order for alarms that have occurred as Old or New.

Display Focus on List after changing Screens or occurring Alarms*1:
Select this check box to automatically display the focus at the first item in the list
after switching screens and when an alarm occurs.
Display Reference Screen*1:

Select this check box to automatically display the reference screen for the alarmthat has focus under the following conditions.
When the focus is displayed
When the focus moves
When a new alarm occurs■ Displaying Alarms*1
Select these check boxes for alarms to display on the Alarm Log Display.
Not Recovered and Unconfirmed Alarm:

Displays active alarms that have not been recovered and confirmed.

Not Recovered and Confirmed Alarm:

Displays alarms that have not been recovered but the key button CHECK
has been pressed.

Recovered and Unconfirmed Alarm:

Displays alarms that have been recovered but the key button CHECK has
not been pressed.

Recovered and Confirmed Alarm:

Displays alarms that have been recovered and the key button CHECK has
been pressed.

*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-101

7 Alarm Log Display■ First Alarm*1
An alarm that occurs in a state where no alarms have occurred is called the first alarm. Select the check boxes for theoperations to execute when the first alarm occurs.
Display First Alarm to 1st line on List:

Always displays the first alarm on the first line of the list.

Change the color of First Alarm:

Changes the text color of the first alarm according to the First Alarm
Color setting. First Alarm Color is configured on the Format tab.

■ Operate the Alarm on List directly*1
Select this check box to display the focus by pressing an alarm displayed on the list.
When an alarm is pressed with no focus displayed, the focus is displayed on that alarm.
When an alarm is pressed that does not have focus when the focus is displayed, the focus is moved to that alarm.
The focus is no longer displayed when an alarm with focus is pressed.
■ Alarm Log Settings
Displays the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.

*1 Advanced mode only

9-102

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7 Alarm Log Display● Log Tab

(Show items detailed settings)

9

Title:

Shows the titles on the first line of the list.

Occurrence Time:

Shows the time the alarm occurred.

Recovery Time:

Shows the time the alarm was recovered from.

Data Displays■ Show Items
Select these check boxes for the items to display on the Alarm Log Display.

Confirmation Time: Shows the time the alarm was confirmed by pressing the key button CHECK.
Occurrence

Message Recovered Confirmed

12/01 12 : 00

Current fault

12 : 53

Title

12 : 54

Confirmation time

Occurrence time
Message

Recovery time
REVERSE

Fcs.UpFcs.Dwn

Ref.

■ (Show items detailed settings)
Each of the show items selected by the check boxes under Show Items can be configured in detail here.
Title:

Enter the titles for the items to display. The maximum number is 20 characters.
Double clicking the cell displays the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the characters in the
Unicode Input dialog box, and then click OK.

Width:

Specifies the number of characters to display (1 to 40). 1 is the width of a single-byte character,2 is the width of a double-byte character.

Date:

Selects the display type of the date from the following.
YY/MM/DD, MM/DD/YY, DD/MM/YY, MM/DD, DD/MM, non-display

Time:

Selects the display type of the time from the following.
HH:MM, HH:MM:SS, non-display• If the title contains a newline, the text after the newline is not displayed. However, if using a Windows
font for the selected text ID, all the characters are displayed.
• If the title contains a language not supported as standard by the OS, the characters may be garbled whendisplaying the (Show items detailed settings). However, the downloaded data is correctly displayed.
• If you change the display type for Date or Time, the number for Width is automatically adjusted.
• The text color for Message changes according to the alarm state. The text color for Message isconfigured by Occurred Color, Recovered Color, and Confirmed Color on the Format tab.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-103

7 Alarm Log Display■ TitleSelect this check box to use text registered in Text Manager for Title in the (Show items detailed settings). The
Text ID message configured for Occurrence Time, Message, Recovery Time, and Confirmation Time isdisplayed in (Show Items detailed settings).
Text ID:

Specifies the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) when using text registered in Text
Manager.
Clickto display Text Manager.

This option can only be configured when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.

9-104

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7 Alarm Log Display● View Tab

9■ Plate Color
Selects the plate (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color■ Line Color
When lines are displayed, select the check box and select line color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Lines■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange (color: 256 colors, monochrome:
8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange.
Click this button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
FlangeSmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-105

Data Displays■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the View Browser.

7 Alarm Log Display■ Buttons
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the buttons (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color
Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the button.
Click this button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from thePattern Palette.
Buttons

Can be set only when there are grouped Key Buttons.

■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H:

Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

20 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

ScreenHeight

9-106

Parts

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7 Alarm Log Display● Format Tab■ StyleSelects Regular or Bold for text style.

9

W, H:

Selects text magnification (0.5, 1 to 8).

■ Title Font
Select the font that will be used for the title from the following options.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page
2-5.
■ Title Color
Select the color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades) of the text for titles.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Occurred Color, Recovered Color, Confirmed Color, First Alarm Color*1
Select the color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades) of the occurred alarm, recovered alarm, confirmed alarmand first alarm.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Blink*1:

Select this check box to flash alarms that are displayed on the list.
The flash interval is specified in Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.

Reverse*1:

Select this check box to show in reverse, the text color and plate color of alarms that are displayed on
the list.
Blink

ReverseBlink and reverse

Current fault

Current fault

Current fault

Current fault

When the Key Button CHECK is pressed before recovering a triggered alarm, the alarm display will change
from the Occurred Color to the Confirmed Color. After this, the alarm that has changed to the Confirmed
Color will remain in that color and will not change to the Recovered Color even when recovered.

*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-107

Data Displays■ Magnification

7 Alarm Log Display■ Line Spacing*1
Selects the specification method for line spacing in the list and configures the line spacing.
Set with Number of Lines:
Specifies the number of lines for the message to display for one alarm line.
Number of Lines: Enter the number of lines (1 to 10). To completely display a message that
contains newlines, a number of lines that is equal to or greater than the numberof message lines is required.
When you enter a value in Number of Lines, Height (dots) is automatically calculated according
to the display area.
The relationship between the number of lines and the height (dots) is height (dots) = number oflines x magnification H x 16.
Number of Lines Magnification H

1

×

1

Number of Lines Magnification H

2

×

1

×

1

Height× 16 = 32 dots

Number of Lines Magnification H

3

Height× 16 = 16 dots

Current fault
Pump fault

When the message is 2 lines,
2nd line is not shown.
Number of Lines Magnification H

Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault
has occurred

3

×

2

Height× 16 = 96 dots

Height× 16 = 48 dots

Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault
has occurred

Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault
has occurred

Since the alarm line spacing is adjusted with the number of lines for the message fixed, this option isconvenient to use when displaying multi-line messages.
Set with Dots: Specifies the line spacing for the message to display for one alarm line in dots.
Height (dots):
Enter the height (8 to 160). To completely display a message, a height equal toor greater than Magnification H x 16 dots x the number of message lines isrequired.
When Magnification H is 1
To display a one-line message, 1 x 16 = 16 dots, a height of 16 dots or higher is required.
Height16 dots

Current fault has occurred
Pump fault has occurred

To display a two-line message, 2 x 16 = 32 dots, a height of 32 dots or higher is required.
Height32 dots

Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault
has occurred

Height16 dots

Current fault
Pump fault

When the message is two lines,
The second line is not shown.

When Magnification H is 2
To display a one-line message, 1 x 32 = 32 dots, a height of 32 dots or higher is required.
Height32 dots

Current fault has occurred
Pump fault has occurred

To display a two-line message, 2 x 32 = 64 dots, a height of 64 dots or higher is required.
Height64 dots

HeightCurrent fault
has occurred
Pump fault
has occurred

32 dots

Current fault
Pump fault

When the message is two lines,
The second line is not shown.

Since only one line of the title is displayed, the title line spacing = 1 (number of lines) x Magnification H
x 16, regardless of the Line Spacing setting.
Example: When Magnification H is 1, the title line spacing = 1 x 1 x 16 = 16 dots
When Magnification H is 2, the title line spacing = 1 x 2 x 16 = 32 dots
*1 Advanced mode only

9-108

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7 Alarm Log Display● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

1. Select a message displayed on
the Alarm Log Display

2. Press the key button Ref.

Reference screen opens

REV

Time

REV

Time

09:15 Motor fault

Up

09:15 Motor fault

Up

1 fault
09:15Pump
Motor
fault

10:02 Pump1 fault

Dwn

10:02 Pump1 fault

Dwn

10:02 Pump1 fault

10:28 High pressureDel

10:28 High pressureDel

13:02 Pump 1 fault

Ref.

13:02 Pump 1 fault

Ref.

Time

Message

Message

Message

REV
UpPump 1 output low
Dwn
Press Stop, check the air,
Del
10:28
pressure
thenHighpress
Start.
Ref.
13:02 Pump 1 fault Air Press.
0000
Stop
Start
2
kg/m

Key buttons Up and Dwn

Reference Screen:

Key button Ref.

Reference screen

Displays the type of screen selected in Reference Screen on the Channel tab in the Alarm
Log Settings dialog box.
Click

to display the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.

When displaying a reference screen, select either Base Screen or Popup Screen as thereference screen type.
When not displaying a reference, select Not Use.
Coordinates X, Y:

Specifies the coordinates to display the reference screen.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the X and Y coordinates are the upperleft corner of the reference screen.
This option can only be configured when Base Screen or Popup Screen is selected for
Reference Screen.
Specify the coordinates in 1 dot units.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)

If you overlap the reference screen key button and the move focus key buttons, the reference screen can beswitched and checked while moving the focus.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-109

9
Data Displays■ Reference Screen Settings
The Options tab is used to configure the reference screen. The reference screen is a Base Screen or Popup Screen
associated with each individual message. The reference screen is displayed when the key button Ref. is pressed.

7 Alarm Log Display■ Display Block No.
Specifies the range of block numbers that will display the collected alarm log data.
All:

Displays the data for all blocks.

Block No.:

Displays only the data for the specified blocks in the Alarm Log Display. Alarms in unspecified blocks are
not displayed, even if active.
Individual block numbers can be specified by separating the numbers with “,”, continuous regions can be
specified with “-”.
Example: When the number of blocks is 6, enter the following.
To specify blocks 1 to 3:

1-3

To specify blocks 1, 3, 6:

1, 3, 6

To specify blocks 1, 4 to 6: 1, 4-6
Number of Blocks

Specified numbers

6
No.

Device1-0

D100-01-1

D100-1

1-2

D100-2

1-13

D100-13

1-14

D100-14

1-15

D100-15

2-0

D101-02-1

D101-1

2-2

D101-2

2-13

D101-13

2-14

D101-14

2-15

D101-15

1-3

1, 3, 6

1, 4-6Block 1

Block 1

Block 1

Block 2Block 2Block 2Block 3Block 3Block 3Block 4Block 4Block 4Block 5Block 5Block 5Block 6Block 6Block 6Block 1

Block 25-0

D104-05-1

D104-1

5-2

D104-2

5-13

D104-13

5-14

D104-14

5-15

D104-15

6-0

D105-06-1

D105-1

6-2

D105-2

6-13

D105-13

6-14

D105-14

6-15

D105-15

Block 5Blocks to display

Blocks to display

Blocks to display

Block 6

• To display the alarms set in blocks 65 to 128 of the Alarm Log settings, select All under Display Block
No.. If Block No. is selected, only blocks 1 to 64 can be specified.
• For the number of blocks, refer to Chapter 13 “Number of Blocks” on page 13-16.

9-110

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7 Alarm Log Display■ Security Groups
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display:

Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.

Input:

Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
• The security group for input can only be configured when there are grouped key buttons.
• For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” onpage 21-1.

9

Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:

Security Group

User1

User2

User3

None

Group AGroup A, Group B

Touch

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart
Display: Group A

Numerical Display
Display: None

Button
Display: Group A
Input: Group B

For User 1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 2 of Group A, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch

Touch

130

PasswordUser2********A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

Group A parts are
not displayed to User1.
User1

Touch

130

130
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualGroup A parts are
displayed to User2.
User2

9-111

Data Displays

User Name

7 Alarm Log Display

Since the display security group is Group A, User 2 (of Group A) can view the buttons. But since the input security
group is Group B, User 2 cannot operate the buttons.
Suppose that the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 3, who is part of both Group A andGroup B. Group A buttons can be displayed, and Group B buttons can be operated.
Touch

Touch

Password
User3

130
130

Touch

130



********A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

ENT

ButtonButtonCannot operate

User2

9-112

For User2,
Group A parts are displayed but
Group B parts cannot be operated.

Can operate

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User3.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

User3

For User3,
Group A parts are displayed andGroup B parts can be operated.

7 Alarm Log Display● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

9
Data Displays■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Alarm Log Display on the editing screen

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-113

8 Numerical Display

8

Numerical Display

8.1 How the Numerical Display is Used
The Numerical Display is used to display the value of a word device in the specified format.
• Display the current value of device
Touch

Display Device : D100

External device

Display Type : Decimal
Data Type : BIN16(+)

65535

D100 :

FFFF (Hex)-1

Digits : 5
Display Device : D100
Display Type : Decimal
Data Type : BIN16(+/-)
Digits : 5

Touch

Display Device : D100

External device

Display Type : Hexadecimal
Data Type : BIN16(+)

AD2

D100 :

1234 (Decimal)?

Digits : 4
Display Device : D100
Display Type : Decimal
Data Type : BCD4Digits : 4• Display the decimal point
Touch
External device

Display Device : D100
Display Type : Decimal

123.4

D100 :

1234

Data Type : BIN16(+/-)
Digits : 4(Decimal)

Display Floating Point : On
Floating Digits : 1• Display the unit
Touch
External device

Display Device : D100
Display Type : Decimal

1234 pcs.

D100 :

Data Type : BIN16(+)
Digits : 41234 (Decimal)With Unit : On
Text ID : 1
Text : pcs.

• Blink a value that exceeds the minimum or the maximum
Touch
External device

Display Device : D100
Display Type : Decimal

120

D100 :

Data Type : BIN16(+)
Digits : 3

120 (Decimal)

Range : Value
Minimum : 0
Maximum : 100
When Data Over
Blink : Selected

9-114

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual8 Numerical Display

8.2 Numerical Display Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Numerical Displays.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Numerical Display.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Numerical Display.
3 Double-click the dropped Numerical Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

9
Data Displays

The Data Over tab, Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-115

8 Numerical Display

8.3 Properties of Numerical Display Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.
● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Display Type
Selects the display type for the value as Decimal or Hexadecimal.
■ Data Format
Data Type:

Selects the type of data for the value.
The data type that can be configured differs according to Display Type. For the datatypes that can be configured, see the table for Digits.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Digits:Specifies the digits to display. The range of digits that can be set varies based on thedisplay type and data type. The digits that can be set are as follows.
Display Type

Data TypeBIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-)

Decimal display

Hexadecimal
display

Display Floating Point:

Digits1 to 5

BIN32 (+), BIN32 (+/-)

1 to 10BCD4

1 to 4BCD8

1 to 8float32

1 to 10

BIN16 (+)

1 to 4

BIN32 (+)

1 to 8

Select this check box to display the decimal point.

When the Display Floating Point check box is selected and BIN16(+), BIN16(+/-), BIN32(+),
BIN32(+/-), BCD4, or BCD8 is selected for Data Type, the source data is an integer, but the value isdisplayed with the decimal point added at the configured floating digits.
However, if float32 is selected for Data Type, the source data is a decimal value.

9-116

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual8 Numerical Display

Floating Digits:

Specifies the number of digits for the fractional part of the decimal value out of thenumber of digits specified by Digits.
This option can only be configured when the Display Floating Point check box isselected. The range of digits that can be set for the fractional part varies based on thedisplay type and data type. The range of digits that can be set for the fractional part is asfollows.
Display Type

Decimal display

Hexadecimal
display

Floating Symbol*1:

BIN32 (+), BIN32 (+/-)

1 to Digits

BCD4

1 to Digits

BCD8

1 to Digits

float32

1 to 8

BIN16 (+)--

BIN32 (+)--

When Digits is 4 and Floating Digits is 2
12.34

When Floating Symbol is /(slash)

12/34

9

Suppress Zeros selected:

1234

Suppress Zeros cleared:

00001234

Select this check box to hide the - (negative) symbol when displaying negative values.
This option can only be configured when Data Type is BCD4, BCD8, or float32.

■ Display Method
Specifies the source of the value to display.
Display Device:

Specifies the word device that stores the value to display.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Use Reference Device*1:

Select this check box and specify a device to change the Display Device by the value of
this device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
For details on indirect reading, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write
Settings” on page 2-4.

*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-117

Data Displays

When Floating Symbol is .(dot)Select this check box to hide “0” for the upper digits of the integer part.
Example:Not Display Sign:

Floating Digits
1 to Digits

Selects the decimal point symbol from the following.
.(dot), :(colon), ;(semicolon), ,(comma), /(slash)This option can only be configured when the Display Floating Point check box isselected.
Example:Suppress Zeros:

Data TypeBIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-)

8 Numerical Display● View Tab
The View tab is used to configure the external form of the part including its color and shape.

■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the View Browser.
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate color of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard graphic (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
Flange9-118

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual8 Numerical Display■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H:

Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

5 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

5 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

9

ScreenParts

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Data Displays

Height9-119

8 Numerical Display● Format Tab■ SizeSelects the text size as 8x16 or 16x16.
■ StyleSelects Regular or Bold for text style.
■ Magnification
W, H:

Selects text magnification (0.5, 1 to 8).

■ Align Text
Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following.
Left, Center, Right
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-5.
■ Text Color
Selects the color of displayed text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ With Unit*1
Select this check box to display units or other characters at the end of a number. Displayed characters must be
registered in Text Manager. The displayed text color will be as set for Text Color under the Format tab.
Text ID:

Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000).
Click
to display Text Manager.

Text:

Displays the characters of the specified Text ID.
• The maximum number that can be displayed with this function is 4 characters. The fifth and subsequentcharacters of a character string are not displayed. However, if Windows Font is set for the specified Text
ID characters all the characters are displayed.
• If a carriage return (CR) is included the characters after the CR are not displayed.

*1 Advanced mode only

9-120

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual8 Numerical Display● Data Over Tab
The Data Over tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

9
Data Displays■ Range
Select data type.
Value:

Specifies the minimum and/or the maximum as a constant.

Device:Specifies the minimum and/or the maximum as a value of word device.

Specifies the allowable range of values to display.
Minimum, Maximum:

Select these check boxes to specify the minimum and/or maximum.
The minimum and maximum that can be specified when Value is selected vary based on thedata type selected with Data Format on the General tab. For details on data types, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
When Device is selected, these options specify the source word devices.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

• Select BIN16(+), BIN16(+/-), BIN32(+), BIN32(+/-), BCD4 or BCD8 for Data Type under the
General tab, and to display a fractional number specify the values of Minimum and Maximum as aninteger.
Example: To set a value of “1.25” for the upper limit, enter “125”.
• If the value of device to display exceeds the data range that can be processed for the data type selectedunder Data Format on the General tab, “?” is displayed.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-121

8 Numerical Display■ When Data Over
These options configure the operation of the part when the allowable range is exceeded.
These options can only be configured when the Minimum or Maximum check boxes are selected under Range.
Blink:

Select this check box to make the value blink when the displayed data exceeds the allowable
range.

Report:Select this check box and specify the device to write 1 in the report device when thedisplayed data exceeds the allowable range.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Example: If the value of word device of the reading source is “120,” which is higher than the upper limit of “100,” or“-10,” which is below the lower limit of “0,” a value of 1 will be written to LM0 and the displayed numericalvalue will blink.
Range: Value

Read data

90

120

50

-10

Minimum: 0
Maximum: 100
When Data Over50

Display120

90

Blinking

Blink: Selected-10
Blinking

Report Device: LM0
Data over notification: LM0

9-122

0

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1

0

1

8 Numerical Display● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

9

Example: When Trigger Type is While ON, Device is LM0, and While not satisfying the condition is Not
display Numerical data
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Numerical Display does not display the number.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Numerical Display displays the number.
Touch

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0Hide
numberLM0: 1Show
number1234

Data over does not operate for hidden Numerical Displays. Data over is reported if the minimum or
maximum is exceeded when the Numerical Display changes from hidden to displayed.
■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to enable the Numerical Display from the following.
Always Enabled: The Numerical Display is always enabled.
Data

Display

99

100

101

102

103

104

105

99

100

101

102

103

104

105

UpdateUpdateUpdateUpdateUpdateUpdateUpdateSmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-123

Data Displays

The Numerical Display is enabled while the condition is satisfied, and it is disabled while the condition is not satisfied.
Select the operation when the condition is not satisfied as Not display Numerical data or Not update Numerical
data under While not satisfying the condition.

8 Numerical Display

While ON:

Enables the Numerical Display when the value of device is 1.
Example: When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Numerical data
Data

99

100

101

102

103

104

105

100

100

102

103

103

103

UpdateDo not update

UpdateUpdateDo not update

Do not update

1
Value of Device
0
Display0
Do not update

While OFF:

Enables the Numerical Display when the value of device is 0.
Example: When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Numerical data
Data

99

100

101

102

103

104

105

99

101

101

101

104

105

UpdateDo not update

Do not update

UpdateUpdate1
Value of Device
0

Display99
UpdateDo not update

While satisfying the condition:
Enables the Numerical Display when the condition is satisfied.
Example: When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Numerical data
Data

99

100

101

102

103

104

105

99

101

101

101

104

105

UpdateDo not update

Do not update

UpdateUpdateSatisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

Display99
UpdateDo not update■ Data Type
Selects the data type handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-63.
■ While not satisfying the condition
Selects the operation of the Numerical Display when the condition is not satisfied.
Not display Numerical data:

The plate and flange are displayed, but number is not displayed.

Not update Numerical data:

The last updated number is displayed. The number does not change.

■ Comment
Enter a comment about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.

9-124

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual8 Numerical Display● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

9
Data Displays■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display:

Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.

Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:

User Name

Security Group

User1

User2

None

Group A
Touch

Line Chart and Bar Chart
Display: Group A

130

Numerical Display
Display: None

Button
Display: Group A

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-125

8 Numerical Display

For User 1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 2 of Group A, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch

Touch

Password
User2

130



Touch

130

130

********ENTA B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2.

Group A parts are
not displayed to User1.
User1

Group A parts are
displayed to User2.
User2■ Display with Arithmetic Operation
To apply arithmetic operations to values of devices and writing the results, select this check box and input thearithmetic formula.
Example: To multiple the value of device when displayed by 60
External device

1234×60

Touch

74040

D0

1234

Display value
multiplied by 60 for
the value of device

Numerical Input
Destination Device: D0
Display with Arithmetic Operation: @*60

Arithmetic Formulas
Arithmetic formulas can be specified by freely combining multiple kinds of data and operators in the following format.
Data

Operator

to

Data

Operator Data Operator Data Operator Data Operator Data ...(up to 120 characters)• There is no limit on the number of data items or number of operators. However, the maximum number is 120
characters.
• Round brackets can be used.
Data

Operator

Data

Data
Item

9-126

Description@

The device on which the arithmetic operation is performed is specified in the arithmetic formula. Only
1 device can be set for an arithmetic operation.
The device is as specified for Display Device on the General tab.

Value

Sets the constant values for the arithmetic formula.
The values that can be set depend on the data type selected in Data Format on the General tab.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

DeviceSpecifies the bit device or word device for the arithmetic formula.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual8 Numerical Display

Operators

Specify the type of arithmetic operation to be performed on the data. The operator priority is the same as for scripts.
For details, refer to Chapter 20 “6.4 About the Priority of the Operator” on page 20-53.
Item

Description
Sets the arithmetic operators.

Arithmetic
operators+

Addition

Adds-

Subtraction

Subtracts

from*Multiplication

Multiplies

and/Division

Divides%ModuloCalculates remainder after dividing

and

.

by

.
.
.
by

.

Sets the bit operator.

Bit operator&

Logical AND

Calculates the logical product (AND) of each bit of|

Logical OR

Calculates the logical sum (OR) of each bit of^

Logical XOR(exclusive OR)

Calculates the exclusive logical sum (XOR) of each bit of.

<<Left shift

Shifts each bit of

to left bybit(s).

>>

Right shift

Shifts each bit of

to right bybit(s).

and
and

.
.
and

9

Examples of Arithmetic Formula Input@+1[LDR0] + @ + 100@&3

Description
To perform the arithmetic operation and input the result, add 1 to the value entered using the
Keypad and write the result to the device.
To perform the arithmetic operation and display the result, add 1 to the value of device and display
the result.
To perform the arithmetic operation and input the result, add the value of LDR0 to the value enteredusing the Keypad and add 100, and write the result to the device.
To perform the arithmetic operation and display the result, add the value of LDR0 to the value of
device and add 100, then display the result.
To perform the arithmetic operation and input the result, write the logical AND operation of the value
entered using the Keypad and 3 to the device.
To perform the arithmetic operation and display the result, a logical AND operation of the value of
device and 3 is displayed.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-127

Data Displays

Input Examples

8 Numerical Display● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Numerical Display on the editing screen

9-128

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual9 Calendar

9

Calendar

9.1 How the Calendar is Used
The Calendar can be used to display the date and time using the Touch's clock data.
• Display the date and timeTouch

12/07 13:45• Write 0 or 1 to a device at the configured times
Touch

ON Time :10:00

External device
Report device M0
0

09:00

OFF Time : 11:00

9

09:00

0

1

1

0

Data Displays

10:00

10:00

11:00

11:00

ON Time
Time

09:00

09:30

ActionValue of Report Device M0

10:00

OFF Time
10:30

Write
0

0

1

11:00
Write

1

0

When Alarm is selected for Calendar Type, you can use just the alarm function without displaying theclock on the screen.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-129

9 Calendar

9.2 Calendar Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Calendars.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Calendar.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Calendar.
3 Double-click the dropped Calendar and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.

9-130

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual9 Calendar

9.3 Properties of Calendar Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.
● General Tab

9
Data Displays■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Calendar Type
Selects the type of Calendar from the following.
Clock:

Displays the date and time.

Alarm:

Notifies by writing 1 (ON Time) or 0 (OFF Time) to a device at the configured times without
displaying the clock.

Clock & Alarm: Displays the clock and notifies by writing 1 (ON Time) or 0 (OFF Time) to a device at the configured
times.
■ Clock
These options configure the type and format of the clock. These options can only be configured when Clock or Clock& Alarm is selected for Calendar Type.
Clock Type:

Selects the items to display for the clock from the following.
Time, Day of the Week & Time, Date & Time, Date & Day of the Week & Time

Date:

Selects the display type of the date from the following.
YY/MM/DD, MM/DD/YY, DD/MM/YY, MM/DD, DD/MM
This option can only be configured when Date & Time or Date & Day of the Week & Time isselected for Clock Type.

Year:

Selects the display type for the year as Double Figures or Four Figures.
This option can only be configured when Date & Time or Date & Day of the Week & Time isselected for Clock Type.

Month:

Selects the display type for the month as 1/2/3/... or Jan/Feb/Mar/....
This option can only be configured when Date & Time or Date & Day of the Week & Time isselected for Clock Type.

Time:

Selects the display type for the time as HH:MM or HH:MM:SS.
HH: hours, MM: minutes, SS: seconds

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-131

9 Calendar● Alarm Tab
These options can only be configured when Alarm or Clock & Alarm is selected for Calendar Type on the
General tab.

(Alarm conditions)■ Alarm Time
Selects the type of data for the alarm time.
Value:

Device:Specifies the alarm time as values and the day of the week.
Year:

Enter the year (0 to 99).

Month:

Enter the month (1 to 12).

Day:

Enter the day (1 to 31).

Day of the Week:

Select the day of the week.

Hour:

Enter the hour (0 to 23).

Minute:Enter the minute (0 to 59).

Second:Enter the second (0 to 59).

Configures the alarm time as values of word device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

■ (Alarm conditions)
Select the check boxes for the conditions to use as the alarm time.
The Day of the Week check box can only be configured when the Year check box is cleared.

9-132

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual9 Calendar■ ON Time
Configures the time to write 1 to the report device according to the type of data.
• After 1 is written to the report time with ON Time, that value is retained.
Value of device retained after ON Time elapses

Value of
Report Device M0

1
0

Time

09:00

09:30

10:00

10:30

11:00

ON Time• After a screen configured with the Calendar is displayed, if the time is in between ON Time and OFF
Time, 1 is written to the report device.
Writes 1 to notify that ON Time has already elapsed

Value of
Report Device M0

1
0

Time

09:00

09:30
ON Time

10:00

10:30

Turn on Touch power
Open screen

11:00

9

OFF Time

Data Displays■ OFF Time
Select this check box to configure the time to write 0 to the report device.
The time is configured according to the type of data.
• The value of Report Device is retained even when the current time exceeds OFF Time.
Value of
Report Device M0
Time

1

Value of device retained after OFF Time elapses

0
10:00

10:30

11:00

11:30

12:00

OFF Time• After a screen configured with the Calendar is displayed, if the time exceeds OFF Time, 0 is written to thereport device.
Writes 0 to notify that OFF Time has already elapsed

Value of
Report Device
Time

1
0
10:00
ON Time

10:30

11:00
OFF Time

11:30

12:00

Turn on Touch power
Open screen■ Report Device
Specifies the bit device to write the value to at ON Time and OFF Time.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-133

9 Calendar● View Tab■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the View Browser.
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate color of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard graphic (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
Flange9-134

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual9 Calendar■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H:

Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

5 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

5 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

9

ScreenParts

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Data Displays

Height9-135

9 Calendar● Format Tab■ SizeSelects the text size as 8x16 or 16x16.
■ StyleSelects Regular or Bold for text style.
■ Magnification
W, H:

Selects text magnification (0.5, 1 to 8).

■ Align Text
Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following.
Left, Center, Right
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-5.
■ Text Color
Selects the color of displayed text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

9-136

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual9 Calendar● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

9

Example: When Trigger Type is While ON, Device is LM0
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Calendar does not display the time.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Calendar displays the time.
Touch

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0Hide
time

LM0: 1Showtime
12/07 13:45■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to enable the Calendar from the following.
Always Enabled: The Calendar is always enabled.

12/07 13:45

Calendar state

Always show time

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-137

Data Displays

The Calendar is enabled while the condition is satisfied, and it is disabled while the condition is not satisfied. Whendisabled, the plate and flange are displayed, but the time is not displayed.

9 Calendar

While ON:

Enables the Calendar when the value of device is 1.
Example: When the Not show Calendar check box is cleared under While not satisfying thecondition
1
Value of Device

0
12/07 13:45

12/07 13:45

12/07 13:45

12/07 13:45

Show time

Show time

Show time

Calendar state
Hide time

While OFF:Show time

Hide time

Hide time

Enables the Calendar when the value of device is 0.
Example: When the Not show Calendar check box is cleared under While not satisfying thecondition
1
Value of Device

0
12/07 13:45

12/07 13:45

12/07 13:45

Calendar stateShow time

Hide time

Show time

Hide time

Hide time

Hide time

Show time

While satisfying the condition:
Enables the Calendar when the condition is satisfied.
Example: When the Not show Calendar check box is cleared under While not satisfying thecondition
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

12/07 13:45

12/07 13:45

12/07 13:45

12/07 13:45

Show time

Show time

Show time

Calendar state
Hide time

Show time

Show time

Hide time■ Data Type
Selects the data type handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-63.
■ Comment
Enter a comment about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.

9-138

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual9 Calendar● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

9
Data Displays■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display:

Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-139

9 Calendar

Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:

User Name

Security Group

User1

User2

None

Group A
Touch

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart
Display: Group A

Numerical Display
Display: None

Button
Display: Group A

For User 1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 2 of Group A, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch

Touch

130

PasswordUser2********A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

Group A parts are
not displayed to User1.
User1

9-140

Touch

130

130
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualGroup A parts are
displayed to User2.
User2

9 Calendar● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

9
Data Displays■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Calendar on the editing screen

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

9-141

9 Calendar

9-142

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualChapter 10 Charts
This chapter describes how to configure charts and meters and their operation on the Touch.

1

Bar Chart

1.1 How the Bar Chart is Used
Bar charts and peak charts can be used to display values of word devices.
• Display values of word devices in a bar chart
External device
D100 :-50

D200 :

120

D300 :40

Touch• Display values of word devices in a peak chart
External device-50

D200 :

120

D300 :

40

10
ChartsD100 :Touch• Make the chart blink when the displayed data exceeds the maximum or minimum
External device
D100 :

20

D200 :

80

D300 :

40

D100 :-50

D200 :

90

D300 :

120

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Touch
Range: Value
Minimum : 0
Maximum : 100
When Data Over
Blink: Selected

10-1

1 Bar Chart

1.2 Bar Chart Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for bar charts.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Charts, and then click Bar Chart.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Bar Chart.
3 Double-click the dropped Bar Chart and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Data Over tab, Scale tab, Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.

10-2

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Bar Chart

1.3 Properties of Bar Chart Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab

10
Charts■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Chart Type
Selects the type of chart from the following items.
Horizontal Bar, Vertical Bar, Horizontal Peak, Vertical Peak
Peak charts only display the tip of the bar chart.
Horizontal Bar

Horizontal Peak

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

10-3

1 Bar Chart■ Data Format
Data Type:

Selects the data type handled by the chart.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

(Data Type)*1:

Origin, Minimum, Maximum:

Selects the type of data used for entering values in Origin, Minimum, and Maximum.
Value:

Uses a constant.

Device:Uses a word device.

Specifies the origin, minimum, and maximum for the chart.
The origin, minimum, and maximum that can be specified during Basic mode and when
Value is selected vary based on the data type. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1
Available Data” on page 2-1.
When Device is selected, these options specify the source word devices.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

If the data displayed in the chart is invalid, 1 is written to System Area 2 Arithmetic error bit (address+2, bit5), and an error message is displayed. For details, refer to Chapter 3 “ Arithmetic error” on page 3-25.
Invalid data is as follows.
• When the minimum is the same as or larger than the maximum• When the source data includes A through F if Data Type is BCD4 or BCD8

*1 Advanced mode only

10-4

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Bar Chart● Data Tab

10

No.:

Shows the numbers for the chart (Ch1 to Ch10).
For Horizontal Bar and Horizontal Peak, the numbers are listed in order from top. For
Vertical Bar and Vertical Peak, the numbers are listed in order from the left.
Vertical Bar

Horizontal Bar

Ch1
Ch2
Ch3
Ch1 Ch2 Ch3

Device:Shows the source word device for the data to display in the chart.

Fg. Normal:

Shows the foreground color of the chart when normal.

Fg. Over*1:

Shows the foreground color of the chart when data over.

Bg. Normal:

Shows the background color of the chart when normal.

Bg. Over*1:

Shows the background color of the chart when data over.

Pattern:

Shows the chart pattern.

*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

10-5

Charts■ Settings
Lists the chart settings. The list shows the numbers, reference devices, and colors for the chart.

1 Bar Chart■ Reference Device
Specifies the source word device for the data to display in the chart.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
■ Foreground Color
Normal, Data Over*1:

Selects the foreground color for the chart when normal and when data over (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click either button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

■ Background Color
Normal, Data Over*1:

Selects the background color for the chart when normal and when data over (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click either button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

■ Pattern
Selects the chart pattern.
Click this button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
■ Set
Registers the chart settings to the list. If you select a Ch number that is already registered, that number is overwrittenwith the new settings.
Select a Ch number on the list, and then click this button to register the Reference Device, Foreground Color,
Background Color, and Pattern settings.
■ Insert
Inserts the chart settings in the position selected on the list.
Select a Ch number on the list, and then click this button to insert the Reference Device, Foreground Color,
Background Color, and Pattern settings. The settings at the insertion point shift down one line. Settings cannot be
inserted if all Ch numbers are configured.
■ Remove
Deletes the registered settings from the list.
Select a Ch number, and then click this button to delete the selected settings from the list.

*1 Advanced mode only

10-6

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Bar Chart● View Tab■ Plate Color
Selects the plate (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange (color: 256 colors, monochrome:
8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange.
Click the Pattern button to open the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern
Palette.
FlangeSmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

10-7

10
Charts■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser.

1 Bar Chart■ Space between Bars*1
Specifies the spacing for the bar chart (0 to 100 dots).
Scale not shown

Show scale
Chart spacing

Chart spacing

Chart spacing

Chart spacing

Chart spacing
0

Chart spacing

Example: If Space between Bars is 10

100

200

If Space between Bars is 0

10 dots

10 dots

10 dots■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H:

Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

5 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

5 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

ScreenHeightParts*1 Advanced mode only

10-8

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Bar Chart● Data Over Tab
The Data Over tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

10
Charts■ Range
Select data type.
Value:

Specifies the minimum and/or the maximum as a constant.

Device:Specifies the minimum and/or the maximum as a value of word device.

Specifies the allowable range of values to display.
Minimum, Maximum:

Select these check boxes to specify the minimum and/or maximum.
The minimum and maximum that can be specified when Value is selected vary based on thedata type selected with Data Format on the General tab. For details on data types, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
When Device is selected, these options specify the source word devices.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

10-9

1 Bar Chart■ When Data Over
These options configure the operation of the part when the allowable range is exceeded.
These options can only be configured when the Minimum or Maximum check boxes are selected under Range.
Blink:

Select this check box to make the chart blink when the displayed data exceeds the allowable range.

Report:Select this check box to write 1 in the report device when the displayed data exceeds the allowable
range.
Report Device: Specifies the report device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 261.

Example: If the value of word device of the reading source is “110,” which is higher than the upper limit of “100,” or“-10,” which is below the lower limit of “0,” a value of 1 will be written to LM0 and the displayed bar will
blink.
Range: Value
Minimum: 0
Maximum: 100

Ch1 data

60

110

80

10

Ch2 data

20

50

10

-10

When Data OverCh1
Ch2Blink: Selected
Report Device: LM0

Display
0

50

100

0

50

100

0

50

Blinking
Data over notification: LM0

10-10

0

1

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

100

0

50

Blinking
01100

1 Bar Chart● Scale Tab
The Scale tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

10
ChartsThe options on the Scale tab vary based on the type selected with Chart Type on the General tab.
Horizontal Bar, Horizontal Peak: X-Axis
Vertical Bar, Vertical Peak: Y-Axis■ Show Ticks
Select this check box to display a scale on a chart.
Major Divisions:Enter the number of major scale divisions (1 to 20).

Minor Divisions:Enter the number of minor scale divisions (1 to 20).

Show Tick Numbers: Select this check box to display numbers along the scale. The values are displayed in the samecolor as the scale.
This can only be set if Value is selected for Data Format under the General tab.
Color:

Selects the color of scales (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
If the area for displaying the scale is small, the scale will not be displayed properly.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

10-11

1 Bar Chart■ Show Gridline
Select this check box to display grid lines on the chart. Grid lines are displayed above the chart.
Display Position: Select from Scale and Data Over to specify the grid line display position.
Scale:

Grid lines are displayed according to the number of major scale divisions.
Can only be set when the Show Ticks check box is selected.
Grid line

Data Over:

Grid lines are displayed at the positions of values specified for Maximum andMinimum under the Data Over tab.
This option can only be configured when Data Format on the General tab andRange on the Data Over tab are set to Value.
Minimum

Maximum

Line Type:

Selects the type of grid lines from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot

Color:

Specifies grid line color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

■ Show Label
Select this check box to display labels on the scale.
Font:

Selects the font for text used in labels from the following.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2
Available Text” on page 2-5.

Text ID:

Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32,000) when text registered in Text Manager are used forlabels.
Clickto display Text Manager.
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.

Text:

Inputs characters to be displayed for labels. The maximum number is 40 characters.
The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-5.
Can only be input when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
When entering Unicode characters click
to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the charactersusing the Unicode Input dialog box then click OK.

Color:

Selects the color of the text used for labels (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for labels.
If a carriage return (CR) is included, the characters after the CR are not displayed. However, if Windows
Font is set for the specified Text ID, all the characters are displayed.

10-12

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Bar Chart● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

10
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON, Device is LM0, and While not satisfying the condition is Not display Chart data
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the bar chart is not displayed.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the bar chart is displayed.
Touch
Hide chart

LM0 : 0ConditionNotsatisfied

0

50

100

Show chart

LM0 : 1

Condition
Satisfied

0

50

100

Data over does not operate for hidden bar charts. Data over is reported if the minimum or maximum isexceeded when the bar chart changes from hidden to displayed.
■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to enable the bar chart from the following.
Always Enabled:

The bar chart is always enabled.
Ch1 data

50

60

70

80

90

Ch2 data

10

30

50

70

90

Display050

Update

100

0

50

100

0

UpdateSmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

50

Update100

050Update

100

0

50

100

Update10-13

ChartsThe bar chart is enabled while the condition is satisfied, and it is disabled while the condition is not satisfied. Selectthe operation when the condition is not satisfied as Not display Chart data or Not update Chart data under
While not satisfying the condition.

1 Bar Chart

While ON:

Enables the bar chart when the value of device is 1.
Example: When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Chart data
Ch1 data

50

60

70

80

90

Ch2 data

10

30

50

70

90

1
Value of Device
0

Display
0

50

100

0

While OFF:

50

100

UpdateDo not update

0

50

100

0

50

100

0

UpdateDo not update

50

100

UpdateEnables the bar chart when the value of device is 0.
Example: When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Chart data
Ch1 data

50

60

70

80

90

Ch2 data

10

30

50

70

90

1
Value of Device
0

Display050

100

Update

0

50

100

0

50

100

0

UpdateDo not update

50

100

Update050

100

Do not update

While satisfying the condition:
Enables the bar chart when the condition is satisfied.
Example: When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Chart data
Ch1 data

50

60

70

80

90

Ch2 data

10

30

50

70

90

Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

Display050

Update

100

0

50

100

0

Do not update

50

100

Update050Update

100

0

50

100

Do not update■ Data Type
Selects the data type handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-63.

10-14

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Bar Chart■ While not satisfying the condition
Selects operation of the Bar Chart when condition is not satisfied.
Not display Chart data:

The plate and flange are displayed, but Bar Chart is not displayed.

Not update Chart data:

The last updated Bar Chart is displayed. The Bar Chart does not change.

■ Comment
Enter a comment about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.

10
ChartsSmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

10-15

1 Bar Chart● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display:

Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.

10-16

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Bar Chart

Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:

User Name

Security Group

User1

User2

None

Group A
Touch

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart
Display: Group A

Numerical Display
Display: None

Button
Display: Group A

For User1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and User2 logs in, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch

Touch

130

PasswordUser2********A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

Touch

130

130
ENT

10
User1

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

ChartsGroup A parts are
not displayed to User1.

Group A parts are
displayed to User2.
User2

10-17

1 Bar Chart● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the bar chart on the editing screen

10-18

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Line Chart2

Line Chart

2.1 How the Line Chart is Used
The line chart can be used to display values of devices sampled with the Data Log function and the values of multiple
word devices.
• Display the values of devices sampled with the Data Log function in a trend chart
Touch

External device
100

D100
60

D101
30

D102
10

80
60
40
20
0
-20

80

40

10

70

40

20

70

50

10

100
80
60
40
20

90

70

10

0
-20

10

There are two types of trend charts, a normal trend chart and a pen recorder trend chart.

Charts• Display the values of multiple, continuous devices in a single line chart
Touch

External device
D100 :

1

D101 :

5

D102 :

10

D103 :

50

D104 :

20

D105 :

60

D106 :

10

100
80
60
40
20

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

0
-20

10-19

2 Line Chart

2.2 Line Chart Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Line Charts.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Charts, and then click Line Chart.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Line Chart.
3 Double-click the dropped Line Chart and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Data Over tab, Scale tab, Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.

10-20

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Line Chart

2.3 Properties of Line Chart Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab

10
Charts■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Chart Type
Selects the type of chart from the following.
Log Trend (Normal):Shows values of devices sampled with the Data Log function in a trend chart. The
displayed chart is updated each time the latest data is sampled and the latest data is
charted from the left edge. If the sampled data exceeds the number of display points,
the entire chart is shifted to the left by the configured scroll size and the display is
updated.
Example: When Display Points is 5 and Scroll Size is 1
Ch1 data

5

30

80

90

110

Ch2 data

0

10

30

40

40

Display

110
30

120

120

120

120

120

120

100

100

100

100

100

100

80

80

80

80

80

80

60

60

60

60

60

60

40

40

40

40

40

40

20

20

20

20

20

0

0

0

0

0

0

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

Display point 1

Display point 2

Display point 3

Display point 4

Display point 5

20

Scroll,ActionSmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

display point 6

10-21

2 Line Chart

Log Trend (Pen Recorder):Shows values of devices sampled with the Data Log function in a trend chart. The
displayed chart is updated each time the latest data is sampled and the latest data isalways displayed at the right edge. The entire chart shifts to the left point by point
and the display is updated.
Example: When Display Points is 5
Ch1 data

5

30

80

90

110

Ch2 data

0

10

30

40

40

110
30

120

120

120

120

120

120

100

100

100

100

100

100

80

80

80

80

80

80

60

60

60

60

60

60

40

40

40

40

40

40

20

20

20

20

20

0

0

0

0

0

0

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

Display point 1

Display point 2

Display point 3

Display point 4

Display point 5

Scroll,display point 6

Display

Action20

The chart can display a maximum of 20 lines.

To display multiple items of data, set the sampling conditions and data size for the data to display to thesame settings. The data cannot be displayed if its sampling conditions or data size is different.
Device Display:

Display the values of multiple, continuous devices as a single line chart. The data sizefor the devices is 16 bits.
Updating and erasing the display is controlled by the lower 2 bits of the starting
address value (control status) of the continuous devices.
The number of values of devices to display is specified by the value of starting address+ 1.
The values of devices from starting address + 2 are displayed on the chart.

Example: When the starting address is D100
The display updates when the value of D100 changes from 0 to 1. The display is erased when the valuechanges to 2. The display is first erased and then updated when the value changes to 3.
0(Starting address) D100-0 value Update

1

0
0

0
1

D100-1 value Erase0(Starting address +1) D101 value
Number of devices to display values

55(Starting address +2) D102 value

10(Starting address +3) D103 value

50(Starting address +4) D104 value

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

3

5

5

10

70

10

20

50

100

50

80

20

20

90

20

30

(Starting address +5) D105 value

60

60

110

60

90

(Starting address +6) D106 value

10

10

80

10

20

Display

Action

120

120

120

120

120

100

100

100

100

100

80

80

80

80

80

60

60

60

60

60

40

40

40

40

40

20

20

20

20

0

0

0

0

0

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

20

UpdateUpdateUpdateUpdateUpdateDo not erase

Erase

Do not erase

Do not erase

Erase

Number of display

Number of display

points changed

points changed

If there are many items of data to display, it may take some time to update the display.

10-22

0

0

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Line Chart■ Data Format
Data Type:

Selects the data type handled by the chart from the following.
BIN16(+), BIN16(+/-), BCD4
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Minimum, Maximum: Specifies the minimum and maximum for the chart.
The minimum and maximum vary based on the selected data type. For details, refer to Chapter
2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
If BCD4 is selected for Data Type and the read data contains A through F, 1 is written to System Area 2
Arithmetic error bit (address+2, bit 5), and an error message is displayed. For details, refer to Chapter 3“Arithmetic error” on page 3-25.
■ Display Points
Specifies the maximum number of points of data to display on the chart (2 to (Base Screen horizontal size)).
This option can only be configured when Log Trend (Normal) or Log Trend (Pen Recorder) is selected for ChartType.
■ Scroll Size
Specifies the number of points of data to scroll when updating the chart display (1 to (Base Screen horizontal size)).
This option can only be configured when Log Trend (Normal) is selected for Chart Type.
Example: When Display Points is 5 and Scroll Size is 3
2. Shift data 3 points left.

3. Display next data.

120

120

120

100

100

100

80

80

80

60

60

60

40

40

40

20

20

20

0

0

0

-20

-20

-20

10
Charts

1. Reached maximum amountof data to display.

■ Restart Chart
Select this check box to display the chart from the beginning when switching screens.
This option can only be configured when Log Trend (Normal) or Log Trend (Pen Recorder) is selected for Chart
Type.
Touch

Touch

100

Touch
100

1234

80

80

60

60

40

40

20

20

0

0

-20

-20

Base Screen 1

Switch screen

Base Screen 2

Switch screen

Display chartfrom beginning.

Base Screen 1

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

10-23

2 Line Chart■ Scroll*1
Enable Scroll:To scroll the chart to display past data and to display the cursor, the chart display updating must be
stopped. To control updating the display, select this check box and specify the bit device or bit of
the word device to control the display.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
Display updating stops when the value of device changes from 0 to 1. Display updating restarts
when the value of device changes from 1 to 0.
This option can only be configured when Log Trend (Normal) or Log Trend (Pen Recorder) is
selected for Chart Type.

Right Scroll Device, Left Scroll Device:
The chart can be scrolled to the right or to the left when display updating is stopped. This option
specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to scroll the chart left or right.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
The chart scrolls right or left one point of data each time the value of device changes from 0 to 1.
These options can only be configured when the Control Display Update and Scrolling check box
is selected.
Scroll right
1 data point.
Value ofRight Scroll Device LM0

Scroll right
1 data point.

Scroll right
1 data point.

1
0

120

120

120

120

100

100

100

100

80

80

80

80

60

60

60

60

40

40

40

40

20

20

20

0

0

0

0

-20

-20

-20

-20

20

Stop updating
Stop updating,then scroll right
3 data points.

*1 Advanced mode only

10-24

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Line Chart● View Tab■ Plate Color
Selects the plate (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange (color: 256 colors, monochrome:
8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange.
Click the Pattern button to open the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern
Palette.
Flange■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)Y

ScreenParts

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

10-25

10
Charts■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser.

2 Line Chart■ SizeW, H:

Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

5 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

5 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

ScreenHeight

10-26

Parts

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Line Chart● Pen (Log) Tab
The Pen (Log) tab is only displayed when Log Trend (Normal) or Log Trend (Pen Recorder) is selected forChart Type on the General tab.

10
Charts■ Settings
Lists the chart settings.
No.:

Shows the numbers for the chart (Ch1 to Ch20).

Channel No.:Shows the Data Log channel number to display on the chart.

Data No.:Out of the data contained in the selected Data Log channel number, shows the data
number to display on the chart.

Line Type:Shows the chart line type.

Line Size:Shows the chart line size.

Line Color:

Shows the chart line color.

■ Channel No.
Specifies the Data Log channel number to display on the chart (1 to 128).
Data Log Settings:

Displays the Data Log Settings dialog box where you can configure the channel while
checking the data to display. Select Channel No. under Settings, and then click OK toclose the Data Log Settings dialog box. Channel No. reflects the selected channel
number.

■ Data No.
Specifies the data number to display on the chart out of the data contained in the selected Data Log channel number.
■ Line Type
Selects the type of line from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot■ Line Size
Selects the line size from the following.
1 dot, 2 dots, 3 dots, 5 dots

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

10-27

2 Line Chart■ Line Color
Selects the line color for the chart (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Set
Registers the chart settings to the list. If you select a Ch number that is already registered, that number is overwrittenwith the new settings.
Select a Ch number on the list, and then click this button to register the settings for the Data Log Channel No. andData No. and the chart Line Type, Line Size, and Line Color.
Always register the settings from Ch1.
■ Insert
Inserts the chart settings in the position selected on the list.
Select a Ch number on the list, and then click this button to insert the settings for the Data Log Channel No. andData No. and the chart Line Type, Line Size, and Line Color. The settings at the insertion point shift down one
line. Settings cannot be inserted if all Ch numbers are configured.
■ Remove
Deletes the registered settings from the list.
Select a Ch number, and then click this button to delete the selected settings from the list.

10-28

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Line Chart● Pen (Device) Tab
The Pen (Device) tab is only displayed when Device Display is selected for Chart Type on the General tab.

10
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
The data size for the devices is 16 bits.
Updating and erasing the display is controlled by the lower 2 bits of the starting address value (control status).
Bit 15

Bit 2 Bit 0

0 : Do not update
1 : Update

Reserved

0 : Do not erase
1 : Erase

The number of values of devices to display is specified by the value of starting address + 1.
The values of devices from starting address + 2 are displayed on the chart.
Example: If Reference Device is set to D100, continuous devices are used starting from D100. The used devices
are as follows.
(Starting address)
+1
+2
+3
+4

Control status (display operation)
Number of data to display values on chart

D100
D101
D102
D103
D104

Data to display values on chart

Values of Devices
D100 value

1

D101 value

5

D102 value

10

D103 value

50

D104 value

20

D105 value

60

D106 value

10

Displayed chart
120
100
80
60

D105

D103

40
20
0

D102

D104

D106

-20

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

10-29

Charts■ Reference Device
Specifies the starting address of the data to display on the chart.

2 Line Chart■ Line Type
Selects the type of line from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot■ Line Size
Selects the line size from the following.
1 dot, 2 dots, 3 dots, 5 dots
■ Line Color
Selects the line color for the chart (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

10-30

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Line Chart● Data Over Tab
The Data Over tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

10
Charts■ Range
The type of data is Value. This option uses constants for the allowable range.
Specifies the allowable range of values to display.
Minimum, Maximum:

Select these check boxes to specify the minimum and/or maximum.
The minimum and maximum that can be specified differ according to the data type selectedwith Data Format on the General tab. For details on data types, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1
Available Data” on page 2-1.

When grid lines are displayed for the minimum and maximum, select the Show Gridline check box on the
Scale tab and then select Data Over.

Ch1 data

Range : Value

60

Ch2 data

Minimum : 0
Maximum : 100
Display

110

20

70

80

50

30

-10

120

120

120

120

100

100

100

100

80

80

80

80

60

60

60

60

40

40

40

40

20

20

20

20

0

0

0

0

-20

-20

-20

-20

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Ch1
Ch2

10-31

2 Line Chart● Scale Tab
The Scale tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Show Ticks
Select this check box to display a scale on a chart.
Major Divisions: Enter the number of major scale divisions (1 to 20).
Minor Divisions: Enter the number of minor scale divisions (1 to 20).
Show Tick Numbers: Select this check box to display numbers along the scale. Can only be set for Y-Axis.
Color:
Selects the color of scales (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
The numbers and scales will be the same color.

If the area for displaying the scale is small, the scale will not be displayed properly.

10-32

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Line Chart■ Show Gridline
Select this check box to display grid lines on the chart. The grid lines are displayed on the chart.
Display Position: Select from Scale and Data Over to specify the grid line display position.
Scale:

Grid lines are displayed according to the number of major scale divisions.
Can only be set when the Show Ticks check box is selected.

Grid lines

Data Over:

Grid lines are displayed at the positions of values specified for Maximum andMinimum under the Data Over tab.
Maximum

Minimum

Line Type:

Selects the type of grid lines from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot

Color:

Specifies grid line color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

10Charts■ Show Label
Select this check box to display labels on the scale.
Font:

Selects the font for text used in labels from the following.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2
Available Text” on page 2-5.

Text ID:

Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32,000) when text registered in Text Manager are used forlabels.
Clickto display Text Manager.
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.

Text:

Inputs characters to be displayed for labels. The maximum number is 40 characters.
The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-5.
Can only be input when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
When entering Unicode characters click

to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the charactersusing the Unicode Input dialog box then click OK.
Color:

Selects the color of the text used for labels (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for labels.
If a carriage return (CR) is included, the characters after the CR are not displayed. However, if Windows
Font is set for the specified Text ID, all the characters are displayed.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

10-33

2 Line Chart● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

The line chart is enabled while the condition is satisfied, and it is disabled while the condition is not satisfied. Whendisabled, the plate and flange are displayed, but the chart is not displayed.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON and Device is LM0
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the line chart is not displayed.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the line chart is displayed.
Touch

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0 : 0Hide chart
100
80
60
40
20
0
-20

LM0 : 1

Show chart
100
80
60
40
20
0
-20

■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to enable the line chart from the following.
Always Enabled:The line chart is always enabled.
100
80
60

Chart state

40
20
0
-20

Always show chart

10-34

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Line Chart

While ON:

Enables the line chart when the value of device is 1.
1
Value of Device

0
100

100

100

100

100

100

100

80

80

80

80

80

80

80

60

60

60

60

60

60

40

40

40

40

40

20

20

20

20

20

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

Show chart

Show chart

Show chart

Chart state

Hide chart

While OFF:

60

40
20

Show chart

Hide chart

40
20

Hide chart

Enables the line chart when the value of device is 0.
1
Value of Device

0
100

100

100

100

100

100

100

80

80

80

80

80

80

80

60

60

60

60

60

60

40

40

40

40

40

40

20

20

20

20

20

20

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

Chart stateShow chart

Hide chart

Show chart

Hide chart

Hide chart

Hide chart

60
40
20

Show chart

While satisfying the condition:
Enables the line chart when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

Chart state

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

80

80

80

80

80

80

80

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

0

0

0

0

0

0

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

Show chart

Show chart

Show chart

Hide chart

Show chart

Hide chart

Hide chart■ Data Type
Selects the data type handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-63.
■ Comment
Enter a comment about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

10-35

Charts0-20

10

2 Line Chart● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display:

Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.

10-36

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Line Chart

Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:

User Name

Security Group

User1

User2

None

Group A
Touch

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart
Display: Group A

Numerical Display
Display: None

Button
Display: Group A

For User1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and User2 logs in, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch

Touch

130

PasswordUser2********A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

User1

130

130
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

10Group A parts are
displayed to User2.

ChartsGroup A parts are
not displayed to User1.

Touch

User2

10-37

2 Line Chart● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the line chart on the editing screen

10-38

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Pie Chart

3

Pie Chart

3.1 How the Pie Chart is Used
The stacked bar chart and pie chart are used to show the proportion of individual data to the sum of the data.
They can be used to check the relative change in the values of multiple devices in real-time.
• Display the proportion for the sum of values of multiple devices in a stacked bar chart or a pie chart
External device
D100 :

10

D200 :

10

D300 :

10

D100 :

120

D200 :

60

D300 :

30

Touch

1:1:1

4:2:1

10

If the source data is all 0, the chart shows the same proportion for all the data.

ChartsSmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

10-39

3 Pie Chart

3.2 Pie Chart Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for pie charts.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Charts, and then click Pie Chart.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Pie Chart.
3 Double-click the dropped Pie Chart and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.

10-40

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Pie Chart

3.3 Properties of Pie Chart Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab

10
Charts■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Chart Type
Select the type of chart from the following items.
Horizontal Bar:

Shows the proportion of the sum of the data as a horizontal stacked bar chart.
Example: When displaying the values for three devices
Ch1 data

0

100

120

150

Ch2 data

0

100

60

50

Ch3 data

0

50

30

10

1:1:1

2:2:1

4:2:1

15 : 5 : 1

Horizontal Bar display

Proportion

Vertical Bar:

Shows the proportion of the sum of the data as a vertical stacked bar chart.
Example: When displaying the values for three devices
Ch1 data

0

100

120

150

Ch2 data

0

100

60

50

Ch3 data

0

50

30

10

1:1:1

2:2:1

4:2:1

15 : 5 : 1

Vertical Bar display

Proportion

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

10-41

3 Pie Chart

Pie:

Shows the proportion of the sum of the data as a pie chart.
Example: When displaying the values for three devices
Ch1 data

0

100

120

300

Ch2 data

0

100

60

50

Ch3 data

0

50

30

10

1:1:1

2:2:1

4:2:1

30 : 5 : 1

Pie chart display

Proportion■ Data Type
Selects the data type handled by the chart.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
If BCD4 or BCD8 is selected and the read data contains A through F, 1 is written to System Area 2
Arithmetic error bit (address+2, bit 5), and an error message is displayed. For details, refer to
Chapter 3 “Arithmetic error” on page 3-25.
■ Settings
Lists the chart settings. The list shows the numbers, source devices, and colors for the chart.
No.:

Shows the numbers for the chart (Ch1 to Ch10).
For Horizontal Bar, the numbers are listed in order from the left. For Vertical Bar, the numbers arelisted in order from the top.
Horizontal bar

Vertical bar

Ch1
Ch1

Ch2 Ch3

Ch2
Ch3

For Pie, the numbers are listed clockwise.
Pie chart

Ch3

Ch1

Ch2

Device:Shows the source device.

Fg. Color:

Shows the foreground color of the chart.

Bg. Color:

Shows the background color of the chart.

Pattern:

Shows the chart pattern.

■ Reference Device
Specifies the source word device for the data to display in the chart.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
■ Foreground Color
Selects the foreground color for the chart (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Background Color
Selects the background color for the chart (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

10-42

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Pie Chart■ Pattern
Selects the chart pattern.
Click this button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
■ Set
Registers the chart settings to the list. If you select a Ch number that is already registered, that number is overwrittenwith the new settings.
Select a Ch number on the list, and then click this button to register the Reference Device, Foreground Color,
Background Color, and Pattern settings.
■ Insert
Inserts the chart settings in the position selected on the list.
Select a Ch number on the list, and then click this button to insert the Reference Device, Foreground Color,
Background Color, and Pattern settings. The settings at the insertion point shift down one line. Settings cannot be
inserted if all Ch numbers are configured.
■ Remove
Deletes the registered settings from the list.
Select a Ch number, and then click this button to delete the selected settings from the list.

10ChartsSmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

10-43

3 Pie Chart● View Tab■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser.
■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange (color: 256 colors, monochrome:
8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:
Selects a pattern for the flange.
Click the Pattern button to open the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
Flange■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:
0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:
0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H:

Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:
5 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:
5 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

ScreenHeight

10-44

Parts

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Pie Chart● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

10

Display:

Charts■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

10-45

3 Pie Chart

Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:

User Name

Security Group

User1

User2

None

Group A
Touch

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart
Display: Group A

Numerical Display
Display: None

Button
Display: Group A

For User1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and User2 logs in, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch

Touch

130

PasswordUser2********A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

Group A parts are
not displayed to User1.
User1

10-46

Touch

130

130
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualGroup A parts are
displayed to User2.
User2

3 Pie Chart● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

10
Charts■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the pie chart on the editing screen

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

10-47

4 Meter

4Meter

4.1 How the Meter is Used
The meter displays the value of a word device as the movement of a needle.
• Display the value of a word device in a meter
Touch

External device

40

D100 :

0

60

20

80

0

100

40

D100 :

75

20

0

10-48

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

60

80

100

4 Meter

4.2 Meter Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for meters.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Charts, and then click Meter.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Meter.
3 Double-click the dropped Meter and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

10
ChartsThe Range tab, Scale tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

10-49

4 Meter

4.3 Properties of Meter Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Meter Type
Select the type of meter from the following items.
90 Degree Meter, 180 Degree Meter, 270 Degree Meter
90-degree meter

180-degree meter

270-degree meter

Example: 180 Degree Meter
Data

0

10

40

180-degree meter display

10-50

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual75

4 Meter■ Data Format
Data Type:

Selects the data type handled by the meter.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Minimum, Maximum:Specifies the minimum and maximum for the data.
The minimum and maximum vary based on the selected data type. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
The needle does not move past the left edge when the data value is the minimum or
lower.
The needle stops at the right edge when the data value is the maximum or higher.

If BCD4 is selected for Data Type and the read data contains A through F, 1 is written to System Area 2
Arithmetic error bit (address+2, bit 5), and an error message is displayed. For details, refer to Chapter 3“Arithmetic error” on page 3-25.
■ Reference Device
Specifies the source word device for the data to display in the meter.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

10ChartsSmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

10-51

4 Meter● View Tab■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser.
■ Needle
Selects the needle color of the Meter (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Needle color■ Plate Color
Selects the plate color of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color

10-52

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Meter■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard graphic (color:
256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern
Palette.
Flange■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
Screen

Y

Parts

10
Charts■ SizeW, H:

Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

5 to (Base Screen horizontal size)H:

5 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width

ScreenHeightParts

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

10-53

4 Meter● Range Tab
The Range tab is only displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Show Range
Select this check box to show ranges on the meter and configure the number of ranges, range colors, and limits.
Number of Ranges:

Specifies the number of ranges (1 to 5).

Range Color:

Selects the range color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Limits:Specifies the limit for the range.
The limit varies based on the selected data type. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1
Available Data” on page 2-1.

Example:180-degree meter, data minimum is 0, maximum is 100, the number of ranges is set to 5
The limit between range 1 and 2: 20
The limit between range 2 and 3: 40
The limit between range 3 and 4: 60
The limit between range 4 and 5: 80

Range 3Range 220

40

60

Range 480

Range 1

Range 50

10-54

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual100

4 Meter● Scale Tab
The Scale tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

10
Charts■ Show Ticks
Select this check box to display a scale on a or meter.
Major Divisions:Enter the number of major scale divisions (1 to 20).

Minor Divisions:Enter the number of minor scale divisions (1 to 20).

Show Tick Numbers: Select this check box to display numbers along the scale. The values are displayed in the samecolor as the scale.
Color:

Selects the color of scales (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
If the area for displaying the scale is small, the scale will not be displayed properly.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

10-55

4 Meter● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display:

Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click
to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Addingand Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.

10-56

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Meter

Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:

User Name

Security Group

User1

User2

None

Group A
Touch

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart
Display: Group A

Numerical Display
Display: None

Button
Display: Group A

For User1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and User2 logs in, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch

Touch

130

PasswordUser2********A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS
CLR
OK

Touch

130

130
ENT

10
User1

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

ChartsGroup A parts are
not displayed to User1.

Group A parts are
displayed to User2.
User2

10-57

4 Meter● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the meter on the editing screen

10-58

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualChapter 11 Commands
This chapter describes how to setup commands and their operation on the Touch.

1

Bit Write Command

1.1 How the Bit Write Command is Used
Writes a 0 or 1 to a bit device.
Touch

External device0Not
Not satisfied
satisfied

Condition

1
SatisfiedSatisfied

Condition■ Set
Writes a 1 to the specified bit device
when the trigger condition issatisfied.

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

Data written

Write

Write

1

1

Commands

Action11■ ResetWrites a 0 to the specified bit device
when the trigger condition issatisfied.

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

ActionData written

Write

Write

0

0

■ Momentary
Writes a 1 to the specified bit device
when the trigger condition issatisfied.
When the trigger condition is nolonger satisfied, a 0 is written to thespecified bit device.

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

Write

Write

Write

Write

0

1

0

1

State of condition

ActionData written

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual11-1

1 Bit Write Command■ Toggle
Toggles the value of the specified bit
device when the trigger condition issatisfied.
If the value of the bit device is 0 itchanges to 1, and vice versa.

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

ActionToggleToggle■ MoveThis function writes the value in thesource bit device to the value in thedestination bit device when thetrigger condition is satisfied.

Action11-2

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

Move

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualMove1 Bit Write Command

1.2 Bit Write Command Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for the Bit Write Command.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Commands, and then click Bit Write Command.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Bit Write Command.
3 Double-click the dropped Bit Write Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

11
Commands

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual11-3

1 Bit Write Command

1.3 Properties of Bit Write Command Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Action Mode
Select the action to perform when the trigger condition is satisfied from the following:Set:

Writes a 1 to the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

ActionData written

Reset:

Write

Write

1

1

Writes a 0 to the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

ActionData written

Momentary:

Write

Write

0

0

Writes a 1 to the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
When the trigger condition is no longer satisfied, a 0 is written to the specified bit device.
Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

Write

Write

Write

Write

0

1

0

1

State of condition

ActionData written

11-4

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Bit Write Command

Toggle:Toggles the value of the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
If the value of the bit device is 0 it changes to 1, and vice versa.
Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

ActionMove:

ToggleToggleThis function writes the value in the source bit device to the value in the destination bit device
when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

ActionMove

Move■ Destination Device
Specify the destination bit device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
*1■ WriteSpecify the number of bit devices (1 to 64) at the destination.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Set or Reset.
Example: This fills a contiguous block of bit devices with the same value.
M0 1
Action Mode: Set
Destination Device: M0
Write: 5

Satisfied

M1 1

11

M2 1
Condition

Commands

M3 1
M4 1

If the bit of the word device is specified, the same value is written to same bit of contiguous word devices.
bit
15

Action Mode: Set
Destination Device: D0-15
Write: 5

bit
0

D0 1
Satisfied

D1 1
D2 1

Condition

D3 1
D4 1

■ Source Data
Specifies the device where the data to be written is stored.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
Device:Specify the source bit device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Transfer:

Specify the number of bit devices (1 to 64) to move.

Example: This button writes the values in a contiguous block of bit devices to a contiguous block of devices at thedestination.
Device: LM0
Destination Device: M0
Transfer: 4

Satisfied

Condition

LM0

1

M0

1

LM1

0

M1

0

LM2

0

M2

0

LM3

1

M3

1

*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual11-5

1 Bit Write Command● Trigger Condition Tab

When the condition has been or is satisfied, the command is executed; when not satisfied, the command is not
executed.
Example: When Trigger Type is Rising-edge and Device is LM0
The command is executed when LM0 changes from 0 to 1.
Touch

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0Not
executedLM0: 1
Executed■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to execute the command from the following.
Rising-edge:

Command is executed when device changes from 0 to 1.
1

Value of Device
0

Execution

ActionFalling-edge:

Execution

Execution

Command is executed when device changes from 1 to 0.
1

Value of Device
0

Execution

ActionSatisfy the condition:

Execution

Command is executed when condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

Action11-6

Execution

Execution

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Execution

1 Bit Write Command

While satisfying the condition:
The command continues being executed while the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionExecution

Execution Execution

Execution Execution■ Data Type
Selects the data type to be handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if Rising-edge or Falling-edge is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-63.
■ Comment
Enter a comment about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.

11
Commands

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual11-7

1 Bit Write Command● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Bit Write Command on the editing screen

11-8

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Word Write Command2

Word Write Command

2.1 How the Word Write Command is Used
Writes a value to a word device. Can be used to indirectly specify the destination address or to perform operations on
the written value.
• Writes a fixed value to the specified word device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Touch

External device

Not satisfied

Condition

D1=

0

Value

100

Destination word device

Satisfied

Write
Condition

D1=

100

100

• Writes the value of device to the specified word device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Touch

External device

D0=

123

D1=

0

D0=

123

Value of device

Not satisfied

11

Condition

Destination word device

Commands

SatisfiedMoveCondition

D1=

123

• Performs arithmetic on the value to write before writing it to a word device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Touch

External device

D0=

100

Value to write

D1=

23

Operator value

D2=

0

Destination word device

D0=

100

D1=

23

D2=

123

Not satisfied

Condition

Satisfied

Add

Condition

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Write

11-9

2 Word Write Command■ Set
Writes a fixed value to the specified word device
when the trigger condition is satisfied.

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

ActionData written

Write

Write

Fixed Value

Fixed Value■ MoveWrites the value in the source device to thedestination word device when the trigger
condition is satisfied.

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

ActionData written

Write

Write

Value of Device

Value of Device■ Momentary
Writes the fixed ON Data value to the specified
word device when the trigger condition issatisfied.
Writes the fixed OFF Data value to the specified
word device when the trigger condition is nolonger satisfied.

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

Write

Write

Write

Write

OFF Data

ON Data

OFF Data

ON Data

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

ActionData written■ Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, XOR
Performs arithmetic on the value in a source
device and a fixed value or a value of device, andwrites the result to a word device when thetrigger condition is satisfied.

State of condition

Arithmetic operation
ActionData written

Arithmetic operation

↓

↓

Write

Write

ResultResultExample: Add (Addition)
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the value
in the Source 1 is added to the value in Source
2 and the result is written to the word device.

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

Addition
ActionData written

11-10

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Addition

↓

↓

Write

Write

ResultResult2 Word Write Command

2.2 Word Write Command Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for the Word Write Command.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Commands, and then click Word Write Command.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Word Write Command.
3 Double-click the dropped Word Write Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

11
Commands

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

11-11

2 Word Write Command

2.3 Properties of Word Write Command Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Action Mode
Select the action to perform when the trigger condition is satisfied from the following:Set:

Writes a fixed value to the specified word device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

ActionData written

Move:

Write

Write

Fixed Value

Fixed Value

Writes the value in the source device to the destination word device when the trigger condition issatisfied.
Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

ActionData written

Momentary:

Write

Write

Value of Device

Value of Device

Writes the fixed ON Data value to the specified word device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Writes the fixed OFF Data value to the specified word device when the trigger condition is nolonger satisfied.
Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

Write

Write

Write

Write

OFF Data

ON Data

OFF Data

ON DataState of condition

ActionData written

11-12

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Word Write Command

Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, XOR:
Performs arithmetic on the value in a reference device and a fixed value, or the value at adevice address and writes the result to a word device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

Arithmetic operation
ActionData written

Arithmetic operation

↓

↓

Write

Write

ResultResultExample: Add (Addition)
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the value in the Source 1 is added to thevalue in Source 2 and the result is written to the word device.
Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

Addition
ActionData written

Addition

↓

↓

Write

Write

ResultResult■ Data Type
Select the data type to be handled by the operation selected for Action Mode.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
BIN16(+) and BIN32(+) can only be set if Action Mode is set to OR, AND, or XOR.

IF BCD4, BCD8, or float32 is selected and the arithmetic data contains a value inexpressible in BCD, a 1
is written to System Area 2 Arithmetic error bit (address+2, bit 5) and an error message is displayed.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “Arithmetic error” on page 3-25.
■ Source 1
Specify the source word device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, or XOR.
■ Source Data
Select the data type to be handled by the operation selected for Action Mode and enter the value.
Value:

Use a constant.
Only a Value can be handled if Action Mode is set to Set or Momentary.
If Action Mode is set to Momentary, the value in the ON Data is written when the trigger condition issatisfied, and the value in the OFF Data when the trigger condition is no longer satisfied.
Hexadecimal:

Select this check box to enter the ON Data and OFF Data values as a hexadecimal.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

11-13

11
Commands

BIN16(+) and BIN32(+) can only be set if Action Mode is set to Move. Because the number of devices
to transfer is specified in Advanced mode, you do not need to set Data Type.

2 Word Write Command

Device: Use a word device.
Specify the device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
Use Reference Device*1:
Select this check box and specify a device to change the source word device according to
the value of the specified device.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings” on page 2-4.
Transfer *1 :Specify the number of word devices (1 to 64) to move.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
Example: If Transfer is set to 2 and Write is set to 3, the same data in 2 continuous word
devices will be written to the destination device 3 times.
Source Data (Device): LDR0
Transfer: 2
Destination Device: D100

LDR0

999

D100

999

LDR1

1000

D101

1000

D102

999

D103

1000

D104

999

D105

1000

Satisfied

Condition

Write: 3■ Destination Device
Destination Device:

Specify the destination word device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Use Reference Device*1:

Select this check box and specify a device to change the destination word device
according to the value of the specified device.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings” on page 2-4.

Write *1 :Specify the number of word devices (1 to 64) at the destination.
For Move, specify how many times to repeat writing.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Set, Momentary, Alternate, or
Move.
Example: If Data Type is set to BIN16(+) and Write is set to 5, the same data will be
written to 5 continuous word addresses.
Data Type: BIN16(+)
Source Data (Value): 12345

SatisfiedDestination Device: LDR10
Write: 5

Condition

LDR10

12345

LDR11

12345

LDR12

12345

LDR13

12345

LDR14

12345

5 words

If Data Type is set to BIN32(+) and Write is set to 5, the same data will be
written to a total of 10 word addresses (2 words 5 times).
LDR11

Data Type: BIN32(+)
Destination Device: LDR10
Write: 5LDR10987654

Source Data (Value): 987654
Satisfied

LDR13
Condition

LDR12987654
LDR15

LDR14

987654
LDR17

LDR16

987654
LDR19

LDR18

987654*1 Advanced mode only

11-14

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 words x 5

2 Word Write Command● Trigger Condition Tab

When the condition has been or is satisfied, the command is executed; when not satisfied, the command is not
executed.
Example: When Trigger Type is Rising-edge and Device is LM0
The command is executed when LM0 changes from 0 to 1.

11

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0Commands

Touch
Not
executedLM0: 1
Executed■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to execute the command from the following.
Rising-edge:

Command is executed when device changes from 0 to 1.
1

Value of Device
0

Execution

ActionFalling-edge:

Execution

Execution

Command is executed when device changes from 1 to 0.
1

Value of Device
0

ActionExecution

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Execution

11-15

2 Word Write Command

Satisfy the condition:

Command is executed when condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionExecution

Execution

Execution

While satisfying the condition:
The command continues being executed while the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionExecution

Execution Execution

Execution Execution■ Data Type
Selects the data type to be handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if Rising-edge or Falling-edge is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-63.
■ Comment
Enter a comment about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.

11-16

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Word Write Command● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

11
Commands■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Word Write Command on the editing screen

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

11-17

3 Goto Screen Command

3

Goto Screen Command

3.1 How the Goto Screen Command is Used
Switches to another screen or displays a window.
• Switches between Base Screens when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Touch

Touch

130

Satisfied

Tank 1
Full

Condition• Opens and closes other windows (such as the Popup Screen, Device Monitor, Ladder Monitor, Password Screen,and Adjust Contrast Screen) when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Touch

Touch

Satisfied

D51

123

D52

456

D53

0
999

Condition

Touch

Satisfied

D51

123

D52

456

D53

0

Touch

999

Condition• Switches to the System Mode when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Touch

Touch

130

Satisfied

Condition• Resets the current screen when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Touch

Satisfied

Touch

130

Condition

11-18

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual03 Goto Screen Command

3.2 Goto Screen Command Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for the Goto Screen Command.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Commands, and then click Goto Screen Command.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Goto Screen Command.
3 Double-click the dropped Goto Screen Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

11
Commands

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

11-19

3 Goto Screen Command

3.3 Properties of Goto Screen Command Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Action Mode
Select the action to perform when the trigger condition is met from the following:
Back to previous Screen:

Switches to the previous screen. Returns to up to 16 earlier screens.

Switch to Base Screen:

Switches between Base Screen.

Open Popup Screen:

Opens a Popup Screen.

Close Popup Screen:

Closes a Popup Screen.

Open Device Monitor Screen:

Opens the Device Monitor Screen.

Close Device Monitor Screen:

Closes the Device Monitor Screen.

Open Ladder Monitor:

Opens the Ladder Monitor.

Close Ladder Monitor:

Closes the Ladder Monitor.

Open Password Screen:

Opens the Password Screen.

Close Password Screen:

Closes the Password Screen.

Open Adjust contrast Screen:

Opens the Adjust contrast Screen.

Close Adjust contrast Screen:

Closes the Adjust contrast Screen.

Switch to System Mode:

Switches to the Top Page in the System Mode.

Reset current screen:

Resets the current Base Screen.

• Open Ladder Monitor and Close Ladder Monitor can only operate when ladder program is selected
as the programming language in control function.
• When the current Base Screen is reset using the Reset current screen function, the window andinternal devices restart as if the Base Screens were switched.

11-20

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Goto Screen Command■ Goto Screen
Screen No.:

If Action Mode is set to Switch to Base Screen, specify the Base Screen number to switch to(from 1 to 3000). If Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen or Close Popup Screen,
specify the number of the Popup Screen to open or close (from 1 to 3015).
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Switch to Base Screen, Open Popup
Screen, or Close Popup Screen.
Use Reference Device*1:

Select this check box and specify a device to specify the screen
number using the value of the specified device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For thedevice address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup
Screen or Close Popup Screen.

Coordinates X, Y: Specify the coordinates on the Base Screen for displaying a window.
X and Y specify the upper left corner of the window using the upper left corner of the screen as theorigin.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen, Open Device
Monitor Screen, Open Password Screen, Open Adjust contrast Screen, or Open Movie
File Screen.
Use Reference Device*1:

Select this check box and specify a device to specify the coordinates
using the value of the specified device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For thedevice address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup
Screen.

11
Commands*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

11-21

3 Goto Screen Command● Trigger Condition Tab

When the condition has been or is satisfied, the command is executed; when not satisfied, the command is not
executed.
Example: When Trigger Type is Rising-edge and Device is LM0
The command is executed when LM0 changes from 0 to 1.
Touch

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0Not
executedLM0: 1
Executed■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to execute the command from the following.
Rising-edge:

Command is executed when device changes from 0 to 1.
1

Value of Device
0

Execution

ActionFalling-edge:

Execution

Execution

Command is executed when device changes from 1 to 0.
1

Value of Device
0

Execution

ActionSatisfy the condition:

Execution

Command is executed when condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

Action11-22

Execution

Execution

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Execution

3 Goto Screen Command

While satisfying the condition:
The command continues being executed while the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionExecution

Execution Execution

Execution Execution■ Data Type
Selects the data type to be handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if Rising-edge or Falling-edge is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-63.
■ Comment
Enter a comment about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.

11
Commands

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

11-23

3 Goto Screen Command● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Goto Screen Command on the editing screen

11-24

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Script Command

4

Script Command

4.1 How the Script Command is Used
Executes a script when certain conditions are satisfied.
Executes Script

Satisfied// Script A

Start Condition[D 100] = [D 100] + 1;
if ([D 100] >= 50){[D 100] = 0;
}

Touch

Complex processes such as conditional branching, logical operation, arithmetic operation, function, etc., canbe programmed in a text format using Scripts. For details, refer to Chapter 20 “Script” on page 20-1.

11
Commands

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

11-25

4 Script Command

4.2 Script Command Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Script Commands.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Commands, and then click Script Command.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Script Command.
3 Double-click the dropped Script Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

11-26

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Script Command

4.3 Properties of Script Command Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab(Script)■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.

11

Script Manager will open when

Commands■ Script ID
Specify the script ID (1 to 32000) of the script to operate.
is clicked. Select a script from the script list.

For details, refer to Chapter 20 “2.2 Script Manager” on page 20-7.
■ Script Name
Displays the name of the script selected in Script Manager.
■ (Script)
Displays the contents of the script selected in Script Manager.
Once this area is double clicked, the Script Editor will open and editing can be done.
For details, refer to Chapter 20 “2.3 Script Editor” on page 20-8.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

11-27

4 Script Command● Trigger Condition Tab

When the condition has been or is satisfied, the command is executed; when not satisfied, the command is not
executed.
Example: When Trigger Type is Rising-edge and Device is LM0
The command is executed when LM0 changes from 0 to 1.
Touch

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0Not
executedLM0: 1
Executed■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to execute the command from the following.
Rising-edge:

Command is executed when device changes from 0 to 1.
1

Value of Device
0

Execution

ActionFalling-edge:

Execution

Execution

Command is executed when device changes from 1 to 0.
1

Value of Device
0

Action11-28

Execution

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Execution

4 Script Command

Satisfy the condition: Command is executed when condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionExecution

Execution

Execution

While satisfying the condition:
The command continues being executed while the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionFixed Period:

Execution

Execution Execution

Execution Execution

Command executes within a fixed time interval.
Fixed time interval

ActionExecution

Fixed time interval

Execution

Fixed time interval

Execution

Execution■ Data Type
Selects the data type to be handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition.

11

Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-63.
■ Period
Sets the period for command execution from 1 to 3600 (seconds).
Can only be set if Fixed Period is selected as Trigger Type.
■ Comment
Enter a comment about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

11-29

Commands

Can only be set if Rising-edge or Falling-edge is selected as Trigger Type.

4 Script Command● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Script Command on the editing screen

11-30

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Multi-Command

5

Multi-Command

5.1 How the Multi-Command is Used
Executes multiple commands at once.
These commands can be assigned to a Multi-Command.
Command

Description

Bit Write

Writes a 0 or 1 to the specified bit device.

Word Write

Writes a value to a word device. You can specify the destination address indirectly, and perform arithmeticon the value to be written.

Goto Screen

Switches screens or opens other windows.

Key

Performs downloads or uploads. Also used to manipulate other parts.

ScriptExecutes a script.

• Writes a 1 to a bit device, and the value in a word device to another device when the trigger condition is satisfied.

0
Touch

1

External device

Satisfied

D0=

Condition

123

D0=

123

Move

D1=

0

D1=

11

123

Commands• When the trigger condition is satisfied, executes the script and switches the Base Screen.
Touch

Executes the script.
// Script A[D 100] = [D 100] + 1;

Satisfiedif ([D 100] >= 50){[D 100] = 0;

Condition}

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

11-31

5 Multi-Command

5.2 Multi-Command Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Multi-Commands.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Commands, and then click Multi-Command.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Multi-Command.
3 Double-click the dropped Multi-Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

11-32

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Multi-Command

5.3 Properties of Multi-Command Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Multi-Functions
Add and edit commands to be executed when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Function List:

11

Lists the commands to be executed.
Shows the command type.

Command Name:

Shows the command name.

Device:Shows the setting when one of the following Command Type is selected.
Shows the destination device for the Bit Write and Word Write commands.
Shows the screen number when Goto Screen is set to Switch to Base
Screen, Open Popup Screen, or Close Popup Screen.
Shows the script ID for the Script command.

• Executes only the Goto Screen command at the end of the Function List when multiple Switch to Base
Screen type commands are set for Action Mode.
• Goto Screen commands are not executed from top to bottom as they appear in the Function List.
Rather, they are executed at the end of the scan of the Touch when the trigger condition is satisfied.
• The function of Key button will affect on the next scan when the trigger condition is satisfied.
• If multiple Key commands are set, only the first and second Key commands in the Function List are
executed. The third and following Key commands are not executed. Also, only the first Key command thatspecifies a Data Transfer function in the Function List is executed if multiple Key commands are set.
Command Type: Select the command to add.
Bit Write:

Writes a 0 or 1 to a bit device or bit of the word device. For details, refer to“Properties of Bit Write for Multi-Functions dialog box” on page 11-35.

Word Write:

Writes a value to a word device. Can be used to indirectly specify the destination
address or to perform operations on the written value. For details, refer to“Properties of Word Write for Multi-Functions dialog box” on page 11-36.

Goto Screen:

Switches to another screen or displays a window. For details, refer to“Properties of Goto Screen for Multi-Functions dialog box” on page 11-38.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

11-33

Commands

Command Type:5 Multi-Command

Add:

Key:

Performs a variety of functions including uploading and downloading, copying
files, and operating other parts. For details, refer to “Properties of Key for MultiFunctions dialog box” on page 11-40.

Script:Executes a script. For details, refer to “Properties of Script for Multi-Functions
dialog box” on page 11-42.

Adds a command to the list. A maximum of 32 commands may be added.
Click this button to display the Properties dialog box for the command selected from Command
Type.

Edit:

Changes a command in the list.
Click this button to display the Properties dialog box for the command selected in Function List.

Delete:Deletes a command from the list.
Select the command in the list, and then click this button.

Copy:

Copies a command in the list.
Select a command in the list, and then click this button. A copy of the selected command is added
to the end of the list.

11-34

Up:

Shifts the selected command upward in the list.

Down:

Shifts the selected command downward in the list.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Multi-Command

Properties of Bit Write for Multi-Functions dialog box
Sets the Bit Write command for the Multi-Command.

■ Command NameEnter a name for the command. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Action Mode
Select the action to perform when the trigger condition is satisfied from the following:Set:

Writes a 1 to the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied.

Reset:

Writes a 0 to the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied.

Set & Reset:

Writes a 1 to the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
When the trigger condition is no longer satisfied, a 0 is written to the specified bit device.

Toggle:Toggles the value of the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied.

11

If the value of the bit device is 0 it changes to 1, and vice versa.
This function writes the value in the source bit device to the value in the destination bit device
when the trigger condition is satisfied.
For details about the Action Mode, refer to “Action Mode” on page 11-4. However, Set & Reset for theMulti-Command has the same function as Momentary for the Bit Write Command.
■ Destination Device
Specify the destination bit device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
■ Write*1

Specify the number of bit devices (1 to 64) at the destination.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Set or Reset. For details, refer to “Write” on page 11-5.
■ Source Data
Specifies the device where the data to be written is stored.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move. For details, refer to “Source Data” on page 11-5.
Device:Specify the source bit device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Transfer:

Specify the number of bit devices (1 to 64) to move.

*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

11-35

CommandsMove:5 Multi-Command

Properties of Word Write for Multi-Functions dialog box
Sets the Word Write command for the Multi-Command.

■ Command NameEnter a name for the command. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Action Mode
Select the action to perform when the trigger condition is satisfied from the following:Set:

Writes a fixed value to the specified word device when the trigger condition is satisfied.

Move:

Writes the value in the source device to the destination word device when the trigger
condition is satisfied.

Set ON & OFF Data:

Writes a fixed value of ON Data to the specified word device when the trigger condition issatisfied.
Writes a fixed value of OFF Data to the specified word device when the trigger condition is nolonger satisfied.

Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, XOR:
Performs arithmetic on the value in a source device and a fixed value or a value of device, andwrites the result to a word device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
For details about the Action Mode, refer to “Action Mode” on page 11-12. However, Set ON & OFF Datafor the Multi-Command has the same function as Momentary for the Word Write Command.
■ Data Type
Select the data type handled by the operation selected for Action Mode.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
BIN16(+) and BIN32(+) can only be set if Action Mode is set to OR, AND, or XOR.
BIN16(+) and BIN32(+) can only be set if Action Mode is set to Move. Because the number of devices
to transfer is specified in Advanced mode, you do not need to set Data Type.
If BCD4, BCD8, or float32 is selected and the arithmetic data contains a value inexpressible in BCD, a 1
is written to System Area 2 Arithmetic error bit (address+2, bit 5) and an error message is displayed.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “ Arithmetic error” on page 3-25.
■ Source 1
Specify the source word device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, or XOR.

11-36

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Multi-Command■ Source Data
Select the data handled by the operation selected for Action Mode.
Value:

Use a constant.
Only a Value can be handled if Action Mode is set to Set or Set ON & OFF Data.
If Action Mode is set to Set ON & OFF Data, the value in the ON Data is written when the trigger
condition is satisfied, and the value in the OFF Data when the trigger condition is no longer satisfied.
Hexadecimal:

Device:Select this check box to enter the ON Data and OFF Data values as ahexadecimal.

Use a word device.
Specify the device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
Use Reference Device*1:

Select this check box and specify a device to change the source word device
according to the value of the specified device.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings” onpage 2-4.

Transfer*1:

Specify the number of word devices (1 to 64) to move.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
For details, refer to “Transfer” on page 11-14.

■ Destination Device
Destination Device:

Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

11

Select this check box and specify a device to change the destination word device
according to the value of the specified device.

Commands

Use Reference Device*1:

Specify the destination word device.

This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings” on page 2-4.
Write*1:

Specify the number of word devices (1 to 64) at the destination.
For Move, specify how many times to write.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Set, Move, or Set ON & OFF Data.
For details, refer to “Write” on page 11-14.

*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

11-37

5 Multi-Command

Properties of Goto Screen for Multi-Functions dialog box
Sets the Goto Screen command for the Multi-Command.

■ Command NameEnter a name for the command. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Action Mode
Select the action to perform when the trigger condition is met from the following:
Back to previous Screen:

Switches to the previous screen. Returns to up to 16 earlier screens.

Switch to Base Screen:

Switches between Base Screen.

Open Popup Screen:

Opens a Popup Screen.

Close Popup Screen:

Closes a Popup Screen.

Open Device Monitor Screen:

Opens the Device Monitor Screen.

Close Device Monitor Screen:

Closes the Device Monitor Screen.

Open Ladder Monitor:

Opens the Ladder Monitor.

Close Ladder Monitor:

Closes the Ladder Monitor.

Open Password Screen:

Opens the Password Screen.

Close Password Screen:

Closes the Password Screen.

Open Adjust contrast Screen:

Opens the Adjust contrast Screen.

Close Adjust contrast Screen:

Closes the Adjust contrast Screen.

Switch to System Mode:

Switches to the Top Page in the System Mode.

Reset current screen:

Resets the current Base Screen.

• Open Ladder Monitor and Close Ladder Monitor can only operate when ladder program is selected
as the programming language in control function.
• When the current Base Screen is reset using the Reset current screen function, the window andinternal devices restart as if the Base Screens were switched.

11-38

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Multi-Command■ Goto Screen
Screen No.:

If Action Mode is set to Switch to Base Screen, specify the Base Screen number to switch to(from 1 to 3000). If Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen or Close Popup Screen,
specify the number of the Popup Screen to open or close (from 1 to 3015).
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Switch to Base Screen, Open Popup
Screen, or Close Popup Screen.
Use Reference Device*1:

Select this check box and specify a device to specify the screen
number using the value of the specified device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For thedevice address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup
Screen or Close Popup Screen.

Coordinates X, Y: Specify the coordinates on the Base Screen for displaying a window.
X and Y specify the upper left corner of the window using the upper left corner of the screen as
the origin.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen, Open Device
Monitor Screen, Open Password Screen, Open Adjust contrast Screen, or Open Movie
File Screen.
Use Reference Device*1:

Select this check box and specify a device to specify the coordinates
using the value of the specified device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For thedevice address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup
Screen.

11
Commands*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

11-39

5 Multi-Command

Properties of Key for Multi-Functions dialog box
Sets the Key command for the Multi-Command.

(Key)

Displays settings
applicable to theselected key.

■ Command NameEnter a name for the command. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Key Type
Select the function for the Key command.
Language:

Switches the display of the key that is displayed when Keypad is selected in Key Browser. These
languages are available:
Japanese, European, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.

Browse:Opens the Key Browser when clicked. Select a key.
For details, refer to Chapter 7 “4.5 Key Browser” on page 7-66.

(Key):

Displays the name of the key selected using the Key Browser.
The function of Key command will affect on the next scan when the trigger condition is satisfied.

The settings explained below appear depending on the type of key selected.
■ Popup Screen No.
The Alt key switches the current Popup Screen used as a Keypad when this button is pressed.
Specify the Popup Screen number to open a Keypad for.
This setting is enabled only if Alt was selected using the Key Browser.

■ Scroll Size
Key Buttons Pg. Up and Pg. Dwn scroll the list up and down, respectively. Key Buttons Fcs. Up and Fcs. Dwn movethe focus up and down, respectively. This settings specifies the number of pages or lines (1 to 1023 lines) to scroll or
move the focus per each press of the button.
This setting is enabled only if Pg. Up, Pg. Dwn, Fcs. Up, and Fcs. Dwn are selected using the Key Browser.

11-40

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Multi-Command■ Transfer Setting
Key commands Download Project and Upload Project perform the data transfer function specified by theirnames.
These settings specify the source, data to be transfered, and destination.
This setting is enabled only if one of these keys is selected after clicking Data Transfer in the Key Browser.
If Download Project is selected.

Source:This is set to the USB flash drive on which the project file to transfer (.ZNV) was saved.
File Path:

Specify the path to the project file (.ZNV) to transfer. The maximum number is 247
characters.
Example: Where “FT_DEMO_1.ZNV” is a project file saved on the root directory of a USB
flash drive:
FT_DEMO_1.ZNV

11

If Upload Project is selected.

Commands

Source:Specify where to save the project uploaded from Touch. The location is the USB flash drive.
File Path:

Specify the path to the folder where the uploaded project file will be saved. The maximum
number is 247 characters.
Example: To save it to the folder “Uploaded_Project” on a USB flash drive:
Uploaded_Project

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

11-41

5 Multi-Command

Properties of Script for Multi-Functions dialog box
Sets the script for the Multi-Command.

(Script)■ Command NameEnter a name for the command. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Script ID
Specify the script ID (1 to 32,000) of the script to operate.
Script Manager will open whenis clicked. Select a script from the script list.

For details, refer to Chapter 20 “2.2 Script Manager” on page 20-7.
■ Script Name
Displays the name of the script selected in Script Manager.
■ (Script)
Displays the contents of the script selected in Script Manager.
Once this area is double clicked, the Script Editor will open and editing can be done.
For details, refer to Chapter 20 “2.3 Script Editor” on page 20-8.

11-42

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Multi-Command● Trigger Condition Tab

When the condition has been or is satisfied, the command is executed; when not satisfied, the command is not
executed.
Example: When Trigger Type is Rising-edge and Device is LM0
The command is executed when LM0 changes from 0 to 1.
Touch

ConditionNotsatisfiedNot
executed

11
Commands

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0LM0: 1
Executed■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to execute the command from the following.
Rising-edge:

Command is executed when device changes from 0 to 1.
1

Value of Device
0

Execution

ActionFalling-edge:

Execution

Execution

Command is executed when device changes from 1 to 0.
1

Value of Device
0

Execution

ActionSatisfy the condition:

Execution

Command is executed when condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionExecution

Execution

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Execution

11-43

5 Multi-Command

While satisfying the condition:
The command continues being executed while the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionExecution

Execution Execution

Execution Execution■ Data Type
Selects the data type to be handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if Rising-edge or Falling-edge is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-63.
■ Comment
Enter a comment about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.

11-44

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Multi-Command● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.

11

Example: When mousing over the Multi-Command on the editing screen

Commands

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

11-45

6 Timer6

Timer

6.1 How the Timer is Used
Starts a countdown when the trigger condition is satisfied, and writes 1 to an internal device (HMI Timer Relay LTC)
once the set time has elapsed.
Touch
Satisfied0

Condition

LTC0:

0
1

LTD0

1999

LTC0:

LTD0

1998

999

Start countdown

1

1

0
Set time
has elapsed

Not satisfied

SatisfiedSatisfied

Not satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

ConditionStart
countdown

Writes 1
to LTC0

Writes thepreset value
to LTD0 and 0
to LTC0State of condition

Action

HMI Timer Current Value
LTD0 value
HMI Timer Relay
LTC0 value

1999

1999

0

0

1998

999

1

0
1

1999
0

• The HMI Timer Relay LTC is an internal device (bit device) that changes to 1 once the time set for thetimer has elapsed.
• The HMI Timer Current Value LTD is an internal device (word device) that stores current values for thetimer.
• Once switched to the screen that the timer has been placed in, the following values will be given
regardless of the whether the trigger condition is satisfied or not satisfied.
- HMI Timer Relay LTC: 0- HMI Timer Current Value LTD: Preset Value

11-46

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6 Timer

6.2 Timer Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Timers.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Commands, and then click Timer.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Timer.
3 Double-click the dropped Timer and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

11
Commands

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

11-47

6 Timer

6.3 Properties of Timer Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum characters is 20 characters.
■ Timer Address
Specifies the HMI Timer address (0 to 31).
The device type for the HMI Timer Relay is LTC. The device type where the current value is stored is LTD.
Example: When 0 is specified for Timer Address
HMI Timer Relay:

LTC0

HMI Timer Current Value: LTD0
■ UnitSelect the unit of time from sec or 100 msec.
■ Preset Value
Select the data type to use and the enter the preset value.
The preset value is the time from when the timer starts its countdown until 1 is written to the HMI Timer Relay LTC.
Value:

When selecting sec in Unit, the preset value is specified with 1 to 65535 (second units) up to a maximumof 1092 minutes 15 seconds.
When selecting 100 msec in Unit, the preset value is specified with 1 to 65535 (100 milliseconds units).

Device:Uses the values of word device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

11-48

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6 Timer● Trigger Condition Tab

When the condition has been or is satisfied, the command is executed; when not satisfied, the command is not
executed.
Example: When Trigger Type is Rising-edge and Device is LM0
The command is executed when LM0 changes from 0 to 1.
Touch

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0Not
executedLM0: 1

11

ExecutedCommands■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to execute the command from the following.
While ON:

Command is executed when device is 1.
1

Value of Device
0

ActionWhile OFF:

Execution

Execution

Execution

Command is executed when device is 0.
1

Value of Device
0

ActionExecution

Execution

While satisfying the condition:
The command continues being executed while the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionExecution

Execution Execution

Execution Execution■ Data Type
Selects the data type to be handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

11-49

6 Timer■ Device
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-63.
■ Comment
Enter a comment about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.

11-50

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6 Timer● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed whenthe mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Timer on the editing screen

11
Commands

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

11-51

6 Timer

11-52

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualChapter 12 Control Function
This chapter describes the actions and operations for ladder program and FBD program, basic operation for WindLDR,
and functions of each instruction and FB.
The functions controlled by ladder programs or FBD programs created with WindLDR is called as control function.

1

Control Function Actions

1.1 Actions and Operations of Ladder Program and FBD Program● Ladder Program and FBD Program Actions
Execution Period
Input delay
Start of processing
for part at topof screen

I
Input
Q

Input refresh

Output refresh

I
External
input

Ladder or FBD
process

OutputOutputdelay

Input process

Output process

Controlfunction
Execution
PeriodQ
External
outputSleep(HMI function
execution)

HMI function

Execution Period
End of processing
for part at bottomof screen12■ Input delay
There is a delay between an external input and the internal device Input (I). The maximum delay period is calculatedby the amount of 5 microseconds, filter value and the execution period.
When an input occurs immediately after the input refresh ends,
the input delay will be the longest because the processor waits
for the input refresh in the next scan before reflecting the input
to the input relay.

Input refresh
Input process
Ladder or FBD
process

I
External
input

Output refresh

Input delay(maximum)

Sleep(HMI function
execution)

I
Input refresh
Input
Ladder or FBD
process
Output refresh■ Ladder or FBD process
Executes the ladder program or FBD program.
■ Output refresh
Updates the relay output (Q).

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

12-1

Control Function■ Input refresh
A capture process is executed at the specified input filter, and the external output is reflected in the internal device
Input (I).

1 Control Function Actions■ Output delay
There is a delay between an external output and the internal device Output(Q). The maximum delay period is
calculated by the amount of 300 milliseconds and the execution period.
When an output occurs immediately after the output refresh
ends, the output delay will be the longest because the processor
waits for the output refresh in the next scan before reflecting
the output to the output relay.

Input refresh
Ladder or FBD
process
Output refreshQ
OutputOutput delay(maximum)

Sleep(HMI function
execution)

Input refresh
Ladder or FBD
process
Q

Output process
Output refresh

External
output■ Control function
A control function refers to three processes: input refresh, ladder or FBD process, and output refresh.
For details of control function settings, refer to Chapter 3 “4 Special Functions” on page 3-45, and the “SmartAXIS
Ladder Programming Manual” or the "SmartAXIS FBD Programming Manual".
Only control devices can be used for control function.

■ Sleep
Sleep refers to the time used by the control function subtracted from the Execution Period. This is when the processor
executes HMI function.
■ Execution Period
The Execution Period refers to one scan of the control function (input refresh + ladder or FBD process + output
refresh) and HMI function (sleep).
The control function is executed once every specified execution interval.
If execution of the control function takes more than half of the time specified for the Execution Period, theprocessor automatically extends the Execution Period so that the control function completes within 1/2 of
the Execution Period. In this instance, error number 7 will be stored in HMI Special Data Register LSD53.
There is a delay in the ladder program or FBD program. Take this delay time into consideration when
specifying the Execution Period. For example, if it is necessary to capture external inputs within 100
milliseconds, set the Execution Period to 90 milliseconds. The default Execution Period is 10 milliseconds. If
you don't change the default value, it will be the same as the M8123 (10 milliseconds clock) operation
period. In this case, M8123 is always ON or OFF.
■ HMI function
Parts laid out on the screen are processed from top to bottom only when the control function is in sleep mode.
Display processing pauses when execution of the next control function begins, and resumes when the function goesto sleep again.
When processing reaches the bottom of the screen, processing returns to the top of the screen.

12-2

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 Control Function Actions● Executing and Stopping Ladder Programs or FBD Programs
This section describes operations to start and stop the Touch.
Make sure your safety before turning the Touch on and off. Incorrect operation may cause machine
damage or accidents.
The ladder program or FBD program is executed (RUN) and stopped (STOP) by using the Touch operations, or byexternal input with the stop input and reset input functions.
For details on stop input settings, refer to Chapter 3 “4.2 Stop Input” on page 3-48.
For details on reset input settings, refer to Chapter 3 “4.3 Reset Input” on page 3-49.
Switching from RUN to STOP is executed by END process of the ladder program or Scan End process of the FBD
program, and the following functions are stopped.
Ladder program:

High-speed counter, User interrupt, Catch input, Timer interrupt

FBD program:

High-speed counter, Catch input• For outputs during STOP, keep or clear can be selected by special internal relay M8025 (Maintain Outputs While
Ladder Program Operation Stopped). For details on M8025 (Maintain Outputs While Ladder Program Operation
Stopped), refer to Chapter 27 “Special Internal Relay (M)” on page 27-5.
• The current values of timer instructions and timer FB are reset. For details, refer to the follows:- Ladder program: Timer instruction
 Chapter 5 "Basic Instructions" - "TML (1-sec Timer)" in the "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual"- FBD program: Timer FB
 Chapter 8 "The timer FB" in the "SmartAXIS FBD Programming Manual"Also, when switching from STOP to RUN, device states are cleared or kept according to Memory Backup in
Function Settings. For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.6 Keep and Clear Control Devices” on page 3-53.

12
Control Function

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

12-3

2 Ladder Program2

Ladder Program

2.1 Basic Operation for WindLDRThis section describes basic procedures for operating WindLDR.
● Start WindLDR
On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click(control function).

WindLDR starts.

Next, create a ladder program.

• The programming language can be changed in the PLC Selection dialog box. The PLC Selection dialog box
can also be accessed using the following methods.
- Click PLC Type on the status bar, and then click PLC Selection on the displayed drop-down list.
- On the Configuration tab, in the PLC group, click PLC.
• To change the default programming language, select the programming language on the PLC Selection
dialog box, and then click Use as Default.

12-4

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Ladder Program● Creating Ladder ProgramThis section describes the procedure for creating a simple ladder program in WindLDR.
For details about basic and advanced instructions, refer to the "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual".

Create a simple program using WindLDR. The sample program performs the following operation:• When input I0 is turned on, output Q0 is turned on.
• When input I1 is turned on, output Q1 is turned on.
• When both inputs I0 and I1 are turned on, output Q2 flashes in 1-sec increments.
Rung No.

Input I0

Input I1

Output Operation

1

ON

OFF

Output Q0 is turned ON.

2

OFF

ON

Output Q1 is turned ON.

3

ON

ON

Output Q2 flashes in 1-sec increments.

One collection of a group of instructions that control output or advanced instructions is called a rung.
WindLDR manages programs in rung units. Function descriptions can be configured as rung comments forindividual rungs.

12
Control Function

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

12-5

2 Ladder Program

Inserting a NO contact of input I0

1 On the WindLDR Home tab, in the Instruction group, click Basic, and then click A (Normally Open).
The symbol for NO contact is displayed at the mouse pointer.

2 Move the mouse pointer to the first column of the first line where you want to insert a NO contact, and then click theleft mouse button.
The NO contact is created on the ladder line and the properties are displayed in the Property window.

3 Set the device in the Property window.

Enter "I0" for Device and press ENTER.
A NO contact of input I0 is programmed in the first column of the first ladder line.

Instructions can be entered using the right-click menu or the keyboard.
If entering an instruction using the right-click menu, open the menu, click Basic Command (B), and thenclick A (Normally Open).
If entering NO contact from the keyboard, press A and then select NO contact from the Coil Selection
dialog box and press ENTER.
For details, refer to the online help for WindLDR.

12-6

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Ladder Program

Inserting a NC contact of input I1

1 On the WindLDR Home tab, in the Instruction group, click Basic, and then click B (Normally Closed).
The symbol for NC contact is displayed at the mouse pointer.

2 Move the mouse pointer to the second column of the first ladder line where you want to insert a NC contact, and thenclick the left mouse button.
The NC contact is created on the ladder line and the properties are displayed in the Property window.

12
Control Function

3 Set the device in the Property window.

Enter "I1" for Device and press ENTER.
A NC contact of input I1 is programmed in the first column of the first ladder line.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

12-7

2 Ladder Program

Inserting Output Q0

1 On the WindLDR Home tab, in the Instruction group, click Basic, and then click OUT (Output).
The symbol for Output is displayed at the mouse pointer.

2 Move the mouse pointer to the third column of the first ladder line where you want to insert an output coil, and thenclick the left mouse button.
The output is created on the ladder line and the properties are displayed in the Property window.

3 Set the device in the Property window.

Enter "Q0" for Device and press ENTER.
Output Q0 is connected to the series circuit of the NO contact for input I0 and the NC contact for input I1.

This completes programming for rung 1.

12-8

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Ladder Program

Creates Rung 2

1 A new rung is inserted.
To insert a rung, on the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Append, and then click Append a Rung.

Rungs can be added using the right-click menu or the keyboard.
If inserting a rung using the right-click menu, open the menu and click Append (N), and then click Rung(R).
If inserting a rung from the keyboard, press ENTER.
For details, refer to the online help for WindLDR.

2 Enter NC contact I0 and NO contact I1, and Output Q1.
Enter NC contact I0 and NO contact I1, and Output Q1 in the same way as described from “Inserting a NO contact of
input I0” on page 12-6 to “Inserting Output Q0” on page 12-8.

12Control Function

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

12-9

2 Ladder Program

Creates Rung 3

1 Insert a rung and enter NO contact I0, NO contact I1, and Output M0010.

2 A new ladder line is inserted.
To insert a ladder line, on the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Append, and then click Append a LadderLine.

One output or computation instruction can be laid out on each ladder line. If entering multiple outputs orcomputation instructions within a single rung, or if setting input conditions that extend over multiple lines,
insert a ladder line to the rung.
Ladder lines can be inserted using the right-click menu or the keyboard.
If inserting a rung using the right-click menu, open the menu and click Append (N), and then click LadderLine (L).
If inserting a rung from the keyboard, press .
For details, refer to the online help for WindLDR.

3 Enter NO contact M0010, NO contact M8121, and Output Q2.
M8121 is a special internal relay that repeatedly toggles ON/OFF on a 1 second cycle.

This completes programming for rung 1 to 3.

12-10

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Ladder Program

Conversion of Programs

1 Confirms that programs have been correctly created.
On the Home tab, in the Program group, click Convert.
When the instruction symbols are connected correctly, conversion is completed successfully. If any error is found, theerrors are listed on the Info Window screen. Then, make corrections as necessary.

Information window

12
Control Function

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

12-11

2 Ladder Program

Monitor Operation
Another powerful function of WindLDR is to monitor the PLC operation on the computer. The input and output statusof the sample program can be monitored in the ladder diagram.
On the WindLDR Online tab, in the Monitor group, click Monitor.
When both inputs I0 and I1 are on, the ladder diagram on the monitor screen looks as follows:

Rung 1:
When both inputs I0 and I1 are on,
output Q0 is turned off.
Rung 2:
When both inputs I0 and I1 are on,
output Q1 is turned off.
Rung 3:
When both inputs I0 and I1 are on,internal relay M10 is turned on.
M8121 is the 1-sec clock special
internal relay.
While M10 is on, output Q2 flashes in
1-sec increments.

12-12

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Ladder Program● Exit WindLDR
Clickin WindLDR, and then click Exit WindLDR.

WindLDR closes.
Application button• If project data is saved during editing in WindO/I-NV3, control function are also saved.
• If you clickin WindLDR and then click Close, or if you close the project file while editing in

WindO/I-NV3, you will exit WindLDR.

12Control Function

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

12-13

2 Ladder Program

2.2 Instructions Reference
The instructions for ladder program are divided into basic instructions, which perform sequencing, and advanced
instructions, which perform moves, comparisons, Boolean computations, binary arithmetic operations, bit shifts, andother operations. Some instruction words cannot be used in interrupt processes.
In an interrupt process, the processing of the main program is interrupted, using the interrupt input, timer
interrupt, and high-speed counter of function settings, and a specified subroutine is executed. If a
subroutine that includes instruction words that cannot be used in interrupt processes is executed, a ladderprogram execution error occurs.
The input and operation of SmartAXIS ladder program requires specialist knowledge.
To make effective use of the SmartAXIS, take the time to develop a thorough understanding of thecontents and programs in this manual.
● Basic Instruction List
SymbolFunctionInterrupt
Program
Execution

The LOD instruction starts the logicaloperation with an NO (normally open)
contact.
Stores intermediate results and reads
contact status

YES

The LODN instruction starts the logicaloperation with an NC (normally closed)contact.
Stores intermediate results and reads
contact status

YES

Outputs the result of bit logical operation

YES

Outputs the inverted result of bit logicaloperation

YES

S

Sets output, internal relay, data register
bit or shift register

YES

R

Resets output, internal relay, dataregister bit or shift register

YES

Series connection of NO contact

YES

Series connection of NC contact

YES

Parallel connection of NO contact

YES

Parallel connection of NC contact

YES

Name and Diagram

Load
LOD

Load Not
LODN

OutputOUT
Output Not
OUTN
Set
SET
Reset
RST
And
AND
And Not
ANDN
OrOR
Or NotORN

12-14

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Ladder Program

SymbolName and Diagram

FunctionInterrupt
Program
Execution

And Load
AND·LOD

Series connection of circuit blocks

YES

Parallel connection of circuit blocks

YES

Or LoadOR·LODBPS

Bit Push

Saves the result of bit logical operation
temporarily

YES

BRD

Bit ReadReads the result of bit logical operation
which was saved temporarily

YES

BPP

Bit PopRestores the result of bit logicaloperation which was saved temporarily

YES

Falling-edge differentiation output

NO

Rising-edge differentiation output

NO

T***

1 sec On Delay timer

NO

T***

100 msec ON Delay timer

NO

T***

10 msec ON Delay timer

NO

T***

1 msec ON Delay timerNO

1 sec OFF Delay timerNO

100 msec OFF Delay timerNO

10 msec OFF Delay timerNO

1 msec OFF Delay timerNO

Adding counterNO

Single Output Up
SOTU

SOTU

Single Output Down
SOTD

SOTD

1-sec Timer
TML

TML
***

100-ms Timer
TIM

TIM
****

10-ms Timer
TMH

TMH

1-ms Timer
TMS

TMS
****

1-sec Off-delay Timer
TMLO

TMLO T*******

100-ms Off-delay Timer
TIMO

TIMO T*******

10-ms Off-delay Timer
TMHOTMHO T*******

1-ms Off-delay Timer
TMSO

TMSO T*******

Counter
CNT

CNT

C***

****

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

12-15

Control Function

****

12

2 Ladder Program

SymbolName and Diagram

FunctionInterrupt
Program
Execution

Dual Pulse Reversible Counter
CDP

CDP

C***

****

Dual Pulse Reversible CounterNO

Up/down selection reversible counterNO

Double-word adding counterNO

Double-word dual pulse reversible
counterNO

Double-word up/down selection
reversible counterNO

Forward shift registerNO

Reverse shift register

NO

Equal to comparison of counter current
value

YES

Greater than or equal to comparison ofcounter current value

YES

Equal to comparison of data register
value

YES

Greater than or equal to comparison ofdata register value

YES

Starts a master control

YES

Ends a master control

YES

Jumps a designated program area

YES

Up/Down Selection Reversible Counter
CUD

CUD

C***

****

Double-word Adding Counter
CNTD

CNTD C*******

Double-word Dual Pulse Reversible Counter
CDPD C***

CDPD

****

Double-word Up/Down Selection Reversible Counter
CUDD C***

CUDD

****

Forward shift register
SFR

SFR

R***

****

Reverse shift register
SFRN R***

SFRN

****

Counter Comparison (=)
CC=

CC＝ C*******Counter Comparison (>=)
CC>=

CC>= C*******

Data Register Comparison (=)
DC=

DC＝ D********

Data Register Comparison (>=)
DC>=

DC>= D********

Master Control Set
MCS

MCS

Master Control Reset
MCR

MCR

Jump
JMP

12-16

JMP

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Ladder Program

SymbolName and Diagram

FunctionInterrupt
Program
Execution

Jump End
JEND

JEND

Ends a jump instruction

YES

Ends a program

YES

End
END

END

12
Control Function

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

12-17

2 Ladder Program● Advanced Instruction List
SymbolName and Diagram

FunctionInterrupt
Program
Execution

NOP
NOP

NOP

Move
MOV

MOV(*)

S1(R) D1(R) REP***** ***** **Move Not
MOVN

MOVN(*) S1(R) D1(R) REP***** ***** **Indirect MoveIMOV

IMOV(*)

S1(R) S2

D1(R) D2

REP***** ***** ***** ***** **Indirect Move Not
IMOVN

IMOVN(*) S1(R) S2

D1(R) D2

REP***** ***** ***** ***** **Indirect Bit Move
IBMV

IBMV

S1(R) S2

D1(R) D2

REP***** ***** ***** ***** **Indirect Bit Move Not
IBMVN

IBMVN

S1(R) S2

D1(R) D2

REP***** ***** ***** ***** **Block MoveBMOV

BMOV(W)

S1

N_W

D1

***** ***** *****

N Data Set
NSET

NSET(*) S1

S2

S3

D1

***** ***** ***** *****

N Data Repeat Set
NRS

NRS(*) N-W

S1

D1***** ***** *****XCHG(*)

D1

D2***** *****

12-18

YES

When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data from device
designated by S1 is moved to device designated by D1.
S1 → D1

YES

When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data from device
designated by S1 is inverted bit by bit and moved todevice designated by D1.
S1 NOT → D1

YES

When input is on, the values contained in devices
designated by S1 and S2 are added to determine thesource of data. The 16- or 32-bit data so determined is
moved to destination, which is determined by the sum ofvalues contained in devices designated by D1 and D2.
S1 + S2 → D1 + D2

YES

When input is on, the values contained in devices
designated by S1 and S2 are added to determine thesource of data. The 16- or 32-bit data so determined isinverted and moved to destination, which is determinedby the sum of values contained in devices designated by
D1 and D2.
S1 + S2 NOT → D1 + D2

YES

When input is on, the values contained in devices
designated by S1 and S2 are added to determine thesource of data. The 1-bit data so determined is moved todestination, which is determined by the sum of values
contained in devices designed by D1 and D2.
S1 + S2 → D1 + D2

YES

When input is on, the values contained in devices
designated by S1 and S2 are added to determine thesource of data. The 1-bit data so determined is inverted
and moved to destination, which is determined by thesum of values contained in devices designated by D1 andD2.
S1 + S2 NOT → D1 + D2

YES

When input is on, N blocks of 16-bit word data startingwith device designated by S1 are moved to N blocks ofdestinations, starting with device designated by D1. N-W
specifies the quantity of blocks to move.
S1, S1+1, S1+2, ... , S1+N–1 → D1, D1+1,
D1+2, ... , D1+N–1

YES

When input is on, N blocks of 16- or 32-bit data indevices designated by S1, S2, S3, ... , Sn are moved to N
blocks of destinations, starting with device designated by
D1.
S1, S2, S3, ... , Sn → D1, D2, D3, ... , Dn

YESWhen input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated by S1 is
set to N blocks of destinations, starting with device
designated by D1.
S1 → D1, D2, D3, ... , Dn–1

YES

When input is on, the 16- or 32-bit data in devices
designated by D1 and D2 are exchanged with each other.

Exchange
XCHG

No Operation

Word data type:D1 ↔ D2

Double-word data type:

D1·D1+1 → D2, D2+1

SmartAXIS Touch User's ManualYES

2 Ladder Program

Name and Diagram

FunctionInterrupt
Program
Execution

Timer/Counter Current Value StoreWhen input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated by S1 isread out and stored to the current value of device
designated by D1.
S1 → D1

YES

Symbol

TCCST

TCCST(*) S1(R) D1(R) REP***** ***** **Compare Equal To
CMP=

CMP=(*)

S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP

AND/OR***** ***** ***** **Compare Unequal To
CMP<>

CMP<>(*)

S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP

AND/OR***** ***** ***** **Compare Less Than
CMP<

CMP<(*)

S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP

AND/OR***** ***** ***** **Compare Greater Than
CMP>

CMP>(*)

S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP

AND/OR***** ***** ***** **Compare Less Than or Equal To
CMP<=(*) S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP
AND/OR***** ***** ***** **Compare Greater Than or Equal To
CMP>=

CMP>=(*) S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP
AND/OR***** ***** ***** **Interval Compare Greater Than or Equal To
ICMP>=

ICMP>=(*) S1

S2

S3

D1

***** ***** ***** *****

Data type W or I:

S1 = S2 → D1 on

Data type D, L, or F:

S1·S1+1 = S2·S2+1 → D1 on

When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated bysource devices S1 and S2 are compared. When S1 data is
not equal to S2 data, destination device D1 is turned on.
When the condition is not met, D1 is turned off.
Data type W or I:

S1 ≠ S2 → D1 on

Data type D, L, or F:

S1·S1+1 S2·S2+1→ D1 on

When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated bysource devices S1 and S2 are compared. When S1 data isless than S2 data, destination device D1 is turned on.
When the condition is not met, D1 is turned off.
Data type W or I:

S1 < S2 → D1 on

Data type D, L, or F:

S1·S1+1 < S2·S2+1 → D1 on

When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated bysource devices S1 and S2 are compared. When S1 data is
greater than S2 data, destination device D1 is turned on.
When the condition is not met, D1 is turned off.
Data type W or I:

S1 > S2 → D1 on

Data type D, L, or F:

S1·S1+1 > S2·S2+1 → D1 on

When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated bysource devices S1 and S2 are compared. When S1 data isless than or equal to S2 data, destination device D1 isturned on. When the condition is not met, D1 is turned
off.
Data type W or I:

S1 ≤ S2 → D1 on

Data type D, L, or F:

S1·S1+1 ≤ S2·S2+1 → D1 on

When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated by source
devices S1 and S2 are compared. When S1 data is greaterthan or equal to S2 data, destination device D1 is turned
on. When the condition is not met, D1 is turned off.
Data type W or I:

S1 ≥ S2 → D1 on

Data type D, L, or F:

S1·S1+1 ≥ S2·S2+1 → D1 on

When input is on, the 16- or 32-bit data designated by
S1, S2, and S3 are compared. When the condition is met,
destination device D1 is turned on. When the condition is
not met, D1 is turned off.
Data type W or I:

S1 ≤ S2 ≤ S3 → D1 on

YES

YES

YES

YES

12
YES

YES

YES

Data type D, L, or F:
S1·S1+1 ≤ S2·S2+1 ≤ S3·S3+1 → D1 on
Load Compare Equal To
LC=

LC=(*)********

This instruction constantly compares 16- or 32- bit data
designated by S1 and S2. When S1 data is equal to S2
data, the output to the following instructions is turned on.
When the condition is not met, the output is turned off.
Data type W or I:

S1 = S2

Data type D, L, or F:

S1·S1+1 = S2·S2+1

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

YES

12-19

Control Function

CMP<=

When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated bysource devices S1 and S2 are compared. When S1 data isequal to S2 data, destination device D1 is turned on.
When the condition is not met, D1 is turned off.

2 Ladder Program

SymbolName and Diagram

This instruction constantly compares 16- or 32- bit data
designated by S1 and S2. When S1 data is equal to S2
data, the output to the following instructions is turned
on. When the condition is not met, the output is turned
off.

Load Compare Unequal To
LC<>

LC<>(*)********

LC<(*)********

LC>(*)
****

LC<=

****

LC>=(*)********

Addition
ADD

ADD(*)

S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP***** ***** ***** **Subtraction
SUB

SUB(*)

S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP***** ***** ***** **Multiplication
MUL

MUL(*)

S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP***** ***** ***** **12-20

Data type D, L, or F:

S1·S1+1 ≠ S2·S2+1

Data type W or I:

S1 < S2

Data type D, L, or F:

S1·S1+1 < S2·S2+1

Data type W or I:

S1 > S2

Data type D, L, or F:

S1·S1+1 > S2·S2+1

This instruction constantly compares 16- or 32- bit data
designated by S1 and S2. When S1 data is less than or
Load Compare Less Than or Equal To equal to S2 data, the output to the following instructions
is turned on. When the condition is not met, the output is
LC<=(*)
turned off.
**** ****

Load Compare Greater Than or Equal To
LC>=

S1 ≠ S2This instruction constantly compares 16- or 32- bit data
designated by S1 and S2. When S1 data is greater thanS2 data, the output to the following instructions is turned
on. When the condition is not met, the output is turned
off.

Load Compare Greater ThanLC>

Data type W or I:

This instruction constantly compares 16- or 32- bit data
designated by S1 and S2. When S1 data is less than S2
data, the output to the following instructions is turned
on. When the condition is not met, the output is turned
off.

Load Compare Less ThanLC<

Function

Data type W or I:

S1 ≤ S2

Data type D, L, or F:

S1·S1+1 ≤ S2·S2+1

This instruction constantly compares 16- or 32- bit data
designated by S1 and S2. When S1 data is greater thanor equal to S2 data, the output to the following
instructions is turned on. When the condition is not met,
the output is turned off.
Data type W or I:

S1 ≥ S2

Data type D, L, or F:

S1·S1+1 ≥ S2·S2+1

When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated bysource devices S1 and S2 are added. The result is set todestination device D1 and carry (M8003).
Data type W or I:

S1 + S2 → D1, CY

Data type D, L, or F:

S1·S1+1 + S2·S2+1→ D1·D1+1, CY

When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated bysource device S2 is subtracted from 16- or 32-bit data
designated by source device S1. The result is set todestination device D1 and borrow (M8003).
Data type W or I:

S1 - S2 → D1, BW

Data type D, L, or F:

S1·S1+1 - S2·S2+1 → D1·D1+1, BW

When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated bysource device S1 is multiplied by 16- or 32-bit data
designated by source device S2. The result is set todestination device D1. When the result exceeds the valid
range for data types D or L, the special internal relay
M8004 (ladder program execution error) is turned on.
Data type W or I:

S1 X S2 → D1·D1+1

Data type D, L, or F:

S1·S1+1 X S2·S2+1 → D1·D1+1

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

Interrupt
Program
Execution

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

2 Ladder Program

SymbolName and Diagram

Function
When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated bysource device S1 is divided by 16- or 32-bit data
designated by source device S2. The quotient is set to16- or 32-bit destination device D1, and the remainder is
set to the next 16- or 32-bit data. Data type F does not
generate a remainder.
When S2 is 0 (dividing by 0), the special internal relay
M8004 (ladder program execution error) is turned on.

Division
DIVInterrupt
Program
Execution

DIV(*)

S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP***** ***** ***** **YESData type W or I:
S1 ÷ S2 →D1 (quotient), D1+1 (remainder)

Data type D or L:
S1·S1+1 ÷ S2·S2+1 → D1·D1+1 (quotient),
D1+2·D1+3 (remainder)
Data type F:
S1·S1+1 ÷ S2·S2+1 → D1·D1+1 (quotient)
Increment
INC

INC(*) S / D*****

Decrement
DEC

DEC(*) S / D*****

When input is on, one is added to the 16- or 32-bit data
designated by device S/D and the result is stored to thesame device.
Data type W or I:

S/D + 1 → S/D

Data type D or L:

S/D·S/D+1 + 1 → S/D·S/D+1

When input is on, one is subtracted from the 16- or 32bit data designated by device S/D and the result is stored
to the same device.
Data type W or I:

S/D – 1 → S/D

Data type D or L:

S/D·S/D+1 – 1 → S/D·S/D+1

YES

YES

When input is on, the square root of device designatedby S1 is extracted and is stored to the destination
designated by D1.
The square root is calculated to two decimals, omitting
the figures below the second place of decimals, andmultiplied by 100.

Root
ROOT

ROOT(*)

S1

D1***** *****

S1 → D1

When input is on, the square root of device designatedby S1·S1+1 is extracted and is stored to the destination
designated by D1·D1+1.
The square root is calculated to two decimals, omitting
the figures below the second place of decimals, andmultiplied by 100.
Data type D:

YES

S1·S1+1 → D1·D1+1

When input is on, the square root of device designatedby S1·S1+1 is extracted and is stored to the destination
designated by D1·D1+1.
Data type F:

Sum
SUM

SUM(*)S1

ADD/XOR***** ***** *****S2

D1

S1·S1+1 → D1·D1+1

Calculate the total of designated data, depending on thecalculation option.
ADD:
When input is on, N blocks of 16- or 32-bit data startingat device designated by S1 are added and the result isstored to device designated by D1. S2 specifies thequantity of data blocks.
XOR:
When input is on, N blocks of 16-bit data starting at
device designated by S1 are XORed and the result isstored to device designated by D1. S2 specifies thequantity of data blocks.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

YES

12-21

Control Function

Data type W:

12

2 Ladder Program

SymbolName and Diagram

Function

AND Word
ANDW

ANDW(*)

S1(R) S2(R) S3(R) REP***** ***** ***** **OR Word
ORW

ORW(*)

S1(R) S2(R) S3(R) REP***** ***** ***** **Exclusive OR Word
XORW

XORW(*)

S1(R) S2(R) S3(R) REP***** ***** ***** **Shift Left
SFTL

SFTL

S1

S2

N_B

bits

***** ***** ***** **Shift Right
SFTR

SFTR

S1

S2

N_B

bits

***** ***** ***** **BCD Left Shift
BCDLS

BCDLS

S1

S2

***** **

Word Shift
WSFT

WSFT

S1

S2

D1

***** ***** *****

Rotate LeftROTL

ROTL(*)

S1

bits***** **

Rotate Right
ROTR

ROTR(*) S1

bits***** **

Hex to BCDHTOBHTOB(*) S1

D1***** *****

12-22

Interrupt
Program
Execution

When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated bysource devices S1 and S2 are ANDed, bit by bit. The
result is set to destination device D1.
S1 · S2 → D1

YES

When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated bysource devices S1 and S2 are ORed, bit by bit. The result
is set to destination device D1.
S1 + S2 → D1

YES

When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated bysource devices S1 and S2 are exclusive ORed, bit by bit.
The result is set to destination device D1.
S1 ⊕ S2 → D1

YES

When input is on, N_B-bit data string starting withsource device S1 is shifted to the left by the quantity ofbits designated by device Bits.
The result is set to source device S1, and the last bit
status shifted out is set to a carry (special internal relay
M8003). Zero or 1 designated by source device S2 is set
to the LSB.
CY ← S1

YES

When input is on, N_B-bit data string starting withsource device S1 is shifted to the right by the quantity ofbits designated by device Bits.
The result is set to source device S1, and the last bit
status shifted out is set to a carry (special internal relay
M8003). Zero or 1 designated by source device S2 is set
to the MSB.
S1 → CY

YES

When input is on, the 32-bit binary data designated by
S1 is converted into 8 BCD digits, shifted to the left by
the quantity of digits designated by S2, and converted
back to 32-bit binary data.
Valid values for each of S1 and S1+1 are 0 through9999.
The quantity of digits to shift can be 1 through 7.
Zeros are set to the lowest digits as many as the digits
shifted.

YES

When input is on, N blocks of 16-bit word data startingwith device designated by D1 are shifted up to the next
16-bit positions. At the same time, the data designatedby device S1 is moved to device designated by D1. S2
specifies the quantity of blocks to move.

YES

When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data of the designatedsource device S1 is rotated to the left by the quantity ofbits designated by device bits.
The result is set to the source device S1, and the last bit
status rotated out is set to a carry (special internal relay
M8003).

YES

When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data of the designatedsource device S1 is rotated to the right by the quantity ofbits designated by device bits.
The result is set to the source device S1, and the last bit
status rotated out is set to a carry (special internal relay
M8003).

YES

When input is on, the 16- or 32-bit data designated by
S1 is converted into BCD and stored to the destination
designated by device D1.
Valid values for the source device are 0 through 9999 forthe word data type, and 0 through 9999 9999 for the
double-word data type.
S1 → D1

YES

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Ladder Program

SymbolFunctionInterrupt
Program
Execution

When input is on, the BCD data designated by S1 isconverted into 16- or 32-bit binary data and stored to thedestination designated by device D1.
Valid values for the source device are 0 through 9999
(BCD) for the word data type, and 0 through 9999 9999
(BCD) for the double-word data type.
S1 → D1

YES

When input is on, the 16-bit binary data designated by
S1 is read from the lowest digit as many as the quantityof digits designated by S2, converted into ASCII data,and stored to the destination starting with the device
designated by D1.
The quantity of digits to convert can be 1 through 4.
S1 → D1, D1+1, D1+2, D1+3

YES

When input is on, the ASCII data designated by S1 as
many as the quantity of digits designated by S2 isconverted into 16-bit binary data, and stored to thedestination designated by device D1.
Valid values for source data to convert are 30h to 39h
and 41h to 46h.
The quantity of digits to convert can be 1 through 4.
S1, S1+1, S1+2, S1+3 → D1

YES

Name and Diagram

BCD to Hex
BTOH

BTOH(*) S1

D1***** *****

Hex to ASCIIHTOAHTOA(*)

S1

S2

D1

***** ***** *****ASCII to Hex
ATOH

ATOH(*)

S1

S2

D1

***** ***** *****BCD to ASCIIBTOABTOA(*)

S1

S2

D1

***** ***** *****

When input is on, the 16- or 32-bit binary data
designated by S1 is converted into BCD, and converted
into ASCII data. The data is read from the lowest digit as
many as the quantity of digits designated by S2. The
result is stored to the destination starting with the device
designated by D1.
The quantity of digits to convert can be 1 through 5 forthe word data type, and 1 through 10 for the doubleword data type.
Word data type:

YES

S1 → D1, D1+1, D1+2, D1+3, D1+4

12

Double-word data type: S1·S1+1 → D1, D1+1, D1+2, ... , D1+9ATOB

ATOB(*)

S1

S2

D1

***** ***** *****

Encode
ENCO

ENCO

S1

Bits

***** *****

D1

DECO

S1

DecodeDECO

D1***** *****

Bit Count
BCNT

BCNT

S1

S2

D1

***** ***** *****

Word data type:

S1, S1+1, S1+2, S1+3, S1+4 → D1

Double-word data type:

S1, S1+1, S1+2, ... , S1+9 → D1·D1+1

YES

When input is on, a bit which is on is sought. The search
begins at S1 until the first point which is set (on) is
located. The quantity of points from S1 to the first set
point (offset) is stored to the destination designated bydevice D1.
If no point is on in the searched area, 65535 is stored to
D1.

YES

When input is on, the values contained in devices
designated by S1 and D1 are added to determine thedestination, and the bit so determined is turned on.

YES

When input is on, bits which are on are sought in anarray of consecutive bits starting at the point designatedby source device S1. Source device S2 designates thequantity of bits searched. The quantity of bits which areon is stored to the destination designated by device D1.

YES

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

12-23

Control Function

ASCII to BCD

When input is on, the ASCII data designated by S1 as
many as the quantity of digits designated by S2 isconverted into BCD, and converted into 16- or 32-bit
binary data. The result is stored to the destination
designated by device D1.
Valid values for source data to convert are 30h through39h.
The quantity of digits to convert can be 1 through 5 forthe word data type, and 1 through 10 for the doubleword data type.

2 Ladder Program

SymbolAlternate Output
ALT

FunctionInterrupt
Program
Execution

When input is turned on, output, internal relay, or shift
register bit designated by D1 is turned on and remains
on after the input is turned off.
When input is turned on again, the designated output,
internal relay, or shift register bit is turned off.
The ALT instruction must be used with a SOTU or SOTD
instruction, otherwise the designated output, internal
relay, or shift register bit repeats to turn on and off ineach scan.

YES

Name and Diagram

ALT

SOTU

D1
*****

When input is on, the data type of the 16- or 32-bit data
designated by S1 is converted and stored to thedestination designated by device D1.
Data types can be designated for the source anddestination, separately.
Data Type
SourceDestination

Convert Data Type
CVDT

CVDT

S1 (R) D1 (R) REP

*TO*

*****

*****

**

Data Divide
DTDV

DTDV(*) S1

D1***** *****

Data Combine
DTCB

DTCB(*) S1

D1***** *****

Data Swap
SWAP

SWAP(*)

S1 (R) D1 (R) REP***** ***** **Weekly Timer
WEEK

WEEK

S1

S2

S3

D1

***** ***** ***** *****

Yearly Timer
YEAR

YEAR

S1

S2

S3

D1

***** ***** ***** *****

12-24

W, I
S1
D1

D, L, F
S1·S1+1
D1·D1+1
YES

When the same data type is designated for both sourceand destination, the CVDT instruction has the samefunction as the MOV instruction.
Unless F (float) data type is selected for both source anddestination, only the integral number is moved, omitting
the fraction.
When the source data exceeds the range of destination
data type, the destination stores a value closest to thesource data within the destination data type.
S1 → D1
When input is on, the 16-bit binary data designated by S1
is divided into upper and lower bytes. The upper byte
data is stored to the destination designated by device D1.
The lower byte data is stored to the device next to D1.
S1 → D1, D1+1

YES

When input is on, the lower-byte data is read out from 2
consecutive sources starting with device designated by
S1 and combined to make 16-bit data. The lower byte
data from the first source device is moved to the upperbyte of the destination designated by device D1, and thelower byte data from the next source device is moved to
the lower byte of the destination.
S1, S1+1 → D1

YES

When input is on, upper and lower byte- or word-data ofa word- or double-word-data designated by S1 areexchanged, and the result is stored to destination
designated by D1.
S1 → D1

YES

Specified day of the week and ON time and OFF time arecompared with the current day/time, and the result is
outputNO

Specified date and current date are compared and result
is output

NO

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Ladder Program

SymbolName and Diagram

Label
LABEL

LABEL
***

Label Jump
LJMP

LJMP

S1
*****

Label Call
LCAL

LCAL

S1
*****

LRET

Decrement Jump Non-zero
DJNZ

DJNZ

S1

S2

***** *****

Interrupt
Program
Execution

This is the label number, from 0 to 127 (all-in-one typeCPU) or 0 to 255 (slim type CPU), used at the program
address where the execution of program instructions
begins for a program branch.
An END instruction may be used to separate a tagged
portion of the program from the main program. In thisway, scan time is minimized by not executing the
program branch unless input conditions are satisfied.
Note: The same label number cannot be used morethan once.

YES

When input is on, jump to the address with label 0
through 127 (all-in-one type CPU) or 0 to 255 (slim typeCPU) designated by S1.
When input is off, no jump takes place, and program
execution proceeds with the next instruction.
The LJMP instruction is used as an “either/or” choice
between two portions of a program. Program execution
does not return to the instruction following the LJMP
instruction, after the program branch.

YES

When input is on, the address with label 0 through 127(all-in-one type CPU) or 0 to 255 (slim type CPU)
designated by S1 is called. When input is off, no calltakes place, and program execution proceeds with thenext instruction.
The LCAL instruction calls a subroutine, and returns to
the main program after the branch is executed. A LRET
instruction (see below) must be placed at the end of aprogram branch which is called, so that normal program
execution resumes by returning to the instruction
following the LCAL instruction.
Note: The END instruction must be used to separate themain program from any subroutines called by the LCAL
instruction.
A maximum of four LCAL instructions can be nested.
When more than four LCAL instructions are nested, aladder program execution error will result, turning on
special internal relay M8004.

YES

This instruction is placed at the end of a subroutine
called by the LCAL instruction. When the subroutine iscompleted, normal program execution resumes by
returning to the instruction following the LCAL
instruction.
The LRET must be placed at the end of the subroutine
starting with a LABEL instruction. When the LRET isprogrammed at other places, a ladder program execution
error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004.

YES

When input is on, the value stored in the data register
designated by S1 is decremented by one and is checked.
If the resultant value is not 0, program execution jumps
to address with label 0 through 127 (all-in-one CPU) or
255 (slim CPU) designated by S2. If the decrement
results in 0, no jump takes place, and program execution
proceeds with the next instruction.

YES

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

12

12-25

Control Function

Label Return
LRET

Function2 Ladder Program

SymbolName and Diagram

I/O Refresh
IOREF

IOREF

S1
*****

High-speed Counter Refresh
HSCRF

HSCRF
*

Disable Interrupt
DI

DI

S1
**

Enable Interrupt
EI

EI

S1
**

XY Format Set
XYFS

XYFS(*) S1*

Y0 ..... Xn

X0Yn***** ***** ***** *****

Convert X to Y
CVXTY

CVXTY(*)

S1

S2

D1

***** ***** ****

Convert Y to X
CVYTX

CVYTX(*)

S1

S2

D1

***** ***** ****

Average
AVRG

AVRG(*)

S1

S2

S3

D1

D2

***** ***** ***** ***** *****

1-sec Dual Timer
DTML

DTML

S1

S2

D1

D2

***** ***** ***** *****

100-msec Dual Timer
DTIM

DTIM

S1

S2

D1

D2

***** ***** ***** *****

10-msec Dual Timer
DTMH

DTMH

S1

S2

D1

D2

***** ***** ***** *****

12-26

FunctionInterrupt
Program
Execution

When input is on, 1-bit I/O data designated by source
device S1 is refreshed immediately regardless of the scantime.
When I (input) is used as S1, the actual input status isimmediately read into an internal relay starting with
M300 allocated to each input available on the CPU
module.
When Q (output) is used as S1, the output data in the
RAM is immediately written to the actual output available
on the CPU module.
Refresh instructions are useful when a real-time
response is required in a user program which has a longscan time. The refresh instruction is most effective whenusing the refresh instruction at a ladder step immediately
before using the data.
The IOREF instruction can be used with an interrupt
input or timer interrupt to refresh data.

YES

When input is on, the HSCRF instruction refreshes thehigh-speed counter current values in special dataregisters in real time.
The current values of four high-speed counters HSC1
through HSC4 are usually updated in every scan. The
HSCRF can be used in any place in the ladder diagram
where you want to read the updated high-speed countercurrent value.

YES

When input is on, interrupt inputs and timer interrupt
designated by source device S1 are disabled.

NO

When input is on, interrupt inputs and timer interrupt
designated by source device S1 are enabled.

NO

When input is on, the format for XY conversion is set.
The XY coordinates define the linear relationshipbetween X and Y.

NOWhen input is on, the X value designated by device S2 isconverted into corresponding Y value according to thelinear relationship defined in the XYFS instruction. The
conversion result is set to the device designated by D1.

NO

When input is on, the Y value designated by device S2 isconverted into corresponding X value according to thelinear relationship defined in the XYFS instruction. The
conversion result is set to the device designated by D1.

NO

When input is on, sampling data designated by device S1
is processed according to sampling conditions designatedby devices S2 and S3.
When sampling is complete, average, maximum, andminimum values are stored to 3 consecutive devices
starting with device designated by D1, then sampling
completion output designated by device D2 is turned on.

NO

While input is on, destination device D1 repeats to turnon and off for a duration designated by devices S1 andS2, respectively.
The time range is 0 through 65535 sec.

NO

While input is on, destination device D1 repeats to turnon and off for a duration designated by devices S1 andS2, respectively.
The time range is 0 through 6553.5 sec.

NO

While input is on, destination device D1 repeats to turnon and off for a duration designated by devices S1 andS2, respectively.
The time range is 0 through 655.35 sec.

NO

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Ladder Program

SymbolName and Diagram
1-msec Dual Timer

DTMS

DTMS

S1

S2

D1

D2

***** ***** ***** *****

Teaching Timer
TTIM

TTIM

D1
*****

Degree to RadianRAD

RAD(F)

S1

D1***** *****

Radian to Degree
DEG

DEG(F)

S1

D1***** *****

Sine
SIN

SIN(F)

S1

D1***** *****

CosineCOS

COS(F)

S1

D1***** *****

Tangent
TAN

TAN(F)

S1

D1***** *****Arc Sine
ASIN(F)

S1

D1***** *****Arc Cosine
ACOS

ACOS(F) S1

D1***** *****

Arc Tangent
ATAN

ATAN(F) S1

D1***** *****Natural Logarithm
LOGE

LOGE(F)

S1

D1***** *****

Common Logarithm
LOG10

LOG10(F) S1

D1***** *****

Interrupt
Program
Execution

While input is on, destination device D1 repeats to turnon and off for a duration designated by devices S1 andS2, respectively.
The time range is 0 through 65.535 sec.

NO

While input is on, the ON duration is measured in units of
100 ms and the measured value is stored to a dataregister designated by destination device D1.
The measured time range is 0 through 6553.5 sec.

NO

When input is on, the degree value designated by source
device S1 is converted into a radian value and stored tothe destination designated by device D1.
S1·S1+1° × π/180 → D1·D1+1 rad

YES

When input is on, the radian value designated by source
device S1 is converted into a degree value and stored tothe destination designated by device D1.
S1·S1+1 rad × 180/ π → D1·D1+1°

YES

When input is on, the sine of the radian value designatedby source device S1 is stored to the destination
designated by device D1.
sin S1·S1+1 → D1·D1+1

YES

When input is on, the cosine of the radian value
designated by source device S1 is stored to thedestination designated by device D1.
cos S1·S1+1 → D1·D1+1

YES

When input is on, the tangent of the radian value
designated by source device S1 is stored to thedestination designated by device D1.
tan S1·S1+1 → D1·D1+1

YES

When input is on, the arc sine of the value designated bysource device S1 is stored in radians to the destination
designated by device D1.
asin S1·S1+1 → D1·D1+1 rad
If the S1·S1+1 value is not within this range, an
indefinite value is stored to D1·D1+1.
The S1·S1+1 value must be within the following range:-1.0 ≤ S1·S1+1 ≤ -1.0
If the S1·S1+1 value is not within this range, an
indefinite value is stored to D1·D1+1.

YES

When input is on, the arc cosine of the value designatedby source device S1 is stored in radians to thedestination designated by device D1.
acos S1·S1+1 → D1·D1+1 rad
If the S1·S1+1 value is not within this range, an
indefinite value is stored to D1·D1+1.
The S1·S1+1 value must be within the following range:-1.0 ≤ S1·S1+1 ≤ -1.0
If the S1·S1+1 value is not within this range, an
indefinite value is stored to D1·D1+1.

YES

When input is on, the arc tangent of the value
designated by source device S1 is stored in radians to
the destination designated by device D1.
atan S1·S1+1 → D1·D1+1 rad

YES

When input is on, the natural logarithm of the binary
data designated by source device S1 is stored to thedestination designated by device D1.
loge S1·S1+1 → D1·D1+1

YES

When input is on, the common logarithm of the binary
data designated by source device S1 is stored to thedestination designated by device D1.
log10 S1·S1+1 → D1·D1+1

YES

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

12

12-27

Control Function

ASIN

Function2 Ladder Program

SymbolName and Diagram

Function

Exponent
EXP

EXP(F)

S1

D1***** *****

Power
POW

POW(F)

S1

S2

D1***** ***** ****FIFO Format
FIFOF

FIFOF(W)

S1

S2

*

**** ***** **** ****

D1

D2

First-In Execute
FIEX

FIEX(W)

S1

*

*****

FOEX(W)

D1

*

*****

First-Out Execute
FOEX

N Data Search
NDSRC

NDSRC(W) S1

S2

S3

D1

***** ***** ***** *****

Time Addition
TADD

TADD

S1

S2

D1

Mode

***

***

*****

Time Subtraction
TSUB

TSUB

S1

S2

D1

Mode

***

***

*****

Hour
HOUR

HOUR

S1

D1

D2

D3

***** ***** ***** *****

HMS to Sec
HTOS

HTOS

S1

D1

***** *****

Sec to HMS
STOH

STOH

S1

D1

***** *****

Interrupt
Program
Execution

When input is on, e is raised to the power S1·S1+1
designated by source device S1 and is stored to thedestination designated by device D1.
e (base of natural logarithm) = 2.7182818
eS1·S1+1 → D1·D1+1

YES

When input is on, binary data designated by source
device S1 is raised to the power S2·S2+1 designated bysource device S2 and the operation result is stored to thedestination designated by device D1.
S1·S1+1S2·S2+1 → D1·D1+1

YES

When input is on, FIFOF instruction initializes an FIFO
data file. Each data file has unique number 0 through 9.
A maximum of 10 data files can be used in a user
program.

NO

When input is on, the data stored in data registers
starting with the device designated by S1 is stored to thecorresponding FIFO data file.

YES

When input is on, the data is retrieved from thecorresponding FIFO data file and stored to the dataregisters starting with the device designated by D1.

YESWhen input is on, a value specified by device S1 issought. Data registers are searched, starting with thedata register designated by device S2. Device S3
specifies the quantity of 1-word or 2-word blocks of dataregisters to search, depending on the data type.
The offset of the data register where a match first occurredis stored in data register designated by device D1. The
quantity of times the value was matched is stored in thenext data register. When the search results in no match,
65535 is stored in device D1 and 0 is stored in device D+1.

NO

When input is on, time data designated by source device
S2 are added to date/time data designated by source
device S1, depending on the selected mode. The result isstored to destination device D1 and carry (M8003).
S1 + S2 → D1, CY

YESWhen input is on, time data designated by source device S2
are subtracted from date/time data designated by source
device S1, depending on the selected mode. The result isstored to destination device D1 and borrow (M8003).
S1 – S2 → D1, CY

YESWhile input is on, the ON duration is measured. The
measured time value (hour, minute, and second) is stored
to 3 consecutive data registers designated by destination
device D1 and compared with the preset value designatedby source device S1. When the D1 value reaches the S1value, an output or internal relay designated by destination
device D2 is turned on. Two data registers starting withdestination device D3 are reserved for system work area.
S1 ↔ D1 → D2

NO

When input is on, time data in hours, minutes, andseconds designated by source device S1 is converted into
seconds. The result is stored to destination device D1.
Hours, minutes, seconds → Seconds

YES

When input is on, time data in seconds designated bysource device S1 is converted into hours, minutes, andseconds. The result is stored to destination device D1.
Seconds → Hours, minutes, seconds

YES

Calls and executes a script from the ladder program.

YES

Performs PID control.

NO

Script
SCRPT

SCRPT

S1

D1

***** *****

PID
PID

PID

S1

S2

S3

S4

＊＊＊＊＊ ＊＊＊＊＊ ＊＊＊＊＊ ＊＊＊＊＊

12-28

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Ladder Program● Available Data
The available data types for each command word are as follows.
In WindLDR data types are displayed as follows: BIN16(+) as W (word), BIN16(+/-) as I (integer),
BIN32(+) as D (double word), BIN32(+/-) as L (long), and float32 as F (float).

Data Type
Group
NOP

Move

BinaryArithmetic

BooleanComputation

I

D

L

F

Word

Integer

Double word

Long

Float

NOP

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

MOV

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

MOVN

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

IMOV

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

IMOVN

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

IBMV(N)

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

BMOV

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NSET

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

NRS

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

XCHG

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

TCCST

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

CMP=

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

CMP<>

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

CMP<

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

CMP>

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

CMP<=

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

CMP>=

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

ICMP>=

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

LC=

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

LC<>

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

LC<

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

LC>

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

LC<=

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

LC>=

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

ADD

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

SUB

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

MUL

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

DIV

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

INC

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

DEC

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

ROOT

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

SUM(ADD)

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

SUM(XOR)

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

ANDW

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

ORW

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

XORW

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

12-29

12
Control Function

Data
ComparisonW2 Ladder Program

Data Type
Group

Shift and Rotate

Data Conversion

Week
Programmer

Program
Branching

I/O Refresh
Enable/Disable
Interrupt
Coordinate
Conversion
Average

Dual / Teaching
Timer

12-30

W

I

D

L

F

Word

Integer

Double word

Long

Float

SFTL

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

SFTR

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

BCDLS

NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

WSFT

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

ROTL

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

ROTR

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

HTOB

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

BTOH

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

HTOA

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

ATOH

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

BTOA

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

ATOB

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

ENCO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

DECO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

BCNT

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

ALT

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

CVDT

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

DTDV

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

DTCB

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

SWAP

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

WEEK

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YEAR

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

LABEL

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

LJMP

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

LCAL

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

LRET

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

DJNZ

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

IOREF

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

HSCRF

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

DI

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

EI

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

XYFS

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

CVXTY

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

CVYTX

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

AVRG

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

DTML

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

DTIM

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

DTMH

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

DTMS

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

TTIM

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Ladder Program

Data Type
Group
RAD

Trigonometric
Function

W

I

D

L

F

Word

Integer

Double word

Long

Float

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

DEG

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

SIN

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

COS

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

TAN

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

ASIN

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

ACOS

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

ATAN

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

LOGE

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

EXP

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

POW

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

FIFOF

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

FIEX

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

FOEX

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NDSRC

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

TADD

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

TSUB

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

HOUR

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

HTOS

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

STOH

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Script

SCRPT

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

PID

PID

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

File Data
Processing

Clock

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

12-31

12
Control Function

LOG10

Logarithm /Power

3 FBD Program3

FBD Program

3.1 Basic Operation for WindLDRThis section describes basic procedures for operating WindLDR.
● Start WindLDR

1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click(control function).

WindLDR starts.

2 If the ladder program editing screen is displayed, click FT1A Touch on the status bar, and then click PLC Selection
on the displayed drop-down list.
The PLC Selection dialog box is displayed.

The PLC Selection dialog box can also be displayed by clicking PLC Type in the PLC group on the
Configuration tab.

3 Select FBD, and then click OK.

To change the default programming language, select the programming language, and then click Use as
Default.
Next, create a FBD program.

12-32

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 FBD Program● Creating FBD ProgramThis section describes the procedure for creating a FBD program in WindLDR.
For details about FB, refer to the "SmartAXIS FBD Programming Manual".

Create a sample program using WindLDR that performs the following operation:• When input I0 and input I1 are both on, output Q0 turns on.
• When either input I1 or input I2 is on, output Q1 repeatedly turns on and off in a one second cycle.
Circuit block

Input I0

Input I1

Input I2

Q0

ON

ON

–

Turn output Q0 on

–

OFF

ON

–

ON

OFF

Repeatedly turn output Q2 on and off in a one
second cycle

Q1

ActionThe output FB and all the FBs connected on the left side of that output FB's input connectors are called thecircuit block. The output value of the output FB is the execution result for a single circuit block.

Insert input I0

1 On the WindLDR Home tab, in the Function Block group, click Terminal, and then click I (Digital Input).

12
Control Function

2 Move the mouse pointer to the FBD editor, and then click the mouse button.
Input I0 is inserted at the position of the mouse pointer.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

12-33

3 FBD Program

Insert the AND (logical AND) FB

1 On the WindLDR Home tab, in the Function Block group, click Basic, and then click AND (Logical AND).

2 Move the mouse pointer to the FBD editor, and then click the mouse button.
AND B0 is inserted at the position of the mouse pointer.

Connect input I0 and AND B0 with a connection line

1 On the WindLDR Home tab, in the Line group, click Draw Line.

2 Move the mouse pointer to the input I0 output connector.

12-34

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 FBD Program

3 Click the mouse button and drag the line to the AND B0 input 1 connector.

4 Release the mouse button.

The input I0 output connector and the AND B0 input 1 connector are connected.

Insert output Q0 and connect it to the AND B0 output

1 On the WindLDR Home tab, in the Function Block group, click Terminal, and then click Q (Digital Output).

12
Control Function

2 Move the mouse pointer to the FBD editor, and then click the mouse button.
Output Q0 is inserted at the position of the mouse pointer.

3 Connect the AND B0 output connector and the output Q0 input connector with a connection line.

Connect them in the same manner as “Connect input I0 and AND B0 with a connection line” on page 12-34.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

12-35

3 FBD Program

Insert input I1 and connect it to AND B0 input 2
Insert input I1 in the same manner as “Insert input I0” on page 12-33 and connect it with a connection line in thesame manner as “Connect input I0 and AND B0 with a connection line” on page 12-34.

Insert input I2 and XOR B1 and connect input I1 and input I2 to XOR B1 input 1 and input 2

The FB output connectors can be connected to multiple FB input connectors. Multiple FB output connectors
cannot be connected to a single FB input connector.

12-36

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 FBD Program

Insert special internal relay M8121, AND B2, and output Q1 and connect them with connection lines
M8121 is a special internal relay that repeatedly turns on and off in a one second cycle. For details on thespecial internal relay, refer to Chapter 27 “Special Internal Relay (M)” on page 27-5.

This completes the FBD program.
Conversion of Programs

1 Confirm that the program has been correctly created.

On the WindLDR Home tab, in the Program group, click Convert.
If the FBs are correctly connected, the conversion will be successful. If errors are found, a list of errors is displayed in
the information window. Fix those errors in order.

12
Control Function

Information window

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

12-37

3 FBD Program

Monitor Operation
You can monitor the operation of the downloaded program with WindLDR's monitor function.

1 After the program is successfully downloaded, on the WindLDR Online tab, in the Monitor group, click Monitor.
The Touch state is displayed on the WindLDR screen.

2 Monitor the following operations.
• When you turn on both input I0 and input I1, output Q0 turns on.
• When you turn on either input I1 or input I2, output Q1 repeatedly turns on and off in a one second cycle.
This concludes the monitor operation.
• You can monitor the state of the input connectors and output connectors for each FB. When input
connectors, output connectors, and connection lines are red, they are on. Blue is off.
• For details on the state of unconnected input connectors in the FBs, refer to the chapters for the FBs in
the "SmartAXIS FBD Programming Manual".

12-38

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 FBD Program● Exit WindLDR
Clickin WindLDR, and then click Exit WindLDR.

WindLDR closes.
Application button• If project data is saved during editing in WindO/I-NV3, control function are also saved.
• If you clickin WindLDR and then click Close, or if you close the project file while editing in

WindO/I-NV3, you will exit WindLDR.

12Control Function

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

12-39

3 FBD Program

3.2 FB Reference
In the FBD program, there are FBs such as logical operation FBs that perform logical operations, timer FB to perform
processing using timer devices and counter FB to perform processing using counter devices. If the output of a FB isinverted, the execution results of the FB are inverted and output. For FBs that support inverted output, refer to thefollowing table.
Programming and operating the user program of the SmartAXIS requires special knowledge.
To make effective use of the SmartAXIS, develop a thorough understanding of the contents of this manualand the FBD programming.

● Input FB
SymbolName and Diagram

Function

OutputInversion

Digital Input
I

I

OUT

Inputs ON/OFF information from an external
device to the Touch.

NO

Special internal relays can be used as bit inputs
for FBs. Special function is allocated to eachspecial internal relay.

NO

Outputs ON/OFF state of a shift register device.

NO•For the analog inputs (A10, AI1) in the Touch,the analog input values can be linearly
converted with the AI FB parameter settings
within the range of -32,768 to 32,767.
•For the analog input cartridge (AI2 to AI5), theanalog input values can be linearly convertedwith the function area settings. For how to
configure the function area settings, refer to
Chapter 3 “4.15 Analog Cartridge” on page 3-88.

NO

Function

OutputInversion

Outputs ON/OFF information from the Touch toan external.

NO

A bit unit FB used internally in the Touch.

NO

Special Internal Relay
SM

SM

OUT

Shift Register
R

R

OUT

Analog Input
AI

AOUT

AI

● Output FB
SymbolName and Diagram
Digital Output

Q

IN

Q

OUT

Internal Relay
M

12-40

IN

M

OUT

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 FBD Program● Logical Operation FB
SymbolFunction

OutputInversion

OUT

Implements logical AND for a maximum of four
input signals (ON/OFF) and outputs the result.

NO

＆

OUT

Implements negative logical AND for a maximumof four input signals (ON/OFF) and outputs theresult.

NO

≥1

OUT

Implements logical OR for a maximum of four
input signals (ON/OFF) and outputs the result.

NO

OUT

Implements negative logical OR for a maximum offour input signals (ON/OFF) and outputs theresult.

NO

OUT

Implements exclusive logical OR for a maximumof two input signals (ON/OFF) and outputs theresult.

NO

Implements negative exclusive logical OR for a
maximum of two input signals (ON/OFF) andoutputs the result.

NO

Name and Diagram
Logical AND
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4

AND

＆

Negative Logical AND
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4

NAND

Logical OR
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4

OR

Negative Logical OR
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4

NOR

≥1

Exclusive Logical OR
IN1
IN2

XOR

=1

Negative Exclusive Logical OR
IN1
IN2

XNOR

=1

OUT

12

NOT

IN

1

OUT

Outputs the result of negating the input signal(ON/OFF).

NO

IN

SOTU

OUT

Turns on the output for one scan when the input
signal turns from off to on.

NO

SOTD

OUT

Turns on the output for one scan when the input
signal turns from on to off.

NO

TRUTH

OUT

A truth table for the output can be configured
corresponding to the 16 combination of the four
input signals, and TRUTH FB outputs the result
according to the table.

YES

Shot Up
SOTU

Shot Down
SOTD

IN

Truth Table
TRUTH

IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

12-41

Control Function

Negation

3 FBD Program● Timer FB
SymbolFunction

OutputInversion

After the execution input turns on, the output isturned on when the on-delay time elapses. The
current value is incremented from zero to thepreset value.

NO

OUT

After the execution input turns on, the output isturned on when the on-delay time elapses. The
current value is decremented from the preset
value to zero.

NO

OUT

When the execution input turns on, the output isturned on. After the execution input turns off, theoutput is turned off when the off-delay time
elapses. The current value is incremented fromzero to the preset value.

NO

OUT

When the execution input turns on, the output isturned on. After the execution input turns off, theoutput is turned off when the off-delay time
elapses. The current value is decremented fromthe preset values to zero.

NO

OUT

After the execution input turns on, the output isturned on when the on-delay time elapses. Afterthe execution input turns off, the output is turned
off when the off-delay time elapses.

NO

SPULS
100 msOUT

After the execution input turns on, the output isturned on for the configured time period.

NO

DTIM
100 msOUT

The output is turned on and off according to theconfigured ON and OFF time.

NO

OUT

The output is turned on for the length of random
time within the configured range of time.

NO

Name and Diagram
On-delay Count Up Timer

TIMU

TRG

TIMU
100 ｍsOUT

On-delay Count Down Timer
TIMD

TRG

TIMD
100 ms

Off-delay Count Up Timer
TIMOU

TRG
RST

TIMOU
100 ms

Off-delay Count Down Timer
TIMOD

TRG
RST

TIMOD
100 msOn/off-delay Timer
TIMCU

TRG
RST

TIMCU
100 msSingle Shot Pulse
SPULS

TRG
RST

Dual Timer
DTIM

EN

Random Pulse Output
RPULS

12-42

EN

RPULS
100 msSmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 FBD Program● Counter FB
SymbolFunction

OutputInversion

When the clock input is turned on, the current
value is incremented by one. The output is turnedon when the current value reaches the preset
value.

NO

When the clock input is turned on, the current
value is incremented or decremented by one
according to the up/down selection input. The
current value is compared with ON/OFF
thresholds. The output is turned on or off
according to the comparison result.

NO

Accumulates the ON duration of the execution
input in hours, minutes, and seconds. The output
is turned on when the accumulated time reaches
the configured time.

NO

Function

OutputInversion

Name and Diagram
Adding Counter
CNT

RST
UP

CNT

OUT

Up/Down Selection Reversible Counter
CUD

PRST
CLK
U/D

CUD

OUT

Hour Meter
EN
RST

HOUR

HOUR

OUT

● Shift Register FB
SymbolName and Diagram
Shift Register
SFR

TRG
RST
DI
DIR

SFR

OUT

When the execution input turns on, the shift
registers are shifted to the specified shift
direction.

YES● Data Comparison FB
SymbolName and Diagram

Function

Data Comparison
EN
DAT1
DAT2

CMP

CMP

OUT

Two comparison values are compared and theoutput is turned on or off according to thecomparison result.

YES

STTG

OUT

The comparison value and the ON/OFF thresholds
are compared and the output is turned on or off
according to the comparison result.

YES

OUT

The comparison value and the upper/lower limits
are compared and the output is turned on or off
according to the comparison result.

YES

Function

OutputInversion

Schmitt Trigger
EN
DATA
ON
OFF

STTG

Range Comparison
EN
DATA
UL
LL

RCMP

RCMP

● Data Conversion FB
SymbolName and Diagram
Alternate Output

ALT

TRG
SET
RST

ALT

OUT

Sets/resets the output.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

YES

12-43

12
Control Function

OutputInversion

3 FBD Program● Week Programmer FB
SymbolName and Diagram

Function

OutputInversion

Weekly Timer
WEEK

OUT

Compares the specified day of the week, ON time,and OFF time with the current time and outputs
the result.

NO

YEAR

OUT

Compares the specified date with the current dateand outputs the result.

NO

Name and Diagram

Function

OutputInversion

SCRPT

Enables you to program complicated processing
with the script language that supports conditional
branching, logical operations, arithmetic
operations, and functions.

NO

Function

OutputInversion

EN
INI

WEEK

Yearly Timer
EN
INI

YEAR

● Script FB
SymbolScript
SCRPT

EN

OUT

● Special FB
SymbolName and Diagram
High-speed Counter

HSC

GT
RST
CLR

HSC

OUT

Operates the high-speed counter configured in
the function area settings. Turns on/off the highspeed counter gate input/clear input.

YES

RSFF

OUT

When the set input turns on, the output turns on
and is kept on. When the reset input turns on, theoutput turns off.

YES

RS Flip-flop
RSFF

12-44

SET
RST

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 FBD Program● Available Data
The available data types for each FB are as follows.
In WindLDR data types are displayed as follows: BIN16(+) as W (word), BIN16(+/-) as I (integer),
BIN32(+) as D (double word), BIN32(+/-) as L (long), and float32 as F (float).
Data type

FB

W

I

D

L

F

SymbolWord

Integer

Double
word

Long

Float

Digital Input

I

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Special Internal Relay

SM

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Shift Register

R

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Group

Input

OutputLogical Operation

Name

*1

*1

Analog Input

AI

YES

YES

Digital Output

Q

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Internal Relay

M

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Logical AND

AND

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Negative Logical AND

NAND

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Logical OR

OR

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Negative Logical OR

NOR

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Exclusive Logical OR

XOR

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Negative Exclusive Logical OR

XNOR

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Negation

NOT

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

SOTU

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Shot Down

SOTD

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Truth Table

TRUTH

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

On-delay Count Up Timer

TIMU

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

On-delay Count Down Timer

TIMD

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

Off-delay Count Up Timer

TIMOU

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

Off-delay Count Down Timer

TIMOD

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

On/off-delay Timer

TIMCU

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

Single Shot Pulse

SPULS

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

Dual Timer

DTIM

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

Random Pulse Output

RPULS

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

Adding Counter

CNT

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

Up/Down Selection Reversible
Counter

CUD

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

Hour Meter

HOUR

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

Shift Register

SFR

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Data Comparison

CMP

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

Data Comparison

Schmitt Trigger

STTG

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

Range Comparison

RCMP

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

Data Conversion

Alternate Output

ALT

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Weekly Timer

WEEK

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Yearly Timer

YEAR

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Timer

Counter

Shift Register

Week Programmer
ScriptSpecialScript

SCRPT

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

High-speed Counter

HSC

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

RS Flip-flop

RSFF

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

*1 Analog inputs (AI0, AI1) do not support the word type. When using the analog input cartridge (AI2 to AI5), configure the AI
FB data type in the function area settings. For how to configure the function area settings, refer to Chapter 3 “4.15 Analog
Cartridge” on page 3-88.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

12-45

12
Control Function

Shot Up

4 Remote I/O

4

Remote I/O

4.1 Overview
When you want to increase the number of I/Os to be connected to a single Touch, you can achieve this using the
remote I/O function.
In addition to the built-in I/Os of the Touch, you can expand the number of I/Os up to a maximum of 90 inputs and
54 outputs.
Configure the Touch to which inputs and outputs need to be expanded as the remote I/O master, and configure thePro/Lite to be the remote inputs and outputs as the remote I/O slaves.
The remote I/O master is configured on connections 1 through 3 in the Function Area Settings dialog box.
The Touch configured as a remote I/O master can connect to one remote I/O slave per one connection. When theconnections 1 through 3 are all used for remote I/O, the remote I/O master can connect to a maximum of three
remote I/O slaves.
For the remote I/O slave function and configuration procedure, refer to the "SmartAXIS Pro/Lite User's Manual".
Touch
Remote I/O master

Connection 1

Connection 3
Ethernet
Connection 2

Pro/Lite
Remote I/O slave

Pro/Lite
Remote I/O slave

Pro/Lite
Remote I/O slave• If a communication timeout occurs at a remote I/O slave, all outputs of the remote I/O slave are turned
off.
Depending on the details of the control on the remote I/O slave side, this may lead to a hazardous
situation, so set the master receive timeout to an ample length. If the master receive timeout setting is
made long, the time that the remote I/O slave outputs remain on also becomes long when communicationis actually lost. Set the master receive timeout to a value suited to each application.
• The SmartAXIS configured as remote I/O master/slave communicates over Ethernet. When other
SmartAXIS or other network devices are connected on the same LAN, the I/O refresh timing for the
remote I/O slaves is affected by those devices.

12-46

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Remote I/O

4.2 Remote I/O Master
The Touch can be used as a remote I/O master by configuring the Touch as a remote I/O master in WindLDR. The
settings can be configured in the Function Area Settings dialog box of WindLDR.
The digital input information from the remote I/O slaves connected with connection 1 through 3 is input to I40 to I75,
I80 to I115, and I120 to I155. The analog input information from the remote I/O slaves is stored to D8149 to D8156,
D8158 to D8165, and D8167 to D8174.
The output information for Q40 to Q61, Q80 to Q101, and Q120 to Q141 on the remote I/O master is output from theremote I/O slaves connected with connection 1 through 3. For details on data communication between the remote I/
O master and the remote I/O slaves, refer to "Remote I/O Communication Memory Refresh Image" on page 12-48.
● Specifications
Item

Connection 1

Digital inputs

I40 to I75

Digital outputs

Q40 to Q61

Analog inputs

D8149 (=AI10) to D8156 (=AI17)

Remote I/O slave 1 communication error status

D8148

Remote I/O slave 1 communication error

M8005

Remote hostConnection 2000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

Port number

0 to 65535
100 ms to 25,500 ms (100 ms increments)

Digital inputs

I80 to I115

Digital outputs

Q80 to Q101

Analog inputs

D8158 (=AI20) to D8165 (=AI27)

Remote I/O slave 2 communication error status

D8157

Remote I/O slave 2 communication error

M8006
000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

Port number

0 to 65535

12

100 ms to 25,500 ms (100 ms increments)

Digital inputs

I120 to I155

Digital outputs

Q120 to Q141

Analog inputs

D8167 (=AI30) to D8174 (=AI37)

Remote I/O slave 3 communication error status

D8166

Remote I/O slave 3 communication error

M8007

IP address

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

Port number

0 to 65535

Timeout

100 ms to 25,500 ms (100 ms increments)

Communication processing

Scan asynchronous

Data update

Each scan end

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

12-47

Control Function

IP address

Timeout

Remote hostRefresh period

IP address

Timeout

Remote hostConnection 3

Description

4 Remote I/O● Remote I/O Communication Memory Refresh Image
Data communication between the remote I/O master and the remote I/O slaves is conducted as shown in the
diagram below.
Remote I/O
master
I0 to I35
Q0 to Q21
Analog inputs
D8040 to D8047
Connection 1

Remote I/Oslave 1

I40 to I75

I0 to I35

Q40 to Q61

Q0 to Q21

Analog inputs

Analog inputs

D8149 to D8156

D8040 to D8047
Remote I/O

Connection 2

Slave 2

I80 to I115
Q80 to Q101
Analog inputs

Q0 to Q21

I0 to I35
Analog inputs

D8158 to D8165

D8040 to D8047
Remote I/O

Connection 3

Slave 3

I120 to I155

I0 to I35

Q120 to Q141

Q0 to Q21

Analog inputs

Analog inputs

D8167 to D8174

D8040 to D8047● Connection Status with Remote I/O Slaves
The connections status of each remote I/O slave can be confirmed by referring to the special internal relays andspecial data registers of the SmartAXIS configured as the remote I/O master.
Item
Connection status

IP address of theconnected slave

Port number of theconnected slave

12-48

Connection port

DeviceConnection 1

M8110

Connection 2

M8111

Connection 3

M8112

Connection 1

D8110 to D8113

Connection 2

D8114 to D8117

Connection 3

D8118 to D8121

Connection 1

D8130

Connection 2

D8131

Connection 3

D8132

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

Description
Indicates the connection status with thecorresponding slave.
OFF: Not connected, ON: Connected

Stores the IP address of the slave.

Stores the connected port number of theslave.

4 Remote I/O● Communication Error Information with the Remote I/O Slaves
Communication errors with the remote I/O slaves can be confirmed by referring to M8005 to M8007 (remote I/Oslave communication error). The details of the communication error can be confirmed by referring to D8148, D8157,
and D8166 (remote I/O slave communication error status).
Item

DeviceRemote I/O slave 1 communication error

M8005

Remote I/O slave 2 communication error

M8006

Remote I/O slave 3 communication error

M8007

Remote I/O slave 1 communication error status

D8148

Remote I/O slave 2 communication error status

D8157

Remote I/O slave 3 communication error status

D8166

Description
ON: Communication error occurs (ON while the error is
occurring)
OFF: Communicating normally
0: Normal
1: Communication timeout error
2: Connection disconnected
10: Slave output error*1*1 The remote I/O master can communicate with the remote I/O slave, but this state indicates a system error has occurred on
the remote I/O slave. Check the status of the remote I/O slave.

● Remote I/O Communication Timing Chart
Establish connection
Establish connection wait time
(fixed by system: 1.5 s)

1.

END processing

2.

3.

4.

Remote I/O masterOne scanRemote I/O slave 1
communication error(M8005)

ON

D8148 = 2
D8148 = 0

OFF

Remote I/O slave 1

Communication timeout
Communication
timeout time

One scan1.

END processing

2.

3.

Remote I/O master

Remote I/O slave 2
communication error(M8006)

D8157 = 1ONOFF

D8157 = 0D8157 = 0

Remote I/O slave 2

1. While communicating with the remote I/O slave, the remote slave communication error (M8005 to M8007) is off
and the remote slave communication error status (D8148, D8157, D8166) is "0" (normal).
2. If the response for a request issued to remote I/O slave 2 takes longer than the communication timeout, theremote I/O slave 2 communication error (M8006) turns on and the remote I/O slave 2 communication error status(D8157) becomes "1" (communication timeout error).
3. When a response from remote I/O slave 2 is returned, the remote I/O slave 2 communication error (M8006) turns
off, and the remote I/O slave 2 communication error status (D8157) becomes "0" (normal).
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

12-49

12
Control Function

The remote I/O master issues a communication request to the remote I/O slave in the END processing.
1. The remote I/O master's initial state is that the remote slave communication error (M8005 to M8007) is on and theremote slave communication error status (D8148, D8157, D8166) is "2" (connection disconnected).
2. The remote I/O master attempts to establish a connection with remote I/O slave 1, but the connection cannot beestablished. At the event above, the remote I/O slave 1 communication error (M8005) is kept on, and the remote
I/O slave 1 communication status (D8148) is kept as "2" (connection disconnected).
3. When the connection is successfully established afterward, the remote I/O slave 1 communication error (M8005)
turns off, and the remote I/O slave 1 communication error status (D8148) also becomes "0" (normal).
4. Communication with remote I/O slave 1 is continued.

4 Remote I/O

Communication with Multiple Remote I/O Slaves
One scan1.

END processing

2.

3.

Remote I/O
masterRemote I/Oslave 1

Remote I/Oslave 2

Remote I/Oslave 3

The above timing chart is an example where the communication with remote I/O slave 1 is the fastest and thecommunication with remote I/O slave 3 is the slowest.
1. The remote I/O master is able to perform remote I/O communication in END processing and it simultaneously
issues requests to all remote I/O slaves.
2. The time until the response is returned is affected by the state of the network connecting the remote I/O slaves.
Therefore, new requests are only issued for remote I/O slaves that have returned a response.
3. When multiple responses are received in one scan, new requests are issued for all of those simultaneously in END
processing.
Remote Communication Speed
The communication speed in remote I/O communication is affected by such factors as the state of the
network line and the communication cable. As a reference for communication speed, when performing
remote I/O communication using a 100BASE-T compatible cable and switching hub, it takes a minimum of
approximately 5 ms after the remote I/O master issues a request until the response from the remote I/Oslave is reflected as inputs.

12-50

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Remote I/O● Procedure
To use the Touch as a remote I/O master, you must configure the Function Area Settings tab and download theladder program or FBD program to the Touch.

1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Control Function) .

WindLDR starts.

2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Connection Settings.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 Click Communication Mode for the connection to configure, and then select Remote I/O Master.
The Remote I/O Master dialog box is displayed.

12
Control Function

4 Click Remote Host No. and select New Remote Host....
The Remote Host dialog box is displayed.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

12-51

4 Remote I/O

5 Configure IP Address and Port of the remote I/O slave to connect.

The default port number of the remote I/O slave is 2110.

6 Click OK.

When the settings are correctly configured, the details configured in the Remote Host dialog box is displayed in
Remote Host No..

7 For Receive Timeout (ms), configure the receive timeout with the remote I/O slave.

8 Click OK.

Configuring the remote I/O master is completed.

12-52

SmartAXIS Touch User's ManualChapter 13 Alarm Log Function
This chapter describes how to configure the Alarm Log function and its operation on the Touch.

1

Overview

1.1 How the Alarm Log Function is Used
The Alarm Log function samples the occurrence of alarms and recovery information by monitoring and evaluating thestate of devices.
The Alarm Log function can perform the following functions.
• Monitor device states and create Alarm Log data
Touch
External device0

12:00
Alarm occurred

1

12:00
1

0

12:53

Recovered

12:54

Confirmed

12:53
Alarm Log data
No.

MessageOccurrence Time

Recovery Time

Confirmation Time

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:00:00

12/01 12:53:10

12/01 12:54:30• Monitor device states and detect alarms
Touch
External device0

Alarm occurred

1

13
Alarm Log Function• Display an alarm screen when an alarm occurs
Touch
External device0

Alarm occurred

Voltagedrop

1

Alarm screen• Make a sound of the buzzer and screen flashing the screen when an alarm occurs
Touch
External device

Beep
0

1
Alarm occurred

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

13-1

1 Overview• Output Alarm Log data to the external memory
Touch
USB flash drive
Output to USB flash drive

Alarm Log data (CSV)

13-2

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Overview

1.2 Alarm States
Alarms have three states: occurred, recovered, and confirmed.
Alarm state

Details

Occurred

Indicates that an alarm has occurred. There are two types of alarms that occur.
First Alarm: The first alarm that occurs in a state where no alarms have occurred.
Second and later: An alarm that has occurred while another alarm is active.

Recovered

Indicates that the alarm that occurred has been recovered from.
However, for channels set to lock, the alarm is not recovered from until a key button is pressed(CHECK or All Chk.).

Confirmed

Indicates the key button CHECK or All Chk. was pressed.

Example: When the source device (the device to monitor) is D100-0, the error state (when an alarm has occurred) is
ON, the channel is set to Unlock, and the used key button is CHECKWhen the source device is ON, the alarm changes to the “Occurred” state. When the source device is OFF,the alarm changes to the “Recovered” state. When CHECK is pressed, the alarm changes to the“Confirmed” state.
Alarm state
Source device state
D100-0 : OFF

No alarm
occurring state

Alarm Log data
Occurred

D100-0 : ON

Record occurrence time
NO/NC is NO, so the state is“Occurred”

D100-0 : OFF

Recovered

Record recovery time
Lock/Unlock is Unlock, so thestate is “Recovered”

Press CHECK
Confirmed

13

Record confirmation time

Alarm state
Source device state
D100-0 : OFF

No alarm
occurring state

Alarm Log data
Occurred

D100-0 : ON

Record occurrence time
NO/NC is NO, so the state is

Press CHECK

D100-0 : OFF“Occurred”

Confirmed

Record confirmation time

Recovered

Record recovery time
Lock/Unlock is Unlock, so thestate is “Recovered”

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

13-3

Alarm Log Function

If CHECK is pressed before the source device changes to OFF, the alarm changes to the “Confirmed” state
regardless of the state of the source device.

1 Overview

1.3 Sampling Data
Data is sampled each time the alarm occurs, is recovered from, or confirmed.
Example: When the message for channel number 1-1 is “Voltage drop” and the message for channel number 1-2 is“Temperature abnormal”
Channel No. 1-1: Alarm occurred1(12:50:00)

Ch.No.

MessageOccurrence Time

Recovery Time

Confirmation Time

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:50:00––

Ch.No.

MessageOccurrence Time

Recovery Time

Confirmation Time

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:50:00

–

–

1-2

Temperatureabnormal

12/01/2011 12:50:10––

Ch.No.

MessageOccurrence Time

Recovery Time

Confirmation Time

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:50:00 12/01 12:50:20

1-2

Temperatureabnormal

12/01/2011 12:50:10––

Ch.No.

MessageOccurrence Time

Recovery Time

Confirmation Time

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:50:00 12/01 12:50:20 12/01 12:50:30

1-2

Temperatureabnormal

12/01/2011 12:50:10––

Ch.No.

MessageOccurrence Time

Recovery Time

Confirmation Time

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:50:00 12/01 12:50:20 12/01 12:50:30

1-2

Temperatureabnormal

12/01/2011 12:50:10

–

–

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:51:00––

Ch.No.

MessageOccurrence Time

Recovery Time

Confirmation Time

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:50:00 12/01 12:50:20 12/01 12:50:30

1-2

Temperatureabnormal

12/01/2011 12:50:10–

12/01 12:52:10

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:51:00––

Ch.No.

MessageOccurrence Time

Recovery Time

Confirmation Time

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:50:00 12/01 12:50:20 12/01 12:50:30

1-2

Temperatureabnormal

12/01/2011 12:50:10 12/01 12:53:00 12/01 12:52:10

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:51:00

Channel No. 1-2: No alarm

Channel No. 1-1: Alarm2(12:50:00)
Channel No. 1-2: Alarm occurred(12:50:10)

Channel No. 1-1:

3

Recovered fromalarm
(12:50:20)

Channel No. 1-2: Alarm(12:50:10)

Channel No. 1-1: CHECK pressed4(12:50:30)
Channel No. 1-2: Alarm(12:50:10)

Channel No. 1-1: Alarm occurred5(12:51:00)
Channel No. 1-2: Alarm(12:50:10)

Channel No. 1-1: Alarm6(12:51:00)
Channel No. 1-2: CHECK pressed(12:52:10)

Channel No. 1-1: Alarm(12:51:00)

7

Recovered from
Channel No. 1-2:
alarm
(12:52:10)

13-4

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

–

–

–

1 Overview

1.4 Data Configuration
The sampled data is composed of the channel number, message, alarm state, time, and label.
The relationship between the Alarm Log function settings and the sampled data is as follows.
Alarm Log settingsϮ͘ŚĂŶŶĞůEŽ͘ ϯ͘DĞƐƐĂŐĞ

Sampled dataϭ͘ĂƚĂƐƚŽƌĂŐĞĂŵŽƵŶƚ

ϰ͘ůĂƌŵƐƚĂƚĞĂŶĚƚŝŵĞŚ͘EŽ͘DĞƐƐĂŐĞKĐĐƵƌƌĞŶĐĞdŝŵĞZĞĐŽǀĞƌǇdŝŵĞŽŶĨŝƌŵĂƚŝŽŶdŝŵĞ ϭͲϭ

sŽůƚĂŐĞĚƌŽƉϭϮͬϬϭͬϮϬϭϭϭϮ͗ϬϬ͗ϬϱϭϮͬϬϭϭϮ͗Ϭϭ͗ϭϬϭϮͬϬϭϭϮ͗Ϭϭ͗ϯϬ ϭͲϮ

dĞŵƉĞƌĂƚƵƌĞĂďŶŽƌŵĂůϭϮͬϬϭͬϮϬϭϭϭϮ͗Ϭϭ͗ϬϵϭϮͬϬϭϭϮ͗ϬϮ͗ϮϭϭϮͬϬϭϭϮ͗ϬϮ͗ϱϱ ϭͲϭ

sŽůƚĂŐĞĚƌŽƉϭϮͬϬϭͬϮϬϭϭϭϮ͗ϬϮ͗ϬϬϭϮͬϬϭϭϮ͗Ϭϯ͗ϭϭϭϮͬϬϭϭϮ͗Ϭϱ͗ϭϮ ϭͲϯ

KǀĞƌĐƵƌƌĞŶƚϭϮͬϬϭͬϮϬϭϭϭϮ͗ϯϬ͗ϮϭϭϮͬϬϭϭϮ͗ϱϱ͗ϭϱϭϮͬϬϭϭϯ͗ϬϬ͗ϬϬ ϭͲϭ

sŽůƚĂŐĞĚƌŽƉϭϮͬϬϭͬϮϬϭϭϭϮ͗ϰϱ͗ϯϲϭϮͬϬϭϭϮ͗ϱϯ͗ϭϮϭϮͬϬϭϭϮ͗ϱϳ͗ϰϭ

ϱ͘>ĂďĞů

2. Channel No.:

Composed of (Block No.)-(Channel No.). The devices to monitor and the conditions for alarm
occurrence and recovery are configured in the channels. When the sampled data is output
as a CSV file, the displayed label is “Ch.No.”.

3. Message:

The message displayed when an alarm has occurred.

4. Alarm state and time: The alarm state (occurred, recovered, confirmed) and the time the alarm occurred, wasrecovered from, and confirmed. When the sampled data is output as a CSV file, thedisplayed label varies based on the output method.
5. Label:

When the sampled data is output as a CSV file, this is the text displayed in the label row.
This cannot be changed.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

13-5

13
Alarm Log Function

1. Data storage amount: The amount of data that can be saved in the data storage area. For details, refer to “DataStorage Amount” on page 13-7.

1 Overview

For sampled data, the format for displayed items varies based on the output method.
■ Batch
Batch output shows the recovery and confirmation time for an alarm that has occurred on a single line.
The labels displayed in the label row are “Ch.No.”, “Message”, “Occurrence Time”, “Recovery Time”, and“Confirmation Time”.
Example: When the message for channel number 1-1 is “Voltage drop” and the message for channel number 1-2 is“Temperature abnormal”
Ch.No.

Confirmation
Time

MessageOccurrence Time

Recovery Time

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:50:00

12/01 12:50:20

12/01 12:50:30

1-2

Temperature abnormal

12/01/2011 12:50:10--

12/01 12:52:10

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:51:00----■ Real Time
Real time output displays the alarm state and the time the alarm became that state on a single line each time an
alarm occurs, is recovered from, or is confirmed.
The labels displayed in the label row are “Ch.No.”, “Message”, “State”, and “Time”.
Example: When the message for channel number 1-1 is “Voltage drop” and the message for channel number 1-2 is“Temperature abnormal”

13-6

Ch.No.

Message

State

Time

1-1

Voltage drop

Occurred

12/01/2011 12:50:00

1-2

Temperature abnormal

Occurred

12/01/2011 12:50:10

1-1

Voltage drop

Recovered

12/01/2011 12:50:20

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Overview

1.5 Saving and Deleting Data
● Saving Data
You can select whether or not to save the sampled data in the data storage area. The method to save data is
configured on the Channel tab in the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.
When Saving Data to the Data Storage Area
Select Store under Data in the Auto-Setup dialog box or in the Individual Settings dialog box.
Touch
External device0

12:00
Alarm occurred

1

12:00
1

0

12:53

Recovered

12:54

Confirmed

12:53
Alarm Log data
No.

MessageOccurrence Time

Recovery Time

Confirmation Time

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:00:00

12/01 12:53:10

12/01 12:54:30

If the number of active alarms exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amount set for the data storage area, the data isprocessed with either of the following methods.
■ FixedIf the saved data exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amount, the new data is not saved.
New data

13■ Rotate
If the saved data exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amount, the oldest data is deleted and the new data is saved.
New data

Oldest data(delete)Alarm Log data storage amount

When the backup battery is depleted, the data in the Alarm Log is erased when the Touch is turned off.

Data Storage AmountThe maximum amount of data that can be saved in the data storage area is 5011.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

13-7

Alarm Log Function

Alarm Log data storage amount1 Overview

When Not Saving Data to the Data Storage Area
Select No Store under Data in the Auto-Setup dialog box or in the Individual Settings dialog box.
Use this option to monitor a device state and display only detected active alarms on the Alarm List Display.
Touch
External device
Voltage drop

0

Pg.
Up
Pg.
Dwn

1

Alarm occurred

Alarm List Display● Deleting Data
The method to delete sampled data from the data storage area is as follows.
• On the Online tab in WindO/I-NV3, click the arrow under Clear, and then click All or Alarm Log Data. For
details, refer to Chapter 23 “4 Clear” on page 23-22.
• On the Top Page in the System Mode, press Main Menu, Initial Setting, Initialize, and Alarm Log in order.

13-8

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Overview

1.6 Using Data and Detected Alarms
The saved data and detected alarms can be used in the following ways.
● Using Saved Data
The saved data can be used in the following ways.
Alarm Log data
Ch.No.

MessageOccurrence Time

Recovery Time

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:00:05

12/01 12:01:10

12/01 12:01:30

1-2

Temperature abnormal

12/01/2011 12:01:09

12/01 12:02:21

12/01 12:02:55

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:02:00

12/01 12:03:11

12/01 12:05:12

1-3

Overcurrent

12/01/2011 12:30:21

12/01 12:55:15

12/01 13:00:00

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:45:36

12/01 12:53:12

12/01 12:57:41

To use with the Touch• Display data with the Alarm Log Display
Display Alarm Log data with the Alarm Log Display.
For details, refer to Chapter 9 “7 Alarm Log Display”
on page 9-99.

Occurred

Message

Confirmation Time

To use with devices other than the Touch• Save to and read from an external memory
Alarm Log data is saved in a CSV file format into theexternal memory which it can be read on yourcomputer.
For details, refer to “4.4 Saving Data as a CSV File”
on page 13-32.

Recovered Confirmed

12/01 12:51

Temperature abnormal

12:53

12:52

12/01 12:00

Voltage drop

12:53

12:52

Book1

SelectRef.

Sheet1

Sheet2

Sheet313

Alarm Log data
(CSV)

Touch
External device
Voltage drop

0

Pg.
Up
Pg.
Dwn

1

Alarm occurred

Alarm List Display

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

13-9

Alarm Log Function● Using Detected Alarms• Display alarms with the Alarm List Display
Display detected alarms with the Alarm List Display.
For details, refer to “4.2 Displaying Registered Messages with the Alarm List Display According to the Active Alarm”
on page 13-27.

2 Alarm Log Function Configuration Procedure

2

Alarm Log Function Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for the Alarm Log function.

2.1 Configuring the Devices to Monitor and the Alarm Detection Condition
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Alarm Log.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the type of device to monitor under Source Device Type on the Channel tab.
If you select Word, devices are configured per block.
If you select Bit, devices are configured per channel.

3 Set the number of blocks to manage in Number of Blocks.
One channel is used for one device to monitor. One block is 16 channels.
The number of blocks that can be set varies based on the Source Device Type setting.

4 Select the reference screen type in Reference Screen.
The reference screen is associated with the channel. This screen is displayed when the key button Ref. is pressed.
If a reference screen is not displayed, select Not Use.

5 To batch register all channels, click Auto. To individually register each channel, click Edit.
An example when Auto is clicked is described here.
The Auto-Setup dialog box is displayed.

13-10

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Alarm Log Function Configuration Procedure

6 Specify the device to monitor in Source.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
For the Auto-Setup dialog box, the device addresses are sequentially set starting with the specified device addressfrom the highlighted row in Settings.

7 Under Data, select whether or not to save Alarm Log data in the date storage area.
To display Alarm Log data on the Touch or to output the data to a file, select Store.
If you select No Store, Alarm Log data is not created, but device states are monitored.

8 Under Alarm function, select whether or not to use the alarm function.
For channels with Disable selected, device states are not monitored and Alarm Log data is not created.

9 Under NO/NC, select the alarm detection condition.
If you select NO, the alarm occurs when the monitored bit changes from 0 to 1. If you select NC, the alarm occurs
when the monitored bit changes from 1 to 0.

If you select Unlock, the alarm is automatically recovered from based on the bit state when the monitored bit
becomes the normal state.
If you select Lock, even if the monitored bit becomes the normal state, the alarm remains active until the key button
CHECK is pressed.

11 Select the Text ID check box and specify the message to display when the alarm occurs as a Text Manager ID
number (1 to 32000).
Number of blocks x 16 (number of channels) text IDs are used starting from the set ID number.

12 Specify the screen number (1 to 3000) to display when the key button Ref. is pressed in Reference Screen No.
Number of blocks x 16 (number of channels) screens are used starting from the screen number.
This option can only be configured when Base Screen or Popup Screen is selected in Reference Screen.

13 Click OK.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

13-11

Alarm Log Function

10 Under Lock/Unlock, select whether or not to automatically recover based on the state of the monitored bit.

13

2 Alarm Log Function Configuration Procedure

The devices to monitor and the messages are batch configured and displayed in Settings of Alarm Log Settings
dialog box.

14 Click OK.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the devices to monitor and the alarm detection condition.
Next, configure the functions to execute using saved data and detected alarms.
 “4.1 Displaying Saved Data with the Alarm Log Display” on page 13-25
 “4.2 Displaying Registered Messages with the Alarm List Display According to the Active Alarm” on page 13-27
 “4.3 Make a Sound of the Buzzer and Flash the Screen when an Alarm has Occurred” on page 13-30
 “4.4 Saving Data as a CSV File” on page 13-32

13-12

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box

3

Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.

3.1 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box● General Tab
The General tab is used to configure what kind of data to sample when an alarm occurs and the methods for savingand deleting the sampled data.

■ Storage Method
Selects the data processing method when the number of active alarms exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amountset for the data storage area.
Fixed:

If the saved data exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amount, the new data is not saved.

13

New data

If the saved data exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amount, the oldest data is deleted and the new data
is saved.
New data

Oldest data(delete)Alarm Log data storage amount

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

13-13

Alarm Log Function

Alarm Log data storage amountRotate:3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box■ Monitoring Period (x 100 msec)
Specifies the period to write the state of the monitored device to the Touch (6 to 500 (100 milliseconds units)).
■ Monitor Number of Active Alarms
Select this check box to count the number of active alarms.
(Destination Device): Specifies a word device to write the number of active alarms.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings”
on page 2-61.
■ Monitor How Many Times Each Alarm has occurred
Select this check box to count the number of alarms that has occurred per channel.
(Top Device):

Specifies a word device to write the number of alarms that has occurred. Number of blocks x 16
(number of channels) addresses are used starting from the set device address.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings”
on page 2-61.
Example: When the number of blocks is 2 and LKR100 is specified as the starting device
The number of alarms that has occurred for channel number 1-0 is saved in LKR100.
The number of alarms that has occurred for channel 1-1 is saved in LKR101, and thispattern continues up to LKR131 where the number of alarms that has occurred forchannel number 2-15 is saved.
Channel No.

Block 116 channels

Block 216 channels

1-0
1-1
1-2

LKR100
LKR101
LKR102

1-14
1-15
2-0
2-1
2-2

LKR114
LKR115
LKR116
LKR117
LKR118

2-14
2-15

LKR130
LKR131

Starting device• If you specify HMI Keep Registers (LKR) as the destination word device, the number of alarms that has
occurred is retained even when the Touch power is turned off.
• The amount of Alarm Log data saved in the data storage area with the Alarm Log function is stored in
HMI Special Data Register LSD57.
• To monitor the number of alarms that has occurred, number of blocks x 16 (number of channels) devices
are required from the set starting device. If the destination device does not exist, “Device range error”
occurs on the Touch.
• If the values of devices that are counting the number of alarms that has occurred are overwritten byanother process, the alarms cannot be accurately counted.
■ Clear Log Data for Recovered Alarms
Select this check box to delete recovered data out of the saved Alarm Log data.
(Trigger Device):

Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition to delete data. The recovered
data is deleted when the value of the configured device changes from 0 to 1. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

■ Monitor the State of Each Alarm
Select this check box to check the alarm state per channel.
(Top Device):

Specifies a word device to write the alarm state. Number of blocks x 16 (number of channels)
addresses are used starting from the set device address.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings”
on page 2-61.

The following values are written to the bits depending on the alarm state.
Bit 15

Bit 3 Bit 0

Reserved

0: Before alarm/after recovery
1: After alarm
0: Second and later alarm (Alarm that has occurred again while an alarm is active)
1: First alarm (First alarm that occurred)
0: After confirm
1: Before confirm

13-14

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box■ Call Popup Screen
These settings configure the Popup Screen to display when an alarm occurs. The Popup Screen displayed when an
alarm occurs is called the alarm screen.
Call Popup Screen:

Select this check box to display the alarm screen when an alarm occurs.

Screen No.:Specifies the alarm screen number (1 to 3015) to display when an alarm occurs.

Coordinates X, Y:

Specifies the coordinates to display the alarm screen.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of thealarm screen is the X and Y coordinates.
Specify the coordinates in 1 dot units.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)

■ Number of Stored Data
Specifies the maximum amount of Alarm Log data saved in the data storage area. Data is saved up to the set amount.
The maximum amount of data that can be saved in the data storage area is 5011.
Click
to open the Data Storage Area Management dialog box. You can change the allocation of data storage area
memory in the Data Storage Area Management dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 16 “Data Storage Area” onpage 16-1.

13
Alarm Log Function

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

13-15

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box● Channel Tab
The Channel tab is used to configure the devices to monitor and the alarm detection condition.

■ Source Device Type
Selects the type of device to monitor.
Word:

Uses a word device. Devices are configured per block.

Bit:

Uses a bit device. Devices are configured per channel.

■ Number of Blocks
Configures the Alarm Log data in block units. The number of blocks that can be set varies based on the Source
Device Type setting and the Touch model.
Word:

0 to 128

Bit:

0 to 8One block is composed of 16 channels. One device can be monitored for each channel. The maximum
number of devices that can be monitored is 16 for each block.

■ Reference Screen
Select the type of reference screen from the following items.
Base Screen, Popup Screen, Not Use
The reference screen is displayed when a message is selected on the Alarm List Display or the Alarm Log Display andthe key button Ref. is pressed. It is the Base Screen or Popup Screen associated with each channel.

2. Press the key button Ref.

REV

Time

09:15 Motor fault

Up

1 fault
09:15Pump
Motor
fault

10:02 Pump1 fault

Dwn

10:02 Pump1 fault

Time

1. Select a message displayedon the Alarm List Display
or the Alarm Log Display

The reference screen opens

Message

10:28 High pressureDel

13:02 Pump 1 fault

Ref.

Message

REV
UpPump 1 output low
Dwn
Press Stop, check the air,
Del
10:28
pressure
thenHighpress
Start.
Ref.
13:02 Pump 1 faultAir Press.
0000
Stop
Start
2
kg/m

Key button Ref.

13-16

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Reference screen

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box■ Settings
The Alarm Log settings for each channel are edited here.
No.:

Displayed as (Block No.)-(Channel No.). Double clicking the cell opens the Individual Settings
dialog box.

Source:Shows the bit device or bit of the word device to monitor. Double clicking the cell opens theDevice Address Settings dialog box.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-61.

Data:

Shows whether or not to save Alarm Log data in the date storage area.
Double clicking the cell switches between Store and No Store.

Alarm function:Shows whether or not the alarm function is used. Double clicking the cell switches between
Enable and Disable. Channels switched to Disable cannot be configured. Device states are
not monitored and Alarm Log data is not created.

NO/NC:

Shows the alarm detection condition. Double clicking the cell switches between NO and NC.

Lock/Unlock:Shows whether or not to automatically recover based on the state of the monitored bit.
Double clicking the cell switches between Lock and Unlock.

Text ID:

Shows the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) to use for the message displayed when an
alarm occurs. Double clicking the cell allows you to specify the Text Manager ID number.

Text Message:

Shows the text for the specified text ID. Double clicking the cell opens Text Manager.

Reference Screen No.: Shows the screen number to display when the key button Ref. is pressed. Double clicking thecell opens the Individual Settings dialog box.
This option can only be configured when Base Screen or Popup Screen is selected in
Reference Screen.
■ AutoBatch registers or changes the settings for all the channels.
Click this button to open the Auto-Setup dialog box. The Auto-Setup dialog box settings are reflected in all thechannels.
For details, refer to “Auto-Setup Dialog Box and Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 13-18.

13

Select a channel, and then click this button to open the Individual Settings dialog box. The settings for the selectedchannel are reflected in the Individual Settings dialog box.
For details, refer to “Auto-Setup Dialog Box and Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 13-18.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

13-17

Alarm Log Function■ EditRegisters or changes, the settings for the selected channel.

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box

Auto-Setup Dialog Box and Individual Settings Dialog Box
With the Auto-Setup dialog box, the Alarm Log settings for all channels are batch registered or changed.
With the Individual Settings dialog box, the Alarm Log settings for the selected channel are registered or changed.

■ Channel*1
Shows the block number and the channel number for the selected channel.
Block No.:Shows the block number for the channel selected in Settings.

Channel No.:Shows the channel number for the channel selected in Settings.

■ Block Settings
Configures Source and Data in block units.
Source:For the Auto-Setup dialog box, the device addresses are sequentially set from block number 1channel number 1, starting with the specified device address.
For the Individual Settings dialog box, if Source Device Type on the Channel tab is Word,
the 16 channels for the block selected at the start of the specified device address are batch
configured. For Bit, the selected channel is individually configured.
Click
to open the Device Address Settings dialog box where you can edit the device address.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-61.

Data:

Selects whether or not to save Alarm Log data in the date storage area.
For the Auto-Setup dialog box, all the channels are batch configured.
For the Individual Settings dialog box, the 16 channels for the selected block are batch
configured.
Store:

Alarm Log data can be displayed on the Touch or output to file.

No Store:

Alarm Log data is not created, but device states are monitored.

*1 Individual Settings dialog box only

13-18

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box■ Channel Settings
The trigger condition for the channel is configured here.
Alarm function:

NO/NC:

Selects whether or not to use the alarm function.
Enable:Monitors the state of the device configured for the channel and samples
the alarm information.

Disable:Does not monitor the state of the device. No Alarm Log data is created.

Selects the alarm detection condition.

Lock/Unlock:NO:

The alarm occurs when the monitored bit changes from 0 to 1.

NC:

The alarm occurs when the monitored bit changes from 1 to 0.

Selects whether or not to automatically recover based on the state of the monitored bit.
Lock:

Even if the monitored bit returns the normal state, the alarm remains
active until the key button CHECK is pressed.

Unlock:The alarm is automatically recovered from based on the bit state when themonitored bit returns the normal state.

Example: When NO/NC is NO
UnlockLock

Record occurrence time

Record occurrence time

Record recovery time

No operation

Record confirmation time

Record confirmation time
Record recovery time

Monitored bit
01

Alarm occurred

0

1

Press CHECKThe display on the Alarm List Display disappears when the alarm is recovered from, regardless of the Lock/
Unlock setting. To keep displaying the alarm until CHECK is pressed, use the Alarm Log Display.
To use text registered in Text Manager as the message to display when an alarm occurs,
select this check box and specify the Text Manager ID number to use as the message.
Number of blocks x 16 (number of channels) text IDs are used starting from the set ID
number.
Click
Text:

to open Text Manager where you can edit the text.

Shows the text for the specified text ID.

Reference Screen No.: Specifies the screen number (1 to 3000) to display when the key button Ref. is pressed.
Number of blocks x 16 (number of channels) screens are used starting from the screen
number.
This option can only be configured when Base Screen or Popup Screen is selected in
Reference Screen.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

13-19

Alarm Log Function

Text ID:13

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box● External Memory Tab
The External Memory tab is used to configure whether or not to output saved data to the external memory.

The output data is stored in the following folder on the external memory.
\External memory folder\ALARMLOG
The default External Memory Folder name is “HGDATA01”. For details, refer to Chapter 26 “1.5 Setting the External
Memory Folder” on page 26-12.
Sampled data after starting output to the external memory is not included in the output data.

13-20

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box■ BatchSelect this check box to batch output all the sampled data to the external memory.
Touch
Output to
USB flash drive

Alarm Log data
Ch.No.

MessageOccurrence Time

Recovery Time

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:00:05

12/01 12:01:10

12/01 12:01:30

1-2

Temperature abnormal

12/01/2011 12:01:09

12/01 12:02:21

12/01 12:02:55

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:02:00

12/01 12:03:11

12/01 12:05:12

1-3

Overcurrent

12/01/2011 12:30:21

12/01 12:55:15

12/01 13:00:00

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:45:36

12/01 12:53:12

12/01 12:57:41

USB flash drive

Confirmation Time

Data to be output (all)Trigger Device
01

Alarm Log data (CSV)

All the data is saved on the external memory when the trigger devices changes from 0 to 1. If a file with the same
name already exists on the external memory, that file is overwritten. The maximum amount of output data is theamount configured by the data storage area.
Output stops if there is insufficient free space on the external memory. USB flash drive error information isstored in HMI Special Data Register LSD33.
Trigger Device:

Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition for batch output. For thedevice address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” onpage 2-61.
Data is output to file when the trigger device changes from 0 to 1.

File Name:Enter the file name for the output data or shows the file name.
The default is “ALMHTO.CSV”. To change the file name, enter a new file name. The maximum
number is 120 characters (including the extension).
Add Device data to File Name*1:

Select this check box to add the bottom three digits ofthe value of device configured by File Name Device tothe end of the file name for the output data.

File Name Device:

Specifies the word device that is the source for the value
to add to the file name. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-61. This option can only be
configured when the Add Device data to File Namecheck box is selected.

*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

13-21

Alarm Log Function

Example: When the value of device configured by File
Name Device is 123, the file name is“ALMHTO123.CSV”.

13

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box■ Real Time
Select this check box to output data to the external memory in real time.
Touch
Alarm Log data
Time

State

Ch.No.

Message

12/01/2011 12:00:05

Occurred

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:01:09

Occurred1-2

Temperature abnormal

12/01/2011 12:01:10

Recovered

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:03:30

Confirmed

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:03:09

Occurred

1-3

Overcurrent

12/01/2011 12:04:33

Recovered

1-2

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:05:15

Confirmed

1-2

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:08:41

Recovered

1-3Overcurrent

Output to
USB flash drive

Data to be output
3 minutes after
operation starts

USB flash drive

Data to be output
3 minutes after that
Data to be output after
another 3 minutes

3 minute interval
after operation starts

Alarm Log data (CSV)With real time output, data is saved to the external memory in three minute intervals after the Touch starts running.
When there is already data with the same file name on the external memory, data is appended to that file. If there
was no update to the data during the three minutes, it is not output.
Data is appended to the file until the size of the file reaches the restriction size (256 MB), so the maximum amount of
output data varies based on the settings for the output channel such as the amount of data, the data size, and thelabels.
If the interval to update the Alarm Log is shorter than real time output (the interval for writing to the external
memory), that Alarm Log is recorded up to the 1,023rd item, and then afterwards, old data is discarded in order andreplaced with new data.
Real time output stops when the file size of the Alarm Log data exceeds 256 MB or when there is insufficientspace on the external memory. USB flash drive error information is stored in HMI Special Data Register LSD33.
• When the value of HMI Special Relay LSM18 changes from 0 to 1, the data at that time is first output inreal time to the USB flash drive, and then access to the USB flash drive is stopped.
• You can check the free space on the USB flash drive with HMI Special Data Register LSD34 to 35.
Trigger condition: Select the check boxes for the items that will trigger the output of Alarm Log data to the external
memory.
Occurrence:

Alarm Log data is output to the external memory when an alarm has occurred.

Recovery:

Alarm Log data is output to the external memory when the alarm is recoveredfrom.

Confirmation:

Alarm Log data is output to the external memory when the key button CHECK waspressed.

Month/day/year hour:minute:second is output for the trigger condition occurrence time, recovery time, andconfirmation time.
File Name:Enter the file name for the output data or shows the file name.
The default is “ALMHTA.CSV”. To change the file name, enter a new file name. The maximum
number is 120 characters (including the extension).
Add Device data to File Name*1:

Select this check box to add the bottom three digits of thevalue of device configured by File Name Device to the end of
the file name for the output data.
Example: When the value of device configured by File Name
Device is 123, the file name is “ALMHTA123.CSV”.

File Name Device:

Specifies the word device that is the source for the value to add
to the file name. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” onpage 2-61. This option can only be configured when the Add
Device data to File Name check box is selected.

*1 Advanced mode only

13-22

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box• The function to sample data operates when Alarm Log data is being saved to the external memory.
• The methods to erase Alarm Log files saved on the external memory are as follows.
- To erase files during operation using parts, on the External Memory tab on the Project Settings dialog
box, select the Remove Files stored in External Memory check box and the All Alarm Log data
check box, and then configure the trigger device. Assign that trigger device to a part.
- To erase files with WindO/I-NV3, click Clear on the Online tab, and then click Stored Data inExternal Memory to open the Clear Data dialog box. Select the Alarm Log Data check box, and thenclick OK.

13
Alarm Log Function

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

13-23

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box● Options Tab
The Options tab is used to configure whether or not the Touch’s internal buzzer operates and the screen flashing.

■ Trigger Buzzer when Alarm occurs
Select this check box to make a sound of the buzzer when an alarm has occurred.
■ Screen flashing when Alarm occurs
Select this check box to have the screen flash when an alarm occurs.
For monochrome LCD models, the backlight changes to red while the screen is flashing.
■ Buzzer and Screen Flashing*1
This item selects the condition for the alarm to sound the buzzer or to flash the screen. This item can only be
configured when the Buzzer when Alarm occurs or the Screen flashing when Alarms occurs is selected.
All Alarms:
Only First Alarm:

The buzzer is triggered and the screen flashing each time an alarm occur.
The buzzer is triggered and the screen flashing only when the first alarm*2 occurs. No beeps
will sound and no screen will flash when another alarm is already active.

■ Stop the Sound of the Buzzer and Screen flashing*1
Select the check box for the items that will trigger the sound of the buzzer and screen flashing to stop.
When touch everywhere on the screen:
When press CHECK/All Chk. button:
When all Alarms are recovered:

The sound of the buzzer and screen flashing stops when you touch
anywhere on the screen.
The sound of the buzzer and screen flashing stops when you touch
the key buttons CHECK or All Chk. on the Alarm Log Display.
The sound of the buzzer and screen flashing stops when all thealarms are recovered from.

• While the sound of the buzzer is sounding, System Area 1 (address+1, bit 6) is 1.
• While the screen is flashing, System Area 1 (address+1, bit 2) is 1.
For monochrome LCD models, System Area 1 (address+1, bit 3) is 0 and System Area 1 (address+1, bit4) is 1 while the screen flashing.
• To stop the sound of the buzzer and the screen flashing when an alarm has occurred, use the following
methods.
- Press the key button Stop the Sound of the Buzzer and Screen flashing- When a condition selected with the Stop the Sound of the Buzzer and Screen flashing check boxes
is satisfied- To stop the sound of the buzzer, set System Area 1 (address+1, bit 6) to 0
- To stop the screen flashing, set System Area 1 (address+1, bit 1 to 4) to 0
However, when System Area 1 (address+1, bit 6) is 1 for a reason other than the occurrence of an alarm,the sound of the buzzer does not stop until 0 is written. When System Area 1 (address+1, bit 1 to 4) are 1,
the alarm is triggered, however, the screen flashing doesn't stop until 0 is written into it.
• If you stop the screen flashing, the backlight turns off when System Area 1 (address+1, bit 0), and thebacklight turns on when it is 1.
*1 Advanced mode only
*2 The first alarm that has occurred in a state where no alarms are active

13-24

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Using Data and Detected Alarms

4

Using Data and Detected Alarms

4.1 Displaying Saved Data with the Alarm Log Display
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Alarm Log.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the type of device to monitor under Source Device Type on the Channel tab and specify Number ofBlocks.

3 Select the channel number to register, and then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.

13
Alarm Log Function

4 Specify the device to monitor in Source and select Store under Data.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

13-25

4 Using Data and Detected Alarms

5 Select Enable under Alarm function, configure NO/NC and Lock/Unlock, and then click OK.
6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 to register all the channels.
7 Click OK.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box closes.

8 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Alarm Log Display.

9 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Alarm Log Display.
10 Double-click the dropped Alarm Log Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.

11 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
For details, refer to Chapter 9 “7.3 Properties of Alarm Log Display Dialog Box” on page 9-101.

12 Click OK.
The Properties of Alarm Log Display dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the Touch to display saved data with the Alarm Log Display.

13-26

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Using Data and Detected Alarms

4.2 Displaying Registered Messages with the Alarm List Display According to the Active Alarm
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Alarm Log.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the type of device to monitor under Source Device Type on the Channel tab and specify Number of Blocks.
3 Select the channel number to register a message to, and then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.

4 Specify the device to monitor in Source and select No Store under Data.

13
Alarm Log Function

5 Select Enable under Alarm function and configure NO/NC and Lock/Unlock.
6 Select the Text ID check box, and then click.

Text Manager opens.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

13-27

4 Using Data and Detected Alarms

7 Enter the message in Text.

8 Click Select.
9 Click OK in the Individual Settings dialog box.
The registered message is displayed in Settings of the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.

10 Repeat steps 3 through 9 to register messages for all the channels.
The messages to use can be registered in advance in Text Manager.

11 Click OK.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box closes.

13-28

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Using Data and Detected Alarms

12 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Alarm List Display.

13 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Alarm List Display.
14 Double-click the dropped Alarm List Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.

15 On the General tab, under Message Settings, select Use Alarm Log Settings.

13
Alarm Log Function

16 Configure the other settings and the settings on each tab as necessary.
For details, refer to Chapter 9 “6.3 Properties of Alarm List Display Dialog Box” on page 9-85.

17 Click OK.
The Properties of Alarm List Display dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the Touch to display registered messages with the Alarm List Display according to theactive alarm.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

13-29

4 Using Data and Detected Alarms

4.3 Make a Sound of the Buzzer and Flash the Screen when an Alarm has Occurred
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Alarm Log.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the type of device to monitor under Source Device Type on the Channel tab and specify Number ofBlocks.

3 Select the channel number to register a message to, and then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.

4 Specify the device to monitor in Source and select Store under Data.

5 Select Enable under Alarm function, configure NO/NC and Lock/Unlock, and then click OK.

13-30

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Using Data and Detected Alarms

6 Click the Options tab in the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.

7 Select the Trigger Buzzer when Alarm occurs check box to make a sound of the buzzer when an alarm has
occurred.

8 Select the Screen flashing when Alarm occurs check box to have the screen flashing when an alarm has
occurred.

9 Click OK.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the settings to make a sound of the buzzer and the screen flashing when an alarm has
occurred.

13
Alarm Log Function

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

13-31

4 Using Data and Detected Alarms

4.4 Saving Data as a CSV File
● Saving Data as a CSV File
The Alarm Log data can be saved to the external memory as a CSV file.
The procedure to save the data is as follows.
On the WindO/I-NV3 System Setup tab, click Alarm Log to display the Alarm Log Settings dialog box. Select an
output method check box on the External Memory tab and configure the items. The data can be saved to theExternal Memory Folder on the external memory. For details, refer to “External Memory Tab” on page 13-20.
Files saved to external memory are read using WindO/I-NV3.
On the WindO/I-NV3 Online tab, click the arrow under Upload, and then click Data in external memory
to display the Upload from external memory dialog box. Select the Alarm Log Data check box, specify thelocation to save the files in Path, and then click OK to be able to save the files in the specified folder.
● Data Structure and Output Example
The data structure for files output with batch output and real time output is different.
■ Batch
Batch output shows the recovery and confirmation time for an alarm that has occurred on a single line.
The data structure of files output with batch output is as follows. Bold items are replaced by the Alarm Log settings,
sampled data, project file name, and WindO/I-NV3 version.
"Project Name","Project name","Version number"
Headers"File Type","Log type"
Blank row

Title row

"Ch.No.","Message","Occurrence Time","Recovery Time","Confirmation Time"" Channel number","Message"," MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS"," MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS"," MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS"

Data row···

Output example

Data size of each row"Project Name","Dimmer Console","V1.00"- 41 bytes"File Type","Alarm Log Data"- 30 bytes- 2 bytes"Ch.No.","Message","Occurrence Time","Recovery Time","Confirmation Time"- 74 bytes" 1-0","Voltage drop"," 08/11/2011 14:46:12"," 08/11 14:46:13"," 08/11 14:46:16"- 82 bytes" 1-1","Temperature abnormal"," 08/11/2011 14:47:18"," 08/11 14:47:19", " 08/11 14:47:20" - 90 bytes
·
·
·

13-32

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Using Data and Detected Alarms■ Real Time
Real time output displays the alarm state and the time the alarm became that state on a single line each time an
alarm occurs, is recovered from, or is confirmed.
The data structure of files output with real time output is as follows. Bold items are replaced by the Alarm Log
settings, sampled data, project file name, and WindO/I-NV3 version.
"Project Name","Project name","Version number"
Headers"File Type","Log type"
Blank row

Title row

"Time","State","Ch.No.","Message"" MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS","State"," Channel number","Message"

Data row···

Output example

Data size of each row"Project Name","Dimmer Console","V1.00"- 41 bytes"File Type","Alarm Log Data"- 30 bytes- 2 bytes"Time","State","Ch.No.","Message"- 35 bytes" 08/11/2011 14:46:12","Occurred"," 1-0","Voltage drop"- 57 bytes" 08/11/2011 14:46:13","Recovered"," 1-0","Voltage drop"- 58 bytes" 08/11/2011 14:46:16","Confirmed"," 1-0","Voltage drop"- 58 bytes" 08/11/2011 14:47:18","Occurred"," 1-1","Temperature abnormal"- 65 bytes···

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

13-33

13
Alarm Log Function• The data size for each row is counted as 2 bytes for full-width characters, one byte for half-widthcharacters, and two bytes for newlines. The total for each row is the total amount of space for the file.
• A space is inserted before the date in the data row.
• The display type for the date and time varies based on the language configured in Project Settings, on
the Project Details tab, in Language.
Japanese: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic: MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS

4 Using Data and Detected Alarms

13-34

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualChapter 14 Data Log Function
This chapter describes how to configure the Data Log function and its operation on the Touch.

1

Overview

1.1 How the Data Log Function is Used
The Data Log function samples values of devices with the Touch using the configured sampling condition. The
sampled values of devices are saved in internal memory along with the sampling time.
The Data Log function can perform the following functions.
• Sample values of devices at a fixed time interval
Touch
External device

12 : 00

D100 : 0

12 : 05

D100 : 55

12 : 10

D100 : 123• Sample values of devices when a value of device changes
Touch
External device

0

D100 : 123

1• Output Data Log data to the external memory
Touch

14

USB flash drive
Output to USB flash drive

Data Log Function

Data Log data (CSV)

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

14-1

1 Overview• Copy Data Log data to internal devices
Data Log data

Touch
External device

126

Sampling Time

Data001

01/01/2011 12:00:30

120

01/01/2011 12:01:30

121

01/01/2011 12:02:30

122

01/01/2011 12:03:30

123

01/01/2011 12:04:30

124

01/01/2011 12:05:30

125

01/01/2011 12:06:30

126

125
124

Copy
LDR10 : 126
LDR11 : 125
LDR12 : 124(Internal device)

14-2

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Overview

1.2 Sampling Values of Devices
The Touch samples target values of devices at a fixed time interval or when a value of device changes.
● Sampling Values of Devices at a Fixed Time Interval
When sampling values of devices (D100 to D102) at a 5 minute interval (Time: 300 seconds) with the data storage
amount in the data storage area is set to 3, the Touch samples Data Log data as follows.
Touch
External device

12 : 05 : 00
12 : 10 : 00
12 : 15 : 00

D100

D101

D102

20

80

2

10

70

3

30

90

1

1 5 minutes after data sampling starts, the Touch stores the values for devices D100 to D102.
2 10 minutes after data sampling starts, the Touch stores the values for devices D100 to D102.
3 15 minutes after data sampling starts, the Touch stores the values for devices D100 to D102.
Values of Devices
Time

Data stored on the Touch
Value
D 101

D1 02

01/01/2011 12:01:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:02:00

20

80

2

01/01/2011 12:03:00

30

90

1

01/01/2011 12:04:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:05:00

20

80

2

01/01/2011 12:06:00

30

90

1

01/01/2011 12:07:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:08:00

20

80

2

01/01/2011 12:09:00

30

90

1

01/01/2011 12:10:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:11:00

20

80

2

01/01/2011 12:12:00

30

90

1

01/01/2011 12:13:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:14:00

20

80

2

01/01/2011 12:15:00

30

90

1

01/01/2011 12:16:00

10

70

3

Sampling Time

1
2
3

Value
Data 1

Data 2

Data 301/01/2011 12:05:00

20

80

2

01/01/2011 12:10:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:15:00

30

90

1

14

4 20 minutes after data sampling starts, the Touch stores the values for devices D100 to D102.
Since the data storage amount in the data storage area is set to 3, the oldest data is deleted in order to make room
for the newest data.
Values of Devices
Time

Data stored on the Touch
Value

Sampling Time

Value

D100

D 101

D1 02

Data 1

Data 2

·
·
·

·
·
·

·
·
·

·
·
·

Data 301/01/2011 12:17:00

40

60

2

01/01/2011 12:10:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:18:00

30

60

1

01/01/2011 12:15:00

30

90

1

01/01/2011 12:19:00

10

90

3

01/01/2011 12:20:00

20

80

2

01/01/2011 12:20:00

20

80

2

Deleted

4

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

14-3

Data Log Function

D100

1 Overview● Sampling Values of Devices when Value of Device Changes
When sampling values of devices (D100 to D102), when a bit device configured as the sampling condition switchesfrom 0 to 1 and the data storage amount in the data storage area is set to 3, the Touch samples Data Log data as
follows.
Touch
External device

D100
20

D101
80

D102
2

1

0

1 When data sampling starts and the bit device configured as the sampling condition switches from 0 to 1, the Touch
stores the values for devices D100 to D102.

2 When the sampling condition device switches from 0 to 1 the second time, the Touch stores the values for devices
D100 to D102.

3 When the sampling condition device switches from 0 to 1 the third time, the Touch stores the values for devices D100
to D102.

Values of Devices
Time

0

1

0

1

0

1

Data stored on the Touch
Value
D100

D101

D102

01/01/2011 12:01:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:02:00

20

80

2

01/01/2011 12:03:00

30

90

1

01/01/2011 12:04:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:05:00

20

80

2

01/01/2011 12:06:00

30

90

1

01/01/2011 12:07:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:08:00

20

80

2

01/01/2011 12:09:00

30

90

1

01/01/2011 12:10:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:11:00

20

80

2

01/01/2011 12:12:00

30

90

1

01/01/2011 12:13:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:14:00

20

80

2

01/01/2011 12:15:00

30

90

1

01/01/2011 12:16:00

10

70

3

Sampling Time

1

2
3

Value
Data 1

Data 2

Da t a 3

01/01/2011 12:05:00

20

80

2

01/01/2011 12:13:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:15:00

30

90

1

4 When the sampling condition device switches from 0 to 1 the fourth time, the Touch stores the values for devices
D100 to D102.

Since the data storage amount in the data storage area is set to 3, the oldest data is deleted in order to make room
for the newest data.
Values of Devices
Time

0

14-4

1

Data stored on the Touch
Value
D100

D1 01

D10 2

·
·
·

·
·
·

·
·
·

·
·
·

01/01/2011 12:17:00

40

60

2

01/01/2011 12:18:00

30

60

1

01/01/2011 12:19:00

10

90

3

01/01/2011 12:20:00

20

80

2

Sampling Time

4

Value
Data 1

Data 2

D ata 301/01/2011 12:13:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:15:00

30

90

1

01/01/2011 12:20:00

20

80

2

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Overview

1.3 Data Configuration
The sampled data is composed of the sampling time, values of devices, and labels.
The relationship between the Data Log function settings and the sampled data is as follows.
Data Log settings

Data No. 1 settings
Data No. 2 settings
Data No. 3 settings

4. Sampling time label

3. Amount of data

Sampled data

2. Data storage amount

Sampling Time

Data001

Data002

Data003

01/01/2011 12:00:00

20

120

201

01/01/2011 12:10:00

21

121

204

01/01/2011 12:20:00

22

122

206

01/01/2011 12:30:00

23

123

206

01/01/2011 12:40:00

24

124

210

5. Data label

14

Data No. 3: Value of device
Data No. 2: Value of device

Time the value of device was sampled

Data No. 1: Value of device

1. Channel

The sampled data is in channel units. A maximum of 20 channels can be configured.

2. Data storage amount:

The amount of sampled data to save. The maximum amount that can be configured per
device differs according to the model. For details, refer to “Data Storage Amount” onpage 14-6.

3. Amount of data:

The amount of data configured for a channel. The maximum amount of data that canbe configured is 128. The maximum number of devices that can be configured tosample values is 128 total for all channels.
For example, when the amount of data for channel 1 is set to 128, this is the maximum
amount total for all channels, so channel 2 through 20 cannot be configured.

4. Sampling time label:

When the sampled data is output as a CSV file, this label is displayed in the label row
for the sampling time column.

5. Data label:

When the sampled data is output as a CSV file, this label is displayed in the label row
for the data number columns.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

14-5

Data Log Function

1. Channel 1 to 20

1 Overview

1.4 Saving and Deleting Data
● Saving Data
The sampled values of devices, along with the sampling time, are all saved in the data storage area.
Data Log data

Touch
External device

Sampling Time

Data001

Data002

Data003

01/01/2011 12:00:00

20

120

201

01/01/2011 12:10:00

21

121

204

01/01/2011 12:20:00

22

122

206

01/01/2011 12:30:00

23

123

206

01/01/2011 12:40:00

24

124

210

01/01/2011 12:50:00

25

125

218

Sample values of devices

If the saved data exceeds the Data Log data storage amount per device, the old data is deleted and the new data is saved.
New data

Oldest data(delete)Data Log data storage amount per device

When the backup battery is depleted, the data in the Data Log is erased when the Touch is turned off.

Data Storage Amount
When saving the sampled data to the data storage area, set the data storage amount per device. The amount of datathat can be saved in the data storage area is calculated from the configured data storage amount per device and dataamount for each channel.
The maximum amount of data that can be saved in the data storage area is 12,528. When saving two devices, thenumber of data that can be saved in the data storage area is 6,264.
● Deleting Data
The method to delete sampled data from the data storage area is as follows.
• On the Online tab in WindO/I-NV3, click the arrow under Clear, and then click All or Data Log Data. For details,
refer to Chapter 23 “4 Clear” on page 23-22.
• Press Main Menu on the Top Page in the System Mode, Initial Setting, Initialize, Data Log in order.

14-6

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Overview

1.5 Using the Data
The saved data can be used in the following ways.
Data Log data
Sampling Time

Data001

Data002

Data003

01/01/2011 12:00:00

20

120

201

01/01/2011 12:10:00

21

121

204

01/01/2011 12:20:00

22

122

206

01/01/2011 12:30:00

23

123

206

01/01/2011 12:40:00

24

124

210

To use with the Touch• Display the data in the Line Chart
Configure the data channel numbers and data
numbers and display the data in the Line Chart.
For details, refer to “4.1 Display the Data in the Line
Chart” on page 14-25.

To use with devices other than the Touch• Save to and read from an external memory
Data Log data is saved in a CSV file format into theexternal memory which it can be read on yourcomputer.
For details, refer to “4.3 Saving Data as a CSV File”
on page 14-37.
Book1

Sampling Time

Data001
Data002
Data003

Data002

Data003

Data004

Data Log data
(CSV)

14
Data Log Function• Display the data with the Numerical Input or the
Numerical Display
Copy the data to an internal device and display it with
the Numerical Input or the Numerical Display.
For details, refer to “4.2 Displaying Data as Numerical
Values” on page 14-27.

Data001

24
124
210

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

14-7

2 Data Log Function Configuration Procedure

2

Data Log Function Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for the Data Log function.

2.1 Configuring the Sampling Condition and Devices for Sampling Data
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Data Log.
The Data Log Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the channel number to register the Data Log settings to in Settings, then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.

14-8

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Data Log Function Configuration Procedure

3 On the General tab, under Log function, select Enable.

4 Select the data size for the source device in Data Size.
5 Specify the device for sampling data in Source.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

6 Select the condition for sampling data under Sampling Method.
■ Fixed Period
Samples the value of source device at a fixed interval. If Fixed Period is selected, specify Time in seconds.

Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
■ Event Word
Samples the value of source device each time the value of monitored word device changes. Specify the word device
to monitor as the condition for sampling data in Device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

14-9

14
Data Log Function■ Event Bit
Samples the value of source device each time the monitored bit device or bit of the word device changes from 0 to 1.
If Event Bit is selected, specify the device to monitor as the condition for sampling data in Device.

2 Data Log Function Configuration Procedure

7 Click the Data tab.

The channel number selected on the General tab is displayed in Channel No.

8 In Number of Data, specify the number of devices to sample starting with the source device configured on the
General tab.

The sequential devices from the starting address for the number of configured devices are displayed in Settings.

9 Enter the label to display in the sampling time column when the data is output as CSV under Sampling Time, in Label.
To use text registered in Text Manager, select the Use Text Manager check box and specify the ID number of thetext to use as the label.
Click

to open Text Manager where you can edit the text.

10 Configure the details in Settings.

To batch register all the data settings for all data numbers, click Auto.
To individually register the data settings for each data number, select a data number, and then click Edit.

The dialog box that corresponds to each button is displayed.
An example when Edit is clicked is described here.

11 Check that the data number selected under Settings in Data No. is displayed.
12 Select the display type for the sampled value of device with Display Type.
The display type selected here is the display type for the numerical values when the data is output as CSV.

13 Select the data type for the sampled value of device with Data Type.
The data type selected here is the data type for the numerical values when the data is output as CSV.

14-10

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Data Log Function Configuration Procedure

14 Enter the text to display in the data label in Label.
The text entered here is the label row for the data number columns when the data is output as CSV.
If you selected the Use Text Manager check box on the Data tab, specify the ID number for the text to use in thelabel.

15 Click OK to close the Data Settings dialog box.
To individually register Data Log settings on the Individual Settings dialog box, repeat steps 11 through 14.

16 Click OK to close the Individual Settings dialog box.
17 Repeat steps 2 through 16 to register Data Log settings for all of the channel numbers to use.
18 Specify the Data Log data storage amount per device.
Click
box.

for Number of Stored Data for Data Log per Device to display the Data Storage Area Management dialog

Increase the number for Number of Stored Data for Data Log per Device.
Click OK to close the Data Storage Area Management dialog box.

14
Data Log Function

19 Click OK.
The Data Log Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the sampling conditions and devices for sampling data.
Next, configure the functions to execute using sampled data.
 “4.1 Display the Data in the Line Chart” on page 14-25
 “4.2 Displaying Data as Numerical Values” on page 14-27
 “4.3 Saving Data as a CSV File” on page 14-37

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

14-11

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box

3

Data Log Settings Dialog Box
This section describes the items and buttons on the Data Log Settings dialog box and the Individual Settings dialog box.

3.1 Data Log Settings Dialog Box
All the devices to sample values from and their sampling conditions are collectively managed in the Data Log Settings
dialog box.

■ Settings
Edits the Data Log settings for each channel.
Channel No.:Log function:

Data Size:
Source:Sampling Method:
Data Size:

Range:

14-12

Shows the channel number. Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box
where you can edit the settings. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” onpage 14-14.
Shows whether or not the Data Log function is used. Double clicking the cell switches between
Enable and Disable. If switched to Disable, that channel’s settings all return to the default
settings.
Shows the data size for the source device. Double clicking the cell switches between 16-bit and32-bit. This option can only be set when Enable is selected in Log Function.
Specifies the device to sample values from. Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address
Settings dialog box where you can edit the device address. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61. This option can only
be set when Enable is selected in Log Function.
The size of the data to sample is 16 bits.
Shows the condition for sampling data. Double clicking the cell switches between Fixed Period,
Event Bit, and Event Word. This option can only be set when Enable is selected in Log Function.
Shows the data size for the device that is the sampling condition. Double clicking the cell switches
between 16-bit and 32-bit. This option can only be set when Event Word is selected in Sampling
Method.
Shows the time in seconds (1 to 9999) to sample data in a fixed interval when Fixed Period isselected in Sampling Method. Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box
where you can edit the settings. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 1414.
Shows the device that is the condition for sampling data when Event Bit or Event Word isselected in Sampling Method. Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address Settings
dialog box where you can edit the device address. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box

Monitor:Batch:

Real Time:

No. of Data*1:

Shows the write destination device for the amount of data when monitoring the amount ofsampled data. Shows No when not monitoring. Double clicking the cell displays the Individual
Settings dialog box where you can edit the settings. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings
Dialog Box” on page 14-14. This option can only be set when Enable is selected in Log
Function.
Shows the trigger device that triggers batch output when batch outputting all the data saved in
the data storage area to the external memory. Shows No when there is no batch output. Double
clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box where you can edit the settings. For
details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 14-14.
Shows whether or not to perform real time output. Double clicking the cell switches between
Yes and No. Data is output to the external memory in 3 minute intervals for Yes channels. This
option can only be set when Enable is selected in Log Function.
Shows the number of devices to sample in a channel. Double clicking the cell displays theIndividual Settings dialog box where you can edit the settings. For details, refer to “3.2
Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 14-14. This option can only be set when Enable isselected in Log Function.

■ EditRegisters or changes the settings for the selected channel number.
Select a channel number, and then click this button to display the Individual Settings dialog box. The settings for theselected channel are reflected in the Individual Settings dialog box.
For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 14-14.
■ Up
Shifts the selected settings upward in the list.
■ Down
Shifts the selected settings downward in the list.
■ Clear Log Data
Select this check box to erase the data saved in the data storage area.
(Trigger device):

Specifies the bit device that triggers the erasure of the data. The data for all channels is erased
when the value of the configured device changes from 0 to 1. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

■ Number of Stored Data for Data Log per Device
Shows the maximum amount of data storage per device for Data Log data saved in the data storage area. If data is
saved up the maximum amount and then the maximum is exceeded, the old data is deleted and the new data is saved.
The default is 0.

*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

14-13

Data Log Function

Click
to display the Data Storage Area Management dialog box where you can change the allocation of data
storage area memory. For details, refer to Chapter 16 “Data Storage Area” on page 16-1.

14

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box

3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box
Use the Individual Settings dialog box to register or edit the Data Log settings for the selected channel.
● General Tab
The General tab is used to configure the source devices for sampling data and the sampling conditions.

■ Channel No.
Specifies the channel number for sampling data (1 to 20).
■ Log function
Selects whether or not to use the Data Log function.
Enable:Samples values of devices and saves the data along with the sampling time.

Disable:Does not sample values of devices.

■ Data Size*1
Selects the data size of the source device as 16-bit or 32-bit.
The value of device in the selected data size is read and saved in the data storage area.
■ Source
Specifies the word device that is the source for sampling data.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

*1 Advanced mode only

14-14

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box■ Sampling Method
Sets the condition for sampling values of devices.
Fixed Period:

Samples the value of source device at a fixed interval.
Time (sec):

Specifies the time in seconds (1 to 9999).
This option can only be set when Fixed Period is selected.

Event Bit:

Samples the value of source device each time the bit device or bit of the word device changes from0 to 1.

Event Word:

Samples the value of source device each time the value of word device changes.
Device:Specifies the word device that triggers sampling data.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-61.
This option can only be set when Event Bit or Event Word is selected.

■ Monitor Number of Stored Data
Select this check box to monitor the number of times values of devices are sampled. The sampling count is written to
the specified device. The maximum sampling count is 12,528.
(Destination Device): Specifies the destination word device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” onpage 2-61.
Report when Sampling Count has reached or exceeded Threshold*1:
Writes 1 in the report device when the current sampling count reaches orexceeds the set threshold.
Threshold*1:

Specifies the sampling count (1 to 12,528) that is the basis for reporting.

Report Device*1:

Specifies the destination bit device or the destination bit of the word device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-61.

■ Monitor % Space Used in Data Storage Area
Select this check box to monitor the usage of the allocated data storage area as the save destination for Data Log
data. The usage is calculated from the data storage amount allocated to the data storage area and the amount ofsaved data, and then written to the specified device.
Usage = Current amount of Data Log data ÷ Data Log data storage amount per device (omits values after the decimal point)

Report when % Space Used has reached or exceeded Threshold*1:
Writes 1 in the report device when the current usage reaches or exceeds theset threshold.
Threshold*1:

Specifies the usage (1 to 100) that is the basis for reporting.

Report Device*1:

Specifies the destination bit device or the destination bit of the word device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-61.

*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

14-15

14
Data Log Function(Destination Device): Specifies the destination word device to write the current usage of the amount of Data Log data storage.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” onpage 2-61.

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box● External Memory Tab
The External Memory tab is used to configure whether or not to output saved data to the external memory.

The output data is stored in the following folder on the external memory.
\External memory folder\DATALOG
The default External Memory Folder name is “HGDATA01”. For details, refer to Chapter 26 “1.5 Setting the External
Memory Folder” on page 26-12.
Data that is sampled after starting output to the external memory is not included in the output data.

14-16

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box■ BatchSelect this check box to batch output all the sampled data to the external memory.
Touch

Output to
USB flash drive

Data Log data
Sampling Time

Data001

Data002

Data003

01/01/2011 12:00:30

20

120

201

01/01/2011 12:01:30

21

121

204

01/01/2011 12:02:30

22

122

206

01/01/2011 12:03:30

23

123

206

01/01/2011 12:04:30

24

124

210

01/01/2011 12:05:30

25

125

210

Trigger Device

01/01/2011 12:06:30

26

126

218

0

USB flash drive

Data to be output
(all)

1

Data Log data (CSV)

All the data is saved on the external memory when the trigger devices changes from 0 to 1. If a file with the same
name already exists on the external memory, that file is overwritten. The maximum amount of output data is theamount configured by the data storage area or 1,024.
Output stops if there is insufficient free space on the external memory. USB flash drive error information isstored in HMI Special Data Register LSD33.
Trigger Device:

Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device that triggers batch output. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 261.
Data is output to file when the trigger device changes from 0 to 1.

File Name:Enter the file name for the output data or shows the file name.
The default is “LOGOn.CSV”. (n: Data log channel number)
To change the file name, enter a new file name. The maximum number is 120 characters(including the extension).
Add Device data to File Name*1:

Select this check box to add the bottom three digits of thevalue of device configured by File Name Device to theend of file name for the output data.

File Name Device:

Specifies the word device that is the source for the value to
add to the file name. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-61. This option can only be configured
when the Add Device data to File Name check box isselected.

*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

14-17

14
Data Log Function

Example: When the channel number is 1 and the value of
device configured by File Name Device is 123,
the file name is “LOGO01123.CSV”.

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box■ Real Time
Select this check box to output data to the external memory in real time.
Touch

Output to
USB flash drive

Data Log data
Sampling Time

Data001

Data002

Data003

01/01/2011 12:00:30

20

120

201

01/01/2011 12:01:30

21

121

204

01/01/2011 12:02:30

22

122

206

01/01/2011 12:03:30

23

123

206

01/01/2011 12:04:30

24

124

210

01/01/2011 12:05:30

25

125

210

01/01/2011 12:06:30

26

126

218

USB flash drive

Data to be output
3 minutes after
operation starts
Data to be output
3 minutes after that
Data to be output
after another3 minutes

3 minute interval
after operation
startsData Log data (CSV)With real time output, data is saved to the external memory in three minute intervals after the Touch starts running.
When there is already data with the same file name on the external memory, data is appended to that file. If there
was no update to the data during the three minutes, it is not output.
Data is appended to the file until the size of the file reaches the restriction size (256 MB), so the maximum amount of output
data differs according to the settings for the output channel such as the amount of data, the data size, and the labels.
If the sampling interval is shorter than real time output (the interval for writing to the external memory), that Data
Log is recorded up to the data storage amount - 1, and then afterwards, old data is discarded in order and replacedwith new data.
Real time output stops when the file size of the Data Log data exceeds 256 MB or when there is insufficientspace on the external memory. USB flash drive error information is stored in HMI Special Data Register
LSD33.
• When the value of HMI Special Internal Relay LSM18 changes from 0 to 1, the data at that time is first
output in real time to the USB flash drive, and then access to the USB flash drive is stopped.
• The text font configured for the starting device is output as the label font.
• You can check the free space on the USB flash drive with HMI Special Data Registers LSD34 to 35.
File Name:Enter the file name for the output data or shows the file name.
The default is “LOGAn.CSV”. (n: Data log channel number)
To change the file name, enter a new file name. The maximum number is 120 characters (including
the extension).
Add Device data to File Name*1:

Select this check box to add the bottom three digits of thevalue of device configured by File Name Device to the end of
the file name for the output data.
Example: When the channel number is 1 and the value of
device configured by File Name Device is 123, thefile name is “LOGA01123.CSV”.

File Name Device:

Specifies the word device that is the source for the value to add
to the file name. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” onpage 2-61. This option can only be configured when the Add
Device data to File Name check box is selected.

• The function to sample data operates when Data Log data is being saved to the external memory.
• The methods to erase Data Log files saved on the external memory are as follows.
- To erase files during operation using parts, on the External Memory tab on the Project Settings dialog
box, select the Remove Files and the All Data Log files check boxes, and then configure the trigger
device. Assign that trigger device to a part.
- To erase files with WindO/I-NV3, click Clear on the Online tab, and then click Stored Data inExternal Memory to display the Clear Data dialog box. Select the Data Log Data check box, and thenclick OK.
*1 Advanced mode only

14-18

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box● Data Tab
The Data tab is used to configure the data to sample.

■ Channel No.
Shows the selected channel number.
■ Number of Data
Specifies the number of devices (1 to 128) for sampling data. Samples values of devices in this amount starting withthe device configured as the source device on the General tab.

■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box to use text registered in Text Manager for labels when outputting data as CSV.
■ LabelSampling Time:

Specifies the label to display in the sampling time column when outputting data as CSV.
Text ID

Specifies the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) when text registered in Text
Manager are used for labels.
Click

to open Text Manager where you can edit the text.

This option is only enabled if you select the Use Text Manager check box.
(Text)

Enter the text to display in the label. The maximum number is 40 characters.
Text can only be entered when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared. The
registered text is displayed when a text ID is specified.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

14-19

Data Log Function

The maximum amount of data that can be configured for one channel is 128. However, if 32-bit is selected
for Data Size, it is counted as 16-bit data times 2 devices, so the maximum number devices that can be
configured for one channel is 64. Data Size is configured with the General tab on the Individual Settings
dialog box.

14

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box■ Settings
Settings is used to configure the details of the data to sample for each data number in the selected channel.
Data No.:Shows the data numbers for the amount of data specified by Number of Data. Double clicking
the cell displays the Data Settings dialog box. The data number cannot be edited. For details, refer
to “Auto-Setup Dialog Box and Data Settings Dialog Box” on page 14-21.

Device:Shows the device as sequential numbers starting with the source device specified on the Generaltab. Double clicking the cell displays the Data Settings dialog box. The device cannot be edited. For
details, refer to “Auto-Setup Dialog Box and Data Settings Dialog Box” on page 14-21.

Display Type:Shows the display type for numerical values when data is output as CSV. Double clicking the cell
displays the Data Settings dialog box where you can edit the data settings. For details, refer to“Auto-Setup Dialog Box and Data Settings Dialog Box” on page 14-21.

Data Type:Shows the data type for numerical values when data is output as CSV. Double clicking the cell
displays the Data Settings dialog box where you can edit the data settings. For details, refer to“Auto-Setup Dialog Box and Data Settings Dialog Box” on page 14-21.

Text ID:

Shows the Text Manager ID number when text registered in Text Manager is used for labels.
Double clicking the cell opens Text Manager where you can edit the text.
Text ID is only displayed when you select the Use Text Manager check box.

Label:

Shows the text to display as labels when data is output as CSV. Double clicking the cell allows you
to edit the label. The maximum number is 40 characters.
Text can only be entered when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The default label is “Data” and the data number.
Example: Data001■ AutoBatch registers or changes the settings for all the data.
Click this button to display the Auto-Setup dialog box. The details configured on the Auto-Setup dialog box are
registered for all the data.
For details, refer to “Auto-Setup Dialog Box and Data Settings Dialog Box” on page 14-21.
■ EditRegisters or changes the settings for the selected data.
Select the data, and then click this button to display the Data Settings dialog box. The details configured on the Data
Settings dialog box are registered or changed for the selected data.
For details, refer to “Auto-Setup Dialog Box and Data Settings Dialog Box” on page 14-21.

14-20

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box

Auto-Setup Dialog Box and Data Settings Dialog Box
With the Auto-Setup dialog box, all the data for the selected channel is batch registered or changed.
With the Data Settings dialog box, the selected data for the selected channel is registered or changed.

Data No.:

Displays 1 when the Auto-Setup dialog box was displayed by clicking Auto.
Displays the data number for the selected data when the Data Settings dialog box was displayedby clicking Edit.

Display Type:

Select the display type as Decimal or Hexadecimal for numerical values when data is output as
CSV.

Data Type:

Select the data type for numerical values when data is output as CSV. For details, refer to Chapter
2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
When float32 is selected, the maximum number of digits for the integer part is 10 and thenumber of digits for the decimal part is 5.

Text ID:

Specifies the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) when text registered in Text Manager areused for labels. For the Auto-Setup dialog box, Text ID is automatically configured sequentiallystarting with the specified text ID.
Click

to open Text Manager where you can edit the text.

Text ID can only be configured when you select the Use Text Manager check box.
Label:

Enter the text to display as the label when data is output as CSV. The maximum number is 40
characters.
The default label is Data+number.
Example: Data001
This item is only displayed on the Data Settings dialog box when the Use Text Manager checkbox is cleared.

14
Data Log Function

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

14-21

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box● Options Tab
The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode. To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced on the Data Log
Settings dialog box.
To display the data saved in the data storage area as numerical values on the Touch, copy this data to the specified
internal device.

■ Copy Data Log Data
Select this check box to copy data to a device.
Destination Device: Specifies the destination device for copied data. You can only specify an internal device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-61.

14-22

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box■ Starting Point
Selects the starting point of the data to copy.
Newest Data:

Sets the starting point as the newest data.

Oldest Data:

Sets the starting point as the oldest data.

Specify by Value of Device:

Specifies which data from the oldest data to set as the starting point.
Specifies the source word device. You can only specify an internal device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Example: 1. For Newest Data, the starting point is the newest sampling time data.
2. For Oldest Data, the starting point is the oldest sampling time data.
3. For Specify by Value of Device and source device: 3, the starting point is the third item of data fromthe oldest sampling time data.
Data Log data
Sampling Time
2. Oldest Data read starting point → 12/18/2011 17:44:10
12/18/2011 18:34:10
3. Specify by Value of Device read starting point (source device: 3) → 12/19/2011 19:24:43
12/19/2011 20:01:54
12/19/2011 21:39:21
1. Newest Data read starting point → 12/20/2011 05:57:06

Value
20
21
22
24
26
28

■ Number of Data
Selects the specification method for the amount of data to copy.
Value:

Uses a constant.
Specifies the amount to copy (1 to 64).

Device:Uses a word device.
Specifies the source word device. You can only specify an internal device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-61.
The maximum amount of data that can be copied to the internal device is 64.

14

From Newest to Oldest:

Of the data to copy, copies from the start point in order of the newest data first.

From Oldest to Newest:

Of the data to copy, copies from the start point in order of the oldest data first.

Example: When Starting Point is Newest Data and Number of Data is 3, data is copied in the following order
starting from device LDR10 configured in Destination Device.
Data Log data
Sampling Time Value
12/18/2011 17:44:10
20::
12/19/2011 19:24:43
22
12/19/2011 20:01:54
24
12/19/2011 21:39:21
26
Newest dataread starting point → 12/20/2011 05:57:06
28

Amount of data: 3

Configured device →Configured device →Destination Device Value
LDR10
28 ← Copy from newest data
LDR11
26
L D R1224

Destination Device Value
LDR10
24 ← Copy from oldest data
LDR11
26
LDR12
28

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

14-23

Data Log Function■ Stored Order of Data
Selects the order to copy data.

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box■ Target Data
Selects the data to copy from the Data Log data.
Sampling Time:

Select this check box to copy the sampling time data from the Data Log data. When this checkbox is selected, values of devices are copied in order from the data for data number 1.

Value of Device:

Select this check box to copy the value of device from the Data Log data.
Data No.:

Selects the specification method for the data number of the value to copy.
Value:

Uses a constant.

Device:Uses a word device.

Start No.:Of the data to copy, specifies the data number of the data to start
copying.
If you select Value, specify the data number (1 to 128).
If you select Device, specify the source device. You can only
specify an internal device. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” onpage 2-61.
When the Sampling Time check box is selected, the data number
is 1. This cannot be changed.

End No.:Of the data to copy, specifies the data number of the data to end
copying.
If you select Value, specify the data number (1 to 128).
If you select Device, specify the source device. You can only
specify an internal device. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” onpage 2-61.

Example: When Start No. is 2 and End No. is 4, data 2 to 4 is the copy target.
Start No.
Data No.:End No.

1

2

3

4

5

↓

↓

↓

↓

↓

Sampling Time

Data 1

Data 2

Data 3

Data 4

Data 5

10/01/2011 12:34:56

100

60

240

60

240

10/02/2011 03:45:12

200

80

450

80

450

Copy target■ Trigger Condition
Selects the condition to start copying.
Always:Copies each time the data is updated.

Device:Specifies the device that triggers the start of copying the data. Copies the data when the valueof the specified device changes from 0 to 1.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-61.

14-24

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Using the Data

4

Using the Data

4.1 Display the Data in the Line Chart
You can display the sampled data in the Line Chart.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Charts, and then click Line Chart.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Line Chart.
3 Double-click the dropped Line Chart and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.

4 On the General tab, select Chart Type as Log Trend (Normal) or Log Trend (Pen Recorder).

14
Data Log Function

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

14-25

4 Using the Data

5 Click the Pen (Log) tab.

6 Specify Channel No. and Data No. for the data to display in the chart.
Click Data Log Settings to display the Data Log Settings dialog box where you can configure the channel
while checking the data to display. Select Channel No. under Settings, and then click OK to close theData Settings dialog box. Channel No. reflects the selected channel number.

7 Select Line Type, Line Size, and Line Color.
8 Click Set.
The data to display in the chart is registered in the channel number (Ch1 to Ch20) for the chart selected in Settings.

9 Repeat steps 6 through 8 to register the data to display in the chart.
10 Click OK.
The Properties dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the Line Chart.

14-26

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Using the Data

4.2 Displaying Data as Numerical Values
You can display data in the Numerical Display by copying data saved in the data storage area to an internal device
according to the conditions configured with the Options tab on the Individual Settings dialog box.
● Copying Data to Internal Devices
Copying Sampling Time Data
Sampling time data is copied as a BCD value to the six sequential devices starting with the device configured by
Destination Device.
The sampling time data is copied in year, month, day, hour, minute, second order regardless of the Stored Order ofData setting.
■ Example
When the sampling time 10/01/2011 12:01:30 is copied to the destination device
Data Log data
Sampling TimeValue

10/01/2011 12:01:30

20

Destination Device Value
Configured device →

LDR10
LDR11

2011 ← Year10 ← Month

LDR12

1

← Day

LDR13
LDR14

12
1

← Hour← Minute

LDR15

30

← Second

Data Read Start Position and Copy Order of Data to the Destination Device
The data to copy and the order differs according to the Starting Point and the Stored Order for Data settings.
■ Example 1
Copying three items of the newest data in the Data Log to the destination device
Item

Setting

Destination Device

LDR10

Starting Point

Newest Data

Number of Data

3

Stored Order of Data

From Newest to Oldest

14

Data Log data

:

:

LDR11

26

12/19/2011 19:24:43
12/19/2011 20:01:54

22
24

LDR12

24

12/19/2011 21:39:21
Newest dataread starting point → 12/20/2011 05:57:06

26
28

Amount of data: 3

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

14-27

Data Log Function

Sampling Time Value
Destination Device Value
12/18/2011 17:44:10
20 Configured device →LDR1028 ← Copy from newest data

4 Using the Data

■ Example 2
Copying three items of the newest data in the Data Log in order from the oldest to the destination device
Item

Setting

Destination Device

LDR10

Starting Point

Newest Data

Number of Data

3

Stored Order of Data

From Oldest to Newest

Data Log data
Sampling TimeValue

12/18/2011 17:44:10:

20:

12/19/2011 19:24:43

22

12/19/2011 20:01:54
12/19/2011 21:39:21

24
26

Newest dataread starting point → 12/20/2011 05:57:06

Destination Device Value
Configured device →

LDR10
LDR11

24
26

LDR12

28

← Copy from oldest data

28

Amount of data: 3■ Example 3
Setting the starting point to the fourth item of the oldest data in the Data Log and copying three items of data fromthe newest to the destination device
Item

Setting

Destination Device

LDR10

Starting Point

Specify by Value of Device (value is 4)

Number of Data

3

Stored Order of Data

From Newest to Oldest

Data Log data
Sampling TimeValue

12/18/2011 17:44:10

20

LDR10

28

Specify by Value of Device 12/19/2011 07:24:09
read starting point
12/19/2011 19:24:43

21

LDR11

26

22
24

LDR12

24

(Source device: 4) → 12/19/2011 20:01:54
12/19/2011 21:39:21

26

12/20/2011 05:57:06
12/20/2011 15:26:17

28
29

12/21/2011 06:46:57

31

Destination Device Value
Configured device →Amount of data: 3

14-28

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual← Copy from newest data

4 Using the Data

Copying Data when 32-bit is Selected as the Data Size
When 32-bit is selected for Data Size on the General tab on the Individual Settings dialog box, two destination
devices are required for a single item of data.
■ Example 1
Copying the newest data in the Data Log with the data size selected as 32-bit to the destination device LDR 10.
Item

Setting

Destination Device

LDR 10Starting Point

Newest Data

Number of Data

2

Data Size

32-bitStored Order of Data

From Newest to Oldest

Data log data
Sampling TimeValue

12/18/2011 17:44:10

87654321
(hex)

:

:

Destination Device Value
Configured device→

12345678
12/19/2011 19:24:43(hex)
12/19/2011 20:01:54

LDR 103344 ←Copy from newest data

LDR 11

1122

LDR 12

7788

LDR 13

5566

55667788(hex)

Newest data
11223344
12/19/2011 21:39:21(hex)
read starting point→

Amount of data: 2

The data copy order for the device selected with a data size of 32-bit is configured on the Project Settings
dialog box, on the System tab, with Storage Method of 32-bit Numerical Data. For details, refer to
Chapter 3 “3.1 System Tab” on page 3-19.

14
Data Log Function

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

14-29

4 Using the Data

Copying Multiple Items of Data
When copying multiple items of data, first all the sampling times for the data are copied in order starting with thedevice configured as the destination device, then the values of devices for all the data are copied in order.
For example, data is copied in this order: first sampling time → second sampling time → ... → first data 1 value of
device → first data 2 value of device → second data 1 value of device → second data 2 value of device and so on.
■ Example 1: When the amount of data is greater than the data to copy
When the sampling time and values of devices from data start number 1 to end number 3 are copied to thedestination device as two items of data
Item

Setting

Destination Device

LDR10

Starting Point

Newest Data

Number of Data

2

Stored Order of Data

From Oldest to Newest
Sampling Time, Value of Device

Target Data

Data No.: Start No. 1, End No. 3

Data Log data
Sampling Time

Data 1

Data 2

Data 3

Data 410/01/2011 12:00:30

10

40

100

20

120

1.

10/01/2011 12:34:56

100

60

240

30

200

2.

10/02/2011 03:45:12

200

80

450

70

400

3.

4.

5.
Configured device →

1.

2.

3.
4.
5.

14-30

Data 5← Newest Data read starting point

Destination Device

Value

LDR10

2011

LDR11

10

LDR12

01

LDR13

12

LDR14

34

LDR15

56

LDR16

2011

LDR17

10

LDR18

02

LDR19

03

LDR20

45

← Copy from oldest data

← First sampling time

← Second sampling time

LDR21

12

LDR22

100

← First data 1 value

LDR23

200

← Second data 1 value

LDR24

60

← First data 2 value

LDR25

80

← Second data 2 value

LDR26

240

← First data 3 value

LDR27

450

← Second data 3 value

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Using the Data

■ Example 2: When the amount of data is less than the data to copy
When the sampling time and values of devices from data start number 1 to end number 3 are copied to thedestination device as two items of data
Item

Setting

Destination Device

LDR10

Starting Point

Newest Data

Number of Data

2

Stored Order of Data

From Oldest to Newest
Sampling Time, Value of Device

Target Data

Data No.: Start No. 1, End No. 3

Data Log data
Sampling Time

Data 1

10/01/2011 12:00:30

10

Data 2 Data 3 (no data)40

1.

10/01/2011 12:34:56

100

60

2.

10/02/2011 03:45:12

200

80

3.

4.

← Newest Data read starting point

Configured device →

1.

2.

3.
4.

Value

LDR10

2011

LDR11

10

LDR12

01

LDR13

12

LDR14

34

LDR15

56

LDR16

2011

LDR17

10

LDR18

02

LDR19

03

LDR20

45

LDR21

12

LDR22

100

← First data 1 value

LDR23

200

← Second data 1 value

LDR24

60

← First data 2 value

LDR25

80

← Second data 2 value

LDR26

0

← First data 3 value

LDR27

0

← Second data 3 value← Copy from oldest data

← First sampling time

← Second sampling time

When writing with the following settings, “Device range error” is displayed.
• Starting Point is 0 or a value larger than the amount of saved data
• Start No. is 0 or a value larger than Data No.
• End No. is 0 or a value larger than Data No.
• Start No. is a value larger than End No.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

14-31

14
Data Log Function

If the amount of data in the Data Log is lessthan the data to copy, 0 is stored

Destination Device

4 Using the Data

● Displaying Data on the Numerical Display
You can copy sampled data to an internal device and display it with the Numerical Display.

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Data Log.
The Data Log Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Click Advanced.
The dialog box switches to Advanced mode.

3 Under Settings, select the channel number for the data to display numerical values of on the Numerical Display, thenclick Edit.

The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.

14-32

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Using the Data

4 Select Enable for Log function on the General tab and configure Data Size, Source, and Sampling Method.
5 Specify the number of devices to sample in Number of Data on the Data tab, and configure Display Type andData Type for each item of data in Settings.

6 Click the Options tab.

7 Select the Copy Data Log Data check box.
8 Specify the destination device for the copied data in Destination Device.
You can only specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

9 Select the data that is the start point for copying data in Starting Point.

■ Oldest Data
Set the starting point to read as the oldest data.
■ Specify by Value of Device
Specifies which data from the oldest data to set as the starting point to read by value of device, and sets that data as
the starting point to read.
Specifies the source word device. You can only specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

14-33

Data Log Function■ Newest Data
Set the starting point to read as the newest data.

14

4 Using the Data

10 Select the specification method for the amount of data to copy in Number of Data.
■ Value
Use a constant.
Specifies the amount to copy (1 to 64).
■ Device
Use a word device.
Specifies the source word device. You can only specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
The maximum amount of data that can be copied to the internal device is 64.

11 Select the order to copy data in Stored Order of Data.
■ From Newest to Oldest
Of the data to copy, copies from the start point in order of the newest data first.
■ From Oldest to Newest
Of the data to copy, copies from the start point in order of the oldest data first.

12 Select the data to copy from the data in Target Data.
Select the Sampling Time check box to copy the sampling time data from the data.
Select the Value of Device check box to copy the value of device from the data. When not copying the value of
device, proceed to step 15.

13 Select the specification method for the data number to copy the value in Data No..
■ Value
Use a constant.
■ Device
Use a word device.

14 Specify the data number of the data to start copying out of the data to copy with Start No..
If you select Value, specify the data number (1 to 128).
If you select Device, specify the source device. You can only specify an internal device. Clickto display theDevice Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-61.
When the Sampling Time check box is selected, the data number is 1. This cannot be changed.

15 Specify the data number of the data to end copying out of the data to copy with End No..
If you select Value, specify the data number (1 to 128).
If you select Device, specify the source device. You can only specify an internal device. Clickto display theDevice Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-61.

16 Select the condition to start copying in Trigger Condition.
■ Always
Copies each time the data is updated.
■ Device
Specifies the device that triggers the start of copying the data. Copies the data when the value of the specified devicechanges from 0 to 1. Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

17 Click OK to close the Individual Settings dialog box.

14-34

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Using the Data

18 Click OK to close the Data Log Settings dialog box.
19 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Numerical Display.

20 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Numerical Display.
21 Double-click the dropped Numerical Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.

22 Select the display type for the copied data with Display Type on the General tab.

14
Data Log Function

23 Select the data type for the copied data in Data Type under Data Format.
24 Specify the number of digits to display in Digits under Data Format.
The range of digits that can be set differs according to the display type and data type.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

14-35

4 Using the Data

25 Specify the source device for the copied data in Display Device under Display Method.
For sequential devices of the amount of data to copy starting with Destination Device configured on the Options
tab on the Data Log Settings Individual Settings dialog box, set Display Device for each Numerical Display to thosedevices.
Example: When Destination Device is LDR10, Number of Data is 3
Specify three Numerical Displays with Display Device specified as LDR10, LDR11 and LDR12
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

26 Click OK.
The Properties dialog box closes.

27 Repeat step 17 through 26 to configure the Numerical Displays for the amount of data to copy.
This concludes configuring the Numerical Display.
Data Log data

Touch
External device

126

Sampling Time

Data001

01/01/2011 12:00:30

120

01/01/2011 12:01:30

121

01/01/2011 12:02:30

122

01/01/2011 12:03:30

123

01/01/2011 12:04:30

124

01/01/2011 12:05:30

125

01/01/2011 12:06:30

126

125
124

Copy
LDR10 : 126
LDR11 : 125
LDR12 : 124(Internal device)

14-36

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Using the Data

4.3 Saving Data as a CSV File
● Saving Data as a CSV FileThe Data Log data can be saved to the external memory as a CSV file.
The procedure to save the data is as follows.
On the WindO/I-NV3 System Setup tab, click Data Log to display the Data Log Settings dialog box. Select achannel number to save to the external memory, and then click Edit to display the Individual Settings dialog box.
Select an output method check box on the External Memory tab and configure the items. The data can be saved to
the External Memory Folder on the external memory. For details, refer to “External Memory Tab” on page 14-16.
Files saved to external memory are read using WindO/I-NV3.
On the WindO/I-NV3 Online tab, click the arrow under Upload, and then click Data in external memory
to display the Upload from external memory dialog box. Select the Data Log Data check box, specify thelocation to save the files in Path, and then click OK to be able to save the files in the specified folder.
● Data Structure and Output Example
The data structure of the output file is as follows. The data structure for files output with batch output and real time
output is the same.
Bold items are replaced by the Data Log settings, sampled data, project file name, and WindO/I-NV3 version.

Headers“Project Name”,”Project name”,”Version number”“File Type”,”Log type”
Blank row
“Channel No.”,”Channel number”“Source”,”Source device”“Sampling Method”,”Sampling condition (type)”“Sampling condition (label)”,”Sampling condition (configuration details)”
Blank row

Label row

“Label (sampling time)”,”Label (data number 1)”,”Label (data number 2)”... times the amount of data

Data row“MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS”,Data number 1 data value,Data number 2 data value... times the amount of
data
·
·
·

Output example

Data size of each row“Channel No.”,”1”“Source”,”LDR 100”“Sampling Method”,”Fixed Period”“Time[Sec]”,”1”“Sampling Time”,”Data001”,”Data002”“08/23/2011 18:32:04”,171,234- 41 bytes- 29 bytes- 2 bytes- 19 bytes- 20 bytes- 34 bytes- 17 bytes- 2 bytes- 37 bytes- 32 bytes···• The data size for each row is counted as two bytes for full-width characters, one byte for characters, andtwo bytes for newlines. The total for each row is the total amount of space for the file.
• A space is inserted before the year in the data row.
• The display type for the date and time differs according to the language configured in Project Settings,
on the Project Details tab, in Language.
Japanese: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic: MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

14
Data Log Function“Project Name”,”Dimmer Console”,”V1.00”“File Type”,”Data Log Data”

14-37

4 Using the Data

14-38

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualChapter 15 Operation Log Function
This chapter describes how to configure the Operation Log function and its operation on the Touch.

1

Overview

1.1 How the Operation Log Function is Used
The Operation Log function records events that have occurred on the Touch, including user operations such aspressing a button or changing the operation mode.
You can perform the following actions using the Operation Log function.
• Record turning on the Touch power
Touch

Touch
Power ON130
12:00
Run Mode• Record switching the Base Screen
Touch

Touch
Switch to Base Screen

130

Tank 1
Full

12:01
Base Screen 2

Base Screen 1• Record changing the user
Touch

Touch
Change Users

130

130

15

12:02
User2

User1

Operation Log Function

Group parts not displayed on User2 screen• Record changing the operation mode
Touch

Touch
Change Operation Modes

130
12:03
Run Mode

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

System Mode

15-1

1 Overview• Record pressing a touch switch
Touch

130
12:04
Press touch switch• Record writing a value to a device by pressing a touch switch
Touch

100

External device

Value

100
Write

100
D1=

12:05

100

Press touch switch

100→D1• Output Operation Log data to the external memory
Touch
USB flash drive
Output to USB flash drive

Operation Log data
(CSV)

15-2

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual100

1 Overview

1.2 Recorded Events
The recorded events are as follows.
■ Power ON
This operation is recorded when the Touch power is turned on.
■ Switch to Base Screen
This operation is recorded by the following events.
• Switched the Base Screen by pressing the Goto Screen Button or a Multi-Button• Switched the Base Screen by pressing the key button Ref. on the Alarm List Display or the Alarm Log Display• Switched the Base Screen by executing the Goto Screen Command or a Multi-Command• Switched the Base Screen by writing a screen number to System Area 1 Display screen number (address+0)■ Change Users
This operation is recorded by the following events.
• Switched the user by entering a password on the Password Screen• Switched the user by writing a value of device• Switched to the default user
• If User is selected in Default User in the User Accounts dialog box, a Change Users event occurs when
the power is turned on and when the operation mode is changed.
• If the Switch to Base Screen check box is selected, a Switch to Base Screen event also occurs whena Change Users event occurs.
■ Change Operation Modes
This operation is recorded by the following events.
• Switched to System Mode by pressing the Goto Screen Button or a Multi-Button• Switched to System Mode by executing the Goto Screen Command or a Multi-Command• Switched to System Mode by pressing System Mode on the Maintenance screen• Switched to Run Mode from System Mode by pressing Run on the Top Page in the System Mode
• Switched to Monitor Mode from Run Mode by clicking Start Monitor on the WindO/I-NV3 Online tab• Switched to Run Mode from Monitor Mode by clicking Stop Monitor on the WindO/I-NV3 Online tab
The Operation Log is only recorded during Run Mode.
Switching from Run Mode to System Mode and switching from System Mode to Run Mode is recorded.
Switching from System Mode to Data Transfer Mode and switching from Data Transfer Mode to System
Mode is not recorded.
■ Press buttons
This operation is recorded by the following events.

The Operation Log only records touch switch presses for parts created in WindO/I-NV3.
Operations for the following screens and buttons displayed in messages and title bars are not recorded.
• System screen• Password screen• System error messages• Popup screen title bar■ Write Data to any Devices
This operation is recorded by the following event.
Writing a value to a device by pressing a Bit Button, Word Button, Multi-Button, Selector Switch, Potentiometer,
Numerical Input, Character Input

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

15-3

15
Operation Log Function• Pressing a Bit Button, Word Button, Goto Screen Button, Multi-Button, Selector Switch, Potentiometer, Numerical
Input, Character Input• Pressing the key buttons ENT, Download Project, Upload Project, All Chk., Del. All, Ref., Stop the Soundof the Buzzer and Screen flashing1 Overview

1.3 Data Configuration
The recorded data is composed of a label, time, user name, screen number, event name, part name, device, andcontent after the change.
The relationship between the Operation Log function settings and the recorded data is as follows.
Operation Log settingsϭ͘ǀĞŶƚ

Recorded dataϰ͘^ĂŵƉůŝŶŐdŝŵĞ
ϯ͘>ĂďĞůƐ

Ϯ͘ĂƚĂƐƚŽƌĂŐĞĂŵŽƵŶƚ

1. Event:ϱ͘hƐĞƌEĂŵĞ ϲ͘^ĐƌĞĞŶEŽ͘ϳ͘ǀĞŶƚEĂŵĞϴ͘WĂƌƚEĂŵĞ ϵ͘ĞǀŝĐĞĚĚƌĞƐƐ ϭϬ͘ŚĂŶŐĞĚƚŽ^ĂŵƉůŝŶŐdŝŵĞ


hƐĞƌ

^ĐƌĞĞŶEŽ͘ǀĞŶƚEĂŵĞWĂƌƚEĂŵĞĞƚĂŝůƐ ϭϮͬϬϭͬϮϬϭϭϭϮ͗ϬϬ͗ϭϬͲĂƐĞϭ

WŽǁĞƌKEͲͲŚĂŶŐĞĚƚŽͲ ϭϮͬϬϭͬϮϬϭϭϭϮ͗Ϭϭ͗ϮϯhƐĞƌϭ

ĂƐĞϭ

^ǁŝƚĐŚƚŽĂƐĞ^ĐƌĞĞŶ

Ͳ

Ͳ

ĂƐĞϮ

 ϭϮͬϬϭͬϮϬϭϭϭϮ͗ϬϮ͗ϰϱhƐĞƌϭ

ĂƐĞϮ

ŚĂŶŐĞhƐĞƌƐ

Ͳ

Ͳ

hƐĞƌϮ

 ϭϮͬϬϭͬϮϬϭϭϭϮ͗Ϭϯ͗ϬϲhƐĞƌϮ

ĂƐĞϮ

ŚĂŶŐĞKƉĞƌĂƚŝŽŶDŽĚĞƐͲͲ^ǇƐƚĞŵDŽĚĞ ϭϮͬϬϭͬϮϬϭϭϭϮ͗Ϭϰ͗ϭϭhƐĞƌϮ

ĂƐĞϮ

WƌĞƐƐďƵƚƚŽŶƐŝƚ^ǁŝƚĐŚͲͲ ϭϮͬϬϭͬϮϬϭϭϭϮ͗Ϭϰ͗ϭϭhƐĞƌϮ

ĂƐĞϮ

tƌŝƚĞĂƚĂƚŽĂŶǇĞǀŝĐĞƐͲ

>ZϬ

ϱϱ

Events that occur on the Touch due to operations including user operations. Only the checked
events are recorded.

2. Data storage amount:The amount of data to record. For details, refer to “Data Storage Amount” on page 15-6.
3. Label:
When the recorded data is output as a CSV file, this is the text displayed in the label row.
4. Sampling Time: The time the event occurred.
The display type for the date and time varies based on the language configured in Project
Settings, on the Project Details tab, in Language.
YYYY/MM/DD
Japanese
HH:MM:SS:
MM/DD/YYYY
European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic
HH:MM:SS:
5. User Name:
The user name when the event occurred.
The user name is only recorded when the Use Security functions check box is selected on the
General tab in the User Accounts dialog box.
6. Screen No.:The screen type and number that was displayed when the event occurred.
Base n:Base Screen (n: screen number)
Example: Base 1
Popup n: Popup Screen (n: screen number)
Example: Popup 10
7. Event Name:
When the recorded data is output as a CSV file, this is the text displayed as a label to describe theevent that occurred. This item is configured in the Data Labels dialog box.

15-4

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Overview

8. Part Name:
The part name for the pressed touch switch when the Press buttons event occurs.
9. Device Address: The destination device when the Write Data to any Devices event occurs.
When an indirect write is used, the device specified by the indirect value is recorded.
Example: When the device configured as the destination for the value 100 is LDR100 and theindirect value is 3
Event Name
Press buttons
Write Data to any Devices

10. Changed to:Part Name
WordSwitch1–

Details–
LDR103

Changed to–100

The result produced from the event that occurred. The recorded content varies based on theevent that occurred.
Switch to Base Screen: The screen type and number after switching.
Base n:Base Screen (n: screen number)
Example: Base 1
Change Users:
The user name after the change.
Change Operation Modes: The operation mode after the change.
Run Mode:
Run Mode
System Mode:
System Mode
Monitor Mode:
Monitor Mode
Write Data to any Devices: The value written to the device by pressing the touch switch. This value
is handled as BIN16 (+). For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available
Data” on page 2-1.
The value written to the device is recorded as BIN16 (+) regardless ofthe data type.
Example: When -10 (0xFFF6) is written to device D0
Event Name
Part Name
Press buttons
WordSwitch1
Write Data to any Devices–

Details–
D0

Changed to–65526 (0xFFF6)

If the written value is 2 words (32 bits), each word is recorded (16 bits).
For the storage order for 32-bit device data, the upper word and lower
word are stored following the Storage Method of 32-bit Numerical
Data setting. Storage Method of 32-bit Numerical Data is
configured on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box. For
details, refer to Chapter 3 “3.1 System Tab” on page 3-19.
Example: When Storage Method of 32-bit Numerical Data is fromLower word and 12345678 (0xBC614E) is written to device
D0 with the data type BIN32 (+)

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Details–
D0
D1

Changed to–24910 (0x614E)
188 (0xBC)

15-5

Operation Log Function

Event Name
Part Name
Press buttons
WordSwitch1
Write Data to any Devices–
Write Data to any Devices–

15

1 Overview

1.4 Saving and Deleting Data
● Saving Data
The recorded data is saved in the data storage area.
Operation Log data

Touch

130

Sampling Time

User

Screen No.

Event Name

Part Name

Details

12/01/2011 12:00:10

-

Base1

Power ON--

Changed to-

12/01/2011 12:01:23

User1

Base1

Switch to Base Screen

-

-

Base2

12/01/2011 12:02:45

User1

Base2

Change Users

-

-

User2

12/01/2011 12:03:06

User2

Base2

Change Operation Modes--

System Mode

12/01/2011 12:04:11

User2

Base2

Press buttons

BitSwitch--

12/01/2011 12:04:11

User2

Base2

Write Data to any Devices

-

LDR 0

55

If the saved data exceeds the Operation Log data storage amount, the oldest data is deleted and the new data is
saved.
New data

Oldest data(delete)Operation Log data storage amount

When the backup battery is depleted, the data in the Operation Log is erased when the Touch is turned off.

Data Storage AmountThe maximum amount of data that can be saved in the data storage area is 3579.
The maximum amount of data that can be recorded by a single operation is 150 items. When writing tomultiple devices in a single operation using the Multi-Button or other part, data over 150 items cannot berecorded. If the data to be recorded in a single operation exceeds 150 items, HMI Special Internal Relay
LSM22 is set to 1. For details, refer to Chapter 27 “HMI Special Internal Relay (LSM)” on page 27-1.
● Deleting Data
The method to delete recorded data from the data storage area is as follows.
• On the WindO/I-NV3 Online tab, click the arrow under Clear, and then click All or Operation Log Data. For
details, refer to Chapter 23 “4 Clear” on page 23-22.
• On the Top Page in the System Mode, press Main Menu, Initial Setting, Initialize, and Opn Log in order.

15-6

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Overview

1.5 Using the Data
The saved data can be used in the following ways.
Operation Log data
Sampling Time

User

Screen No.

Event Name

Part Name

Details

12/01/2011 12:00:10

-

Base1

Power ON--

Changed to-

12/01/2011 12:01:23

User1

Base1

Switch to Base Screen

-

-

Base2

12/01/2011 12:02:45

User1

Base2

Change Users

-

-

User2

12/01/2011 12:03:06

User2

Base2

Change Operation Modes--

System Mode

12/01/2011 12:04:11

User2

Base2

Press buttons

BitSwitch--

12/01/2011 12:04:11

User2

Base2

Write Data to any Devices

-

LDR 0

55

• Save to and read from an external memory
Operation log data is saved in a CSV file format into theexternal memory which it can be read on your computer.
For details, refer to “4.1 Saving the Data as a CSV File” onpage 15-17.

Book1

Sampling Time

User

12/01/2011 12:00:10-

12/01/2011 12:01:23

User1

12/01/2011 12:02:45
12/01/2011 12:03:06

Screen No.
Base1
Base1

Event NamePower ON
Switch to Base Screen

Details--

Changed to
Base2

Change Operation Modes

-

Base2

Press buttons

BitSwitch

-

-

User2

Base2

Write Data to any Devices

-

LDR 0

55

Sheet2

-

-

Base2
Base2

User2

12/01/2011 12:04:11

Sheet1

Change Users

Part Name

User1
User2

12/01/2011 12:04:11

-

User2

-

System Mode

Sheet3Operation Log data
(CSV)

15
Operation Log Function

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

15-7

2 Operation Log Function Configuration Procedure2

Operation Log Function Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for the Operation Log function.

2.1 Configuring the Events and the Condition for Recording
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Operation Log.
The Operation Log Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the Enable Operation Log Settings check box.

3 Select the check boxes for the events to record under Target Events to record.
Power ON:
Switch to Base Screen:
Change Users:
Change Operation Modes:
Press buttons:
Write Data to any Devices:

15-8

The following items are recorded when the Touch power is turned on.
Time, screen number, event name
The following items are recorded when the Base Screen is switched.
Time, user name, screen number, event name, changed to
The following items are recorded when the user is changed.
Time, user name, screen number, event name, changed to
The following items are recorded when the operation mode is changed.
Time, user name, screen number, event name, changed to
The following items are recorded when a touch switch is pressed.
Time, user name, screen number, event name, part name
The following items are recorded when a value is written to a device by pressing atouch switch.
Time, user name, screen number, event name, device, changed to

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Operation Log Function Configuration Procedure

4 Configure the Operation Log data storage amount in Number of Stored Data.
Click

to display the Data Storage Area Management dialog box.

Specify the Operation Log data storage amount in Number of Stored Data for Operation Log, and then click OK.
The Data Storage Area Management dialog box closes.

5 Select the condition to record events in Trigger condition.
■ Always
Always records events.
■ Device
Records events when the specified device is 1. You can only specify an internal device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

6 Click OK.
The Operation Log Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the events and the condition for recording.

15
Operation Log Function

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

15-9

3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box

3

Operation Log Settings Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the Operation Log Settings dialog box.

3.1 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box● General Tab
The General tab is used to configure the events and the condition for recording.

■ Enable Operation Log Settings
Select this check box to use the Operation Log function.
■ Target Events to record
Selects the events to record. Select the check boxes for the events to record.
Power ON:
Switch to Base Screen:
Change Users:
Change Operation Modes:
Press buttons:
Write Data to any Devices:
Edit Data Labels:

15-10

The following items are recorded when the Touch power is turned on.
Time, screen number, event name
The following items are recorded when the Base Screen is switched.
Time, user name, screen number, event name, changed to
The following items are recorded when the user is changed.
Time, user name, screen number, event name, changed to
The following items are recorded when the operation mode is changed.
Time, user name, screen number, event name, changed to
The following items are recorded when a touch switch is pressed.
Time, user name, screen number, event name, part name
The following items are recorded when a value is written to a device by pressing atouch switch.
Time, user name, screen number, event name, device, changed to
Displays the Data Labels dialog box.
The Data Labels dialog box is used to edit the text displayed in the label row and theevent names displayed in the data rows when the recorded data is output as a CSV file.
For details, refer to “Data Labels Dialog Box” on page 15-12.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box■ Monitor Number of Stored Data
Select this check box to count the amount of recorded Operation Log data. The amount of recorded data is written to
the specified device.
(Destination Device): Specifies the destination word device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-61.
Report when Number of Stored Data has reached or exceeded Threshold*1:
Writes 1 to the report device when the current amount of data reaches orexceeds the set threshold.
Threshold*1:

Specifies the amount of data (1 to 3579) that is the basis for reporting.
*1

Report Device : Specifies the destination bit device or the bit of the destination word device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-61.
■ Monitor % Space Used in Data Storage Area
Select this check box to monitor the usage of the data storage area allocated as the save destination for Operation
Log data. The usage is calculated from the data storage amount allocated to the data storage area and the amount ofsaved data, and then written to the specified device.
Usage = Current amount of Operation Log data ÷ Operation Log data storage amount (omits values after the decimal point)(Destination Device): Specifies the destination word device to write the current usage of the amount of Operation
Log data storage.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” onpage 2-61.
Report when % Space Used has reached or exceeded Threshold*1:
Writes 1 in the report device when the current usage reaches or exceeds theset threshold.
Threshold*1:

Specifies the usage (1 to 100) that is the basis for reporting.
*1:

Report Device

RSpecifies the destination bit device or the bit of the destination word device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-61.

■ Clear Log Data
Select this check box to erase the Operation Log data saved in the data storage area.
(Trigger Device):

Specifies the bit device that triggers the erasure of the data. The saved data is erased when thevalue of the configured device changes from 0 to 1. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Click
to open the Data Storage Area Management dialog box where you can change the allocation of data storage
area memory. For details, refer to Chapter 16 “Data Storage Area” on page 16-1.
■ Trigger Condition
Selects the trigger condition for the Operation Log function.
Always:Device:Always records events.
Records events when the specified device is 1. You can only specify an internal device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-61.

*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

15-11

15
Operation Log Function■ Number of Stored Data
Shows the maximum amount of Operation Log data to save in the data storage area. Data is saved up to the set
amount. The maximum amount of data that can be saved in the data storage area is 3579.

3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box

Data Labels Dialog Box
The Data Labels dialog box is where you can edit labels for recorded data and event names when saving data as a
CSV file.

Label of Recorded Data
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box to use text registered in Text Manager for recorded data labels when saving data as a CSV file.
■ Label of Recorded Data
Specifies the text to display in the label row in Text or Text ID.
Text:

Double click the cell to enter the text to display as the label. The maximum number is 40
characters.
Text can only be entered when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.

Text ID:

Double click the cell to specify the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) when using text
registered in Text Manager as the label.
This option is only enabled if you select the Use Text Manager check box.

The details for each label row label is as follows.
Sampling Time: The label for the column to display the time the event occurred.
User Name:

The label for the column to display the user name when the event occurred.

Screen No.:

The label for the column to display the screen type and number that was displayed when the event
occurred.

Event Name:

The label for the column to display the name of the event that occurred on the Touch by anoperation including a user operation.

Part Name:

The label for the column to display the part name for the pressed touch switch when the Press
buttons event occurs.

Device Address: The label for the column to display the destination device when the Write Data to any Devices
event occurs.
Changed to:

15-12

The label for the column to display the result produced from the event that occurred. The recorded
content varies based on the event that occurred.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box

Event Name
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box to use text registered in Text Manager for the event names when saving data as a CSV file.
■ Event Name
Specifies the text to display in Event Name in Text or Text ID.
Text:

Double click the cell to enter the text to display as the event name. The maximum number is 40
characters.
Text can only be entered when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.

Text ID:

Double click the cell to specify the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) when using text registered in
Text Manager as the event name.
This option is only enabled if you select the Use Text Manager check box.

Event name details are as follows.
Power ON:

The event name when the Touch power is turned on.

Switch to Base Screens:

The event name when the base screen is switched.

Change Users:

The event name when the user is changed.

Change Operation Modes:

The event name when the Touch operation mode is changed.

Press buttons:

The event name when a touch switch is pressed.

Write Data to any Devices:

The event name when a value is written to a device by pressing a touch switch.

15
Operation Log Function

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

15-13

3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box● External Memory Tab
The External Memory tab is used to configure whether or not to output saved data to the external memory.

The output data is stored in the following folder on the external memory.
\External memory folder\OPERATIONLOG
The default External Memory Folder name is “HGDATA01”. For details, refer to Chapter 26 “1.5 Setting the External
Memory Folder” on page 26-12.
Data recorded after starting output to the external memory is not included in the output data.

15-14

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box■ BatchSelect this check box to batch output all the sampled data to the external memory.
Touch
Output to
USB flash drive

Trigger Device0

USB flash drive1

Operation Log data
Sampling Time

User

Screen No.

Event Name

Part Name

Details

12/01/2011 12:00:10-

12/01/2011 12:01:23

User1

Base1

Power ON

-

-

-

Base1

Switch to Base Screen

-

-

Base2

Operation Log data
(CSV)

Changed to

12/01/2011 12:02:45

User1

Base2

Change Users

-

-

User2

12/01/2011 12:03:06

User2

Base2

Change Operation Modes--

System Mode

12/01/2011 12:04:11

User2

Base2

Press buttons

BitSwitch--

12/01/2011 12:04:11

User2

Base2

Write Data to any Devices

-

LDR 0

55

12/01/2011 12:07:30

User2

Base2

Switch to Base Screen

-

-

Base3

Data to be output(all)

All the data is saved on the external memory when the trigger device changes from 0 to 1. If a file with the same
name already exists on the external memory, that file is overwritten. The maximum amount of output data is theamount configured by the data storage area.
Output stops if there is insufficient free space on the external memory. USB flash drive error information isstored in HMI Special Data Register LSD33.
Trigger Device:

Specifies the bit device that triggers batch output. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
Data is output to file when the trigger device changes from 0 to 1.

File Name:Enter the file name for the output data or shows the file name.
The default is “OPLOGO.CSV”.
To change the file name, enter a new file name. The maximum number is 120 characters(including the extension).
Add Device data to File Name*1:

Select this check box to add the bottom three digits ofthe value of device configured by File Name Device tothe end of the file name for the output data.

File Name Device:

Specifies the word device that is the source for the value
to add to the file name. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-61. This option can only be
configured when the Add Device data to File Namecheck box is selected.

*1 Advanced mode only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

15-15

Operation Log Function

Example: When the value of device configured by File
Name Device is 123, the file name is“OPLOGO123.CSV”.

15

3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box■ Real Time
Select this check box to output data to the external memory in real time.
Touch
Output to
USB flash drive

3 minute interval

USB flash drive

after operation starts

Operation Log data
Sampling Time

User

Screen No.

Event Name

Part Name

Details

Changed to

12/01/2011 12:00:10

-

Base1

Power ON---

12/01/2011 12:01:23

User1

Base1

Switch to Base Screen

-

-

Base2

12/01/2011 12:02:45

User1

Base2

Change Users

-

-

User2

12/01/2011 12:03:06

User2

Base2

Change Operation Modes--

System Mode

12/01/2011 12:04:11

User2

Base2

Press buttons

BitSwitch--

12/01/2011 12:04:11

User2

Base2

Write Data to any Devices

-

LDR 0

55

12/01/2011 12:07:30

User2

Base2

Switch to Base Screen

-

-

Base3

Data to be output
3 minutes after
operation starts

Operation Log data
(CSV)

Data to be output
3 minutes after that
Data to be output
after another3 minutes

With real time output, data is saved to the external memory in three minute intervals after the Touch starts running.
When there is already data with the same file name on the external memory, data is appended to that file. If there
was no update to the data during the three minutes, it is not output.
Data is appended to the file until the size of the file reaches the restriction size (256 MB), so the maximum amount of
output data varies based on the settings for the output channel such as the amount of data, the data size, and thelabels.
If the interval events occur more quickly than the time it takes to accomplish the real time output (the interval for
writing to the external memory), the Operation Log is recorded up to the data storage amount - 1, and thenafterwards, old data is discarded in order and replaced with new data.
Real time output stops when the file size of the Operation Log data exceeds 256 MB or when there is insufficientspace on the external memory. USB flash drive error information is stored in HMI Special Data Register LSD33.
• When the value of HMI Special Internal Relay LSM18 changes from 0 to 1, the data at that time is first
output in real time to the USB flash drive, and then access to the USB flash drive is stopped.
• You can check the free space on the USB flash drive with HMI Special Data Registers LSD34 and 35.
File Name:Enter the file name for the output data or shows the file name.
The default is “OPLOGA.CSV”.
To change the file name, enter a new file name. The maximum number is 120 characters (including
the extension).
Add Device data to File Name*1:
Select this check box to add the bottom three digits of the value of device configured by File
Name Device to the end of the file name for the output data.
Example: When the value of device configured by File Name Device is 123, the file name is“OPLOGA123.CSV”.
File Name Device:
Specifies the word device that is the source for the value to add to the file name. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
This option can only be configured when the Add Device data to File Name check box isselected.

• The function to record data operates when Operation Log data is being saved to the external memory.
• The methods to erase Operation Log files saved on the external memory are as follows.
- To erase files during operation using parts, on the External Memory tab in the Project Settings dialog
box, select the Remove Files stored in External Memory check box and the All Operation Log
data check box, and then configure the trigger device. Assign that trigger device to a part.
- To erase files with WindO/I-NV3, click Clear on the Online tab, and then click Stored Data inExternal Memory to open the Clear Data dialog box. Select the Operation Log Data check box, andthen click OK.
*1 Advanced mode only

15-16

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Using the Data

4

Using the Data

4.1 Saving the Data as a CSV File
● Saving the Data as a CSV FileThe Operation Log data can be saved to the external memory as a CSV file.
The procedure to save the data is as follows.
On the WindO/I-NV3 Configuration tab, click Operation Log to display the Operation Log Settings dialog box.
Select an output method check box on the External Memory tab and configure the items. The Operation Log data
is saved to the External Memory Folder on the external memory according to the External Memory tab settings. For
details, refer to “External Memory Tab” on page 15-14.
Files saved to external memory are read using WindO/I-NV3.
On the WindO/I-NV3 Online tab, click the arrow under Upload, and then click Data in external memory
to display the Upload from external memory dialog box. Select the Operation Log Data check box, specify
the location to save the files in Path, and then click OK to be able to save the files in the specified folder.
● Data Structure and Output Example
The data structure of the output file is as follows. The data structure for files output with batch output and real time
output is the same.
Bold items are replaced by the Operation Log settings, recorded data, project file name, and WindO/I-NV3 version.
"Project Name","Project name","Version number""File Type","Log type"

Headers

Blank row
"Sampling Time","User Name","Screen No.","Event Name","Part Name","Device
Address","Changed to"Label row

" MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS","User Name","Screen Type & No.","Event","PartName","Device Address", "Changed to"Data row･･･

Output example

Data size of each row- 41 bytes"File Type","Operation Log Data"- 34 bytes"Sampling Time","User","Screen No.","Operation","Part Name","Details","Changed to"- 84 bytes" 12/01/2011 12:00:10","-","Base 1","Power ON","-","-","-"- 60 bytes" 12/01/2011 12:01:23","User1","Base 1","Switch to Base Screen","-","-", "Base2"- 81 bytes

15- 2 bytes···• The data size for each row is counted as 2 bytes for full-width characters, one byte for half-widthcharacters, and two bytes for newlines. The total for each row is the total amount of space for the file.
• A space is inserted before the date in the data row.
• The display type for the date and time varies based on the language configured in Project Settings, on
the Project Details tab, in Language.
Japanese: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic: MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

15-17

Operation Log Function"Project Name","Dimmer Console","V1.00"

4 Using the Data

15-18

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualChapter 16 Data Storage Area
This chapter describes how to configure the data storage area and its operation on the Touch.

1

Overview

1.1 What is the Data Storage Area?
The data storage area is the area in the Touch’s internal memory where saved data is not erased even when the
power is turned off. The HMI Keep Registers (LKR) and the HMI Keep Relays (LK) are allocated in this area.
The following data can be saved in the data storage area.
• Alarm Log data
 Chapter 13 “Alarm Log Function” on page 13-1
• Data Log data
 Chapter 14 “Data Log Function” on page 14-1
• Operation Log data
 Chapter 15 “Operation Log Function” on page 15-1
• When there is no remaining battery power, the data in the data storage area is erased when the Touchis turned off.
• If you download the project data from WindO/I-NV3, the Alarm Log data, Operation Log data, and Data
Log data stored in internal memory are erased, and all internal devices are reset except for the HMI Keep
Registers (LKR) and the HMI Keep Relays (LK).

16
Data Storage Area

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

16-1

1 Overview

1.2 Data Storage Area
● Data Storage Area Capacity and Types of Storable Data
You can allocate areas to save Alarm Log data, Operation Log data, and Data Log data, as well as areas to use as HMI
Keep Registers (LKR) and HMI Keep Relays (LK). The unallocated leftover area is free space.

Data storage area (102,400 bytes)

Alarm Log data

Operation Log
data

Data Log data

HMI Keep Registers HMI Keep Relays
(LKR)
(LK)

Free space● Minimum and Maximum Amount of Data Storage and Number of Addresses
The minimum and maximum amount of data storage and the minimum and maximum number of addresses that canbe configured for the data storage area is as follows.
Data type

16-2

Minimum

Maximum

Number of Stored Data for Alarm Log

0

5,011

Number of Stored Data for Operation Log

0

3,579

Number of Stored Data for Data Log per Device

012,528

Number of HMI Keep Register (LKR)

1,024

8,192

Number of HMI Keep Relay (LK)

1,024

8,192

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Data Storage Area Configuration Procedure

2

Data Storage Area Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for the data storage area.

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Data Storage Area.
The Data Storage Area Management dialog box is displayed.

2 Specify the amount of Alarm Log data to save in the data storage area in Number of Stored Data for Alarm Log(0 to 5011).

3 Specify the amount of Operation Log data to save in the data storage area in Number of Stored Data for
Operation Log (0 to 3579).

4 Specify the amount of Data Log data per device to save in the data storage area in Number of Stored Data for
Data Log per Device (0 to 12528).

5 Specify the number of HMI Keep Register (LKR) addresses in Number of HMI Keep Register (LKR) (1024 to8192).

6 Specify the number of HMI Keep Relay (LK) addresses in Number of HMI Keep Relay (LK) (1024 to 8192).
7 Click OK.

16

The Data Storage Area Management dialog box closes.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Data Storage Area

This concludes configuring the data storage area.

16-3

3 Data Storage Area Management Dialog Box

3

Data Storage Area Management Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the Data Storage Area Management dialog box.

3.1 Data Storage Area Management Dialog Box
The areas to save Alarm Log data, Operation Log data, and Data Log data and the areas to use as HMI Keep
Registers (LKR) and HMI Keep Relays (LK) are allocated in the Data Storage Area Management dialog box.

■ Number of Stored Data for Alarm Log
Specifies the amount of Alarm Log data to save in the data storage area (0 to 5011).
Alarm Log data is only saved in the data storage area when Store is selected under Block Settings, Data in the
Auto-Setup dialog box or in the Individual Settings dialog box for Alarm Log Settings.
■ Number of Stored Data for Operation Log
Specifies the amount of Operation Log data to save in the data storage area (0 to 3579).
■ Number of Stored Data for Data Log per Device
Specifies the amount of Data Log data per device to save in the data storage area (0 to 12528).
Data Log data is only saved in the data storage area when Enable is selected under Log function on the General
Tab in the Individual Settings dialog box for Data Log Settings.
■ Number of HMI Keep Register (LKR)
Specifies the number of HMI Keep Register (LKR) addresses (1024 to 8192).
■ Number of HMI Keep Relay (LK)Specifies the number of HMI Keep Relay (LK) addresses (1024 to 8192).
■ Free SpaceShows the amount of free space in the data storage area (in bytes).
■ Default
Returns the configured values to their default values.

16-4

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualChapter 17 Preventive Maintenance Function

17

1

Overview

1.1 How the Preventive Maintenance Function is Used
The Preventive Maintenance function monitors the state of devices and counts the time the value of the monitored
devices are 1, as well as the number of times the values of monitored devices change to 1.
The Preventive Maintenance function can perform the following functions.
• Monitor devices that turn on lighting or warning lights and count the operation time
Touch
Lighting

External device
Lighting

1230 hours

Warninglight

360 hours

Warning light• Report the replacement time for lighting and warning lights by the counted operation time
Touch
Lighting

External device
Lighting
Warninglight

Please replace

Replace soon

Warning light• Monitor devices connected to buttons and relays and count the operation count
Touch
External device
ButtonButton

123 times

Relay

1000 times

Relay• Report the inspection time for buttons and relays by the counted operation count
Touch
External device
ButtonButtonRelay

Inspect soon

Please inspect

Relay

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

17-1

Preventive Maintenance Function

This chapter describes how to configure the Preventive Maintenance function and its operation on the Touch.

1 Overview

1.2 Counting the Operation Time and Operation CountThe operation time and operation count are counted up to the set maximum value. The counted operation time andoperation count are saved in HMI Keep Registers (LKR) and the values are retained until they are reset. To reset a
counted value, set the value of the configured HMI Keep Register (LKR) to 0.
The maximum value that can be configured varies based on the data type of the destination device for the operation
time and operation count.
● Counting the Operation Time
While the value of Monitor Device is 1, 1 is added to the value of device (Operation Time Device) configured in
Measure Operation Time for each second that elapses. The operation time is not counted when it is less than one
second.
The counted operation time is written to the device configured in Measure Operation Time.
Example: When the value of Monitor Device M0 is 1, 1 is added to the value of Operation Time Device LKR0.
Not counted

Not counted

0.5 sec.

3 sec.

0.5 sec.

3.4 sec.

Operation time
1 sec. 1 sec. 1 sec.

Value of
Monitor Device M0

1 sec. 1 sec. 1 sec.

0.4 sec.

10

Value of
Operation Time Device LKR0

0

1

2

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

4

5

6

6

● Counting the Operation Count
When the value of Monitor Device changes from 0 to 1, 1 is added to the value of device (Operation Count Device)configured in Measure Operation Count.
The counted operation count is written to the device configured in Measure Operation Count.
Example: When the value of Monitor Device M0 changes from 0 to 1, 1 is added to the value of Operation Count
Device LKR0.

1

Operation countValue of
Monitor Device M0

2

3

4

1
0

Value of
Operation Count Device LKR0

0

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

3

3

3

4

4

4

4

If the value of Monitor Device changes from 0 to 1 in an interval shorter than the Touch scan time and thecommunication cycle with external devices, the operation time and operation count is not counted
normally. You can check the maximum Touch scan time (x 1 millisecond) with the value of HMI Special
Data Register LSD4. You can check the communication cycle with external devices (x 1 millisecond) withthe value of HMI Special Data Register LSD6. For details, refer to Chapter 27 “HMI Special Data Register(LSD)” on page 27-9.

17-2

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Overview

17

1.3 Thresholds

Example: When the value of Operation Time Device LKR0 reaches the threshold set for level 1 through level 3, 1 iswritten to the Report Device configured for each level, LM1 through LM3.
Level

ThresholdReport Device

Level 1

10LM1Level 215

LM2

Level 320

LM3Level 1 threshold
Value of
Operation Time Device LKR0

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Value of
Report Device LM1Value of
Report Device LM2
Value of
Report Device LM3

9

10

11

12

Level 2 threshold
13

14

15

16

17

Level 3 threshold
18

19

20

21

22

1
0
1
0
1
0

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

17-3

Preventive Maintenance Function

The threshold is a value that is the criterion for reporting to a configured device (Report Device) when the value
counted for the operation time or operation count (the value of Operation Time Device or Operation Count Device)
has reached the threshold value. 1 is written to the configured device when the operation time and operation countreach the threshold.

2 Preventive Maintenance Function Configuration Procedure

2

Preventive Maintenance Function Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for the Preventive Maintenance function.

2.1 Counting Operation Time and Operation Count
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Preventive Maintenance.
The Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Specify the number of devices to monitor in Number of Items.

3 Select the item to display in Settings with Display Options.

Select Operation Time + Operation Count.
The Operation Time and Operation Count settings are displayed in Settings.

4 Select the number to register the Preventive Maintenance settings to in Settings, then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.

5 Specify the bit device or bit of the word device to monitor with Monitor Device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

17-4

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Preventive Maintenance Function Configuration Procedure

6 Select the Measure Operation Time check box on the Operation Time tab.

7 Specify the destination device for the counted operation time.
You can only specify an HMI Keep Register (LKR).
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

8 Select the data type for the value of the Measure Operation Time device from Data Type.
This concludes configuring operation time counting.

9 Click the Operation Count tab.

10 Select the Measure Operation Count check box.
If you are not counting the operation count, leave the Measure Operation Count check box cleared and proceed tostep 13.

11 Specify the destination device for the counted operation count.
You can only specify an HMI Keep Register (LKR).
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

12 Select the data type for the value of the Measure Operation Count device from Data Type.
This concludes configuring operation count counting.

13 Click OK to close the Individual Settings dialog box.
14 Repeat steps 2 through 13 to register settings to count the operation time and operation count in all the used
numbers.
This concludes configuring operation time and operation count counting.
Next, configure the functions to execute using counted data.
 “4.1 Displaying the Counted Operation Count on a Numerical Display” on page 17-11
 “4.2 Notifying with a Beep when the Counted Operation Time Reaches the Threshold” on page 17-14

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

17-5

17
Preventive Maintenance Function

If you are not counting the operation time, leave the Measure Operation Time check box cleared and proceed tostep 9.

3 Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box

3

Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box
This section describes the items and buttons on the Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box and the Individual
Settings dialog box.

3.1 Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box
The Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box is used to manage the preventive maintenance settings for eachmonitored device.

■ Number of Items
Specifies the number of devices (1 to 256) to monitor. The numbers for the amount of configured devices is displayedin Settings.
■ Display Options
Select the item to display in Settings from the following:
Operation Time:Operation time settings are displayed in Settings.

Operation Count:

Operation count settings are displayed in Settings.

Operation Time + Operation Count: Operation time and operation count settings are displayed in Settings.
■ Settings
Edits the settings for each number.
No.:

Shows the number of the preventive maintenance settings to manage. Double clicking
the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual
Settings Dialog Box” on page 17-8.

Monitor Device:Shows the bit device or bit of the word device to count the operation time or operation count.
Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Operation Time Device:Shows the destination device for the counted operation time. You can only specify an
HMI Keep Register (LKR).
Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
This option is only displayed when Operation Time or Operation Time + Operation
Count is selected in Display Options.

Data Type:Shows the date type of the operation time device. Double clicking the cell displays the Individual
Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 17-8.
This option is only displayed when Operation Time or Operation Time + Operation
Count is selected in Display Options.

17-6

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box

Level 1 to 3 Threshold:This option is only displayed when Operation Time or Operation Time + Operation
Count is selected in Display Options.
Level 1 to 3 Report Device: Shows the bit device or bit of the word device for reporting when the operation timereaches or exceeds the level 1 through level 3 thresholds.
Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” onpage 2-61.
This option is only displayed when Operation Time or Operation Time + Operation
Count is selected in Display Options.
Operation Count Device:Shows the destination device for the counted operation count. You can only specify an
HMI Keep Register (LKR).
Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” onpage 2-61.
This option is only displayed when Operation Count or Operation Time + Operation
Count is selected in Display Options.

Data Type:Shows the date type of the operation count device. Double clicking the cell displays theIndividual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” onpage 17-8.
This option is only displayed when Operation Count or Operation Time + Operation
Count is selected in Display Options.

Level 1 to 3 Threshold:Shows the count as a constant or a device that is the criterion for reporting at level 1
through level 3. For a constant, double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings
dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 17-8. For adevice, the Device Address Settings dialog box is displayed. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
This option is only displayed when Operation Count or Operation Time + Operation
Count is selected in Display Options.

Level 1 to 3 Report Device: Shows the bit device or bit of the word device for reporting when the operation countreaches or exceeds the level 1 through level 3 thresholds.
Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” onpage 2-61.
This option is only displayed when Operation Count or Operation Time + Operation
Count is selected in Display Options.
■ EditRegisters or changes the settings for the selected number.
Select a number, and then click this button to display the Individual Settings dialog box. The configured content forthe selected number is reflected in the Individual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings
Dialog Box” on page 17-8.
■ Remove
Deletes the settings for the selected number.
Select a number, and then click this button.
■ Up
Shifts the selected settings upward in the list.
■ Down
Shifts the selected settings downward in the list.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

17-7

17
Preventive Maintenance Function

Shows the time as a constant or a device that is the criterion for reporting at level 1
through level 3. For a constant, double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings
dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 17-8. For adevice, the Device Address Settings dialog box is displayed. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

3 Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box

3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box
The Individual Settings dialog box is used to configure the operation time and operation count settings for eachmonitored device.

No.:

Monitor Device:Shows the number selected in Settings in the Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box. To
change the set number, specify a number (1 to 256).
You can only specify a number of the amount of devices configured by Number of Items in
the Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box.
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to count the operation time or operation count.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

● Operation Time Tab
The Operation Time tab is used to configure the destination device for the counted operation time and the reportconditions when the threshold is reached or exceeded.
■ Measure Operation Time
Select this check box to count the operation time.
(Operation Time Device): Specifies the destination device for the counted operation time. You can only specify an
HMI Keep Register (LKR).
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
If you specify the same device as the operation time device for multiple numbers, the counted operation
time is added in total by all the monitored devices for each number and the function will not be able tocount normally.
■ Data Type
Select the data type for the operation time device as BIN16 (+) or BIN32 (+). For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1
Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Report when Operation Time has reached or exceeded Threshold level
Select this check box to report when the counted operation time reaches or exceeds the threshold.
■ (Data Type)
Selects the type of data for the threshold.
Value:
Device:Uses a constant as the threshold.
Uses a value of device as the threshold.

■ Level 1
Configures the level 1 threshold and report device.
ThresholdSpecifies the time as a constant or a device that is the criterion for reporting at level 1. For aconstant, the range that can be set varies based on the data type. For a device, clicktodisplay the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

17-8

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box

Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device for reporting when the operation time reaches
or exceeds the level 1 threshold.

17

Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Preventive Maintenance Function

Report Device:■ Level 2
Select this check box to configure the level 2 threshold and report device.
ThresholdReport Device:

Specifies the time as a constant or a device that is the criterion for reporting at level 2. For aconstant, the range that can be set varies based on the data type. For a device, clicktodisplay the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device for reporting when the operation time reaches
or exceeds the level 2 threshold.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

■ Level 3
Select this check box to configure the level 3 threshold and report device.
ThresholdReport Device:

Specifies the time as a constant or a device that is the criterion for reporting at level 3. For aconstant, the range that can be set varies based on the data type. For a device, clicktodisplay the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device for reporting when the operation time reaches
or exceeds the level 3 threshold.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

● Operation Count Tab
The Operation Count tab is used to configure the destination device for the counted operation count and the reportconditions when the threshold is reached or exceeded.

■ Measure Operation Count
Select this check box to count the operation count.
(Operation Count Device): Specifies the destination device for the counted operation count. You can only specify an
HMI Keep Register (LKR).
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
If you specify the same device as the operation count device for multiple numbers, the counted operation
count is added in total by all the monitored devices for each number and the function will not be able tocount normally.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

17-9

3 Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box■ Data Type
Select the data type for the operation count device as BIN16 (+) or BIN32 (+). For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1
Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Report when Operation Count has reached or exceeded Threshold level
Select this check box to report when the counted operation count reaches or exceeds the threshold.
■ (Data Type)
Selects the type of data for the threshold.
Value:

Uses a constant as the threshold.

Device:Uses a value of device as the threshold.

■ Level 1
Configures the level 1 threshold and report device.
ThresholdSpecifies the count as a constant or a device that is the criterion for reporting at level 1. For aconstant, the range that can be set varies based on the data type. For a device, clicktodisplay the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Report Device:

Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device for reporting when the operation count reaches
or exceeds the level 1 threshold.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

■ Level 2
Select this check box to configure the level 2 threshold and report device.
ThresholdSpecifies the count as a constant or a device that is the criterion for reporting at level 2. For aconstant, the range that can be set varies based on the data type. For a device, clicktodisplay the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Report Device:

Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device for reporting when the operation count reaches
or exceeds the level 2 threshold.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

■ Level 3
Select this check box to configure the level 3 threshold and report device.
ThresholdSpecifies the count as a constant or a device that is the criterion for reporting at level 3. For aconstant, the range that can be set varies based on the data type. For a device, clicktodisplay the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Report Device:

Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device for reporting when the operation count reaches
or exceeds the level 3 threshold.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

17-10

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Using the Data

4

17

Using the Data

Preventive Maintenance Function

4.1 Displaying the Counted Operation Count on a Numerical Display
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Preventive Maintenance.
The Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Specify the number of devices to monitor in Number of Items.

3 Select the item to display in Settings with Display Options.
Select Operation Count.
Operation count settings are displayed in Settings.

4 Select the number to register the Preventive Maintenance settings to in Settings, then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.

5 Specify the bit device or bit of the word device to monitor with Monitor Device.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

17-11

4 Using the Data

6 Click the Operation Count tab.

7 Select the Measure Operation Count check box and specify the destination device for the counted operation count.
8 Select the data type for the value of the Measure Operation Count device from Data Type.
9 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Numerical Display.

10 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Numerical Display.
11 Double-click the dropped Numerical Display and the Properties dialog box is displayed.

17-12

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Using the Data

17

12 On the General tab, under Display Type, click Decimal.

Preventive Maintenance Function

13 Under Data Format, in Data Type, select the data type for the value to display.
Select the same data type as the data type selected on the Operation Count tab in the Preventive Maintenancesettings Individual Settings dialog box.

14 Specify Digits for the value to display.
The digits that can be set varies based on the display type or data type.

15 Under Display Method, in Display Device, specify the destination device for the counted operation count.
Select the same device as the device configured with Measure Operation Count on the Operation Count tab in
the Preventive Maintenance settings Individual Settings dialog box.

16 Click OK.
The properties dialog box closes.
This concludes the configuration to display the counted operation count on a Numerical Display.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

17-13

4 Using the Data

4.2 Notifying with a Beep when the Counted Operation Time Reaches the Threshold
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Preventive Maintenance.
The Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Specify the number of devices to monitor in Number of Items.

3 Select the number to register the Preventive Maintenance settings to in Settings, then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.

4 Specify the bit device or bit of the word device to monitor with Monitor Device.

5 Select the Measure Operation Time check box on the Operation Time tab and specify the destination device forthe counted operation time.

6 Select the data type for the value of the Measure Operation Time device from Data Type.

17-14

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Using the Data

17

7 Select the Report when Operation Time has reached or exceeded Threshold level check box.

Preventive Maintenance Function

8 Select the type of data for the threshold.
If you select Value, specify the threshold as a constant.
If you select Device, specify the threshold as a value of device.

9 Configure Threshold for level 1.
When you select Value as the threshold data type, specify the threshold as a constant. The range for the constantthat can be set varies based on the data type.
When you select Device as the threshold data type, specify the threshold as a value of device. Clickto display theDevice Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-61.

10 Configure Report Device for level 1.
Specify the bit device or bit of the word device for reporting when the threshold is reached or exceeded. Clicktodisplay the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
You can only specify an internal device.

11 Click OK to close the Individual Settings dialog box.
12 Click OK to close the Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box.
13 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Alarm Log.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box is displayed.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

17-15

4 Using the Data

14 On the Channel tab, under Source Device Type, select Bit and specify Number of Blocks.

15 Select the channel number to register the Level 1 Report Device to, and then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.

16 Specify the Level 1 Report Device in Source and select No Store under Data.
Set Source to the Level 1 Report Device configured on the Operation Time tab in the Preventive Maintenancesettings Individual Settings dialog box.

17 Select Enable under Alarm function, select NO under NO/NC, and then click OK.

17-16

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Using the Data

18 Switch the alarm function for all the unused channel numbers to Disable in the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.

The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.

Under Channel Settings, in Alarm function, select Disable and then click OK.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

17-17

17
Preventive Maintenance Function

Select all the unused channels, and then click Edit. To select multiple channels, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while
you click the specific them.

4 Using the Data

19 Click the Options tab in the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.

20 Select the Trigger Buzzer when Alarm occurs check box.
21 Click OK.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes the configuration to notify with a beep when the counted operation time reaches the threshold.

17-18

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualChapter 18 Recipe Function
This chapter describes how to configure the Recipe function and its operation on the Touch.

Overview

1.1 How the Recipe Function is Used
The Recipe function batch writes values prepared in advanced to specified devices and batch reads the values for
specified devices according to the state of a device. Use this function for situations such as configuring the initialvalues of an external device when the Touch starts running. The data used by the Recipe function is called recipe
data for the data saved in internal memory, a recipe file for data saved to the external memory, and recipe values forthe values written to devices that were saved in recipe data and recipe files.
The Recipe function can perform the following functions.
• Batch write the recipe values saved in internal memory to devices when a value of device changes from 0 to 1
Touch
1

0

External device
Write
Internal Memory

D100=

0

100

D101=

0

150

D102=

0

200

Recipe Data
100
150
200

• Batch write the recipe values saved on the external memory to devices when a value of device changes from 0 to 1
Touch
1

0

D100=

0

100

D101=

0

150

D102=

0

200

External device

USB flash drive

Write

Recipe File
100,
150,
200,

• Batch read value of a device and save them to the external memory as a recipe file when a value of device changes
from 0 to 1
Touch
1

0

D100=

100

D101=

150

D102=

200

External device
Output to USB flash drive

USB flash drive

Recipe File
100,
150,
200,

To keep the values of devices, you can use recipe function. The recipe function saves them as a recipe filein the external memory. For example, save the values of devices before the power is turned off and write
them the next time the power is turned on.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

18-1

Recipe Function

118

1 Overview

1.2 Data for Recipes
The data handled by the Recipe function is based on the starting device address for the amount of data selected.
Example:When the Top Device is D100 and the Number of Data is 10
D100 value 1111
D101 value 2222
D102 value 3333
D103 value 4444
D104 value 5555
D105 value 6666
D106 value 7777
D107 value 8888
D108 value 9999
D109 value 11111

18-2

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Overview

1.3 Data Configuration
The relationship between the Recipe function settings and the data for recipes is as follows.

18

Recipe settings

Recipe Function

7RS'HYLFH

Data for recipes

1XPEHURI'DWD

'DWD

'







'







'







'







'







'







'







'







'







'







&KDQQHOWR
1XPEHURIEORFNV

1. Number of blocks: The operation using the data for recipes is configured in blocks (0 to 64). One block is 16
channels.
2. Channels:

Destination devices and recipe values are configured in channels. One channel is used for one
item of data for the recipe.

3. Number of Data:

The amount of data configured for one channel. The maximum number of data that can be
configured is 8,192.

4. Top Device:

The starting address of the destination devices for recipe values and the source devices forvalues of devices.

5. Data:

The values to write to the devices.
If there are many word devices for the data for the recipe, it will take time to read and write them. For
example, when using the Recipe function to configure initial values, if other processes are executed before
the function is finished writing all the settings, you may experience unexpected results. Monitor the System
Area 2 Transferring recipe bit (address+3, bit 4) while the recipe is transferring and wait until reading andwriting the data for the recipe is finished before executing other processes. For details, refer to Chapter 3“System Area” on page 3-23.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual18-3

2 Recipe Function Configuration Procedure

2

Recipe Function Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for the Recipe function.

2.1 Configuring Recipe Function Operations and Devices
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Recipe.
The Recipe Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Specify the number of blocks to use as data for the recipe in Number of Blocks.
The operation using the data for the recipe is configured in blocks (0 to 64). One channel is used for one item of data
for the recipe. One block is 16 channels.
The maximum number of blocks that can be configured is 64 blocks. The maximum number of devices that can be
configured for one channel is 8,192 devices.

3 Select the number of the data for the recipe to configure in Settings, and then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.

4 On the Channel tab, under Recipe function, select Enable.
The channel for the block number displayed in Channel is enabled.

18-4

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Recipe Function Configuration Procedure

5 Enter the name for the Recipe function in Recipe Name.
The maximum number is 40 characters.

18

6 Specify the destination device for the Recipe values in Top Device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box.

For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
The specified device addresses are configured sequentially from the number 1 in Data List on the Data tab.

7 Select the data type for the values to write with Data Type.
To read values of devices and save them as a recipe file, specify the type of data for the read values.

8 With Number of Data, specify the number of destination devices starting with the device address configured by Top
Device.

To read values of devices and save them as a recipe file, specify the number of source devices.
The sequential device addresses from the starting address for the number of configured devices is displayed in Data
List on the Data tab.
The amount of data that can be set varies based on the data type. When BIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-), or BCD4 isselected for Data Type, up to 8,192 items of data can be configured. When BIN32 (+), BIN32 (+/-), or BCD8 is
selected, up to 4,096 items of data can be configured.

9 With Display Type, select the display type for Data to configure in Data List on the Data tab.
To save data to a recipe file, the display type is decimal for all.

10 Click the Data tab.

The data for the recipe in the amount specified by Number of Data on the Channel tab is configured in Data List.
In Device, the devices are sequentially configured starting from the device address specified by Top Device.

11 Double click the data cell for each number in Data List to enter the value to write to the device.
The value of device that can be configured varies based on Data Type and Display Type configured on the
Channel tab.
When Read-only is selected under Trigger Setting on the Block tab, entering values of devices is unnecessary.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

18-5

Recipe Function

To read values of devices and save them as a recipe file, specify the source device of the values.

2 Recipe Function Configuration Procedure

12 Click the Block tab.

13 Select the destination to save recipe data to under Access to.
This option is set by block.
■ External Memory
Use a recipe file saved to the external memory.
■ Internal Memory
Use recipe data saved to internal memory.
If you selected Internal Memory, proceed to step 17.

14 Enter the file name for the recipe file in File Name.
The default is “RCPn.CSV”. (n: four digit sequential number)
To change the file name, enter a new file name. The maximum number is 120 characters (including extension).
If there is a recipe file with the same file name on the external memory, the existing file is overwritten with the new
file.

15 Select the operation using the data for the recipe under Trigger Setting.
This option is set by block.
■ Read/Write
Save batch read values of devices to the external memory as a recipe file or write them to devices as recipe values.
This option can only be configured when External Memory is selected under Access to.
■ Read-only
Save batch read values of devices to the external memory as a recipe file.
This option can only be configured when External Memory is selected under Access to.
■ Write-only
Write recipe values to devices.
If you select Write-only, proceed to step 17.

16 Specify the device that triggers batch reading values of devices and saving them to the external memory as a recipe
file in Read Trigger.
This option is set by block.
Click

to display the Device Address Settings dialog box.

For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
This option can only be configured when Read/Write or Read-only is selected under Trigger Setting.
If you selected Read-only, proceed to step 18.

18-6

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Recipe Function Configuration Procedure

17 Specify the device that triggers batch writing recipe values to devices in Write Trigger.
This option is set by block.
Click

to display the Device Address Settings dialog box.

18

For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

Recipe Function

This option can only be configured when Read/Write or Write-only is selected under Trigger Setting.

18 Click OK to close the Individual Settings dialog box.
19 Repeat steps 3 through 18 to register data for the recipe to all the used channels.
20 Click OK.
The Recipe Settings dialog box closes.
For details on how to create and edit the data for recipes, refer to “4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes” on page
18-14.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual18-7

3 Recipe Settings Dialog Box

3

Recipe Settings Dialog Box
This section describes the items and buttons on the Recipe Settings dialog box and the Individual Settings dialog box.

3.1 Recipe Settings Dialog Box
Use the Recipe Settings dialog box to collectively manage the save destination of data for recipes, the devices forwriting recipe values and reading values of devices, and those execution conditions.

■ Number of Blocks
The operation using the data for the recipe is configured in blocks (0 to 64). One channel is used for one item of data
for the recipe. One block is 16 channels.
The maximum number of blocks that can be configured is 64 blocks. The maximum number of devices that can be
configured for one channel is 8,192 devices.
■ Settings
Edits the recipe settings for each channel.

18-8

No.:

Displayed as (Block No.)-(Channel No.). Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings
dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 18-10.

Access to:Shows the save destination for the data for the recipe. Double clicking the cell switches between
Internal Memory and External Memory.

Trigger Setting:Shows the operation using the data for the recipe. When External Memory is selected forAccess to, double clicking the cell switches between Write-only, Read/Write, and Readonly. Shows Write-only when Internal Memory is selected for Access to.

Read Trigger:

Shows the device that triggers saving the recipe file. Double clicking the cell displays the Device
Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
This option can only be configured when Read/Write or Read-only is selected under Trigger
Setting.

Write Trigger:

Shows the device that triggers writing recipe values to devices. Double clicking the cell displays
the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
This option can only be configured when Read/Write or Write-only is selected under
Trigger Setting.

Recipe function:Shows whether or not to use the Recipe function. Double clicking the cell switches between
Enable and Disable.

Recipe Name:

Shows the name of the Recipe function for each channel. Double clicking the cell displays theIndividual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page
18-10.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Recipe Settings Dialog Box

Top Device:Shows the starting address of the destination devices for recipe values and the source devices
for values of devices. Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address Settings dialog box.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-61.

Data Type:Shows the data type of the source or destination values of devices. Double clicking the cell
displays the Individual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog
Box” on page 18-10.

Number of Data:

Shows the number of source or destination devices starting with the device address configured
by Top Device. Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box. For details,
refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 18-10.

Display Type:Shows the display type of Data in Data List configured on the Data tab in the Individual
Settings dialog box. Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box. For
details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 18-10.

■ EditRegisters or changes the settings for the selected number.
Select a number in Settings, and then click this button to display the Individual Settings dialog box. The settings forthe selected channel are reflected in the Individual Settings dialog box.
For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 18-10.
■ Write Recipe Files to External Memory
Saves all the settings in every channel on the Recipe Settings dialog box to the external memory as a recipe file.
Click this button to display the Select Drive dialog box.
Only saves channels configured with Access to set to External Memory and Recipe function set to Enable.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

18-9

Recipe Function

This option can only be configured when Recipe function is Enable.

18

3 Recipe Settings Dialog Box

3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box
Use the Individual Settings dialog box to register or edit the recipe settings for the selected channel.
● Block Tab
The Block tab is used to configure settings that are managed by blocks such as the save destination for the data forthe recipe to use, the Recipe function operation, and the trigger setting.

■ Access to
Selects the save destination for data for the recipe to use when writing values to devices.
External Memory:

Uses a recipe file saved to the external memory.
Requires an external memory with a saved recipe file. For details, refer to “4.2 Creating Recipe
Files” on page 18-17.

Internal Memory:

Uses recipe data saved to internal memory.
Since recipe data is handled as a portion of project data, it may put pressure on the volume of
project data that can be downloaded. One item of recipe data uses two bytes when the top
device data type is 16 bits and it uses four bytes when the top device data type is 32 bits.
Example: When the top device data type is 16 bits and using one block of 16 channels of recipe
data with a data amount of 10
2 x 10 x 1 x 16 = 320 bytes
When the top device data type is 32 bits and using 64 blocks of 16 channels of recipe
data with a data amount of 100
4 x 100 x 64 x 16 = 409.6 kilobytes■ File NameEnter the file name of the recipe file to save on the external memory.
The default is “RCPn.CSV”. (n: four digit sequential number)
To change the file name, enter a new file name. The maximum number is 120 characters (including the extension).
If there is a recipe file with the same file name on the external memory, the existing file is overwritten with the new
file.
■ Trigger Setting
Selects the operation using the data for the recipe.

18-10

Read/Write:

Saves values of batch read devices to the external memory as a recipe file and writes themto devices as recipe values.
This option can only be configured when External Memory is selected under Access to.

Read-only:

Saves values of batch read devices to the external memory as a recipe file.
This option can only be configured when External Memory is selected under Access to.

Write-only:

Writes recipe values to devices.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Recipe Settings Dialog Box■ Read Trigger
Specifies the device that triggers batch reading values of devices and saving them to the external memory as a recipe
file.

This option can only be configured when Read/Write or Read-only is selected under Trigger Setting.
Each bit of the word device configured by the read trigger corresponds to a channel.
When a bit changes from 0 to 1, a read to the device is executed.
Example: When the block 1 read trigger is specified as LDR0000
LDR0000-0 corresponds to channel 1-0, LDR0000-1 to channel 1-1, through to LDR0000-15 whichcorresponds to channel 1-15.
bit
15

bit
0

Channel 1-15

Channel 1-0

LDR0000■ Write Trigger
Specifies the device that triggers batch writing recipe values to devices by block.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
This option can only be configured when Read/Write or Write-only is selected under Trigger Setting.
Each bit of the word device configured by the write trigger and the read trigger corresponds to a channel.
When a bit changes from 0 to 1, a write to the device is executed.
Example: When the block 1 write trigger is specified as LDR0000
LDR0000-0 corresponds to channel 1-0, LDR0000-1 to channel 1-1, through to LDR0000-15 whichcorresponds to channel 1-15.
bit
15

bit
0

Channel 1-15

Channel 1-0

LDR0000■ Monitoring Period
Shows the period to monitor the write device and the read device. This period is for detecting alarms so it is the sameas the period to monitor device states. This option is configured on the General tab in the Alarm Log Settings dialog
box.
• When recipe values are batch written to devices with Access to set to External Memory and Trigger
Setting set to Read/Write or Write-only, if no recipe file exists in the “RECIPE” folder in the External
Memory Folder on the external memory, 0 is written to all the devices.
• If a value of device reads and recipe value writes occur simultaneously, first the values of devices are
read, then the recipe values are written.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

18-11

18
Recipe Function

Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

3 Recipe Settings Dialog Box● Channel Tab
The Channel tab is used to configure the recipe name for the selected channel and the devices to read and write
values to.

■ Channel
Shows the block number and the channel number for the selected channel.
Block No.:Shows the block number for the channel selected in Settings.

Channel No.:Shows the channel number for the channel selected in Settings.

■ Recipe function
Selects whether or not to use the Recipe function.
Enable:Writes recipe values to devices, reads values of devices and saves them to the external memory
as a recipe file.

Disable:The Recipe function is not used.

■ Recipe NameEnter the name for the Recipe function to differentiate the channel. The maximum number is 40 characters. The
default is “Recipen”. (n: four digit sequential number)■ Top Device
Specifies the starting address of the destination devices for recipe values and the source devices for values of devices.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
The specified device addresses are configured sequentially from the number 1 in Data List on the Data tab.
■ Data Type
Selects the type of data for recipe values to write and values of devices that are read. For details, refer to Chapter 2“1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Number of Data
Specifies the number of source or destination devices starting with the device address configured by Top Device.
The sequential device addresses from the starting address for the number of configured devices is displayed in Data
List on the Data tab.
The amount of data that can be set varies based on the data type. When BIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-), or BCD4 isselected for Data Type, up to 8,192 items of data can be configured. When BIN32 (+), BIN32 (+/-), or BCD8 is
selected, up to 4,096 items of data can be configured.
■ Display Type
Selects the display type for Data in Data List configured on the Data tab as Decimal or Hexadecimal.
Values when saving data to a recipe file are decimal.

18-12

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Recipe Settings Dialog Box● Data Tab
The Data tab is used to configure recipe values written to devices.

18
Recipe Function■ Channel
Shows the block number and the channel number for the selected channel.
Block No.:Shows the block number for the channel selected in Settings.

Channel No.:Shows the channel number for the channel selected in Settings.

■ Data List
Enter the recipe values to write to devices for each number in the selected channel.
No.:

Shows the data numbers for the amount of data specified by Number of Data.

Device:Devices are sequentially configured starting from the device address specified by Top Device
on the Channel tab.

Data:

Double click a cell to enter a recipe value. The value that can be configured varies based on
Data Type and Display Type configured on the Channel tab.
When Read-only is selected under Trigger Setting on the Block tab, entering recipe values
is unnecessary.

■ Import
Displays the Open dialog box.
Select a recipe file, and then click Open to overwrite the data in Data List with the selected recipe file.
■ Export
Displays the Save As dialog box.
Select the location to save the recipe file, enter a file name, and then click Save to save the recipe file for theselected channel.
The saved recipe file can be edited using Notepad, commercially available text editors, and spreadsheet software.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

18-13

4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes

4Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes

4.1 Editing Recipe Data
You can export recipe data for the selected channel, edit the recipe values in a saved file, and import a recipe fileback into WindO/I-NV3.

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Recipe.
The Recipe Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the channel number to export its recipe data in Settings, and then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 Click the Data tab, and then click Export.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.

18-14

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes

4 Specify the save location in Save in, and then click Save.
The file name specified on the Block tab in the Individual Settings dialog box is entered in File name.

18
Recipe Function

5 Open the exported recipe data file.
Use Notepad, a commercially available text editor, or spreadsheet software.

6 Edit the values and save the file.

7 Return to the Data tab in the Individual Settings dialog box, and then click Import.
The Open dialog box is displayed.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

18-15

4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes

8 Specify the file, and then click Open.

The recipe data is imported.

9 Click OK.
The Individual Settings dialog box closes.

10 Click OK.
The Recipe Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes editing recipe data.

18-16

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes

4.2 Creating Recipe Files
Recipe files can be created on the external memory with the following procedure. The recipe values configured on the
Data tab in the Individual Settings dialog box are saved in recipe files.

Recipe Function

 “Creating Recipe Files in the Recipe Settings Dialog Box” on page 18-17
 “Creating Recipe Files when Downloading Project Data” on page 18-19
 “Creating Recipe Files with a Text Editor” on page 18-20● Creating Recipe Files in the Recipe Settings Dialog Box

1 Insert a USB flash drive in the computer.
ComputerUSB flash drive

2 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Recipe.
The Recipe Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 Click Write Recipe Files to External Memory.
The Select Drive dialog box is displayed.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

18

18-17

4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes

4 Specify the drive for USB flash drive, and then click OK.

■ Drive
Specifies the drive assigned to the external memory.
■ Network
Displays the Map Network Drive dialog box. This dialog box allows you to specify a drive on the network.
■ External Memory Folder
Specifies the folder to save the created recipe file.
Click
to display the Project Settings dialog box. You can specify the External Memory Folder used as the savedestination.

5 Click OK.
The Recipe Settings dialog box closes.
The “RECIPE” folder is created in the External Memory Folder used as the save destination, and the recipe files for thechannels configured with Access to set to External Memory and Recipe function set to Enable in the Recipe
Settings dialog box are created.

18-18

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes

The External Memory Folder is configured in the Project Settings dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 26“1.5 Setting the External Memory Folder” on page 26-12.

1 Insert a USB flash drive into the Touch.
Touch

USB flash drive

2 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the Download icon.
The Download dialog box is displayed.

If the project data was changed, a confirmation message to save the project data is displayed.
Click OK to save the project data and display the Download dialog box.
Click Cancel to stop to save the project data.

3 Select the Download Recipe Files to External Memory check box.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

18-19

18
Recipe Function● Creating Recipe Files when Downloading Project Data
When a project download is executed, the “RECIPE” folder is created in the External Memory Folder on the external
memory inserted in the Touch and the recipe files are created. The recipe files are only created for channels
configured with Access to set to External Memory and Recipe function set to Enable in the Recipe Settings
dialog box.

4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes

4 Verify Communication Settings, and then click Download.
Since the recipe files are downloaded to the external memory inserted in the Touch, use the same settings as whencommunicating with the Touch.
To change Communication Settings, click Change to display the Communication Settings dialog box. Change
Communicate with, Port, and Baud Rate. For details, refer to Chapter 23 “1 Communicating with the Touch” onpage 23-1.
If security is enabled in the Touch project, the Password Screen is displayed. Select the user name andenter the password.
For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 21-1.

5 Click Yes.
The Download Project dialog box is displayed and the project files start downloading.
When finished downloading, a completion message is displayed.

6 Click OK.

7 Click Close.

● Creating Recipe Files with a Text Editor
You can edit recipe files using Notepad, commercially available text editors, or spreadsheet software.

1 Write the data for the amount of data in “value of device” comma (,) new line order.
If the amount of data in the recipe file is lower than the amount of data for the top device configured on the Channel
tab in the Individual Settings dialog box, 0 is written in the rest of the devices.

2 Save the file with the “.csv” extension.
Give the file the file name configured on the Block tab in the Individual Settings dialog box. If the file name isdifferent, 0 is written to all the devices.

3 Copy the edited recipe files to the “RECIPE” folder in the External Memory Folder on the external memory.

18-20

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes

4.3 Editing Recipe Files

18
Book1

100

Recipe Function

150
200

You can read and display the data saved from the Touch to
the external memory as a recipe file on a computer.
USB flash drive

Recipe File

The recipe file that was read can be edited using Notepad, commercially available text editors, or spreadsheet
software.
You can upload recipe files from the external memory using WindO/I-NV3.
On the WindO/I-NV3 Online tab, click the arrow under Upload, and then click Stored Data in External
Memory to display the Upload Data from External Memory dialog box. Select the Recipe Files check box,
specify the location to save the recipe files in Path, and then click OK to be able to save the recipe files inthe specified folder.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

18-21

4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes

4.4 Deleting Recipe Files
The methods to delete recipe files saved on the external memory are as follows.
To delete files with WindO/I-NV3, on the Online tab, in the Touch group, click Clear, and then click Stored Data inExternal Memory to display the Clear Data in external memory dialog box. Select the Recipe Files check box,
and then click OK.

18-22

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualChapter 19 Text Group
This chapter describes the Text Group function and how to configure text groups and text.

1

Overview

19

Text groups are a function where the text used for such purposes as registration text, messages for parts, chartlabels, and titles for Popup Screens are registered in advance. The registered text is loaded and displayed whendisplaying parts and screens. The text can be managed collectively including editing the registered text and adding ordeleting text.
Text groups can perform the following functions.
• Switch the displayed language by value of device.
Group 1: English
Text ID: 1 Goal reachedGroup 2: ChineseGroup 3: Japanese

䗴ᡆⴤḽ

目標達成

Touch

External device

D100 :

1

Goal reached

D100 :

2

䗴ᡆⴤḽ

D100 :

3

目標達成• Use common text for parts.
Touch
Group 1: English

RUN STOP
Base Screen 1

RUN

RUN
Text ID: 2 STOP
Text ID: 1

STOP

Base Screen 2

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

19-1

Text Group

1.1 How the Text Group Function is Used

1 Overview

1.2 Functions that Support Text Groups
The functions that support text groups are as follows.
Item

Setting

ScreenPopup Screen

Title

Drawings

Text

Text

Bit Button

Registration Text

Word Button

Registration Text

Goto Screen Button

Registration Text

Buttons

Lamps

Data
Displays

ChartsKey Button

Registration Text

Selector Switch

Registration Text

Pilot Lamp

Registration Text

Multi-State Lamp

Registration Text

Numerical Input

Unit

Message Display

Message

Message Switching
Display

Message

Alarm List Display

Message

Alarm Log Display

Message, Title

Numerical Display

Unit

Bar Chart

X-axis and Y-axis scale labels

Line Chart

X-axis and Y-axis scale labels

Alarm Log

Messages displayed in data output as CSV

Data Log

Labels displayed in data output as CSV

Operation Log

Recorded item labels and event names displayed in data output as CSV

When the text group is switched, the displayed Base Screen is reset. Popup Screens and internal devices
have the same behavior as when the Base Screen is switched. If the Close while changing Base Screen
check box is selected on the Options tab in the properties dialog box for the Popup Screen, the displayed
Popup Screen is closed. The behavior of the internal devices differs according to the internal devices. For
details, refer to Chapter 27 “Internal Devices” on page 27-1.

19-2

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure2

Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for text groups and text.

19

2.1 Creating Text Groups

Text Group

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Text Group.
The Text Group Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 In Number of Text Groups, specify the number of text groups to create (1 to 16).
The configured number of text groups are enabled.

3 Under Text Group Name, enter the name for each text group.
The maximum number for the Text Group name is 20 characters.

For one text group, proceed to step 7.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual19-3

2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure

4 In Default Group, select the text group to use when the Touch power is turned on and when switched to run mode.
5 Select the Use Dynamic Text check box.
6 With Trigger Device, specify the word device to use as the condition to switch the text group.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
These options can only be configured when Number of Text Groups is specified as two or more.
When the value of device is 0, the text group switches to the default group.
If the value of device is invalid, the text group is not switched.

7 Click OK to close the Text Group Settings dialog box.
This concludes creating text groups.

19-4

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure

2.2 Registering Text
1 On the View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Text Manager).

Text Manager is displayed.

19

The default is “1-Group 1” only. To manage text by groups, create the groups in the Text Group Settings dialog box.
Click
19-15.

to display the Text Group Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “Text Group Settings Dialog Box” on page

3 With Text ID, specify the ID number to register (1 to 32,000).
4 With Font under Text Attribute, select the font to use for the text to register from the following.
European, Japanese, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic, Windows
When Windows is selected, all the fonts installed on the computer can be used. This allows you to display
fonts and languages that are not installed on the Touch.
Click Change to display the Font Settings dialog box. Configure the details such as the font, style, and size.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-12.

5 With Text Color under Text Attribute, select the color of the text to register (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8
shades).

Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

19-5

Text Group

2 With Text Group, select the text group to register text to.

2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure

6 In Text under Text Attribute, enter the text to register.
The maximum number is 3750 characters.
The characters that can be entered vary based on the font selected by Font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2
Available Text” on page 2-5.
• You can enter multi-line text by inserting a newline. The newline is displayed as \n and is counted as two
characters.
• To enter Unicode characters, click

to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the characters in

the Unicode Input dialog box, and then click OK.

7 Click Add/Edit.
The text is registered and displayed in the text list.

8 Repeat steps 2 through 7 to create the necessary text in each text group.
9 Click Close.
A save confirmation message is displayed.

10 Click OK.
The confirmation message and Text Manager close.
This concludes registering text.

19-6

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure● Saving Registered Text as a CSV File
To use registered text in another project, save the text as a CSV file or as a text file. This file is called a text list.

1 On the View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Text Manager).

Text Manager is displayed.

19
Text Group

2 With Text Group, select the text group where the text ID to save is registered.
For one text group, proceed to step 3.

3 Click Export.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.

4 Select Save in, enter File name, and then click Save.

5 Click Close to close Text Manager.
This concludes saving a text list.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

19-7

2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure● Importing Text from a Text List
A text list saved as a CSV file or as a text file can be imported into Text Manager for the project being edited.

1 On the View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Text Manager).

Text Manager is displayed.

2 With Text Group, select the text group to register the imported text to.
For one text group, proceed to step 3.

3 Click Import.
The Text Message List dialog box is displayed.

4 Click List File.
The Open dialog box is displayed.

19-8

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure

5 Select a saved text list, and then click Open.
The text is displayed in the list.

19
Text Group

6 Click the text to import.
To select multiple items of text, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

7 Click OK.
If there is text with an already registered ID number in Text Manager, a confirmation message to overwrite that text
is displayed.
• Click Yes to overwrite the text with the ID number displayed in the confirmation message.
• Click Yes To All to overwrite all the text.
• Click No to display the next confirmation message without overwriting the text with the ID number displayed in theconfirmation message.
• Click Cancel to stop importing text.

8 Click Close in Text Manager.
A save confirmation message is displayed.

9 Click OK.
The confirmation message and Text Manager close.
This concludes importing text from a text list.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

19-9

2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure

2.3 Switching the Displayed Language by Value of Device
When multiple text groups have been created, the text group can be switched with a value of device to display adifferent language.
This section describes an example when the registration text for a button changes between English, Chinese, andJapanese.
Group 1: English

RUN
Text ID: 2 STOP
Text ID: 1

Group 3: Japanese

䘆㺂

運転

‫↘ڒ‬

停止

Touch

External device

D100 :

Group 2: Chinese

RUN STOP

1

Bit Button 2 (Text ID: 2)
Bit Button 1 (Text ID: 1)

D100 :

2

䘆㺂

‫↘ڒ‬

D100 :

3

運転停止

1 Following the steps in “Creating Text Groups” on page 19-3, specify Number of Text Groups as 3, and under Text
Group Name, enter “English” for Group 1, “Chinese” for Group 2, and “Japanese” for Group 3. Select the Use
Dynamic Text check box and set Trigger Device to D100.

2 Following the steps in “Registering Text” on page 19-5, register the text.
Group 1: English

RUN
Text ID: 2 STOP
Text ID: 1

Group 2: ChineseGroup 3: Japanese

䘆㺂

運転

‫↘ڒ‬

停止

3 Create a Bit Button.

On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Bit Button.

4 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Bit Button.

19-10

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure

5 Double-click the dropped Bit Button and the properties dialog box is displayed.

19
Text Group

6 Click the Registration Text tab.

7 Select the Use Text Manager check box.
8 Specify 1 for the Text ID under OFF.
9 Configure the settings on each tab as necessary, and then click OK.
The Properties of Bit Button dialog box closes.

10 Repeat steps 3 through 9 and create a Bit Button to use text ID 2 for the registration text.
This concludes configuring the settings to switch the displayed language by a value of device.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

19-11

3 Text Manager

3

Text Manager
This section describes items and buttons in Text Manager and on the Text Group Settings dialog box.

3.1 Text Manager
The text that is loaded and displayed when objects and Popup Screens are displayed is collectively managed with
Text Manager.

■ Text ID
Shows the ID number (1 to 32,000).
When registering text, specify the ID number to register (1 to 32,000).
When using registered text when displaying parts and screens, specify the ID number to use (1 to 32,000).
■ Text Group
Selects the group where text is registered.
The default is “1-Group 1” only. To manage text by groups, create the groups in the Text Group Settings dialog box.
Click
19-15.

to display the Text Group Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “Text Group Settings Dialog Box” on page

■ Text Attribute
This area configures the text to register and the font and color for the text.
Font:

Selects the font used for displaying text from the following.
European, Japanese, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic,
Windows

19-12

Text Color:

Selects the color of the text to register (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Text:

Enter the text to register here. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
The characters that can be entered vary based on the font selected by Font. For details, refer
to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-5.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Text Manager

Windows Font:

Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font.
Select Windows using Font to display the current setting. To change the setting, click Change
to display the Font Settings dialog box.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-12.

• You can enter multi-line text by inserting a newline. The newline is displayed as \n and is counted as two
characters.
to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the characters in

the Unicode Input dialog box, and then click OK.
■ Text Messages List
The attributes for the registered text are displayed in this list.
ID:

Shows the ID number (1 to 32,000).

Font:

Shows the font to use to display the registered text.

Color ID:

Shows the color ID for the registered text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).

Message:

Shows the registered text.

■ Add/Edit
Registers the settings in Text Attribute to the ID number specified by Text ID. When you specify an ID numberthat is already registered, that ID number is overwritten with the new settings. The registered text and its attributes
are displayed in the Text Messages List.
.
■ Delete
Deletes the text with the ID number selected in the Text Messages List. Click this button and the Confirm Message
Delete Dialog dialog box is displayed.
• Click Yes to delete the text with the ID number displayed in the confirmation message from all the text groups.
• Click Yes To All to delete the text for all the ID numbers selected in the Text Messages List from all the textgroups.
• Click No to display the next confirmation message without deleting the text with the ID number displayed in theconfirmation message.
• Click Cancel to stop deleting the text.
To select multiple items of text, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

■ Reduce
Deletes the text with ID numbers that are registered in the Text Message List but are not used in the project. This candecrease the amount of project data and reduce the amount of internal memory used on the Touch.
■ FindDisplays the Find dialog box.
The text entered in Find what is searched for in Message in the Text Messages List.

When Find is clicked after selecting a range of text, it will only search within the selected range.
To select multiple items of text, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

19-13

Text Group• To enter Unicode characters, click19

3 Text Manager■ Replace
Displays the Replace dialog box.
The text entered in Find what is searched for in Message in the Text Messages List and that text is replaced withthe text entered in Replace with.

When Replace is clicked after selecting a range of text, it will only search and replace within the selected
range.
To select multiple items of text, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.
■ Import
Imports text in a text list saved as a CSV file or as a text file.
Click this button to display the Text Message List dialog box. For details, refer to “Importing Text from a Text List” onpage 19-8.
■ Export
Saves the text for the text group being edited as a CSV file or as a text file. This file is called a text list. The types offiles that can be saved are as follows.
• CSV file (comma delimited) (*.csv)• CSV file (semicolon delimited) (*.csv)• Text file (comma delimited) (*.txt)• Text file (semicolon delimited) (*.txt)• Unicode text file (tab delimited) (*.txt)
Click this button to display the Save As dialog box. For details, refer to “Saving Registered Text as a CSV File” on page19-7.
The saved text list can be imported with Import.
When Unicode text file (tab delimited) (*.txt) is selected, the file can handle multiple languages byusing a commercially available text editor or spreadsheet software that supports Unicode.
■ Other Groups
When text with the same ID number as the text selected in the Text Messages List is registered to other textgroups, that text is displayed in this list.
Group Name:

Shows the group name.

Font:

Shows the font for the registered text.

Color ID:

Shows the color ID for the registered text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).

Message:

Shows the registered text.

■ Select
Closes Text Manager and sets the ID number selected in Text Manager Text Messages List in the dialog box orscreen that opened Text Manager. This button is only enabled when Text Manager was called from the properties
dialog box of an object.
■ CloseCloses Text Manager.
When Text Manager was called from the properties dialog box of an object, Add/Edit, Delete, Reduce,
Replace, Import, and Export are disabled. These buttons are only enabled when Text Manager isdisplayed with the following operations.
• Double click Text Manager in the Project window• On the View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Text Manager)

19-14

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Text Manager

3.2 Text Group Settings Dialog Box
The groups for switching text are managed in the Text Group Settings dialog box.

19
Text Group■ Number of Text Groups
Specifies the number of text groups (1 to 16). The configured number of text groups are created.
■ Text Group NameEnters the names of the text groups.
The maximum number for the Text Group name is 20 characters.
■ Default Group
Select the group to use when the Touch power is turned on and when switching to run mode.
■ Use Dynamic Text
Select this check box to switch the text group according to the value of device.
Specify the word device to use as the condition to switch the text group.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
These options can only be configured when Number of Text Groups is specified as two or more.
When the value of device is 0, the text group switches to the text group set as the default group.
If the value of device is invalid, the text group is not switched.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

19-15

3 Text Manager

19-16

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualChapter 20 Script
This chapter describes the script function, editing and management of the script, definition method, and definition
sample.

1

About the Script Function

1.1 Overview of the Script Function

20

For ladder program and FBD program details, refer to the following.
• Ladder program: SCRPT instruction
"SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual" - Chapter 27 "Script"• FBD program: Script FB
 "SmartAXIS FBD Programming Manual" - Chapter 17 "The script FB"
As an example, the logical product (AND) calculation described as

LM100

LM101

in a ladder diagram is described as[LM 100] & [LM 101] in text format in the script.
■ Description and management of the script
The script is programmed by WindO/I-NV3 script editor, and managed by Script Manager.
• By using the Script Editor, conditional expressions, operators, and functions can be described by selecting
them from a list, and an error in the script can also be determined. The script can also be exported as atext file, so the script can be edited by a text editor such as Notepad, and the edited script can beimported back into the Script Editor by saving it as a text file.
For details, refer to “2.3 Script Editor” on page 20-8.
• Script Manager can manage the script collectively by adding, deleting, organizing, etc., the script createdby the Script Editor.
For details, refer to “2.2 Script Manager” on page 20-7.
■ Example of using the script
As an example, when reading the data from the external device and displaying on the Touch, the load on the external
device can be reduced for processes such as conditional branching or function calculation, which apply a heavy loadon the external device, by processing it with a script on the Touch.
// Change the additional value// depending on the value of D10
if ([D 10] <= 9){ [D 10] = [D 10] + 10; }else{ [D 10] = [D 10] + 20; }// Change the additional value// depending on the value of D11
if ([D 11] <= 19){ [D 11] = [D 11] + 20; }else{ [D 11] = [D 11] + 40; }// Change the additional value// depending on the value of D12
if ([D 12] <= 29){ [D 12] = [D 12] + 30; }else{ [D 12] = [D 12] + 60; }// Change the additional value// depending on the value of D13
if ([D 13] <= 39){ [D 13] = [D 13] + 40; }else{ [D 13] = [D 13] + 80; }D10
Read the data not processed0

D11 10
D12 30
D13 50Touch

External device

Process with script to decrease
the load of external device.

0 → 10

D10

10

D11 10 → 30

D11

30

D12

90

D10

D12 30 → 90
D13 50 → 130

Write the result

D13 130

Get the result by processing with script

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual20-1

Script● What is the script function?
Complex processes such as conditional branching, logical operation, arithmetic operation, functions, etc., can be
programmed in a text format using Script Function.
The scripts can be executed in a Script Command, a Global Script, a ladder program, or a FBD program.

1 About the Script Function

1.2 Types and Trigger Conditions of the Script for HMI Function● Types of scripts
There are two types of scripts used.
■ Script Command
This is a script that executes in accordance with trigger conditions in the same way as other parts, such as buttons orlamps, for each screen.
• It is executed only in the screens where it is placed.
• Multiple scripts can be set for each screen.
For details, refer to Chapter 11 “4 Script Command” on page 11-25.
■ Global Script
This is a script that operates within the whole project. This script is executed at the end of Touch scan process inaccordance with the trigger condition.
Only one global script can be set to a project.
For details about setup, refer to “3 Global Script” on page 20-12.
● Trigger condition of the script
Trigger conditions that can be set for the script are as follows:
Trigger Condition
Rising-edge

Fallingedge

Satisfy thecondition

Whilesatisfying
thecondition

Fixed Period

Always ON

Script Command

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

Global Script

YES

YES

NO

NO

YES

YES

Script■ Rising-edge
Script is executed when trigger device changes from 0 to 1.
■ Falling-edge
Script is executed when trigger device changes from 1 to 0.
■ Satisfy the condition
Script is executed when the set condition is met.
This can only be set for the Script Command.
■ While satisfying the condition
Script is executed while the set condition is met.
This can only be set for the Script Command.
■ Fixed Period
Script is executed at set intervals.
■ Always ON
Script is executed on every scan of the Touch.
This can only be set for the Global Script.

20-2

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 About the Script Function

1.3 Data Type of the Script
It is required to set the data type appropriate for the range of data to be used, such as the maximum and minimum
values of the data used in the script, negative numbers or real numbers required, etc., considering what is to beprocessed with the script.
Data type is set by the Script Editor.
For the setting method, refer to “2.3 Script Editor” on page 20-8.

20Script● Data Types
There are seven types of data that can be processed by the script function.
For details about the data types, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
Types of the data
type

Required
word countRange that can be processed

BIN16 (+)

1

0

to

65535

BIN16 (+/-)

1-32768

to32767

BIN32 (+)

2

0

to

4294967295

BIN32 (+/-)

2-2147483648

to2147483647

BCD4

1

-999

to

9999

BCD8

2

-9999999

to

99999999-3.4×1038

to-1.18×10-38

float32

02
1.18×10-38

to

3.4×1038

There are functions that cannot be used when the data types are different. Please refer to the format list.
 For details, refer to “4 Script Definition Method” on page 20-14.
WindLDR data types are displayed as follows: BIN16(+) as W (word), BIN16(+/-) as I (integer), BIN32(+)
as D (double word), BIN32(+/-) as L (long), and float32 as F (float). For details, refer to the follows:• Ladder program
 "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual" - Chapter 4 "Instructions Reference" - "Data Types for
Advanced Instructions"• FBD program
 "SmartAXIS FBD Programming Manual" - Chapter 4 "FB Reference" - "Data types"

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual20-3

1 About the Script Function

1.4 Script Error of HMI Function
This section describes the types, cause, and information of script errors.
● Types and causes of script errors
Script will stop running when an error occurs.
Types of script error

Cause
Dividend was divided by 0 for division and residue calculation.

Processing error

Data types are BCD, float32, and value out of range is specified.

Execution time over error

The execution time for one script exceeded 3,000 milliseconds.

Writing count error

Data count written to the external device address in one script has exceeded 64.
Indirect read from external device address is performed while the HMI Special
Internal Relay LSM14 or LSM15 is 1.

Indirect device error

Indirect read or indirect write of external device address is performed with the
Global Script.
Value out of range was specified as argument for LINE function, RECTANGLE
function, or CIRCLE function.

Parameter error● Error information
Script error information is stored in the following locations. An error message is displayed on the screen when a script
error has occurred.
Category

Storage location

Stored value

Bit 10 of the System Area address+2

Existence of a script error

Script ID of the script with an error HMI Special Data Register LSD52

Types of script errors

HMI Special Data Register LSD530No error

1

Error

1 to
32,000Script ID

1

Processing error

2

Execution time over error

3

Writing count error

4

Indirect device error

5

Parameter error• If there is a script error, bit 10 (11th bit) of the starting device +2 (third word from the beginning) of the
System Area will be 1.
System Area 1

System Area 2

System Area 3

System Area 4

Starting device

+1

+2

+3

+4

+5

+6

+7

+8

+9

1st word

2nd word

3rd word

4th word

5th word

6th word

7th word

8th word

9th word

10th word

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

11th bit

The starting device of the System Area is set in the System tab of the Project Settings dialog box.
For details about the System Area, refer to Chapter 3 “System Area” on page 3-23.
• For ladder program and FBD program errors, refer to Chapter 30 “2.2 Program Execution Error” on page
30-5.

20-4

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Editing and Management of the Script2

Editing and Management of the Script

2.1 Script Registration Procedure
This section describes the procedure to create a script and register it in the project.
The registered script can be used in a Multi-Button, Script Command, Multi-Command and Global Script.

1 On the View tab, in the Workspace group, click

20(Script Manager).

ScriptScript Manager opens.

2 Click Add.
Script Editor opens.

3 Specify Script ID.
When creating a new script, enter the script ID (1 to 32000).

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

20-5

2 Editing and Management of the Script

4 Enter Script Name.
The maximum number for the script name is 40 characters.

5 Select Data Type.
Be sure to match the Data Type of the script with the types of data being used within the script.
For example, if the script contains numbers with decimals, the Data Type of the script would be float32. If
the script contains only whole numbers between 0 and 65535, the Data Type of the script would be
BIN16(+).

6 Type in a program to Script.
To create a script using the samples provided by WindO/I-NV3, under Function List, select Category andFunction, and then click Insert Format. The sample shown in Format is inserted at the cursor position in
Script.

7 When the script is finished, click OK.
The created script is shown in Script List.

8 Click Close on Script Manager.
A save confirmation message is displayed.

9 Click OK.
The scripts are saved in the project data and Script Manager closes.
If you click Cancel, Script Manager closes without saving the scripts.

When you are in the following dialog boxes, clicking
will open Script Manager. When you close Script
Manager, you will be taken back to the original dialog box.
• Global Script General tab• Script Command properties General tab• Multi-function script properties for Multi-Buttons and Multi-Commands

20-6

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Editing and Management of the Script

2.2 Script Manager
Script Manager can add, delete and manage the script created by Script Editor.

20
Script■ Script List
Displays a list of registered scripts.
Script ID:

Displays the script ID (1 to 32,000) of the registered scripts.

Error:

OK is displayed when there is no error in the registered script and NG is displayed when there is an error.

Script Name:

Displays the script name of the registered scripts.

■ Script
Displays the contents of the script selected in the script list.
■ Add
Displays the Script Editor dialog box to add a script.
For details, refer to “2.3 Script Editor” on page 20-8.
■ EditDisplays the Script Editor dialog box to allow editing of the selected script. For details, refer to “2.3 Script Editor” onpage 20-8.
■ Delete
Deletes the script selected in the script list.
If a script is used in a project or parts, it cannot be deleted.
■ Reduce
Deletes the scripts that are registered in the script list but are not used in the project.
■ Select
The highlighted script in the script list is selected and Script Manager is closed.
■ CloseCloses Script Manager.
When Close is clicked after a change has been made in the script list, a confirmation message to save isdisplayed. The change will be saved when OK is clicked. The change will be discarded and Script Manager
closed when Cancel is clicked.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

20-7

2 Editing and Management of the Script

2.3 Script Editor
A new script can be created or the script selected in Script Manager can be edited using Script Editor.

(Description)■ Script ID
To create a new script, enter the script ID (1 to 32,000).
To edit an existing script, the set script ID is displayed.
■ Script NameEnter the script name. The maximum number for script name is 40 characters.
■ Data Type
Select the data type to be processed by the script.
For details about the data type, refer to “1.3 Data Type of the Script” on page 20-3.
■ ScriptEnter the script.
Single script limitation is 240 characters per line with up to 1024 lines.
■ Error Check
The script being edited is checked for errors.
■ Import
The Open dialog box is displayed.
By selecting a script saved (exported) in a text format (*.txt) and clicking Open, the imported script is inserted at the
cursor position of the script being edited.

20-8

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Editing and Management of the Script■ Export
The Save As dialog box is displayed.
By selecting a save location and clicking Save, the script being edited is saved in text format (*.txt). A saved script
can be inserted in the script clicking Import.

20
Script■ Options
The Options dialog box is displayed.
The fonts and color of the text, tab indents, etc., used in the Script text box are set in the Options dialog box. For
details, refer to “Script Formatting Options dialog box” on page 20-11.
■ FindThe Find dialog box is displayed.
Enter the text to be searched for in the Find What box.

When Find is clicked after selecting a range in the Script text box, it will only search within the selected
range.
■ Replace
The Replace dialog box is displayed.
Text entered in Find what will be replaced with the text entered in Replace with.

• This is useful when replacing device addresses.
• When Replace is clicked after selecting a range in the Script text box, it will only search and replace
within the selected range.
■ Show/Hide Function List
Switches between showing and not showing the Function List and Script Compilation Output.
The size of the script edit box can be changed by dragging the right bottom corner of the Script Editor. By
hiding the Function List and Script Compilation Output, the script editing area (text box) will becomelarger, making the editing of script easier.
■ Cursor
Displays the current position of the cursor in the Script text box by line number and column number.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

20-9

2 Editing and Management of the Script■ Function list
Category:

Lists the categories of the functions.

Function:

Lists the functions of the selected category.

Format:Displays the definition example of the selected function.

(Description):

Displays the description of the selected function.

Insert Format:

Contents displayed in the selected Format are inserted at the cursor position.

Insert Device:

The Device Address Settings box is displayed.
By specifying the device address and clicking on OK, specified device address is inserted
at the cursor position.

■ Script Compilation Output
The contents of any errors found when using error check are displayed.
By double-clicking on the comment displayed in the Script Compilation Output, the part corresponding to the error
is highlighted in the Script text box.
Depending on the error, there may be an error in the line that is different from the line displayed in the
Script Compilation Output, or multiple errors may be displayed.
■ OK
Error check is performed for the script being edited and save it.
If there is an error in the script being edited, a message will appear before saving the script. It is possible tosave a script with an error.
■ Cancel
Closes Script Editor without saving the script being edited.

20-10

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Editing and Management of the Script● Script Formatting Options dialog box
Font, Size, Tab indent, and Color used in the Script text box of the Script Editor can be specified.

20
Script■ Font
The font name for the text displayed in the Script is entered or selected.
■ Size
The font size (dots) for the text displayed in the Script is entered or selected.
■ Sample
Displays a sample of the text with the Font and Size as specified in the Script text box.
■ Tab indent
Specify the position of the indent when a tab is inserted (1 to 20).
■ Color
Displays each of the text colors for Comment, Keyword, and Device.
The Color dialog box is displayed when the color button is clicked.

Text other than comment, keyword, or device is displayed in black.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

20-11

3 Global Script3

Global Script
A Global Script is a script that operates throughout the entire project, regardless of which screen is currently being
displayed. Only one Global Script can be set for a project. This script is executed at the end of scan process of Touchin accordance with the trigger condition.

3.1 Setting procedures for Global Script
Global Script is setup using the following procedures.

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Global Script.
The Global Script dialog box is displayed.

2 Click General tab and Trigger Condition tab.
Set or confirm the items displayed in each of the tabs.
● General Tab■ Use Global Script
To use the Global Script, select the Use Global Script check box.
With Global Script, you cannot do indirect read and indirect write of the external device addresses.
(It can be setup in WindO/I-NV3, but it will not operate on the Touch.)■ Script ID
Specify the script ID (1 to 32,000) of the script to operate.
Script Manager is displayed whenis clicked. The script can be selected from the script list of Script Manager. For
details, refer to “2.2 Script Manager” on page 20-7.
■ Script Name
Displays the name of the script specified by the script ID.
■ Script
Displays the contents of the script specified by the script ID.

20-12

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual3 Global Script● Trigger Condition Tab

20
Script■ Trigger TypeSpecify the condition to execute the script.
Rising-edge:

Script is executed when trigger device changes from 0 to 1.

Falling-edge:

Script is executed when trigger device changes from 1 to 0.

Always ON:

Script is executed constantly.

Fixed Period:

Script is executed at set intervals.

■ Device
Specify the bit device or bit of the word device.
This is enabled only when Rising-edge or Falling-edge is selected in Trigger Type.
■ Period (sec)Specify the scan frequency in seconds (1 to 3,600).
This is enabled only when Fixed Period is selected in Trigger Type.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual20-13

4 Script Definition Method

4

Script Definition Method

4.1 Format List
This section describes the format and operation of control statements, operators, functions, etc.
Enter everything except comments in single-byte. For specific definition examples, refer to “5 Script Coding
Examples” on page 20-22.
● Control statements
Conditional expressions are described as
,

,

,

,

here. Execution lines are described as...

■ Conditional branching
Formatif
else
else ifswitchcasedefault

Description

if (
{

)
; }

if (
{
else
{

)
; }

Execution line is executed if the conditional expression is satisfied.

Execution line 1 is executed if the conditional expression is satisfied.
Execution line 2 is executed if it is not satisfied.

; }

if (
)
{
; }
else if (
{
; }
else
{
; }

)

Execution line 1 is executed if the conditional expression 1 is satisfied.
Conditional expression 2 is determined if conditional expression 1 is notsatisfied, and execution line 2 is executed if conditional expression 2 issatisfied.
Execution line 3 is executed if conditional expression 2 is not satisfied too.

switch (){
case constant 1:;
break;
case constant2:;
break;
default::
break;}

Execution line 1 is executed if the value of conditional expression matches
constant 1.
Execution line 2 is executed if the value of conditional expression matches
constant 2.
Execution line 3 is executed if the value of conditional expression does notmatch constant 1 nor constant 2.
• This can only be used for data types BIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-), BIN32 (+),
BIN32 (+/-), BCD4, and BCD8.

■ Repeat
Formatwhile

while (
{

)
;

}

20-14

Description
Execution line is repeatedly executed while the conditional expression issatisfied.
• It will go into an infinite loop when the conditional expression is always
satisfied, so do not set fixed values or devices that do not change as theconditional expression.
• Do not write a value to the external device address in the while definition.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Script Definition Method■ Halt and exit
FormatDescription

while (
{
if (
{

)
)

Process will be as follows while the conditional expression 1 is satisfied.
• Execution line 2 is continuously executed while the conditional expression 2 is
not satisfied.
• Once the conditional expression is satisfied, it will go out of the loop by break(not executing execution line 2), and execution line 3 is executed.

;

break

break;};

Script};break

switch (){
case constant 1:;
break;
case constant 2:;
break;};

When the conditional expression 2 matches the constant 1, it will halt thedetermination of constant 2 by break after executing execution line 1, andprocess will move to execution line 3.

returnreturn;It will exit the script, and execute the next parts or script.

● Operator
Device, constant, and temporary device are described as,,

here, and expression is described as,.

■ Relational operator
OperatorFormatDescription====

Compares if

is equal to!=!=Compares if

is not equal to<<Compares if

is less than<=<=Compares if

is equal or less than>>Compares if

is greater than>=>=Compares if

is equal or greater than

.
.
.
.
.
.

■ Logical operator
OperatorFormatDescription&&() && ()

Calculates the logical product (AND) of||() || ()

Calculates the logical sum (OR) of

!

!(

)

Reverses the logic of

and
and

.
.

.

■ Arithmetic operator
Operator

20

FormatDescription

+

+

Adds

and

.

-

-

Subtracts

from

*

*

Multiplies

and

/

/

Divides%%

Calculates remainder after dividing

by

.
.
.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

by

.

20-15

4 Script Definition Method■ Bit operator
OperatorFormatDescription&&

Calculates the logical product (AND) of each bit ofand.
• This can only be used for data types BIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-), BIN32 (+),
BIN32 (+/-), BCD4, and BCD8.

||

Calculates the logical sum (OR) of each bit ofand.
• This can only be used for data types BIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-), BIN32 (+),
BIN32 (+/-), BCD4, and BCD8.

^^

Calculates the exclusive logical sum (XOR) of each bit ofand.
• This can only be used for data types BIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-), BIN32 (+),
BIN32 (+/-), BCD4, and BCD8.

~

Reverses the logic of each bits of.
For word device and fixed values, 0 will be 65535, and 65535 will be 0.
For bit device, 0 will be 1, and 1 will be 0.
• This can only be used for data types BIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-), BIN32 (+),
BIN32 (+/-), BCD4, and BCD8.

~

<<

<<

Shifts each bit of
to left forbit(s).
• This can only be used for data types BIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-), BIN32 (+),
BIN32 (+/-), BCD4, and BCD8.

>>>>

Shifts each bit of
to right forbit(s).
• This can only be used for data types BIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-), BIN32 (+),
BIN32 (+/-), BCD4, and BCD8.

● Function
Device, constant, and temporary device are described as

,

,

,

... here.

■ Bit function
Function

FormatDescription

Bit setSET();

Turns bit device
to 1.
It will be same result as= 1;.

Bit reset

RST(

);

Turns bit device
to 0.
It will be same result as= 0;.

Bit reverse

REV(

);

Reverses the 1 and 0 of bit device
It will be same result as
=~

.

;.

■ Word function
Arithmetic operation
Function

FormatDescription
Maximum value out of

Maximum
value

MAX(

,

,

)

Minimum
value

MIN(

,

,

)

Exponentialfunction

EXP()

Naturallogarithm(Base: e)

LOGE(

)

Commonlogarithm(Base: 10)

LOG10()

Exponentiation

POW(

,

Minimum value out of,,is returned.

• This can be used for all data types.
• Up to 15 arguments can be defined.
Exponential function ofis returned.

• This can only be used for data type float32.
Natural logarithm (base is e) foris returned.

• This can only be used for data type float32.
• Set a value larger than 0 for argument.
Common logarithm (base is 10) for,is returned.

• This can be used for all data types.
• Up to 15 arguments can be defined.

is returned.

• This can only be used for data type float32.
• Set a value larger than 0 for argument.

)

to thepower is returned.

• This can only be used for data type float32.

(Continued to next page)

20-16

,

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Script Definition Method

Arithmetic operation (Continued)
Function
Square root

FormatROOT(

Description
Square root of)• This can only be used for data type float32.
Sine of

Sine

SIN(

is returned.

(-1 - +1) is returned. Specify arbitrary formula to represent

angle (units in radian) for argument).

• This can only be used for data type float32.
Cosine of

COS(

represent angle (units in radian) for argument)

ScriptCosine20(-1 - +1) is returned. Specify arbitrary formula to.

• This can only be used for data type float32.
Tangent ofTangent

TAN((-1 - +1) is returned. Specify arbitrary formula torepresent angle (units in radian) for argument).

• This can only be used for data type float32.
Arcsine of
ArcsineASIN((-1 - +1) in radian value (-π/2 - +π/2) is returned.

Specify arbitrary formula for argument).

• This can only be used for data type float32.
Arccosine of
Arccosine

ACOS((-1 - +1) in radian value (0 - π) is returned.

Specify arbitrary formula for argument).

• This can only be used for data type float32.
Arctangent of
Arctangent

ATAN((-1 - +1) in radian value (-π/2 - +π/2) is returned.

Specify arbitrary formula for argument);.

• This can only be used for data type float32.
Conversion
from Angle to
RadianRAD();

Conversion
from Radianto Angle

DEG();

Value ofis converted from degree (°) to radian, and the value is returned.

• This can only be used for data type float32.
Value ofis converted from radian to degree (°), and the value is returned.

• This can only be used for data type float32.

Data type conversion
Function
Conversion
from BCD to
BinaryFormat
BCD value of

BCD2BIN(

BIN2BCD(

Conversion
from float32
to Binary

FLOAT2BIN(

Conversion
from Binary to
float32

BIN2FLOAT(

Conversion
from String
character to
Decimal)is returned in binary value.

• This can be used with data types BIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-), BIN32 (+),
and BIN32 (+/-).
Binary value ofConversion
from Binary to
BCD

Conversion
from Decimal
to String
character

Description)

is returned in BCD value.

• This can be used with data types BIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-), BIN32 (+),
and BIN32 (+/-).
Float32 value ofis returned in binary value.
Values under the decimal point is truncated.

)• This can be used with data types BIN32 (+) and BIN32 (+/-).
Binary value of

DEC2ASCII(),• This can be used with data types BIN32 (+) and BIN32 (+/-).

)

Decimal number value
is converted to a character string, and store
in order withas a starting device.
• This can be used with data types BIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-), BIN32 (+),
BIN32 (+/-), BCD4, and BCD8.
Character string

ASCII2DEC()

is returned in float32 value.

is returned as decimal number value.

• This can be used with data types BIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-), BIN32 (+),
BIN32 (+/-), BCD4, and BCD8.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

20-17

4 Script Definition Method

Data comparison and copy
Function

Data
comparison

Data copy

Bit device(1 word length)toBit device(1 word length)
Bit device(1 word length)
toWord device

Word devicetoBit device(1 word length)

FormatDescription,): Starting device of comparison target 1: Starting device of comparison target 2: Range of comparison (in words)
Values of device
forwords and values of device
forwords are compared.
1 is returned if all the values of devices match, and 0 is returned if anyof the value does not match.
• Specified range is compared in word unit, and result is returned.
• Up to 64 words can be compared.

): Starting device of copy source: Starting device of copy target: Range of copy (in words)
Values fromforwords are copied towords respectively.
• Specified range is copied in word unit.
• Up to 64 words can be copied.

MEMCMP(MEMCPY(,,BITS2BITS(,,: Starting device of copy target (bit device): Starting device of copy source (bit device)
Copies one word worth of data from
to

);

for

.

• 16 bits are processed from the starting bit device as one word.
• This can only be used in control functions.

BITS2WORD(,: Starting device of copy target (bit device): Starting device of copy source (word device)
Copies one word worth of data from
to
.

);

• 16 bits are processed from the starting bit device as one word.
• This can only be used in control functions.

WORD2BITS(,: Starting device of copy target (word device): Starting device of copy source (bit device)
Copies one word worth of data from
to
.

);

• 16 bits are processed from the starting bit device as one word.
• This can only be used in control functions.

Character string operation*1
Only internal devices can be specified as an argument for character string operation function.
Termination character NULL (0x00) is treated as end of character string when character string is handled. Also,
termination character NULL is not included in the length of the character string.
Function

FormatCharacterstring copy

STRCUT(,

Characternumber count

STRLEN()

Characterstringconcatenation

STRCAT(,

Characterstring search

STRSTR(,

Description,,: Starting device of copy target: Starting device containing copy source character string: Start location of copy (0-127)): Number of characters to copy (1-128)
From the character string starting from, character string
frombytes forward forcharacters are stored intoforcharacters.
Number of characters for character string starting fromreturned.

)

To the character string starting from, the character string
starting fromis concatenated, andis returned to
beginning.

)

From the character string starting from, character string
starting fromis searched, and location found (number ofcharacters from beginning -1) is returned.
The maximum number for character string to search is 128
characters.

*1 HMI function only

20-18

is

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Script Definition Method

Draw*1This is a function to draw an object on the screen. Top left corner of the screen is coordinates X=0 and Y=0.
When a device is used as an argument, an object is drawn with the changed value when the value is changed.
However, the object that is already drawn is not erased. To erase the drawn object, overwrite it with the background color.
When an out-of-range value is used as an argument, 5 is stored in the LSD53 and script is halted.
Function

Format

LINE(

,
,

,
)

,

Set valueLine width

Drawing ofstraight line

LINE(

,

RECTANGLE(

,

,
,
,
,

,

,
,
,
)

)

,
,
,

1
1 dot

2
2 dots3
3 dots5
5 dotsIt will be set to 1 (1 dot) when omitted.
• Specification of: Line type is as follows.
Set value
1
2
3
4
5
6
Long Dash Long DashLine type Solid
Dot Dash Long Dash
Dot
Dot Dot
It will be set to 1 (Solid) when omitted or when the line width isset to anything other than 1 (1 dot).
•: Line color is specified by the color data. It will be set to
255 (white) when omitted.
For color data, refer to Appendix “1 Color Number
Correspondence Table” on page A-1.
Rectangle with left top corner as start coordinate and bottom right corneras end coordinate is drawn.
: Start coordinate X,: Start coordinate Y,: End
coordinate X,: End coordinate Y,: Line width,:
Line type,: Foreground color,: Background color,:
Pattern,: Rounded corner type,: Rounded corner radius•: Line width,: Line type,: Foreground color,: Background color,: Pattern,: Rounded
corner type,: Rounded corner radius can be omitted.
• Specification of: Line width is as follows:
Set value12
35Line width
1 dot
2 dots3 dots5 dotsIt will be set to 1 (1 dot) when omitted.
• Specification of: Line type is as follows.
Set value
1
2
3
4
5
6
Line type Solid
Dot Dash Long Dash Long Dash Long Dash
Dot
Dot Dot
It will be set to 1 (Solid) when omitted or when the line width isset to anything other than 1 (1 dot).

Drawing of
Rectangle•

RECTANGLE(

,
)

,

,

: Foreground color,: Background color is specified
by the color data. It will be set to 255 (white) when omitted.
For color data, refer to Appendix “1 Color Number
Correspondence Table” on page A-1.
• Specification of: Pattern is as follows.
Set
0
2
3
4
7
8
value
Line
Foreground Foreground Foreground Background Horizontal
None 100%
type
25%
50%
100%
lines
Set
9
10
11
12
13
value
Line Vertical Slant
Slant
type
lines Upwards Down-wards Cross-hatch Tint
It will be set to 0 (None) when omitted.
• Specification of: Rounded corner type is as follows.
Set value012Line type
None
Straight
Curve
It will be set to 0 (None) when omitted.
•: Rounded corner radius is specified with number of dots (0 - 200).
It will be set to 0 (0 dot) when omitted.

(Continued to next page)*1 HMI function only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

20-19

20
Script,,Description
Straight line connecting the start coordinate and end coordinate is drawn.
: Start coordinate X,: Start coordinate Y,: End
coordinate X,: End coordinate Y,: Line width,: Line type,: Line color: Line width,: Line type,: Line color can be omitted.
•• Specification of: Line width is as follows:4 Script Definition Method

Draw (Continued)
Function

FormatDescription
A circle with specified radius from center coordinate is drawn.
: Center coordinate X,
X axis radius,: Y axis radius,: Center coordinate Y,: Line width,:: Line type,: Foreground color,

CIRCLE(

,
,
)

,
,

,
,

,
,

: Background color,: Pattern: Line width,: Line type,: Foregroundcolor,: Background color,: Pattern can beomitted.
• Specification of: Line width is as follows:•

Set valueLine width

1
1 dot

2
2 dots3
3 dots5
5 dotsIt will be set to 1 (1 dot) when omitted.
• Specification ofDrawingof circle
and ellipse

CIRCLE(

,

,

,

)

: Line type is as follows.

Set value123Line type

Solid

Dot

4

5
6
Long Dash Long Dash
Dash Long Dash
Dot
Dot Dot

It will be set to 1 (Solid) when omitted or when the line width isset to anything other than 1 (1 dot).
•: Foreground color,: Background color is specified
by the color data. It will be set to 255 (white) when omitted.
For color data, refer to Appendix “1 Color Number
Correspondence Table” on page A-1.
• Specification of: Pattern is as follows.

Set value

0

2
3
4
7
8
Foreground Foreground Foreground Background Horizontal
Line type None
100% 25%
50%
100%
lines

Set value

9
10
11
12
Vertical Slant
SlantLine type
Cross-hatch
lines Upwards Down-wards

13
Tint

It will be set to 0 (none) when omitted.

OffsetFunction

FormatDescription: Reference device: Device to store the indirect value (0 to 32767)
Specify the device

words from.

Indirect readSpecify OFFSET function to the right of the assignment
statement.
Format example:
Indirect
specification

OFFSET(,)

Operation:= OFFSET(,Stores the value of device in
from

into

)
words

.

Indirect write
Specify OFFSET function to the left of the assignment statement.
Format example:
Operation:

OFFSET(,

Stores the value of
devicewords from) =into the.

• Store the value appropriate for the data type as the indirect
value. As an example, when the data type is BCD4, store theindirect value of BCD4 into the device.

20-20

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Script Definition Method● OtherThis section provides definitions for constant, device, temporary device, and comment.
■ Constant
Constant can be defined as decimal or hexadecimal numbers.
Sample definition of decimal numbers

Define the numeric value directly.

-1234

Define the negative number with a “-” (minus) symbol at the beginning.

12.34

Decimal number can be defined for real numbers (float32).
Define a “.” (period) between the whole numbers and decimal numbers.

There are 2 ways to define hexadecimal numbers.
Sample definition of hexadecimal numbers

0x12AB

Define “0” (zero) and “x” (lower case x) at the beginning of the value.

12ABh

Append “h” at the tail of the value.

■ Device Address
Device Address is defined with the device symbol and address within “[” and “]”.
Definition of the device[Device symbol address](“ ” represents a space.)

Sample definition[LDR 100]■ Temporary Device
Temporary device is a device that can be used only with the script. It can store a value and can be used as a variable.
It is defined with a device symbol “@” followed by address (HMI function: 1 to 16, Control function: 1 to 32).
Definition of the temporary device@Address(Space between the device symbol “@” and address is not required.)

Sample definition

Temporary device number 2@2

All the values for temporary devices are set to “0” when the execution of the script is started.

■ Comment
A note defined in the script is called a comment. The line with “//” defined at the beginning of a line will become a comment.
“//” is defined with a single-byte. Double-byte characters can be used after “//”.
Definition of comment// Arbitrary note
Sample definition// Store the initial value to calculation
data [LDR 100] for process A[LDR 100] = 1234;::←This line is not executed.

• It will be useful to use comments to explain the contents of the script (especially when the editor of thescript has changed or some time has passed since editing).
• Comments are ignored (not executed) when the script is executed, so they can be defined freely withoutworrying about the execution time.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

20-21

20
Script1234

5 Script Coding Examples

5

Script Coding Examples
This section provides script coding examples for control statements, arithmetic operators, and functions, as well as
the descriptions of their operations. However, the devices that can be used and their notation varies based on HMI
functions and control functions. Please program a script with the devices and notation that can be used for each
respective function.

5.1 Control Statements■ Example 5.1.1

Conditional branch

Scriptif ([LDR 100]){[LDR 200] = 100;}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is not 0, then 100 is stored in LDR200.
■ Example 5.1.2

Conditional branching

Scriptif ([LM 100]){[LDR 200] = [LDR 300] + [LDR 400] + [LDR 500];}
Operation description
If the value of LM100 is not 0, then LDR300, LDR400, and LDR500 are added and that value is stored in LDR200.
■ Example 5.1.3

Conditional branching

Scriptif (0 != [LDR 100]){
if (0 != [LDR 200]){[LDR 300] = 0x1234;}}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is not 0 and the value of LDR200 is also not 0, then 0x1234 is stored in LDR300.
If the value of LDR100 is not 0 and the value of LDR200 is 0, then nothing is executed.
If the value of LDR100 is 0, then nothing is executed regardless of the value of LDR200.

20-22

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.1.4

Conditional branching

Scriptif ((0 != [LDR 100]) || (0 != [LDR 200])){[LDR 300] = 100;}else{
[LDR 400] = [LDR 500] + 100;}20
ScriptOperation description
If either the value of LDR100 or the value of LDR200 is not 0, then 100 is stored in LDR300.
If the value of both LDR100 and LDR200 is 0, 100 is added to LDR500 and that value is stored in LDR400.
■ Example 5.1.5

Conditional branching

Scriptif ([LDR 100] == 0){[LDR 200] = 0x1234;}
else if ([LDR 100] == 1){[LDR 200] = 0x5678;}
else{[LDR 200] = 0x9999;}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is 0, then 0x1234 is stored in LDR200.
If the value of LDR100 is 1, then 0x5678 is stored in LDR200.
If the value of LDR100 is not 0 or 1, then 0x9999 is stored in LDR200.
■ Example 5.1.6

Conditional branching

Scriptif ([LDR 100]){
if ([LDR 200]){
if ([LDR300]){[LDR 400] = 100;}else{
[LDR 400] = 200;}}}
Operation description
If the values of LDR100, LDR200, and LDR300 are all not 0, then 100 is stored in LDR400.
If the values of LDR100 and LDR200 are not 0 and the value of LDR300 is 0, then 200 is stored in LDR400.
If either the value of LDR100 or LDR200 is 0, then nothing is executed regardless of the value of LDR300.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

20-23

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.1.7

Iteration

Script[LDR 100] = 10;[LDR 200] = 10;
while (0 < [LDR 100]){[LDR 200] = [LDR 200] + 1;
[LDR 100] = [LDR 100] - 1;}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is larger than 0, then 1 is repeatedly added to the value of LDR200 and 1 is repeatedly
subtracted from the value of LDR100.
In the script example above, when the while statement repeats ten times, the value of LDR100 becomes 0 and thewhile statement ends.
After this script executes, the value of LDR100 is 0 and the value of LDR200 is 20.
■ Example 5.1.8

Iteration

Script[LDR 100] = 0;
[LDR 200] = 3;
[LDR 300] = 5;
while ([LDR 100] == 0){[LDR 200] = [LDR 200] + 1;
if ([LDR 300] = [LDR 200){
SET([LM 0]);break;}}
Operation description
While the value of LDR100 is 0, the while statement repeats.
Inside the while statement, if the values of LDR200 and LDR300 are equal, the while statement will terminate, andafter [LM 0] changes to 1, execution breaks out of the while statement.
In the script example above, the values of LDR200 and LDR300 are equal when the while statement repeats twice,
and after LM0 changes to 1, execution breaks out of the while statement loop. After execution, the value of LDR100
is 0, the value of LDR200 is 5, the value of LDR300 is 5, and LM0 is 1.

20-24

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.1.9

Indirect write and indirect read using iteration (while statement)

Script// Transfer LDR10 through LDR19 to LDR100 through LDR109// Initialize the indirect value[LDR 0] = 0;20
Script// Loop ten times
while ([LDR 0] < 10){// Transfer 1 word by indirect assignment
OFFSET([LDR 100], [LDR 0]) = OFFSET([LDR 10], [LDR 0]);// Increment indirect value[LDR 0] = [LDR 0] + 1}
This script stores the values of LDR10 through LDR19 in LDR100 through LDR109.
It operates as follows.
First, the indirect value LDR0 is initialized and set to 0.
First iteration (loop): The value of LDR0 is 0, so the condition “[LDR 0] < 10” is true and the statements inside whileare executed.
• The value of LDR10, 0 words from LDR10, is stored in LDR100, 0 words from LDR100.
• 1 is added to the value of the indirect value LDR0 so that it becomes 1.
Second iteration (loop): The value of LDR0 is 1, so the condition “[LDR 0] < 10” is true and the statements insidewhile are executed.
• The value of LDR11, 1 word from LDR10, is stored in LDR101, 1 word from LDR100.
• 1 is added to the value of the indirect value LDR0 so that it becomes 2.
:(Repeats in this manner for the third to ninth iterations):
Tenth iteration (loop): The value of LDR0 is 9, so the condition “[LDR 0] < 10” is true and the statements inside whileare executed.
• The value of LDR19, 9 words from LDR10, is stored in LDR109, 9 words from LDR100.
• 1 is added to the value of the indirect value LDR0 so that it becomes 10.
The value of LDR0 is 10, so the condition “[LDR 0] < 10” is false and execution breaks out of the while loop.
After execution, the values of LDR100 through LDR109 are the values of LDR10 through LDR19.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

20-25

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.1.10

Decimal to octal conversion using a while statement

Script// Convert a decimal value to octal// - For example, convert 10 (dec) to 12 (oct), 16 (dec) to 20 (oct)// - Convert a value to octal up to 4 digits max@1 = 0;@2 = [LDR 100];@3 = 1;@4 = 0;// while counter// gets original data// decimal base// calculation results// repeat four times
while (@1 < 4){// Extract 1st octal digit from original data. Store working result in @10.
@10 = @2 % 8;// Convert the extracted results to decimal and add to results@4 = @4 + (@10 * @3);// Increase the decimal base by one digit@3 = @3 * 10;// Reduce the original data by one digit@2 = @2 / 8;// If @2 is 0, terminate the while statement
if (0 == @2){
break;}// Increment while counter by 1
@1 = @1 + 1;}// Store the calculation result in LDR200[LDR 200] = @4;
Operation description
This example converts a decimal value to octal using a while statement.
By repeating the process to divide the original decimal data by 8 and converting each digit to octal in a whilestatement, the conversion is implemented up to four digits.
The unconverted decimal value is stored in LDR100. After the script is executed, the converted octal value is stored in
LDR200.

20-26

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.1.11

Conditional branching with switch

Scriptswitch ([LDR 100]){case 10:[LDR 200] = 0x1234;
break;
case 999:[LDR 200] = 0x5678;
SET([LM 10]);break;}

20
ScriptOperation description
If the value of LDR100 is 10, then 0x1234 is stored in LDR200.
If the value of LDR100 is 999, then 0x5678 is stored in LDR200 and LM10 turns on.
If the value of LDR100 is not 10 or 999, then nothing is executed.
■ Example 5.1.12

Conditional branching with switch using the default statement

Scriptswitch ([LDR 100]){case 0:[LDR 200] = 0x1234;
break;
case 1:[LDR 200] = 0x5678;
break;
default:[LDR 200] = 0x9999;
break;}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is 0, then 0x1234 is stored in LDR200.
If the value of LDR100 is 1, then 0x5678 is stored in LDR200.
If the value of LDR100 is not 0 or 1, then 0x9999 is stored in LDR200.
■ Example 5.1.13

Terminate the script with the return statement

Scriptif (0x1234 == [LDR 100]){[LDR 200] = 0x5678;
return;}[LDR 300] = 0;
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is not 0x1234, then 0 is stored in LDR300.
If the value of LDR100 is 0x1234, then 0x5678 is stored in LDR200 and the script terminates.
The return statement does not break out of a function like the break statement, it terminates the script and executes
the next part or script.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

20-27

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.1.14

Break out of a loop with the break statement

Script[LDR 100] = 0;
[LDR 200] = 3;
[LDR 300] = 5;
while ([LDR 100] == 0){[LDR 200] = [LDR 200] + 1;
if ([LDR 200] == [LDR 300){
SET([LM 0]);break;}}
Operation description
While the value of LDR100 is 0, the while statement repeats until LDR200 and LDR300 are equal.
Inside the while statement, if the values of LDR200 and LDR300 are equal, the while statement will end andexecution breaks out of the while statement.
In the script example above, the values of LDR200 and LDR300 are equal when the while statement repeats twice,
and after LM0 changes to 1, the while statement ends. After execution, the value of LDR100 is 0, the value of LDR200
is 5, the value of LDR300 is 5, and the value of LM0 is 1.

5.2 Relational Operators■ Example 5.2.1

Equal toScriptif ([LDR 100] == [LDR 200]){[LDR 300] = 0x100;}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is equal to the value of LDR200, then 0x100 is stored in LDR300.
■ Example 5.2.2

Not equal to

Scriptif ([LDR 100] != [LDR 200]){[LDR 300] = 0x100;}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is not equal to the value of LDR200, then 0x100 is stored in LDR300.
■ Example 5.2.3

Less than

Scriptif ([LDR 100] < [LDR 200]){[LDR 300] = 0xl00;}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is less than the value of LDR200, then 0x100 is stored in LDR300.

20-28

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.2.4

Less than or equal to

Scriptif ([LDR 100] <= [LDR 200]){[LDR 300] = 0xl00;}

20

Operation description■ Example 5.2.5

ScriptIf the value of LDR100 is less than or equal to the value of LDR200, then 0x100 is stored in LDR300.
Greater than

Scriptif ([LDR 100] > [LDR 200]){[LDR 300] = 0xl00;}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is greater than the value of LDR200, then 0x100 is stored in LDR300.
■ Example 5.2.6

Greater than or equal to

Scriptif ([LDR 100] > [LDR 200]){[LDR 300] = 0xl00;}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is greater than or equal to the value of LDR200, then 0x100 is stored in LDR300.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

20-29

5 Script Coding Examples

5.3 Logical Operators■ Example 5.3.1

Logical AND

Scriptif (([LDR 100] == [LDR 200]) && ([LDR 300] == [LDR 400] + [LDR 500])){[LDR 600] = 100;}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is equal to the value of LDR200, and if the value of LDR300 is equal to the value of LDR400
and LDR500 added together, then 100 is stored in LDR600.
If either ([LDR 100] == [LDR 200]) or ([LDR 300] == [LDR 400] + [LDR 500]) is false, the processing in the brackets“{ }” is not executed.
■ Example 5.3.2

Logical OR

Scriptif ((0 != [LDR 100]) || (0 != [LDR 200])){[LDR 300] = 100;}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is not 0 or the value of LDR200 is not 0, then 100 is stored in LDR300.
If either is true, the processing in the brackets “{ }” is executed.
■ Example 5.3.3

Logical inversion

Scriptif (!([LDR 100] == 0x1234)){[LDR 300] = 100;}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is not equal to 0x1234, then 100 is stored in LDR300.
■ Example 5.3.4

Logical inversion

Scriptif (!(0 !=[LDR 100])){[LDR 300] = 100 ;}Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is 0, then 100 is stored in LDR300.
This is the same as the code “if (0==[LDR 100]))”.

20-30

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Script Coding Examples

5.4 Arithmetic Operators■ Example 5.4.1

Addition

Script[LDR 300] = [LDR 100] + [LDR 200];

20

Operation description■ Example 5.4.2

Script

The values of LDR100 and LDR200 are added together and the result is stored in LDR300.
Subtraction

Script[LDR 300] = [LDR 100] - [LDR 200];
Operation description
The value of LDR200 is subtracted from the value of LDR100 and the result is stored in LDR300.
■ Example 5.4.3

Multiplication

Script[LDR 300] = [LDR 100] * [LDR 200];
Operation description
The values of LDR100 and LDR200 are multiplied together and the result is stored in LDR300.
■ Example 5.4.4

Division

Script[LDR 300] = [LDR 100] / [LDR 200];
Operation description
The value of LDR100 is divided into the value of LDR200 and the result is stored in LDR300.
■ Example 5.4.5

ModuloScript[LDR 300] = [LDR 100] % [LDR 200];
Operation description
The value of LDR100 is divided into the value of LDR200 and the remainder is stored in LDR300.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

20-31

5 Script Coding Examples

5.5 Bitwise Operators■ Example 5.5.1

Logical AND

Scriptif ([LM 100] & [LM 101]){
SET([LM 200)]);}else{
RST([LM 200]);}
Operation description
If the bitwise logical AND operation on the values of LM100 and LM101 is 1, LM200 changes to 1.
If the bitwise logical AND operation on the values of LM100 and LM101 is 0, LM200 changes to 0.
The operation is the same as the following ladder diagram.
LM100 LM101

LM200■ Example 5.5.2

Logical OR

Scriptif ([LM 100] | [LM 101]){
SET([LM 200]);}else{
RST([LM 200]);}
Operation description
If the bitwise logical OR operation on the values of LM100 and LM101 is 1, LM200 changes to 1.
If the bitwise logical OR operation on the values of LM100 and LM101 is 0, LM200 changes to 0.
The operation is the same as the following ladder diagram.
LM100

LM200

LM101

■ Example 5.5.3

Logical XOR (exclusive OR)

Script[LDR 200] = [LDR 100] ^ 0xFF;
Operation description
The logical XOR operation on the value of LDR100 and each bit in 0xFF is stored in LDR200.
For example, if the value of LDR100 is 15 (0x0F), then LDR200 is 240 (0xF0).

20-32

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.5.4

Inversion

Script[LDR 200] = ~[LDR 100];
Operation description
The bits in the value of LDR100 are flipped and stored in LDR200.
For example, if the value of LDR100 is 0, then LDR200 is 65535.
Inversion

Script■ Example 5.5.5

20

Scriptif (([LM 100] & ~ [LM 101]) | [LM 102]){
SET([LM 200]);}else{
RST([LM 200]);}
Operation description
If the bitwise logical OR operation on the value of LM102 and the result of the bitwise logical AND operation on thevalue of LM100 and the inverted result of the value of LM101 is 1, then LM200 changes to 1.
If the bitwise logical OR operation on the value of LM102 and the result of the bitwise logical AND operation on thevalue of LM100 and the inverted result of the value of LM101 is 0, then LM200 changes to 0.
The operation is the same as the following ladder diagram.
LM100 LM101

LM200

LM102

■ Example 5.5.6

Left shift

Script[LDR 300] = [LDR 100] << [LDR 200];
Operation description
The value of LDR100 is shifted left by only the amount of the value of LDR200 and the result is stored in LDR300.
For example, if the value of LDR100 is 1 and the value of LDR200 is 3, 1 is shifted 3 bits to the left and the result 8 isstored in LDR300.
■ Example 5.5.7

Right shift

Script[LDR 300] = [LDR 100] >> [LDR 200];
Operation description
The value of LDR100 is shifted right by only the amount of the value of LDR200 and the result is stored in LDR300.
For example, if the value of LDR100 is 8 and the value of LDR200 is 3, 8 is shifted 3 bits to the right and the result 1
is stored in LDR300.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

20-33

5 Script Coding Examples

5.6 Bit Functions■ Example 5.6.1

Set a bit

ScriptSET([LM 100]);
Operation description
Turns LM100 to 1. The result is the same as [LM■ Example 5.6.2

100] = 1.

Reset a bit

Script

RST([LM 100]);
Operation description
Turns LM100 to 0. The result is the same as [LM■ Example 5.6.3

100] = 0.

Invert a bit

ScriptREV([LM 100]);
Operation description
Flips LM100 1 and 0. The result is the same as [LM20-34100] = ~[LM 100].

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Script Coding Examples

5.7 Word Functions● Arithmetic operations■ Example 5.7.1

Maximum value

Script[LDR 200] = MAX([LDR 100], [LDR 110], [LDR 120], [LDR 130], [LDR 140]);

20

Operation description
Up to 15 arguments can be used.
■ Example 5.7.2

Minimum value

Script[LDR 200] = MIN([LDR 100], [LDR 110], [LDR 120], [LDR 130], [LDR 140]);
Operation description
Out of the values stored in LDR100, LDR110, LDR120, LDR130, and LDR140, stores the minimum value in LDR200.
Up to 15 arguments can be used.
■ Example 5.7.3

Exponential function

Script[D 10] = EXP([D 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the exponential function of the value of D20 and the result is stored in D10.
Only the data type float32 can be used.
■ Example 5.7.4

Natural logarithm

Script[D 10] = LOGE([D 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the natural logarithm of the value of D20 and the result is stored in D10.
Only the data type float32 can be used.
■ Example 5.7.5

Common logarithm

Script[D 10] = LOG10([D 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the logarithm of the value of D20 with 10 as the base and the result is stored in D10.
Only the data type float32 can be used.
■ Example 5.7.6

Power

Script[D 10] = POW([D 20],[D 30]);
Operation description
Calculates the power of a value.
For example, when the value of D20 is 10 and the value of D30 is 5, the function calculates 10 to the power of 5 andstores the result in D10.
Only the data type float32 can be used.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

20-35

ScriptOut of the values stored in LDR100, LDR110, LDR120, LDR130, and LDR140, stores the maximum value in LDR200.

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.7.7

Square root

Script[D 10] = ROOT([D 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the square root of the value of [D20] and the result is stored in [D10].
Only the data type float32 can be used.
■ Example 5.7.8

Sine

Script[D 10] = SIN([D 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the sine of the radian value of D20 and stores the result in D10.
Only the data type float32 can be used.
■ Example 5.7.9

CosineScript[D 10] = COS([D 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the cosine of the radian value of D20 and stores the result in D10.
Only the data type float32 can be used.
■ Example 5.7.10

Tangent

Script[D 10] = TAN([D 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the tangent of the radian value of D20 and stores the result in D10.
Only the data type float32 can be used.
■ Example 5.7.11

ArcsineScript[D 10] = ASIN([D 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the arcsine of the value of D20 and stores the result as radians in D10.
Only the data type float32 can be used.
■ Example 5.7.12

Arccosine

Script[D 10] = ACOS([D 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the arccosine of the value of D20 and stores the result as radians in D10.
Only the data type float32 can be used.

20-36

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.7.13

Arctangent

Script[D 10] = ATAN([D 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the arctangent of the value of D20 and stores the result as radians in D10.
Only the data type float32 can be used.

Script■ Example 5.7.14

20

Convert angle to radians

Script[D 10] = RAD([D 20]);
Operation description
Converts the value of D20 from degrees (°) to radians and stores the result in D10.
Only the data type float32 can be used.
■ Example 5.7.15

Convert radians to angle

Script[D 10] = DEG([D 20]);
Operation description
Converts the value of D20 from radians to degrees (°) and stores the result in D10.
Only the data type float32 can be used.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

20-37

5 Script Coding Examples● Data type conversions■ Example 5.7.16

Convert BCD to binary

Script[LDR 200] = BCD2BIN([LDR 100]);
Operation description
Converts the BCD value in LDR100 to a binary value and stores it in LDR200.
For example, if the BCD value 10 (16 as a binary value) is stored in LDR100, 10 (binary value) is stored in LDR200.
■ Example 5.7.17

Convert binary to BCD

Script[LDR 200] = BIN2BCD([LDR 100]);
Operation description
Converts the binary value in LDR100 to a BCD value and stores it in LDR200.
For example, if the binary value 16 (10 as a BCD value) is stored in LDR100, 16 (BCD value) is stored in LDR200.
■ Example 5.7.18

Convert float32 to binary

Script[LDR 200] = FLOAT2BIN([LDR 100]);
Operation description
Converts the float value in LDR100 to a binary value and stores it in LDR200.
For example, if the float value 1234 (0x449A4000 as a binary value) is stored in LDR100, 1234 (binary value) is stored
in LDR200. If the float value 1234.56 (0x449A51EC as a binary value) is stored in LDR100, the value after the decimal
point is discarded and 1234 (binary value) is stored in LDR200.
■ Example 5.7.19

Convert binary to float32

Script[LDR 200] = BIN2FLOAT([LDR 100]);
Operation description
Converts the binary value in LDR100 to a float value and stores it in LDR200.
For example, if the binary value 1234 is stored in LDR100, the float value 1234 (0x449A4000 as a binary value) isstored in LDR200.

20-38

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.7.20

Convert decimal to string

Script

DEC2ASCII([LDR 100], [LDR 200]);
Operation description
Converts the decimal numeric value in LDR200 to a string and stores it in order with LDR100 as the starting address.

Converting 1234 (when the data type is BIN16+)
DeviceStored value

LDR2001234

DeviceStored value
Upper byte

Lower byte

LDR100'1' = 0x31

'2' = 0x32

LDR101'3' = 0x33

'4' = 0x34

0x00

0x00

LDR102

Terminating character

Converting -12345 (when the data type is BIN16+/-)
DeviceStored value

LDR200-12345

DeviceStored value
Upper byte

Lower byte

LDR100'-' = 0x2D

'1' = 0x31

LDR101'2' = 0x32

'3' = 0x33

LDR102'4' = 0x34

'5' = 0x35

LDR1030x00

0x00

Terminating character

Converting 1234567890 (when the data type is BIN32+)
DeviceLDR200LDR201

Stored value
1234567890

DeviceStored value
Upper byte

Lower byte

LDR100'1' = 0x31

'2' = 0x32

LDR101'3' = 0x33

'4' = 0x34

LDR102'5' = 0x35

'6' = 0x36

LDR103'7' = 0x37

'8' = 0x38

LDR104'9' = 0x39

'0' = 0x30

0x00

0x00

LDR105

Terminating character

Converting -1234567890 (when the data type is BIN32+/-)
DeviceLDR200LDR201

Stored value-1234567890

DeviceStored value
Upper byte

Lower byte

LDR100'-' = 0x2D

'1' = 0x31

LDR101'2' = 0x32

'3' = 0x33

LDR102'4' = 0x34

'5' = 0x35

LDR103'6' = 0x36

'7' = 0x37

LDR104'8' = 0x38

'9' = 0x39

'0' = 0x30

0x00

LDR105

Terminating character

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

20-39

20
Script• This function can be used with data types BIN16(+), BIN16(+/-), BIN32(+), BIN32(+/-), BCD4, andBCD8.
• Only internal devices can be used.
• When using functions that handle strings, check the Storage Method of string data setting on the
System tab in the Project Settings dialog box. Depending on the setting, the upper and lower bytes are
stored in the reverse of the following explanation.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “3.1 System Tab” on page 3-19.
• A NULL terminating character (0x00) is added to the end of the string.

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.7.21

Convert string to decimal

Script[LDR 100] = ASCII2DEC([LDR 200]);
Operation description
Converts the stored string starting at LDR200 to a decimal and stores the result in LDR100.
The number of digits that can be converted is the maximum number of digits for each data type with added sign.
If the string to convert contains NULL or characters that cannot be converted to numeric values, the string isconverted up to that character.
• This function can be used with data types BIN16(+), BIN16(+/-), BIN32(+), BIN32(+/-), BCD4, andBCD8.
• Only internal devices can be used.
• When using functions that handle strings, check the Storage Method of string data setting on the
System tab in the Project Settings dialog box. Depending on the setting, the upper and lower bytes are
stored in the reverse of the following explanation.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “3.1 System Tab” on page 3-19.
Setting the string “1234” (when the data type is BIN16+)
DeviceStored value
Upper byte

Lower byte

DeviceStored value

LDR1001234

LDR200'1' = 0x31

'2' = 0x32

LDR201'3' = 0x33

'4' = 0x34

0x00

0x00

LDR202

Terminating character

Setting the string “1234567” (when the data type is BIN16+)
DeviceStored value
Upper byte

Lower byte

DeviceStored value

LDR200'1' = 0x31

'2' = 0x32

LDR10012345

LDR201'3' = 0x33

'4' = 0x34

LDR202'5' = 0x35

'6' = 0x36

LDR203'7' = 0x37

0x00
Terminating character

Setting the string “-12345” (when the data type is BIN16+/-)
DeviceStored value
Upper byte

Lower byte

DeviceStored value

LDR200'-' = 0x2D

'1' = 0x31

LDR100-12345LDR201'2' = 0x32

'3' = 0x33

LDR202'4' = 0x34

'5' = 0x35

LDR2030x00

0x00

Terminating character

String “1234567890” (when the data type is BIN32+)
DeviceStored value
Upper byte

Lower byte

DeviceStored value

LDR200'1' = 0x31

'2' = 0x32

LDR100 - 101

1234567890

LDR201'3' = 0x33

'4' = 0x34

LDR202'5' = 0x35

'6' = 0x36

LDR203'7' = 0x37

'8' = 0x38

LDR204'9' = 0x39

'0' = 0x30

LDR2050x00

0x00

Terminating character

20-40

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Script Coding Examples● Data comparison and copying■ Example 5.7.22

Word-unit data comparison

Script[LDR 0] = MEMCMP([LDR 100], [LDR 200], 10);
Operation description

If the value for each is entirely equal, 1 is stored in LDR0. If even a single one is not equal, 0 is stored.
Compare each
LDR100LDR101LDR102

LDR200LDR201LDR202LDR107
LDR108LDR109LDR207
LDR208LDR209Even if the data type is set to BIN32+, BIN32+/-, BCD8, or float32, the comparison is performed from thestarting device in word units.
■ Example 5.7.23

Bit-unit data comparison

Script[LDR 0] = MEMCMP([LDR 100-2], [LM 0], 10);
Operation description
Compares the third bit of LDR100 through the third bit of LDR109 with the state of the bits from LM0 to LM9.
If the value for each is entirely equal, 1 is stored in LDR0. If even a single one is not equal, 0 is stored.
Compare each
3rd bit of LDR100
3rd bit of LDR101
3rd bit of LDR102

LM0
LM1
LM2

3rd bit of LDR107
3rd bit of LDR108
3rd bit of LDR109

LM7
LM8
LM9

Even if the data type is set to BIN32+, BIN32+/-, BCD8, or float32, the comparison is performed from thestarting device in bit units.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

20-41

20
ScriptCompares the value of 10 words from LDR100 (up to LDR109) with the value of 10 words from LDR200 (up to
LDR209).

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.7.24

Word-unit data copy

Script

MEMCPY([LDR 100], [LDR 200], 10);
Operation description
Copies the value of 10 word devices from LDR200 (up to LDR209) to 10 word devices from LDR100 (up to LDR109).
Copy each
LDR100LDR101LDR102

LDR200LDR201LDR202LDR107
LDR108LDR109LDR207
LDR208LDR209Even if the data type is set to BIN32+, BIN32+/-, BCD8, or float32, the data is copied from the starting
device in word units.
■ Example 5.7.25

Bit-unit data copy

Script

MEMCPY([LM 0], [LDR 100-2], 10);
Operation description
Copies the third bit of 10 words from LDR100 (up to LDR109) to the bit state for 10 bits of devices from LM0 (up to LM9).
Copy each
LM0
LM1
LM2

3rd bit of LDR100
3rd bit of LDR101
3rd bit of LDR102

LM7
LM8
LM9

3rd bit of LDR107
3rd bit of LDR108
3rd bit of LDR109

Even if the data type is set to BIN32+, BIN32+/-, BCD8, or float32, the bits are copied from the starting
device in bit units.
■ Example 5.7.26

Copy 1 word from bit devices to bit devices*1

Script

BITS2BITS(I004, M0000);
Operation description
A value of 1 word length from I004 (I004 to I023) is copied to the bit states of a 1 word region from M0000 (M0000
to M0017).
Copy each
M0000
M0001

I004
I005

M0017

I023

*1 Control function only

20-42

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.7.27

Copy 1 word from bit devices to a word device*1

Script

BITS2WORD(I004, D0000);
Operation description
A value of 1 word length from I004 (to I023) is copied to the value of device D0000.

20This is the same as BITS2BITS(I004, D0000.0);.
Copy 1 word from a word device to bit devices*1

Script■ Example 5.7.28
ScriptWORD2BITS(D0100, M0000);
Operation description
The value of device D0100 is copied to the bit states of a value of 1 word length from M0000 (M0000 to M0017).
This is the same as BITS2BITS(D1000.0, M0000);.

*1 Control function only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

20-43

5 Script Coding Examples*2● String operations
When using functions that handle string data, check the Storage Method of string data setting in the projectsettings.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “3.1 System Tab” on page 3-19.
■ Example 5.7.29

Copy a string

ScriptSTRCUT([LDR 100], [LDR 200], 2, 3);
Operation description
Stores in order from LDR100 character count 3 (3 characters worth) from start position 2 (starting from 0, so the 3rd
character) of the string “ABCDEFG” that starts from LDR200.
The start position can be specified in the range from 0 to 127, the character count can be specified in therange from 1 to 128.
Copy from string “ABCDEFG” at start position 2, character count 3
DeviceLDR200LDR201LDR202
LDR203

Stored value

CharacterStart
position countUpper byte

'A' = 0x41

0Lower byte

'B' = 0x421Upper byte

'C' = 0x43

←2

Lower byte

'D' = 0x443Upper byte

'E' = 0x45

4Lower byte

'F' = 0x46

5Upper byte

'G' = 0x47

Lower byte

0x00

DeviceLDR1003 characters

LDR101

Stored value

Upper byte

'C' = 0x43

Lower byte

'D' = 0x44

Upper byte

'E' = 0x45

Lower byte

0x00

Terminating character:
Terminating character

ScriptSTRUCT([LDR 100], [LDR 200], 1, 4);
Copy from string “ABCDEFG” at start position 1, character count 4
DeviceLDR200LDR201LDR202
LDR203Upper byte

Stored value'A' = 0x41

CharacterStart
position count0

Lower byte

'B' = 0x42←1Upper byte

'C' = 0x43

←2

Lower byte

'D' = 0x443Upper byte

'E' = 0x45

4Lower byte

'F' = 0x46

5Upper byte

'G' = 0x47:

Lower byte

0x00

DeviceLDR1004 characters

LDR101LDR102

Terminating character*2 HMI function only

20-44

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Upper byte

Stored value'B' = 0x42

Lower byte

'C' = 0x43

Upper byte

'D' = 0x44

Lower byte

'E' = 0x45

Upper byte

0x00

Lower byte

0x00

Terminating character5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.7.30

Count a string

Script[LDR 100] = STRLEN([LDR 200]);
Operation description
Finds the length (character count) of the string starting from LDR200 and stores that in LDR100.

DeviceLDR200LDR201LDR202
LDR203Upper byte

'A' = 0x41

Lower byte

'B' = 0x42

Upper byte

'C' = 0x43

Lower byte

'D' = 0x44

Upper byte

'E' = 0x45

Lower byte

'F' = 0x46

Upper byte

'G' = 0x47

Lower byte

0x00

DeviceLDR200LDR201LDR202

LDR203

Stored value
Character
count'A' = 0x41

Lower byte

'B' = 0x42

Upper byte

'C' = 0x43

Lower byte

0x00

Upper byte

'E' = 0x45

Lower byte

'F' = 0x46

Upper byte

'G' = 0x47

Lower byte

0x00

Stored value

LDR1007

DeviceStored value

LDR1003

Terminating character

Stored value

Upper byte

DeviceCharactercount

Terminating character

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

20-45

20
Script• The only devices that can be specified as function arguments in string operations are internal devices.
• The NULL terminating character (0x00) is the end of the string. (The terminating character is not includedin the string length.)

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.7.31

Concatenate strings

ScriptSTRCAT([LDR 100], [LDR 200]);
Operation description
Concatenates the string starting from LDR200 to the string starting from LDR100.
• Only internal devices can be used.
• The NULL terminating character (0x00) is the end of the string. (The terminating character is not includedin the string length.)
DeviceLDR100LDR101

Upper byte

LDR201LDR202

20-46

Device'A' = 0x41

Lower byte

'B' = 0x42

Upper byte

'C' = 0x43

Lower byte

0x00

DeviceLDR200Stored value

LDR100Terminating
character

LDR101
Concatenate

LDR102

Stored value

Upper byte

'D' = 0x44

Lower byte

'E' = 0x45

Upper byte

'F' = 0x46

Lower byte

'G' = 0x47

Upper byte

0x00

Lower byte

0x00

LDR103Upper byte

Stored value'A' = 0x41

Lower byte

'B' = 0x42

Upper byte

'C' = 0x43

Lower byte

'D' = 0x44

Upper byte

'E' = 0x45

Lower byte

'F' = 0x46

Upper byte

'G' = 0x47

Lower byte

0x00

Terminating character

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Terminating character5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.7.32

Search a string

Script[LDR 0] = STRSTR([LDR 100], [LDR 200]);
Operation description
Searches for the search string “DEFG” that starts from LDR200 in the string to be searched “ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO” thatstarts from LDR100 and stores the position of the occurrence of the string in LDR0. If not found, -1 is stored in LDR0.

ScriptIf “?” is specified as a character to search for, it is handled as an arbitrary single-byte character.
When specifying “?” (0x3F) as a character, specify it as “~?” (0x7E3F) in two bytes.
When specifying “~” (0x7E) as a character, specify it as “~~” (0x7E7E) in two bytes.
• The maximum number for the search string is 128 characters.
• Only internal devices can be used.
When searching for “DEFG” and the string was foundSearch string
DeviceStored value
Upper byte 'D' = 0x44
LDR200Lower byte 'E' = 0x45
Upper byte 'F' = 0x46
LDR201
Lower byte 'G' = 0x47
Upper byte
0x00
LDR202Lower byte
0x00

Terminating
character

String to be searched
DeviceStored value Position
Upper byte 'A' = 0x41
0
LDR100Lower byte 'B' = 0x421Upper byte 'C' = 0x43
2
LDR101
Lower byte 'D' = 0x44 ←3Upper byte 'E' = 0x45
4
LDR102Lower byte 'F' = 0x46
5Upper byte 'G' = 0x47
6
LDR103Lower byte 'H' = 0x48
7Upper byte 'I' = 0x49
8
LDR104Lower byte 'J' = 0x4A
9
LDR105LDR106

LDR107

Upper
byte
Lower
byte
Upper
byte
Lower
byte
Upper
byte
Lower
byte

'K' = 0x47

10

'L' = 0x4C

11

'M' = 0x4D

12

'N' = 0x4E

13

'O' = 0x4F

14

0x00

Search result
Device Stored value
LDR03

Terminating character

When searching for “WXYZ” and the string was not foundSearch string
DeviceStored value
Upper byte 'W' = 0x57
LDR200Lower byte 'X' = 0x58
Upper byte 'Y' = 0x59
LDR201
Lower byte 'Z' = 0x5A
Upper byte
0x00
LDR202Lower byte
0x00

String to be searched

DeviceLDR100LDR101
Terminating
character

LDR102LDR103LDR104LDR105LDR106
LDR107Upper byte
Lower byte
Upper byte
Lower byte
Upper byte
Lower byte
Upper byte
Lower byte
Upper byte
Lower byte
Upper byte
Lower byte
Upper byte
Lower byte
Upper byte
Lower byte

Stored value Position'A' = 0x41
0'B' = 0x42
1
'C' = 0x43
2
'D' = 0x443'E' = 0x45
4'F' = 0x46
5'G' = 0x47
6'H' = 0x48
7'I' = 0x49
8'J' = 0x4A
9
'K' = 0x47
10
'L' = 0x4C
11
'M' = 0x4D 12'N' = 0x4E
13
'O' = 0x4F
14
Terminating character
0x00

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Search result
Device Stored value
LDR0

20

-1

20-47

5 Script Coding Examples

When searching for “?” as an arbitrary single-byte character
Search string
DeviceStored value
Upper byte 'E' = 0x45
LDR200Lower byte '?' = 0x3F
Upper byte 'G' = 0x47
LDR201
Lower byte 'H' = 0x48
Upper byte
0x00
LDR202Lower byte
0x00

Terminating
character

String to be searched
Search result
DeviceStored value Position
DeviceStored value
Upper byte 'A' = 0x41
0
LDR100LDR04Lower byte 'B' = 0x421Upper byte 'C' = 0x43
2
LDR101
Lower byte 'D' = 0x443Upper byte 'E' = 0x45 ←4
LDR102Lower byte 'F' = 0x46
5Upper byte 'G' = 0x47
6
LDR103Lower byte 'H' = 0x48
7Upper byte 'I' = 0x49
8
LDR104Lower byte 'J' = 0x4A
9Upper byte 'K' = 0x47
10
LDR105Lower byte 'L' = 0x4C
11
Upper byte 'M' = 0x4D 12
LDR106Lower byte 'N' = 0x4E
13Upper byte 'O' = 0x4F
14
LDR107
Terminating character
Lower byte
0x00

When searching for “?” as a character
Search string
DeviceStored value
Upper byte 'E' = 0x45
LDR200Lower byte '~' = 0x7E
Upper byte '?' = 0x3F
LDR201
Lower byte 'G' = 0x47
Upper byte 'H' = 0x48
LDR202Lower byte
0x00

Terminating
character

String to be searched
DeviceStored value Position
Upper byte 'A' = 0x41
0
LDR100Lower byte 'B' = 0x421Upper byte 'C' = 0x43
2
LDR101
Lower byte 'D' = 0x443Upper byte 'E' = 0x45 ←4
LDR102Lower byte '?' = 0x3F
5Upper byte 'G' = 0x47
6
LDR103Lower byte 'H' = 0x48
7Upper byte 'I' = 0x49
8
LDR104Lower byte 'J' = 0x4A
9Upper byte 'K' = 0x47
10
LDR105Lower byte 'L' = 0x4C
11
LDR106

LDR107

Upper
byte
Lower
byte
Upper
byte
Lower
byte

'M' = 0x4D

12

'N' = 0x4E

13

'O' = 0x4F

14

0x00

Search result
DeviceStored value
LDR04

Terminating character

When searching for “~” as a character
Search string
DeviceStored value
Upper byte 'E' = 0x45
LDR200Lower byte '~' = 0x7E
Upper byte '~' = 0x7E
LDR201
Lower byte 'G' = 0x47
Upper byte 'H' = 0x48
LDR202Lower byte
0x00

20-48

Terminating
character

String to be searched
Search result
DeviceStored value Position
DeviceStored value
Upper byte 'A' = 0x41
0
LDR100LDR04Lower byte 'B' = 0x421Upper byte 'C' = 0x43
2
LDR101
Lower byte 'D' = 0x443Upper byte 'E' = 0x45 ←4
LDR102Lower byte '~' = 0x7E
5Upper byte 'G' = 0x47
6
LDR103Lower byte 'H' = 0x48
7Upper byte 'I' = 0x49
8
LDR104Lower byte 'J' = 0x4A
9Upper byte 'K' = 0x47
10
LDR105Lower byte 'L' = 0x4C
11
Upper byte 'M' = 0x4D 12
LDR106Lower byte 'N' = 0x4E
13Upper byte 'O' = 0x4F
14
LDR107
Terminating character
Lower byte
0x00

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

5 Script Coding Examples● Drawing*2■ Example 5.7.33

Draw a line

ScriptLINE(20, 20, 60, 60, 3, 1, 20);
Operation description
Draws a line connecting the start coordinates X=20, Y=20 and the end coordinates X=60, Y=60 on the screen where
the script is running. The line has a line width of 3 (3 pixels), line type of 1 (solid line), and line color of 20 (red).
Draw a line (omitting arguments)

Script■ Example 5.7.34
ScriptLINE(0, 0, 150, 100);
Operation description
Draws a line connecting the start coordinates X=0, Y=0 and the end coordinates X=150, Y=100 on the screen where
the script is running. The line width, line type, and line color have been omitted, so the line's line width is 1 (1 pixel),
the line type is 1 (solid line), and the line color is 255 (white).
■ Example 5.7.35

Draw a rectangle

ScriptRECTANGLE(20, 20, 100, 60, 1, 2, 24, 22, 13, 2, 5);
Operation description
Draws a rectangle with the start coordinates (the coordinates of the rectangle's upper-left corner) X=20, Y=20 andthe end coordinates (the coordinates of the rectangle's lower-right corner) X=100, Y=60 on the screen where thescript is running. The rectangle's line width is 1 (1 pixel), line type is 2 (dotted line), foreground color is 24 (green),background color is 22 (yellow), pattern is 13 (tint), rounding type is 2 (curve), and rounding radius is 5 (5 pixels).
■ Example 5.7.36

Draw a rectangle (omitting arguments)

ScriptRECTANGLE(0, 0, 150, 100);
Operation description
Draws a rectangle with the start coordinates (the coordinates of the rectangle's upper-left corner) X=0, Y=0 and the end
coordinates (the coordinates of the rectangle's lower-right corner) X=150, Y=100 on the screen where the script isrunning. The line width, line type, foreground color, background color, pattern, rounding type, and rounding radius areomitted, so the rectangle's line width is 1 (1 pixel), line type is 1 (solid line), foreground color and background color is
255 (white), pattern is 0 (none), rounding type is 0 (none), and rounding radius is 0 (0 pixels).
■ Example 5.7.37

Draw a circle or ellipse

Script

CIRCLE(100, 100, 60, 60, 1, 2, 26, 0, 4);Operation description
Draws a circle with the center coordinate X=100, Y=100, the X-axis radius 60 pixels, and the Y-axis radius 60 pixels.
The circle's line width is 1 (1 pixel), line type is 2 (dotted line), foreground color is 26 (light blue), background color is
0 (black), and pattern is 4 (foreground 50%).
■ Example 5.7.38

Draw a circle or ellipse (omitting arguments)

Script

CIRCLE(100, 100, 80, 40);
Operation description
Draws an ellipse with the center coordinate X=100, Y=100, the X-axis radius 80 pixels, and the Y-axis radius 40 pixels.
The line width, line type, foreground color, background color, and pattern are omitted, so the ellipse's line width is 1 (1pixel), line type is 1 (solid line), foreground color and background color is 255 (white), and pattern is 0 (none).
*2 HMI function only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

20

20-49

5 Script Coding Examples● Indirect assignment■ Example 5.7.39

Indirect read

Script[LDR 200] = OFFSET([LDR 10],[D 20]);
Operation description
When the value of D20 is 8, the value of LDR18, the device 8 words from LDR10, is read and stored in LDR200.
LDR10

0000

D20

0008

+8
LDR200

1234

LDR18

1234

Read

■ Example 5.7.40

Indirect write

ScriptOFFSET([LDR 10],[D 20]) = 1234;
Operation description
When the value of D20 is 3, the constant 1234 is stored in LDR13, the device 3 words from LDR10.
LDR10

0000

D20

0003

+3
1234

LDR13

1234

Write

20-50

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6 Important Notes

6

Important Notes
This section describes important notes when defining a script.

6.1 Important Notes Regarding the While Definition■ Define so it will not go into an infinite loop.
The execution expression is repeatedly executed while the conditional expression is satisfied.

20
ScriptHowever, it will go into an infinite loop when the conditional expression is satisfied continually.

[LDR 100] = 10;
while (0 != [LDR 100]){[LDR 200] = [LDR 200] + 1;}
In the conditional expression of the while definition, it states to exit the loop when the value of LDR100 turns 0.
However, the value stored in the LDR100 is not changed after storing 10 in the first line of the script, so it will go into
an infinite loop.
When using the while definition, define it so it will not go into an infinite loop.
The value of LDR100 will become 0 when the while definition is repeated 10 times in the next example, and it will getout of the while definition.

[LDR 100] = 10;
while (0 != [LDR 100]){[LDR 200] = [LDR 200] + 1;
[LDR 100] = [LDR 100] - 1;}
■ Define it so it will not continue the process for longer than the time limit.
In a script of HMI function when the processing of a single script continues for more than the time limit due to a while
definition, etc., an execution time over error occurs and that script will be halted. Define the script so the execution
time for one script does not exceed 3,000 milliseconds.
For details, refer to “1.4 Script Error of HMI Function” on page 20-4.
■ Do not write into the external device address.
In a script of HMI function, a script error occurs when writing to external device addresses in a while definition.

6.2 Number of Devices That Can Be Used
Number of external device addresses that can be set in single script with WindO/I-NV3 are 64 for read device and 64
for write device.
When the total number of write data to an external device address exceeds 64 in a single script while executing ascript with Touch, that script will be halted with an error.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

20-51

6 Important Notes

6.3 Write Delay
In a script of HMI function the writing process to external device addresses is performed at the end of a script, so it
may not operate correctly due to the write delay.
Example where write delay occurs[D 100] = 1000;[D 200] = [D 100] + 5000;
Initial value of D100 is 0.
Since the write destination of 1000 in first line is the external device address, the value is not reflected immediately,
and the value of D100 is still 0 when the second line is executed.
Therefore, the value where 5000 is added to 0 (value of D100) would be written to D200 in second line.
The value of D100 will be 1000 and the value of D200 will be 5000 when above script is executed.
There are 2 countermeasures for cases like this.
● Not using the device cache
Write delay does not occur when writing to the internal device, so the calculation is performed only in the internal
device, and only the result will be written to the external device address.

[LDR 0] = 1000;[LDR 0] = [LDR 0] + 5000;[D 200] = [LDR 0];● Using the device cache
Problems with the write delay to the external device address can be avoided by caching the value of the external
device address into the internal memory. To use the device cache, setup as follows in WindO/I-NV3.

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.
The Project Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 In the System tab, click Advanced.

20-52

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6 Important Notes

3 Select the Use Device Cache check box.

20
Script4 Click OK.
This setting will be applied not only to the script, but to the whole project.

6.4 About the Priority of the Operator
As a basic rule, operators are calculated in order from left of the line, but when multiple calculations are combined,
they are calculated in following priority.
PriorityHigh

Operator()! ~ -(Negative number)* / %+ -(Subtraction)
<< >>
&
^
|
< <= > >=
== !=
&&
||

Low

=

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

20-53

6 Important Notes

20-54

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualChapter 21 User Accounts and the Security Function
This chapter describes user accounts and the Security function, how to configure them, and their operation on the
Touch and in WindO/I-NV3.

1

Overview

1.1 User Accounts

User account
Account
User
Privileges to operate the Touch
AssignPrivileges to access data

In WindO/I-NV3, security groups are used as accounts.
There are two types of security groups. One type protects access to data. The other type protects Touch displays andoperations. To protect access to data, assign one of the provided security groups to a user. To protect Touchdisplays and operations, assign a user-created security group to a user.
Protect data

Protect displays and operations
GroupA

Administrator

Provided security groups

User-created security
groups (12 max)

Operator

GroupB

ReaderAssignAssignUser account:

User account:

A user name and password are associated with a user account and up to 15 user accounts can be created.
Password:

11111111

22222222

33333333

44444444

EEEEEEEE

User1

User2

User3

User4

User15User account:
User name:

If you configure a password for a user account assigned to a security group, access to data and Touch displays andoperations are password protected.
For password protected operations, users are prompted to enter their user name and password as necessary on the
Touch Password screen or the WindO/I-NV3 Enter Password dialog box.
Password screen

Enter Password dialog box

Password▼User********AB C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U V WX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS

CLR

OK

↑
→

←

ENT

↓

If a password is not configured for a user account, access to data and Touch displays and operations cannot
be protected.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

21-1

21
User Accounts and the Security Function

The Security function protects access to data and Touch displays and operations using accounts. Accounts are theprivileges to use the Touch and data. By assigning accounts to users, you can protect the Touch from being
inappropriately operated and protect project data from alterations and misuse.
Accounts assigned to users are called user accounts.

1 Overview

1.2 Protecting Data
● Protecting Access to Data
Security groups that protect access to data can perform the following functions.
• Protect from changes by editing project data

The Enter Password dialog box is displayed.

Opening project data

• Protect from alterations or misuse by downloading data

Project data

ComputerTouch
USB flash drive

Download

The Enter Password dialog box is displayed.

Download

Recipe files• Protect from the loss of data by upload

Project data

ComputerTouch
USB flash drive

UploadUploadThe Enter Password dialog box is displayed.
Alarm Log data
Data Log data
Operation Log data
Recipe files

21-2

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Overview• Protect from data erasures and formatting external memory by unauthorized access
Computer

Touch

Deleting data

USB flash drive

Deleting data
Formatting
The Enter Password dialog box is displayed.

• Protect from alterations and misuse by changing to the System Mode
Touch

21

Touch

User Accounts and the Security Function

Password▼User

AB C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS

CLR

ENT

OK

The Password screen is displayed.

• Protect from unauthorized browsing by displaying Device Monitor
Touch

Touch

Password▼User

AB C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS

CLR

ENT

OK

The Password screen is displayed.

• Protect from the loss of data or alterations by the execution of the USB Autorun function
Touch

Touch

Password▼User

AB C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS

CLR

ENT

OK

The Password screen is displayed.
USB flash drive

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual21-3

1 Overview● Security Groups that Protect Access to Data
Three security groups have been provided to protect access to data. These security groups are Administrator,
Operator, and Reader. Each one of these security groups can only be assigned to a single user.
■ Administrator
The Administrator group possesses complete access rights to project data. This security group can execute allnecessary operations including editing project data and changing Touch project data.
■ Operator
The Operator group can partially change project data by changing values of devices. This security group download
data to external memory.
■ ReaderThe Reader group can read data stored on external memory.
The provided user account has the security groups Administrator, Operator, and Reader allocated to it.
Passwords have not been configured for this user account. To protect access to data, a password must be
configured for the user account.

User1
Administrator

Provided security groups

Operator
Reader● Operations Subject to Password Protection
If you configure a password for a user account assigned to a security group to protect access to data, access to datais password protected. The operations that are subject to password protection and the security group that the
password is valid for are as follows.
Operations subject to password protection
Data editing

Modifying data

Security group that the password is valid for
Administrator

Operator

ReaderOpening projects

YES

NO

NO

Reusing screens

YES

NO

NO

Downloading project data

YES

NO

NO

Downloading data to external memory*1

YES

NO

NO

Downloading data to external memory*1 while the
Touch is running

YES

YES

NO

Uploading project data

YES

NO

NO

Uploading external memory data*1

YES

YES

YES

Deleting all data

YES

NO

NO

Deleting external memory data*1

YES

NO

NO

Formatting external memory*1

YES

NO

NO

Switching to the Top Page in the System Mode

YES

NO

NO

Displaying Device Monitor

YES

YES

NO

Executing the USB Autorun function

YES

NO

NO

To password protect operations, the lowest level security group out of the security groups enabled with apassword must be assigned to a user account.
The security levels, from highest to lowest, are Administrator > Operator > Reader.
Example: To password protect the operation to display Device Monitor, assign the Operator security group
to a user account. If a user account assigned to the Operator security group does not exist, theoperation is not password protected.

*1 External memory inserted into the Touch

21-4

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Overview

1.3 Protecting Displays and Operations● Displays and Operations that can be Protected with the Security Function
Security groups can be assigned to users to protect Touch displays and operations. These groups are capable of thefollowing actions.
• Protecting the display of screens
Touch

Touch
Base Screen 1

Touch

21

Password▼User2********A B C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS

CLR

Tank 1
ENT

Full

OK

Base Screen 2 isdisplayed.
Switch user account.

Goto Screen Button(Switch to Base Screen 2)

Base Screen 2
Can be displayed

Base Screen 2

User2

Cannot be

User2

displayed
No user• Protecting the display of parts
Line Chart that can only be displayed with User2
Touch

Touch

Touch

Password▼User2********A B C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS

CLR

ENT

OK

The Password
screen is displayed.

Line Chart isdisplayed.
Switch user account.

Goto Screen Button(Open Password Screen)Line Chart
Can be displayedLine Chart

User2

Cannot be

User2

displayed
No user• Protecting the operation of parts
Numerical Input that can only be operated by User2
Touch

Touch

Touch

Password

▼

User2

999

********A B C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789

999

BS

CLR

999

The Password screen
is displayed.
Goto Screen Button(Open Password Screen)
Numerical Input
Can be operated

999

OK

The Numerical Input
can be operated.
Switch user account.
Numerical Input
Can be operated

User2
User2

No userSmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

21-5

User Accounts and the Security Function

The Password
screen is displayed.

1 Overview● Security Groups that Protect Touch Displays and Operations
The security groups that protect the display and operation of screens and parts are user-created. Only the user
accounts assigned to the same security group as the security group configured for the screens and parts can display
and operate those screens and parts.
The security group for screens and parts is configured in the Options tab in the Properties dialog box for the screen
or part. The input security group to protect operations can only be configured for parts with an input function.
Example: If the user and security group for the part are set as follows:

User Name

Security Group

User2

User3

User4

GroupAGroupA, GroupB

GroupB

Goto Screen Button (Open Password Screen)
Display: None
Input: None

TouchLine Chart and Bar Chart
Display: GroupA
999

Numerical Input
Display: None
Input: GroupB
Button
Display: GroupA
Input: GroupB

Default user: None

If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in GroupA, the parts for GroupA are displayed. The
parts for GroupB cannot be operated.
Touch

Touch

Touch

Not
displayed

Displayed
Password

999

▼

User

Cannot be
operated

With no user, GroupA parts
are hidden, GroupB partscannot be operated.

AB C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS

CLR

999

999

ENT

Cannot be
operated

OK

Open the password screen with the Goto
Screen Button, enter the password, andswitch to User2.

With User2, GroupA parts areshown, GroupB parts cannot be
operated.
User2

If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User3 in GroupA and GroupB, the parts for GroupA are
displayed and the parts for GroupB can be operated.

Not
displayed

Displayed
999
Password

999

▼

User

Cannot be
operated

With no user, GroupA parts
are hidden, GroupB partscannot be operated.

AB C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS

CLR

999

999

ENT

Can beoperated

OK

Open the password screen with the Goto
Screen Button, enter the password, andswitch to User3.

User3

With User3, GroupA parts areshown, GroupB parts can be
operated.

Parts that are not displayed on the screen cannot be operated regardless of the input security group.

21-6

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Overview

If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User4 in GroupB, only the displayed parts for GroupB canbe operated. The GroupA parts are not displayed.
Touch

Touch

Touch

Not
displayedNotdisplayed
999
Password

999

▼

User

Cannot be
operated

BS

CLR

999

ENT

OK

Open the password screen with the Goto
Screen Button, enter the password, andswitch to User4.

Can beoperated

User4

With User4, GroupA parts are
hidden, displayed GroupB parts
can be operated.

GroupA is not configured for User4, so the button in the lower right of the screen is not displayed. Parts thatare not displayed on the screen cannot be operated, even by the user configured with the input security
group.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

21-7

21
User Accounts and the Security Function

With no user, GroupA parts
are hidden, GroupB partscannot be operated.

AB C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789

999

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

2

Security Function Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for the Security function.

2.1 Creating and Editing User Accounts● Creating a User Account1 On the Configuration tab, in the Protect group, click User Accounts.
The User Accounts dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the Use Security functions check box.

The settings related to user accounts are displayed.
The user account already provided with WindO/I-NV3 is as follows.

21-8

No.:

1

User Name:

User

Password:(blank)Security Group:

Administrator, Operator, Reader

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

3 Click Add.

The New User Account dialog box is displayed.

4 Specify the user number (1 to 15) in No.

This number is used when switching the user account according to the value of device.

21

The maximum number for the user name is eight characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
You cannot use the following characters in the user name.
\/:*?“<>|

6 Enter the password in Password.

The number of characters for the password is 4 to 15. Only uppercase alphabetic characters and numbers can beused.
Write down the password so you do not forget it and save that note in a safe place.

7 Click the Group Membership tab.

Assign the security groups to the user being created.

Administrator, Operator, and Reader have already been provided in Security Group. These three security
groups cannot be used in multiple user accounts. To use them with the user account being created, delete thesecurity group from the user account they are assigned to beforehand.

User1

User2

User3

Administrator

Operator

Administrator

Reader

If you will not add a new security group, proceed to step 11.
If you will not assign a security group, proceed to step 12.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

21-9

User Accounts and the Security Function

5 Enter the name for the new user in User Name.

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

8 Click Add.
The New Security Group dialog box is displayed.

9 Enter the name of the new group in New Group, and then click << Add.
The maximum number for the group name is 15 characters.
The created group name is added to Security Group. Repeat this procedure to create multiple security groups.
“” (Japanese), “None” (English), and “” (Chinese) cannot be used for the group name.

10 Click OK.
The group added is displayed in Security Group.

11 Select the security groups in Security Group on the New User Account dialog box to assign to the user being
created, and then click << Copy.

The security groups are copied to To.
The security groups that you create can be used in multiple user accounts.

User1
Created security
groups (12 max)

User2

User3

User4

GroupAGroupB

GroupB

GroupCGroupB

GroupCGroupC

Multiple user accounts can use the same security groups.

To delete the security groups assigned to the user, select the security groups to delete in To, and then click Delete.
• To select multiple security groups, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.
• Select the security groups in Security Group, and then click Delete to delete the security groups.
However, security groups configured for user accounts, screens, and parts cannot be deleted.

21-10

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

12 Click OK.
If you will not continue creating a user account, proceed to step 14.

13 Repeat steps 3 through 12 and create all of the necessary user accounts.
You can configure a user account to be enabled when the Touch power is turned on and when switching the
Run Mode in Default User.

21
User Accounts and the Security Function

14 Click OK.
The User Accounts dialog box closes.
This concludes creating a user account.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

21-11

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure● Editing a User Account1 On the Configuration tab, in the Protect group, click User Accounts.
The User Accounts dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the user account to edit, and then click Edit.
The Change User Account dialog box is displayed.

3 On the General tab, change User Name and Password.

21-12

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

4 Click the Group Membership tab.
Change the security groups assigned to the user.
If you will not assign a security group or you will not delete a security group, proceed to step 7.

21

The security groups are copied to To.
If you will not delete a security group, proceed to step 7.
To select multiple security groups, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

6 Select the security groups assigned to the user to delete in To, and then click Delete.
The security groups are deleted from To.
• To select multiple security groups, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.
• Select the security groups in Security Group, and then click Delete to delete the security groups.
However, security groups configured for user accounts, screens, and parts cannot be deleted.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

21-13

User Accounts and the Security Function

5 Select the security groups in Security Group to assign to the user being edited, and then click << Copy.

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

7 Click OK.

8 Click OK to close the User Accounts dialog box.
This concludes editing a user account.
● Deleting a User Account1 On the Configuration tab, in the Protect group, click User Accounts.
The User Accounts dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the user account to delete, and then click Remove.
The user account is deleted.

3 Click OK.
The User Accounts dialog box closes.
This concludes deleting a user account.

21-14

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups● Adding a Security Group

1 On the Project window, double click Security Group Settings.
The Security Group Settings dialog box is displayed.

21

The maximum number for the group name is 15 characters.
The created group name is added to Security Group. Repeat this procedure to create multiple security groups.
“” (Japanese), “None” (English), and “” (Chinese) cannot be used for the group name.

3 Click OK.
The Security Group Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes adding a security group.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

21-15

User Accounts and the Security Function

2 Enter the name of the new group in New Group, and then click << Add.

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure● Changing the Name of a Security Group

1 On the Project window, double click Security Group Settings.
The Security Group Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the security group in Security Group to change the name of, and then click Rename.
The Change Security Group Name dialog box is displayed.
The group name for Administrator, Operator, and Reader cannot be changed.

3 Change the name of the security group to the new group name in New Name.
The maximum number for the group name is 15 characters.
“” (Japanese), “None” (English), and “” (Chinese) cannot be used for the group name.

4 Click OK.
The Change Security Group Name dialog box closes.

5 Click OK.
The Security Group Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes changing the name of a security group.

21-16

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure● Deleting a Security Group

1 On the Project window, double click Security Group Settings.
The Security Group Settings dialog box is displayed.

21
User Accounts and the Security Function

2 Select the security group in Security Group to delete, and then click Delete.
The security group is deleted.
To select multiple security groups, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

• Security groups configured for user accounts, screens, and parts cannot be deleted.
• Administrator, Operator, and Reader cannot be deleted.

3 Click OK.
The Security Group Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes deleting a security group.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

21-17

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

2.3 Protecting the Display and Operation of Screens and Parts● Protecting the Display of Screens
Here you will configure the security group for a screen to protect the display of that screen.
This section describes an example where the display of Base Screen 2 is protected when switching to Base Screen 2
by pressing the Goto Screen Button.
Touch

Touch
Base Screen 1

Goto Screen Button(Switch to Base Screen 2)

Base Screen 2
Tank 1
Full

Base Screen 2

Base Screen 2

Cannot be

Can be displayed

displayed

User2

No user

To change the user account, a button or command is required to open the Password screen.

Configuration Procedure

1 Following the procedure in “Creating a User Account” on page 21-8, create the following user account.

User Name
User2

Security Group

GroupATo automatically display the Password screen when the user attempts to switch to a Base Screen they cannot accesswith the current user account using the Goto Screen Button, in the User Accounts dialog box, in the Options tab,select the Require a password automatically check box. For displaying the Password screen, refer to “4.1Entering the Password on the Touch” on page 21-36.

21-18

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

2 Place a Goto Screen Button on Base Screen 1.

On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Goto Screen Button.

21
User Accounts and the Security Function

3 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Goto Screen Button.
4 Double-click the dropped Goto Screen Button and the Properties dialog box is displayed.

5 Select Switch to Base Screen for Action Mode.

6 Specify the screen number of the Base Screen to switch to with Screen No. under Goto Screen.
2 is specified here.

7 Click OK.
The Properties of Goto Screen Button dialog box closes.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

21-19

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

8 Create the Base Screen to switch to and configure the security group.

On the Home tab, in the Screens group, click the arrow under New, and then click Base Screen.
The Screen Properties dialog box is displayed.

9 Specify the screen number of the Base Screen to switch to with No. on the General tab.
This is the same screen number as the screen number specified in step 6. 2 is specified here.

10 Click the Options tab.

11 With Security Group, select the security group to allow the display of the Base Screen.
GroupA is selected here.

12 Configure the settings on each tab as necessary, and then click OK.

The Screen Properties dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the project to protect the display of screens.

21-20

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

Operating Procedure
This section describes an example when the current user account has no default user.

1 Press the Goto Screen Button configured with Switch to Base Screen.
The Password screen is displayed.
Touch
Base Screen 1
Press the Goto Screen Button.

21
User Accounts and the Security Function

No user

2 Press ▼ and select User2.

Password
▼

User2

ENT

A B C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS

CLR

OK

3 Enter the password.
1. Press ↑, ↓, ←, and → to move the cursor to the character selected and then press ENT.

Password
▼

User2

*

ENT

A B C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS

CLR

1

OK

2

2. Repeat 1 to enter all the characters for the password.
3. Press ↑, ↓, ←, and → to move the cursor to OK and then press ENT.

Password▼User2********ENTA B C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS

CLR

1

OK

2

If the correct password is entered, the user account changes to User2 and the Password screen closes.
Base Screen 2 is displayed.
Touch
Base Screen 2
Tank 1
Full

User2

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

21-21

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure● Protecting the Display of Parts
Here you will configure the security group for a part to protect the display of that part.
This section describes an example where the display of the Line Chart is protected.
Goto Screen Button(Open Password Screen)

Touch

Touch

Line Chart

Line Chart

CannotCan be displayed

be displayed

User2

No user

To change the user account, a button or command is required to open the Password screen.

Configuration Procedure

1 Following the procedure in “Creating a User Account” on page 21-8, create the following user account.

User Name
User2

Security Group

GroupA

2 Create a Line Chart and configure the display security group.

On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Charts, and then click Line Chart.

3 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Line Chart.
4 Double-click the dropped Line Chart and the Properties dialog box is displayed.

21-22

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

5 Click Advanced.
The Options tab is displayed.

21
User Accounts and the Security Function

6 Click the Options tab.

7 Select the security group to allow the display of the Line Chart with Display under Security Group.
GroupA is selected here.

8 Configure the settings on each tab as necessary, and then click OK.
The Properties of Line Chart dialog box closes.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

21-23

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

9 Place a Goto Screen Button to display the password screen on the Base Screen.

On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Goto Screen Button.

10 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Goto Screen Button.
11 Double-click the dropped Goto Screen Button and the Properties dialog box is displayed.

12 Select Open Password Screen for Action Mode.

13 Specify the display location in coordinates for the password screen to open above the Base Screen with Coordinates
X, Y.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the window is the X and Y coordinates.

21-24

X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

14 Click OK.
The Properties of Goto Screen Button dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the project to protect the display of a part.
Operating Procedure
This section describes an example when the current user account has no default user.

1 Press the Goto Screen Button configured with Open Password Screen.
The Password screen is displayed.
Touch

21
User Accounts and the Security Function

Press the Goto Screen Button.

No user

2 Press ▼ and select User2.

Password
▼

User2

ENT

A B C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS

CLR

OK

3 Enter the password.
1. Press ↑, ↓, ←, and → to move the cursor to the character selected and then press ENT.

Password
▼

User2

*

A B C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS

CLR

OK

ENT
1

2

2. Repeat 1 to enter all the characters for the password.
3. Press ↑, ↓, ←, and → to move the cursor to OK and then press ENT.

Password▼User2********A B C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS

CLR

OK

ENT
1

2

If the correct password is entered, the user account changes to User2 from no default user and the Password screen
closes.
The Line Chart is displayed.
Touch

User2

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

21-25

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure● Protecting the Operation of Parts
Here you will configure the security group for a part to protect the operation of that part.
This section describes an example where the operation of the Numerical Input is protected.
Goto Screen Button(Open Password Screen)

Touch

Touch

999

999

Numerical Input
Cannot be

999

The keypad is not displayed,

Numerical Input

nothing can be operated.

Can be operated

operated

User2

No user

To change the user account, a button or command is required to open the Password screen.

Configuration Procedure

1 Following the procedure in “Creating a User Account” on page 21-8, create the following user account.

User Name
User2

Security Group

GroupA

2 Create a Numerical Input and configure the input security group.

On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Numerical Input.

3 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Numerical Input.
4 Double-click the dropped Numerical Input and the Properties dialog box is displayed.

21-26

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

5 Click Advanced.
The Options tab is displayed.

21
User Accounts and the Security Function

6 Click the Options tab.

7 Select the security group to allow the operation of the Numerical Input with Input under Security Group.
GroupA is selected here.

8 Configure the settings on each tab as necessary, and then click OK.
The Properties of Numerical Input dialog box closes.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

21-27

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

9 Place a Goto Screen Button to display the password screen on the Base Screen.

On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Goto Screen Button.

10 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Goto Screen Button.
11 Double-click the dropped Goto Screen Button and the Properties dialog box is displayed.

12 Select Open Password Screen for Action Mode.

13 Specify the display location in coordinates for the password screen to open above the Base Screen with Coordinates

X, Y.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the window is the X and Y coordinates.

21-28

X:

0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

14 Click OK.
The Properties of Goto Screen Button dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the project to protect the operation of a part.
Operating Procedure
This section describes an example when the current user account has no default user.

1 Press the Goto Screen Button configured with Open Password Screen.
The Password screen is displayed.
Touch

21

999

User Accounts and the Security Function

Press the Goto Screen Button.

No user

2 Press ▼ and select User2.

Password
▼

User2

ENT

A B C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS

CLR

OK

3 Enter the password.
1. Press ↑, ↓, ←, and → to move the cursor to the character selected and then press ENT.

Password
▼

User2

*

ENT

A B C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS

CLR

1

OK

2

2. Repeat 1 to enter all the characters for the password.
3. Press ↑, ↓, ←, and → to move the cursor to OK and then press ENT.

Password▼User2********ENTA B C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS

CLR

1

OK

2

If the correct password is entered, the user account changes to User2 from no default user and the Password screen
closes.
The Numerical Input can be operated.
Touch

999

999

User2

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

21-29

3 User Accounts Dialog Box

3User Accounts Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the User Accounts dialog box.

3.1 User Accounts Dialog Box
The passwords and security groups assigned to user accounts are collectively managed in the User Accounts dialog
box.
● General Tab■ Use Security functions
Select this check box to protect access to data and to protect Touch displays and operations by accounts. The settings
related to user accounts are displayed.
When this check box is cleared, switching to System Mode, displaying the monitor, and accessing data are protectedby a single password. The SmartAXIS Touch is not protected if Password is left blank.

User Name:Enter the name for the user account.
The maximum number for the user name is eight characters. Only alphanumeric characters andsymbols can be used.

You cannot use the following characters in the user name.
\/:*?“<>|
Password:

Enter the password.
The number of characters for the password is 4 to 15. Only uppercase alphabetic charactersand numbers can be used.

Write down the password so you do not forget it and save that note in a safe place.

21-30

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 User Accounts Dialog Box■ Users for this project
Displays the number (1 to 15) used when switching the user account according to the value of
device. Double clicking the cell displays the Change User Account dialog box. For details, refer
to “New User Account Dialog Box and Change User Account Dialog Box” on page 21-32.

User Name:

Displays the name for the user account. Double clicking the cell displays the Change User
Account dialog box. For details, refer to “New User Account Dialog Box and Change User
Account Dialog Box” on page 21-32.

Password:

Displays the password for the user account. Double clicking the cell displays the Change User
Account dialog box. For details, refer to “New User Account Dialog Box and Change User
Account Dialog Box” on page 21-32.

Security Group:

Displays all of the security groups for user accounts. Double clicking the cell displays the
Change User Account dialog box. For details, refer to “New User Account Dialog Box andChange User Account Dialog Box” on page 21-32.

■ Add
Makes a new user account. You can create a maximum of 15. Click this button to display the New User Account dialog
box. In the New User Account dialog box, the user name, password, and security groups are assigned to the user
account. For details, refer to “New User Account Dialog Box and Change User Account Dialog Box” on page 21-32.
■ EditSelect a number in Users for this project, and then click this button to display the Change User Account dialog box.
In the Change User Account dialog box, the user name, password, and security groups are changed. For details, refer
to “New User Account Dialog Box and Change User Account Dialog Box” on page 21-32.
■ Remove
Deletes the user account with the selected number. Select a number, and then click this button.
■ Default User
Select the user account to be enabled when the Touch power is turned on and when switching the Run Mode.
If None is selected, no user account is selected when the Touch power is turned on and when the Run Mode ischanged. Screens and parts cannot be displayed or operated that are protected by a security group.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

21-31

21
User Accounts and the Security FunctionNo.:3 User Accounts Dialog Box

New User Account Dialog Box and Change User Account Dialog Box
In the New User Account dialog box, the user name, password, and security groups are assigned to an account andthat user account is added.
In the Change User Account dialog box, the user name, password, and security groups for the selected user accountare changed.
General Tab■ No.
In the New User Account dialog box, this setting specifies the number (1 to 15) when switching the account according
to the value of device.
When Edit was clicked and the Change User Account dialog box was displayed, this item displays the selected user
account number.
■ User NameEnter the name for the user account.
The maximum number is eight characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
You cannot use the following characters in the user name.
\/:*?“<>|■ Password
Enter the password.
The number of characters for the password is 4 to 15. Only uppercase alphabetic characters and numbers can beused.
Write down the password so you do not forget it and save that note in a safe place.

21-32

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 User Accounts Dialog Box

Group Membership Tab

21■ << Copy
Assigns the security groups to the user displayed in To.
Select the security groups in Security Group, and then click this button to add them to To.
■ Delete
Deletes the security groups assigned to the user.
Select the security groups in To, and then click this button.
■ Security Group
Displays a list of all the security groups. The provided security groups (Administrator, Operator, and Reader) are
grayed out if assigned to another user account.
■ Add
Makes a new security group. You can create a maximum of 12.
Click this button to display the New Security Group dialog box. New security groups are added in the New Security
Group dialog box. For details, refer to “Adding a Security Group” on page 21-15.
■ Rename
Select a security group in Security Group, and then click this button to display the Change Security Group Namedialog box. Change the name of the security group in the Change Security Group Name dialog box. For details, refer
to “Changing the Name of a Security Group” on page 21-16.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

21-33

User Accounts and the Security Function■ To: (user name being configured)
Displays the user name and the list of security groups assigned to the user.

3 User Accounts Dialog Box● Options Tab
These settings can only be configured when the Use Security functions check box is selected on the General tab.

■ Change User by Device
Select this check box to switch the user account according to the value of device.
The user account is specified by using the number on the General tab.
(Trigger device): Specifies the word device to write the number.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
Example: When the trigger device is D0 and the default user is selected as User1
1

2

3

User1

User2

User3

No.

User Name(Default user)

The user account switches according to the value of device.
Value of Trigger device D0

1

2

3

4

0

User1

User2

User3

User3

User1

Switch to user
account no. 1

Switch to user
account no. 2

Switch to user
account no. 3

None

Switch to default
user accountUser accountActionThe user account is not switched when the

If the value of device is 0,

value of device is a number not configured tothe user is switched to thea user account or an invalid number.

default user.

■ Back to Default User
Select this check box to automatically switch to the default user when the Touch is unused for an extended period oftime.
After:

Specify the time (0 to 60 minutes) to switch to the default user after the Touch is last used.
If 0 is set, the Touch switches back to the default user immediately, even if the user account waschanged.

21-34

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 User Accounts Dialog Box■ Status of Password Entry
Select this check box to monitor the entry status of the password on the Password screen.
(Destination device):

Specifies a word device to write the password entry status.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

The following bits change to 1 depending on the password input status. These bits become 0 when the Password
screen opens or when a button other than ENT or

Function0This bit stores the information when the correct password wasentered on the Password screen and ENT was pressed.

0: Password being entered
1: Correct password entered1

This bit stores the information when an incorrect password wasentered on the Password screen and ENT was pressed.

0: Password being entered
1: Incorrect password entered2

This bit stores the information when

0: Password being entered
1: Password entry canceled

3 to 721

Parameters(Close) was pressed on

the Password screen.
Reserved–■ Require a password automatically
Select this check box to automatically display the Password screen when the user attempts to switch to a Base Screenthat cannot be accessed with the current user account by using a Goto Screen Button or Goto Screen Command
configured with Switch to Base Screen for the Action Mode in the Properties dialog box.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

21-35

User Accounts and the Security Function

Bitposition(Close) is pressed on the Password screen.

4 Password Input

4

Password Input
When a password is configured for a user account, the user is prompted to enter their password with the following
operations.
• Accessing password protected data
• Executing password protected displays and operations

4.1 Entering the Password on the Touch
To execute password protected operations, the user must open the Password screen and switch the user account.
The Password screen is opened with a Goto Screen Button or Goto Screen Command configured with Password
Screen. The Password screen is also automatically displayed on the Touch when the following operations are
executed.
• Switching to a Base Screen for a security group that cannot be displayed by the current user account with the Goto
Screen Button, Multi-Button, Goto Screen Command, or Multi-Command when the Require a password
automatically check box is selected on the Options tab in the User Accounts dialog box• Switching to Top Page in the System Mode or displaying the Device Monitor with the Maintenance screen, Goto
Screen Button, Multi-Button, Goto Screen Command, or Multi-Command• Downloading or uploading project data with a Key Button, Multi-Button, or Multi-Command• Executing the USB Autorun function• Operations where the Password screen is not displayed are as follows.
- Switching the Base Screen using the System Area
- Displaying the alarm screen for the Alarm Log Settings- Opening the keypad with the Numerical Input or Character Input- Opening the Ref. screen with the Alarm Log Display- For screens that are already open when the user account was switched by opening the Password screenwith the Goto Screen Button or Goto Screen Command• When the user account is switched, the displayed Base Screen is reset. Popup screens and internal
devices have the same behavior as when the Base Screen is switched. However, if the Close whilechanging Base Screen check box is selected on the Options tab in the Properties dialog box for the
popup screen, the popup screen is closed when the Base Screen is switched. The behavior of the internal
devices varies based on the internal devices. For details, refer to Chapter 27 “Internal Devices” on page27-1.
• When the Touch has been installed vertically, the password screen is displayed horizontally.

21-36

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

4 Password Input● Password Screen Configuration

Password
User

Password
Cursor********Key list

Close button▼

User NameA B C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS

CLR

ENT

OK

■ User Name
Displays the selected user name.

■ Password
The entered password is displayed as “*”.
■ Key list
CursorHighlights the selected character or command.

A to Z, 0 to 9: The available characters which can be used in the Password. Select with the cursor and press ENT
to enter the selected character in Password.
:

Select with the cursor and press ENT to delete one character entered in Password.

:

Select with the cursor and press ENT to delete all the characters entered in Password.

:

Select with the cursor and press ENT to confirm the entered password and start verifying the username and password.
If the entered password is correct, the Password screen closes and the operation executes.
If the entered password was incorrect, the password entered on the Password screen is deleted andthe screen returns to input mode.

■

↑

■↑
Moves the character list cursor up.
Moves the character list cursor left.

↑■

Moves the character list cursor right.

↑■

Moves the character list cursor down.
■ ENT
Enters the selected character in Password or executes the selected command.
■(Close) button
Cancels password entry and closes the Password screen.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

21-37

21
User Accounts and the Security Function■▼
Switches the user name. Changes the user name in order of user account number. When the last user name ischanged, it returns to the first user name.

4 Password Input

4.2 Entering the Password in WindO/I-NV3
When a user account assigned with Administrator is configured with a password, the Enter Password dialog box isdisplayed in WindO/I-NV3 as required and the user is prompted to enter their password.
The operations that display the Enter Password dialog box are as follows.
• Opening projects• Reusing screens• Downloading project data
• Downloading data to external memory*1• Downloading data to external memory*1 while the Touch is running• Uploading project data
• Uploading external memory data*1• Deleting all data
• Deleting external memory data*1• Formatting external memory*1● Enter Password Dialog Box■ User Name
Selects the user name. This item can only be selected when multiple user accounts are registered.
■ Password
Enter the password. The entered password is displayed as “*”.
■ OK
Confirms the entered password and starts verifying the user name and password.
If the entered password is correct, the Enter Password dialog box closes and the operation executes.
If the entered password is incorrect, a confirmation message is displayed.
■ CancelCancels password input and closes the Enter Password dialog box.

*1 External memory inserted into the Touch

21-38

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1

Chapter 22 Communication
This chapter describes the communication between the Touch and the external device.

1

PLC Link Communication

1.1 Overview
PLC Link Communication refers to the communiation protocol used for communication with the Touch, via the CPU
Unit*1 or PLC Link Unit*1 Programming Port of the external device connected to the Touch.
The Touch continuously reads the value of device of external devices on the currently displayed screen, and external
devices (such as relays and registers) on the screens are updated with the latest data at all times.
When a button is pressed or a command is executed in the Touch screen, the value is written to the external device.

Communication

PLC Link Commuication
Touch
Numerical Display
Reference Device: D0
Bit Button
Destination Device: M0

External device
Read

1234

D0:

1234
0

Write

1

M0:

For details regarding the PLC Link Communication, refer to Chapter 1 "PLC Link Communication" andChapter 2 "Connection to a PLC" in the "External Device Setup Manual".

*1 Unit names vary based on the manufacturer of the external device.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22

22-1

1 PLC Link Communication● PLC Link Connection Types
There are two basic types of connections. 1:1 Communication, where an external device is connected to a Touch; and1:N Communication, where multiple external devices are connected to a Touch.
■ 1:1 Communication
The Touch is connected to a single external device.
Touch

PLC Link Communication

External device

Read
Write

■ 1:N Communication
The Touch is connected to multiple external devices.
PLC Link Communication
Touch

External device

Read
Write
Station No.1

Read
Write
Station No.2

Read
Write
Station No.3

1.2 PLC Link Communication Settings
The external devices connected to the Touch and connection types are selected on the Select Communication Driverdialog box, or the Change Communication Driver dialog box.
• When creating new project data by following displayed dialog boxes and configuring settings step by step, byclicking, and then clicking New, the Select Communication Driver dialog box is displayed. For details, refer

to Chapter 3 “Create new project data by using the interactive quick start” on page 3-1.
• Click Communication Driver on the status bar to display the Change Communication Driver dialog box. For
details, refer to Chapter 3 “Changing Communication Drivers” on page 3-15.
Specify Manufacturer and Communication Driver for each CPU Unit*1 or each PLC Link Unit*1 of the external
device. For details regarding the correspondence model, refer to the "External Device Setup Manual."*1 Unit names vary based on the manufacturer of the external device.

22-2

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual2 O/I Link Communication

2

O/I Link Communication

2.1 Overview
O/I Link Communication is a protocol for communication between Master and Slave, where a Touch connected to theexternal device is configured as a Master and multiple Touch (Slaves) communicate with the external device via the
Master.
The Master Touch unit communicates with the external device by means of PLC Link Communication. The MasterTouch is called an O/I Link Master and a slave Touch connected to the O/I Link Master is called an O/I Link Slave. A
maximum of 15 O/I Link Slaves can be connected to an O/I Link Master.
Touch
O/I Link Master

PLC Link Communication

22

External device
D1:

5678
1

0
Write

M1:

O/I Link Communication
Read

Numerical Display
Reference Device: D1

Write

Read

Write

Read

Write

5678

Bit Button
Destination Device: M1

Touch
O/I Link Slave(Slave 1)

Touch
O/I Link Slave(Slave 2)

Touch
O/I Link Slave(Slave 15)• The MICRO/I models that can communicate with the Touch using O/I Link Communication are the
HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, and HG3G/4G.
• For details regarding the O/I Link Communication, refer to Chapter 3 "O/I Link Communication" in the"External Device Setup Manual".

2.2 O/I Link Communication Settings
These settings are configured under the O/I Link tab on the Project Settings dialog box. The Project Settings dialog
box can also be accessed using the following methods.
• Click Project on the Configuration tab.
• Double click Project Settings in the Project window.
The O/I Link Communication Settings can only be configured when O/I Link Master or O/I Link Slave is selectedin Protocol under Interface Settings on the Communication Interface tab. For details, refer to Chapter 3 “3.6O/I Link Tab” on page 3-37.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-3

Communication

Read3 DM Link Communication

3

DM Link Communication

3.1 Overview
DM Link Communication reads and writes value to external devices using the Touch's dedicated DM Link memory. The
device type of dedicated DM Link memory is DM.
This method uses a dedicated IDEC protocol, so a communication program is required in the external device.
DM Link Communication
Touch

External device

DM1:

DM0:

999

1234

5678

Numerical Display
Destination Device: DM0

Read
999

5678

Numerical Display
Reference Device: DM1

Write
Dedicated DM Link memory
DM0
DM1
DM2

DM8190DM8191For details regarding the DM Link Communication, refer to Chapter 4 "DM Link Communication" in the"External Device Setup Manual".
● Communication Methods
There are two basic types of DM Link Communication. 1:1 Communication, where the Touch is connected to an
external device; and 1:N Communication, where multiple Touch are connected to an external device.
■ 1:1 Communication
The external device is connected to a single Touch.
External device

DM Link 1:1 Communication

Touch

Read

Dedicated DM
Link memory

Write

The Event Transmission function from the Touch can be used with 1:1 communication.
The Event Transmission function is a function that works as follows. When value in the dedicated DM Link memory of
the Touch is changed, the data is transmitted from the Touch to the external device.
External device
DM0:

22-4

100

DM1:

150

DM2:

200

DM Link 1:1 Communication
Event transmission

Touch
Dedicated DM
Link memory

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

DM0:

0

100

DM1:

0

150

DM2:

0

200

3 DM Link Communication■ 1:N Communication
The external device is connected to multiple Touch.
External device

DM Link 1:N Communication
Touch

Read
Write
Station No.1

Dedicated DM
Link memory

Read
Write
Station No.2

Dedicated DM
Link memory

22

Read

Station No.3

Communication

Write

Dedicated DM
Link memory

The Event Transmission function cannot be used with 1:N communication.

3.2 DM Link Communication Settings
DM Link Communication settings are selected on the Select Communication Driver dialog box, or the Change
Communication Driver dialog box.
• When creating new project data by following displayed dialog boxes and configuring settings step by step, byclicking, and then clicking New, the Select Communication Driver dialog box is displayed. For details, refer

to Chapter 3 “Create new project data by using the interactive quick start” on page 3-1.
• Click Communication Driver on the status bar to display the Change Communication Driver dialog box. For
details, refer to Chapter 3 “Changing Communication Drivers” on page 3-15.
Select IDEC System in Manufacturer, and then select DM Link (1:1) or DM Link (1:N) in Communication
Driver.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-5

4 No External Devices

4

No External Devices

4.1 Overview
In this case, there is no communication with an external device, so the Touch operates as a standalone unit.
It is only possible to operate the Touch with relays and registers.
Touch

Internal device

No external devices

4.2 No External devices Settings
No external devices settings are selected on the Select Communication Driver dialog box, or the Change
Communication Driver dialog box.
• When creating new project data by following displayed dialog boxes and configuring settings step by step, byclicking, and then clicking New, the Select Communication Driver dialog box is displayed. For details, refer

to Chapter 3 “Create new project data by using the interactive quick start” on page 3-1.
• Click Communication Driver on the status bar to display the Change Communication Driver dialog box. For
details, refer to Chapter 3 “Changing Communication Drivers” on page 3-15.
Select IDEC System in Manufacturer, and then select No External Device in Communication Driver.

22-6

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication

5

User Communication

5.1 Overview
User Communication allows you to develop a communication protocol to transmit and receive data from an external
device, such as a bar code reader. The Touch supports the user communication with start and stop synchronization(full duplex) and a maximum of 1,500 bytes of data transmission or reception.
User Communication is supported up to three interfaces of the Touch, either serial, Ethernet, or USB interfaces.
PLC Link Communication
Touch

External device

22
Communication

User communication
Data transmission

Data reception

External device

Up to 31 external devices can be connected when the serial interface is RS485. However, it is necessary tothoroughly check command settings, error handling, and other detailed command specifications when
considering the capability of communicating with two or more external devices to decide the number ofexternal devices to be connected.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual22-7

5 User Communication

5.2 User Communication Settings Procedure
This section describes the procedure for setting user communication.
● Setting user communication for a communication interface

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.
The Project Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the Communication Interface tab.

3 Select the interface for user communication under Interface Configuration, and then select the user
communication in Protocol under Interface Settings.

The User Communication tab is displayed.

22-8

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication

4 Specify the items for Interface Settings.
Setting items vary based on the interface.
• Serial Interface
 For details, refer to Chapter 3 “When Port is selected under Interface Configuration” on page 3-28.
• Ethernet Interface
 For details, refer to Chapter 3 “When Protocol1, Protocol2, or Protocol3 is selected for Ethernet underInterface Configuration” on page 3-30.
• USB Interface
 For details, refer to Chapter 3 “When USB2 is selected under Interface Configuration” on page 3-31.

5 Click the User Communication tab.

22
Communication

6 Select the user communication under Settings, and then click Browse.
Select the user communication configured on the Communication Interface tab.
Protocol Manager is displayed.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual22-9

5 User Communication

7 Select the user communication protocol under Protocol List, and then click Select.

The name of the configured user communication protocol set on the User Communication tab in the Project
Settings dialog box is displayed in Protocol Name under Settings, and the protocol settings are displayed underProtocol. In addition, the command settings selected under Protocol are displayed under Command.

8 Click OK.
This concludes configuring user communication for communication interfaces.

22-10

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication● Creating a New User Communication Protocol

1 On the View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Protocol Manager).

Protocol Manager is displayed.

2 Click Add.
The User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box is displayed.

22
Communication

3 Enter the name of the user communication protocol in the Protocol Name.
The maximum number for protocol name is 40 characters.
You cannot use the following characters in the protocol name.
\/:,;*?"<>|

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-11

5 User Communication

4 Set the time out (0 to 255) from when 1 frame of data has been received to when the next frame of data starts to bereceived in Receiving Character Time Out (x100 msec).

A frame refers to a data string from the beginning to the end of a command. These setting items are used only withreceive command.

5 Click Edit.
The Command Settings dialog box is displayed.

6 Set Transmission (TXD) command.

Enter a comment for transmission command in Comment.

The maximum number is 40 characters.

7 Select TXD in Command Type.
Specify the transmitted data to the external device connected to the Touch and the conditions for transmitting data.

8 Specify the bit device or bit of the word device for reporting that data transmission was successfully completed inCompleted Device.

Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

9 Specify the destination word device for the transmitted data size and error information in Status Device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

10 Set the wait time (0 to 255) from when the trigger condition is satisfied to when the data is transmitted inTransmission Wait (x100 msec).

11 Select the condition to transmit data in Trigger Type under Trigger Condition from the following.
■ Rising-edge
Data is transmitted when the value of device changes from 0 to 1.
Specify the bit device or bit of the word device as the condition.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
■ Falling-edge
Data is transmitted when the value of device changes from 1 to 0.
Specify the bit device or bit of the word device as the condition.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

22-12

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication■ Satisfy the condition
Data is transmitted when condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Specify the conditional expression in Condition and select the data type handled by the conditional expression in
Data Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expressions configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-63
For details on data types, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Fixed Period
Data is transmitted at a fixed time interval.
Set the time interval between data transmissions as 1 to 3600 (seconds) in Period (sec).

12 Set data for transmission command.
Click Edit.
The Data Settings dialog box is displayed.

22
Communication

13 Select data type in Type.
Data setting items are displayed.
For details on transmission command, refer to “Transmission (TXD) Command” on page 22-37.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-13

5 User Communication

14 Set the data, and then click OK.
The data configured in Command is displayed.

15 Repeat steps 12 through 14 to set all the data for the transmission command.

The data are displayed in Command in the order they were set. To change the order of data, select data,
and then click Up or Down to shift it.

16 Click OK.
The transmission command configured under Protocol is displayed.

17 Specify Receive (RXD) command.
Click Edit.

22-14

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication

18 Specify Receive (RXD) command.

Enter a comment for receive command in Comment.
The maximum number is 40 characters.

22
Communication

19 Select RXD in Command Type.

Define the data configuration for received data from the external device.

20 Specify the bit device or bit of the word device for reporting that data receiving was successfully completed inCompleted Device.

Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
If the value of Completed Device automatically is not set to 0 after it is set to 1, select the Not Clear Completed
Device automatically check box.

21 Specify the destination word device for the received data size and error information in Status Device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

22 Select the condition for being ready to receive data in Trigger Type under Trigger Condition from the following.
■ Always Enabled
The device is always ready to receive data. Proceed to step 24.
■ While ON
Ready to receive data when the value of device is 1.
Specify the bit device or bit of the word device as the condition.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
■ While OFF
Ready to receive data when the value of device is 0.
Specify the bit device or bit of the word device as the condition.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
■ While satisfying the condition
Ready to receive data while a condition is satisfied.
Specify the conditional expression in Condition and select the type of data handled by the conditional expression in
Data Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expressions configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-63.
For details on data types, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-15

5 User Communication

23 Set the time out (0 to 255) from when the trigger condition is satisfied in Receiving Time Out (x100 msec) towhen 1 frame of data has been received.
A frame refers to a data string from the beginning to the end of a command.

24 Set data for receive command.
Click Edit.
The Data Settings dialog box is displayed.

25 Select data type in Type.
Data setting items are displayed.
For details on receive command, refer to “Receive (RXD) Command” on page 22-50.

26 Specify the data, and then click OK.
The data configured in Command on the Command Settings dialog box is displayed.

22-16

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication

27 Repeat steps 24 through 26 to specify all the data for the receive command.

22

28 Click OK.
The receive command configured in Protocol on the User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box is displayed.
To add a transmission command, repeat steps 5 through 16.
To add a receive command, repeat steps 17 through 28.

29 Configure all commands, click OK.
User communication protocols are registered in Protocol List on Protocol Manager.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-17

Communication

The data are displayed in Command in the order they were set. To change the order of data, select data,
and then click Up or Down to shift it.

5 User Communication

30 Click Close.
This concludes registering user communication protocol.

22-18

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication● Using registered user communication protocol on another computer
Saving registered user communication protocol as a file
To use the user communication protocol registered in Protocol Manager on another computer, save it as a file.

1 On the View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Protocol Manager).

Protocol Manager is displayed.

2 Select the user communication protocol in Protocol List, and then click Export.

22

The Save As dialog box is displayed.

3 Specify Save in, and then click Save.
The name of the saved file will be the name of the protocol.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-19

Communication

To select multiple user communication protocols, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specificitems.

5 User Communication

Importing user communication protocol

1 On the View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Protocol Manager).

Protocol Manager is displayed.

2 On Protocol Manager, click Import.
The Open dialog box is displayed.
To select multiple user communication protocols, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specificitems.

3 Specify the user communication protocol file, and then click Open.
The user communication protocol is registered in Protocol Manager. The name of the user communication protocol fileis set as the name of the protocol.

When a user communication protocol file with the protocol name already exists, a confirmation message isdisplayed.
• Click Overwrite to overwrite the existing user communication protocol.
• Click Rename to display the Protocol File Name Settings dialog box. Enter a new name for Protocol FileName, and then click OK to add the user communication protocol with the protocol name entered forProtocol File Name. For details, refer to “Protocol File Name Setting Dialog Box” on page 22-25.
• Click Cancel to stop importing the user communication protocol.

22-20

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication

5.3 Protocol Manager
The protocol for user communication is collectively managed in Protocol Manager.

22
Communication■ Protocol List
Displays a list of registered user communication protocols and sample protocols provided by WindO/I-NV3.
The bar code reader protocols such as Barcode-Reader1, Barcode-Reader2, and Barcode-Reader3 aresupplied as samples with WindO/I-NV3.
■ Add
Adds user communication protocols to the Protocol List.
Click this button to display the User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box. Specify the user communication
protocol to be registered in the User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “UserCommunication Protocol Settings Dialog Box” on page 22-23.
■ EditChanges the selected user communication protocol.
Click this button to display the User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box. Change the user communication
protocol in the User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “User Communication Protocol
Settings Dialog Box” on page 22-23.
■ Delete
Deletes the selected user communication protocol.
■ Import
Imports a saved user communication protocol file. Click this button to display the Open dialog box. For details, refer
to “Importing user communication protocol” on page 22-20.
■ Export
Export and saves a selected user communication protocol as a file.
Click this button to display the Save As dialog box. For details, refer to “Saving registered user communication
protocol as a file” on page 22-19.
Saved user communication protocols can be imported using Import.
■ CopyCopies the selected user communication protocol.
Click this button to display the Protocol File Name Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “Protocol File Name Setting
Dialog Box” on page 22-25.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-21

5 User Communication■ Protocol
The command settings for the user communication protocol selected in the Protocol List are displayed.
No.:

Shows the number for managing command settings. Double clicking the cell displays the Command
Settings dialog box.

Type:

Shows the type of command. Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box.

Completed:

Shows the device for reporting when transmission or receiving of data is successfully completed.
Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box.

Status:Shows the destination device for the transmitted or received data size and error information. Double
clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box.

Trigger Type:Shows the trigger type for data transmission or being ready to receive data. Double clicking the cell
displays the Command Settings dialog box.

Condition:Shows the condition of trigger type for data transmission or being ready to receive data. The
displayed content varies based on Trigger Type.
Always Enabled:

Trigger conditions are not necessary, so nothing is displayed.

Rising-edge, Falling-edge, While ON, or While OFF:Shows the bit device as the condition. Double clicking the cell displays theCommand Settings dialog box.
While satisfying the condition or Satisfy the condition:Shows the conditional expression.
Fixed Period:

Shows the period in seconds.

Comment:

Shows the command comment. Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box.

Size:

Shows the command data size in bytes. Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings
dialog box.

■ Command
Shows a list of command settings for the selected user communication protocol. Double clicking the line displays theData Settings dialog box.
■ Select
The highlighted user communication protocol in the protocol list is selected and Protocol Manager is closed.
■ CloseClose Protocol Manager.

22-22

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication● User Communication Protocol Settings Dialog Box
The command for user communication protocol is collectively managed in the User Communication Protocol Settings
dialog box.

22

You cannot use the following characters in the protocol name.
\/:,;*?"<>|■ Receiving Character Time Out (x100 msec)
Specify the time out value (0 to 255) from when 1 frame of data has been received to when the next frame of data
starts to be received. A frame refers to a data string from the beginning to the end of a command. If the Receiving
Character Time Out is set to 0, it is not monitored. These setting items are used only with receive command.
Example: When the received data (1 frame) is 2 bytes, While ON is selected as Trigger Type in Trigger
Condition and LM100 is set to Device, LM101 is set to Completed Device, and LDR110 is set to Status
DeviceThe data of second byte starts to be received before exceeding the Receiving Character Time Out duration
after the data of first byte is received, and the values of the Completed Device and Status Device when
receiving of the data has been successfully completed are as follows.
• The value of the Completed Device LM101 changes to 1.
When the Not Clear Completed Device automatically check box is not selected, when the value of
the Trigger Condition device LM100 changes from 0 to 1, the value of the Completed Device LM101
changes to 0.
When the Not Clear Completed Device automatically check box is selected, the value of Completed
Device LM101 remains 1, so set 0 if necessary.
• The value of the Receiving Character Time Out (address+0, bit 15) of the Status Device LDR110 remains
0.
Receiving Character Time Out duration

Receive command
Value of LM100 when
Trigger Condition is While ON

Value of Completed Device
LM101

First byte of receive data

Second byte of receive data

1
0
1
0

Value of Receiving Character Time Out 1(address+0, bit 15)
of Status Device LDR110 0

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-23

Communication■ Protocol NameEnter the name of the user communication protocol. The maximum number for protocol name is 40 characters.

5 User Communication

When the Receiving Character Time Out duration exceeds until the data of second byte starts to bereceived after the data of first byte is received, the value of the Receiving Character Time Out (address+0,
bit 15) of the Status Device LDR110 changes to 1 and the Completed Device LM101 remains 0. In addition,
when the value of the Trigger Condition device LM100 changes from 0 to 1, the value of LDR110 (address+0, bit 15) changes to 0.
Receiving Character Time Out duration

Receive command
Value of LM100 when
Trigger Condition is While ON

Value of Completed Device
LM101

First byte of receive data

Second byte of receive data

1
0
1
0

Value of Receiving Character Time Out 1(address+0, bit 15)
of Status Device LDR110 0■ Protocol
Displays a list of command settings for the user communication protocol selected during editing. The maximum
amount that can be configured is 32 commands per protocol.
No.:

Shows the number for managing command settings. Double clicking the cell displays the Command
Settings dialog box.

Type:

Shows the type of command. Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box.

Completed:

Shows the device for reporting when transmission or receiving of data is successfully completed.
Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address Settings dialog box.

Status:Shows the destination device for the transmitted or received data size and error information. Double
clicking the cell displays the Device Address Settings dialog box.

Trigger Type:Shows the trigger type for data transmission or being ready to receive data. Double clicking the cell
displays the Command Settings dialog box.

Condition:Shows the condition of trigger type for data transmission or being ready to receive data. The
displayed content varies based on Trigger Type.
Always Enabled: Trigger conditions are not necessary, so nothing is displayed.
Rising-edge, Falling-edge, While ON, or While OFF:Shows the bit device as the condition. Double clicking the cell displays theCommand Settings dialog box.
While satisfying the condition or Satisfy the condition:Shows the conditional expression.
Fixed Period:

Shows the period.

Comment:

Shows the command comment. Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box.

Size:

Shows the command data size in bytes. Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings
dialog box.

■ EditAdds or changes commands.
To add a command, select an empty line for the protocol, and then click this button. To change a command, select acommand for the protocol, and then click this button. For details, refer to “Command Settings Dialog Box” on page
22-26.
■ Insert
Inserts a command in the selected position of the protocol.
Click this button to insert a command. The command at the insertion position shift down 1 line. When 32 commands
are already set, you cannot insert a command. For details, refer to “Command Settings Dialog Box” on page 22-26.
■ Delete
Deletes the selected command.

22-24

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication■ CopyCopies the selected command.
Click this button to copy the selected command and add it to the end of the Protocol List.
■ Command
Displays data of the command selected in the protocol. Double clicking the line displays the Data Settings dialog box.
■ Copy to Protocol Manager
Copies a user communication protocol during editing and copies it to Protocol Manager.
Click this button to copy the user communication protocol and add it to the Protocol List of Protocol Manager.
This is enabled only when the User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box under the User Communication
tab on the Project Settings dialog box is displayed.
When a protocol of the same name has already been saved, an overwrite confirmation message is displayed.
Click Rename to display the Protocol File Name Settings dialog box. Enter a new protocol name, and then click OK tosave the protocol.

22

Click Cancel to stop saving the protocol.

Communication

Click Overwrite to overwrite the existing protocol.

The User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box under the User Communication tab on the Project
Settings dialog box can be displayed in the following ways.
• Click Edit.
• Click Browse, and then click Add or Edit in Protocol Manager.
■ OK
Adds or changes the user communication protocol and closes the User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box.
When a protocol of the same name has already been saved, an overwrite confirmation message is displayed.
Click Overwrite to overwrite the existing protocol.
Click Rename to display the Protocol File Name Settings dialog box. Enter a new protocol name, and then click OK tosave the protocol.
Click Cancel to stop saving the protocol.
■ Cancel
Closes the User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box, without adding or changing the user communication
protocol.

Protocol File Name Setting Dialog Box
Specify the name of a user communication protocol.

■ Protocol File NameEnter the name of the user communication protocol. The maximum number for protocol name is 40 characters.
You cannot use the following characters in the protocol name.
\/:,;*?"<>|

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-25

5 User Communication● Command Settings Dialog Box
Specify the command details for user communication protocol.

■ Comment
Enter a comment for a command. The maximum number is 40 characters.
■ Command Type
Select the type of communication command from the following items.
TXD:

A command for data transmission from the Touch to an external device.
External device

Touch
Transmission
dataTransmission

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

Processing of transmission command is as follows.
Example: When Trigger Type in Trigger Condition is Rising-edge, Device is LM100 andCompleted Device is LM101
When the value of the Trigger Condition device LM100 changes to 1, data is transmitted
by user communication from the Touch to the external device. When data transmission is
successfully completed, the value of the Completed Device LM101 changes to 1.
State in which user
communication is
not operatingStart
transmission

State in which data can betransmitted by user communication

Transmission data

1
Value of LM100 when
Trigger Condition is
Rising-edge 0
Value of Completed Device
LM101

22-26

1
0

SmartAXIS Touch User's ManualCompletetransmission

State in which user
communication is
not operating5 User Communication

RXD:

A command for analyzing and processing data received by the Touch from an external device.
External device
Touch
Receive

Receive data
1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

Processing of receive command is as follows.

State in which user
communication is
not operating

State in which data can bereceived by user communication
Data transmission fromexternal device
Start
receiving

State in which user
communication is
not operating

Complete
receiving

Receive data

1
Value of LM100 when
Trigger Condition is
While ON 0
Value of Completed Device
LM101

1
0

■ Completed Device
Specify the bit device or bit of the word device for reporting that data transmission or receiving was successfullycompleted. You can only specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
Example: When Trigger Type in Trigger Condition is While ON, Device is LM100 and Completed Device is
LM101
When data receiving is successfully completed, the value of the Completed Device LM101 changes to 1.
When the value of the Trigger Condition device LM100 changes from 0 to 1, the value of the Completed
Device LM101 changes to 0.
Receive command

Receive data 1 frame

1
Value of LM100 when
Trigger Condition is
While ON 0
Value of Completed Device
LM101

1
0

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-27

22
Communication

Example: When Trigger Type in Trigger Condition is While ON, Device is LM100 andCompleted Device is LM101
When the value of the Trigger Condition device LM100 changes to 1, data can be received(ready to receive) by user communication, so when data is transmitted from the external
device, the Touch starts to receive the data. When data receiving is successfullycompleted, the value of the Completed Device LM101 changes to 1.

5 User Communication■ Not Clear Completed Device automatically
Select this check box when the value of the Completed Device is not set to 0 automatically after it changes to 1. This canbe configured when RXD is selected in Command Type.
Example: When Trigger Type in Trigger Condition is While ON, Device is LM100 and Completed Device is
LM101
When the Not Clear Completed Device automatically check box is not selected:
When data receiving is successfully completed, the value of the Completed Device LM101 changes to 1.
When the first data of the next frame is received, the value of the Completed Device LM101 changes to 0.
Receive command

Receive data 1 frame

Receive data 1 frame

1
Value of LM100 when
Trigger Condition is
While ON 0
Value of Completed Device
LM101

1
0

When the Not Clear Completed Device automatically check box is selected:
When data receiving is successfully completed, the value of the Completed Device LM101 is set to 1. Even
after the first data of the next frame is received, the value of the Completed Device LM101 does notchange to 0.
Receive command

Receive data 1 frame

Receive data 1 frame

1
Value of LM100 when
Trigger Condition is
While ON 0
Value of Completed Device
LM101

22-28

1
0

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication■ Status Device
Specify the destination word device for the transmitted or received data size and error information. Error informationand command data size is stored at the beginning of the configured device address. When data transmission orreceiving has not successfully completed, the value of each bit changes to 1. The bits of the Status Device changes to0 when the trigger condition is satisfied and they are not changed to 0 automatically. When Always Enabled is
selected in Trigger Condition of receive command, the value of the Status Device is kept as long as a Clear
command is not executed.
You can only specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
Example: When LDR110 is configured as Status Device(Starting address) +0+1

LDR110LDR111

Error information and time out information
Transmitted or received data size (bytes)

22

Address+0

BitFunction

0

BCC Error

1, 2Reserved

Cause

3

Registering
Constant Data Error

4

Reserved

Solution• The Calculation Start Position and Calculation
End Position are not stored in 1 frame.
• The Calculation End Position is set before
Calculation Start Position.

Change the Calculation
Start Position andCalculation End Position
settings.

• When Calculation Type is Modbus ASCII(LCR), the data size from Calculation Start
Position to Calculation End Position is odd
bytes.
• The data contains data other than ASCII(30h to 39h, 41h to 46h) data.

Change the Calculation
Start Position andCalculation End Position
settings and thetransmission data.

When data type is Registering Constant(Character) or Registering Constant(Hexadecimal), the value of the Index
Device does not match the Index No. of theregistered Registering Constant.

Change the data stored in
the Index Device.

Change the value stored in
the Reference Device.

5

Use Reference
Device Data Error

When data type is Device and the Use
Reference check box is selected, the device
address in which the value of the Reference
Device is stored as offset has exceeded thevalid range.

6

Device Data
Variable
Specification Error

When data type is Device, the Variablecheck box is selected and Device is selected,
the value of device is negative or exceeds thesetting (number of bytes x number of words).

Change the value of device
to a positive value or to avalue that does not exceed
the setting (number of bytes
x number of words).

7

Transmission
Command Abandon
Error

When transmitting data after the Trigger
Condition is satisfied, the command with thesame Command No. was transmitting data ortransmission (transmission is not completed).

Increase the time interval
for starting transmission.

8 to 15

Reserved

Address

Function

Description+1

Transmission Data Size (bytes)

Stores the size of transmission data.

When the Error Information bit changes to 1, data is not transmitted, and the Transmission Completed
Device does not change to 1.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-29

Communication

When TXD is selected as Command Type:5 User Communication

When RXD is selected as Command Type:
Address

Bit

0

+0

+1

BCC error

Cause

Solution

The BCC that calculated the receive data did notmatch the BCC that is appended to the receive data.

Check the transmission datafrom the external device.

• The Calculation Start Position and Calculation
End Position are not stored in 1 frame.
• The Calculation End Position is set before
Calculation Start Position.

Change the Calculation
Start Position andCalculation End Position
settings.

• When Calculation Type is Modbus ASCII (LCR), thedata size from Calculation Start Position to Calculation
End Position is odd bytes.
• The data contains data other than ASCII (30h to
39h, 41h to 46h) data.

Change the Calculation Start
Position and Calculation End
Position settings and thetransmission data from theexternal device.

Check the transmission datafrom the external device.

1

Received Data
Size Error• When data type is Device and the Variable check box isselected, 1 frame of process is completed before one ofConstant (Character), Constant (Hexadecimal),
Registering Constant (Character), Registering
Constant (Hexadecimal), BCC, or Skip is processed.
• When data type is Device and the Variablecheck box is not selected, the receive data sizeof the receive data does not match that of thespecified receive command.

2

Registering
Constant Data
Error

The Constant (Character) or Constant(Hexadecimal) set up with the receive command
does not match the receive data.

Check the transmission datafrom the external device.

3

Registering
Constant Error

No data matches the registered setting of theRegistering Constant data.

Check the transmission datafrom the external device.

4

Device Data
Conversion Error• When data type is Device and Conversion
Type is ASCII (HEX) to Binary, a code otherthan 0 to 9 or A to F, a to f *1 receives as data. Check the transmission datafrom the external device.
• When data type is Device and Conversion Type is
ASCII (DEC) to Binary, a code other than 0 to 9
receives as data. Or the converted data exceeds 65535.

5

Device Data
Reference
Device Error

When data type is Device and the Use Reference checkbox is selected, the device address in which the value of theReference Device is stored as offset has exceeded the valid
range. Or the number of words setting of the device isbeyond the range of device address for which data is stored.

6

Terminal Code of In the receive command whose trigger condition is
Receive Databeing satisfied, the start code matches while the
Miscompare Error terminal code does not match.

Check the transmission datafrom the external device.

7

In the multiple Receive (RXD) Commands
processing, the number of the same-time stored
devices which is sum of the number of the stored
device of Device and the number of the index
device of Registering Constant (Character) or
Registering Constant (Hexadecimal), is over
800 words.

Change settings so that the total
number of devices used for storage
at one time does not exceed 800
words.
Change settings so that the trigger
conditions for several receive
commands are not satisfied, toreduce the number of receive
commands that are processed.

8 to 13

Address

Function

Device Storing
Error

Change the value of theReference Device or thechange the number ofwords.

Reserved

14

Receiving TimeOut

1 frame of data is not received even when thepreset Receiving Time Out duration has passed
after the Trigger Condition is satisfied.

Check the transmission datafrom the external device.

15

Receiving
Character TimeOut

While 1 frame of data is being received, even after the time out
period—the specified time interval between receiving data(from when 1 frame of data has been received to when thenext frame of data starts to be received)—has elapsed, the next
frame of data does not start to be received.

Check the transmission datafrom the external device.

Function
Receive Data Size (bytes)

Description
Stores the size of receive data.

After the Receiving Character Time Out duration has elapsed, the receive data is analyzed. When the Error
Information bit changes to 1, data is not received, and the Receiving Completed Device does not change to 1.
*1 Receive a to f and device adata conversion error occurs if the system-soft version is V4.01 or older. For details, refer to “6.2 Target Information Dialog
Box” on page 23-29.

22-30

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication■ Transmission Wait (x100 msec)
Specify the wait time (0 to 255) from when the trigger condition is satisfied to when the data is transmitted. This canbe configured only when TXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box.
After the Transmission Wait duration has elapsed from when the trigger condition is satisfied, transmission starts.
Example: When Trigger Type in Trigger Condition is Rising-edge and Device is LM100
Transmission
Wait duration

Transmission command

Transmission
Wait duration

Transmission data 1 frame

Transmission data 1 frame

Value of LM100 when 1
Trigger Condition is
Rising-edge 0

When 1 frame of data could not be received, even though the Receiving Time Out duration has elapsed from when
the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of the Receiving Time Out of the Status Device (address+0, bit 14)changes to 1. When the Receiving Time Out duration elapses, the value of the Completed Device does not change to
1, and the receive data is not processed.
When the trigger condition again changes from not satisfied to satisfied, the value of the Receiving Time Out of the
Status Device (address+0, bit 14) changes to 0. When the value of this bit is not 0, the Receiving Time Out cannot be
detected.
Receiving Time Out duration
Value of Device when 1
Trigger Condition is
While ON 0
Value of the Receiving Time Out 1(address+0, bit14)of the Status Device 0

Example: When Trigger Type in Trigger Condition is While ON, Device is LM100, Status Device is LDR110,
Completed Device is LM101 and the Not Clear Completed Device automatically check box is notselected
When Status Device is LDR110, error information and time out information is stored in each bit of
LDR110.
When receiving of 1 frame of data is completed before the Receiving Time Out duration has elapsed fromwhen the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of the Receiving Time Out of the Status Device LDR110(address+0, bit 14) remains 0.
Receiving Time Out duration

Receive data 1 frame

Receive command

Value of LM100 when
Trigger Condition is While ON

Receive data 1 frame

10

Value of Receiving Time Out 1(address+0, bit 14)
of Status Device LDR110 0
1
Value of Completed Device LM1010

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-31

22
Communication■ Receiving Time Out (x100 msec)
Set the time out (0 to 255) from when the trigger condition is satisfied to when 1 frame of data has been received. A
frame refers to a data string from the beginning to the end of a command. If the Receiving Character Time Out is set
to 0, it is not monitored.
This can be configured only when RXD is selected in Command Type, and While ON, While OFF, or Whilesatisfying the condition is selected in Trigger Type.

5 User Communication

When receiving of 1 frame of data could not be completed by the time the Receiving Time Out duration
elapses from when the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of the Receiving Time Out of the Status
Device LDR110 (address+0, bit 14) changes to 1.
Receiving Time Out duration

Receive data 1 frame

Receive command
Value of LM100 when 1
Trigger Condition is While ON
0
Value of Receiving Time Out 1(address+0, bit 14)
of Status Device LDR110 0
1
Value of Completed Device LM101
0Receiving Time Out duration

Receive data 1 frame

Receive command

Value of LM100 when
Trigger Condition is While ON

10

Value of Receiving Time Out 1(address+0, bit 14)
of Status Device LDR110 0
1
Value of Completed Device LM101
0■ Trigger Condition
Set the trigger conditions for transmission or receiving of data.
When TXD is selected as Command Type:
Trigger Type: A condition for data transmission is selected from the following.
Rising-edge:
Data is transmitted when the value of device changes from 0 to 1.
1

Value of Device
0

ActionFalling-edge:

Execution

Execution

Execution

Data is transmitted when the value of device changes from 1 to 0.
1

Value of Device
0

ActionExecution

Execution

Satisfy the condition:
Data is transmitted when the condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

Action22-32

Execution

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

Execution

Execution

5 User Communication

Fixed Period:

Data is transmitted at a fixed time interval.
Fixed time interval

ActionExecution

Fixed time interval

Execution

Fixed time interval

Execution

Data Type:

Select the data type handled by the conditional expression.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device:Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition. You can only specify the HMI device.
Can only be set if Rising-edge or Falling-edge is selected as Trigger Type.

Condition:

Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition is selected as Trigger Type.

Communication

Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expressions
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-63.
Period (sec): Specify the period for command execution from 1 to 3600 (seconds).
This is enabled only when Fixed Period is selected in Trigger Type.
When RXD is selected as Command Type:
Trigger Type: Selects the condition to be ready to receive data from the following.
Always Enabled: The Touch is always ready to receive data.
ActionWhile ON:

Always Enabled

Ready to receive data when the value of device is 1.
1

Value of Device
0

ActionWhile OFF:

EnabledEnabledEnabledReady to receive data when the value of device is 0.
1

Value of Device
0

ActionEnabledEnabledEnabledWhile satisfying the condition:
Ready to receive data while the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionData Type:

Device:Condition:

EnabledEnabledEnabled

Select the data type handled by the conditional expression.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition. You can only specify the HMI device.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expressions
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-63.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22

22-33

5 User Communication■ Command
Shows a list of command data. Double clicking the line displays the Data Settings dialog box.
For details, refer to “Data Settings Dialog Box” on page 22-36. The maximum amount that can be configured is 32
commands per protocol.
The content displayed in lists varies based on the type of command.
Constant (Character):

Displays the specified data enclosed in " ".
"Data"
Example: "1234"

Constant (Hexadecimal): Displays the specified data with each byte value enclosed in ' '.
'Data of the first byte' 'Data of the second byte' 'Data of the third byte' 'Data of theforth byte'
Example: '31' '32' '33' '34'
Device:Displays the specified data enclosed by < >, in the following order.
<Device Conversion Type Number of bytes Variable Words Storage Method of data>
Device:Displays the device address enclosed by [ ]When the Use Reference Device check box is selected,
displays as OFFSET([Device], [Reference Device])

Number of bytes:

Displays the number of bytes of the transmitted or
received data.

Conversion Type:

Display the conversion methods for values of devices asfollows.
B16-A: When Binary (HEX) to ASCII is selected
B10-A: When Binary (DEC) to ASCII is selected
N: When No Conversion is selected

Variable:

When the Variable check box is selected, variables are
displayed as follows.
V00: When NULL (00h) is selected for transmissioncommand
V [Device]: When Device is selected for transmissioncommand
V: In the case of receive command

Words:

Displays the number of word devices for transmitting or
receiving data.

Storage Method of data: Displays the handling method for value of read device asfollows.
U: When from Upper byte is selected
L: When from Lower byte is selected
Example: <OFFSET([LDR0100], [LDR0300]) N 2V[LDR0200] 2 U>
Registering Constant (Character):
Displays the specified data enclosed in << >>.
<<Index No. of No. 1: Data of No. 1 Index No. of No. 2: Data of No. 2 ... Index No. of
No. N: Data of No. N Index Device>> (N = 1 to 100)
Data:

Displays the data enclosed by " "Index Device:

Displays the device address enclosed by [ ]Example: <<1:"123" 2 :"456" 3 :"789" [LDR0100]>>
Registering Constant (Hexadecimal):
Displays the specified data enclosed in << >>.
<<Index No. of No. 1: Data of No. 1 Index No. of No. 2: Data of No. 2 ... Index No. of
No. N: Data of No. N Index Device>> (N = 1 to 100)
Data:

Displays the data enclosed by ' 'Index Device:

Displays the device address enclosed by [ ]Example: <<1:'313233' 2:'343536' 3 :'373839' [LDR0100]>>

22-34

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication

BCC:

Displays the specified data enclosed in BCC ( ).
BCC(Calculation Start Position Calculation End Position Calculation Type
Conversion Type Number of bytes)
Calculation Start Position:
Displays the data position where the BCC calculation
starts.
Calculation End Position:
Displays the data position where the BCC calculation ends.
Calculation Type:

Display the methods to calculate the data between the
Calculation Start Position and Calculation End Position as
follows.
XOR: When XOR is selected

22

ADD: When ADD is selected
ADD2: When ADD (2's Complement) is selected
Display the conversion methods for values of devices asfollows.
B16-A: When Binary (HEX) to ASCII is selected
N: When No Conversion is selected
Number of bytes:

Displays the number of bytes of the transmitted or
received data.

Example: BCC(2 1 XOR N 2)
Skip:

Displays the specified data enclosed in Skip( ).
Skip(Number of bytes)
Example: Skip(2)Edit

Add or change data.
To add data, select an empty line in the Command, and then click this button. Tochange data, select data in the Command, and then click this button. For details, refer
to “Data Settings Dialog Box” on page 22-36.

InsertInsert data at the position of the selected command.
Click this button to display the Data Settings dialog box. And specify the data. The dataat the insertion point shifts down by 1 item. When 32 data items are already set, you
cannot insert data.

DeleteDeletes the selected data.

Up

Shifts the selected data upward in the command.

Down

Shifts the selected data downward in the command.

■ Command Size
Displays the data size of a configured command.
The calculation method for command size varies based on the type selected in Command Type on the Command
Settings dialog box. The command size calculation methods are as follows.
TXD:

Number of bytes for Constant Data + Number of bytes for a data of Registering Constant + Number ofbytes of BCC + Number of bytes of Device x Words of Device

RXD:

Number of bytes for Constant Data + Number of bytes for a data of Registering Constant + Number ofbytes of BCC + Number of bytes of Skip + Number of bytes of Device x Words of Device■ OK
Save the settings.
■ CancelCancel the saving of settings.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-35

Communication

Conversion Type:5 User Communication● Data Settings Dialog Box
Specify the transmitted or received data by a command.

■ TypeSelects data types from the following items.
Constant (Character), Constant (Hexadecimal), Device, Registering Constant (Character), Registering
Constant (Hexadecimal), BCC, Skip
Skip can only be configured when RXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box.
Setting item varies based on the selection in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box.
When TXD is selected, refer to “Transmission (TXD) Command” on page 22-37.
When RXD is selected, refer to “Receive (RXD) Command” on page 22-50.

22-36

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication● Transmission (TXD) Command
Constant (Character)
The character data is sent without being converted.
This can be configured only when TXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box, andConstant (Character) is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.

22
Communication■ DataEnter character data (1 to 1500 bytes) to be transmitted. The size of a single-byte character is one byte and that of adouble-byte character is two bytes.

Example: Constant (Character) for transmission command data
Item

Setting

Data

1234

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the character data is transmitted in the following order.
Transmission data

Data
1234
No
conversion

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

Order of transmission

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-37

5 User Communication

Constant (Hexadecimal)
The hexadecimal data is sent without being converted.
Use this setting to send a control code of ASCII data (00h to 1Fh).
This can be configured only when TXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box, andConstant (Hexadecimal) is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.

■ DataEnter hexadecimal data (1 to 1500 bytes) to be transmitted.

Example: Constant (Hexadecimal) for transmission command data
Item

Setting

Data

1234

When the trigger condition is satisfied, 1234h is transmitted in the order 12h and 34h.
Transmission data

Data
1234h

12h

34h

No
conversion
Order of transmission

22-38

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication

DeviceThe value of device is either not converted or converted to ASCII and then sent as data with the specified size.
This can be configured only when TXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box, andDevice is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.

22

Binary (HEX) to ASCII:

Considers the value of device as binary-coded hexadecimal number and converts it to ASCII
data.

Binary (DEC) to ASCII: Considers the value of device as binary-coded decimal number and converts it to ASCII
data.
No Conversion:

No conversion is performed.

■ Device
Specify the source word device for transmitted data. You can only specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
■ Use Reference Device
To change the source word device for transmitted data according to values of device, select this check box andspecify a device. This can be configured only when No Conversion is selected under Conversion Type. You can
only specify an internal device.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings” on page 2-4.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
■ Storage Method of data
Select the handling method for the value of read device. This can be configured only when No Conversion is
selected under Conversion Type.
from Upper byte: Value of devices are read from the upper byte.
from Lower byte: Value of devices are read from the lower byte.
■ Number of bytes
Specify the number of bytes of transmitted data. The number of bytes that can be specified varies based on thesetting under Conversion Type.
Binary (HEX) to ASCII:

1 to 4

Binary (DEC) to ASCII: 1 to 5
No Conversion:

1 to 2■ Words
Specify the number of word devices (1 to 99) of transmitted data.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-39

Communication■ Conversion Type:
Select the conversion rule for the value of device from the following.

5 User Communication■ Variable
Select this check box to change the transmitted data size according to conditions. This can be configured only when
No Conversion is selected under Conversion Type. When the check box is not selected, the amount of data(bytes) transmitted is data (bytes) for Number of bytes x Words.
NULL (00h):

Send the data from the start data of the value of device up to 00 (hexadecimal). Data 00 will not
be sent. This setting is effective for sending only the character data section of character data
having 00 (hexadecimal) as the last data.

Device:Specify a word device to which a number of bytes is applied for transmitted data.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
When the value of device exceeds Number of bytes x Words, or when it is negative, the Device
Data Variable Specification Error (address+0, bit 6) of the Status Device changes to 1, andtransmission does not occur.

Examples: Device for transmission command data
Example 1
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeNo Conversion

DeviceLDR100Use Reference Device

OFF

Storage Method of datafrom Upper byte

Number of bytes

1

Words

3

VariableOFF

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of device is read and data is transmitted in the following order.

Words: 3

Value of Device
LDR100:1234h
LDR101:5678h
LDR102:
9ABCh

Upper

Lower

Transmission data

12h

34h

12h

56h

78h

9Ah

BCh

from Upper byte
1 byte56h

9Ah

Order of transmission

No conversion

Example 2
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeNo Conversion

DeviceLDR100Use Reference Device

OFF

Storage Method of datafrom Lower byte

Number of bytes

2

Words

3

VariableOFF

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of device is read and data is transmitted in the following order.

Words: 3

Value of Device
1234h
LDR100:5678h
LDR101:LDR102:
9ABCh

Upper

Lower

12h

34h

56h

78h

9Ah

BCh

Transmission data
34hfrom Lower byte
2 bytes

No conversion

22-40

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

12h

78h

56h

BCh

Order of transmission

9Ah5 User Communication

Example 3
Item

Setting

Conversion Type

Binary (HEX) to ASCII

DeviceLDR100Use Reference Device

OFF

Number of bytes

2

Words

2

VariableOFF

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of device is read, and data is converted to ASCII and transmitted in
the following order.

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

5
(35h)

6
(36h)

7
(37h)

8
(38h)

3
(33h)

2 bytes

4
(34h)

7
(37h)

8
(38h)

Order of transmission

Binary (HEX) to ASCII

Example 4
Item

Setting

Conversion Type

Binary (DEC) to ASCII

DeviceLDR100Use Reference Device

OFF

Number of bytes

2

Words

2

VariableOFF

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of device is read, and data is converted to ASCII and transmitted in
the following order.

Words: 2

Transmission data

Value of Device
LDR100:1234
LDR101:
5678

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

5
(35h)

6
(36h)

7
(37h)

8
(38h)

3
(33h)

2 bytes

4
(34h)

7
(37h)

8
(38h)

Order of transmission

Binary (DEC) to ASCII

Example 5
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeNo Conversion

DeviceLDR100Use Reference Device

OFF

Storage Method of datafrom Upper byte

Number of bytes

2

Words

2

VariableON, NULL

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of device is read and data is transmitted in the following order.

Words: 2

Value of Device
LDR100:1234h
LDR101:0056h
No conversion

Upper

Lower

12h

34h

00h

56h

Transmission data
12h

34h

from Upper byte
2 bytes
Order of transmission

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-41

22
Communication

Words: 2

Transmission data

Value of Device
LDR100:1234h
LDR101:5678h

5 User Communication

Example 6
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeNo Conversion

DeviceLDR100Use Reference Device

OFF

Storage Method of datafrom Lower byte

Number of bytes

2

Words

2

VariableON, Device: LDR200

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of device is read and data is transmitted in the following order.
When the LDR200 value is 3

Words: 2

Value of Device
LDR100:1234h
LDR101:
5678h

Upper

Lower

Transmission data

12h

34h

34h

56h

78h

from Lower byte
2 bytes

No conversion

12h

78h

LDR200=3
Order of transmission

Example 7
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeNo Conversion

DeviceLDR100Use Reference Device

ON, Device: LDR200

Storage Method of datafrom Upper byte

Words

2

VariableOFF

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of device is read and data is transmitted in the following order.
When the LDR200 value is 2

LDR200=2
Words: 2

Value of Device
LDR100:1234h
LDR101:5678h
LDR102:2537h
LDR103:
4619h

Upper

Lower

25h

37h

46h

19h

Transmission data
25hfrom Upper byte
2 bytes

No conversion

22-42

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

37h

46h

19h

Order of transmission

5 User Communication

Registering Constant (Character)
From the registered character data, character data according to the value of device is read and transmitted.
This can be configured only when TXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box, andRegistering Constant (Character) is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.

22
Communication■ Number of Registering ConstantsSpecify the number of data of the registered character data (1 to 100).
■ Registering Constants
No.:

Shows the ID No. (1 to 100) of the character data.

Index:

Shows the Index No. of the character data.

Data:

Shows the character data.

■ Index
Specify the Index No. (0 to 65535) of the character data.
■ DataEnter the character data (1 to 1500 bytes) to be registered. The size of a single-byte character is one byte and that ofa double-byte character is two bytes.
The character data of different size or the same data with a different number cannot be registered.
■ Set
Register the Index and Data settings to the list. When a number that is already registered is selected, it isoverwritten with the new setting.
■ Insert
Insert a character data setting to the selected number in the list.
Click this button to insert the Index and Data setting. The settings at the insertion point shift down 1 line. Settingscannot be inserted when all numbers are already set.
■ Delete
Delete the selected settings from the list.
■ Index Device
Specify the source word device to serve as the Index No. You can only specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-43

5 User Communication

Example: Transmission command for Registering Constant (Character) data
Item

Setting

Number of Registering Constants

3
Index No. 1: 123

Registering Constants

Index No. 2: 456
Index No. 3: 789

Index Device

LDR100

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the data of the Index No. according to the value of device is transmitted.
When the LDR100 value is 2
Index No.
1:
Number of2:
Registering
3:
Constants: 3

22-44

Data
123
456
789

Transmission data
Index Device
LDR100=2

4
(34h)

5
(35h)

6
(36h)

Order of transmission

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication

Registering Constant (Hexadecimal)
From the registered hexadecimal data, the hexadecimal data according to the value of device is read and transmitted.
This can be configured only when TXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box, andRegistering Constant (Hexadecimal) is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.

22
Communication■ Number of Registering ConstantsSpecify the number of data of the registered hexadecimal data (1 to 100).
■ Registering Constants
No.:

Shows the ID No. (1 to 100) of the hexadecimal data.

Index:

Shows the Index No. of the hexadecimal data.

Data:

Shows the hexadecimal data.

■ Index
Specify the Index No. (0 to 65535) of the hexadecimal data.
■ DataEnter the hexadecimal data (1 to 1500 bytes) to be registered.
The data of different size or the same data with a different number cannot be registered.
■ Set
Register the Index and Data settings to the list. When a number that is already registered is selected, it isoverwritten with the new setting.
■ Insert
Insert a hexadecimal data setting to the selected number in the list.
Click this button to insert the Index and Data setting. The settings at the insertion point shift down one line. Settingscannot be inserted when all numbers are already set.
■ Delete
Delete the selected settings from the list.
■ Index Device
Specify the source word device to serve as the Index No. You can only specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-45

5 User Communication

Example: Transmission command for Registering Constant (Hexadecimal) data
Item

Setting

Number of Registering Constants

3
Index No. 1: 1234

Registering Constants

Index No. 2: 5678
Index No. 3: 2537

Index Device

LDR100

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the data of the Index No. according to the value of device is transmitted.
When the LDR100 value is 3
Index No.
1:
Number of2:
Registering
Constants: 3
3:

Data
1234h
5678h
2537h

Transmission data
25h
Index Device
LDR100=3

22-46

37h

Order of transmission

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication

BCC (Block Check Code)A BCC for the transmission data is automatically calculated and appended to the transmission data at an arbitrary
position and transmitted.
This can be configured only when TXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box, andBCC is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.

22
Communication■ Calculation Start Position
Specify the position of transmission data at which BCC calculation starts (1 to 15). The position is counted backwards,
with the first position of the transmission data taken as 1.
Calculation Start Position:
Transmission data:

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

STX
(02h)

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

5
(35h)

BCC

CR
(0Dh)

■ Calculation End Position
Specify the position of transmission data at which BCC calculation ends (0 to 15). The position is counted forwards,
with the data position before the BCC taken as 0.
Transmission data:
Calculation End Position:

STX
(02h)

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

5
(35h)

(5)

(4)

(3)

(2)

(1)

(0)

BCC

CR
(0Dh)

■ Calculation Type
Select the method to calculate the data between the Calculation Start Position and Calculation End Position.
XOR:

Calculates the data with exclusive logical add.

ADD:

Calculates the data using addition.

ADD (2's Complement): Calculates the data using addition, inverts the bit and adds one.
Modbus ASCII (LCR):

Calculation is performed according to the following procedure. Conversion Type:
Binary (HEX) to ASCII, Number of bytes: 2
1. Convert the ASCII characters between Calculation Start Position and Calculation End
Position into 1-byte hexadecimal data for each set of two characters.
Example: 37h, 35h→75h
2. Calculate the sum of the data obtained in step 1.
3. Invert the bit of the result of step 2 and add one. (2’s complement)
4. Convert the lower one byte data of the result of step 3 into ASCII characters.
Example: 75h→37h, 35h

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-47

5 User Communication

CRC-16 (Generating polynomial:x16+x15+x2+1) is calculated according to the following
procedure. Conversion Type: No Conversion, Number of bytes: 2

Modbus RTU (CRC):

1. Obtain an exclusive OR (XOR) of 1 byte data at Calculation Start Position and FFFFh.
2. If the least significant bit of the result of step 1 is 0, shift to the right by one bit. If the
bit is 1, shift to the right by 1 bit and obtain XOR of the result and the value (A001h).
3. Repeat step 2 to shift 8 times.
4. Obtain XOR of the next one byte of data and the result of step 3.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 until the data at Calculation End Position is processed.
6. Send the result of step 5 in the order of the lower byte and upper byte.
Example: 1234h→34h, 12h■ Conversion TypeAfter calculating the data using the specified calculation type, select the type of conversion for the data from thefollowing.
Binary (HEX) to ASCII

Considers the data as binary-coded hexadecimal number and converts it to ASCII data.

No conversion:

No conversion is performed.

■ Number of bytes
After converting according to the specifed conversion type, select 1 or 2 for the number of bytes for transmission
data.
Example: BCC for transmission command data
This example describes the case of transmitting the BCC calculation result from the following transmission data as
BCC data.
STX
(02h)

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

5
(35h)

BCC

CR
(0Dh)

• Calculation Start Position and Calculation End Position
When Calculation Start Position is 2 and Calculation End Position is 1: Calculates the range 1234.
Calculation Start Position:

Calculation End Position:

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

STX
(02h)

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

5
(35h)

(5)

(4)

(3)

(2)

(1)

(0)

BCC

CR
(0Dh)

Data used for BCC calculation• Calculation TypeXOR:

31h^32h^33h^34h^=04h

ADD:

31h+32h+33h+34h=CAh

ADD (2's Complement):

Inverts the bit of CAh+1=36h

Modbus ASCII (LCR):

BA → 42h, 41h

Modbus RTU (CRC):

BA30h → BAh, 30h• Conversion Type
When the BCC calculation result is 0004h, the converted data is as follows.
Data
0004h

0
(30h)

4
(34h)

00h

04h

Binary (HEX) to ASCII
Data
0004h
No conversion

22-48

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication• Bytes and BCC data
When the converted data is 3034h, the data appended to the transmission data is as follows.
Converted data
(Second byte) (First byte)

0
(30h)

4
(34h)

BCC data

1 byte4(34h)

Converted data
(Second byte) (First byte)

0
(30h)

4
(34h)

2 bytes

BCC data
0
(30h)

4
(34h)

Converted data
(Second byte) (First byte)

Data

B
(42h)

4241h

A
(41h)

Binary (HEX) to ASCII

2 bytes

BCC data
B
(42h)

A
(41h)

• When Calculation Type is Modbus RTU (CRC)
When the BCC calculation result is BA30h with no conversion the two bytes of data is appended to thetransmission data.
Converted data
(Second byte) (First byte)

Data

BAh

BA30h
No conversion

BCC data
BAh

30h

30h

2 bytesSmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-49

22
Communication• When Calculation Type is Modbus ASCII (LCR)
When the BCC calculation result is 4241h after Binary (HEX) to ASCII conversion the resulting two bytes of data
is appended to the transmission data.

5 User Communication● Receive (RXD) Command
Constant (Character)
The received data is considered as character data and compared with the data specified without being converted.
This can be configured only when RXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box, andConstant (Character) is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.

■ DataEnter character data (1 to 1500 bytes) designated to be received. The size of a single-byte character is one byte andthat of a double-byte character is two bytes.
When a Constant (Character) is set at the beginning of a command, the first one byte is recognized as thestart code. When a Constant (Character) is set at the end of a command, the last one byte is recognized as
the terminal code.
For details, refer to “Start Code and Terminal Code” on page 22-66.

Example: Constant (Character) for receive command data
Item

Setting

Data

1234

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is compared with the following data.
Specified data
1234

Data used for comparison with received data

No
conversion

22-50

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

Order of reception

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication

Constant (Hexadecimal)
The received data is considered as hexadecimal data and compared with the data specified without being converted.
Use this setting to receive a control code of ASCII data (00h to 1Fh).
This can be configured only when RXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box, andConstant (Hexadecimal) is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.

22
Communication■ DataEnter hexadecimal data (1 to 1500 bytes) designated to be received.
When a Constant (Character) is set at the beginning of a command, the first one byte is recognized as thestart code. When a Constant (Character) is set at the end of a command, the last one byte is recognized as
the terminal code.
For details, refer to “Start Code and Terminal Code” on page 22-66.

Example: Constant (Hexadecimal) for receive command data
Item

Setting

Data

1234

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is compared with the following data.
Specified data

Data used for comparison with received data
12h

1234h

34h

No conversion
Order of reception

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-51

5 User Communication

DeviceFrom the received data, data of the specified size is unconverted, or converted to binary format, and stored in thedevice.
This can be configured only when RXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box, andDevice is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.

■ Conversion Type
Select conversion processing for the received data from the following.
ASCII (HEX) to Binary:

Considers the received data as a hexadecimal number and converts it to binary data.

ASCII (DEC) to Binary:

Considers the received data as a decimal number and converts it to binary data.

No conversion:

No conversion is performed.

■ Device
Specify the word device for storing the received data. You can only specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61 .
■ Use Reference Device
To change the word device for storing the received data according to values of devices, select this check box andspecify a device. You can only specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
■ Storage Method of data
Select the handling method for received data. This can be configured only when No Conversion is selected under
Conversion Type.
from Upper byte: Values of devices are stored from the upper byte.
from Lower byte: Values of devices are stored from the lower byte.
■ Number of bytes
Specify the received data size to be stored per word. The number of bytes to be specified varies based on
Conversion Type.
ASCII (HEX) to Binary:

1 to 4ASCII (DEC) to Binary:

1 to 5

No Conversion:

1 to 2■ Words
Specify the number of word devices (1 to 250) for storing the received data.

22-52

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication■ Variable
Select this check box to store data up to either Constant (Character) data, or Constant (Hexadecimal) datafrom the beginning of the received data in a device. Stores data of the size specified under Words.
When the stored data is smaller than the size specified under Words, the values of all remaining devices will stored 0.
Stored data

Number of words for stored data: 2

2
(32h)

1
(31h)

4
(34h)

3
(33h)

No
conversion

Value of Device
LDR100:3231h
LDR101:3433h
Number of specified words: 3
LDR102:0000h

Insufficient by 1 word
0 is stored.
The stored data is smaller than the size specified for Words.

When the check box is not selected, the amount of data (bytes) stored is Number of bytes x Number of words.

Examples: Device for receive command data
Example 1
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeNo Conversion

DeviceLDR100Use Reference Device

OFF

Storage Method of datafrom Upper byte

Number of bytes

1

Words

3

VariableOFF

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in devices in the following order.
Received data
1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

Order of reception

from Upper byte
1 byte

Upper

Lower

1
(31h)

0
(00h)

2
(32h)

0
(00h)

3
(33h)

0
(00h)

Value of Device
LDR100:3100h
Words: 3
LDR101:3200h
LDR102:3300h

No conversion

Example 2
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeNo Conversion

DeviceLDR100Use Reference Device

OFF

Storage Method of datafrom Lower byte

Number of bytes

2

Words

2

VariableOFF

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in devices in the following order.
Received data
1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

Order of reception

4
(34h)

from Lower byte
2 bytes

Upper

Lower

2
(32h)

1
(31h)

4
(34h)

3
(33h)

Value of Device
LDR100:3231hWords: 2
LDR101:3433h
No conversion

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-53

22
Communication

When the Variable check box is selected, observe the following points.
• When data is set expect for the end of a command, set Constant (Character) data or Constant(Hexadecimal) data following Device data.
• When there is no data stored in the device, all of the values of devices specified under Words will be 0.
• The maximum amount of the received data stored in the device is Number of bytes x Number of words.

5 User Communication

Example 3
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeASCII (HEX) to Binary

DeviceLDR100Use Reference Device

OFF

Number of bytes

2

Words

2

VariableOFF

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in devices in the following order.
Received data
1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

2 bytes

Order of reception

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

Value of Device
LDR100:0012h
Words: 2
LDR101:0034h
ASCII (HEX) to Binary

Example 4
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeASCII (DEC) to Binary

DeviceLDR100Use Reference Device

OFF

Number of bytes

2

Words

2

VariableOFF

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in devices in the following order.
Received data
1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

2 bytes

Order of reception

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

Value of Device(DEC)
LDR100:12
Words: 2
LDR101:
34(DEC)
ASCII (DEC) to Binary

Example 5
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeNo Conversion

DeviceLDR100Use Reference Device

OFF

Storage Method of datafrom Upper byte

Number of bytes

1

Words

3

VariableON

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in devices in the following order.
Data from the beginning of the received data to Constant (Hexadecimal) data is stored in the device. Constant(Hexadecimal) data is not stored.
Received data
Stored data

1
(31h)

Constant (HEX) data

3
(33h)

ETX
(03h)

Order of reception

from Upper byte
1 byteConstant (Character) data
0 is stored.

Upper

Lower

1
(31h)

NUL
(00h)

3
(33h)

NUL
(00h)

No
conversion

Value of Device
LDR100:3100h
LDR101:3300h
LDR102:0000h

Insufficient by 1 word
0 is stored.
The stored data is smaller than thesize specified for Words.

22-54

SmartAXIS Touch User's ManualWords: 3

0 is stored.

5 User Communication

Example 6
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeNo Conversion

DeviceLDR100Use Reference Device

OFF

Storage Method of datafrom Lower byte

Number of bytes

2

Words

3

VariableON

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in devices in the following order.
Data from the beginning of the received data to Constant (Hexadecimal) data is stored in the device. Constant(Hexadecimal) data is not stored.

Communication

Received data
Stored data

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

Constant (HEX) data

3
(33h)

ETX
(03h)

Order of reception

from Lower byte
2 bytes

Upper

Lower

2
(32h)

1
(31h)

NUL
(00h)

3
(33h)

No
conversion

Value of Device
LDR100:3231hWords: 3
LDR101:0033h
LDR102:0000h

Insufficient by 1 word
0 is stored.

Constant (Character) data
0 is stored.

The stored data is smaller than thesize specified for Words.

Example 7
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeASCII (HEX) to Binary

DeviceLDR100Use Reference Device

OFF

Number of bytes

1

Words

3

VariableON

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in devices in the following order.
Data from the beginning of the received data to Constant (Hexadecimal) data is stored in the device. Constant(Hexadecimal) data is not stored.
Received data
Stored data

1
(31h)

3
(33h)

Constant (HEX) data

ETX
(03h)

Order of reception

1 byte

1
(31h)
3
(33h)

ASCII (HEX) to Binary
Value of Device
LDR100:0001h
Words: 3
LDR101:0003h
LDR102:0000h
Insufficient by 1 word
0 is stored.

The stored data is smaller than thesize specified for Words.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22

22-55

5 User Communication

Example 8
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeASCII (DEC) to Binary

DeviceLDR100Use Reference Device

OFF

Number of bytes

2

Words

3

VariableON

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in devices in the following order.
Data from the beginning of the received data to Constant (Hexadecimal) data is stored in the device. Constant(Hexadecimal) data is not stored.
Received data
Stored data

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

Constant (HEX) data

3
(33h)

ETX
(03h)

2 bytes

Order of reception

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

NUL
(00h)

3
(33h)

ASCII (DEC)to Binary
Value of Device(DEC)
LDR100:123(DEC) Words: 3
LDR101:LDR102:0(DEC)
Insufficient by 1 word
0 is stored.

Constant (Character) data
0 is stored.

The stored data is smaller than thesize specified for Words.

Example 9
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeNo Conversion

DeviceLDR100Use Reference Device

ON, Device: LDR200

Storage Method of datafrom Upper byte

Words

2

VariableOFF

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in devices in the following order.
When the LDR200 value is 2

Received data
1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

Order of reception

22-56

4
(34h)

Bytes: 2

Upper

Lower

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

Value of Device
LDR100:0000h
LDR101:0000h
LDR200=2
LDR102:3132h
Words: 2
LDR103:3334h
No conversion

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication

Registering Constant (Character)
The received data is compared with the registered character data and the number of the matching character data isstored in the device.
This can be configured only when RXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box, andRegistering Constant (Character) is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.

22
Communication■ Number of Registering ConstantsSpecify the number of data of the registered character data (1 to 100).
■ Registering Constants
No.:

Shows the ID No. (1 to 100) of the character data.

Index:

Shows the Index No. of the character data.

Data:

Shows the character data.

■ Index
Specify the Index No. (0 to 65535) of the character data.
■ DataEnter the character data (1 to 1500 bytes) to be registered. The size of a single-byte character is one byte and that ofa double-byte character is two bytes.
The character data of different size or the same data with a different number cannot be registered.
■ Set
Register the Index and Data settings to the list. When a number that is already registered is selected, it isoverwritten with the new setting.
■ Insert
Insert a character data setting to the selected number in the list.
Click this button to insert the Index and Data setting. The settings at the insertion point shift down 1 line. Settingscannot be inserted when all numbers are already set.
■ Delete
Delete the selected settings from the list.
■ Index Device
Specify the word device for storing the Index No. of the character data matching the received data. You can only
specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-57

5 User Communication

Example: Registering Constant (Character) for receive command data
Item

Setting

Number of Registering Constants

3
Index No. 1: 123

Registering Constants

Index No. 2: 456
Index No. 3: 789

Index Device

LDR100

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is compared with the registered data, and the value of theIndex No. 2 of the matching data is stored in Index Device LDR100.
Received data
4
(34h)

5
(35h)

6
(36h)

CompareIndex No.
1:
Number of2:
Registering
3:
Constants: 3

Data
123
456
789

Value of the Index Device
LDR100:2(DEC)

Order of reception

22-58

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication

Registering Constant (Hexadecimal)
The received data is compared with the registered hexadecimal data and the number of the matching hexadecimaldata is stored in the device.
This can be configured only when RXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box, andRegistering Constant (Hexadecimal) is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.

22
Communication■ Number of Registering ConstantsSpecify the number of data of the registered hexadecimal data (1 to 100).
■ Registering Constants
No.:

Shows the ID No. (1 to 100) of the hexadecimal data.

Index:

Shows the Index No. of the hexadecimal data.

Data:

Shows the hexadecimal data.

■ Index
Specify the Index No. (0 to 65535) of the hexadecimal data.
■ DataEnter the hexadecimal data (1 to 1500 bytes) to be registered.
The hexadecimal data of different size or the same data with a different number cannot be registered.
■ Set
Register the Index and Data settings to the list. When a number that is already registered is selected, it isoverwritten with the new setting.
■ Insert
Insert a hexadecimal data setting to the selected number in the list.
Click this button to insert the Index and Data setting. The settings at the insertion point shift down 1 line. Settingscannot be inserted when all numbers are already set.
■ Delete
Delete the selected settings from the list.
■ Index Device
Specify the word device for storing the Index No. of the hexadecimal data matching the received data. You can only
specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-59

5 User Communication

Example: Registering Constant (Hexadecimal) for receive command data
Item

Setting

Number of Registering Constants

3
Index No. 1: 1234

Registering Constants

Index No. 2: 5678
Index No. 3: 2537

Index Device

LDR100

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is compared with the registered hexadecimal data, and thevalue of the Index No. 2 of the matching data is stored in Index Device LDR100.
When the LDR100 value is 3
Received data25h

37hCompareIndex No.
1:
Number of2:
Registering
3:
Constants: 3

Data
1234h
5678h
2537h

Value of the Index Device
LDR100:3(DEC)

Order of reception

Example of applying Registering Constant
When the same device address is specified for the Index Device for Registering Constant (Character) data or
Registering Constant (Hexadecimal) data and for Use Reference Device for Device data, the data storage
destination for each unit of received data can be changed.
Data type

Item

Constant (Hexadecimal)

Registering Constant (Character)

DeviceConstant (Hexadecimal)

Setting

Data02

Number of Registering Constants

2
Index No. 1: AA

Registering ConstantIndex No. 2: BB

Index Device

LDR100Conversion TypeNo Conversion

DeviceLDR100Use Reference Device

ON, Device: LDR200

Storage Method for Data

from Upper byte

Bytes

2

Words

2

Variable

OFF

Data

0D

When the following commands are received
STX
(02h)

B
(42h)

B
(42h)

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

CR
(0Dh)

• The first 1 byte is taken as the start code. Constant (Hexadecimal) data is not stored.
STX
(02h)

• The received data is compared with the registered data, and the value of the Index No. 2 (DEC) of the matchingdata is stored in Index Device LDR100.
Received data
B
(42h)

B
(42h)

CompareIndex No.
Number of1:
Registering2:Constants: 2

Data
AA
BB

Value of the Index Device
LDR100:2(DEC)

Order of reception

22-60

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication• Since the Indirect Device LDR100 of Device of the receive command data is 2 (DEC), the data is stored in thedevice LDR202, which is offset by +2.
Value of Device
LDR200:0000h
LDR100=2
LDR201:0000h
LDR202:3132h• The last 1 byte is taken as the terminal code. Constant (Hexadecimal) data is not stored.
CR
(0Dh)

22
Communication

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-61

5 User Communication

BCC (Block Check Code)
The BCC comparison data is automatically calculated from the receive data and compared with the BCC part of thereceive data.
This can be configured only when RXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box, andBCC is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.

■ Calculation Start Position
Specify the position (1 to 15) in the receive data where BCC calculation starts. The position is counted backwards,
with the first position of the receive data taken as 1.
Calculation Start Position:

(1)

STX
Receive data:
(02h)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

5
(35h)

BCC

CR
(0Dh)

■ Calculation End Position
Specify the position (0 to 15) in the receive data where BCC calculation ends. The position is counted forwards, withthe data position before the BCC taken as 0.
Receive data:
Calculation End Position:

STX
(02h)

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

5
(35h)

(5)

(4)

(3)

(2)

(1)

(0)

BCC

CR
(0Dh)

■ Calculation Type
Select the method to calculate the data between the Calculation Start Position and Calculation End Position.
XOR:

Calculates the data with exclusive logical add.

ADD:

Calculates the data using addition.

ADD (2's Complement): Calculates the data using addition, inverts the bit and adds one.
Modbus ASCII (LCR):

Calculation is performed according to the following procedure. Conversion Type:
Binary (HEX) to ASCII, Number of bytes: 2
1. Convert the ASCII characters between Calculation Start Position and Calculation End
Position into 1-byte hexadecimal data for each set of two characters.
Example: 37h, 35h → 75h
2. Calculate the sum of the data obtained in step 1.
3. Invert the bit of the result of step 2 and add one. (2’s complement)
4. Convert the lower one byte data of the result of step 3 into ASCII characters.
Example: 75h → 37h, 35h

22-62

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication

CRC-16 (Generating polynomial:x16+x15+x2+1) is calculated according to the following
procedure. Conversion Type: No Conversion, Number of bytes: 2

Modbus RTU (CRC):

1. Obtain an exclusive OR (XOR) of 1 byte data at Calculation Start Position and FFFFh.
2. If the least significant bit of the result of step 1 is 0, shift to the right by one bit. If the
bit is 1, shift to the right by 1 bit and obtain XOR of the result and the value (A001h).
3. Repeat step 2 to shift 8 times.
4. Obtain XOR of the next one byte of data and the result of step 3.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 until the data at Calculation End Position is processed.
6. Compare the result of step 5 in the order of the lower byte and upper byte.
Example: 1234h → 34h, 12h■ Conversion TypeAfter calculating the data using the specified calculation type, select the type of conversion for the data from thefollowing.
Considers the data as binary-coded hexadecimal number and converts it to ASCII data.

No conversion:

No conversion is performed.

■ Number of bytes
After converting according to the specified conversion type, select 1 or 2 for the number of bytes for comparison
data.
Example: BCC for receive command data

This example describes the case of comparing the BCC calculation result for the following receive data with the BCCpart of the receive data.
STX
(02h)

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

5
(35h)

BCC

CR
(0Dh)

• Calculation Start Position and Calculation End Position
When Calculation Start Position is 2 and Calculation End Position is 1: Calculates the range 1234.
Calculation Start Position:

Calculation End Position:

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

STX
(02h)

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

5
(35h)

(5)

(4)

(3)

(2)

(1)

(0)

BCC

CR
(0Dh)

Data used for BCC calculation• Calculation TypeXOR:

31h^32h^33h^34h^=04h

ADD:

31h+32h+33h+34h=CAh

ADD (2's Complement): Inverts the bit of CAh+1=36h
Modbus ASCII (LCR):

BA→42h, 41h

Modbus RTU (CRC):

BA30h→BAh, 30h• Conversion Type
When the BCC calculation result is 0004h, the converted data is as follows.
Data
0004h

0
(30h)

4
(34h)

00h

04h

Binary (HEX) to ASCII
Data
0004h
No conversion

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-63

Communication

Binary (HEX) to ASCII:

22

5 User Communication• Number of bytes and comparison data
When the converted data is 3034h, the data used for comparison with the BCC part of the receive data is asfollows.
Converted data
Comparison data

(Second byte) (First byte)

0
(30h)

4
(34h)

Bytes: 1

Converted data
(Second byte) (First byte)
0
(30h)

4
(34h)

4
(34h)

Comparison data

Bytes: 2

0
(30h)

4
(34h)

• BCC data comparison
The comparison data is compared with the BCC part of the receive data.
In the following receive data, when the comparison data is the 1-byte 34h, there is a match since the BCC part datais 34h.
When there is no match, the BCC Error (address+0, bit 0) of the Status Device changes to 1.
Receive data
STX
(02h)

BCC part

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

5
(35h)

BCC
(34h)

CR
(0Dh)
Match

Comparison data4(34h)

• When the calculation type is Modbus ASCII (LCR)
When the BCC calculation result is 4241h after Binary (HEX) to ASCII conversion the resulting two bytes of data
is used for comparison with the BCC part of the receive data.
Converted data
(Second byte) (First byte)

Data
4241h

B
(42h)

A
(41h)

Binary (HEX) to ASCII

Bytes: 2

Comparison data
B
(42h)

A
(41h)

• When the calculation type is Modbus RTU (CRC)
When the BCC calculation result is BA30h with no conversion the two bytes of data is used for comparison with the
BCC part of the receive data.
Converted data
(Second byte) (First byte)

Data
BA30h

BAh
No conversion

22-64

Comparison data
BAh

30h

30h

Bytes: 2

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication

Skip
The data with the specified number of bytes in the receive data will be ignored.
This can be configured only when RXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box, andSkip is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.

22
Communication■ Number of bytes
Specify the number of bytes (1 to 249) of receive data to be ignored.

Example: Skip for receive command data
Item

Setting

Number of bytes

2

In the received four byte data (1 (31h), 2 (32h), 3 (33h), 4 (34h)), only the data for 3 (33h) and 4 (34h) is received
and the two bytes of 1 (31h) and 2 (32h) are discarded.
Received data
1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

Enabled data
4
(34h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

2 bytes(Ignored)
Order of reception

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-65

5 User Communication● Start Code and Terminal CodeA start code starts data reception and a terminal code judges the terminal of data reception. A start code and aterminal code can be configured for either Constant (Character) or Constant (Hexadecimal) settings for receive
command. The first 1 byte of the constant is recognized as the start code and the last 1 byte as the terminal code.
Command settings: Constant (HEX)

DeviceConstant (HEX)

Receive data: '02' '31' '32' '33' <[LDR0100] N 2 2 U>
Start code 02h'34' '35' '0d'
Terminal code 0dh

Code 00h to 7Fh can be set when Data Length under Interface Settings is 7 bits, and 00h to FFh when the data
length is 8 bits. Data Length is configured under the Communication Interface tab on the Project Settings dialogbox.
The procedure for terminal of data reception varies whether or not the receive data contains a start code and aterminal code, and whether the Variable check box for Device for receive command data is selected.
In the following description, With Variable indicates that the Variable check box for Device for receive commanddata is selected and Without Variable indicates that the Variable check box is not selected. Also, when there are
multiple Device set for receive command data, and at least 1 command has the Variable check box selected, thiscorresponds to With Variable.
Start code

Terminal
code

Variable

Description of the procedure for terminal of data reception
Reception is started with the start code and terminated with the terminal code.
Command settings: Constant (HEX)

DeviceConstant (HEX)

Receive data: '02' '31' '32' '33' <[LDR0100] N 2 2 U>
Start code 02h

Set

Set

Set
Not set'34' '35' '0d'
Terminal code 0dh

Receive

When the terminal code is followed by BCC, the data including the number of bytes of
BCC is received.
Command settings: Constant (HEX)

DeviceConstant (HEX)

BCC'34' '35' '0d'

BCC(1 0 XOR N 1)

Receive data: '02' '31' '32' '33' <[LDR0100] N 2 2 U>
Start code 02h

Terminal code 0dh

Receive

Reception is started with the start code and the data is received according to the
maximum command length.
Command settings: Constant (HEX)
Receive data: '02' '31' '32'

Device With Variable

Registering Constant (HEX)<[LDR0100] N 2V 2 U><<1:”AB” 2:”CD” [LDR0200]>>

Start code 02h

Terminal code: None

Maximum command length

Set

Receive

Reception is terminated when the Receiving Character Time Out occurs.
Set

Not setCommand settings: Constant (HEX)

Device With Variable

Constant (HEX)

Registering Constant (HEX)

Receive data: '02' '31' '32'<[LDR0100] N 2V 2 U>

'03'<<1:”AB” 2:”CD” [LDR0200]>>

Start code 02h

Terminal code: None

Receiving charactertime out occurs.

Receive

Reception is started with the start code and the data is received according to the length ofthe command.
Not setCommand settings: Constant (HEX)

Device Without Variable

Registering Constant (HEX)

Receive data: '02' '31' '32'<[LDR0100] N 2 2 U><<1:”AB” 2:”CD” [LDR0200]>>

Start code 02h

Terminal code: None

Command length
Receive

Reception is started from the beginning and terminated with the terminal code.
Not set

Set

Set
Not setCommand settings:

Registering Constant (HEX)

Receive data: <<1:”AB” 2:”CD” [LDR0200]>>

DeviceConstant (HEX)<[LDR0100] N 2 2 U>

'34' '35' '0d'Start code: None

Terminal code 0dh

Receive

22-66

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication

Start code

Terminal
code

Variable

Description of the procedure for terminal of data reception
Reception is started from the beginning and the data is received according to the
maximum command length.
Command settings:
Receive data:

Skip

Constant(Character)

Device With Variable

Skip(2)“123”<[LDR0100] N 2V 2 U>

Start code: None

Terminal code: None

Maximum command length
Receive

Set

Reception is terminated when the Receiving Character Time Out occurs.
Not setCommand settings:

Not set

Receive data:

Skip

Constant(Character)

Device With Variable

Skip(2)“123”<[LDR0100] N 2V 2 U>
Terminal code: None
Receiving character time out occurs.

Receive

Reception is started from the beginning and terminated when the data is received
according to the length of the command.
Command settings:

Not setDevice Without Variable

Receive data: <[LDR0100] N 2 2 U>

Registering Constant (HEX)

BCC<<1:”AB” 2:”CD” [LDR0200]>> BCC(1 0 XOR N 1)

Start code: None

Terminal code: None

Command length
Receive• When trigger conditions are satisfied for two or more receive commands for which both start code andterminal code are set, all commands are analyzed and processed for receive processing. Sincecommands with and without errors may be mixed depending on the results of data reception analysis ofeach command, take extra caution regarding error handling.
• While the trigger condition is satisfied for a receive command for which either a start code or terminal
code is not set, only this command is processed for data reception when the trigger condition of anothercommand is being satisfied. When two or more commands exist for which either start code or terminal
code is not set, the command with the biggest number for managing the protocol is processed.
• When a start code of the receive command for which a start code is set cannot be received, all of thereceive data is ignored and abandoned. No error occurs.
• When start code is received with a receive command for which start code and terminal code are set, thedata reception is completed after the maximum number of bytes received in case of continuous receptionof data that does not match the terminal code of all receive command in which the trigger conditions is
satisfied.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-67

Communication

Start code: None22

5 User Communication

5.4 Example of User Communication Settings
This section describes examples of user communication settings and command operations.
● Example 1
This section describes an example of user communication protocol settings for creating the following commands andcommand operations.
• Transmission command for transmitting data using Constant (Hexadecimal), Constant (Character), Device,
Constant (Hexadecimal) command settings when the trigger condition device changes to 1
• Receive command for receiving, processing, and storing data in devices, using Constant (Hexadecimal), Constant(Character), Device, Constant (Hexadecimal) command settings, for data transmitted from an external device,when the trigger condition device is 1
■ User Communication Settings dialog box settings
Item

Setting

Protocol Name

Sample 1

Receiving Character Time Out

30 (×100 msec)■ Transmission command: Command Settings dialog box settings
Item

Setting

Comment

TXD command

Command Type

TXD

Completed Device

LM101

Status Device

LDR110Transmission Wait

50 (×100 msec)

Trigger Condition

While ON, Device: LM100

Command
Data Settings dialog box settings

Constant(Hexadecimal)'05'

Constant(Character)"D"

DeviceConversion Type: Binary (DEC) to ASCII,
Number of bytes: 4, Words: 1
Device: LDR100

Constant(Hexadecimal)'0D'

Operation for transmission command

1 Write a value of 100 (DEC) to LDR100 of transmission command data Device.
2 Change the trigger condition LM100 from 0 to 1 to start command transmission.
After the transmission wait duration (five seconds), the transmission data is sent. The transmission data is as follows.

Command settings:
Transmission data:

Constant Constant(HEX) (Character)

EQN
(05h)

D
(44h)

Constant(HEX)

Device

0
(30h)

1
(31h)

0
(30h)

0
(30h)

CR
(0Dh)

• When data transmission is successfully completed, the Completed Device LM101 changes to 1.
• When the value of each bit of address+0 for Status Device LDR110 is 0, transmission is completed without an error.

22-68

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication■ Receive command: Command Settings dialog box settings
Item

Setting

Comment

RXD command

Command Type

Receive

Completed Device

LM102

Not Clear Completed Device
automaticallyNo

Status Device

LDR130Receiving Time Out

0 (No Receive Time Out)

Trigger Condition

While ON, Device: LM101'02'

Constant(Character)"D"

DeviceConversion Type: ASCII (HEX) to Binary,
Number of bytes: 4, Words: 1
Device: LDR120, Reference Device: LDR100

Constant(Hexadecimal)

'0D'

22
Communication

Command
Data Settings dialog box settings

Constant(Hexadecimal)

Operation for receive command

1 When data transmission of the transmission command is completed, the value of LM101 changes to 1, and since thesame device is specified for the trigger condition user communication becomes ready for receiving.

2 Data is transmitted from the external device and the transmitted data is received and processed.
The receive data is as follows.

Command settings:
Receive data:

Constant Constant(HEX) (Character)

STX
(02h)

D
(44h)

Constant(HEX)

Device

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

CR
(0Dh)

Since a value of 100 is written to LDR100 at the time of transmission, the data is stored in device LDR220, whichcorresponds to an offset of +100 from LDR120.
Value of Device
LDR120:0000
LDR121:0000
LDR230=100
LDR220:1234h• When data reception is successfully completed, the Completed Device LM102 changes to 1.
• When the value of each bit of address+0 of Status Device LDR130 is 0, reception is completed without an error.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-69

5 User Communication● Example 2This section describes an example of user communication protocol settings for creating the following commands andcommand operations.
• Transmission command for transmitting data using Constant (Hexadecimal), Registering Constant (Character),Device, BCC, Constant (Hexadecimal) command settings when the trigger condition device changes to 1
• Receive command for receiving, processing, and storing data in devices, using Constant (Hexadecimal), Registering
Constant (Character), Skip, Device, BCC, Constant (Hexadecimal) command settings, for data transmitted from anexternal device, when the trigger condition device is 1
■ User Communication Settings dialog box settings
Item

Setting

Protocol Name

Sample 2

Receiving Character Time Out

30 (×100 msec)■ Transmission command: Command Settings dialog box settings
Item

Setting

Comment

TXD command

Command TypeTransmit

Completed Device

LM201

Status Device

LDR220Transmission Wait

0 (×100 msec)

Trigger Condition

While ON, LM200

Command
Data Settings dialog box settings

Constant(Hexadecimal)'05'

Registering
Constant(Character)

10: "AB", 20: "CD", Index Device: LDR200

DeviceNo Conversion, from Upper byte, Number of bytes: 2,
Words: 2
Device: LDR210

BCC

Start Calculation Position: 1, End Calculation Position: 0,
XOR, Binary (HEX) to ASCII, 2 bytes

Constant(Hexadecimal)'0D0A'

Operation for transmission command

1 Write a value of 10 (DEC) to LDR200 for Registering Constant (Character) for transmission command data.
AB is selected.
Index No.
10:
Number of Registering Constants: 2
20:

Transmission data

Data
AB
CD

A
(41h)

Index Device
LDR200=10B(42h)

Order of transmission

2 Write a value of 3132h to LDR210 and 3334h to LDR211 for Device for transmission command data.
3 Change the trigger condition LM200 from 0 to 1 to start command transmission.
The transmission data is as follows.

Command settings:
Transmission data:

Constant
Registering(HEX) Constant (Character)

EQN
(05h)

A
(41h)

B
(42h)

Device

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

BCC

4
(34h)

0
(30h)

2
(32h)

Constant
(HEX)

CR
(0Dh)

LF
(0Ah)

• When data transmission is successfully completed, the Completed Device LM201 changes to 1.
• When the value of each bit of address+0 for Status Device LDR220 is 0, transmission is completed without an error.

22-70

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication■ Receive command: Command Settings dialog box settings
Item

Setting

Comment

RXD command

Command Type

Receive

Completed Device

LM203

Not Clear Completed Device
automaticallyNo

Status Device

LDR260Receiving Time Out

0 (No Receive Time Out)

Trigger Condition

While ON, Device: LM202'02'

Registering
Constant(Character)

10: "AB", 20: "CD", Index Device: LDR230

Skip

2 bytes

DeviceConversion Type: No Conversion, from Upper byte,
Number of bytes: 2, Words: 2
Device: LDR240, Reference Device: LDR230

BCC

Calculation Start Position: 1 Calculation End Position: 0, XOR
Binary (HEX) to ASCII, 2 bytes

Constant(Hexadecimal)'0D''0A'

22
Communication

Command
Data Settings dialog box
settings

Constant(Hexadecimal)

Operation for receive command

1 Change the trigger condition LM202 from 0 to 1 to be ready for receiving user communication.
2 Data is transmitted from the external device and the transmitted data is received and processed.
The receive data is as follows.

Command settings:

Constant
Registering(HEX) Constant (Character)

Receive data:

STX
(02h)

A
(41h)

B
(42h)

Skip

C
(43h)

BCC

Device

D
(44h)

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

0
(30h)

2
(32h)

Constant
(HEX)

CR
(0Dh)

LF
(0Ah)

• The receive data is compared with the character data, and the value of the matching Index No. (10 (DEC)) is stored
in Index Device LDR230.
Received data
A
(41h)

B
(42h)

CompareIndex No.
Number of
10:
Registering
20:
Constants: 2

Data

Value of the Index Device

AB
CD

LDR230:(DEC)

10Order of reception• The 2 bytes (specified with Skip) of the receive command data 43h and 44h are ignored.
• Since the Reference Device LDR 230 of Device of the receive command data is 10 (DEC), the data is stored in thedevice LDR250 and LDR251, which is offset by +10.
Value of Device
LDR240:0000h
LDR241:0000h
LDR230=10
LDR250:3132h• [STX] ABCD1234 is calculated with BCC of receive command data and compared with 3032h.
- When Calculation Start Position is 1 and Calculation End Position is 0: Calculates the range STX ABCD1234.
Calculation Start Position:

Calculation End Position:

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

STX
(02h)

A
(41h)

B
(42h)

C
(43h)

D
(44h)

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

(8)

(7)

(6)

(5)

(4)

(3)

(2)

(1)

(0)

0
(30h)

2
(32h)

CR
(0Dh)

LF
(0Ah)

Data used for BCC calculation- The BCC calculation type is XOR.
02h^41h^42h^43h^44h^31h^32h^33h^34h^=02h

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22-71

5 User Communication- When the BCC calculation result is 0002h, the converted data will be 3032h.
Data
0002h

0
(30h)

2
(32h)

Binary (HEX) to ASCII- When the converted data is 3032h, the data for comparison with the BCC part of the receive data will be 3032h.
Converted data
(Second byte) (First byte)
0
(30h)

2
(32h)

Comparison data

Bytes: 2

0
(30h)

2
(32h)

- The comparison data is compared with the BCC part of the receive data.
In the following receive data, when the comparison data is the 2-byte 3032h, there is a match since the BCC part
data is 3032h.
When there is no match, the BCC Error (address+0, bit 0) of Status Device changes to 1.
Receive data
STX
(02h)

A
(41h)

BCC part
B
(42h)

C
(43h)

D
(44h)

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

0
(30h)

2
(32h)

CR
(0Dh)

LF
(0Ah)

Match
Comparison data
0
(30h)

2
(32h)

• When data reception is successfully completed, the Completed Device LM203 changes to 1.
• When the value of each bit of address+0 for Status Device LDR250 is 0, transmission is completed without an error.

22-72

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

5 User Communication

5.5 Compatible USB Bar Code Readers
The following USB bar code readers can be used with the Touch:
Manufacturer

Type Number
QD2130*1

IDEC DATALOGIC• Set the USB Barcode Reader to USB-KBD(Keyboard) setting.
• The Touch handles the new line code as 0x0A.

5.6 Connection Diagram for User Communication
When connecting an external device to the Touch via user communication, refer to the following connection diagram.

Communication■ Serial interface (RS232C)
External device (RS232C)
Name
Pin No.
FG
RD
SD
SG
-

Shield Wire

Touch
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5

Name
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG

Touch
Pin No.
8
9
6
7
5

Name
RDA(RD+)
RDB(RD-)SDA(SD+)SDB(SD-)
SG■ Serial interface (RS422/485)
External device (RS485/422)
Name
Pin No.
FG
SDA
SDB
RDA
RDB
SG
-

Shield Wire

Terminal

There is no pin No. corresponding to TERM. When a termination resistor is necessary, insert one withsuitable resistance value between pin 8 (RDA) and pin 9 (RDB). For details, refer to Chapter 1 "2 Important
Points Regarding Wiring" in the "External Device Setup Manual".

*1 in selected country only

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

22

22-73

5 User Communication

22-74

SmartAXIS Touch User's ManualChapter 23 Online Function
This chapter describes in detail on how to setup the online function and the operation of the Touch.

1

Communicating with the Touch

1.1 How the Online Function is Used
The online function enables communication with the Touch in WindO/I-NV3. This communication between
WindO/I-NV3 and the Touch, implemented using an exclusive protocol called maintenance communication.
The online function enables the following.
• Write a project data into the Touch.

ComputerTouch

23

Download

Online Function

Project data

When project data is downloaded using the online function, the Alarm Log data, Data Log data, andOperation Log data in the data storage area are deleted. All internal devices except for the HMI Keep
Register (LKR) and HMI Keep Relay (LK) are cleared.
• The following functions can be executed with downloading of project data.
- Download additional fonts.
- Download the runtime system.
- Download recipe files to an External Memory Folder in external memory inserted in the Touch.
- Clear the HMI Keep Register (LKR) and HMI Keep Relay (LK) after download.
- Start running the control functions after download.
• For details on writing project data to an external memory inserted in the computer, refer to Chapter 26“Downloading” on page 26-6.
• Write files to an external memory inserted in the Touch.

ComputerTouch
USB flash drive

Download

Recipe file

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual23-1

1 Communicating with the Touch• Read the project data downloaded to the Touch and then save it to a computer.

Computer
Touch

UploadProject data

• It is possible to upload recipe files from an External Memory Folder in external memory inserted in the
Touch, together with uploading of project data.
• For details on reading project data saved on an external memory using WindO/I-NV3, refer to Chapter 26“Uploading” on page 26-9.
• Delete the data stored in the internal memory or the external memory inserted in the Touch and format theexternal memory inserted in the Touch.

Computer

Touch

Deleting data
USB flash drive

Deleting data
Formatting• Display the information about the runtime system and project data of the Touch.

Computer
Touch

SystemInformation

23-2

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 Communicating with the Touch• Edit a project data in WindO/I-NV3 while checking Touch operation by displaying and changing values of devices
and switching screens using the monitor function.
Touch

ComputerExternal device

Screen monitor

130
LDR1=

0

130

Touch

ComputerExternal device

130

23

Base Screen 1

External device
Tank 1
Full

Base Screen 2

For details about monitor function, refer to Chapter 24 “1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3” on page 24-1.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

23-3

Online Function

Switches to Base Screen 2.

1 Communicating with the Touch

1.2 Connect Touch to a Computer
Connection type varies according to the interface between the Touch and computer.
● USB cable connection
The computer must be running Windows 10/8/7 (64-bit and 32-bit versions), and must have a USB 1.1/2.0 port.
ComputerTouch
To USB port

A plugTo USB interface
USB cable

Mini-B plug

• A USB driver must be installed when connecting the Touch to a computer with a USB cable. Install theUSB driver when making the connection for the first time.
For details, refer to “How to install USB driver”. Click ▼ to the right of theicon at the top rightcorner of the WindO/I-NV3 window and click How to install USB driver to display How to install USB
driver.
• The USB driver does not have to be installed for subsequent connections.
Note, the connection must use the same USB port that was connected to when installing the USB driver.
The computer will not recognize the Touch immediately if the USB cable is connected to a different USB
port.
• Multiple Touch connections using different USB ports on the same computer are not supported.
• The computer cannot be connected to the Touch via a USB hub.

● Ethernet cable connection
The computer must be equipped with an Ethernet port.
ComputerTouch
To Ethernet port

To Ethernet interface

Ethernet cable

It is necessary to configure the Touch according to the local network that is used.
On the Communication Interface tab in the Project Settings dialog box, specify the IP address, subnet
mask, and default gateway, and clear the Forbid Maintenance Communication check box. For details,
refer to Chapter 3 “3.2 Communication Interface Tab” on page 3-27.

23-4

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 Communicating with the Touch

1.3 Change Communication Settings
To communicate with the Touch in WindO/I-NV3, configure the settings such as communication speed and port used
to match the connection method for the Touch.

1 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click Comm.Setup.
The Communication Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Change the settings on each tab as necessary and then click OK.

23
Online Function■ Communicate with
Select the device to communicate with from the following items.
Touch:

Communicate with the Touch connected to the computer.
For details, refer to “Using the online function for Ethernet communication” on page 23-7.
ComputerTouch
USB cable
Ethernet cable

O/I Link Slaves:

Communicate with an O/I Link Slave Touch via an O/I Link Master.
For details, refer to “Using the online function with an O/I Link Slave via an O/I Link Master”
on page 23-8.
Touch

ComputerO/I Link Master

USB cable

Ethernet cable
O/I Link Communication

Read

Write

Touch
O/I Link Slave(Slave 1)

SmartAXIS Touch User's ManualTouch
O/I Link Slave(Slave 2)

Touch
O/I Link Slave(Slave 15)

23-5

1 Communicating with the Touch

External Memory:

Read or write data to the external memory inserted in the Touch connected to the computer.
For details, refer to Chapter 26 “1.4 Reading/Writing Data” on page 26-3.

■ PortSelect the communication port on the computer from the following items.
USB:

Connect the USB port on the computer to the USB interface on the Touch.

Ethernet:

Connect the Ethernet port on the computer to the Ethernet interface on the Touch.
The initial values of the network settings on the Touch are as follows.
IP Address:

192.168.0.1

Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0■ Time Out (min)Specify the time to wait for a response from the Touch (1 minute to 20 minutes).
This option can only be configured when Ethernet is selected for Port.

23-6

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 Communicating with the Touch● Using the online function for Ethernet communication
Select Ethernet under Port on the Target IP Address dialog box.
It is necessary to set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway of the Touch according to the local
network that is used.
For details about Ethernet communication, refer to Chapter 3 “3.2 Communication Interface Tab” on page3-27.
The initial values of the network settings on the Touch are as follows.
IP Address:

192.168.0.1

Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0

To download project data
Click Download in the Download dialog box to display the Target IP Address dialog box.
Specify the Ethernet settings (IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway) for the Touch.

23

Select the Touch IP addresses and you can batch download project data to multiple Touch.

■ Target List
Download to:Shows the current IP address for the Touch to download the project data to.

Set IP Address:

Shows the IP address for the Touch after downloading the project data.

Set Subnet Mask:

Shows the subnet mask for the Touch after downloading the project data.

Set Default Gateway:

Shows the default gateway for the Touch after downloading the project data.

■ Add
Adds a download destination for project data to the list. Click this button to open IP Address Manager. Using
IP Address Manager, specify the Ethernet settings for the Touch to which you are downloading.
■ Delete
Deletes download destinations from the list.
■ Change Settings
Changes the Ethernet settings of the Touch to which you are downloading after project data is downloaded.
Select a download destination from the list, and then click Change Settings to display IP Address Manager. Using
IP Address Manager, specify the Ethernet settings of the Touch after downloading.
Even if the Ethernet settings of the Touch are changed by using the Target IP Address dialog box when
downloading a project, the Ethernet settings in the editing project data are not changed.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

23-7

Online Function

It is also possible to change the Ethernet settings (IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway) of the Touch towhich you are downloading after project data is downloaded.

1 Communicating with the Touch

To execute any function except project data download
The Target IP Address dialog box will be displayed when any of the following functions are executed.
• Upload a project data.
• Upload data from an external memory inserted in the Touch.
• Delete data stored in the internal memory.
• Delete data from or formatting an external memory inserted in the Touch.
• Display information about runtime system and project data.
• Monitor the Touch.
Specifies the IP address of the Touch used for communication.

■ Target IP Address
Specify the IP address for the target Touch to execute this function.
Click

to display IP Address Manager. Specify the IP address for the target Touch with IP Address Manager.

● Using the online function with an O/I Link Slave via an O/I Link MasterSelect O/I Link Slaves under Communicate with on the Communication Settings dialog box.
When a Touch used as an O/I Link Master or O/I Link Slave is connected with a computer, select Touch in
the Communication Settings dialog box.
For details about O/I Link Communication, refer to Chapter 22 “2 O/I Link Communication” on page 22-3.
• The MICRO/I models that can communicate with the Touch using O/I Link Communication are the HG2GS/-5S/-5F, and HG3G/4G.
• During communication with an O/I Link Slave using the online function, O/I Link Master operation is
stopped.
To download project data
Click Download in the Download dialog box to display the Target Slaves dialog box.
Specify the slave station number of the Touch to which you are downloading. You can download project data tomultiple Touchs.
Also, it is possible to change the slave station number the Touch to which you are downloading after project data is
downloaded.

■ TargetSelect slave stations (Slave 1 through Slave 15 of the download target).

23-8

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 Communicating with the Touch■ Set Slave No.
The slave station number of the Touch to which you are downloading is changed after project data is downloaded.
Specifies the new slave station number (1 to 15) applied to the Touch after downloading a project data.
If the slave station number of the Touch is duplicated after downloading, communication is not possible.

Even if the slave station number of the Touch configured in the Target IP Address dialog box when
downloading a project is rewritten, project data remains unchanged during editing.
■ Master IP Address
Specifies the IP address of the O/I Link Master that is used to communicate between the O/I Link Slave and theexternal device.
Clickto display IP Address Manager. Specify the IP address for the O/I Link Master with IP Address Manager.

This option can only be displayed when O/I Link Slave is selected for Communicate with and Ethernet isselected for Port in the Communication Settings dialog box.

23
Online Function

To execute any function except project data download
The Target Slave dialog box will be displayed when any of the following functions are executed.
• Upload project data.
• Upload data from an external memory inserted in the Touch.
• Delete data stored in the internal memory of the Touch.
• Delete data from or format an external memory inserted in the Touch.
• Display information about runtime system and project data.
• Monitor the Touch.
Specifies the O/I Link Slave.

■ Target Slave
Select the slave station number (Slave 1 to Slave 15) that will be the subject of the operation.
■ Master IP Address
Specify the IP address of the O/I Link Master that is used to communicate between the O/I Link Slave and theexternal device.
Clickto display IP Address Manager. Specify the IP address for the O/I Link Master with IP Address Manager.

This option can only be displayed when O/I Link Slave is selected for Communicate with and Ethernet isselected for Port in the Communication Settings dialog box.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual23-9

1 Communicating with the Touch● IP Address Manager
You can register target Ethernet settings for performing online function via Ethernet communication to the projectdata.

■ IP Address List
Ethernet settings registered in the project data are displayed in this list.
IP Address:

Shows the IP address.

Subnet Mask:

Shows the subnet mask.

Default Gateway:

Shows the default gateway.

Comment:

Shows comment.

■ IP AddressEnter the IP address to register in the project data.
■ Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask to register in the project data.
■ Default Gateway
Enter the default gateway to register in the project data.
■ Comment
Enter comment to register in the project data.
■ Add New
Adds IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, and Comment to the list.
■ Delete
Deletes the selected IP address from the list.
■ Select
Closes IP Address Manager, and apply the Ethernet settings selected from the list.

23-10

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Downloading

2

Downloading

2.1 Downloading Project Data to the Touch
1 Change communication settings according to the connection method between the computer and the Touch.
In the Communication Settings dialog box, select Touch from Communicate with. To communicate with the Touchas an O/I Link Slave via an O/I Link Master, select O/I Link Slave. For details, refer to “1.3 Change Communication
Settings” on page 23-5.

2 Open a project to download.
To download a project without opening it, on the Home tab, in the Project group, click the Download
icon. The Open dialog box is displayed. Select a file then click Open. The Download dialog box is displayed.
Proceed to Step 4.
When project data is downloaded to the Touch, the Touch screen data is overwritten.

23
Online Function

3 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the Download icon.
The Download dialog box is displayed.

If the project data was changed, a confirmation message to save the project data is displayed.
• Click OK to save the project data and display the Download dialog box.
• Click Cancel to return to the editing screen without saving the project data.

4 Select data for download under Download Data.

■ All
Download the entire project data.
■ Modified Data Only
Downloads files modified since the previous download.
If download fails, select All to download.
■ Select Files
Download the specified files. Click Browse to display the Open Screens dialog box. Select Screen Type, select thescreen to be downloaded from Screen List and then click OK. The selected screen is added to the list.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual23-11

2 Downloading

5 Click Download.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port to USB, the project data starts downloading.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port to Ethernet, the Target IP Address dialog box is displayed.
Specify the IP address of the Touch, and then click OK to start the download. For details, refer to “To download
project data” on page 23-7.
• When Communicate with is set to O/I Link Slave, the Target Slave dialog box is displayed. Specify the slave
station of the Touch to download to, then click OK to start the download.
If Port is set to Ethernet, specify the IP address of the O/I Link Master via which to download. For details, refer to“To download project data” on page 23-8.
If security is enabled in the Touch project, the Password Screen is displayed. Enter the password.
For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 21-1.

6 Click Yes.
The Download Project dialog box is displayed and the project file starts downloading.
When finished downloading, a completion message is displayed.

7 Click OK.

8 Click Close on the Download Project dialog box.
This concludes downloading project data.

• Do not turn off the Touch while project data is downloading.
• If project data downloading fails and communication is not possible, turn the Touch off and on, thendownload the data once again.
• During communication with an O/I Link Slave using the online function, O/I Link Master operation is
stopped.
For details on writing project data to an external memory inserted in the computer, refer to Chapter 26“Downloading” on page 26-6.

23-12

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Downloading

2.2 Download Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons of the Download dialog box.

23
Online Function■ Communication Settings
Communicate with: Available computer devices are displayed.
Port:

Available communication ports on the computer are displayed.

Change:Changes communication settings. Click this button to display the Communication Settings dialog
box. For details, refer to “1.3 Change Communication Settings” on page 23-5.

■ Download Data
Selects data to be downloaded.
All:

All project data is downloaded.

Modified Data Only: Only files that were updated since the previous download are downloaded.
If an upload fails, select All to download.
Select Files:

Specifies a screen for download.
Browse:The screen to be downloaded is added to the list. Click Browse to display
the Open Screens dialog box. Select Screen Type, then select the screen to
be downloaded from Screen List, and then click OK. The selected screen isthen added to the list.

Specific Data List: Lists the properties of the specified screen
No.:

Displays the Screen No. of the specified screen

Title:

Displays the title of the specified screen

Screen Type: Displays the screen type of the specified screen
File Name:
Options:

Displays the file name of the specified screen

Used for settings to download runtime system and additional fonts. Click to display the Options
dialog box. For details, refer to “Options dialog box” on page 23-15.

■ Automatic start Control Function after download
After project data is downloaded, the ladder program or FBD program starts automatically (M8000 is set to 1).
■ Clear Keep Device
Select this check box to clear Keep Device after the project data is downloaded. Note that when a project data with achanged data storage area setting is downloaded, Keep Device are always cleared.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual23-13

2 Downloading■ Download Recipe Files to External Memory
Select this check box to create a RECIPE folder or recipe files in an External Memory Folder on an external memory
inserted in the Touch when downloading projects. Only on channels for which Save to in the Recipe Settings dialog
box is set to External Memory, and Recipe Function is set to Use.
• When Download Data is set to All, recipe files are created for all channels for which recipe data is set.
• When Download Data is set to Modified Data Only, only recipe files on channels where recipe data haschanged are created.
• When Download Data is set to Select Files, no recipe file is created.
■ Download• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port to USB, the project data starts downloading.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port is set to Ethernet, the Target IP Address dialog box isdisplayed. Specify the IP address of the Touch, and then click OK to start the download. For details, refer to “To
download project data” on page 23-7.
• When Communicate with is set to O/I Link Slave, the Target Slave dialog box is displayed. Specify the slave
station of the Touch to download to, then click OK to start the download.
If Port is set to Ethernet, specify the IP address of the master via which to download. For details, refer to “To
download project data” on page 23-8.
• When Communicate with is set to External Memory, the Select Drive dialog box is displayed. Select theexternal memory drive, then click OK to start the download. For details, refer to “2.3 Downloading Files to an
External Memory Inserted in the Touch” on page 23-16.
• Do not turn off the Touch while project data is downloading.
• If project data downloading fails and communication is not possible, turn the Touch off and on thendownload the data once again.
• During communication with an O/I Link Slave using the online function, O/I Link Master operation is
stopped.
■ CancelStops downloading of project data.

23-14

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Downloading

Options dialog box
Download runtime system and additional fonts.

23■ Download additional fonts
Select this check box to download additional fonts when downloading project data.
If this check box is selected, the following additional fonts can be selected for download to the Touch.
Japanese Large Font (First standard), Japanese Large Font (Second Standard), Chinese, Taiwanese,
Korean, European Large Font, Central European, Baltic, and Cyrillic.
• For details about additional fonts, refer to Chapter 2 “Installed Fonts in the Touch” on page 2-6.
• Clear the Download Additional Fonts check box, to delete all additional fonts that have been
downloaded to the Touch.
• The additional fonts downloaded to the Touch whose check box is cleared will be deleted from the Touch.
Target font size (byte):

Shows the total size of the basic fonts and selected additional fonts.
If no additional fonts are selected for download to the Touch, shows the size ofthe basic fonts.

Downloadable project size (byte):

Shows the amount of project data that can be downloaded. This figure varies
according to the additional fonts selected.

Target Font Information:

Confirms the additional fonts installed on the Touch.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

23-15

Online Function■ Download Runtime system
Select this check box to force download runtime system, irrespective of the runtime system version of the Touch,when downloading project data. Normally this option should not be used.

2 Downloading

2.3 Downloading Files to an External Memory Inserted in the Touch
Specified files can be downloaded to an external memory inserted in the Touch. The files are downloaded to External
Memory Folder specified in the Project Settings dialog box for the current project.

1 Insert the external memory into the Touch.
Touch
USB flash device

2 Change communication settings according to the connection method between the computer and the Touch.
In the Communication Settings dialog box, select Touch from Communicate with. To communicate with the Touchas an O/I Link Slave via an O/I Link Master, select O/I Link Slave. For details, refer to “1.3 Change Communication
Settings” on page 23-5.

3 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the arrow under Download.
While editing project data, even if you click the arrow under Download in the Transfer group on theOnline tab, the download menu will be displayed.

4 Select the method for downloading the file to the external memory.
The Open dialog box is displayed.

■ Files to External Memory
Stops operation of the Touch and downloads the file to the external memory inserted in the Touch. When the filedownload is complete, operation resumes.
■ Files to External Memory while running
Downloads the file to the external memory inserted in the Touch without stopping operation of the Touch.

5 Select the file, and then click Open.

• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port to USB, the project data starts downloading.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port to Ethernet, the Target IP Address dialog box is displayed.
Specify the IP address of the Touch, and then click OK to start the download. For details, refer to “To execute any
function except project data download” on page 23-8.
• When Communicate with is set to O/I Link Slave, the Target Slave dialog box is displayed. Specify the slave
station of the Touch to download to, then click OK to start the download.
If Port is set to Ethernet, specify the IP address of the master via which to download. For details, refer to “To
execute any function except project data download” on page 23-9.
If security is enabled in the Touch project, the Password Screen is displayed. Select the user name andenter the password.
For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 21-1.

23-16

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Downloading

6 Click Yes.
The External Memory Maintenance dialog box is displayed and the file starts downloading.
When finished downloading, a completion message is displayed.

7 Click OK.

23
Online Function

8 Click Close in the External Memory Maintenance dialog box.

During communication with an O/I Link Slave using the online function, O/I Link Master operation is
stopped.
To create a recipe file on an external memory inserted in the computer, use Save Recipe File to External
Memory in the Recipe Settings dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 18 “Creating Recipe Files in the
Recipe Settings Dialog Box” on page 18-17.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual23-17

3 Uploading3

Uploading
Project data in the Touch or in an external memory inserted in a computer can be read using WindO/I-NV3 and saved
to the computer.

3.1 Upload Project Data from the Touch
1 Change communication settings according to the connection method between the computer and the Touch.
In the Communication Settings dialog box, select Touch from Communicate with. To communicate with the Touchas an O/I Link Slave via an O/I Link Master, select O/I Link Slave. For details, refer to “1.3 Change Communication
Settings” on page 23-5.

2 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the Upload icon.
While editing project data, project data can be uploaded from the Touch even by clicking the Upload iconin the Transfer group on the Online tab.

If project data is being edited, project data will be closed. If the project data was changed, a confirmation
message to save the project data is displayed.
• Click Yes to save the project data and display a dialog box corresponding to the communication settings.
• Click No to close the project data without saving changes and display a dialog box corresponding to thecommunication settings.
• Click Cancel to stop uploading and return to the editing screen without saving the project data.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port is set to USB, the Upload dialog box is displayed.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port is set to Ethernet, the Target IP Address dialog box isdisplayed. Specify the IP address of the Touch, and then click OK to start the upload. For details, refer to “To
execute any function except project data download” on page 23-8.
• When Communicate with is set to O/I Link Slave, the Target Slave dialog box is displayed. Specify the slave
station of the Touch to communicate with, and then click OK to display the Upload dialog box.
If Port is set to Ethernet, specify the IP address of the master via which to upload. For details, refer to “To
execute any function except project data download” on page 23-9.
If security is enabled in the Touch project, the Password Screen is displayed. Enter the password.
For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 21-1.

23-18

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Uploading

3 Check the project data details, and then click Upload.
If there is a project file with the same file name in the upload folder, an overwrite confirmation message is displayed.
• Click Yes to start uploading the project data.
• Click Cancel to stop uploading the project data.
When finished uploading, a completion message is displayed.

23

You cannot use the following characters in the project name.
\/:*?"<>|■ Location
The uploaded project file is saved to the currently displayed location. To change the location of the saved file,click. The Save Project After Uploading dialog box is displayed. Select a location, and then click Save.

4 Click OK.

5 Click Close on the Upload dialog box.
A confirmation message to open the project is displayed.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

23-19

Online Function■ Project Name
The project file is saved with the currently displayed name. To change the project name, enter a new name for the
file. The maximum number is 50 characters.

3 Uploading

6 Click OK.
The uploaded project opens.
This concludes uploading of project data.

During communication with an O/I Link Slave using the online function, O/I Link Master operation is
stopped.
For details on reading project data saved on an external memory using WindO/I-NV3, refer to Chapter 26“Uploading” on page 26-9.

23-20

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Uploading

3.2 Upload Dialog Box
This section describes the settings and buttons of the Upload dialog box.

You cannot use the following characters in the project name.
\/:*?"<>|■ Comment
Displays comment on project data downloaded to the Touch.
■ Type Number
Displays the type number selected in project data downloaded to the Touch.
■ Modified
Displays the time that project data downloaded to the Touch was last saved in WindO/I-NV3.
■ Location
Specifies the location for saving uploaded project files.
Click

to display the Save Project After Uploading dialog box. Select the location for saving, then click Save.

■ Upload files used in this project from the External Memory
To upload files located on an external memory inserted in the Touch that are used by the project together withproject data, select the file to be uploaded from the following.
Recipe Files■ UploadStarts uploading of project data.
■ CancelStops uploading of project data.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

23-21

23
Online Function■ Project Name
The project file is saved with the currently displayed name. To change the project name, enter a new name for the
file. The maximum number is 50 characters.

4 Clear

4

Clear
Deletes data from the Touch or from an external memory inserted in the Touch.

4.1 Clear Data from the Touch
1 Change communication settings according to the connection method between the computer and the Touch.
In the Communication Settings dialog box, select Touch from Communicate with. To communicate with the Touchas an O/I Link Slave via an O/I Link Master, select O/I Link Slave. For details, refer to “1.3 Change Communication
Settings” on page 23-5.

2 Open project data.
3 On the Online tab, in the Touch group, click Clear, then click the data to be deleted.

■ All
Deletes project data, Alarm Log data, Data Log data, and Operation Log data. It also clears the HMI Keep Register(LKR) and HMI Keep Relay (LK).
■ Alarm Log Data
Deletes the data collected by the Alarm Log function.
■ Data Log Data
Deletes the data collected by the Data Log function.
■ Operation Log Data
Deletes the data collected by the Operation Log function.
■ Data of all Device Addresses
Clears the data of all device addresses.
■ Stored Data in External Memory
After stopping operation, deletes data saved to an External Memory Folder on an external memory.
Click this to display the Clear Data dialog box. For details, refer to “4.2 Deleting Data from an External Memory
Inserted in the Touch” on page 23-24.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port to USB, deletion of the data starts.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port is set to Ethernet, the Target IP Address dialog box isdisplayed. Specify the IP address of the Touch, and then click OK to start deletion of the data. For details, refer to“To execute any function except project data download” on page 23-8.
• When Communicate with is set to O/I Link Slave, the Target Slave dialog box is displayed. Specify the slave
station of the Touch to communicate with, and then click OK to start deletion of the data.
If Port is set to Ethernet, specify the IP address of the master to be used. For details, refer to “To execute any
function except project data download” on page 23-9.
If security is enabled in the Touch project, the Password Screen is displayed. Enter the password.
For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 21-1.

23-22

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Clear

4 Click Yes.

5 Click Close.
This concludes clearing data.

23
Online Function

During communication with an O/I Link Slave using the online function, O/I Link Master operation is
stopped.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

23-23

4 Clear

4.2 Deleting Data from an External Memory Inserted in the Touch
1 Change communication settings according to the connection method between the computer and the Touch.
In the Communication Settings dialog box, select Touch from Communicate with. To communicate with the Touchas an O/I Link Slave via an O/I Link Master, select O/I Link Slave. For details, refer to “1.3 Change Communication
Settings” on page 23-5.

2 Open project data.
3 On the Online tab, in the Touch group, click Clear, then click Stored Data in External Memory.
The Clear Data dialog box is displayed.

4 Select the check box for the data items to be deleted from the External Memory Folder.
Alarm Log Data, Data Log Data, Operation Log Data, and Recipe Files

5 Click OK.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port to USB, deletion of the data starts.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port is set to Ethernet, the Target IP Address dialog box isdisplayed. Specify the IP address of the Touch, and then click OK to start deletion of the data. For details, refer to“To execute any function except project data download” on page 23-8.
• When Communicate with is set to O/I Link Slave, the Target Slave dialog box is displayed. Specify the slave
station of the Touch to communicate with, and then click OK to start deletion of the data.
If Port is set to Ethernet, specify the IP address of the master to be used. For details, refer to “To execute any
function except project data download” on page 23-9.
If security is enabled in the Touch project, the Password Screen is displayed. Enter the password.
For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 21-1.

23-24

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

4 Clear

6 Click Yes.

7 Click Close.
This concludes clearing data on the external memory.

23
Online Function

During communication with an O/I Link Slave using the online function, O/I Link Master operation is
stopped.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

23-25

5 Formatting

5

Formatting
Stops operation of the Touch and formats an external memory inserted in the Touch.

5.1 Formatting an External Memory Inserted in the Touch
1 Change communication settings according to the connection method between the computer and the Touch.
If communicating with a Touch inserted in a computer, in the Communication Settings dialog box, select Touch from
Communicate with. To communicate with the Touch as an O/I Link Slave via an O/I Link Master, selectO/I Link Slave. For details, refer to “1.3 Change Communication Settings” on page 23-5.

2 Open project data.
3 On the Online tab, in the Touch group, click Format.

• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port is set to USB, a formatting confirmation message isdisplayed.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port is set to Ethernet, the Target IP Address dialog box isdisplayed. Specify the IP address of the Touch, and then click OK to display the formatting confirmation message.
For details, refer to “To execute any function except project data download” on page 23-8.
• When Communicate with is set to O/I Link Slave, the Target Slave dialog box is displayed. Specify the slave
station of the Touch to communicate with, and then click OK to display the formatting confirmation message.
If Port is set to Ethernet, specify the IP address of the master to be used. For details, refer to “To execute any
function except project data download” on page 23-9.
If security is enabled in the Touch project, the Password Screen is displayed. Enter the password.
For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 21-1.

4 Click Yes.

5 Click Close.
This concludes formatting the external memory.

During communication with an O/I Link Slave using the online function, O/I Link Master operation is
stopped.

23-26

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

6 System Information

6

System Information
Displays information about the runtime system and downloaded project data of the Touch.
This function can be used to show information about project data during editing and to simultaneously check detailsof project data downloaded to the Touch.

6.1 Displaying System Information
1 Change communication settings according to the connection method between the computer and the Touch.
If communicating with a Touch inserted in a computer, in the Communication Settings dialog box, select Touch from
Communicate with. To communicate with the Touch as an O/I Link Slave via an O/I Link Master, selectO/I Link Slave. For details, refer to “1.3 Change Communication Settings” on page 23-5.

2 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click Target Info..

23• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port is set to USB, the System Information dialog box isdisplayed.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port is set to Ethernet, the Target IP Address dialog box isdisplayed. Specify the IP address of the Touch, and then click OK to display the System Information dialog box. For
details, refer to “To execute any function except project data download” on page 23-8.
• When Communicate with is set to O/I Link Slave, the Target Slave dialog box is displayed. Specify the slave
station of the Touch to communicate with, and then click OK to display the System Information dialog box.
If Port is set to Ethernet, specify the IP address of the master to be used. For details, refer to “To execute any
function except project data download” on page 23-9.
If security is enabled in the Touch project, the Password Screen is displayed. Enter the password.
For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 21-1.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

23-27

Online Function

While editing project data, information about runtime system and project data can be displayed even byclicking Target Info. in the Touch group on the Online tab.

6 System Information

3 Check information about the runtime system and project data.

• To check the additional fonts installed on the Touch, click Font Information. The Font Information
dialog box is displayed. For details, refer to “Font Information Dialog Box” on page 23-30.
• To check information about the external memory inserted in the Touch, click External Memory
Information. The External Memory Information dialog box is displayed. For details, refer to “External
Memory Information Dialog Box” on page 23-30.

4 When you have finished checking the information, click OK.
5 Click Close.
This concludes checking system information.

During communication with an O/I Link Slave using the online function, O/I Link Master operation is
stopped.

23-28

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

6 System Information

6.2 Target Information Dialog Box
This section describes the settings and buttons of the Target Information dialog box.

23
Online Function■ Target Runtime Information
Product Series:

Shows the type number of Touch

Runtime Version:

Shows the runtime system version of the Touch.

Memory Space (byte): Shows the maximum amount of project data (bytes) that can be downloaded to the Touch.
Font Information:

Checks the additional fonts currently installed on the Touch. Click this button to display the
Font Information dialog box. For details, refer to “Font Information Dialog Box” on page 2330.

External Memory Information: Checks the state of an external memory inserted in the Touch, its total capacity,
available capacity, and used capacity. Click this button to display the External Memory
Information dialog box. For details, refer to “External Memory Information Dialog Box”
on page 23-30.
■ Target Project Information
Project Name:

Shows the project name of projects downloaded to the Touch.

Modified Date:

Displays the time that project data downloaded to the Touch was last saved in WindO/I-NV3.

Project Version:

Displays the version of WindO/I-NV3 used to create the project data downloaded to the
Touch.

External Device Manufacturer: Displays the external device manufacturer configured in the project downloaded to the
Touch.
Protocol:Displays the communication driver configured in the project downloaded to the Touch.

Driver Version:

Displays the version of the communication driver.

■ Opened Project Information
Project Name:

Shows the project name of the project being edited.

Modified Date:

Displays the time that the project being edited was last saved in WindO/I-NV3.

Version Number:

Displays the version of WindO/I-NV3 used to create the project being edited.

This function can be used to show information about a project that is being edited and simultaneously checkinformation about project data downloaded to the Touch.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

23-29

6 System Information

Font Information Dialog Box
This dialog box is used to check the state of installed additional fonts.

The installation status of each additional font is shown to the right of the font. The following additional fonts can beinstalled.
• Japanese Large Font (First standard)• Japanese Large Font (Second standard)• Chinese• Taiwanese• Korean• European Large Font
• Central European• Baltic• Cyrillic
External Memory Information Dialog Box
Checks the state of an external memory inserted in the Touch, its total capacity, available capacity, and usedcapacity.

23-30

State:

Shows the state of the external memory inserted in the Touch.

Memory Capacity:Shows the total capacity (bytes) of the external memory inserted in the Touch.

Free Space:Shows how much of the capacity (bytes) of the external memory inserted in the Touch iscurrently available for use.

Used Space:Shows how much of the capacity (bytes) of the external memory inserted in the Touch iscurrently in use.

SmartAXIS Touch User's ManualChapter 24 Monitor Function
This chapter describes the monitor function that checks operation of the created project data.
Monitor function enables the values of internal devices and the values of external devices to be checked and changed.
This can be done in two ways: using WindO/I-NV3 on a computer connected to the Touch, or directly on the screenof the Touch.

1

Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3

1.1 How the Monitor Function in WindO/I-NV3 is Used
Monitor function in WindO/I-NV3 can be performed as follows.
• Checking values of devices used on the screen of the Touch

Computer

Touch
LDR1

Screen Monitor

External device

24

130

Monitor Function

LM0
LM0

LDR1
Displays device addresses used in a screen.

• Checking values of specified devices

Computer

Touch

External device

Custom Monitor

130
Select device address• Checking values of devices of sequential addresses

Computer

Touch

External device

Batch Monitor

130

Sequential addresses(Starting address)
LM0
Length: 3 LM1

LM2

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual24-1

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3• Checking the state of external devices connected to the Touch

Computer

Touch

External device
Connect

External Device Monitor

130
Station
No. 0

StationNo. 1

Station No. 0
External device
Disconnect

Station No. 1• Displaying the value of device in a popup
Object List window

Script Editor

Popup
Popup

• Highlighting objects while satisfying conditions

Trigger Condition
While satisfying the condition: LM0==1

Not satisfied
Condition

LM0 =Satisfied

Highlighted

Condition

24-2

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual01

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3• Switching to the screen of the Touch
Touch

ComputerExternal device

130
Base Screen 1

Switches to Base Screen 2.
External device
Tank 1
Full

Base Screen 2

24• Opening current screen

External device

Tank 1Full

Click
Base Screen 2
Opens toBase Screen 2.
External device
Tank 1
Full

Base Screen 2

Monitor function in WindLDR can be performed as follows.
• Monitoring the ladder programrefer to Chapter 12 “Monitor Operation” on page 12-12• Monitoring the FBD programrefer to Chapter 12 “Monitor Operation” on page 12-38

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

24-3

Monitor Function

Touch

Computer1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3

1.2 Debugging in WindO/I-NV3
This section describes the procedure for monitoring values of devices and debugging in WindO/I-NV3.

1 Change the communication setting to match the connection method between computer and Touch.
For details, refer to Chapter 23 “1.3 Change Communication Settings” on page 23-5.

2 On the Online tab, in the Monitors group, click Start Monitor.
The Touch switches to monitor mode and Monitor Mode is displayed at the bottom left of the screen.

If a password has been configured for the project data, the Enter Password screen will be displayed. Enterthe password. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 21-1.

3 On the Online tab, in the Monitors group, click the following button or enter the number to the text box to switch
the screen displayed on the Touch to the Monitor screen.

■■(Back)
You are returned to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before the screen was switched.
(Forward)
Advances to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before the screen was switched using(Back).

■(First Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of the lowest screen number in the project data.

■(Previous Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of screen number one lower than the Base Screen currently displayed. If the screen
numbers are not sequential, switches to the screen of next lowest number.

■(Specified Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen with the specified number.

■(Next Screen)
Switches to the screen with screen number one higher than the Base Screen currently displayed. If the screen
numbers are not consecutive, switches to the screen of next highest number.

■(Last Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of highest screen number in the project data.

4 On the Online tab, in the Monitors group, click Open Current Screens.
The screen displayed on Touch opens in the editing window.

24-4

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3

5 On the Online tab, in the Monitors group, select the monitor being used.
When monitoring starts, the screen monitor is displayed.

■ Screens
Automatically checks device addresses used on the screen displayed on the Touch. For details, refer to “Screen
Monitor” on page 24-6.
■ Object List
Displays values of devices in a popup on the Object List window. It also highlights objects while satisfying
conditions. For details, refer to “1.3 Display the Value of Device in Popup” on page 24-16, and “1.4 Highlighting
Objects While Satisfying Conditions” on page 24-16.
■ CustomRegisters monitored devices individually and displays the value of devices. For details, refer to “Custom Monitor” onpage 24-7.

■ External Devices
Displays the state of external devices connected to the Touch. For details, refer to “External Device Monitor” on page
24-15.

6 Check operation of project data by monitoring and changing values of devices, and edit project data if there is anerror.

If the monitored screen is switches, repeat steps 3 through 4.

7 Download the edited project data to the Touch.
To reflect edits made during debugging, it is necessary to perform a download.

8 On the Online tab, in the Monitors group, click Stop Monitor.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

24-5

Monitor Function■ BatchRegisters monitored devices as a batch for sequential addresses and displays the value of devices. For details, refer to“Batch Monitor” on page 24-14.

24

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3● Screen Monitor
Automatically displays device addresses used on the screen displayed on the Touch. Enables values of devices to bemonitored and changed.

■ Device Address
Displays the device addresses used on the screen displayed on the Touch.
next to Comment toggles between showing and hiding comments. When comments are displayed, click
display a popup menu, then click Comment and select the check box.
■ Comment
Displays comments on device addresses saved in Tag Editor. Comments are displayed only after you click
Device Address to display a popup menu, then click Comment and select the check box.

tonext to■ Value
Displays the current value of device address in decimal format. To change a value, double-click a cell and then specify
a value.
The value range depends on the data type. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
Click
to toggle display of HEX and BIN format. To display HEX and BIN values, clickthen click HEX and BIN and select the check box.

to display a popup menu,■ Hexadecimal, Binary
Displays the current value of device address in hexadecimal and binary format. To change a value, double-click a celland then specify a value.
The value range depends on the data type. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
Comments are displayed only after you click
BIN check box.

next to Value to display a popup menu and then select the HEX and■ Data Type
Selects the data type of the selected value. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
• The values of device addresses configured as write-only, such as destination device address for bit
buttons, cannot be monitored. “????” is displayed in this case.
• If BIN32, BCD8, or float32 is selected from Data Type for the address of highest number, the values
stored in the device address are displayed repeatedly.
• If BIN32, BCD8, or float32 is selected from Data Type, sequential addresses (lower word to upper
word) are used.

24-6

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3● Custom Monitor
Enables the values of registered device addresses to be monitored and changed.

Click this button to display the Device List Name Setting dialog box. For details, refer to “Saving Registered Device
Addresses to Project Data as a Custom Monitor List” on page 24-10.
■ Device
Registers the device addresses to monitor individually.
Click this button to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “Registering the device
addresses to monitor individually” on page 24-8.
■ Script
Batch saves all device addresses used in a script.
Click this button to display Script Manager. For details, refer to “Batch Saving Device Addresses Used in Scripts” onpage 24-9.
■ Import
Imports the device addresses from a device list saved as a CSV text file.
Click this button to display the Open dialog box. For details, refer to “Importing Devices from a Device List” on page24-12.
■ Export
Saves the device addresses displayed in Monitor as a CSV text file. This file is called a Device List.
Click this button to display the Save As dialog box. For details, refer to “Saving a Custom Monitor List as a CSV File”
on page 24-11.
The saved device list can be imported using Import.
■ Clear
Deletes all the device addresses displayed in Monitor.
■ ListDisplays a custom monitor list saved with the project data.
Select a list to clear the device addresses shown in Monitor and display the device addresses in the list.
Double-click a cell to display the Device List Name Setting dialog box. The name of the custom monitor list can beedited.
Select a list and press DELETE to delete it from the List.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

24-7

24
Monitor Function■ Add to List
Saves device addresses registered in Monitor to project data as a custom monitor list. A saved lists can be monitored
by selecting it from the List.

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3■ Monitor
The registered device addresses are displayed in a list.
Select the custom monitor list from the List to show the device addresses registered in the list.
Device Address:

The registered device addresses are displayed.
Double-click a cell to register or change a device address. Clickto display the Device
Address Settings dialog box. For details on how to configure device address settings, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.
toggles between showing and hiding comments. When comments are displayed, click
display a popup menu, then click Comment and select the check box.

Comment:

Displays comments on device addresses saved in Tag Editor. Comments are displayed only
after you clicknext to Device Address to display a popup menu, then click Commentand select the check box.

Value:

Displays the current value of device address in decimal format. To change a value, doubleclick a cell and then enter a value.

to

The value range depends on the data type. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data”
on page 2-1.
Click
to toggle display of HEX and BIN format. To display HEX and BIN values, click
display a popup menu, then click HEX and BIN and select the check box.

to

Hexadecimal, Binary: Displays the current value of device address in hexadecimal and binary format. To change avalue, double-click a cell and then specify a value.
The value range depends on the data type. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data”
on page 2-1.
Comments are displayed only after you clickthen select the HEX and BIN check box.
Data Typenext to Value to display a popup menu andSelects the data format of the displayed value. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available
Data” on page 2-1.

• If BIN32, BCD8, or float32 is selected from Data Type for the address of highest number, the values
stored in the device address are displayed repeatedly.
• If BIN32, BCD8, or float32 is selected from Data Type, sequential addresses (lower word to upper
word) are used.

Registering the device addresses to monitor
Registering the device addresses to monitor individually
Click Device. Or, double-click a cell under Device Address in Monitor, and then click.

The Device Address Settings dialog box is displayed. For details on configuring device address settings, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

24-8

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3

Batch Saving Device Addresses Used in Scripts

1 Click Script.
Script Manager is displayed.

24

2 Select the script ID of the script for the device address to be batch-saved, and then click Select.

Monitor Function

All the device addresses used by the script are registered.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual24-9

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3

Saving Registered Device Addresses to Project Data as a Custom Monitor List
If registered device addresses are saved with project data as a list, then even when the project data is later
reopened, the device addresses can be called from the List to be reutilized.

1 Click Add to List.
The Device List Name Setting dialog box is displayed.

2 Enter a name for the custom monitor list.
The maximum number is 40 characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
The following characters cannot be used for names of custom monitor list.
\/:*?"<>|

3 Click OK.
The custom monitor list is added to the List.

4 Saving project data.
If a project file is closed without saving, custom monitor lists will not be saved with the project data.

24-10

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3

Saving a Custom Monitor List as a CSV File
To use a custom monitor list (registered devices list) in another project, save it as a CSV text file. This file is called a
Device List.

1 Click Export.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.

24
Monitor Function

2 Select Save in, enter a File name, and then click Save.

This concludes saving device list.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

24-11

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3

Importing Devices from a Device List
Imports the device addresses from a device list saved as a CSV text file into custom monitor.

1 Click Import.
The Device List dialog box is displayed.

2 Click.

The Open dialog box is displayed.

3 Select a saved device list, and then click Open.
The device addresses are listed.

24-12

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3

4 Click the device address to import.
To select multiple items of text, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

5 Click OK.
If there is an already registered device address on the Custom Monitor, an overwrite confirmation message isdisplayed.

24
Monitor Function• Click Yes to overwrite the device address displayed in the confirmation message.
• Click Yes To All to overwrite all the device addresses.
• Click No to display the next confirmation message without overwriting the device address displayed in theconfirmation message.
• Click Cancel to stop importing device addresses.
The device is added to Monitor.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

24-13

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3● Batch Monitor
Displays sequential addresses as a batch.

(Monitor)■ TargetSelect Touch or External Devices from the device addresses that include the device addresses to be set.
■ Station No.
Specify the station number of the external device. The range of possible settings can be varies according to theselected communication drivers.
This option can only be configured when 1:N Communication is selected under Connection in the SelectCommunication Driver dialog box or the Change Communication Driver dialog box.
■ Device Type
Selects the device type.
The list only shows device types that can be used.
■ Address
Specify the address. The range that can be set varies based on the device type selected.
■ Bit
Specify the bit (0 to 15) of the word device when a word device is selected in Device.
■ Length
Specifies the number of device addresses displayed in the list (Bit of the word device specification: 1 to 16, Other
than above: 1 to 1000).
■ Data Type
Selects the data format of the displayed value. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ (Monitor)
Automatically displays the selected device addresses, in the number specified under Length, from top to bottom,
consecutively.
Device Address:

The specified device addresses are displayed.
toggles between showing and hiding comments. When comments are displayed, click
display a popup menu, then click Comment and select the check box.

Value:

Displays the current value of device address in decimal format. To change a value, doubleclick a cell and then specify a value.
The value range depends on the data type. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data”
on page 2-1.
Click
to toggle display of HEX and BIN format. To display HEX and BIN values, click
display a popup menu, then click HEX and BIN and select the check box.

24-14

to

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manualto1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3

Hexadecimal, Binary: Displays the current value of device address in hexadecimal and binary format. To change avalue, double-click a cell and then specify a value.
The value range depends on the data type. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data”
on page 2-1.
Comments are displayed only after you clickthen select the HEX and BIN check box.

next to Value to display a popup menu and• If BIN32, BCD8, or float32 is selected from Data Type for the address of highest number, the values
stored in the device address are displayed repeatedly.
• If BIN32, BCD8, or float32 is selected from Data Type, sequential addresses (lower word to upper
word) are used.

● External Device Monitor
Displays the state of external devices connected to the Touch.
Can be used only for 1:N communication devices.

24(Connection status)(Station No.)device (), communication is stopped.

Clicking the external device icon enables switching between connection and disconnection.
■ (Station No.)
Displays the station number of all external devices used in the project.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

24-15

Monitor Function■ (Connection status)
Displays the state of external devices connected to the Touch. If a red cross appears over the icon of an external

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3

1.3 Display the Value of Device in Popup
During monitoring, mousing over device addresses displayed in the Object List window or device addresses in ascript opened in Script Editor displays the current value in a popup window.
• Object List window• Script Editor• Popup viewing of values of devices in the Object List window works only if the screen displayed in the
Object List window matches the screen displayed on the Touch.
• Popup viewing of values of devices in Script Editor works only if the script during editing is being used bya global script command or a script command on the screen displayed on the Touch.
• The maximum number for popup window is 80 characters. Any characters entered after the 80th will not
be displayed.
• If 65 or more device addresses are displayed in the Object List window, monitor refreshing and popup
message will slow down.

1.4 Highlighting Objects While Satisfying Conditions
When the Trigger Condition is satisfied during monitoring, the objects for which conditions are being satisfied arehighlighted in the Object List window.

24-16

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3

1.5 Switching the Screen of the Touch
During monitoring, it is possible to switch to the screen displayed on the Touch using a WindO/I-NV3 command.

■■(Back)
You are returned to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before the screen was switched.
(Forward)
Advances to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before the screen was switched using the(Back).

(First Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen with the lowest screen number in the project data.

■(Previous Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of screen number one lower than the Base Screen currently displayed. If the screen
numbers are not consecutive numbers, this command switches to the closest number.

■(Specified Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of a specified number.

■(Next Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of screen number one higher than the Base Screen currently displayed. If the screen
numbers are not consecutive numbers, switches to the closest number.

■(Last Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of highest screen number in the project data.

1.6 Open Current Screens
To automatically open the screen displayed on the Touch during monitoring and put it into an active state, click OpenCurrent Screens.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

24-17

24
Monitor Function■

2 Monitoring on the Touch

2

Monitoring on the Touch
It is possible to change values of devices and check the operation on the Touch, without connecting to a computer.

2.1 How the Monitoring Function is Used
Monitoring in the Touch can perform the following functions.
• Checking and changing the value of specified device
Touch





• Checking ladder program
Touch

00001
IMOV
N

I0000
00002
M0001

D0000
-01
ESC

24-18

OK

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Monitoring on the Touch

2.2 Device Monitor
By registering device addresses in Run Mode, both data monitoring and changing can be conducted. Registereddevice addresses are listed in Device Monitor in ascending order (A to Z, 0 to 9). Registered device addresses are
saved until power to the Touch is turned OFF, or the mode is changed.
• Available device address range depends on types and settings of external devices. Selecting unavailable
device address, “Communication error” happens and it can not be back in without reboot. For details,
refer to Chapter 30 “1.1 Errors Displayed on the Screen” on page 30-1.
• If three Popup Screens are displayed on the screen (or if two Popup Screens are displayed in the Alarm
Log Settings), in order to use Device Monitor in the same way on Popup Screens, the Device Monitor
cannot be used.

● Displaying Device Monitor

1 Press the upper-left corner of the screen on the Touch for three seconds or more.
The Maintenance Screen is displayed.

24

Touch

Monitor Function

Press and hold threeor more seconds

2 Press Device Monitor.
Device Monitor is displayed.

If a password has been configured for the project data, the Enter Password screen will be displayed. Selecta user name and then enter a password. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security
Function” on page 21-1.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

24-19

2 Monitoring on the Touch● Device Address Registration

1 Press Select on Device Monitor.
The Select Device screen is displayed.

Dec/Hex

2 Press Up or Dwn to select the device type.

The next address of the device address entered previously is automatically displayed in the Select Device
screen.

3 Enter the address and then press ENT.
• Press CLR to clear all values entered for the address.
• Press CAN to stop registering devices.

• If a device address is invalid, pressing ENT will not return to Device Monitor.
• For 1:N communication, : is displayed. Enter the station number as a 2-digit hexadecimal value. Press :,specify the station number and then enter the address.
• Control device addresses are displayed on Device Monitor with a # before the device type.
Example:When setting D100
Device Monitor: #D100
Ladder Monitor: D100

The device address is registered to Device Monitor.

Dec/Hex

4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to register all device addresses to be monitored.

24-20

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Monitoring on the Touch● Changing Value of Device

1 Press Up or Down to select the device to be changed the value.

Dec/Hex

2 Press Data on Device Monitor.
The Write Data screen is displayed.

Dec/Hex24

Monitor Function

3 Press Dec/Hex to switch the display type for values of devices.
Switches between DEC and HEX.

Dec/Hex

4 Enter the value of device and press ENT.
• Press CLR to delete the entered value of device.
• Press CAN to stop entering the value of device.

Dec/Hex• If a value of device is invalid, pressing ENT will not return you to Device Monitor.
• If the display type is decimal, A to F cannot be used.
The value of device is changed.

Dec/HexSmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

24-21

2 Monitoring on the Touch● Device Monitor Configuration
Title barMove button

Close button
Dec/Hex(Device Address)(Value)(Focus)■ Title Bar
Displays the title,(Move) button, and(Close) button.

(Move) button:

Moves the Device Monitor.

(Close) button:

Closes the Device Monitor.

■ Dec/Hex
Switches the display type for the current value of device. Switches between DEC and HEX.
■ (Device Address)
The registered device address is displayed.
■ (Value)
The current value of device is displayed.
■ (Focus)
Highlights the selected device address.
■▲
Moves the focus up by one line.
■▼
Moves the focus down by one line.
■ DataChanges the value of the selected device address. Press to display the Write Data Screen. For details, refer to“Changing Value of Device” on page 24-21.
■ Del
Deletes the selected device address.
■ Select
Registers a selected device address. Press to display the Select Device Screen. For details, refer to “Device Address
Registration” on page 24-20.

24-22

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Monitoring on the Touch

2.3 Ladder Monitor
This function displays the ladder program along with execution states. This enables you to visually understand thestates of the ladder program. The Ladder Monitor can only be used when ladder program is selected as the
programming language for control function. For details, refer to Chapter 2 "Ladder Program Monitoring on the
SmartAXIS" in the "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual".
● Displaying Ladder Monitor
Use the Goto Screen Button, the Goto Screen Command, or the follow method to display the Ladder Monitor.

1 Press the upper-left corner of the screen on the Touch for 3 seconds or more.
The Maintenance Screen is displayed.

Touch
Press and hold threeor more seconds

2 Press Ladder Monitor.

The select line screen is displayed.

24

3 Press Last Monitored Line or Go To ....

Select Last Monitored Line to display the Ladder Monitor and start the monitor from the last monitored line.
Select Go To ... to display the Go To screen. Enter the desired line and press
to display the Ladder Monitor andstart the monitor from the specified line.
When the following operations are performed, Last Monitored Line is reset to the first line of the ladderprogram.
• The power is turned on.
• The project is downloaded.

● Moving the focus

1 The Ladder Monitor is displayed.

Use the Goto Screen Button, the Goto Screen Command, or the Maintenance Screen to display the Ladder Monitor.

2 Press, ↑ , , andto move the focus to the desired position.
Press and hold to repeatedly move the focus.
↑↑↑● Displaying instruction parameters

1 The Ladder Monitor is displayed.
↑

, ↑,

, and

↑

2 Press↑

Use the Goto Screen Button, the Goto Screen Command, or the Maintenance Screen to display the Ladder Monitor.
to move the focus to the desired instruction.

3 Press.
The detailed information screen is displayed.

4 Press.
Closes the detailed information screen.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

24-23

Monitor Function

If a password has been configured for the project data, the Enter Password screen will be displayed. Selecta user name and then enter a password. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security
Function” on page 21-1.

2 Monitoring on the Touch● Ladder Monitor Configuration
Touch
Focus

00001
IMOV
N

I0000

Display

00002
M0001

D0000
-01

Operation buttons

ESC

OK

■ Display
This area displays the ladder program and the parameters for the instructions.
Ladder program: Displays the ladder program used by the running project.
Up to five symbols can be displayed per line.
Example:Line No.

Symbol

Focus

I0000

MOV

00001

00002
M0000 M0001 M0002 M0003 M0004

Device addresses
or instructions

Line No.:Shows the ladder program line number.

Symbol:Shows the instruction symbol.

Focus:

Displays the selected instruction with the colors reversed.

Device addresses or instructions:
The LOD, LODN, OUT, OUTN, SET, RST, AND, ANDN, OR, and ORN instructions
display the device address under the symbol. The displayed device addresses are as
follows.
"Device type (one character)" + "Address (four characters)" (+ "Bit position (twocharacters)")
For details, refer to Chapter 27 “1.2 Control Device Addresses” on page 27-4 andChapter 27 “2.2 Control Device Addresses” on page 27-12.
MCS, MCR, JMP, END, LABEL, LJMP, LCAL, and LRET instructions are displayed in one
line on the screen.
The instructions other than those listed above display the instruction name under
up to a maximum of five characters.
Details of the following instructions can be displayed in the details screen:
Basic instructions:

LOD, LODN, OUT, OUTN, SET, RST, AND, ANDN, OR, ORN, TML, TIM, TMH, TMS,
TMLO, TIMO, TMHO, TMSO, CNT, CDP, CUD, CNTD, CDPD, CUDD, SFR, SFRN, CC=,
CC>=, DC=, DC>=

Move instructions:

MOV, MOVN, IMOV, IMOVN, IBMV, IBMVN

Binary arithmetic instructions:
ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, INC, DEC, ROOT, SUM

24-24

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Monitoring on the Touch

Details:

Displays detailed information for the selected instruction. Select an instruction on the ladderprogram and press

to display. The displayed content varies based on the instruction.

Example:Instruction

OPCODE: MOV (W)S1 -: D0000 = 1234
D1 R: D0123 = 1234
REP : 03/99

Label

Parameter

Label:

Data typeShows the name and data type of the instruction.
Instruction:
Data type:Shows the instruction name up to a maximum of 5 characters.
Shows the data type. The displayed data types are as follows.
W (word), I (integer), D (double word), L (long), F (float)

Parameter: Shows the configuration details for the instruction.

24: Moves the focus left by one line.

↑:

Monitor Function↑: Moves the focus right by one line.

↑■ Operation button

Moves the focus up by one line.

: Moves the focus down by one line.
: Toggles the contact state for the selected NO contact or NC contact.
Press and hold to display the detailed information for the instruction with focus.
: The operation varies based on the content displayed in the display.
Ladder program:

Closes the Ladder Monitor.

Details:

Closes the detailed information screen.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

24-25

↑

2 Monitoring on the Touch

24-26

SmartAXIS Touch User's ManualChapter 25 Data Transfer Function
This chapter describes the Project Transfer function to upload and download project data to the Touch using external
memory.
The function to exchange data using external memory is generically referred to as the Data Transfer function.

1

Project Transfer Function

1.1 How the Project Transfer Function is Used
The project transfer function uploads or downloads project data between the Touch and an external memory inserted
in the Touch.
● Download project data saved on an external memory to the Touch. However, you must create project

data for transfer.
Computer

Touch
Create Project Filefor Transfer

USB flash drive
Download

25
Data Transfer Function

Project File(ZNV Format)

Project File(ZNV Format)● Upload the project data used for operation on the Touch and save it to an external memory.
Touch
USB flash drive
UploadProject File(ZNV Format)

When using the project transfer function and a project file is uploaded, the project file name is “project
name + file extension (.ZNV)”.

1.2 Project Data Transfer Procedures
The following methods can be used to upload or download project data between the Touch and an external memory
inserted in the Touch.
• Using the USB Autorun function
 For details, refer to Chapter 26 “2 USB Autorun Function” on page 26-18.
• Using Key Buttons, Multi-Buttons, or Multi-commands
 For details, refer to “1.4 Using Key Buttons, Multi-Buttons, or Multi-Commands to Transfer Project Data” onpage 25-5.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual25-1

1 Project Transfer Function

1.3 Converting Project Data for Transfer
Project data must be converted to dedicated data for transfer in order to download project data to the Touch using
the project transfer function.
Use the following procedure to create project data for transfer using an external memory.

1 Insert a USB flash drive in the computer's USB port.
ComputerUSB flash drive
To USB Port2 Open the project data to transfer using WindO/I-NV3.
3 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the Download icon.
The Download dialog box is displayed.

When the project data has not been saved after it was opened, a save confirmation message is displayed.
Click OK to save the project data and display the Download dialog box.
Click Cancel to return to the editing screen without saving the project data.

4 Check that Communication Settings is External Memory, and then click Download.
The Select Drive dialog box is displayed.

1. If Communication Settings is not External Memory, click Change.
The Communication Settings dialog box is displayed.
2. Select External Memory for Communicate with, and then click OK.

25-2

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Project Transfer Function

5 Specify the drive for the USB flash drive, and then click OK.
A continue download confirmation message is displayed.

■ Drive
Specify the drive assigned to the external memory.
■ Network
Displays the Network Drive Assignment dialog box. You can specify a drive on the network.
■ External Memory Folder
Specify the folder where the project data is to be downloaded.
Click
to display the Project Settings dialog box. You can specify an External Memory Folder as the download
destination.

6 Click Yes.
The Download dialog box is displayed and the project data is now being saved.

25

When this process is complete, a message is displayed.

Data Transfer Function

7 Click OK.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual25-3

1 Project Transfer Function

8 Click Close on the Download Project dialog box.
The project data for transfer is created in the External Memory Folder on an external memory.

For details about the created data folder and file structure, refer to Chapter 26 “External Memory Devices”
on page 26-1.

If the folder or file structure on the External Memory Folder is modified, the Touch and WindO/I-NV3 will
not be usable.

25-4

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

1 Project Transfer Function

1.4 Using Key Buttons, Multi-Buttons, or Multi-Commands to Transfer Project Data

Allocate a Key Button, Multi-Button, or Multi-Command configured with the project transfer function to the
Touch.
 For details, refer to Chapter 7 “4 Key Button” on page 7-49.
 For details, refer to Chapter 7 “5 Multi-Button” on page 7-68.
 For details, refer to Chapter 11 “5 Multi-Command” on page 11-31.
● Download

1 Create a project file for transfer (.ZNV) and save it on a USB flash drive.
For details, refer to “1.3 Converting Project Data for Transfer” on page 25-2.

2 Insert a USB flash drive in the Touch.
Touch
USB flash drive

Transfer on the Key Browser.

● Upload

1 Insert a USB flash drive in the Touch.
Touch
USB flash drive

2 Press the Key Button or Multi-Button or execute the Multi-Command configured with Upload Project under Data
Transfer on the Key Browser.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

25-5

25
Data Transfer Function

3 Press the Key Button or Multi-Button or execute the Multi-Command configured with Download Project under Data

1 Project Transfer Function

1.5 Precautions• An error message is displayed if the project data upload or download fails.
For details, refer to Chapter 30 “1 Error Messages” on page 30-1.
• While the project transfer function is running, the Touch stops processing other functions.
• When project data is downloaded using the project transfer function, the HMI Keep Registers and the HMI Keep
Relays are cleared. Control device addresses kept by Memory Backup in Function Settings are not cleared.
• If a project file (ZNV format) exists with the same name in the save destination when uploading a project file (ZNV
format), the file is overwritten with the uploaded file without displaying an overwrite confirmation message.
• When using the project transfer function, make the project data file name half-width alphanumeric characters.
• While running the project transfer function using a Key Button, Multi-Button, or Multi-Command, if a data transfer
function (project transfer) is initiated, the only function that will work is the currently running function. If two or
more data transfer functions are configured to a Multi-Button or Multi-Command, only the data transfer function
displayed at the top of the function list on the parts property dialog box will run.
• When running the project transfer function, the external memory device must have enough free space equivalent
to the size of the ZNV project file. Check that there is sufficient free space on the external memory device that will
be used with the project transfer function. If the device does not have sufficient free space, the project upload or
download may fail.

25-6

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualChapter 26 External Memory Devices
This chapter describes the specifications, functions, and notes to observe when using external memory devices with
the Touch.

1

USB Flash Drives

1.1 How the USB Flash Drive Function is Used
The following functions are available when a USB flash drive is inserted in the Touch.
• USB Autorun function
 Refer to “2.1 Overview of the USB Autorun Function” on page 26-18.
• USB Popup Screen function
 Refer to “1.8 USB Popup Screen Function” on page 26-15.
• Transferring projects
 Refer to “Chapter 25 Data Transfer Function” on page 25-1.
• Alarm Log output
 Refer to Chapter 13 “External Memory Tab” on page 13-20.
• Data Log output
 Refer to Chapter 14 “External Memory Tab” on page 14-16.

26
External Memory Devices• Operation Log output
 Refer to Chapter 15 “External Memory Tab” on page 15-14.
• Reading/writing recipe data
 Refer to Chapter 18 “Recipe Function” on page 18-1.

1.2 Specifications
The specifications of supported USB flash drives are as follows.
• Max capacity 32 GB.
• Compatible with FAT16 or FAT32 formatted USB flash drives.
• The maximum file size that can be read and written is 256 MB.
• Character set support only for alphanumeric characters.
• File names may be up to 120 characters long. (Includes file extensions.)• File paths may be up to 250 characters long. (Includes file extensions and drive characters.)• Drive letters cannot contain the following characters:\"&()*+,./:;<>[] =|^• File and directory names cannot contain the following characters:\/:*?"<>|
Check the IDEC web site for more information about compatible USB flash drives.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual26-1

1 USB Flash Drives

1.3 File Structure
When downloading or uploading data using the WindO/I-NV3, the following files and folders are accessible.
By default, the External Memory Folder on the external memory is named “HGDATA01”. For details, refer to “1.5
Setting the External Memory Folder” on page 26-12.

USB flash drive

HGDATA01 (External Memory Folder)
Folder name

File name

Description

ALARMLOG[user-defined].CSV
Default file name
Batch: ALMHTO.CSV
Real time: ALMHTA.CSV

Alarm Log data

DATALOG[user-defined].CSV
Default file name
Batch: LOGO**.CSV
Real time: LOGA**.CSV

Data Log data(** corresponds to the data number)

OPERATIONLOG[user-defined].CSV
Default file name
Batch: OPLOGO.CSV
Real time: OPLOGA.CSV

Operation Log data

RECIPE[user-defined].CSV
Default: RCP****.CSV

Recipe data(*** corresponds to the recipe
number)

NVDATA[Project name].ZNV

Project files

HGDATA02

HGDATA03

Users can create multiple external memory folders for different projects on a single USB flash drive. Note,the External Memory Folder on the external memory must reside on the root directory.
Do not alter project files (ZNV format). Altered files cannot be used with Touch.

26-2

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 USB Flash Drives

1.4 Reading/Writing Data
● Using WindO/I-NV3 to read and write to an external memory inserted in the Touch
This procedure shows how to read and write data to the External Memory Folder specified for the project currently
running on the Touch.
Use either method below to make the connection.
• Connect a USB cable to the USB port on the computer and the USB interface on the Touch.
• Connect an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on the computer and the Ethernet interface on the Touch.
Computer

To USB Port

To USB Interface

Touch
USB flash drive

A PlugUSB Cable

To Ethernet Port

Mini-B Plug
To Ethernet Interface

Ethernet Cable

Communication settings
Follow these procedures to configure the communication device and port to allow reading and writing to the USB flash
drive inserted in the Touch.

1 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click Comm. Setup.
The Communication Settings dialog box appears.

26
External Memory Devices

2 Select Touch under Communicate with.
3 Select the type of connection under Port, and then click OK.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual26-3

1 USB Flash Drives

DownloadingThis procedure shows how to download a specified file into the External Memory Folder on the external memory forthe currently running project.

1 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the arrow under Download.
2 Click Files to External Memory or Files to External Memory while running.
The Open dialog box appears.

■ Files to External Memory
This function temporarily stops the Touch and then downloads files to the USB flash drive inserted in the Touch. Touch
resumes running when files have been downloaded.
■ Files to External Memory while runningThis function downloads files to the USB flash drive inserted in the Touch without stopping the Touch.

3 Specify the file name, and then click Open.
A confirmation message appears.

If security is enabled in the Touch project, the Password Screen is displayed. Select the user name andenter the password.
For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 21-1.

4 Click Yes.
The External Memory Maintenance dialog box appears and the file download begins.
When the download is complete, a message box appears.

5 Click OK.

26-4

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 USB Flash Drives

6 Click Close on the External Memory Maintenance dialog box.

UploadingThis procedure shows how to upload specified data from the External Memory Folder on the external memory for thecurrently running project.

1 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the arrow next to Upload.
2 Click Stored Data in External Memory.
The Upload from External Memory dialog box appears.

26
External Memory Devices

3 Specify the type of data to upload by checking the appropriate items.
4 Specify the destination folder in the Path box.
5 Click OK.
The External Memory Maintenance dialog box appears and the data upload begins.
A message box appears when the data upload is complete.

The following kinds of data can be uploaded.
• Alarm Log Data
• Data Log Data
• Operation Log Data
• Recipe Files• Click
to display the Select a Folder dialog box and specify the destination folder for uploading.
• After starting WindO/I-NV3, Alarm Log data, Data Log data, and Recipe files can be uploaded from anExternal Memory Folder without opening project data.
If security is enabled in the Touch project, the Password Screen is displayed. Select the user name andenter the password.
For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 21-1.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual26-5

1 USB Flash Drives

6 Click OK.

7 Click Close on the External Memory Maintenance dialog box.

● Using Downloader to read and write to a USB flash drive inserted in the Touch
Maintenance is performed on data in the External Memory Folder on the external memory specified for the projectcurrently running on the Touch.

DownloadingThis procedure shows how to download a specified file into the External Memory Folder on the external memory forthe currently running project.

1 In Downloader, under the External Memory Maintenance, click Files to External Memory or Files to External
Memory while running.

The Open dialog box appears.

2 Specify the file name, and then click Open.
This procedure saves the data to the External Memory Folder on the USB flash drive inserted in the Touch.

UploadingThis procedures shows how to upload specified data from the External Memory Folder on the external memory for thecurrently running project.

1 In Downloader, under External Memory Maintenance, click Upload.
The Upload from External Memory dialog box appears.

2 Specify the data to upload and where to save it to, then click OK.
This procedure uploads data to the External Memory Folder on the USB flash drive inserted in the Touch and saves itin the user-specified location.

26-6

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 USB Flash Drives● Using WindO/I-NV3 to read and write to a USB flash drive inserted in the computerThis procedure shows how to read and write from a USB flash drive inserted in the computer's USB port.
ComputerUSB flash drive
To USB port

Communication settings
To read and write to the USB flash drive inserted in the computer, the External Memory must be selected under theCommunication with. Configure the communication settings as follows before downloading or uploading.

1 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click Comm. Setup.
The Communication Settings dialog box appears.

2 Under Communicate with, select External Memory, and then click OK.

26
External Memory Devices

DownloadingThis procedure shows how to download the project data to the External Memory Folder on the USB flash drive.

1 Open the project data to download using WindO/I-NV3.
2 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the icon above Download.
The Download dialog box appears.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual26-7

1 USB Flash Drives

3 Click Download.
The Select Drive dialog box appears.

4 Select the external memory drive, and then click OK.
A confirmation message appears.

■ Drive
Specify the drive assigned as the external memory drive.
■ Network
The Network Drive Assignment dialog box appears. This dialog box allows you to specify a drive on the network.
■ External Memory Folder
Specify the destination folder for downloading project data.
Click
to display the Project Settings dialog box. This procedure allows you to specify the External Memory Folder
on the external memory where the download will be stored.

5 Click Yes.
The Download dialog box appears and the file download begins.
When the download is complete, a completion message appears.

26-8

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 USB Flash Drives

6 Click OK.

7 Click Close on the Download dialog box.

Uploading26

This procedure shows how to upload the project data from the External Memory Folder on the USB flash drive
inserted in the computer, to the computer.

External Memory Devices

1 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click Upload.
The Select External Memory Folder dialog box appears.

2 Select the external memory drive, and then click OK.
The Upload dialog box appears.

■ External Memory Folder
Displays the folder specified in the Project tree described next.
■ Project
Specify the destination folder for uploading the project data.
■ Drive
Specify the drive assigned as the external memory drive.
■ Network
The Network Drive Assignment dialog box appears. This dialog box allows you to specify a drive on the network.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual26-9

1 USB Flash Drives

3 Click Upload.
The Upload dialog box appears and the file upload begins.
When the upload is complete, a completion message appears.

4 Click OK.

5 Click Close on the Upload dialog box.
A confirmation message appears indicating the project will be opened.

6 Click OK.
The uploaded project opens.

26-10

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 USB Flash Drives● Manipulating files using the file management functions provided with the OS
It is possible to use Explorer or any other program provided with the Windows OS to replace the recipe data that
Touch uses.
Insert the USB flash drive into the computer and save the new file(s) using the same name as the existing files ineach folder under the External Memory Folder.
● External memory writing timing
If the write timing setting for Alarm Log, Data Log, and Operation Log data is set to Real Time to USB flash drive,the data is stored in the file output buffer once.
The writing timing from the file output buffer to the USB flash drive is as follows.
• Within three minutes of an output event to the USB flash drive.
• When the HMI Special Internal Relay LSM18 changes to 1.
• When switching to the Top Page in the System Mode.
• When downloading/uploading project data.
• When the Access Pause button is pressed.
In the following events, WindO/I-NV3 writes the data in the file output buffer to the USB flash drive once,
and then moves on to the next process. This creates a processing delay which can cause WindO/I-NV3 toraise a communication error when downloading or uploading a project file. If a communication error
occurs, try downloading or uploading the project file again.
• When data exists in the file output buffer• When attempting to switch to the Top Page in the System Mode while reading/writing to the USB flash
drive.
• When downloading or uploading project data.

26
External Memory Devices

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual26-11

1 USB Flash Drives

1.5 Setting the External Memory Folder
The External Memory Folder on the external memory can be renamed using WindO/I-NV3.

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.
The Project Settings dialog box appears.

2 On the External Memory tab, enter the desired name in the External Memory Folder text box.
Use only alphabetic characters (A to Z) and numbers (0 to 9) and the maximum number is 8 characters.

3 Click OK.
• It is not possible to change folder names and file names other than the External Memory Folder.
• The External Memory Folder is named “HGDATA01” if project data has never been downloaded to the
Touch.

26-12

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 USB Flash Drives

1.6 Deleting Files on the USB Flash Drive
When the value of device that uses as a condition for deleting a file changes from 0 to 1, the file is deleted from theExternal Memory Folder of the USB flash drive inserted in the Touch.

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.
The Project Settings dialog box appears.

2 On the External Memory tab, select the Remove Files check box.
3 Specify the range of files to delete by checking the appropriate items.

26
External Memory Devices■ All Alarm Log files
Deletes all files in the ALARMLOG folder.
■ All Data Log files
Deletes all files in the DATALOG folder.
■ All Operation Log files
Deletes all files in the OPERATIONLOG folder.
■ Trigger Device
Specifies the bit device or the bit of a word device to serve as condition for deleting files.
Click
to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-61.

4 Click OK.
The online function in WindO/I-NV3 can also be used to delete files on the USB flash drive.
For details, refer to Chapter 23 “4 Clear” on page 23-22.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual26-13

1 USB Flash Drives

1.7 Formatting the USB Flash Drive
Always format the USB flash drive before using it.

The USB flash drive inserted in the Touch can be formatted with the WindO/I-NV3 online function.

1 On the Online tab, in the Touch group, click Format.
A confirmation message appears warning that existing data will be deleted.

In Communication Settings, Communicate with must be set to Touch in advance, and Port must be
set to USB in advance. For details on how to configure these settings, refer to “Communication settings” onpage 26-3.
If security is enabled for the project saved on the external memory, the Password Screen is displayed.
Select the user name and enter the password. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the
Security Function” on page 21-1.

2 Click Yes.
The External Memory Maintenance dialog box appears and formatting begins.
When the external memory has been formatted, the display returns to the External Memory Maintenance dialog box.

3 Click Close.

26-14

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 USB Flash Drives

1.8 USB Popup Screen Function
The USB Popup Screen function displays a specific screen by simply inserting a USB flash drive in the Touch.
This provides an easy way to display a message when the operator inserts a USB flash drive.
● When a USB flash drive is inserted a popup window is automatically displayed.
Configuration Procedure

1 Create the popup window to be displayed when USB flash drive 1 is inserted.
On the Home tab, in the Screens group, click the arrow under New and then click Popup Screen.
The Screen Properties dialog box is displayed.

2 Change the settings on each tab as necessary, and then click OK.
3 Arrange the object on the editing screen as required.
4 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.
The Project Settings dialog box appears.

26
External Memory Devices

5 On the Autorun tab, select the Open Popup Screen when USB Flash Drive is inserted check box.
6 Specify the Screen No. of the Popup Screen to display, and the Coordinates, then click OK.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “3.9 Autorun Tab” on page 3-41.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual26-15

1 USB Flash Drives

Operating Procedure
Insert the USB flash drive into the Touch.
USB flash drive

Touch

The Popup Screen appears.

Touch

Popup Screen

USB flash drive was inserted.

If security is enabled for the Popup Screen that is displayed by the USB Popup Screen function, thePassword Screen is displayed. Select the user name and enter the password.
For details, refer to “2.4 USB Autorun Function Security” on page 26-26.
When the USB Popup Screen function is enabled, if the USB flash drive contains a definition file (hgauto.ini)
for use with the USB Autorun function, both functions will appear on the menu screen.

26-16

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 USB Flash Drives

1.9 Precautions• USB flash drives have a limitation on the number of times they can be written to.
Regularly backup data on the USB flash drive.
• Never turn the power off or remove the USB flash drive while reading/writing to it. Otherwise, the data on the USB
flash drive may be destroyed. Should this occur, reformat the USB flash drive.
• Multiple USB flash drives cannot be used at the same time.
• Before turning off the power to the Touch or before removing the USB flash drive, set HMI Special Internal Relay
LSM18 to 1 and check that HMI Special Internal Relay LSM19 is 0.
• The message Saving USB flash drive appears while reading or until writing stops.
To resume reading/writing to the USB flash drive, re-insert it.
• If an unusable USB flash drive is inserted, the error message USB flash drive not available appears.
• Do not alter project files (ZNV format). Altered files cannot be used with Touch.
• Do not connect the USB flash drive to the Touch through a USB hub.

26
External Memory Devices

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual26-17

2 USB Autorun Function

2

USB Autorun Function

2.1 Overview of the USB Autorun Function
The USB Autorun function automatically displays a menu screen from which the user can execute predefinedcommands when a USB flash drive is inserted into the Touch.
USB Autorun Function Menu Screen

Touch

USB flash drive

Confirmation
Change Program

Copy Program

Run All

USB Autorun
definition file(hgauto.ini)

CancelPress the button• This allows operators to change project files without using a computer.
• These defined processes are called commands, and the file that contains the details of the command andmenu screen is called the USB Autorun definition file (hgauto.ini).
• A USB Autorun definition file (hgauto.ini) must be stored on the USB flash drive to use the USB Autorun
function.
The commands that can be executed with the USB Autorun function are as follows.
● Downloading a project file
Downloads a project file (ZNV format) saved on a USB flash drive to the Touch.
USB Autorun
definition file(hgauto.ini)
Computer
Save

Touch

USB flash drive
Download

Save

Project file
(ZNV format)

Project file
(ZNV format)

When the download is complete, the Touch will reset and start running from the beginning of the project that was
just downloaded.
Refer to Chapter 25 “1 Project Transfer Function” on page 25-1 for important notes and limitations.

● Uploading a project file
Uploads the project file (ZNV format) used to operate the Touch and saves it to a USB flash drive.
ComputerTouch

USB flash drive
Save

USB Autorun
definition file(hgauto.ini)

UploadProject file
(ZNV format)

When the upload is complete, the Touch will reset and start over at the beginning of the project.
Refer to Chapter 25 “1 Project Transfer Function” on page 25-1 for important notes and limitations.

26-18

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 USB Autorun Function

2.2 USB Autorun Function Configuration Procedure● Executing commands using the USB Autorun function
Configuration Procedure

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.
The Project Settings dialog box appears.

2 On the Autorun tab, select the Enable USB Autorun check box, and then click OK.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “3.9 Autorun Tab” on page 3-41.

26
External Memory Devices• When enabling the USB Autorun function using the Touch, on the Top Page in the System Mode, press
Main Menu, Initial Setting, System Op., and then press Autorun.
• If the USB Autorun function of the Touch is not enabled, the menu screen will not be displayed, even if a
USB flash drive is inserted into the Touch.
• Once the USB Autorun function of the Touch is enabled, the function will remain enabled until either a
project file with the Enable USB Autorun check box unchecked is downloaded, or the function isdisabled via the System Mode.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual26-19

2 USB Autorun Function

3 Create a USB Autorun definition file (hgauto.ini) and save it on the USB flash drive.
For details, refer to “2.3 Creating a USB Autorun Definition File” on page 26-22.
ComputerUSB flash drive
Save

USB Autorun
definition file(hgauto.ini)

4 Prepare the necessary files and store them on the USB flash drive.
The necessary files are as follows.
• To download a project file
Create a project file (ZNV format).
For details, refer to Chapter 25 “1.3 Converting Project Data for Transfer” on page 25-2.
ComputerUSB flash drive
Save

Project file
(ZNV format)

Operating Procedure

1 Insert the USB flash drive into the Touch.
The menu screen for the USB Autorun function appears.
USB flash drive

Touch

If the menu screen does not appear, follow these troubleshooting tips. Correct the problem and re-insert
the USB flash drive.

26-20

Cause:USB Autorun definition file (hgauto.ini) does not exist on the USB flash drive.

Solution:

Create a USB Autorun definition file and save it on the USB flash drive. For details, refer to“2.3 Creating a USB Autorun Definition File” on page 26-22.

Cause:The USB Autorun definition file (hgauto.ini) contains an error.

Solution:

For details, refer to “2.3 Creating a USB Autorun Definition File” on page 26-22.

Cause:The USB Autorun function is disabled in the Touch settings.

Solution:

Enable the USB Autorun function by referring to steps 1 and 2 on page 26-19.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 USB Autorun Function

2 Press the command to execute.
The command executes.
Confirmation
Change Program

Copy Program

Run All

CancelPress the button.

Touching Run All causes all commands defined in the USB Autorun definition file (hgauto.ini) to executeone by one.
• If security is enabled in the Touch project, the Password Screen is displayed. Select the user name andenter the password.
For details, refer to “2.4 USB Autorun Function Security” on page 26-26.
• Do not remove the USB flash drive while command is executing.

3 When the command finishes executing, a screen appears indicating the execution result.

26

Press Ack to close the execution result screen and display the menu screen.

The following function completed

Function Change ProgramAck

If a command executes with a button (except the Run All), the menu screen is displayed after touching
Ack on the execution result screen.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

26-21

External Memory Devices

Result2 USB Autorun Function

2.3 Creating a USB Autorun Definition File
The menu screen that appears when a USB flash drive inserted in the Touch is defined in the USB Autorun definition
file.
The USB Autorun definition file is created using the following methods.
• Created with the USB Autorun definition file creation tool
 Refer to USB Autorun Definition File Creation Tool manual.
• Created with the text editor
 Refer to “Created using the text editor” on page 26-22.

● Created using the text editor
You create this file using Notepad or any commercially available text editor. Fill in the items in each section and savethe file with the name “hgauto.ini”.
The USB Autorun definition file has these three sections.
Enter the items and definitions for each section.
[AUTORUN] section (required)
Specify the number of command items, enable/
disable the buttons, and the display language to use.

[AUTORUN]
item = 2
button_command = Enablebutton_runall = Enablelanguage = English[COMMAND] section (required)
Specify the command to execute and its parameters.
Create buttons to execute the number of commands
specified in the [AUTORUN]: section from[COMMAND_1] to [COMMAND_5], in that order.

[COMMAND_1]
command = PRO_DOWNLOAD
src_path = "B:\NV3DATA\FT_PROJECT.ZNV"
reset_keep_device = Enable
title = "Change Program"[COMMAND_2]
command = PRO_UPLOAD
dst_path = "B:\Uploaded_Project"
title = "Copy Program"[COMMENT] section
Enter text to display, as necessary, at the bottom of
the menu screen.

[COMMENT]
comment = "Press the button."

Confirmation[COMMAND_1]
execution button

Change Program[COMMAND_2]
execution button

Copy Program

RunAllDisplays text enteredin [COMMENT]

CancelButton to closethe menu screen

Press the button.
Execution button for all commands

26-22

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 USB Autorun Function[AUTORUN] section■ item (required)
Specify the number of commands used from 1 to 5. The USB Autorun function will fail to execute if a value other than
1 to 5 is specified.
■ button_command
Specify whether to enable or disable the execution buttons for [COMMAND_1] to [COMMAND_5].
Enable:Enables the button.
Disable:Disables the button.
If this item is left blank or contains an illegal value, the Touch assumes “Enable”.

■ button_runall
Specify whether to enable or disable the execution buttons for Run All.
Enable:Enables the button.
Disable:Disables the button.
If this item is left blank or contains an illegal value, the Touch assumes “Enable”.

■ language
Specify the language to use for the button labels and messages.
Japanese:
Shift-JIS
European:EnglishChinese:
GB2312
Taiwanese:
BIG5
KoreanCentral European
BalticCyrillic

26
External Memory Devices

If this item is left blank or contains an illegal value, the Touch assumes “Japanese”.

[COMMAND] section■ command (required)
Specify the command to execute.
PRO_DOWNLOAD: Download a project file.
PRO_UPLOAD:
Upload a project file.
The items required differ for each command except for the “title” item.
command = PRO_DOWNLOAD■ src_path (required)
Specify the path (250 or less characters) where the project file is to be downloaded.
Use “B:\” for a USB flash drive.
■ reset_keep_device
Specify whether to initialize the keep devices or not when the project file is downloaded. However, when project datathat changes the settings of the data storage area is downloaded, the keep devices are always initialized.
Enable:Disable:Initializes the keep device.
Does not initialize the keep devices.
If this item is left blank or contains an illegal value, the MICRO/I assumes "Enable".

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual26-23

2 USB Autorun Functioncommand = PRO_UPLOAD■ dst_path (required)
Specify the path to the folder (250 or less characters) where the uploaded project file will be saved.
Use “B:\” for a USB flash drive.
Common items■ titleEnter a title for the button label using 1 line of 14 characters or less.
• When using a semicolon (;), backslash (\), or double quotations ("), a backslash (\) as an escape character will be
automatically inserted before those characters and will thus be calculated as 2 single-byte characters.

[COMMENT] section■ comment
Enter a comment using 1 line of 29 characters or less.
• When using a semicolon (;), backslash (\), or double quotations ("), an escape character (\) will be automaticallyinserted before those characters and will thus be calculated as 2 single-byte characters.

Notes on comments
To add comments to the USB Autorun definition file, use a semicolon (;).
All text after the semicolon (;) and up to the line feed will be treated as a non-executable comments.

Restrictions• The maximum number of characters per line is 512 single-byte characters including line feed codes.
All the text on the line will be ignored if there are more than 512 single-byte characters on the line.
• Each item must be described as a single line. If a line feed occurs before the end of the description, all characters
after the line feed are ignored.
• The maximum size of the USB Autorun definition file (hgauto.ini) is 512 KB. The file cannot be used if it exceeds
this limit.
• Only line feed codes of the format generally supported by Windows (CR+LF) are supported. If any other format isused, the USB Autorun definition file (hgauto.ini) will fail to run properly.

Sample definition file and explanation
Sample definition; sample hgauto.ini

26-24

(1)

[AUTORUN]
item = 5
button_command = Enablebutton_runall = Enablelanguage =English; number of items; enable individual command buttons: enable the "Run All" button.
; use English(2)[COMMAND_1]
command = PRO_DOWNLOAD
src_path = "B:\FT_DEMO_1.ZNV"
title = "Change Program"; download the project file; source path
; button label(3)[COMMAND_2]
command = PRO_UPLOAD
dst_path = "B:\Uploaded_Project"
title = "Copy Program"; upload a project file; destination path
; button label(4)[COMMENT]
comment = "Press the button."; Message shown at bottom of screen.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 USB Autorun Function

Explanation(1)This definition file displays two command execution buttons on the menu screen displayed by the USB Autorun
function. It also enables the Run All button. All button labels and messages are displayed in English.
[AUTORUN]

Defines the number of commands to use and details about the menu
screen.

item = 2

Specifies that two commands will be used.

button_command = Enable

Enables execution buttons for each command from [COMMAND_1]
to [COMMAND_2].

button_runall = Enable

Enables the Run All button.

language = English

Displays all button labels and messages in English.

(2)Downloading a project file from a USB flash drive to the Touch.
[COMMAND_1]

Defines the command assigned to execution button [COMMAND_1].
This is the first command that executes when Run All is touched.

command = PRO_DOWNLOAD

Executes "Download a project file".

src_path = "B:\FT_DEMO_1.ZNV"

Downloads the project file “FT_DEMO_1.ZNV” saved on the USB
flash drive (B:) to the Touch.

title = "Change Program"

Displays the text “Change Program” as the button label.

(3)Uploading a project to a USB flash drive.
Defines the command assigned to execution button [COMMAND_2].
This is the fourth command that executes when Run All is touched.

command = PRO_UPLOAD

Executes "Upload a project file".

dst_path = "B:\Uploaded_Project"

Uploads the project file used to operate the Touch and saves it to
the Uploaded_Project folder on the USB flash drive (B:).

title = "Copy Program"

Displays the text “Copy Program” as the button label.

(4)Displays messages below the menu screen for the USB Autorun function.
[COMMENT]

Defines the number of commands to use and details about themenu screen.

comment = "Press the button."

Displays the text “Press the button.” below the menu screen.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

26-25

26
External Memory Devices[COMMAND_2]

2 USB Autorun Function

2.4 USB Autorun Function Security
If security has been enabled for the Touch project, Touch displays the Password Screen when the USB Autorun
function runs.

Password
User1********ENTA B C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T UVWXYZ
0 123 4 56 7 8 9
BS
CLR
OK

Select the user name from the security group that has command execution permissions, enter the password, andtouch ENT.
● Execution privileges by security groups
With the Touch, a password-authenticated user account with the security group "Administrator" is necessary.
CommandSecurity Group
Administrator

Operator

ReaderDownloading a project file

YES

NO

NO

Uploading a project file

YES

NO

NO

If you press(Close) instead of entering a password, no commands are executed and the menu screen

closes. To re-execute the USB Autorun function, insert the USB flash drive again.

26-26

SmartAXIS Touch User's ManualChapter 27 Internal Devices
This chapter describes internal devices available for the SmartAXIS.
The Touch includes an internal HMI device to control HMI functions, and control device for control functions.

1

Bit Devices

1.1 HMI Device Addresses
Internal Device Name

SymbolR/W

Address Range

Base

HMI Internal Relay

LM

R/W

0 to 2,047

10

HMI Keep Relay

LK

R/W

Variable

10

HMI Temporary Relay

LBM

R/W

0 to 12710

HMI Special Internal Relay

LSM

R/W

0 to 63

10

HMI Timer Relay

LTC

R

0 to 31

10

R/W stands for Read/Write. R/W enables reading and writing of values, whereas R enables reading only.

■ HMI Internal Relay (LM)This is a bit-unit device used for the HMI function. It can store 2,048 addresses.

■ HMI Temporary Relay (LBM)
This is a bit-unit device for temporarily storing values for the HMI function. The value of this device switches between
screens and text groups and user accounts, and it becomes 0 if the screen is reset. It can store 128 addresses.
■ HMI Special Internal Relay (LSM)
Special functions are assigned to each bit by the bit-unit device. It can store 64 addresses.
Address

Function/Part

LSM0

Normally set to 1.

LSM1

1 only on the second scan when Base Screen is switched.
It also operates when switching text group or user account, or resetting the display screen.

LSM2

1 only on the first scan when Base Screen is switched.
It also operates when switching text group or user account, or resetting the display screen.

LSM30 only on the first scan when Base Screen is switched.
It also operates when switching text group or user account, or resetting the display screen.

LSM4

Alternates between 0 and 1 on each scan of the Touch.

LSM5

1 only on the first scan when Popup Screen is opened.

LSM6

1 while touch panel is pressed.

LSM7

Alternates between 0 and 1 each time data is read (read scan) from all the external devices being
used.

LSM8

After powering ON value is 1 until the initially displayed screen switches to another screen.

LSM9

When value changes from 0 to 1, the backup data stored in flash memory is restored.
When it becomes 1 value does not become 0 until the Touch is reset or 0 is written.

LSM10

When value changes from 0 to 1, the data of Keep Relay and Keep Register configured in the Data
Storage Area, and the current backlight settings are transferred to flash memory.
When it becomes 1 value does not become 0 until the Touch is reset or 0 is written.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

27-1

27
Internal Devices■ HMI Keep Relay (LK)This is a bit-unit device that holds the values of device used for the HMI function. The value of this device can be set
to 0 by clearing the project data download option or online function, or it becomes zero if the backup battery isdrained. The address range can be varied between 1,024 and 8,192. For details, refer to Chapter 16 “Minimum andMaximum Amount of Data Storage and Number of Addresses” on page 16-2.

1 Bit Devices

Address

Function/Part

LSM11

Changes from 0 to 1 when the Base Screen is switched, after the values of all the external devices
being used are read, and remains 1 until there is a switch to another screen.
It also operates when switching text group or user account, or resetting the display screen.

LSM12

1 only on the first scan when Popup Screen is closed.

LSM13

Value becomes 0 when Popup Screen is opened, and then changes from 0 to 1 after all the values of
all the external devices being used by that Popup Screen are read.

LSM14

When the indirect value of an indirect device positioned on the Base Screen changes, value becomes
1, and reading of the indirect device starts. When reading is complete value becomes 0.

LSM15

When the indirect value of an indirect device positioned on a Popup Screen changes, value becomes 1,
and reading of the indirect device starts. When reading is complete value becomes 0.

LSM16 to 17

Reserved

LSM18

When value changes from 0 to 1, access to USB flash drive is stopped. The access state can bechecked with the value of LSM19.
When it becomes 1 value does not become 0 until the Touch is reset or 0 is written.

LSM19

Value is 1 while there is access to USB flash drive. If value is 0 the USB flash drive can be safely
ejected.

LSM20 to 21

Reserved

LSM22This is the Operation Log function. When data in excess of the amount that can be recorded in one
operation occurs, the value becomes 1.
When it becomes 1 value does not become 0 until the Touch is reset or 0 is written.

LSM23 to 24

Reserved

LSM25

Value is 1 while data is being written to USB flash drive.

LSM26 to 47

Reserved

LSM48

200 millisecond clock (alternates between 0 and 1 every 100 milliseconds)

LSM49

1 second clock (alternates between 0 and 1 every 500 milliseconds)

LSM50 to 52

Reserved

LSM53

When the value changes to 1, the preset values for IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway(LSD192 to 203) are written to the Touch, then it automatically resets. After the Touch is reset, thevalue becomes 0.

LSM54 to 63

Reserved• Since the HMI Special Internal Relay can be written to, even if a write is attempted, the contents will notchange.
• Transfer of the LSM10 Keep Relay and Keep Register to the flash memory can take an excess of one second.
Writing to the flash memory can be repeated a maximum of 100,000 times. Keep writing to the flash memory
to a minimum. LSM10 cannot be used while the ladder program is running. LSM10 does not work while theladder program or FBD program is running.
• When there is no remaining battery power, data transferred with LSM10 will be restored once the power tothe Touch has been turned on.
The period of processing for all of the parts set on the displayed screen is called a scan of the Touch. It is
not related to the period of reading the value of external devices.

27-2

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 Bit Devices

A timing chart for the HMI Special Internal Relay controlled by operation of the Touch is shown below.
Power on

LSM0
LSM1
LSM2
LSM3
LSM4
LSM8

1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0

Processing

1st scan 2nd scan 3rd scan 4th scan

Popup Screen open

LSM5
LSM12

Base Screen switch

1st scan 2nd scan 3rd scan

Popup Screen close

1
0
1
0

■ HMI Timer Relay (LTC)
The HMI Timer is a bit-unit device that can be changed to 1 in value of device switched by the Timer from Parts. It
can store 32 addresses.

27
Internal Devices

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual27-3

1 Bit Devices

1.2 Control Device Addresses
Internal Device Name

SymbolR/W

Address Range

Base

Input

I

R

0 to 178

OutputQ

R/W

0 to 138
8

Remote Input

I

R

40 to 75
80 to 115
120 to 155

Remote Output

Q

R/W

40 to 61
80 to 101
120 to 141

8Timer Bit

TR

000 to 199

10

Counter Bit

CR

000 to 199

10

Shift Register

R

R/W

0 to 12710Internal Relay

M

R/W

0 to 1277

10*1

Special Internal Relay

M

R/W

8000 to 8177

10*1

R/W stands for Read/Write. R/W enables reading and writing of values, whereas R enables reading only.

■ Input (I)Inputs (I) are relays to receive input signals through the input terminals.
■ Output (Q)Outputs (Q) are relays to send the processed results to the output terminals.
■ Remote Input (I)Remote inputs (I) are devices to input the on/off state from external devices connected to remote I/O slaves to the
Touch.
■ Remote Output (Q)Remote outputs (Q) are devices to output the on/off information from the Touch to external devices connected toremote I/O slaves.
■ Timer (T)Control device timers are bit unit devices that become 1 when the time is up.
■ Counter (C)Control device counters are bit unit devices that become 1 when the count is up.
■ Shift registers (R)Shift registers (R) are registers to shift the data bits according to pulse inputs.
■ Internal Relay (M)Internal relays (M) are relays used in the Touch and cannot be outputted to the output terminals.
• Control devices must have a "#" before the device type only when the WindO/I-NV3 is used.
In addition, on the Device Monitor a "#" is displayed before the device type.
Example: When setting D100
WindO/I-NV3:#D100

WindLDR:

D100• Values can only be written from the HMI function to outputs (Q) while the ladder program or FBD program isrunning.
• Do not simultaneously write values to the same control device using the HMI function and the control function.
• Operations in scripts of control function are as follows.
- Bit of Data register can be handled as a bit device.
- Calculations in which both bit and word devices are used are not allowed.
- Bit devices are always processed as bits, and values of those devices are 0(OFF) or 1(ON).
*1 The last digit of the device address is 0 to 7 in octal notation.

27-4

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 Bit Devices■ Special Internal Relay (M)Special internal relays (M) are bit devices used internally on the Touch. Each bit has been assigned a special function.

Although the device code for internal relays (M0000 to M1277) and special internal relays (M8000 to M8177)
is the same ("M"), the device characteristics are different. Special functions are assigned to each bit of thespecial internal relay.
Do not change the status of reserved special internal relays, otherwise the Touch may not operatecorrectly.
DeviceAddress

M8000

M8001

M8002

M8004

M8005
M8006
M8007

M8010
M8011,
8012

M8013

M8014

M8015

Start Control
M8000 controls the state of the ladder program or FBD
program (RUN/STOP). When M8000 is turned on, the ladderprogram or FBD program is executed, and when turned off,the ladder program or FBD program stops. Stop input andreset input have precedence over M8000 (start control).
M8000 maintains its status when the Touch is powered down.
When the data to be maintained during power failure is broken
after the Touch has been off for a period longer than thebattery backup duration, the Touch restarts ladder program
operation or FBD program operation or not as selected in
Configuration, Run/Stop Control, Run/Stop Selection
at Memory Backup Error.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.4 Run/Stop Selection at
Memory Backup Error” on page 3-51.
1-sec Clock Reset
While M8001 is on, M8121 (1-sec clock) is turned off.
All Outputs OFF
When M8002 is turned on, all outputs go off until M8002 isturned off. Self-maintained circuits using outputs also go off
and are not restored when M8002 is turned off.
Carry (Cy) and Borrow (Bw)
When a carry or borrow results from executing an addition or
subtraction instruction, M8003 turns on. For details, refer to
Chapter 4 "Instructions Reference" – "Carry and Borrow" in the"SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual".
Program Execution Error
When an error occurs while executing a ladder program or
FBD program, M8004 turns on.
For details, refer to Chapter 30 “2.2 Program Execution Error”
on page 30-5.
Remote I/O Slave 1
Remote I/O Slave Communication Error Communication Error
Special internal relays used by remote
Remote I/O Slave 2
I/O.
Communication Error
For details, refer to Chapter 12 “4.2Remote I/O Slave 3
Remote I/O Master” on page 12-47.
Communication Error
In Daylight Saving Time Period
When the daylight saving time is enabled, M8010 is turned on
while in the daylight saving time period. When the daylightsaving time is disabled, M8010 is always off.
Reserved
Calendar/Clock Data Write/Adjust Error Flag
When an error occurs while calendar/clock data is written orclock data is adjusted, M8013 turns on. If calendar/clock datais written or clock data is adjusted successfully, M8013 turns
off.
Calendar/Clock Data Read Error Flag
When an error occurs while calendar/clock data is read fromthe internal clock to the special data registers (D8008 to
D8014), M8014 turns on. If calendar/clock data is read
successfully, M8014 turns off.
Reserved

SmartAXIS Touch User's ManualCPU
Stopped

Power
OFF

Read/
Ladder FBD
Write

Maintained

Maintained

Write

YES

YES

ClearedCleared

Write

YES

YES

ClearedCleared

Write

YES

YES

27
ClearedCleared

Read

YES

―

ClearedCleared

Read

YES

YES

Operating

Cleared

Read

YES

YES

Operating

Cleared

Read

YES

YES

Operating

Cleared

Read

YES

YES

Operating

Cleared

Read

YES

YES

―

―

―

―

―

Operating

Cleared

Read

YES

YES

Operating

Cleared

Read

YES

YES

―

―

―

―

―

27-5

Internal Devices

M8003

Description

1 Bit Devices

DeviceAddress
M8016
M8017
M8020

M8021

M8022,
8023
M8024

M8025

M8026,
8027

Description
Calendar Data Write Flag
When M8016 is turned on, data in data registers D8015 throughD8018 (calendar new data) are set to the internal clock.
Clock Data Write Flag
When M8017 is turned on, data in data registers D8019
through D8021 (clock new data) are set to the internal clock.
Calendar/Clock Data Write Flag
When M8020 is turned on, data in data registers D8015 throughD8021 (calendar/clock new data) are set to the internal clock.
Clock Data Adjust Flag
When M8021 is turned on, the clock is adjusted with respect toseconds. If seconds are between 0 and 29 for current time,
adjustment for seconds will be set to 0 and minutes remain the same.
If seconds are between 30 and 59 for current time, adjustment forseconds will be set to 0 and minutes are incremented by 1.
Reserved
BMOV/WSFT Executing Flag
While the BMOV or WSFT is executed, M8024 turns on. Whencompleted, M8024 turns off. If the Touch is powered down
while executing BMOV or WSFT, M8024 remains on when the
Touch is powered up again.
Maintain Outputs While Ladder Program Operation Stopped
Outputs are normally turned off when the ladder program
operation is stopped. M8025 is used to maintain the output
statuses when the ladder program operation is stopped. Whenthe ladder program operation is stopped with M8025 turned on,
the output ON/OFF statuses are maintained. When the ladderprogram operation restarts, M8025 is turned off automatically.
Reserved

Power
OFF

Read/
Ladder FBD
Write

Operating

Cleared

Write

YES

YES

Operating

Cleared

Write

YES

YES

Operating

Cleared

Write

YES

YES

Operating

Cleared

Write

YES

YES

―

―

―

―

―

Maintained

Maintained

Read

YES

―

Maintained

Cleared

Write

YES

YES

―

―

―

―

―

YES

YES*1

YES

YES*1

YES

YES*1

YES
YES
YES
YES
YES

YES
YES
YES
YES
YES

YES

YES*1

YES

YES*1

YES

YES*1

YES
YES

YES
YES

―

―

M8030

Comparison Output Reset

ClearedCleared

M8031

Gate Input

Maintained

ClearedReset Input

Maintained

ClearedReset Status
Comparison ON Status
Overflow
Underflow
Count Direction

Maintained
Maintained
Maintained
Maintained
Maintained

ClearedClearedClearedClearedClearedComparison Output Reset

ClearedClearedGate Input

Maintained

ClearedReset Input

Maintained

ClearedComparison ON Status
Overflow

Maintained
Maintained

ClearedCleared

Read/
Write
Read/
Write
Read/
Write
Read
Read
Read
Read
Read
Read/
Write
Read/
Write
Read/
Write
Read
Read

―

―

―

M8032
M8033
M8034
M8035
M8036
M8037

Special Internal Relays for High-Speed
Counter (Group 1/I0)
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.7High-Speed Counter” on page 3-55.

M8040
M8041
M8042
M8043
M8044
M8045
to 8047,8050 to8054

Special Internal Relays for High-Speed
Counter (Group 2/I2)
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.7High-Speed Counter” on page 3-55.

Reserved*1 Read only

27-6

CPU
StoppedSmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 Bit Devices

DeviceAddress
M8055
M8056
M8057
M8060
M8061
M8062
to 8067,
8070
M8071
M8072
M8073
M8074
M8075
to 8077,
8080
M8081
M8082
M8083
M8084
M8085
to 8087,
8090
M8091
M8092
M8093

M8095
to
M8107
M8110
M8111
M8112
M8113
to 8117

Power
OFF

Special Internal Relays for High-Speed
Counter (Group 3/I3)
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.7High-Speed Counter” on page 3-55.

Comparison Output Reset

ClearedClearedGate Input

Maintained

ClearedReset Input

Maintained

ClearedComparison ON Status
Overflow

Maintained
Maintained

ClearedCleared

―

―

―

―

―

ClearedClearedClearedClearedClearedCleared

Read
Read
Read

YES
YES
YES

―
―
―

ClearedCleared

Read

YES

―

―

―

―

―

―

ClearedClearedClearedClearedClearedClearedClearedCleared

Read
Read
Read
Read

YES
YES
YES
YES

―
―
―
―

―

―

―

―

―

Group 2/I2Group 3/I3Group 4/I4

Maintained
Maintained
Maintained

ClearedClearedCleared

Read
Read
Read

YES
YES
YES

YES
YES
YES

Group 5/I6

Maintained

Cleared

Read

YES

YES

―

―

―

―

―

Operating

Cleared

Read

YES

YES

Operating

Cleared

Read

YES

YES

Operating

Cleared

Read

YES

YES

―

―

―

―

―

ClearedCleared

Read

YES

YES

Operating

Cleared

Read

YES

YES

Reserved
Interrupt Input I2 Status
Interrupt Input I3 Status
Interrupt Input I4 Status
Interrupt Input I5 Status

Turns on when the correspondinguser interrupt is allowed. Wheninterrupt inputs are disabled, theseinternal relays are turned off.
(ON: Allowed, OFF: Prohibited)

Reserved
Interrupt Input I2 Edge
Interrupt Input I3 Edge
Interrupt Input I4 Edge
Interrupt Input I5 Edge

This flag indicates whether theinterrupt input is triggered with arising edge or falling edge.
(ON: Rising, OFF: Falling)

Reserved
Catch Input ON/OFF Status
When a rising or falling input edge is
detected during a scan, the input statusesof catch inputs Group 1/I0 through Group6/I7 at the moment are set to M8090
through M8095, respectively, without
regard to the scan status. Only one edge
is detected in one scan.
Reserved

Connection Status
Special internal relays used by remote I/O.
For details, refer to Chapter 12 “4.2 Remote
I/O Master” on page 12-47.

Remote I/O Slave 1
Connection Status
Remote I/O Slave 2
Connection Status
Remote I/O Slave 3
Connection Status

Reserved

Read/
Ladder FBD
Write
Read/
YES YES*1
Write
Read/
YES YES*1
Write
Read/
YES YES*1
Write
Read
YES
YES
Read
YES
YES

Initialize Pulse
When the ladder program starts running, M8120 turns on for a periodof one scan.
M8120

1 scan time

M8120
Start

M8121

1-sec Clock
While M8001 (1-sec clock reset) is off, M8121 generates clock pulses in
one second increments, with a duty ratio of 1:1 (500 milliseconds on and
500 milliseconds off).
500msec

500msec

M8121
1sec

*1 Read only

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

27-7

27
Internal Devices

M8094

CPU
StoppedDescription

1 Bit Devices

DeviceAddress

CPU
Stopped

Power
OFF

Read/
Ladder FBD
Write

Operating

Cleared

Read

YES

YES

Operating

Cleared

Read

YES

YES

Maintained

Cleared

Read

YES

YES

ClearedCleared

Read

YES

YES

―

―

―

―

―

ClearedCleared

Read

YES

―

―

―

―

―

―

Maintained

Cleared

Read

YES

―

―

―

―

―

―

Comparison Output Reset

ClearedCleared

YES

YES*1

Gate Input

Maintained

Cleared

YES

YES*1

Reset Input

Maintained

Cleared

YES

YES*1

M8171
M8172

Comparison ON Status
Overflow

Maintained
Maintained

ClearedCleared

YES
YES

YES
YES

M8173

Comparison Output Reset

ClearedCleared

YES

YES*1

Gate Input

Maintained

Cleared

YES

YES*1

Reset Input

Maintained

Cleared

YES

YES*1

Comparison ON Status
Overflow

Maintained
Maintained

ClearedCleared

YES
YES

YES
YES

M8122

Description
100-msec Clock
M8122 always generates clock pulses in 100 milliseconds increments,
whether M8001 is on or off, with a duty ratio of 1:1 (50 milliseconds on
and 50 milliseconds off).
50msec50msecM8122
100msec

M8123

10-msec Clock
M8123 always generates clock pulses in 10 milliseconds increments,
whether M8001 is on or off, with a duty ratio of 1:1 (5 milliseconds on
and 5 milliseconds off).
5msec

5msec

M8123
10msec

M8124

M8125

Timer/Counter Preset Value Changed
When timer or counter preset values are changed, M8124
turns on. When a ladder program or FBD program isdownloaded to the Touch or when the changed timer/counter
preset value is cleared, M8124 turns off.
In-operation Output
M8125 remains on while the ladder program is running.

M8126
to 8143

Reserved

M8144

Timer Interrupt Status
When timer interrupt is enabled, M8144 is turned on. Whendisabled, M8144 is turned off.

M8145
to 8147

Reserved

M8150
to 8152

Comparison Result Greater Than
Each bit turns ON in accordance with the results of the
CMP=(Compare(=)) command and ICMP>=(interval comparison)command.
For CMP=(Compare(=)) command: M8150 = S1>S2, M8151 =S1=S2, M8152 = S1<S2For ICMP>=(interval comparison) command: M8150=S2>S1,
M8151=S3>S2, M8152=S1>S2>S3
For details about comparison results of the
CMP=(Compare(=)) and ICMP>=(interval comparison)commands, refer to the "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming
Manual".

M8153
to 8165

Reserved

M8166
M8167
M8170

M8174
M8175
M8176
M8177

Special Internal Relays for High-Speed
Counter (Group 4/I4)
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.7High-Speed Counter” on page 3-55.

Special Internal Relays for High-Speed
Counter (Group 5/I5)
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.7High-Speed Counter” on page 3-55.

*1 Read only

27-8

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

Read/
Write
Read/
Write
Read/
Write
Read
Read
Read/
Write
Read/
Write
Read/
Write
Read
Read

2 Word Devices

2

Word Devices

2.1 HMI Device Addresses
Internal Device NameHMI Data Register

SymbolR/W

Address Range

Base

LDR

R/W

0 to 8191

10

HMI Keep Register

LKR

R/W

Variable

10

HMI Temporary Register

LBR

R/W

0 to 127

10

HMI Timer (Current)LTDR

0 to 31

10

HMI Special Data Register

LSD

R/W

0 to 255

10

R/W stands for Read/Write. R/W enables reading and writing of values, whereas R enables reading only.

■ HMI Data Register (LDR)
8,192 points are available.
■ HMI Keep Register (LKR)
The value in these registers is retained during power OFF.
The maximum number of HMI Keep Register depends upon the number set in WindO/I-NV3. For details, refer to
Chapter 16 “Minimum and Maximum Amount of Data Storage and Number of Addresses” on page 16-2.
■ HMI Temporary Register (LBR)
This register value will be cleared to 0 when a text group or user account is changed, when a screen is reset or thescreen is changed. 128 points are available.

27
Internal Devices■ HMI Timer (Current value) (LTD)HMI Timer stores the current value of Timer from the parts. 32 points are available.
■ HMI Special Data Register (LSD)The HMI Special Data Registers (256 points) perform the following special operations.
Address

Function/Part

LSD0 to 3

Reserved

LSD4

Scan time Maximum value of the Touch (msec)

LSD5

Screen switch response time (msec)

LSD6

Read scan communication time (msec)

LSD7

Scan counter (incremented at each scan of the Touch)LSD8

1 second counter (incremented each second)

LSD9

10 millisecond counter (increments every 10 msec)

LSD10

100 millisecond counter (incremented every 100 msec)

LSD11200 millisecond counter (incremented every 200 msec)

LSD12500 millisecond counter (incremented every 500 msec)

LSD13Stores the current Year data from the Touch. “Year” (4 BCD digits)

LSD14Stores current time data from Touch. “Month” (2 BCD digits)

LSD15Stores current time data from Touch. “Day” (2 BCD digits)

LSD16Stores current time data from Touch. “Hour” (2 BCD digits)

LSD17Stores current time data from Touch. “Minute” (2 BCD digits)

LSD18Stores current time data from Touch. “Second” (2 BCD digits)

LSD19Stores current time data from Touch. “Day-of-week” (1 BCD digit)

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual27-9

2 Word Devices

Address27-10Function/Part

LSD20

When a value of 1 is written into this device address, the internal clock in Touch is updated
according to the data stored in LSD21 to 26. It automatically resets to 0 after the update.

LSD21Stores preset value in the Touch internal clock "Year". (2 BCD digits)

LSD22Stores preset value in the Touch internal clock "Month". (2 BCD digits)

LSD23Stores preset value in the Touch internal clock "Day". (2 BCD digits)

LSD24Stores preset value in the Touch internal clock "Hour". (2 BCD digits)

LSD25Stores preset value in the Touch internal clock "Minute". (2 BCD digits)

LSD26Stores preset value in the Touch internal clock "Second". (2 BCD digits)

LSD27

Current value of the scan time for Touch (msec)

LSD28

Minimum value of the scan time for Touch (msec)

LSD29, 30

Reserved

LSD31Stores the currently displayed screen number.

LSD32

Set a value (in reference to a Base Screen number you want to switch to) and it willautomatically switch to a specified Base Screen number.
Note, after switching to a Base Screen, the value stored automatically resets to 0.

LSD33

USB flash drive error status
0: Normal
1: USB flash drive not inserted/incompatible memory
2: Formatting error
3: Access error/insufficient free space/read-write failure

LSD34

USB flash drive available capacity lower word (kB)LSD35

USB flash drive available capacity upper word (kB)LSD36

USB flash drive full capacity lower word (kB)LSD37

USB flash drive full capacity upper word (kB)

LSD38

Ladder program or FBD program processing time (msec)

LSD39 to 48

Reserved

LSD49

O/I Link Slave station number

LSD50

The sequence value of the message number (or channel number if the alarm function is
being used) selected by the cursor in the Alarm List Display is stored.
A value of between 1 and 1024 (allocated using ((project No. - 1) x 16 + bit position + 1)) isstored for the number.

LSD51

Color or Monochrome LCD models: Brightness Adjustment 0 to 31

LSD52

The ID number of the script for which the error occurred

LSD53

Script error status

LSD54

Reserved

LSD55

Monochrome LCD models: Contrast Adjustment 0 to 31

LSD56

The number of lines of data from the start line to the line currently selected with the cursor
displayed in the Alarm List Display/Alarm Log Display is stored.

LSD57

The number of log data pieces stored in the Data Storage Area by the Alarm Log function isstored. (0 to 1,024)

LSD58

USB flash drive download status
During download of a file to USB flash drive with WindO/I-NV3 the following bits turns ON.
When downloading is complete, the bit turns OFF.
Bit 2: Recipe data
Bit 4: Project data

LSD59 to 66

Reserved

LSD67Stores the connection status for TCP clients and the TCP server for the User Communication
set to the Ethernet interface.
Bit 0: User Communication 1
Bit 1: User Communication 2
Bit 2: User Communication 3

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Word Devices

Address

Function/Part

LSD68

When the value changes from 0 to 1, the connections for the TCP clients and the TCP server
for the User Communication set to the Ethernet interface are forcibly disconnected.
Bit 0: User Communication 1
Bit 1: User Communication 2
Bit 2: User Communication 3

LSD69 to 100

Reserved

LSD101

Polling period register for the O/I Link Slave

LSD102

Slave registration setting register for O/I Link Master

LSD103

Reserved

LSD104

Slave online information register for O/I Link Master

LSD105Reserved

LSD106

Slave error information register for O/I Link MasterReserved

LSD112 to 127

Refer to details on registers for communication drivers in "External Device Setup Manual".

LSD128 to 191

Reserved

LSD192 to 195

The preset value for IP address of the Touch. When the value of LSM53 is changed to 1, thevalues of these device addresses are written to the Touch. When the power is turned on, theset values of the project are read to these device addresses.
Example: The IP address is 192.168.0.1
LSD192=192, LSD193=168, LSD194=0, LSD195=1

LSD196 to 199

The preset value for subnet mask of the Touch. When the value of LSM53 is changed to 1,
the values of these device addresses are written to the Touch. When the power is turned on,
the set values of the project are read to these device addresses.
Example: The subnet mask is 255.255.254.0
LSD196=255, LSD197=255, LSD198=254, LSD199=0

LSD200 to 203

The preset value for default gateway of the Touch. When the value of LSM53 is changed to
1, the values of these device addresses are written to the Touch. When the power is turned
on, the set values of the project are read to these device addresses.
Example: The default gateway is 192.168.0.24
LSD200=192, LSD201=168, LSD202=0, LSD203=24

LSD204 to 255

Reserved• LSD4 and 6 store the maximum value, and when the Base Screen is switched, they are reset.
• The values of LSD4 to 6 are included errors of +/- 10 milliseconds.
• The values of LSD38 to 40 are included errors of +/- 10 milliseconds.
• When registers LSD7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12 contain FFFF (H) and are incremented, the value becomes 0.
• When you reckon time by using LSD9, the time difference (in 10 milliseconds units) from the previous value
can be calculated.
• The range for the “Year” in LSD13 is 2000 to 2099, and reverts to 2000 after 2099.
• When 1 is written to LSD20, internal clock is updated by the contents of LSD21 to 26. Note that if there iseven 1 incorrect data item in LSD21 to 26, the internal clock of the Touch is not updated.
• The display format for LSD31 is set under Screen No. Format in Project Settings. (BCD, BIN)
• This data format for LSD32 is the same as Screen No. Format in Project Settings. (BCD, BIN)
If the screen number is not exist in the project, “No Screen Data” message will appear.
If 0xFFFF(Hex) is written to LSD32, Touch will display the Top Page in the System Mode.
In case that the current screen is changed by System Area 1 and LSD32 at the same instant, the screen
number of the System Area 1 will be displayed.
• By using the LSD50 value in the Message Switching Display you can display the message that corresponds tothe cursor in the Alarm List Display.
• Refer to Chapter 20 “1.4 Script Error of HMI Function” on page 20-4 regarding LSD52 and LSD53.
• LSM7 and LSD6, 102 to 107 are not available for slave units when using O/I Link Communication.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

27-11

27
Internal Devices

LSD107 to 111

2 Word Devices

2.2 Control Device Addresses
Device Name

SymbolR/W

Address Range

Base

WI

R

0,40,60,80,100,120,140

10OutputWQ

R/W

0,40,60,80,100,120,140

10

Shift Register

WM

R/W

*2

0 to 11210Internal Relay

WR

R/W

0 to 1260*1

10Special Internal Relay

WM

R/W

8000 to 8160*1

10Timer Setting Value

TP

R/W

000 to 199

10

Timer Count ValueTC

R

000 to 199

10

Counter Setting Value

CP

R/W

000 to 199

10

Counter Count ValueCC

R

000 to 199

10

Data Register

D

R/W

0000 to 1999

10

Special Data Register

D

R/W

8000 to 8199

10

Input

R/W stands for Read/Write. R/W enables reading and writing of values, whereas R enables reading only.

■ Input (WI)
Devices for handling bit device inputs (I) in word units■ Output (WQ)
Devices for handling bit device outputs (Q) in word units■ Shift Register (WR)
Devices for handling bit device shift registers (R) in word units■ Internal Relay (WM)
Devices for handling bit device internal relays (M) in word units■ Special Internal Relay (WM)
Devices for handling bit device special internal relays (M) in word units■ Timer (TP, TC)
This timer is used internally by the Touch. These can be used as an ON delay Timer or OFF delay Timer.
■ Counter (CP, CC)
This counter is used internally by the Touch. These can be used as an addition type counter or reverse counter.
■ Data Register (D)This is a word unit device used for storing numerical data internally in the Touch. It can also be used as a bit unit
device.
• Control devices must have a "#" before the device type only when the WindO/I-NV3 is used.
In addition, on the Device Monitor a "#" is displayed before the device type.
Example: When setting D100
WindO/I-NV3:#D100

WindLDR:

D100• Do not simultaneously write values to the same control device using the HMI function and the control function.
• Operations in scripts of control function are as follows.
- Bit of Data register can be handled as a bit device.
- Calculations in which both bit and word devices are used are not allowed.
- Bit devices are always processed as bits, and values of those devices are 0(OFF) or 1(ON).
*1 Multiples of 20 only
*2 Multiples of 16 only

27-12

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Word Devices■ Special Data Register (D)This is a word unit device used for storing numerical data internally in the Touch. Each data register is assigned a
special function. It can also be used as a bit unit device.
Although the device code for the data registers (D0000 to D1999) and special data registers (D8000 to
D8199) is the same ("D"), the device characteristics are different. Special functions are assigned to eachspecial data register.
Do not change the data of reserved area, otherwise the Touch may not operate correctly.

DeviceAddress

Description

UpdatedLadder FBD

D8000

Quantity of Inputs
The total of input points provided on the Touch is stored to D8000.

When I/O
initialized

YES

YES

D8001

Quantity of Outputs
The total of output points provided on the Touch is stored to D8001.

When I/O
initialized

YES

YES

D8002

CPU Module Type Information
Information about the Touch is stored to D8002.
0: SmartAXIS Pro/Lite 12-I/O type
1: SmartAXIS Pro/Lite 24-I/O type
2: SmartAXIS Pro/Lite 40-I/O type
3: SmartAXIS Pro/Lite 48-I/O type
4: SmartAXIS Touch

Power-up

YES

YES

D8003,
8004

Reserved

―

―

―

D8005

General Error CodeSmartAXIS general error information is stored to D8005. When a general error
occurs, the bit corresponding to the error occurred turns on.
The general error and the program execution error can be cleared by writing “1”to the most significant bit of D8005 using a ladder program or FBD program.
For details, refer to Chapter 30 “2.1 General Error Codes” on page 30-3.

When error
occurred

YES

YES

27

D8006

Program Execution Error CodeThe ladder program or FBD program execution error information is stored toD8006. When a program execution error occurs, the error code corresponding to
the error occurred is stored to D8006.
For details, refer to Chapter 30 “2.2 Program Execution Error” on page 30-5.

When error
occurred

YES

YES

D8007

Reserved

Internal Devices

―

―

―

D8008

Year

Every 500 msec

YES

YES

D8009

Month

Every 500 msec

YES

YES

D8010

Day

Every 500 msec

YES

YES

Day ofWeek

Every 500 msec

YES

YES

D8012

Hour

Every 500 msec

YES

YES

D8013

MinuteEvery 500 msec

YES

YES

D8014

SecondEvery 500 msec

YES

YES

D8015

Year

―

YES

YES

D8011

Calendar/Clock Current Data (Read only)
Used to read calendar and clock data from the internal clock.

D8016

Month

―

YES

YES

D8017

Day

―

YES

YES

Day of
Week

―

YES

YES

D8018

Calendar/Clock New Data (Write only)
Used to write calendar and clock data to the internal clock.

D8019

Hour

―

YES

YES

D8020

Minute

―

YES

YES

D8021

Second

―

YES

YES

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual27-13

2 Word Devices

DeviceAddress

UpdatedLadder FBD

D8022

Reserved

―

―

D8023

Scan Time Data
Scan Time Current Value
Every scan
These are special data registers for checking theScan Time Maximum Value At occurrence
scan time.
For details, refer to Chapter 12 “Control function” on
Scan Time Minimum Value At occurrence
page 12-2.

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

Reserved

―

―

―

D8024
D8025
D8026 to
8032
D8033

―

Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No.
Jump destination label numbers for interrupt inputs are stored inthese special data registers. To use interrupt inputs, store the label
number that corresponds to the special data register allocated tothe interrupt input.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.9 Interrupt Input” on page 3-74.

I2

―

YES

―

I3

―

YES

―

I4

―

YES

―

D8036

Timer Interrupt Jump Destination Label No.
The jump destination label number when the timer interrupt occurs is stored in
D8036. To use the timer interrupt, store the corresponding label number.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.13 Timer Interrupt” on page 3-84.

―

YES

―

D8037

Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No.
Jump destination label numbers for interrupt inputs are stored inthese special data registers. To use interrupt inputs, store the label
number that corresponds to the special data register allocated tothe interrupt input.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.9 Interrupt Input” on page 3-74.

―

YES

―

D8038,
39

Reserved

―

―

―

AI0

Every scan

YES

YES

AI1

Every scan

YES

YES

AI0

Every scan

YES

YES

AI1

Every scan

YES

YES

AQ0

Every scan

YES

YES

AQ1

Every scan

YES

YES

AQ0

Every scan

YES

YES

AQ1

Every scan

YES

YES

―

―

―

Current Value

Every scan

YES

YES

Preset Value

―

YES

YES

Reset Value

―

YES

YES

D8034
D8035

D8040

D8041

D8042
D8043
D8044
D8045
D8046
D8047
D8048,
D8049
D8050
D8051
D8052
D8053
D8054
D8055

27-14

Description

Analog Input Value
The analog input values to the analog input terminals are converted
to digital values (0 to 1000) and stored to the corresponding special
data registers.
For FBD, a linear transformation can be configured for the analog
input (AI). Even when a linear transformation is configured for AI,
the special data registers store the analog values (0 to 1000) before
the linear transformation.
D8040=AI0, D8041=AI1
Analog Input Status
The analog input status to the analog input terminals is stored tothe corresponding special data registers.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.12 Analog Input” on page 3-81.
D8042 = AI0, D8043 = AI1
Analog Output Value
The analog output values to the analog output terminals are stored tothe corresponding special data registers in digital values.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.14 Analog Output” on page 3-86.
D8044 = AQ0, D8045 = AQ1
Analog Output Status
The analog output status to the analog output terminals is stored tothe corresponding special data registers.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.14 Analog Output” on page 3-86.
D8046 = AQ0, D8047 = AQ1
Reserved
High-Speed Counter (Group 1/I0)
These special data registers areused with the high-speed counterfunction.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.7High-Speed Counter” on page 3-55.

Upper Word
Lower Word
Upper Word
Lower Word
Upper Word
Lower Word

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

I5

2 Word Devices

DeviceAddress
D8056
D8057
D8058
D8059
D8060
D8061
D8062 to
8067
D8068
D8069
D8070
D8071
D8072
D8073
D8074 to8076

Description
High-Speed Counter (Group 2/I2)
These special data registers areused with the high-speed counterfunction and the frequency
measurement function.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.7High-Speed Counter” on page 3-55.

Upper Word

UpdatedLadder FBD

Every scan

YES

YES

Preset Value

―

YES

YES

Reset Value

―

YES

YES

―

―

―

Every scan

YES

YES

Preset Value

―

YES

YES

Reset Value

―

YES

YES

―

―

―

―

YES

YES

Current Value / Frequency
Measurement Value (I2)

Lower Word
Upper Word
Lower Word
Upper Word
Lower Word

Reserved
High-Speed Counter (Group 3/I3)
These special data registers areused with the high-speed counterfunction and the frequency
measurement function.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.7High-Speed Counter” on page 3-55.

Upper Word

Current Value / Frequency
Measurement Value (I3)

Lower Word
Upper Word
Lower Word
Upper Word
Lower Word

Reserved
Out of Analog Input Range Status
If the analog input signal exceeds 11 V or 21 mA, the corresponding bits of
D8077 (bit 0, 1) become 1. If the signal falls below 11 V or 21 mA, the bits
become 0.
If the analog input signal falls below 2 mA, the corresponding bits of D8077 (bit2, 3) become 1. If the signal exceeds 2 mA, the bits become 0.
The assignment of each analog input is as follows.

D8077

bit

bit

bit

15

8

7

bit

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

27
D8078 to8109
D8110 to8113
D8114 to8117
D8118 to
8121
D8122
D8123
D8124
D8125
D8126 to
8129
D8130
D8131
D8132
D8133

Reserved

IP Address of the Connected Slave
Special data registers used by remote I/O.
For details, refer to Chapter 12 “4.2 Remote I/O
Master” on page 12-47.
Cartridge Slot 1 Information
The information of the Cartridge Slot 1 is stored tothe special data registers. For details, refer to“Cartridge Slot Information” on page 27-18.
Cartridge Slot 2 Information
The information of the Cartridge Slot 2 is stored tothe special data registers. For details, refer to“Cartridge Slot Information” on page 27-18.

―

―

―

IP Address of theConnected Slave 1

Each second

YES

YES

IP Address of theConnected Slave 2

Each second

YES

YES

IP Address of theConnected Slave 3

Each second

YES

YES

Type ID/Status

―

YES

YES

System Software Version

―

YES

YES

Type ID/Status

―

YES

YES

System Software Version

―

YES

YES

―

―

―

Port Number of theConnected Slave 1

Each second

YES

YES

Port Number of theConnected Slave 2

Each second

YES

YES

Port Number of theConnected Slave 3

Each second

YES

YES

―

―

―

Reserved

Port Number of the Connected Slave
Special data registers used by remote I/O.
For details, refer to Chapter 12 “4.2 Remote I/O
Master” on page 12-47.
Reserved

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

27-15

Internal Devices

Analog input AI1 (Out of range error: minimum)
Analog input AI0 (Out of range error: minimum)
Analog input AI1 (Out of range error: maximum)
Analog input AI0 (Out of range error: maximum)2 Word Devices

DeviceAddress

UpdatedLadder FBD

Every scan

YES

YES

Preset Value

―

YES

YES

Reset Value

―

YES

YES

Every scan

YES

YES

Preset Value

―

YES

YES

Reset Value

―

YES

YES

―

―

―

Connection Error Status

When acommunication
error occurs

YES

YES

Analog input (AI10)

Every scan

YES

YES

Analog input (AI11)

Every scan

YES

YES

Analog input (AI12)

Every scan

YES

YES

Analog input (AI13)

Every scan

YES

YES

Analog input (AI14)

Every scan

YES

YES

D8154

Analog input (AI15)

Every scan

YES

YES

D8155

Analog input (AI16)

Every scan

YES

YES

D8156

Analog input (AI17)

Every scan

YES

YES

Connection Error Status

When acommunication
error occurs

YES

YES

Analog input (AI20)

Every scan

YES

YES

Analog input (AI21)

Every scan

YES

YES

Analog input (AI22)

Every scan

YES

YES

Analog input (AI23)

Every scan

YES

YES

Analog input (AI24)

Every scan

YES

YES

D8163

Analog input (AI25)

Every scan

YES

YES

D8164

Analog input (AI26)

Every scan

YES

YES

D8165

Analog input (AI27)

Every scan

YES

YES

Connection Error Status

When acommunication
error occurs

YES

YES

Analog input (AI30)

Every scan

YES

YES

Analog input (AI31)

Every scan

YES

YES

Analog input (AI32)

Every scan

YES

YES

Analog input (AI33)

Every scan

YES

YES

D8134
D8135
D8136
D8137
D8138
D8139
D8140
D8141
D8142
D8143
D8144
D8145
D8146,
8147

Description
High-Speed Counter(Group 4/I4)These special data registers areused with the high-speed counterfunction and the frequency
measurement function.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.7High-Speed Counter” on page 3-55.
High-Speed Counter (Group 5/I5)These special data registers areused with the high-speed counterfunction and the frequency
measurement function.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.7High-Speed Counter” on page 3-55.

Upper Word
Lower Word
Upper Word
Lower Word
Upper Word
Lower Word
Upper Word
Lower Word
Upper Word
Lower Word
Upper Word
Lower Word

D8149
D8151
D8152
D8153

Remote I/O Slave 1
Special data registers used by remote I/O.
For details, refer to Chapter 12 “4.2 Remote I/O
Master” on page 12-47.

D8157
D8158
D8159
D8160
D8161
D8162

Remote I/O Slave 2
Special data registers used by remote I/O.
For details, refer to Chapter 12 “4.2 Remote I/O
Master” on page 12-47.

D8166
D8167
D8168
D8169
D8170
D8171

Remote I/O Slave 3
Special data registers used by remote I/O.
For details, refer to Chapter 12 “4.2 Remote I/O
Master” on page 12-47.

Analog input (AI34)

Every scan

YES

YES

D8172

Analog input (AI35)

Every scan

YES

YES

D8173

Analog input (AI36)

Every scan

YES

YES

D8174

Analog input (AI37)

Every scan

YES

YES

―

―

―

D8175

27-16

Current Value / Frequency
Measurement Value (I5)Reserved

D8148

D8150

Current Value / Frequency
Measurement Value (I4)Reserved

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Word Devices

DeviceAddress

D8176

D8177

D8178

D8179
D8180 to
8185

D8186

D8187

D8189
D8190 to8199

Analog Input/Output Value to the Analog Cartridge (Port 1)• For the analog input typeThe analog input values to the analog cartridges are converted todigital values and stored to the corresponding special data registers.
• For the analog output typeThe analog output values to the analog cartridges are stored to thecorresponding special data registers in digital values.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.15 Analog Cartridge” on page 388.
D8176 = AI2/AQ2, D8177 = AI3/AQ3
Analog Status to the Analog Cartridge (Port 1)
The analog status to the analog cartridges is stored to thecorresponding special data registers.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.15 Analog Cartridge” on page 388.
D8178 = AI2/AQ2, D8179 = AI3/AQ3

UpdatedLadder FBD

AI2/AQ2

Every scan

YES

YES

AI3/AQ3

Every scan

YES

YES

AI2/AQ2

Every scan

YES

YES

AI3/AQ3

Every scan

YES

YES

―

―

―

AI4/AQ4

Every scan

YES

YES

AI5/AQ5

Every scan

YES

YES

Reserved
Analog Input/Output Value to the Analog Cartridge (Port 2)•For the analog input typeThe analog input values to the analog cartridges are converted todigital values and stored to the corresponding special dataregisters.
•For the analog output typeThe analog output values to the analog cartridges are stored tothe corresponding special data registers in digital values.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.15 Analog Cartridge” on page 388.
D8186 = AI4/AQ4, D8187 = AI5/AQ5
Analog Status to the Analog Cartridge (Port 2)
The analog status to the analog cartridges is stored to thecorresponding special data registers.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.15 Analog Cartridge” on page 388.
D8188 = AI4/AQ4, D8189 = AI5/AQ5Reserved

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

27
AI4/AQ4

Every scan

YES

YES

AI5/AQ5

Every scan

YES

YES

―

―

―

27-17

Internal Devices

D8188

Description

2 Word Devices

Cartridge Slot Information
The type IDs, status information, system software version of the digital I/O cartridge and the analog cartridge are
written to the special data registers as the cartridge slot information. The allocation of information is as follows.
Bit

15

14

13

12

11

10

Bit

Bit

8

7

9

Bit

6

5

4

3

2

1

D8122, D8124

StatusType ID

D8123, D8125

Reserved

System Software Version

0

D8122, D8123 = Cartridge Slot 1 Information
D8124, D8125 = Cartridge Slot 2 Information
The system software version displays the version of the software written to the cartridge.
Type ID List
Type ID

Type Number

Hexadecimal

Binary0x00

0000 0000

FC6A-PJ2A

0x01

0000 0001

FC6A-PK2AV

0x020000 0010

FC6A-PK2AW

0x03

0000 0011

FC6A-PJ2CP

0x090000 1001

FC6A-PTS4, FC6A-PTK4

0x0A

0000 1010

FC6A-PN4

0xFF

1111 1111

Not connected

Status List
Status27-18

Description

Hexadecimal

Binary0x00

0000 0000

Normal0x811000 0001

Communication error (An error has occurred in the communication
between the Touch and a cartridge.)

0x821000 0010

Unknown device is detected (The attached cartridge is not recognized by
the Touch.)

0x831000 0011

Device setting error (No cartridge is attached or the attached cartridge isdifferent from that set in the ladder program or the FBD program.)

0x84

1000 0100

Device writing error (The attempt to set the operation of the cartridge
failed.)SmartAXIS Touch User's ManualChapter 28 Touch Setup
This chapter describes the Touch setup screen and how to perform setup.

1

Maintenance Screen

1.1 Maintenance Screen Overview
You can display the Maintenance screen in Run Mode. It will allow you to access the System Mode, make Brightness/
Contrast adjustment, do Device Monitor, Ladder Monitor, and Start/Stop.
Color LCD models

Monochrome LCD models

Maintenance Screen functions are indicated below:
ButtonDescription

System Mode

In System Mode, you can specify the initial settings and initialize data of the Touch.
For details, refer to “2 System Mode Overview” on page 28-3.

Device Monitor

Shows the Device Monitor. This screen can be used to register devices and monitor and change
values of devices. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Device Monitor” on page 24-19.
Color LCD models:The control of brightness adjustment of the screen is displayed.
Adjusts the brightness of the screen.

Monochrome LCD models:The control of brightness and contrast adjustment of the screen isdisplayed. Adjusts the brightness and contrast of the screen.

Brightness/Contrast

Ladder Start/Stop*1
FBD Start/Stop*2

Manipulates start control (M8000) to run and stop the ladder program or FBD program operation.
While the ladder program operation is stopped, "Ladder STOP*1" or "FBD STOP*2" flashes at thelower-right corner of the Touch screen.

• If a password has been configured for the project data and press System Mode, Device Monitor or
Ladder Monitor, the Enter Password screen will be displayed. Select a user name, and then enter the
password. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 21-1.
• When the Stop Input or Reset Input is on, M8000 (Start Control) cannot control the state of the ladderprogram or FBD program (RUN/STOP).

*1 When ladder program is selected for control function*2 When FBD program is selected for control function

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

28-1

28
Touch Setup

Ladder Monitor

Ladder is displayed and allows you to monitor ladder programs. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.3
Ladder Monitor” on page 24-23. The Ladder Monitor only operates when ladder program is selected
as the programming language for the control function.

1 Maintenance Screen

1.2 Displaying the Maintenance Screen
Press the upper-left corner of the Touch screen for three seconds or more.
If the Base Screen is switched before three seconds have elapsed, the load operation for the Maintenance Screen will
be canceled. Please press it again.
Touch
Press and hold 3
or more seconds• To display the Maintenance Screen, select the Enable Maintenance check box under the System tabin the Project Settings dialog box.
• If a touch switch is placed in the upper-left corner of the screen, switching to the Maintenance Screen
will not be possible.

1.3 Adjusting Screen Brightness
1 On the Maintenance screen, press Brightness (Color LCD models), or Brightness/Contrast (Monochrome LCD
models).

Color LCD models

2 Pressor

Monochrome LCD models

to adjust to your preferred brightness.
Color LCD models

Monochrome LCD models

You can also adjust the screen brightness and contrast by using the following items.
•orbuttons on the Top Page in System Mode
• The values of HMI Special Data Registers
Brightness: LSD51
Contrast*1: LSD55*1 Monochrome LCD models only

28-2

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 System Mode Overview

2

System Mode Overview
The System Mode allows you to access the internal Touch initial settings, self diagnosis, and clearing logged data. In
this mode, the project in the Touch will not be running.

2.1 System Mode ScreensIn the System Mode, the content of the Top Page appears. (as shown below).
Color LCD models

Monochrome LCD models

パスワード

For information on accessing the Touch System Mode, refer to “1.2 Displaying the Maintenance Screen” onpage 28-2.
The following items are included on the Top Page and Main Menu. When you press the button of an item theoperation and settings screen for that item will be displayed.

■ Top Page
Item

Descriptions

See page

Run

Switches to Run Mode.

Page 28-9

Main Menu

Displays the Main Menu.

Page 28-3

Item

Descriptions

See page

Initial Setting

Allows adjustment of settings relating to operation,communication parameters, and log data of the Touch.

Page 28-5

Clock Setting

Allows setting of the internal clock of the Touch.

Page 28-9

Run

Switches to Run Mode.

Page 28-9

System Info.

Displays information relating to the type number,project, as well as runtime system of the Touch.

Page 28-9

Top Page

Moves to the Top Page.

Page 28-10

Self Diag.

Executes self diagnosis of memory, the touch panel, display,communication and other self diagnosis.

Page 28-10

The screens under the Top Page in the System Mode are displayed in English only.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual28-3

Touch Setup■ Main Menu

28

2 System Mode Overview

2.2 Names and Layout of Setup Menus
Main Menu

Initial Setting

System Op.

Backlight
Start Time
Details
Default Scr. No.
Password
AutorunInitialize

Alarm Log
Data Log
Op. Log
Touch PnlAdj

Comm. Driver

Retry Cycles
Time OutTrans. Wait
Parameter1
Parameter2
Parameter3
Parameter4

O/I Link

O/I Link Set1
O/I Link Set2

Comm. I/F

RS232C
RS422/485
IP Address

TP/CP Change
Clock Setting

Ext. IP Address

Run
System Info.

Default Gateway
Misc Setting

SystemSystem2
Font

Top Page
Self Diag.

Memory
Display

LCD
Draw
Brightness
Backlight
BuzzerContrast

Touch Panel

Trace
Fixed Points

Comm.
I/O

IN OUT
HSC

Seq. Check

28-4

Sequent

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Settings

3

Settings

3.1 Initial Setting
Press Initial Setting on the Main Menu to display the initial setting screen. You can use this screen to input thesettings for Touch operation and communication parameters, and to clear the logs. To return to the Main Menu, press
Main Menu at the top of the screen.
● System Op. (System Operation)
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, and then System Op. to display the system operation menu screen.
You can use this screen to set the items below. Press the button for each item to set it.
• To return to the initial settings screen, press Init Set at the top of the screen.
• To return to the system operation menu screen from any of the settings screens below, press System
Op. at the top of the screen.

■ Backlight
This item sets the amount of time (in minutes) until the backlight turns off automatically when the screen is nottouched or switched for a preset amount of time.
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, System Op., and then Backlight.
To set a value, enter the value using the Keypad, and then press ENT.
Press CAN to cancel the entered value and display the currently set value.
• The setting is not updated if you display another screen before pressing ENT.
• Setting a time of 0 turns off the backlight automatically.
■ Start Time
This item sets the amount of time (in minutes) until communication with the external device starts after Touch power
ON. This can be used to synchronize boot times with the external device.

Touch Setup

From the main menu, press Initial Setting, System Op., and then Start Time.
To set a value, enter the value using the Keypad, and then press ENT.
Press CAN to cancel the entered value and display the currently set value.
The setting is not updated if you display another screen before applying the setting.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

28

28-5

3 Settings■ Details (Detailed Settings)
The following items can be set.
• Whether or not to have a sound made when a touch switch is pressed.
• Select the screen number to be displayed as a binary number or BCD (binary coded decimal).
• To set blink cycle.
• Display the error message in Japanese or English.
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, System Op., and then Details.
Select the item to change using ▲ or ▼ . The selected item is highlighted.
Each press of CHG changes the property of the selected item. Repeat this procedure until the desired properties are
displayed.
Press ENT to apply the changes.
The setting is not updated if you display another screen before applying the setting.

■ Default Scr. No. (Default Screen Number)This item sets the No. (as a decimal value) of the screen to display after power ON.
From the main menu, press Initial Setting, System Op., and then Default Scr. No.
To set a value, use the keypad to enter a value.
Press ENT on the keypad to apply the value entered.
Press CAN to cancel the entered value and display the currently set value.
• The setting is not updated if you display another screen before applying the setting.
• If the Default Scr. No. is set to 0, Touch will display the screen set in the external device instead of the
Default Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 3 “System Area 1” on page 3-23.
■ Password
Specifies a password to use to move to System Mode. This changes the password for the "Administrator" Security
Group of the WindO/I-NV3.
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, System Op., and then Password.
Press Change Password to display the password input screen.
To enter a password, use the arrow keys (↑, ↓, ←, →), to move the cursor to a selected character and then press
ENT.
Once the the password is entered, move the cursor to OK, and then press ENT to confirm the password entered. To
cancel changing the password, move the cursor to CAN, and then press ENT.
To clear the password input field, move the cursor to CLR, and then press ENT.
• If you want to return to the password screen and decide not to change the password, move the cursor to
the CAN and press ENT on the password input screen.
• Pressing ENT without entering a password disables the password function.
• When you do not assign a password to a project data, the Password is blank.
• If you forget your password, contact for sales representative.
■ Autorun
You have the option to enable or disable the USB Autorun function.
When Autorun is enabled, Autorun function will be executed when a USB flash drive is inserted to the Touch.
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, System Op., and then Autorun.
The setting is not updated if you display another screen before applying the setting.

28-6

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Settings● Initialize
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, and then Initialize to display the initialization menu screen.
You can use this screen to set the following items. Press the button for each item to set it.
• To return to the initial settings screen, press Init Set at the top of the screen.
• To return to the initialization menu screen from any of the settings screens below, press Init at the top of
the screen.
■ Alarm Log
Clears all the Alarm Log data.
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, Initialize, and then Alarm Log.
Press Yes to clear the Alarm Log data.
■ Data Log
Clears all the Data Log data.
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, Initialize, and then Data Log.
Press Yes to clear the Data Log data.
■ Op. Log (Operation Log)
Clears all the Operation Log data.
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, Initialize, and then Op. Log.
Press Yes to clear the Operation Log data.
■ Touch PnlAdj (Touch Panel Adjust)
Adjusts the analog touch panel.
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, Initialize, and then Touch PnlAdj.
Press Yes and adjust according to the instructions on the screen.

28
Touch Setup

Press the center ofthe symbol.

Press the center ofdisplayed on the screen, in the following order: lower-left corner, lower-rightcorner, upper-left corner, upper-right corner of the Touch screen. The position of the analog touch
panel is properly adjusted and set.

● Comm. Driver (Communication Driver)
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, and then Comm. Driver to display the communication driver menu
screen.
To specify settings, press the button to select a choice. Comm. Driver setting items vary based on the currently
connected hardware. For details about settings, refer to the "External Device Setup Manual".
If No External Devices are selected from the Communication Driver, some settings cannot be modified.
To return to the initial settings screen, press Init Set at the top of the screen.

● O/I Link
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, and then O/I Link to display the O/I link menu screen.
This screen displays information on the O/I Link.
(Various settings can be made by pressing O/I Link Set 1 and O/I Link Set 2.)• To return to the initial settings screen, press Init Set at the top of the screen.
• For details about settings, refer to the "External Device Setup Manual".

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual28-7

3 Settings● Comm. I/F (Communication Interface)
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, and then Comm. I/F to display the communication interface settings
menu screen.
You can use this screen to set the items below. Press the button for each item to set.
• To return to the initial settings screen, press Init Set at the top of the screen.
• Press Comm. I/F at the top of the screen to return to the communication interface settings menu
screen.
■ RS232C
Allows the setting of communication parameters for the Serial Interface Port (RS232C).
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, Comm. I/F, and then RS232C.
■ RS422/485
Allows the setting of communication parameters for the Serial Interface Port (RS422/485).
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, Comm. I/F, and then RS422/485.
■ IP Address
Allows the setting of the IP address and subnet mask.
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, Comm. I/F, and then IP Address.
Press <-- or --> to select an item, and then use the Keypad to enter the IP address and subnet mask values.
Press ENT to apply the entered values.
The setting is not updated if you display another screen before applying the setting.

■ Default Gateway
Specify the default gateway.
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, Comm. I/F, and then Default Gateway.
Press <-- or --> to select an item, and then use the Keypad to enter the default gateway value. Press ENT to apply
the entered value.
The setting is not updated if you display another screen before applying the setting.

■ Misc Setting (Miscellaneous Setting)Specify whether to allow or prohibit Maintenance Communication via TCP/IP (refer to Chapter 23 “Using the online
function for Ethernet communication” on page 23-7).
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, Comm. I/F, and then Misc Setting.
Each press of CHG changes the property of the selected item. Repeat this procedure until the desired properties are
displayed.
Press ENT to apply the entered value.
The setting is not updated if you display another screen before applying the setting.

■ Ext. IP Address (External Device IP Address)
Changes the IP addresses for the external device.
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, Comm. I/F, and then Ext. IP Address.
Procedure

1 Press <-- or --> to select the station number, and then enter the station number value with the numeric keypad.
2 Press ENT to confirm the entered value. The IP address for the selected station number is displayed.
3 Press <-- or --> to select the item, and then enter the IP address with the numeric keypad.
4 Press ENT to confirm the entered value.
5 Press SAVE to save the settings.
If you switch to another screen or change the station number before pressing SAVE, the settings are notsaved.

28-8

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Settings● TP/CP Change (Change the Timer and counter preset value)
Saves the control device timer and counter preset values.
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, and then TP/CP Change.
If you press SAVE, the modified values are saved and the project data is updated.
If you press CLEAR, the modified values are restored to the values configured in the project data.

3.2 Clock Setting
Press Clock Setting in the Main Menu to display the clock settings screen.
Use this screen to set the internal clock of the Touch.
To return to the Main Menu, press Main Menu at the top of the screen.
Procedure

1 Press <-- or --> to select an item and then the date or time with the numerical keypad.
2 Press ENT to apply the new setting.
3 Press SAVE to save the date/time setting.
The setting is not updated if you display another screen before applying the setting.

3.3 RunSwitches to the Run Mode to execute the project.

3.4 System Info. (System Information)
From the Main Menu, press System Info., and then press System or System 2 to display the system information screen.
This screen displays information such as the Touch type number, the type and version number of runtime system.

28

To return to the Main Menu, press Main Menu at the top of the screen.

Touch Setup

Only the first 15 characters of the project name are displayed.

● System
From the Main Menu, press System Info. and then System.
Displays the following settings:• Touch type number• MAC address• Boot software version• Runtime system version
To return to the system information screen, press System Info. at the top of the screen.
● System 2
From the main menu, press System Info. and then System 2.
Displays the following settings:• Project file name
• External device manufacturer• Communication protocol• Communication driver version
To return to the system information screen, press System Info. at the top of the screen.
● FontFrom the Main Menu, press System Info., and then Font.
Displays the font type stored in Touch.
To return to the system information screen, press System Info. at the top of the screen.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual28-9

3 Settings

3.5 Top Page
Press Top Page in the Main Menu to return to the Top Page.

3.6 Self Diag. (Self Diagnosis)
From the Main Menu, press Self Diag. to display the self-diagnosis screen.
Use this screen to run Touch internal self-diagnosis. To execute an operation, press the corresponding button.
To return to the Main Menu, press Main Menu at the top of the screen.
• You need inspection jigs to run self-diagnosis.
• Self Diagnosis is a special screen for factory inspections. Do not use without due reason.

28-10

SmartAXIS Touch User's ManualChapter 29 SmartAXIS Specifications
1

Touch

1.1 Packing Contents
Before installing the Touch, make sure that the specifications of the product conform to your requirements, and thatno parts are missing or damaged due to accidents during transportation.
Name

Pcs/pack

1

Instruction Sheet

1

Mounting clips

2

Power plug
(Attached to the Touch)1

Communication I/F plug
(Attached to the Touch)1

USB Cable Lock Pin

2

USB Clamp Band2

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

29
SmartAXIS Specifications

Touch Unit

29-1

1 Touch

1.2 Type Number
LCD size

I/O configuration

FT1A-M12RA-W

Dark gray

FT1A-M12RA-B

SilverFT1A-M12RA-S

Digital source in: 6pt
Shared digital sink in/analog in: 2pt
Transistor sink out: 4pt
Analog out: 2pt

Light gray

FT1A-M14KA-W

Dark gray

FT1A-M14KA-B

SilverFT1A-M14KA-S

Digital sink in: 6pt
Shared digital sink in/analog in: 2pt
Transistor source out: 4pt
Analog out: 2pt

Light gray

FT1A-M14SA-W

Dark gray

FT1A-M14SA-B

SilverFT1A-M14SA-S

Light gray

FT1A-C12RA-W

Dark gray

FT1A-C12RA-B

Digital sink in: 6pt
Shared digital sink in/analog in: 2pt
Relay out: 4pt

3.8inch TFT Color LCD

29-2

Type No.

Light gray

Digital sink in: 6pt
Shared digital sink in/analog in: 2pt
Relay out: 4pt
3.7inch STN Monochrome
LCD

Bezel color

SilverFT1A-C12RA-S

Digital source in: 6pt
Shared digital sink in/analog in: 2pt
Transistor sink out: 4pt
Analog out: 2pt

Light gray

FT1A-C14KA-W

Dark gray

FT1A-C14KA-B

SilverFT1A-C14KA-S

Digital sink in: 6pt
Shared digital sink in/analog in: 2pt
Transistor source out: 4pt
Analog out: 2pt

Light gray

FT1A-C14SA-W

Dark gray

FT1A-C14SA-B

SilverFT1A-C14SA-S

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 Touch

1.3 Part Names■ FT1A-*12RA

(3)

(6)

(7)

(1), (2)

(4)

(8)

(9)

(5)

No.

Name

Description

Display(2)

Touch Panel(3)

Power Supply Terminal

Connector : Terminal Block 3 pin(4)Serial Interface (Port)

RS232C, RS422/485
Connector : Terminal Block 9 pin(5)Ethernet Interface (Ethernet)

IEEE802.3u
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Connector : RJ-45(6)

USB Interface (USB1)

USB2.0 (Device)
Connector : Mini-B(7)

USB Interface (USB2)

USB1.1 (External device)
Connector : Type A(8)

Output Terminal (Q0 to Q3)

Relay output (10A)(9)

Input Terminal (I0 to I7)

Digital input, Analog input

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

29
SmartAXIS Specifications

(1)

29-3

1 Touch■ FT1A-*14KA/14SA

(3)

(10)

(4)

(8)

(11)

(6)

(1), (2)

(9)

(5)

No.
(1)

Description

Display(2)

Touch Panel(3)

Power Supply Terminal

Connector : Terminal Block 3 pin(4)Serial Interface (Port)

RS232C, RS422/485
Connector : Terminal Block 9 pin(5)Ethernet Interface (Ethernet)

IEEE802.3u
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Connector : RJ-45(6)

USB Interface (USB1)

USB2.0 (Device)
Connector : Mini-B(7)

USB Interface (USB2)

USB1.1 (External device)
Connector : Type A(8)

Output Terminal (Q0 to Q3, AQ0 to AQ1)

Transistor output, analog output(9)Input Terminal (I0 to I7)

Digital input, Analog input

Slot 1

Optional product (analog cartridge) expansion•FC6A-PJ2A•FC6A-PK2AV•FC6A-PK2AW•FC6A-PJ2CP

Slot 2

Optional product (analog cartridge) expansion•FC6A-PJ2A•FC6A-PK2AV•FC6A-PK2AW•FC6A-PJ2CP

(10)

(11)

29-4

Name

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual(7)

1 Touch

1.4 External Interfaces

CAUTION• Make sure to turn off the power to the Touch before wiring each interface.
• Do not touch the terminals during communication. Doing so may result in electrical shock.
• When keeping power ON, terminals connected to external devices may reach high temperatures. Do not touch
the terminals immediately after turning the power off.
• Do not touch the terminals immediately after turning the power off. Doing so may result in electrical shock.
• Insert and crimp the wire to the end portion of the ferrule.
• Always use ferrules when wiring stranded wire and multiple wires to the terminal block. Otherwise there is a riskof wires becoming disconnected.

● Serial Interface (Port)Interface Specification

RS232C, RS422/485

Connector

Detachable Terminal Block 9 pin

Applicable cable

RS232C: AWG16 to AWG28
RS422/485: AWG16 to AWG28 Shielded twisted-pair
Stripped wire length 7 mm (Solid wire)

Recommended ferrule

AI 0.34-8 TQ (For AWG22, For 1 wire)
AI 0.5-8 WH (For AWG20, For 1 wire)
AI-TWIN2 x 0.5-8 WH (For AWG20, For 2 wires)(Phoenix Contact)

Tightening Torque0.25 N•m (Screwdriver SZS 0.4 x 2.5, Phoenix Contact)

No.

Name

I/O

FunctionSD

OUT

Send Data

2

RD

IN

Receive Data

3

RS

OUT

Request to Send

4

CS

IN

Clear to Send

5

SG

―

Signal Ground

6

SDA

OUT

Send Data (+)

7

SDB

OUT

Send Data (-)

8

RDA

IN

Receive Data (+)

9

RDB

IN

Receive Data (-)

RS232C

RS422/485

The Touch is not equipped with terminating resistance. When using the RS422/485 interface, insert
terminating resistance with the appropriate value (around 100 to 120 Ω) between terminal No. 8 (RDA)
and terminal No. 9 (RDB) as required.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

29-5

29
SmartAXIS Specifications

1

Communication type

1 Touch● I/O Terminals■ FT1A-*12RA
Applicable cable

AWG16 to AWG22
Stripped wire length 6.5 mm, coating diameter φ3.4 mm or lower (Solid wire)

Recommended ferrule

AI 0.34-8 TQ (For AWG22, For 1 wire)
AI 0.5-8 WH (For AWG20, For 1 wire)
AI 0.75-8 GY (For AWG18, For 1 wire)
AI 1-10 RD (For AWG18, For 1 wire)
AI 1.5-10 BK (For AWG16, For 1 wire)
AI TWIN 2 x 0.75 10GY (For AWG18, For 2 wires)(Phoenix Contact)

Tightening Torque

0.5 to 0.6 N•m (Screwdriver SZS 0.6 x 3.5, Phoenix Contact)■ FT1A-*14KA/14SA
Applicable cable

AWG20 to AWG22
Stripped wire length 5 mm, coating diameter φ2.6 mm or lower (Solid wire)

Recommended ferrule

AI 0.34-8 TQ (For AWG22, For 1 wire)
AI 0.5-8 WH (For AWG20, For 1 wire)
AI-TWIN2 x 0.5-8 WH (For AWG20, For 2 wires)(Phoenix Contact)

Tightening Torque

0.2 N•m (Screwdriver SZS 0.4 x 2.5, Phoenix Contact)

Terminal Arrangement
Terminal Arrangement and I/O Wiring Diagrams■ FT1A-*12RA

Power supply terminal

1 SD
5 SG

Port

9 RDB
Ry OUT

Q0 COM0

Q1 COM1Q2 COM2Q3 COM3

L

L

L

L

: Fuse

29-6

DC IN

I0

L : Load

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

I1

I2

I3

2-wireSensor

I4

I5

I6

I7

Analog voltage
output device

1 Touch■ FT1A-*14KA

Power supply terminal

1 SD
5 SG

Port
DC IN

9 RDB
Tr. OUT

Q0

Q1

Q2

Q3

L

L

L

L

AI0
(+)

Analog OUT

COM
(-)

V
(+)

AQ0
(+)

AQ0
(-)

Analog voltage/current input device

AQ1
(+)

AQ1
(-)

I0

I1

I2

Analog voltage/current input device

I3

I4

I5

AI0
(-)

I6

AI1
(+)

AI1
(-)

I7

Analog voltage/current input device

2-wireSensor

L : Load: Fuse■ FT1A-*14SA

Power supply terminal

1 SD
5 SG

29

Port

Tr. OUT

Q0

Q1

Q2

Q3

L

L

L

L

AI0
(+)

Analog OUT

COM
(+)

V
(-)

AQ0
(+)

AQ0
(-)

AQ1
(+)

AQ1
(-)

I0

I1

Analog voltage/
Analog voltage/current input device current input device: FuseSmartAXIS Specifications

DC IN

9 RDB

I2

I3

2-wireSensor

I4

I5

I6

AI0
(-)

AI1
(+)

AI1
(-)

I7

Analog voltage/current input device

L : Load

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual29-7

1 Touch● Input Terminal Specifications
Input Points

8

Rated Input Voltage

24V DC

Input Voltage Range

0 to 28.8V DC

Effect of Improper
Input Connection

No damage.
(If any input exceeding the rated value is applied, permanent damage may be caused.)

Digital Input Specifications
Sink (FT1A-*12RA/14SA)

Input Type

Source (FT1A-*14KA)

Input Points(Terminal No. /Common Line Name)

6 points in 1 common line
(I0 to I5/Power supply "-" terminal)

Rated Input Current

4.4mA (Sink Input)
5.2mA (Source Input)

Input Impedance

5.5kΩ (Sink Input)
4.7kΩ (Source Input)

Input System
Transfer Time
Isolation

OFF → ON

2.5 μs + filter value

ON → OFF

5 μs + filter value

Between input
terminals

Not isolatedInternal circuit

Not isolated

Input TypeType1 (IEC61131-2)

External Load for I/O Interconnection

Not needed

Signal Determination Method

StaticCable Length(in compliance with EMC standards)

3m

Analog Input Specifications■ FT1A-*12RA
Input Signal Type

Voltage Input

Input Points(Terminal No. /Common Line Name)

2 points in 1 common line
(I6, I7/internal -terminal, SG terminal for Port)

Input Range

0 to 10V DC

Rated Input Current

0.3mA

Input Impedance

78.0KΩ

Digital Resolution

0 to 1,000 (850 steps)

Data Type
Input Value of LSB

Binary data: 0 to 1000
*1

11.7mV

Type of Input
AD Conversion

Input Error

GeneralCharacteristics

Single-ended input
Sample Duration Time

2 msec max.

Sample Repetition Time

2 msec max.

Total Input System Transfer Time

3 msec + filtering time + scan time

Maximum Error at 25°C

±3.0% of full scale

Temperature Coefficient±0.04% of full scale/°C

Maximum Error±5.0% of full scale

Operating Mode

Self-scan

Conversion MethodΣ∆ type

Status Display

Device Monitor screen (LCD)

Maximum Temporary Error during Electrical Noise Tests±5.0% of full scale

Recommended Cable for Noise Immunity

Twisted pair shielded cable*1 This value may vary by device.

29-8

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 Touch

Calibration or Verification to Maintain Rated Accuracy

Not possible

Maximum Permanent Allowed Overload (No Damage)

28.8V DC

Overload Status (Outside Input Range) Detection

Detectable

Isolation

Used as Digital
Input

Between input terminals

Not isolated

Between input and internal circuit

Not isolated

Digital Input Type— (IEC 61131-2 digital input type is not supported)
ON voltage: 15V min. (ON current: 0.20 mA min.)

Input Threshold

OFF voltage: 5V max. (OFF current: 0.06 mA max.)■ FT1A-*14KA/14SA
Input Signal Type

Voltage/current input (selectable with software)

Input Points(Terminal No. /Common Line Name)

1 point in 1 common line
AI0+, AI1+/ AI0-, AI1-

Input Range

0 to 10V DC (Voltage Input)
4 to 20mA (Current Input)

Input Impedance

78.0KΩ (Voltage Input)
250Ω (Current Input)

Digital Resolution

0 to 1,000 (850 steps)

Data Type

Binary data: 0 to 1000

Input Value of LSB*1

11.7mV (Voltage Input)
16μA (Current Input)

Type of Input

Single-ended input

AD Conversion

Input Error

2 msec max.

Sample Repetition Time

2 msec max.

Total Input System Transfer Time

3 msec + filtering time + scan time (Voltage Input)
12 msec + filtering time + scan time (Current Input)

Maximum Error at 25°C

±3.0% of full scale

Temperature Coefficient±0.04%/°C of full scale

Maximum Error±5.0% of full scale

Operating Mode

Self-scan

Conversion Method

SAR

Status Display

Device Monitor screen (LCD)

Maximum Temporary Error during Electrical Noise Tests±5.0% of full scale

Recommended Cable for Noise Immunity

Twisted pair shielded cable

Calibration or Verification to Maintain Rated Accuracy

Not possible

Maximum Permanent Allowed Overload (No Damage)

28.8V DC (Voltage Input)
40mA (Current Input)

Overload Status (Outside Input Range) Detection

Detectable

Isolation

Used as Digital
Input

Between input terminals

Not isolated

Between input and internal circuit

Not isolated

Digital Input Type— (IEC 61131-2 digital input type is not supported)

Input Threshold

29
SmartAXIS Specifications

GeneralCharacteristics

Sample Duration TimeON voltage: 15V min. (ON current: 0.20 mA min.)OFF voltage: 5V max. (OFF current: 0.06 mA max.)*1 This value may vary by device.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual29-9

1 Touch

Equivalent Circuit■ FT1A-*12RA
Sink Input (I0 to I5)

Shared Digital/Analog Input (I6, I7)

4.3kΩ

1.2kΩ

Internal Circuit

Input
circuit

56kΩ

Input
circuit22kΩ

Internal Circuit

24V DC

24V DCOVOV■ FT1A-*14KA
Source Input (I0 to I5)

Shared Digital/Analog Input (I6, I7)Internal Circuit

4.7kΩ
47kΩ

Input
circuit

24V DC

24V DC

10kΩ

Internal Circuit

24V DC56kΩ

Input
circuit

120kΩ
22kΩ

130kΩ

0V

0V
0V

■ FT1A-*14SA
Sink Input (I0 to I5)

Shared Digital/Analog Input (I6, I7)

4.3kΩ

1.2kΩ

OV

29-10

Internal Circuit

Input
circuit

56kΩ

Input
circuit

120kΩ
22kΩ

130kΩ

0V

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

0V

Internal Circuit

24V DC

24V DC1 Touch

Operating Range
Sink Input (I0 to I5)

Source Input

Input Voltage (V DC)

Input Voltage (V DC)

28.8V

28.8V
ON Area

ON Area

24V

24V

15V

15V
Transition Area

Transition Area

5V

5V
OFF Area

OFF Area
Input Current (mA)

0.9mA 2.7mA

4.4mA

Input Current (mA)

5.3mA

-1.0mA -3.0mA-5.2mA -6.2mA

Shared Digital/Analog Input (I6, I7)
Input Voltage (V DC)
28.8V
ON Area
24V

15V
Transition Area
5V
OFF Area
Input Current (mA)
0.06mA

0.2mA0.3mA 0.37mA● Output Specifications
Relay Output Specifications■ FT1A-*12RA
No. of Outputs (Terminal No.)

4 (Q0 to Q3)

Output Type1a contact

Maximum Load Current

10A

Minimum Switching Load

10 mA/5V DC (reference value)

Initial Contact Resistance

100 mΩ max. (1A, 6V DC)
100,000 operations min. (rated load 1,800 operations/hour)

Mechanical Life

20,000,000 operations min. (no load 18,000 operations/hour)

Rated Load

250V AC/10A, 30V DC/10A

Dielectric Strength

Between output
terminal andinternal circuit

SmartAXIS Specifications

Electrical Life29

2,300V AC 5mA, 1 minuteBetween output
terminals (COMs)
Status Display

Device Monitor screen (LCD display)

Output Delay
ON

CommandOFF
ON

Output Relay Status
OFF

OFF delay: 330 msec max.
Chatter:
6 msec max.
ON delay: 6 msec max.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual29-11

1 Touch

Transistor Output Specifications■ FT1A-*14KA/SA
No. of Outputs (Terminal No.)

4 (Q0 to Q3)

Output TypeSink output (FT1A-*14KA)
Source output (FT1A-*14SA)

Rated Load

24V DCOperating Load Voltage Range

20.4 to 28.8V DC

Maximum Load Current

0.3A

Voltage Drop (ON voltage)

1V max. (Voltage between COM and output terminal when ON)

Maximum Inrush Current

1A

Leakage Current

0.1 mA max.

Clamping Voltage

39V ±1V

Maximum Lamp Load

8W

Inductive Load

L/R=10 ms (28.8V DC, 1 Hz)

External Current Draw

100 mA max., 24V DC
Sink output: power voltage at the +V terminal
Source output: power voltage at the +COM terminal

Isolation

Photocoupler isolated

Status Display

Device Monitor screen (LCD display)

Equivalent Circuit■ FT1A-*14KA/SA
Sink Output (Q0 to Q3)

Source Output (Q0 to Q3)
V (+)

COM (+)

Internal Circuit

Internal Circuit
OutputCOM ( )

29-12

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

OutputV()

1 TouchAnalog Output Specifications■ FT1A-*14KA/SA
No. of Outputs (Terminal No.)

2 (AQ0 to AQ1)

Output Type

Voltage/current output

Output Range

0 to 10 V (Voltage output)
4 to 20 mA (Current output)

Output Load

Impedance

2 kΩ min. (Voltage output)
500 Ω max. (Current output)

Load Type

Resistance load

Digital Resolution

0 to 1,000 (10bit)

Output Value of LSB

10 mV (Voltage output)
16 μA (Current output)

Data Type

Binary data: 0 to 1000

Monotonicity

Output Error

Yes
Maximum Error at
25°C±0.3% of full scale

Temperature
Coefficient±0.02%/°C of full Scale

Reproducibility
After Stabilization
Time±0.4% of full scale

Non-linearity±0.01% of full scale

Output Ripple

30 mV max.

Overshoot0%*1

Maximum Error
Open Current Loop

±1.0% of full scale
Cannot be detected29
SmartAXIS Specifications*1 Overshoot may occur at light loads.
The occurrence of overshoot can be controlled by inserting damping resistance into the circuit. A general guide for thedamping resistance value is about 150 Ω including the input line impedance for the destination.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual29-13

1 Touch

1.5 Specifications■ Applicable Standards
Safety Standard

UL508
CSA C22.2 No.142 (c-UL)

EMC Standard*1

IEC/EN 61131-2:2007■ Environmental Specifications
Operating Temperature
Relative Humidity

0 to 55°C: FT1A-M (Monochrome LCD models)*2 (No freezing)-20 to 55°C: FT1A-C (Color LCD models)*2 (No freezing)
10 to 95% RH (No condensation)

Storage Temperature-20 to +60°C (No freezing)

Storage Humidity

10 to 95% RH (No condensation)

AltitudeOperation: 0 to 2,000m
Transport: 0 to 3,000m

Pollution Degree2

Corrosion Immunity

Free from corrosive gases■ Electrical Specifications
FT1A-*12RA
Rated Voltage

24V DCPower Consumption

9.2W max.

Power Voltage Range

20.4 to 28.8V DC

Allowable Momentary PowerInterruption

10 msec max.

Inrush Current

50A max.

Dielectric Strength

Between power and FE terminals: 500V AC, 5mA,1 minuteBetween power and output terminals: 2,300V AC, 5mA, 1 minute

When USB2 is unused: 5.8W max.

FT1A-*14KA/SA
Rated Voltage

24V DCPower Consumption

10.1W max.

Power Voltage Range

20.4 to 28.8V DC

Allowable Momentary PowerInterruption

11 msec max.

Inrush Current

50A max.

Dielectric Strength

Between power and FE terminals: 500V AC, 5mA,1 minuteBetween power and output terminals: 500V AC, 5mA, 1 minute

When USB2 is unused: 8.1W max.

■ Construction Specifications
Vibration Resistance

5 to 8.4Hz amplitude 3.5mm, 8.4 to 150Hz acceleration 9.8m/s2
10 times on each of three mutually perpendicular axes (100 minutes) (IEC61131-2)

Shock Resistance

147m/s2, 11ms (5 shocks on each of three mutually perpendicular axes)(IEC61131-2)*1 When using the Touch as the EMC Standard Approved Products, attach a ferrite core (ZCAT3035-1330 manufactured by TDK
Corporation) to the power cables and the communication cables.
If there a risk of an error occurring due to noise, install the product separated from sources of noise such as power lines,
high voltage lines, and load lines. Also attach a ferrite core to the I/O cable (ZCAT3035-1330 manufactured by TDK
Corporation).
*2 FT1A-*12RA-*: The UL and c-UL certified operating temperature is 0 to 50ºC.

29-14

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 Touch■ Performance Specifications
Type Number

Display

FT1A-M (Monochrome LCD models)

FT1A-C (Color LCD models)

LCD Type

STN Monochrome LCD

TFT Color LCD

Display Colors

2 Colors (Black, White) 8 shades

65,536 Colors

Effective Display Area [mm]87.59(W) × 35.49 (H)88.92 (W) × 37.05 (H)Display Resolution

240 (W) x 100 (H) pixels

View angle

Left/Right/Top/Bottom: 45°

Left/Right: 40°, Top: 20°, Bottom: 60°

Contrast Adjustment

32 levels–

Brightness of LCD only

Touch
Panel

2

White: 740 [cd/m ]Red: 135 [cd/m2]

Brightness Adjustment

32 levels

Backlight

LED (White, Red)
Screen color: White, Pink, Red

Backlight Life*2

50,000 hours nominal

Switch Type

Analog Resistive Film

Operating Force

0.2 to 2.5 N

Multiple Operations

Impossible

Life

400 [cd/m2]

LED (White)

1,000,000 operations

User Memory

5MB

Backup Battery*3

Lithium secondary battery
Backup Duration: Approx. 30 days (typical) (Operating temperature: 25°C)
Charging Time: Approx. 15 hours for charging from 0% to 90% of full charge
Battery Life: 5 years in cycles of 9-hour charging and 15-hour discharging
Replaceability: Not possible to replace battery

Backup Data

128KB

Buzzer Output

Single tone (tone length is adjustable)

Degree of Protection

IP66F (IEC60529)*4

Weight (approx.)

FT1A-*12RA: 300 g
FT1A-*14KA/SA: 250 g

29■ EMC Specifications
FT1A-*12RA

Radiated Emission

Class A : 10m
40dBµV/m quasi-peak (30M to 230MHz)
47dBµV/m quasi-peak (230M to 1GHz)

FT1A-*14KA/SA

Electrostatic Discharge

Contact : ±6kV
Air : ±8kVElectromagnetic Field

10V/m (80 to 1000 MHz)
3V/m (1.4 to 2.0 GHz)
1V/m (2.0 to 2.7 GHz)
80% AM (1kHz)

Fast Transient Burst±2kV (Power, Output terminal)±1kV (Port, Ethernet, Input terminal)

Surge Immunity±500V (between +24V-0V)±1kV (between +24V-FE, 0V-FE)

Conducted Radio
Frequency Immunity

10V (Power, Port, Ethernet, Input terminal, Output terminal)(150kHz to 80MHz)
80% AM (1kHz)±2kV (Power)±1kV (Port, Ethernet, Input terminal,
Output terminal)*2 The backlight life refers to the time until the surface brightness reduces to a half after using continuously at room
temperatures.
*3 In high temperature environments battery life may be affected, so retention time may be reduced.
*4 The degree of protection for the operating section after the panel is attached. The compliance test has been passed, but thisis not a guarantee of operation in all environments.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

29-15

SmartAXIS Specifications

Type Number

1 Touch

1.6 Dimensions■ FT1A-*12RA
Unit: mm

<Cable Attached Dimensions>

Depending on the type of connection cable used the dimensions shown above will change.
The dimensions given here are intended for reference only.

29-16

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 Touch■ FT1A-*14KA/SA

65.5

77.0

Unit: mm

4.0

116.0

54.0
(58.9)

104.5<Cable Attached Dimensions>
30
15

29
SmartAXIS Specifications

50

20

Depending on the type of connection cable used the dimensions shown above will change.
The dimensions given here are intended for reference only.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual29-17

1 Touch

1.7 Installation● Operating Environment
For designed performance and safety of the Touch, do not install the Touch in the following environments:• Where dust, briny air, or iron particles exist.
• Where oil or chemical splashes for a long time.
• Where oil mist is filled.
• In direct sunlight.
• Where strong ultraviolet rays exist.
• Where corrosive or combustible gasses exist.
• Where the Touch is subjected to shocks or vibrations.
• Where condensation occurs due to rapid temperature change.
• Where high-voltage or arc-generating equipment (electromagnetic contactors or circuit protectors) exists in thevicinity.
● Ambient Temperature• Allow sufficient space for ventilation, and install the equipment away from heat sources.
• Allow at least 100mm between the Touch and walls or other equipment.
• Do not install the Touch where the ambient temperature exceeds the rated operating ambient temperature range.
When mounting the Touch in such locations, provide a forced air-cooling fan or air-conditioner to keep the ambient
temperature within the rated temperature range.
• The Touch is designed to install on a vertical plane so that natural air-cooling is provided. If you install it using anyother orientation, use forced-air cooling, or lower the ambient operating temperature.
Derating■ FT1A-*12RA
When using the Touch at an ambient temperature of 45°C or higher, reduce the output current of each output
terminal as shown in the figure below.*1
Installed upright in landscape orientation
Output Current

10A

5A

1A
45°C

0

50°C

55°C

Ambient Temperature

If operating the FT1A-*12RA in a high-temperature environment, reducing the brightness of the backlight
can help to limit the temperature rise of internal components.
The relationship between ambient temperature, the output current of each output terminal, and brightness
is approximately as shown in the figure below.
Brightness

100%

Output Current10A
Output Current5A
Output Current1A

Output terminal not used

50%
0

35°C

45°C

50°C

55°C

Ambient Temperature

The values shown above may vary with individual products. Please use this information as a reference atthe time of design.

*1 FT1A-*12RA-*: The UL and c-UL certified operating temperature is 0 to 50ºC.

29-18

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 Touch■ FT1A-*14KA/14SA
When used at ambient temperatures of 40ºC or higher, limit the usage of analog current output and the analog
cartridge as shown in the figure below.
Power Voltage
Range

Touch Analog Output

Cartridge

OperatingTemperature

20.4 to 24V DC

Voltage/current output
cannot be used

Voltage output (FC6A-PK2AV)/
current output (FC6A-PK2AW)
cannot be used

55ºC

20.4 to 28.8V DC

Current output cannot be
usedVoltage output (FC6A-PK2AV)/
current output (FC6A-PK2AW)
cannot be used

50ºC

20.4 to 28.8V DC

No restrictions

Voltage output (FC6A-PK2AV)/
current output (FC6A-PK2AW)
cannot be used

45ºC

20.4 to 28.8V DC

Current output cannot be
usedCurrent output (FC6A-PK2AW)
cannot be used

45ºC

20.4 to 28.8V DC

No restrictions

No restrictions

40ºC

If operating the FT1A-*14KA/14SA in a high-temperature environment, reducing the brightness of thebacklight can help to limit the temperature rise of internal components.
The relationship between ambient temperature and brightness is approximately as shown in the figure
below.

Brightness

Power Supply Voltage: 20.4 to 28.8 V
Unit Analog: No restrictions,
Cartridge: No restrictions
Power Supply Voltage: 20.4 to 24 V
Unit Analog Output: Cannot be used,
Cartridge: Voltage/current output cartridge cannot be used

100%

40%
10%
0

30ºC

40ºC

50ºC 55ºC

Ambient Temperature

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

29-19

29
SmartAXIS Specifications

The values shown above may vary with individual products. Please use this information as a reference atthe time of design.

1 Touch● Installation• Make a panel cut-out on the panel with the dimensions shown below.
B

Unit: mm
A

A

66.0

B
+1.0
0

105.0

Panel Cut-out+1.00

1.0 to 5.0• The Touch has the mounting clip positions not only on the top and bottom side (0.3 to 0.35 N•m).
TOP
Mounting Clip
Panel

BOTTOM
Mounting Clip Position

CAUTION• Do not tighten excessively, otherwise the Touch may warp and cause wrinkle on the display, or
impair the waterproof characteristics.
• If the mounting clips are tightened obliquely to the panel, the Touch may fall off the panel.
• When installing the Touch into a panel cut-out, make sure that the gasket is not twisted. Especiallywhen re-installing, take special care because any twists in the gasket will impair the waterproof
characteristics.
• Even in the panel thickness range, there is a risk that the waterproof characteristics cannot be
maintained due to the panel materials and size.

29-20

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 Touch● Orientation
The Touch is designed to install on a vertical landscape. If you install it using any other orientation, confirm thelimitations about operating temperature and the use of the Touch.
Operating Ambient Temperature (no freezing)
Orientation

FT1A-M(Monochrome LCD models)

FT1A-C(Color LCD models)

0 to 55°C-20 to 55°C

0 to 50°C-20 to 50°C

0 to 55°C-20 to 55°C

0 to 55°C-20 to 55°C

0 to 50°C-20 to 50°C

Vertical landscape Portrait

Portrait (Clockwise)
VerticalPortrait (Counter Clockwise)

29
SmartAXIS Specifications

Horizontal (Flip)

Horizontal• When installing the Touch in a diagonal, the limitations are same as a horizontal.
• Confirm the visibility of the display in a final installation.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual29-21

1 Touch

1.8 Attaching Cartridges (FT1A-*14KA/SA only)
1 Insert flat head screwdrivers into the screwdriver insertion slots in both locations of the unit, and while pushing thetabs of the cartridge cover, pull the cartridge cover directly upward to remove it.
Screwdriver insertion slot

Screwdriverinsertion slot
Cartridge cover

2 Pay careful attention to the direction of the cartridge and attach it directly onto the unit.

Cartridge

CAUTION
Attach the cartridge directly onto the unit. If the cartridge is attached when tilted, it may be damaged or cause
communication problems.

29-22

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 Touch

1.9 Wiring

CAUTION• Turn off the power supply before wiring.
• Make the wiring as short as possible and run all wires as far away as possible from high-voltage
and large-current cables. Follow all the procedures and precautions when wiring the Touch.
• Separate the Touch power supply wiring from the power lines of I/O devices and motor equipment.
• Ground the functional earth terminal to make sure of correct operation.
• Do not touch the terminals during communication. Doing so may result in electrical shock.
• When keeping power ON, terminals connected to external devices may reach high temperatures.
Do not touch the terminals immediately after turning the power off.
• Do not touch the terminals immediately after turning the power off. Doing so may result inelectrical shock.
• Insert and crimp the wire to the end portion of the ferrule.
• Always use ferrules when wiring stranded wire and multiple wires to the terminal block.
Otherwise there is a risk of wires becoming disconnected.
● Power Supply Terminal• Pin assignment is shown in the following table.

+

Power supply 24V DC (+24V)-

Power supply 0V (0V)29

Functional Earth (FE)Applicable Cable

AWG16 to AWG22
Stripped wire length 7 mm (Solid wire)

Recommended ferrule

AI 0.34-8 TQ (For AWG22, For 1 wire)
AI 0.5-8 WH (For AWG20, For 1 wire)
AI 0.75-8 GY (For AWG18, For 1 wire)
AI 1-8 RD (For AWG18, For 1 wire)
AI 1.5-8 BK (For AWG16, For 1 wire)
AI-TWIN 2×0.5-8 WH (For AWG20, For 2 wires)
AI-TWIN 2×0.75-8 GY (For AWG18, For 2 wires)(Phoenix Contact)

Tightening Torque

0.5 to 0.6 N•m (Screwdriver SZS 0.6 x 3.5, Phoenix Contact)

SmartAXIS Specifications• Use applicable cables for wiring and recommended ferrules (made by Phoenix Contact) as follows.

● Cautions when connecting external devices
The Touch power supply is non-isolating. Interference or external noise from external devices due to wiring may
cause adverse effects on the internal circuits of the Touch or external devices.
To prevent such damage, choose a proper solution depending on your system setup.
• Use a separate earth ground from the external noise source device.
• The wire for grounding should be thick and short in order to direct the noise from the noise source device to theearth ground.
• Use a separate power supply from the external noise source device.
• Insert an isolator on the communication line of the Touch and the non-isolated communication device (i.e. PLC) toprevent damage.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual29-23

1 Touch● Cautions for using the Touch connected to a computer
When connecting the Touch to a computer via the Serial Interface (Port) or USB Interface, the Touch or the computer
may break down depending on the conditions of the computer. Make sure of the following cautions, in order toprevent an accident.
• If the computer has a 3-pin power plug or power plug with a ground lead type. make sure to use a plug socket
including a ground input electrode or ground the earth lead, respectively.
• If the computer has a 2-pin power plug without ground lead, follow the procedure below when connect the Touchto the computer.
(1) Pull out the power plug of the computer from the AC outlet.
(2) Connect the Touch to the computer.
(3) Insert the power plug of the computer into the AC outlet.

1.10 USB Cable Lock Pin Attachment
When using the USB interface (USB1, USB2), attach the USB cable lock pin to prevent disconnecting the USB cable fromthe Touch.

1 Insert the USB cable into the USB port.
2 Strain the “Edge part” of the USB cable lock pin, and insert the “Edge part” to the 2 holes upper the USB port.
Edge Part

Clamp part

Upper Holes

3 Fasten the USB clamp band around the USB cable and the clamp part, secure them tightly.

29-24

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 Touch

Fasten the USB clamp band without the space between the clamp part and it, and the inclination.

29
SmartAXIS Specifications

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual29-25

1 Touch

1.11 Maintenance and Inspection
Maintain and inspect the Touch periodically to ensure the best performance. Do not disassemble, repair, or modify
the Touch during inspection.
Display

Wipe any stain of the display using a soft cloth slightly dampened with neutral detergent or
alcoholic solvent. Do not use solvents such as thinner, ammonia, strong acid, and strong
alkaline.

Terminals, Connectors

Check the terminals and connectors to make sure of no loose screws, incomplete insertion, ordisconnected lines.

Mounting Clips

Make sure that all mounting clips and screws are tightened sufficiently. If the mounting clips areloose, tighten the screw to the recommended tightening torque.

Backlight

The Touch backlight cannot be replaced by the customer. When the backlight needs to be
replaced, contact IDEC.

Touch Panel

A gap may be caused in the operation accuracy of the touch panel by the secular distortion, etc.
Adjust the touch panel according to the following procedure when there is a gap in the operationof the touch panel.

● Maintenance Screen
Turn on the power to the Touch, then press and hold the upper-left corner of the screen for three seconds or longer.
The Maintenance Screen appears on the screen.
Touch
Press and hold 3
or more seconds

Maintenance Screen (Color LCD models)Maintenance Screen (Monochrome LCD models)• Permission to show the Maintenance Screen can be set using WindO/I-NV3 software. For details, refer to Chapter 3“3.1 System Tab” on page 3-19.
• The Maintenance Screen is not displayed in the System Mode.
● System Mode
Press the System Mode at the top of the Maintenance Screen. The Top Page appears.
Top Page (Color LCD models)Top Page (Monochrome LCD models)

6<67(002'(7233$*(

6<67(002'(7233$*(

5XQ

0DLQ0HQX

-8/)5,
,3$GG '+&3

5XQ

0DLQ0HQX

-8/)5,
,3$GG '+&3&2175$67

%5,*+71(66

%5,*+71(66

Initial Setting, Self Diagnosis and Initialization of the data, etc can be executed in the System Mode.

29-26

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

1 Touch● Adjusting the Brightness and Contrast
The brightness and contrast of the Touch display can be adjusted on the Adjust Brightness/Contrast Screen. Adjust
the brightness and contrast to the best condition as required.

1 Press the Brightness (color LCD models) or Brightness/Contrast (monochrome LCD models) on the Maintenance
Screen.

The Adjust Brightness/Contrast Screen appears.
Color LCD models

2 Press

andMonochrome LCD models

at the bottom the Adjust Brightness/Contrast Screen to adjust the contrast to the optimal

setting.
Color LCD models

3 Press

Monochrome LCD models

to close the Adjust Brightness/Contrast Screen.

To adjust the brightness and contrast in the System Mode, use
Page.

and

located at the bottom of the Top

Top Page (Monochrome LCD models)

6<67(002'(7233$*(

6<67(002'(7233$*(

5XQ

5XQ

0DLQ0HQX

-8/)5,
,3$GG

'+&3

29

0DLQ0HQX

-8/)5,
,3$GG

'+&3&2175$67
%5,*+71(66

%5,*+71(66

Since contrast adjustment is not possible on color LCD models, the contrast adjust function is not displayed.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

29-27

SmartAXIS Specifications

Top Page (Color LCD models)1 Touch● Adjusting the Touch Panel
A gap may be caused in the operation accuracy of the touch panel by the secular distortion, etc. Adjust the touch
panel according to the following procedure when there is a gap in the operation of the touch panel.

1 Press Main Menu on Top Page in System Mode. The Main Menu appears.
Top Page (Color LCD models)Top Page (Monochrome LCD models)

6<67(002'(7233$*(

6<67(002'(7233$*(

5XQ

0DLQ0HQX

5XQ-8/)5,

0DLQ0HQX

-8/)5,

,3$GG '+&3,3$GG '+&3&2175$67

%5,*+71(66

%5,*+71(66

2 Press Init Set, Initialize, and then Touch PnlAdj. The confirmation screen appears and asks “Adjust Touch Panelsetting?” is displayed. Press Yes.
The Touch Panel Adjust Screen is displayed.

3 Press the center of the, then the position of the symbol changes one after another. Press five symbols

sequentially.

Press the center ofthe symbol.

When pressing, make sure to press the center of the symbol. This will ensure the accuracy of the touch
panel operation.

4 When normally recognized, the confirmation screen of 2 is restored.
At step 3, when pressing a point away from the center of theto the initial position, then repeat the step of 3 again.

29-28, a recognition error will result. Then the

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

returns

2 Analog Cartridge

2

Analog Cartridge

2.1 Packing Contents
Before installing the analog cartridge, make sure that the specifications of the product conform to your requirements,
and that no parts are missing or damaged due to accidents during transportation.
Name

Pcs/pack

Cartridge

1

Instruction Sheet

1

2.2 Type Number
Inputs/outputs

Cartridge type
Analog Output Cartridge

Type

Type No.

Output: 2

Voltage output: 0 to 10 V

FC6A-PK2AV

Output: 2

Current output: 4 to 20 mA

FC6A-PK2AW

Input: 2

Voltage input: 0 to 10 V
Current input: 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA

FC6A-PJ2A

Input: 2

Thermocouple input: K, J, R, S , B, E, T, N, C
Resistance thermometer input: Pt100, Pt1000,
Ni100, Ni1000

FC6A-PJ2CP

Analog Input Cartridge

29

2.3 Part Names

SmartAXIS Specifications

(3)

(1)

No.

(2)

Name

Description(1)

Terminal channel 0(2)

Terminal channel 1(3)

Connection connector for the Touch

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual29-29

2 Analog Cartridge

2.4 Specifications
Type Number

FC6A-PK2AV

FC6A-PK2AW

FC6A-PJ2A

FC6A-PJ2CP

Rated Voltage

5.0 V, 3.3 V (Supplied from the Touch)

Consumption Current

5.0 V: 70 mA
3.3 V: 30 mA

5.0 V: 185 mA
3.3 V: 30 mA

5.0 V: 3.3 V: 30 mA

5.0 V: 3.3 V: 30 mA

Weight

15 g

15 g

15 g

15 g

■ Analog Output Specifications
Type Number
Output Type
Load
D/A
Conversion

Output Error

Data

FC6A-PK2AV
Voltage Range

0 to 10 V

Current Range-

Impedance

2 kΩ min.

Load Type

Resistance load

4 to 20 mA
500 Ω max.

Cycle Time

20 ms

20 ms

Settling Time

40 ms max.

20 ms max.

Total Output System Transfer Time

60 ms+1 scan

40 ms+1 scan

Maximum Error at 25°C

±0.3% of FS±0.3% of FS

Temperature Coefficient±0.02%/°C of FS±0.02%/°C of FS

Reproducibility After Stabilization Time

±0.4% of FS±0.4% of FS

Non-linearity±0.01% of FS±0.01% of FS

Output Ripple

30 mV max.

30 mV max.

Overshoot0%0%Maximum Error±1.0% of FS±1.0% of FS

Digital Resolution

4,096 increments (12bit)

4,096 increments (12bit)

LSB Output Value

2.44 mV (0 to 10 V)

3.91 µA (4 to 20 mA)

Data Format in Application

0···4095 (0 to 10 V)

0···4095 (4 to 20 mA)

Monotonicity

Yes

Yes

Open Current Loop
Noise
ResistanceFC6A-PK2AW-

Cannot be detected

Maximum Temporary Deviation
during Electrical Noise Tests±4.0% of FS max.

±4.0% of FS max.

Recommended Cable

Shielded twisted pair

Crosstalk

1 LSB max.

1 LSB max.

None

None

Isolation
Effect When Output is Incorrectly Wired

No Damage

No DamageCalibration to Maintain Rated Accuracy

Not possible

Not possible■ Analog Input Specifications

29-30

Type Number

FC6A-PJ2A

Input Type

Voltage
input

FC6A-PJ2CP
Current
input

Resistance thermometer

Thermocouple

4 to
20 mA
0 to
20 mA

Pt100:-200 to +850 °C (-328 to 1562 'F)
Pt1000:-200 to +600 °C (-328 to 1112 'F)
Ni100:-60 to +180 °C (-76 to 356 'F)
Ni1000:-60 to +180 °C (-76 to 356 'F)(K)-200 to 1300 °C (-328 to 2372 °F)(J)-200 to 1000 °C (-328 to 1832 °F)(R)0 to 1760 °C (32 to 3200 °F)(S)0 to 1760 °C (32 to 3200 °F)(B)0 to 1820 °C (32 to 3308 °F)(E)-200 to 800 °C (-328 to 1472 °F)(T)-200 to 400 °C (-328 to 752 °F)(N)-200 to 1300 °C (-328 to 2372 °F)(C)0 to 2315 °C (32 to 4199 °F)

Input Range

0 to 10 V

Input Impedance

1 MΩ min. 250 Ω max. 1 MΩ min.

Allowable Conductor Resistance--

10 Ω max.

-

Input Detection Current--

TYP: 0.2 mA 1.0 mA max.

-

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Analog Cartridge

Type Number

AD
Conversion

FC6A-PJ2A

FC6A-PJ2CP

Sample Duration
Time

10 ms

Total Input System
Transfer Time

20 ms+1 scan

Type of Input

Single-ended input

Operating Mode

Self-scan

Conversion Method

SAR

10 ms

250 ms

250 ms

500 ms+1 scan

±0.1% of FS
Cold junction compensation
accuracy ±4.0°C or lessMaximum Error at
25°C±0.1% of FS±0.1% of FS

Temperature
Coefficient±0.02%/°C of FS±0.02%/°C of FS

Reproducibility After
Stabilization Time

±0.5% of FS±0.5% of FS

Non-linearity±0.01% of FS±0.01% of FS

Maximum Error±1.0% of FS±1.0% of FS

Input
Error

Digital Resolution

4,096 increments(12bit)Noise
Resistance

4.88 µA(0 to
20 mA)
3.91 µA(4 to
20 mA)

Pt100: 10500 (14bit)
Pt1000: 8000 (13bit)
Ni100: 2400 (12bit)
Ni1000: 2400 (12bit)

K: 15000 (14bit)
J: 12000 (14bit)
R: 17600 (15bit)
S: 17600 (15bit)
B: 18200 (15bit)
E: 10000 (14bit)
T: 6000 (13bit)
N: 15000 (14bit)
C: 23150 (15bit)

0.1°C
0.18'F

0.1°C
0.18'FLSB Input Value

2.44 mV(0-10 V)

Data Format in
Application

Can be arbitrarily set for each channel in the range of -32,768 to 32,773

Monotonicity

Yes

Maximum Temporary
Deviation during
Electrical Noise Tests±4.0% of FS max.

Recommended cable

Shielded twisted pair

Crosstalk

1 LSB max.

Isolation

None

Effect When Input isIncorrectly Wired

No Damage

Maximum Allowable Constant
Load *1(non-destructive)

40 mA

13 V

Input Type Modification

Software programming

Calibration to Maintain Rated
Accuracy

Not possible

29
SmartAXIS Specifications

Data

Exceptions
R, S thermocouple error:±6.0°C(0 to 200°C range only)
B thermocouple error:
Not guaranteed(0 to 300°C range only)
K, J, E, T, N thermocouple error:±0.4% FS
(0°C or lower range only)

13 V*1 The maximum amount of voltage value or current value that can be input without damaging the hardware.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual29-31

2 Analog Cartridge

2.5 Dimensions

44.6

Unit: mm

34.8

12.5
17.8

2.6 Installation
Refer to Chapter 29 “1.8 Attaching Cartridges (FT1A-*14KA/SA only)” on page 29-22.

29-32

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Analog Cartridge

2.7 Wiring

CAUTION• Do not connect a thermocouple to a hazardous voltage component (60V DC or peak 42.4 V or higher
component).
• Always check the wiring before turning on the power. If the wiring is incorrect, the analog cartridge may bedamaged. When there is a risk of malfunction due to noise, use a shielded cable for the wiring and connect bothends of the shield to the FG.
● Terminal Arrangement
FC6A-PK2AV

FC6A-PK2AW

OUT0
+

-

+

OUT1
NC

+

-

-

+

0...10 V

OUT0
NC

NC

+

-

-

Analog voltage input device

+

+

-

0...10 V
Analog voltage output device+-

Analog current input device

Analog current input device

IN1
+

-

FC6A-PJ2CP

IN0
-

+

0...20 mA
4...20 mA

FC6A-PJ2A+

NC

0...20 mA
4...20 mA

0...10 V

Analog voltage input device

-

OUT1

+

-

-

IN0
+

IN1

A

B

B’

A

B

B’

+

-

NC

+

-

NC

A

B
B’
Pt / Ni+

0...20 mA
4...20 mA
Analog current output device

Resistance thermometer

+

-

29

Thermocouple

SmartAXIS Specifications

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual29-33

2 Analog Cartridge

29-34

SmartAXIS Touch User's ManualChapter 30 TroubleshootingThis chapter describes the errors that may occur with the Touch and the measures necessary to correct these errors.

1

Error Messages
The Touch displays a variety of error messages in order to assist you in quickly analyze and resolve problems with the
hardware, communications system, and user screen data.

1.1 Errors Displayed on the Screen
The following error messages are displayed in the event of communication system problems and problems with user
screen data. When an error occurs, take the appropriate indicated action. If an error persists despite your attempts tocorrect it, contact your nearest sales representative.
Error Message

Cause

Solution

Waiting for default
screen No.

The default screen number is set at 0.

Write the screen number to System
Area 1 (address+0), or set the Default
Screen spin box on the System tab of
the Project Settings dialog box to avalue other than 0.

No screen data

The specified Base Screen does not exist.

Set the Base Screen and download it to
the Touch.

Processing error• This message is displayed when a value is divided by
0.
• There is data which cannot be handled with the
BCD4, BCD8, or float32 data types.
• Incorrect calendar data has been saved to the Calendarof the Data Display.

Check the calculation or settings.

Communication Error

An error occurred during communication with theexternal device.

Check the communication lines and thecommunication settings.
During 1: N communications, the port
number of the external device on which
the Communication error has occurred.

Device range error• The data is written to the device with the addressout of the range.
• The number of devices exceeds the limitation.

Check the device settings.

No USB flash drive
existsNo USB flash drive inserted when the unit attemptedto access the USB flash drive.

Insert a USB flash drive.

This USB flash drive is
not available• The type of USB flash drive is not recognized by the
Touch.
• The USB flash drive is broken.

Please use a new recommended USB
flash drive.

USB flash drive Access
Error

When the unit attempted to access the USB flash
Create some free space on the USB
drive:
flash drive or get a new one.
• The USB flash drive did not have enough free space.
• The USB flash drive was removed partway through.
• The USB flash drive was broken.

ZNV file is not foundThe project file (ZNV format) was not in the specified
location on the external memory when a download wasmade using the Project Data Transfer function.

Check whether or not the file is in thespecified location on the external
memory.

ZNV file format Error

When a download was made using the Project Data
Transfer function:• The project file is not in ZNV format.
• The file is corrupt.

Remake the project file (ZNV format).

When a download was made using the Project Data
Transfer function, the model of the downloaded project
and the model of the destination Touch were different

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

Check that the model name that is set in
the file you want to download is the sameas the model name of the destination
Touch.

30-1

Troubleshooting

Product Series is notcorrect30

1 Error Messages

Error Message

Cause

Solution

Script error

An error occurred for a process in execution of the script. Check the value of LSD52 and LSD53, andcorrect the script. For details, refer to
Chapter 20 “Script” on page 20-1.

Device write error

The script generated a lot of write data, and the write
operation failed.

Reduce the number of write operations tobe performed at the same time.

Insufficient memory
error

The resource memory of the Touch is insufficientbecause of the use of a large number of the following
parts.
• Pilot Lamps, Multi-State Lamps, and Picture Displayswith the Recover Background checkbox is selected.
• Message Display and Message Switching Display with the
Scroll checkbox is selected.
• Parts over the number limit of parts that can be set per
screen by overlapping Base Screen.

Clear the Recover Background or Scroll
checkbox, or delete parts to reduce
memory resource utilization.

Indirect device error

Indirect write failure with Word Button or Word Write
Command.

Do not perform indirect read-write withexternal devices while HMI Special Internal
Relay LSM14 or LSM15 is ON.

Check Interface settings

Touch cannot change into the Run mode because theInterface settings are not correct.

Modify settings using the Communication
Interface tab of the Project Settings dialog
box before downloading.

Network off-line

This error message is only displayed when O/I Link isbeing used.

See the "External Device Setup Manual"for details.

TP/CP

The control device timer or counter preset value wasmodified.

Press Main Menu, Initial Setting, andthen TP/CP Change in order on the Top
Page in the System Mode

Output circuit error

The circuit for the relay output did not operate normally.

If this problem occurs frequently, theTouch may be damaged and require
replacement.

Analog input error

The user program in which the operation mode of AI0/
AI1 is configured as the current input is downloaded toTouch (relay output type).

Configure the operation mode of AI0/AI1
as the voltage input and download the
project.

Overcurrent

Voltage input is applied is applied to AI0/AI1 that isconfigured as the current input, or the applied current
input is more than 40 mA.

Confirm the applied current/voltage on
AI0/AI1 of the Touch (transistor outputtype).
When voltage is applied, configure the
Operating Mode of AI0/AI1 as the voltage
input and download the project.
When current is applied, make sure thatthe current input applied is within the
rated input (0 to 20 mA) and cycle thepower to the Touch.

1.2 Low Battery Voltage
An internal battery maintains clock settings and log data in the Touch. When the battery runs out, keep register data,log data and other backup data will be cleared, and the contrast is reset to the default value. If this happens, thefollowing message is displayed when the Touch is powered up, so take the indicated action.
This message does not show when the Enable Low Battery Warning check box on the System tab of
the Project Settings dialog box is not selected.
Note that in this case, System Area 2 (address+2, bit 14) is set to 1. Turn ON the power again to set the value to 0.
Message
Backup data lost

Description
The Log Data and Calendar Data are lost. Set the clock again. Keep the power ON for
about two days to charge the battery.

In case of storing Keep Relay or Keep Register to the flash memory using HMI Special Internal Relay(LSM10), stored data is transferred to the memory automatically when Backup data is lost.

30-2

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Error Information

2

Error Information
There are two kinds of errors with the control functions of the Touch: general errors and program execution errors.
General errors can be checked by the state of a Special Data Register (D8005), and they can be cleared.
Program execution errors can checked by the state of a Special Data Register (D8006).

2.1 General Error Codes
The error code is stored in Special Data Register D8005. If '1' is stored in each bit of D8005, the corresponding error
is occurring.
Also, general errors (D8005) and program execution errors (D8006) can be cleared by writing "1" to the mostsignificant bit of Special Data Register D8005, using a ladder program or FBD program. Due to parts andcommunication, writing "1" to the most significant bit of D8005 will not clear errors.
bit

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

bit

bit

8

7

bit

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

D8005
Error clear bit

Error information bits

● General Error Code List
Bit No.

Item

Cause

Solution0Power FailureThis error indicates when the power supply is lower
than the specified voltage. This error is also
recorded when the power is turned off.

Clear the error code using WindLDR.

1

Watchdog Timer
Error

The watchdog timer monitors the time required for
one program cycle (scan time). When the timeexceeds the allowed time, the watchdog timer
indicates an error.

Clear the error code using WindLDR. If
this error occurs frequently, the Touchhas to be replaced.

2, 3Reserved

4

Timer/Counter
Preset Value
Sum Check
Error

5

Reserved–

Clear the error code using WindLDR.

––
If this error occurs in a short period of
power interruption after the battery
has been charged as specified, thebattery is defective and the Touch has
to be replaced. Clear the error codeusing WindLDR.

6

Keep Data Sum
Check Error

This error indicates that the data designated to be
maintained during power failure is corrupted
because of memory backup failure.
Note that the “keep” data of internal relays andshift registers are cleared. Data of counters anddata registers are also cleared.

7

Program Syntax
Error

This error indicates that the ladder program or FBD
program has a syntax error.

Correct the ladder program or FBD
program, and then download it to the
Touch.

––

This error indicates that invalid data is foundduring execution of a ladder program or FBD
program. When this error occurs, special internal
relay M8004 (program execution error) is turnedon.

Refer to “2.2 Program Execution Error”
on page 30-5 and fix and clear theerror code. Clear the error code with
WindO/I-NV3.

8 to 12Reserved

13

Program
Execution Error

14

Reserved––

15

Error clear bit––

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

30-3

30
Troubleshooting–
The execution data of timer/counter preset values
is corrupted. The timer/counter preset values are
initialized to the values of the ladder programautomatically. Note that changed preset values arecleared and that the original values are restored.

2 Error Information

Example: This ladder program clears the error information using the error clear bit of special dataregister D8005.
Turn on M0 and turn on the upper bit of D8005. The error information is cleared at the end of the ladder scan.

1

S
M0000

D8005.15

2

R
M0000

● Touch Operating Status and Output during Errors
If an error occurs, the operation and output states of the Touch will be as follows.
Error Items

Operating Status

OutputChecked at

Power failure

Stop

OFF

Any time

Watchdog timer error

Stop

OFF

Any time

Program (ROM) CRC error

Stop

OFF

Starting operation

TIM/CNT preset value sum check error

Maintained

Maintained

When checking a change intimer/counter setting values

Keep data error

Maintained/Stop*1

Maintained/Stop*1

Turning power on

Program syntax error

Stop

OFF

Downloading a ladder program
or FBD program

Program execution error

Maintained

Maintained

Executing a ladder program or
FBD program*1 Operation starts to run and outputs are turned on or off according to the ladder program as default, but it is also possible tostop operation and turn off outputs using the Function Area Settings on WindLDR

30-4

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

2 Error Information

2.2 Program Execution Error
This error indicates that invalid data is found during execution of a ladder program or FBD program. When this error
occurs, the special internal relay M8004 (program execution error) is from 0 to 1. The detailed information of thiserror can be viewed from the error code stored in special data register D8006 (program execution error code).
● Ladder Program Execution Error Code (D8006)
Error CodeError Details

1

Source/destination device is out of range.

2

MUL result is out of data type range.

3

DIV result is out of data type range, or division by 0.

4

BCDLS has S1 or S1+1 exceeding 9,999.

5

S1 is 10,000 or higher in the HTOB(W) instruction, or S1 is 100,000,000 or higher in the HTOB(D) instruction.

6

BTOH has any digit of S1 exceeding 9.

7

HTOA/ATOH/BTOA/ATOB has quantity of digits to convert out of range.

8

ATOH/ATOB has non-ASCII data for S1 through S1+4.

9

In the WEEK instruction or WEEK FB, the ON time data is out of range (hour data is 24 or higher, minute data is
60 or higher), or the OFF time data is out of range (hour data is 25 or higher, minute data is 60 or higher).

10

In the YEAR instruction or YEAR FB, the month and day data is out of range (month data is 13 or higher, daydata is 32 or higher).

12

CVXTY/CVYTX is executed without matching XYFS.
XYFS and CVXTY/CVYTX have the same S1, but have different data types.

13

CVXTY/CVYTX has S2 exceeding the value specified in XYFS.

14

Label in LJMP, LCAL, or DJNZ is not found.

16

PID instruction execution error.

18

Attempt was made to execute an instruction that cannot be used in an interrupt program. (Refer to Chapter 3“4.9 Interrupt Input” on page 3-74.)
Attempt was made to execute an instruction that is not available for the external device.

21

DECO has S1 exceeding 255.

22

BCNT has S2 exceeding 256.

23

ICMP>= has S1 < S3.

25

BCDLS has S2 exceeding 7.

26

DI or EI is executed when interrupt input or timer interrupt is not programmed in the Function Area Settings.

27

Work area is broken when using DTML, DTIM, DTMH, DTMS, or TTIM.

28

S1 for trigonometric function instruction is invalid.

29

Result of F (float) data type instruction is out of the data type range.

30

The number of bits configured in SFTL instruction, SFTR instruction or SFR FB exceeds the valid range.

31

In the FIFOF instruction, the FIEX instruction or the FOEX instruction was executed before the FIFO data file wasregistered.

32

TADD, TSUB, HOUR, or HTOS has invalid data for source device S1 or HOUR FB has invalid data for Preset value.

34

NDSRC has invalid data for source device S3.

35

In the SUM instruction, the execution result exceeds the valid range for the selected data type, or S2 data is 0.

36

In a DLOG/TRACE instruction or DLOG/TRACE FB, the size of the CSV file has exceeded 5 MB.

42

The execution is unsuccessful in SCRPT instruction or SCRPT FB.

43

The minimum value is greater than the maximum value in RCMP FB.

44

The shift registers specified by the start shift register and the number of bits in SFR FB does not exist.

45

In RPULS FB, the lower limit of ON time is greater than the upper limit of ON time, or the upper limit of ON timeis greater than the cycle.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

30-5

30
Troubleshooting19

3 Handling Problems

3

Handling Problems

3.1 When You Cannot Download Project Data
If you are unable to download project data from the WindO/I-NV3, press the top left corner of the panel for threeseconds while at the same time turning the power off and back on again.

When power is turned on again, the screen in the System Mode is displayed, and then Touch becomes downloadable
status. If you download using Ethernet and O/I Link, check again each setting of TCP/IP and O/I Link before
executing the download.

3.2 When the Backlight is OFF and the Buzzer Sounds
If you fail to download the runtime system to Touch, the backlight may turn to OFF and a buzzer may soundcontinuously every second, even after the power has been turned off and on again. If this happens, rectify thesituation by doing the following:
Download the project and the runtime system by using WindO/I-NV3 via USB cable. When the Touch is in this state,
projects cannot be downloaded via Ethernet or using an external memory.
To download the runtime system, when you download a project, click Option on the Download dialog box in WindO/
I-NV3, and then select Download Runtime system on the Options dialog box.

30-6

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

3 Handling Problems

3.3 When a Problem Occurs with a Control Function
This section describes the procedures to determine the cause of trouble and actions to be taken when any trouble of
the Control Function occurs while operating the Touch. In case of any trouble, refer to the following table todetermine the cause and to correct the error.
Problem
Ladder program or FBD
program doesn't execute.

Cause
M8000 is not "1".

Set "1" to M8000.

The stop or rest input is designated using Function
Area Settings.

Set "0" to the stop and reset inputs.

Input device is not "1".
Input device address is incorrect.
Input does not operate
normally.

ActionCorrect the program.
Correct the input wiring.

The input terminal is not powered.

Supply the rated voltage to the input
terminal.

Wiring or operation of external device is incorrect.

Correct the external device wiring.

Output device addresses are incorrect.

Correct the ladder program or FBD
program.

Output does not turn on and off.

The output circuit in the Touch isdamaged. Replace the Touch.

Touch output connection is incorrect.

Correctly connect the output.

The stop or reset input is designated in the
Function Area Settings.

Set "1" to the designated input.

The designated stop or reset input does not turnon and off.

Input does not work normally. Replace
the Touch.

M8000 is not "0".

Set "0" to M8000.

Watchdog timer error
occurs.

The scan time exceeds the time configred for thewatchdog timer.

NOP instruction can reset the watchdog
timer.
Insert a NOP instruction into the ladderprogram so the time configured for thewatchdog timer is not exceeded.

The interrupt/catch input
cannot receive shortpulses.

The input ON/OFF voltage level are not correct.

Make sure of correct input voltage.

Signals are not input to the Groups 1 through 5.

Select Single-phase High-speed
Counter in the Groups 1 through 5.

The function settings in WindLDR is not configured
correctly.

Specify the used group in thefrequency measurement settings.

Output does not operate
normally.

Ladder program or FBD
program cannot be
stopped.

Frequency measurement
does not work.

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

30-7

30
Troubleshooting

The input wiring is incorrect.

3 Handling Problems

30-8

SmartAXIS Touch User's ManualAppendix
This chapter contains the Color Number Correspondence Table, and describes details about the Color Palette andother settings used in WindO/I-NV3.

1

Color Number Correspondence Table
This table is used when using Message Display and Script. Select a value from the Data column of the table and you
can change the display color of an object.
Color No.

Data

Color No.

Data

Color No.

Data

Color No.

Data

Color No.

Data

Color No.

Data

041

0x29

083

0x53

125

0x7D

167

0xA7

209

0xD1
0xD2

000

0x00

042

0x2A

084

0x54

126

0x7E

168

0xA8

210

001

0x01

043

0x2B

085

0x55

127

0x7F

169

0xA9

211

0xD3

002

0x02

044

0x2C

086

0x56

128

0x80

170

0xAA

212

0xD4

003

0x03

045

0x2D

087

0x57

129

0x81

171

0xAB

213

0xD5

004

0x04

046

0x2E

088

0x58

130

0x82

172

0xAC

214

0xD6

005

0x05

047

0x2F

089

0x59

131

0x83

173

0xAD

215

0xD7

006

0x06

048

0x30

090

0x5A

132

0x84

174

0xAE

216

0xD8

007

0x07

049

0x31

091

0x5B

133

0x85

175

0xAF

217

0xD9

008

0x08

050

0x32

092

0x5C

134

0x86

176

0xB0

218

0xDA

009

0x09

051

0x33

093

0x5D

135

0x87

177

0xB1

219

0xDB

010

0x0A

052

0x34

094

0x5E

136

0x88

178

0xB2

220

0xDC

011

0x0B

053

0x35

095

0x5F

137

0x89

179

0xB3

221

0xDD

0x0C

054

0x36

096

0x60

138

0x8A

180

0xB4

222

0xDE

013

0x0D

055

0x37

097

0x61

139

0x8B

181

0xB5

223

0xDF

014

0x0E

056

0x38

098

0x62

140

0x8C

182

0xB6

224

0xE0

015

0x0F

057

0x39

099

0x63

141

0x8D

183

0xB7

225

0xE1

016

0x10

058

0x3A

100

0x64

142

0x8E

184

0xB8

226

0xE2

017

0x11

059

0x3B

101

0x65

143

0x8F

185

0xB9

227

0xE3

018

0x12

060

0x3C

102

0x66

144

0x90

186

0xBA

228

0xE4

019

0x13

061

0x3D

103

0x67

145

0x91

187

0xBB

229

0xE5

020

0x14

062

0x3E

104

0x68

146

0x92

188

0xBC

230

0xE6

021

0x15

063

0x3F

105

0x69

147

0x93

189

0xBD

231

0xE7

022

0x16

064

0x40

106

0x6A

148

0x94

190

0xBE

232

0xE8

023

0x17

065

0x41

107

0x6B

149

0x95

191

0xBF

233

0xE9

024

0x18

066

0x42

108

0x6C

150

0x96

192

0xC0

234

0xEA

025

0x19

067

0x43

109

0x6D

151

0x97

193

0xC1

235

0xEB

026

0x1A

068

0x44

110

0x6E

152

0x98

194

0xC2

236

0xEC

027

0x1B

069

0x45

111

0x6F

153

0x99

195

0xC3

237

0xED

028

0x1C

070

0x46

112

0x70

154

0x9A

196

0xC4

238

0xEE

029

0x1D

071

0x47

113

0x71

155

0x9B

197

0xC5

239

0xEF

030

0x1E

072

0x48

114

0x72

156

0x9C

198

0xC6

240

0xF0

031

0x1F

073

0x49

115

0x73

157

0x9D

199

0xC7

241

0xF1

032

0x20

074

0x4A

116

0x74

158

0x9E

200

0xC8

242

0xF2

033

0x21

075

0x4B

117

0x75

159

0x9F

201

0xC9

243

0xF3

034

0x22

076

0x4C

118

0x76

160

0xA0

202

0xCA

244

0xF4

035

0x23

077

0x4D

119

0x77

161

0xA1

203

0xCB

245

0xF5

036

0x24

078

0x4E

120

0x78

162

0xA2

204

0xCC

246

0xF6

037

0x25

079

0x4F

121

0x79

163

0xA3

205

0xCD

255

0xF7

038

0x26

080

0x50

122

0x7A

164

0xA4

206

0xCE

039

0x27

081

0x51

123

0x7B

165

0xA5

207

0xCF

040

0x28

082

0x52

124

0x7C

166

0xA6

208

0xD0

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

A-1

Appendix012

2 View Browser

2

View Browser
The View Browser displays the list of graphics that have been prepared in advance in WindO/I-NV3. The settings
displayed on View Browser vary based on the parts.
These graphics can be used as the outline of parts.
Example: Bit Button■ TypeSelects the category of graphics.
■ OFF, ON
Displays the graphic when OFF or ON. Click ON or OFF to switch the graphics displayed on the list.
■ Picture List
Displays the list of registered graphics. Select the graphic to use as the outline of the part.
■ OK
Closes the View Browser and sets the selected graphic to the caller.

A-2

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

3 Color Palette3

Color Palette
The Color Palette is used to select colors for drawing objects, text on parts, outlines, flanges, plates and other objects.
The Color Palette appears when you click on the Color button in the object’s Properties dialog box.

● Functions of Color Palette buttons■ ColorSelects a color. Clicking these buttons sets the Color button to the selected color.
■ >>More, <<Less
Switches the palette display. Clicking >> More shows all the colors assignable to the Color button. Clicking <<Less shows only the basic colors assignable to the Color button.
■ TMC
This feature allows use of the text color specified in Text Manager. Click this button to use the text color specified in
Text Manager. The TMC button appears on the Color Palette only if the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
● Color Palette Types
The type of color palette shown varies based on the series being used.
■ 256 Color Palette*1<< Less button

Color buttons>> More button

Appendix

TMC button■ 8 shades Monochrome Palette*2<< Less button
Color buttons >> More button
TMC button*1 Color LCD models only
*2 Monochrome LCD models only

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualA-3

4 Pattern Palette

4

Pattern Palette
The Pattern Palette is used to select patterns for drawing objects, part outlines, flanges, and other objects.
The Pattern Palette appears when you click on the Pattern button in the object’s Properties dialog box.
Click the Pattern button and select a pattern.
Drawings

Pattern buttons

Parts

Pattern buttons● Foreground and Background Colors
Drawing objects, part outlines and flanges are formed by foreground and background colors.
The selected pattern is applied to the foreground color.
Foreground color
Background color

The background color is visible through the unpainted parts of the foreground color.

● Patterns
These patterns are available on WindO/I-NV3.
Pattern name

None*1

Foreground100%

Foreground25%

Foreground50%

Background100%

Horizontal
lines

Vertical lines

Slant Upwards

Slant
Downwards

Crosshatch

Pattern buttons

Display sample

Pattern name
Pattern buttons

Display sample*1 None can only be applied to drawing objects. Selecting None is the same as not applying any color at all.

A-4

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualTint5 Text Alignment

5

Text Alignment
Text Alignment is used to adjust the way text appears on Drawing Objects and Parts.

● Horizontal Writing
These examples show how text appears using different combinations of the Align Text Horizontal and Align Text
Vertical properties.
Align Text Horizontal
Left

CenterTop

Align Text
VerticalRight

Center-Left---

Center(CenterTop)

Bottom---■ Align Text VerticalTop:

Aligns the text along the top edge.
Aligns text along top edge

Center (Center-Top):

Centers the text vertically in the center.

AppendixCenters text in the middle

Bottom:Aligns the text along the bottom edge.

Aligns text along bottom edge

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

A-5

5 Text Alignment■ Align Text Horizontal
Left:

Aligns the text along the left edge.
Aligns along left edge

Center:Centers the text horizontally in the center.
Centers text in the middle

Right:

Aligns the text along the right edge.
Aligns along right edge

Center-Left:

Centers the line containing the most number of characters, and then aligns the other lines
to the left end of that line.
Aligns to left end of line with most characters

Centers line with most characters

If Align Text Horizontal is set to Center-Left, Align Text Vertical will automatically be set to CenterTop. Center-Top results in the same display as Center.

● Vertical Writing
These examples show how text appears for Align Text Horizontal.
Align Text Vertical defaults to Top.
Align Text Horizontal
Left

Align
Text
VerticalA-6

CenterTop

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualRight5 Text Alignment■ Align Text Horizontal
Left:

Aligns the text along the left edge.
Aligns along left edge

Center:Centers the text horizontally in the center.
Centers text in the middle

Right:

Aligns the text along the right edge.
Aligns along right edge

Take note of these points when the Vertical Writing check box is selected:• When there is a mixture of double-byte and single-byte characters, the half-width characters are leftaligned.
Aligned toleft edge• Dashes are displayed horizontally. Symbols representing voiced and semi-voiced sounds of single-bytecharacters are shown as follows.
Horizontal
display

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

Appendix

Next
characters

A-7

6 Ladder Program6

Ladder ProgramThis section describes details on ladder program processing, instruction execution times, and the byte count for
instructions.

6.1 Processing in One Scan
While the Touch is running, the Touch performs operations repeatedly such as input refreshing, ladder program
processing, and error checking. A scan is the execution of all instructions from the first line of the ladder program to
the END instruction. The time required for this execution is referred to as one scan time. The scan time varies withrespect to program length.
The current value of the scan time is stored to special data register D8023 (scan time current value), and the
maximum value of the scan time is stored to special data register D8024 (scan time maximum value).

6.2 Executing Program Instructions
During the scan time, the ladder program is executed sequentially from the top to the bottom except when interrupt
programs are executed. One scan time of a ladder program is approximately equal to the total of execution time ofeach instruction.
For the instruction execution times, refer to “6.4 Execution Times for Instructions” on page A-9.
When the processing time for one scan exceeds the specified time, a watch dog timer error occurs and thesystem is reset. For details on the watchdog timer, refer to Chapter 3 “4.17 Watchdog Timer Setting” onpage 3-98.

6.3 Breakdown of END Processing TimeWith the Touch, processing that occurs outside ladder program processing is referred to as END processing. This
includes the processing for I/O refreshing and error checking.
ItemHousekeeping (built-in I/O service)

A-8

END Processing Time
5 msec min.

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

6 Ladder Program

6.4 Execution Times for Instructions

Instruction

LOD, LODN

OUT, OUTN

SET, RST

AND, ANDN, OR, ORN

Device andCondition

Execution
Time (μs)―

1.58

CMP (=, <>, <, >, ≤, ≥) (D, L)

D↔D→M

127.5
127.5

2.17

ICMP (≥)

D↔D↔D→M

169.5

―

1.08

LC (=, <>, <, >, ≤, ≥) (W, I)

D↔D

5.0

Using dataregister

LC (=, <>, <, >, ≤, ≥) (D, L)

D↔D

86.5

2.17

LC (=, <>, <, >, ≤, ≥) (F)

D↔D

86.5

―

0.81

ADD (W, I)

Using dataregister

2.46

―

0.85
0.99

BPP

―

0.99

SOTU, SOTD

―

2.16

TML, TIM, TMH, TMS

―

5.45

TMLO, TIMO, TMHO, TMSO

―

5.45

CNT, CDP, CUD

―

4.33

CNTD, CDPD, CUDD

―

126.1

N bitsCC=, CC≥

42.7+0.4n―

2.38

DC=, DC≥―

2.94

MCS, MCR, JMP, JEND

―

―

END

―

―

NOP

―

―

ADD (D, L)
ADD (F)SUB (W, I)
SUB (D, L)
SUB (F)MUL (W, I)
MUL (D, L)
MUL (F)DIV (W, I)
DIV (D, L)

M+M→D

86.5

D+D→D

47.3

M+M→D

166.3

D+D→D

167.3

D+D→D

171.9

M-M→D

86.5

D-D→D

47.3

M-M→D

166.3

D-D→D

167.3

D-D→D

171.9

M×M→D

86.5

D×D→D

47.3

M×M→D

166.3

D×D→D

167.3

D×D→D

171.9

M÷M→D

86.5

D÷D→D

9.3

M÷M→D

166.3

D÷D→D

167.3

44.7

D→D

4.3

DIV (F)

D÷D→D

171.9

M→M

84.5

INC (W, I)

―

44.7

D→D

84.5

INC (D, L)

―

124.5

―

84.5

DEC (W, I)

―

44.7

M+D→M+D

48.4

DEC (D, L)

―

124.5

7.7

ROOT (W)

D →D

5.5

D+D→D+D

87.9

ROOT (D)

D →D

86.7

―

87.9

ROOT (F)

D →D

886.5

M+D→M+D

47.5

SUM (W, I)

D, D→D47.6+1.1n

47.5

SUM (D, L)

D, D→D90.5+41.5n

90.3+1.4n

SUM (F)D, D→D90.5+45.0n

M·M→D,

46.1

D·D→D

5.7

ANDW, ORW, XORW (D)

D·D→D

127.1

N_B=100

56.1

D+D→D+D

IMOV (F)D+D→D+D
D→D

NSET (W, I)

D→D

1.8+2.5n

NSET (D, L)

D→D

1.8+83.0n

NSET (F)D→D

1.8+83.0n

ANDW, ORW, XORW (W)NRS (W, I)

D, D→D

16.5

SFTL, SFTR

NRS (D, L)

D, D→D

732.5

BCDLS

D→DS1=1

49.9

NRS (F)D, D→D

732.5

WSFT

D→D

91.3

D, bits=1

44.9

D→D

10.5

XCHG

D↔D

5.1

ROTL, ROTR

TCCST (W)

D→T

4.81

HTOB

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

A-9

Appendix

M→M

MOV (F)

BMOV

47.0

CMP (=, <>, <, >, ≤, ≥) (F) D↔D→M―

IBMV, IBMVN

85.5

D↔D→M

Using dataregister

BRD

IMOV, IMOVN (D)

D→T

CMP (=, <>, <, >, ≤, ≥) (W, I)

1.13

0.99

IMOV, IMOVN (W)

TCCST (D)――

MOV, MOVN (D, L)

Execution
Time (μs)

2.71

BPS

MOV, MOVN (W, I)

Device andCondition

Using dataregister

AND·LOD, OR·LOD

SFR, SFRN

Instruction

6 Ladder Program

Instruction

Device andCondition

Execution
Time (μs)

Instruction

Execution
Time (μs)

―

129.0

D, D, D→D

19.5

BTOH

D→D

11.1

FOEX

HTOA

D→D

13.7

NDSRC (W, I)

ATOH

D→D

6.0

NDSRC (D, L)

D, D, D→D

782.5

BTOA

D→D

13.7

NDSRC (F)D, D, D→D

782.5

ATOB

D→D

56.3

TADD

―

54.4

ENCO

M→Dbits=16

6.9

TSUB

―

54.4

DECO

D→M

50.0

HOUR

D→D, Y, D

20.6

BCNT

M→Dbits=16

―

HTOS

ALT

―

42.7

STOH

W, I, D, L→F

53.0

SCRPT

―

*1

PID

―

―

CVDT

F→W, I, D, L

56.3

DTDV

D→D

8.9

DTCB

D→D

10.4

SWAP (W)―

8.9

SWAP (D)

―

89.7

WEEK

―

―

YEAR

―

―

LABEL

―

―

LJMP

―

―

LCAL

―

―

LRET

―

―

DJNZ

―

―

IOREF

―

46.8

HSCRF

―

46.8

DI

―

90.3

EI

―

54.1

XYFS

―

―

CVXTY

―

―

CVYTX

―

―

AVRG (W, I)

S3=10

6.38

AVRG (D, L)

S3=10

49.5

AVRG (F)

S3=10

55.1

DTML, DTIM, DTMH

―

60.2

DTMS

―

63.0

TTIM

―

60.3

RAD

F→F

143.9

DEG

F→F

143.9

SIN, COS

F→F

161.1

TAN

F→F

149.1

ASIN, ACOS

F→F

618.9

ATAN

F→F

616.5

LOGE, LOG10

F→F

206.0

EXP

F→F

172.5

POW

F→F

191.0

FIFOF

―

129.0

FIEX

―

129.0

*1 The SCRPT instruction execution time is stored in D1+1 after the instruction is executed.

A-10

Device andCondition

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

―
D→D

52.7
92.1

6 Ladder Program

6.5 Instruction Bytes
The quantities of bytes of basic and advanced instructions are listed below.
● Basic Instruction
Basic
Instruction

Qty of Bytes

Basic
Instruction

Qty of Bytes
When not using
data registers

Using dataregisters

When not using
data registers

Using dataregisters

4

8

TMLO

8

―

8

―

8

―

LOD
LODN

4

8

TIMO

OUT

4

8

TMHO

OUTN

4

8

TMSO

8

―

8

―

SET

4

8

CNT

RST

4

8

CDP

8

―

8

―

AND

4

8

CUD

ANDN

4

8

CNTD

8

―

OR

4

8

CDPD

8

―

8

―

ORN

4

8

CUDD

AND·LOD

4

―

SFR

8

―

OR·LOD

4

―

SFRN

8

―

8

―

BPS

4

―

CC=

BRD

4

―

CC>=

8

―

8

―

BPP

4

―

DC=

SOTU

4

―

DC>=

8

―

SOTD

4

―

MCS

4

―

4

―

TML

8

―

MCR

TIM

8

―

JMP

4

―

TMH

8

―

JEND

4

―

―

END

4

―

Advanced Instruction

Qty of Bytes

TMS

8● Advanced Instruction
Advanced Instruction
NOP

Qty of Bytes
4

SFTL, SFTR

1212 to 16

IMOV, IMOVN

16

WSFT

IBMV, IBMVN

16 to 24

ROTL, ROTR

12

BMOV

12 to 16

HTOB, BTOH

12 to 16NSET

12 to 1,540

HTOA

12 to 20

NRS

12 to 20

ATOH

12 to 20XCHG

12 to 16

BTOA

12 to 20

TCCST

12 to 16

ATOB

12 to 20

CMP (=, <>, <, >, <=, >=)16 to 24ENCO

12 to 16

ICMP>=

16 to 28

DECO

12 to 16

LC (=, <>, <, >, <=, >=)12 to 20BCNT

12 to 20

16 to 24

ALT

8

8

CVDT

12 to 20ROOT

12 to 20DTDV

12 to 16SUM

16 to 20DTCB

12 to 16

ANDW, ORW, XORW

16 to 24SWAP

12 to 16

ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV
INC, DEC

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

12 to 16
12 to 20

Appendix

MOV, MOVN

BCDLS

A-11

6 Ladder Program

Advanced Instruction

A-12

Qty of Bytes

WEEK

20 to 532

YEAR

24 to 216

LABEL

8

LJMP

8 to 12LCAL

8 to 12

LRET

8

DJNZ

12 to 16

IOREF

12

HSCRF

8

DI

8

EI

8

XYFS

20 to 268

CVXTY, CVYTX

16 to 20

AVRG

16 to 24

DTML, DTIM, DTMH, DTMS

16 to 20TTIM

8 to 12RAD

12 to 16DEG

12 to 16SIN

12 to 16COS

12 to 16TAN

12 to 16ASIN

12 to 16ACOS

12 to 16ATAN

12 to 16LOGE

12 to 16LOG10

12 to 16EXP

12 to 16POW

12 to 24

FIFOF

20 to 24

FIEX

12

FOEX

12

NDSRC

16 to 24TADD

16 to 20TSUB

16 to 20

HOUR

16 to 24HTOS

12 to 16

STOH

12 to 16SCRPT

12 to 16

PID

112

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7 FBD Program

7

FBD ProgramThis section describes details on FBD program processing, FB execution time, and the byte count for FBs.

7.1 Processing in One Scan
While the Touch is running, the Touch continue to perform operations such as input refreshing, FBD program
processing, and error checking. The execution of such a set of processing is defined as a scan. The time required forthis execution is referred to as one scan time. The scan time varies depending on the created FBD program.
The current value of the scan time is stored to special data register D8023 (scan time current value), and the
maximum value of the scan time is stored to special data register D8024 (scan time maximum value).

7.2 FBD Program Processing
In FBD programs, all of the FBs connected to the output FB (digital output FB or internal relay FB) are executed
sequentially from the input FBs. The FBD program processing time in one scan is approximately equal to the total of
execution time of each FB.
For the execution time of each FB, refer to “7.4 FB Execution Time” on page A-14.
If the processing time for one scan exceeds the specified time for the watchdog timer, a watchdog timer
error occurs and the system is reset. For details on the watchdog timer, refer to Chapter 3 “4.17 Watchdog
Timer Setting” on page 3-98.

7.3 Breakdown of Scan End Processing Time
After processing the FBD program, the Touch processes housekeeping operations at the end of each scan. It is
referred to as Scan End processing. This includes the operations such as I/O refreshing and error checking.
Item
Scan End Processing

Processing Time
5 msec min.

Appendix

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

A-13

7 FBD Program

7.4 FB Execution TimeGroup

LogicalOperation

Timer

Counter

Shift Register
Data
Comparison

SymbolDevice and Condition

Execution time (μsec)

Logical AND

AND

―

73.0

Negative Logical AND

NAND

―

73.2

Logical OR

OR

―

73.2

Negative Logical OR

NOR

―

73.0

Exclusive Logical OR

XOR

―

72.6

Negative Exclusive Logical
OR

XNOR

―

72.8

Negation

NOT

―

70.8

Shot Up

SOTU

―

72.6

Shot Down

SOTD

―

72.8

Truth Table

TRUTH

―

73.4

On-delay Count Up Timer

TIMU

―

74.8

On-delay Count Down
Timer

TIMD

―

74.6

Off-delay Count Up Timer

TIMOU

―

75.0

Off-delay Count Down
Timer

TIMOD

―

75.0

On/off-delay Timer

TIMCU

―

77.4

Single Shot Pulse

SPULS

―

74.8

Dual Timer

DTIM

―

72.2

Random Pulse Output

RPULS

―

95.2

Adding Counter

CNT

W (Word)75.0

D (Double word)

152.0

W (Word)

75.6

D (Double word)

126.8

Up/Down Selection
Reversible Counter

CUD

Hour Meter

HOUR

―

94.6

Shift Register

SFR

―

50.8

Data Comparison

CMP

―

82.0

Schmitt Trigger

STTG

―

79.8

Range Comparison

RCMP

―

81.6

Data Conversion

Alternate Output

ALT

―

59.2

Week
Programmer

Weekly Timer

WEEK

―

112.8

Yearly Timer

YEAR

―

113.6

ScriptScript

SCRPT

―

―

High-speed Counter

HSC

―

159.0

RS Flip-flop

RSFF

―

53.2

Special

A-14

Name

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

7 FBD Program

7.5 FBD Program Limitation
FBD programs have a limitations on the program size and the number of FBs. Even when the FBD program is lessthan the maximum size, FBs cannot be added to the FBD program if the number of used FBs is at the maximum.
The size of the FBD program is the total of the size of all FBs used in the FBD program.
The number of Block (B) is the number of FBs that use blocks (B) in the program. The number of Timer (T) andCounter (C) is the total of devices used in the timer FB and counter FB. These are not the number of timer FBs andcounter FBs.
Maximum size of FBD program
Maximum number of blocks, timers,
and counters that can be used in the
FBD program

38,000 bytes
Block (B)

1,000

Timer (T)200Counter (C)200

The timer FB, counter FB, and depending on the FB, multiple devices may be used. For details about each
FB, refer to the description in the "SmartAXIS FBD Programming Manual".

Appendix

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

A-15

7 FBD Program● FB Size and Number of Used Devices
The size (quantities of bytes) and the number of used devices of FBs are listed below.
Group

LogicalOperation

Timer

Name

Qty of Bytes

Logical AND

AND

12

1

Negative Logical AND

NAND

12

1

Logical OR

OR

12

1

Negative Logical OR

NOR

12

1

Exclusive Logical OR

XOR

8Shift Register

XNOR

8

Negation

NOT

8

1

Shot Up

SOTU

8

1

Shot Down

SOTD

8

1

Truth Table

TRUTH

16

1

On-delay Count Up Timer

TIMU

8

1

On-delay Count Down
Timer

TIMD

8

1

Off-delay Count Up Timer

TIMOU

12

1

Off-delay Count Down
Timer

TIMOD

12

On/off-delay Timer

TIMCU

12

2

Single Shot Pulse

SPULS

12

1

T

1

1

Dual Timer

DTIM

12

3

Random Pulse Output

RPULS

12

3

CNT(W)

12

1

CNT(D)

12

2

Up/Down Selection
Reversible Counter

CUD(W)

16

CUD(D)

16

6

Hour Meter

HOUR

12

3

Shift Register

SFR

16

1

C

3

Data Comparison

CMP

16

1

Schmitt Trigger

STTG

20

1

Range Comparison

RCMP

20

1

Data Conversion

Alternate Output

ALT

12

Week
Programmer

Weekly Timer*1

WEEK

20 to 130

Yearly Timer*1

YEAR

24 to 2121

Script

SCRPT

12

1

High-speed Counter

HSC

12

1

RS Flip-flop

RSFF

8

1

Data
Comparison

ScriptSpecial*1 The size of the WEEK/YEAR FB varies depending on the number of tabs.

A-16

1
B

Negative Exclusive LogicalOR

Adding Counter
Counter

Device type

Number of
Used devices

SymbolSmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualB

11

7 FBD Program● FBD Program Examples
Example program 1

For example, in the above FBD program, the program size and the number of used devices can be calculated as
described below.
Block number

FB

Number of Used devices

Size (Qty of Bytes)

M8125

SM

Special Internal Relay

I1

I

Input
OutputBlock (B)Timer (T)Counter (C)Special internal relays, inputs, and outputs do not affect the FBD
program size or the number of used devices.

Q0

Q

B1

WEEK

Weekly Timer

24 (Number of tabs: 2) 1

0

0

T0

DTIM

Dual Timer

12

0

3

0

B2

OR

Logical OR

12

1

0

0

2

3

0

Total 48 (Program size)

Example program 2

Block number

FB

I1

I

Input

I2

I

Input

I3

I

Input

I4

I

Input

AI1

AI

Analog Input

Number of Used devices

Size (Qty of Bytes)

Block (B)Timer (T)Counter (C)Inputs, analog inputs, and internal relays do not affect the FBD
program size or the number of used devices.

M0003

M

Internal Relay

B1

AND

Logical AND

12

1

0

0

B2

OR

Logical OR

12

1

0

0

20

1

0

0

B3

STTG(I) Schmitt Trigger

C10

CNT(W) Counter

12
Total 56 (Program size)

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual

0

0

1

3

0

1

A-17

Appendix

For example, in the above FBD program, the program size and the number of used devices can be calculated as
described below.

7 FBD Program

A-18

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualIndexNumerics

Ladder program ................................................. 12-29
Available Updates ....................................................... 2-34

1:1 Communication ............................................ 22-2, 22-4
1:N Communication ............................................ 22-2, 22-5
256 Color Palette ..........................................................A-3
8 shades Monochrome Palette ........................................A-3

B
Background Colors ........................................................ A-4
Backlight color ............................................................ 4-15
Backlight OFF ............................................................. 4-16

A

Bar Chart ................................................................... 10-1

Actions and Operations of Ladder Program andBase Screen ............................................................... 4-14

FBD Program ........................................................ 12-1

Basic Instruction .............................................. 12-14, A-11

Active User ................................................................. 2-53

Batch

Add .......................... 7-19, 7-22, 7-74, 11-10, 11-13, 11-36

Advanced Instruction ........................................ 12-18, A-11

Alarm Log Function .............................................. 13-6
Alarm Log Settings ............................................. 13-21
Data Log Settings ............................................... 14-17
Data Structure and Output Example(Alarm Log Settings) .................................... 13-32
Data Structure and Output Example(Data Log Settings) ...................................... 14-37
Data Structure and Output Example(Operation Log Settings) .............................. 15-17
Operation Log Settings ....................................... 15-15
Batch Monitor ........................................................... 24-14

Alarm Display .............................................................. 7-67

Bit Button ..................................................................... 7-1

Adding a Security Group ............................................ 21-15
Additional fonts ......................................................... 23-15
Address
Enable Increment Address ..................................... 2-57
Adjust Brightness Screen ............................................. 28-2
Adjust Contrast Screen ................................................ 28-2
Adjusting Screen Brightness ......................................... 28-2
Administrator .............................................................. 21-4

Alarm List Display ............................................... 7-65, 9-83
Alarm Log Display .............................................. 7-65, 9-99

Bit Devices ................................................................. 27-1
Bit Functions ..................................................20-16, 20-34

Alarm Log Function ..................................................... 13-1

Bit Number Symbol ..................................................... 2-57

Alarm Log Settings dialog box .................................... 13-13

Bit operator .............................................................. 20-16

Alarm States ............................................................... 13-3

Bit Write Command ..................................................... 11-1

Alarm Tab ................................................................ 9-132

Bitwise Operators ...................................................... 20-32

Alternate .................................... 7-2, 7-5, 7-18, 7-22, 7-70

Blink .......................................................................... 4-16

Always Entry Mode ...................................................... 3-21

Blinking Cycle ............................................................. 3-22

Analog Cartridge .............................................. 3-88, 29-29

Block Settings ........................................................... 13-18

Analog Input ............................................................... 3-81

Block Tab ................................................................. 18-10

Analog Output ............................................................ 3-86

Breakdown of END Processing Time ............................... A-8

AND ......................... 7-19, 7-22, 7-74, 11-10, 11-13, 11-36

Breakdown of Scan End Processing Time ...................... A-13

Application Menu ......................................................... 2-37

C

Arithmetic Formulas ......................................... 9-18, 9-126

Calendar .................................................................. 9-129

Arithmetic operation .................................................. 20-16
Arithmetic Operators .......................................20-15, 20-31
Arrange ...................................................................... 2-48
Auto Backlight OFF ...................................................... 3-19
Auto-change IME ........................................................ 2-57
Automation Organizer Updater dialog box ..................... 2-34
Autorun Tab ............................................................... 3-41
Auto-Setup dialog box

Catch Input ................................................................ 3-72
Change User Account Dialog Box ............................... 21-32
Changing the Name of a Security Group ..................... 21-16
Channel Settings ....................................................... 13-19
Channel Tab
Alarm Log Settings ............................................. 13-16
Recipe Settings .................................................. 18-12
Character Code Table .................................................. 2-14

Alarm Log Settings ............................................. 13-18
Data Log Settings ............................................... 14-21
Available Data ...............................................................2-1

Character Input Keypad ............................................... 7-63

Character Input .......................................................... 9-23

FBD program ...................................................... 12-45

Charts ........................................................................ 10-1

Character string operation ......................................... 20-18

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualIndex-1

Index

Arc ............................................................................. 6-13

Circle ..........................................................................6-10

Confirmed ...................................................................13-3

Clear ........................................................................23-22

Connect Touch to a Computer ...................................... 23-4

Clear Data from the Touch .........................................23-22

Connection Diagram for User Communication .............. 22-73

Clipboard ....................................................................2-41

Connection Settings ................................................... 3-104

Clock Function ...........................................................3-101

Connection Status ..................................................... 12-48

Closing Screens ............................................................ 4-6

Constant ................................................................... 20-21

Color Number Correspondence Table ............................. A-1

Contents Tab .............................................................. 3-44

Color Palette ................................................................ A-3

Control Device Addresses

Command Settings Dialog Box ....................................22-26

Bit Devices ........................................................... 27-4
Word Devices ..................................................... 27-12
Control Devices

Commands ..................................................................11-1
Comment ..................................................................20-21
Comment Tab
Alarm List Display .................................................9-98
Alarm Log Display ...............................................9-113
Bar Chart ...........................................................10-18
Bit Button .............................................................7-16
Bit Write Command ...............................................11-8
Calendar ............................................................9-141
Character Input ....................................................9-36
Goto Screen Button ...............................................7-48
Goto Screen Command ........................................11-24
Key Button ...........................................................7-62
Line Chart ..........................................................10-38
Message Display ...................................................9-68
Message Switching Display ....................................9-82
Meter .................................................................10-58
Multi-Button .........................................................7-89
Multi-Command ..................................................11-45
Multi-State Lamp ...................................................8-25
Numerical Display ...............................................9-128
Numerical Input ....................................................9-20
Picture Display ......................................................9-52
Pie Chart ............................................................10-47
Pilot Lamp ............................................................8-13
Potentiometer .....................................................7-118
Script Command .................................................11-30
Selector Switch ...................................................7-108
Timer .................................................................11-51
Word Button .........................................................7-34
Word Write Command .........................................11-17
Communicate with .......................................................23-5

Keep and Clear .....................................................3-53
Control Function .......................................................... 12-1
Control Statements ......................................... 20-14, 20-22
Conversion of Programs
FBD Program ...................................................... 12-37
Ladder Program .................................................. 12-11
Converting Project Data for Transfer .............................25-2
Counter FB ............................................................... 12-43
Counting the Operation Count ...................................... 17-2
Counting the Operation Time .......................................17-2
Creating a Library Screen ............................................. 4-30
Creating a New User Communication Protocol ............. 22-11
Creating a screen ..........................................................4-2
Creating a USB Autorun Definition File (Text editor) ..... 26-22
Creating a User Account .............................................. 21-8
Creating FBD Program ............................................... 12-33
Creating Ladder Program ............................................. 12-5
Creating New Project Data .............................................3-1
Creating Recipe Files ................................................. 18-17
Creating Text Groups ................................................... 19-3
Custom Monitor ........................................................... 24-7

D
Data ........................................................................... 2-64
Data comparison and copy ......................................... 20-18
Data Comparison FB .................................................. 12-43

Communicating with the Touch ....................................23-1

Data Configuration

Communication ...........................................................2-45

Alarm Log Function ............................................... 13-5
Data Log Function ................................................ 14-5
Operation Log Function .........................................15-4
Recipe Function ....................................................18-3
Data Conversion FB ................................................... 12-43

Communication Driver ..................................................2-53
Communication Driver Extension Tab ............................3-36
Communication Driver Network Tab ..............................3-34
Communication Driver Tab ...........................................3-32

Data Displays ................................................................9-1

Communication Error Information ...............................12-49

Data for Recipes .......................................................... 18-2

Communication Interface Tab .......................................3-27

Data Labels dialog box ............................................... 15-12

Communication Settings ............................. 23-5, 26-3, 26-7

Data Log Function .......................................................14-1

Communication Timeout ............................................12-46

Data Log Settings dialog box ...................................... 14-12

Communications Driver Network Settings Dialog Box ......3-35

Data Over Tab

Compatible USB Bar Code Readers ..............................22-73
Completed Device ......................................................22-27
Conditional branching ................................................20-14
Configuration ..............................................................2-44

Index-2

Bar Chart ............................................................. 10-9Line Chart .......................................................... 10-31
Numerical Display ............................................... 9-121
Numerical Input ....................................................9-12

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualData Settings Dialog Box .................................14-21, 22-36

Downloading Files to an External Memory Inserted

Data Size .................................................................... 2-53

in the Touch ...................................................... 23-16

Data Storage Amount

Downloading Project Data

Alarm Log Function ............................................... 13-7
Data Log Function ................................................ 14-6
Operation Log Function ......................................... 15-6
Data Storage Area ....................................................... 16-1

USB flash drive ..................................................... 26-7
Downloading Project Data to the Touch ...................... 23-11

Data Storage Area Management dialog box ................... 16-4

Drawing Objects ........................................................... 5-2

Data Tab
Bar Chart ............................................................. 10-5
Data Log Settings ............................................... 14-19
Recipe Settings .................................................. 18-13
Data Transfer ...................................................... 1-6, 7-66

Downloading Project Files ............................................ 25-5
Draw ........................................................................ 20-19
Drawings ...................................................... 2-41, 5-1, 6-1
Duplicating Screens ....................................................... 4-8

E

Data Transfer Function ................................................ 25-1

Editing ....................................................................... 2-43

Data type conversion ................................................. 20-17

Editing a User Account .............................................. 21-12

Daylight Savings Time ............................................... 3-100

Editing Recipe Data ................................................... 18-14

Debugging in WindO/I-NV3 .......................................... 24-4

Editing Recipe Files ................................................... 18-21

Default Gateway ......................................................... 3-29

Ellipse ........................................................................ 6-10

Default Path ............................................................... 2-58

Enable Low Battery Warning ........................................ 3-20

Deleting a Security Group .......................................... 21-17

Enable Maintenance .................................................... 3-20

Deleting a User Account ............................................ 21-14

Enable Two-point Push ................................................ 3-20

Deleting Data

ENT button ................................................... 9-6, 9-7, 9-27

Alarm Log Function ............................................... 13-8
Data Log Function ................................................ 14-6
Operation Log Function ......................................... 15-6
Deleting Data from an External Memory Inserted

Equilateral Polygons .................................................... 6-18

in the Touch ....................................................... 23-24
Deleting Files on the USB Flash Drive ......................... 26-13
Deleting Library Screens .............................................. 4-33
Deleting Recipe Files ................................................. 18-22
Deleting Screens ......................................................... 4-10
Device AddressEnter Password Dialog Box ........................................ 21-38
Error Information ........................................................ 30-3
Error Messages ........................................................... 30-1
Errors Displayed on the Screen .................................... 30-1
Ethernet ....................................................3-29, 3-30, 23-6
Event Name .............................................................. 15-13
Example of User Communication Settings ................... 22-68
Executing and Stopping Ladder Programs or
FBD Programs ...................................................... 12-3

Maximum Number of External Devices ........ 3-108, 4-28
Device Address Settings ............................................... 2-61

Executing commands using the USB Autorun function ... 26-19

Device cache ............................................................ 20-52

Executing Program Instructions ...................................... A-8

Device Display .......................................................... 10-22

Execution Times for Instructions .................................... A-9

Device Monitor .......................................................... 24-19

Exit WindLDRDisable Switch ............................................................ 3-22

FBD Program ..................................................... 12-39
Ladder Program ................................................. 12-13
Exporting Library Screens ............................................ 4-34

Display Block No. ...................................................... 9-110

Display the Value of Device in Popup .......................... 24-16
Display with Arithmetic Operation ...................... 9-18, 9-126
Div ........................... 7-19, 7-22, 7-74, 11-10, 11-13, 11-36
DM Link Communication .............................................. 22-4

External Device Monitor ............................................. 24-15
External Memory ......................................................... 23-6
External Memory Devices ............................................ 26-1
External Memory Information Dialog Box .................... 23-30
External Memory Tab
Alarm Log Settings ............................................. 13-20
Data Log Settings ............................................... 14-16
Operation Log Settings ....................................... 15-14
Project Settings .................................................... 3-40

Docking ...................................................................... 2-49
Download ................................................................. 3-108
Download Data ......................................................... 23-13
Download Dialog Box ................................................ 23-13
Downloading ............................................................. 23-11
Downloading files
Downloader ......................................................... 26-6
USB flash drive ..................................................... 26-4

F
FB Execution Time ...................................................... A-14
FB Reference ............................................................ 12-40
FB Size and Number of Used Devices ........................... A-16

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualIndex-3

Index

Display side by side ..................................................... 2-52
Display the Order of Overlapping Screens ..................... 4-16

FBD Program ....................................................12-32, A-13
FBD Program Examples ............................................... A-17
FBD Program Limitation .............................................. A-15
FBD Program Processing ............................................. A-13
File structure
USB flash drive .....................................................26-2
Fill ..............................................................................6-21
Floating windows .........................................................2-49
Focus Order .......................................................4-16, 4-24
Font Assignment ..........................................................2-59
Font Information Dialog Box .......................................23-30
Font Size ...................................................................... 2-8
Fonts installed in the Touch ........................................... 2-5
Foreground Colors ........................................................ A-4
Format ......................................................................23-26
Arrange ................................................................2-48
Shape Style ..........................................................2-47
Size .....................................................................2-48
Text Style .............................................................2-47
Format List ................................................................20-14
Format Tab
Alarm List Display .................................................9-91
Alarm Log Display ...............................................9-107
Calendar ............................................................9-136
Character Input ....................................................9-30
Message Display ...................................................9-60
Message Switching Display ....................................9-78
Numerical Display ...............................................9-120
Numerical Input ....................................................9-10
Selector Switch ...................................................7-103
Formatting an External Memory Inserted in the Touch ...23-26
Formatting the USB Flash Drive ..................................26-14
Frequency Measurement ..............................................3-77
Function ...................................................................20-16
Function Area Settings .................................................3-46
Function List .................................................... 3-45, 20-10
Functions that Support Text Groups ..............................19-2

Key Button ........................................................... 7-51
Line Chart .......................................................... 10-21
Message Display ................................................... 9-56
Message Switching Display .................................... 9-72
Meter ................................................................. 10-50
Multi-Button ......................................................... 7-70
Multi-Command .................................................. 11-33
Multi-State Lamp .................................................. 8-16
New User Account .............................................. 21-32
Numerical Display ............................................... 9-116
Numerical Input ......................................................9-3
Operation Log Settings ........................................ 15-10
Picture Display ......................................................9-43
Pie Chart ............................................................ 10-41
Pilot Lamp ..............................................................8-3
Popup Screen .......................................................4-22
Potentiometer .................................................... 7-111
Script Command ................................................. 11-27
Selector Switch .....................................................7-96
Timer ................................................................. 11-48
User Accounts .................................................... 21-30
Word Button ......................................................... 7-21
Word Write Command ......................................... 11-12
Global Script ............................................................. 20-12
Goto Screen Button .....................................................7-35
Goto Screen Command .............................................. 11-18
Gridlines
Grid Settings ........................................................2-54
Show/Hide ........................................................... 2-46
Snap to Grid ......................................................... 2-53
Group Membership Tab
Change User Account .......................................... 21-33
New User Account .............................................. 21-33

H
Halt and exit ............................................................. 20-15
Handling Problems ......................................................30-6
Highlighting Objects While Satisfying Conditions .......... 24-16
High-quality Fonts .........................................................2-9
High-Speed Counter ....................................................3-55

G

HMI Device Addresses

General Error Codes .....................................................30-3
General Tab
Alarm List Display .................................................9-85
Alarm Log Display ...............................................9-101
Alarm Log Settings ..............................................13-13
Bar Chart .............................................................10-3
Base Screen .........................................................4-14
Bit Button .............................................................. 7-4
Bit Write Command ...............................................11-4
Calendar ............................................................9-131
Change User Account ..........................................21-32
Character Input ....................................................9-25
Data Log Settings ...............................................14-14
Global Script .......................................................20-12
Goto Screen Button ...............................................7-37
Goto Screen Command ........................................11-20

Index-4

Bit Devices ........................................................... 27-1
Word Devices .......................................................27-9
Home ......................................................................... 2-41
Horizontal Writing ........................................................ A-5

I
I/O Refresh Timing .................................................... 12-46
Image Files .................................................................2-18
Image Name ............................................................... 2-60
Importing Library Screens ............................................4-35
Importing Text from a Text List .................................... 19-8
Importing user communication protocol ...................... 22-20
Indirect read .................................................................2-4
Indirect write ................................................................2-4

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualIndividual Settings Dialog Box

Message Tab .............................................................. 9-74

Alarm List Display ................................................. 9-88
Alarm Log Settings ............................................. 13-18
Data Log Settings ............................................... 14-14
Preventive Maintenance Settings ............................ 17-8
Recipe Settings .................................................. 18-10
Input FB ................................................................... 12-40

Meter ....................................................................... 10-48

Input Filter ................................................................. 3-79
Input with Arithmetic Operation ................................... 9-18
Installed Fonts in the Touch ...........................................2-6
Instruction Bytes .........................................................A-11
Instructions Reference ............................................... 12-14
Interface Configuration ................................................ 3-27
Interface Settings ........................................................ 3-28
Internal Device ........................................................... 27-1
Interrupt Input ............................................................ 3-74
IP Address .................................................................. 3-29
Default ....................................................... 23-6, 23-7
IP Address Manager .................................................. 23-10

Minimize the Ribbon .................................................... 2-40
Minimum System Requirements ..................................... 2-1
Mod ..........................7-19, 7-22, 7-74, 11-10, 11-13, 11-36
Mode ......................................................................... 2-53
Momentary ................................ 7-2, 7-5, 7-18, 7-22, 7-70,
11-1, 11-4, 11-10, 11-12
Monitor Function ......................................................... 24-1
Monitor Mode ............................................................... 1-6
Monitor OperationFBD Program ..................................................... 12-38
Ladder Program ................................................. 12-12
Monitoring on the Touch ........................................... 24-18
Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3 ...................................... 24-1
Monitors ..................................................................... 2-45
Move ................................7-2, 7-5, 7-18, 7-21, 7-73, 7-74,
11-2, 11-5, 11-10, 11-12, 11-35, 11-36
Multi .........................7-19, 7-22, 7-74, 11-10, 11-13, 11-36

K

Multi-Button ...................................................... 7-68, 25-5

Keep data error ........................................................... 30-4

Multi-State Lamps ....................................................... 8-14

Multi-Command ................................................11-31, 25-5

Keep data sum check error .......................................... 30-3
Key Browser ............................................................... 7-66
Key Button ........................................................ 7-49, 25-5
For Alarm Displays ................................................ 7-65
For Data Transfer Keys ......................................... 7-65
For Keypad .......................................................... 7-63
Keypad .............................................................. 7-66, 7-90

L
Label of Recorded Data ............................................. 15-12
Ladder Monitor ................................................ 3-97, 24-23
Ladder Program ...................................................12-4, A-8
Library Screens ........................................................... 4-29
Library Tab ................................................................. 3-11
Line .............................................................................6-1
Line Chart ................................................................. 10-19

N
New ........................................................................... 4-30
New User Account Dialog Box .................................... 21-32
No External Devices .................................................... 22-6
No Touch Sound
Bit Button ............................................................ 7-15
Character Input .................................................... 9-35
Goto Screen Button .............................................. 7-47
Key Button ........................................................... 7-61
Multi-Button ......................................................... 7-88
Numerical Input ................................................... 9-19
Potentiometer .................................................... 7-117
Selector Switch .................................................. 7-107
Word Button ........................................................ 7-33
No. ................................................................... 4-14, 4-22
Not Clear Completed Device automatically .................. 22-28
Notch Settings dialog box .......................................... 7-100

Log Tab .................................................................... 9-103

Number of Blocks

Log Trend .......................................................10-21, 10-22
Logical Operators ............................................20-15, 20-30

Alarm Log Settings ............................................. 13-16
Recipe Settings .................................................... 18-8
Number of I/Os ........................................................ 12-46

Low Battery Voltage .................................................... 30-2

Numerical Display ..................................................... 9-114

Logical Operation FB ................................................. 12-41

Numerical Input ................................................... 3-21, 9-1

M

Numerical Input Keypad .............................................. 7-63

Maintenance Screen .................................................... 28-1
Master IP Address ....................................................... 23-9
Master Receive Timeout ............................................ 12-46

O
O/I Link Communication .............................................. 22-3

Maximum Number of Parts ........................................... 4-27

O/I Link Slaves ........................................................... 23-5

Message Display ......................................................... 9-53

O/I Link Tab ............................................................... 3-37

Message Switching Display .......................................... 9-70

Object List .................................................................. 2-59

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualIndex-5

Index

List Tab ...................................................................... 9-87

Occurred .....................................................................13-3
Offset .......................................................................20-20
Online .........................................................................2-44
Online Function ...........................................................23-1
Open Current Screens ................................................24-17
Opening Project Data .................................................... 3-4
Opening Screens .......................................................... 4-2
Operating Modes .......................................................... 1-6
Operation Count Tab ...................................................17-9
Operation Log Function ................................................15-1
Operation Log Settings dialog box ...............................15-10
Operation Time Tab .....................................................17-8
Operator ................................................. 2-64, 20-15, 21-4
Options dialog box .....................................................23-15
Options Tab
Alarm List Display .................................................9-94
Alarm Log Display ...............................................9-109
Alarm Log Settings ..............................................13-24
Bar Chart ...........................................................10-16
Base Screen .........................................................4-15
Bit Button .............................................................7-14
Calendar ............................................................9-139
Character Input ....................................................9-34
Data Log Settings ...............................................14-22
Goto Screen Button ...............................................7-46
Key Button ...........................................................7-60
Line Chart ..........................................................10-36
Message Display ...................................................9-65
Message Switching Display ....................................9-80
Meter .................................................................10-56
Multi-Button .........................................................7-87
Multi-State Lamp ...................................................8-23
Numerical Display ...............................................9-125
Numerical Input ....................................................9-16
Picture Display ......................................................9-50
Pie Chart ............................................................10-45
Pilot Lamp ............................................................8-11
Popup Screen .......................................................4-23
Potentiometer .....................................................7-116
Selector Switch ...................................................7-106
User Account ......................................................21-34
Word Button .........................................................7-32
OR ........................... 7-19, 7-22, 7-74, 11-10, 11-13, 11-36
Output FB .................................................................12-40
Overlay .......................................................................4-15

Picture .................................................................5-2, 6-23
Picture Display ............................................................ 9-40
Picture Manager .......................................................... 2-26
Picture Name Setting dialog box ................................... 2-32
Picture Tab .................................................................3-10
Pie ............................................................................. 6-15
Pie Chart ....................................................... 10-39, 10-42
Pilot Lamps ...................................................................8-1
Plate Color ..................................................................9-66
PLC Link Communication .............................................. 22-1
Polygon ........................................................................6-5
Polyline ........................................................................6-3
Popup Screen .............................................................. 4-22
Port ............................................................................ 23-6
Position ...................................................................... 2-53
Potentiometer ........................................................... 7-109
Power failure ..................................................... 30-3, 30-4
Preference ..................................................................2-34
Preventive Maintenance Function ................................. 17-1
Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box ..................17-6
Preview ...................................................................... 2-54
Preview button ............................................................ 2-57
Print Tab ......................................................................3-8
Printing Project Data .....................................................3-7
Priority of the Operator .............................................. 20-53
Processing in One ScanFBD Program ........................................................A-13
Ladder Program ..................................................... A-8
Program (ROM) CRC error ............................................30-4
Program Execution Error ............................ 30-3, 30-4, 30-5
Program Syntax Error ......................................... 30-3, 30-4
Project ............................................................ 2-43, 3-108
Project Data ..................................................................3-1
Project Data Transfer Procedures ................................. 25-1
Project Details Tab ......................................................3-42
Project Recovery dialog box .........................................2-35
Project Settings .................................................. 3-18, 3-19
Project Settings dialog box ...........................................3-19
Properties dialog box

Parts ...........................................................................2-42
Parts List .....................................................................2-60
Password Input .........................................................21-36
Password Screen .......................................................21-37
Pattern Palette ............................................................. A-4
Patterns ....................................................................... A-4
Peak charts .................................................................10-3

Index-6

Line Chart .......................................................... 10-27
Pen Recorder ............................................................ 10-22

Project Transfer Function ............................................. 25-1

P

Pen (Device) Tab

Line Chart .......................................................... 10-29
Pen (Log) Tab

Alarm List Display ................................................. 9-85
Alarm Log Display ............................................... 9-101
Arc ...................................................................... 6-14
Bar Chart ............................................................. 10-3
Bit Button ...............................................................7-4
Bit Write Command ............................................... 11-4
Bit Write for Multi-Functions ....................... 7-73, 11-35
Calendar ............................................................ 9-131
Character Input ....................................................9-25
Circle/Ellipse ......................................................... 6-11

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualEquilateral Polygons .............................................. 6-19
Fill ....................................................................... 6-22
Goto Screen Button .............................................. 7-37
Goto Screen Command ....................................... 11-20
Goto Screen for Multi-Functions .................. 7-76, 11-38
Key Button ........................................................... 7-51
Key for Multi-Functions .............................. 7-78, 11-40
Keypad ................................................................ 7-92
Line .......................................................................6-2
Line Chart .......................................................... 10-21
Message Display ................................................... 9-56
Message Switching Display .................................... 9-72
Meter ................................................................. 10-50
Multi-Button ......................................................... 7-70
Multi-Command .................................................. 11-33
Multi-State Lamp .................................................. 8-16
Numerical Display ............................................... 9-116
Numerical Input .....................................................9-3
Picture ................................................................. 6-24
Picture Display ..................................................... 9-43
Pie ....................................................................... 6-16
Pie Chart ............................................................ 10-41
Pilot Lamp ..............................................................8-3
Polygon .................................................................6-6
Polyline ..................................................................6-4
Potentiometer .................................................... 7-111
Rectangle ...............................................................6-8
Script Command ................................................. 11-27
Script for Multi-Functions ........................... 7-80, 11-42
Selector Switch ..................................................... 7-96
Text .................................................................... 6-26
Timer ................................................................ 11-48
Word Button ........................................................ 7-21
Word Write Command ......................................... 11-12
Word Write for Multi-Functions ................... 7-74, 11-36
Protect ....................................................................... 2-44
Protecting Data ........................................................... 21-2
Protecting Displays and Operations ............................... 21-5
Protecting the Display of Parts ................................... 21-22
Protecting the Display of Screens ............................... 21-18
Protecting the Operation of Parts ............................... 21-26
Protocol Manager ...................................................... 22-21
Protocol Tab ............................................................... 3-12

Data Structure and Output Example(Data Log Settings) ...................................... 14-37
Data Structure and Output Example(Operation Log Settings) .............................. 15-17
Operation Log Settings ....................................... 15-16
Receive (RXD) Command
BCC (Block Check Code) ..................................... 22-62
Constant (Character) .......................................... 22-50
Constant (Hexadecimal) ...................................... 22-51
Device ............................................................... 22-52
Registering Constant (Character) ......................... 22-57
Registering Constant (Hexadecimal) .................... 22-59
Skip .................................................................. 22-65
Receiving Character Time Out .................................... 22-23
Receiving Time Out ................................................... 22-31
Recipe Function .......................................................... 18-1
Recipe Settings dialog box ........................................... 18-8
Recorded Events ......................................................... 15-3
Recovered .................................................................. 13-3
Rectangle ..................................................................... 6-7
Reference Screen ..............................................9-94, 9-109
Registering Text ......................................................... 19-5
Registration Text Tab
Bit Button ............................................................ 7-10
Goto Screen Button .............................................. 7-42
Key Button ........................................................... 7-56
Multi-Button ......................................................... 7-83
Multi-State Lamp .................................................. 8-20
Pilot Lamp ............................................................. 8-7
Word Button ........................................................ 7-28
Relational Operator ................................................... 20-15
Relational Operators .................................................. 20-28
Remote Host List ...................................................... 3-106
Remote I/O .............................................................. 12-46
Remote I/O Communication Memory Refresh Image ... 12-48
Remote I/O master .........................................12-46, 12-48
Remote I/O slave ............................................12-46, 12-48
Repeat ..................................................................... 20-14
Reset ............................... 7-1, 7-4, 7-73, 11-1, 11-4, 11-35
Reset Input ................................................................ 3-49
Reusing Screens ......................................................... 4-12

Q

Run Mode ..................................................................... 1-6

Quick Access Toolbar ................................................... 2-38

Run/Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error ................. 3-51

R

Runtime system ........................................................ 23-15

Run/Stop Selection at Power Up ................................... 3-52

Range Tab ................................................................ 10-54
Reader ....................................................................... 21-4
Real Time
Alarm Log Function ............................................... 13-6
Alarm Log Settings ............................................. 13-22
Data Log Settings ............................................... 14-18
Data Structure and Output Example(Alarm Log Settings) .................................... 13-33

RXD ......................................................................... 22-27

S
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .................................................. P-1
Sampling Method ...................................................... 14-15
Save ............................................................................ 3-5
Save As ........................................................................ 3-6
Save option ................................................................ 2-58

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualIndex-7

Index

Ribbon ....................................................................... 2-41

Save Screen As ............................................................. 4-5

Shape Style ................................................................ 2-47

Save Screens ................................................................ 4-4

Shapes ..................................................................5-2, 6-1

Saving a screen ............................................................ 4-4

Shift Register FB ....................................................... 12-43

Saving Data

Show Below the Ribbon ............................................... 2-39

Alarm Log Function ...............................................13-7
Data Log Function .................................................14-6
Operation Log Function .........................................15-6
Saving Data as a CSV FileShow script error ......................................................... 3-20
Show/Hide ..................................................................2-46
Size ............................................................................ 2-48
Special Data Register ................................................. 12-48

Alarm Log Function .............................................13-32
Data Log Function ...............................................14-37
Operation Log Function .......................................15-17
Saving drawing objects drawn on the editing screen ......2-23

Special Functions ........................................................3-45

Saving graphic elements in Picture Manager ..................2-19

Specifications .......................................................2-1, 29-1

Saving image files ........................................................2-19

Stacked Bar Chart ..................................................... 10-41

Saving pictures as image files .......................................2-25

Standard Keypad Popup Screen .................................... 4-26

Saving Project Data ...................................................... 3-5

Start Code ................................................................ 22-66

Special FB ................................................................. 12-44
Special Internal Relay ................................................ 12-48

Saving Registered Text as a CSV File ............................19-7

Start Part with synchronous .........................................3-22

Saving registered user communication protocol as a file ...22-19

Start Time ..................................................................3-19

Scale Tab

Start WindLDRBar Chart ...........................................................10-11
Line Chart ..........................................................10-32
Meter .................................................................10-55
Screen ......................................................................... 4-1

FBD Program ...................................................... 12-32
Ladder Program ....................................................12-4
State Settings dialog box ............................................. 8-22
State Tab ....................................................................8-21

Screen List ..................................................................2-59

Station No.

Screen Monitor ............................................................24-6
Screen No. Format .......................................................3-19

Enable Increment Station No. ................................ 2-57
Status Bar .......................................................... 2-53, 2-55

Screen Number Restrictions ..........................................4-27

Status Device ............................................................ 22-29

Screen Size .................................................................. 4-1

Stop Input ..................................................................3-48

Screen Tab .................................................................. 3-9

Storage Method of 32-bit Numerical Data ...................... 3-21

Screen Type .......................................................4-14, 4-22
Screens .......................................................2-41, 2-47, 4-2

Storage Method of String Data ..................................... 3-21
String Data Storage Method ................................ 9-38, 9-69

Script ..........................................................................20-1

Sub .......................... 7-19, 7-22, 7-74, 11-10, 11-13, 11-36

Script Coding Examples ..............................................20-22

Subnet Mask ............................................................... 3-29

Script Command ........................................................11-25

Default ........................................................ 23-6, 23-7
Superimpose ............................................................... 4-23

Script Definition Method .............................................20-14
Script Editor ................................................................20-8
Script Error .................................................................20-4
Script FB ...................................................................12-44
Script Function ............................................................20-1
Script Manager ............................................................20-7
Security Function .........................................................21-1
Security Group ...................... 4-17, 4-24, 21-4, 21-6, 26-26
Selecting graphic elements from Symbol Factory ............2-21
Selector Switch ............................................................7-94
Set ................................... 7-1, 7-4, 7-18, 7-21, 7-73, 7-74,
11-1, 11-4, 11-10, 11-12, 11-35, 11-36
Set & Reset ...................................................... 7-73, 11-35
Set ON & OFF Data ........................................... 7-74, 11-36

Supported Languages ....................................................2-5
Switching the Displayed Language by Value of Device ... 19-10
Switching the Screen of the Touch ............................. 24-17
Symbol Factory ........................................................... 2-29
Symbol Options Dialog Box ..........................................2-30
System Area ............................................................... 3-23
System Information ................................................... 23-27
System Language ........................................................3-21
System Mode .......................................................1-6, 28-3
System Setup .............................................................. 2-44
System Tab ................................................................ 3-19

T

Set Slave No. ..............................................................23-9

Tag Editor ...................................................................2-62

Setting Conditional Expressions ....................................2-63

Target ........................................................................ 23-8

Setting the External Memory Folder ............................26-12

Target Information Dialog Box ................................... 23-29

Setting user communication for a communication

Target IP Address .......................................................23-8

interface ...............................................................22-8

Index-8

Target List ..................................................................23-7

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualTarget Slave ............................................................... 23-9
Temporary Device ..................................................... 20-21
Terminal Code .......................................................... 22-66
Text .................................................................... 5-2, 6-25
Text Alignment .............................................................A-5
Text Color .................................................................. 9-66
Text Group ........................................................ 2-53, 19-1
Text Group Settings Dialog Box .................................. 19-15

Picture Display ..................................................... 9-48
Pilot Lamp ............................................................. 8-9
Potentiometer .................................................... 7-114
Script Command ................................................. 11-28
Selector Switch .................................................. 7-104
Timer ................................................................ 11-49
Word Button ........................................................ 7-30
Word Write Command ........................................ 11-15
Troubleshooting .......................................................... 30-1

Text Manager ........................................................... 19-12

TXD ......................................................................... 22-26

Text size

Type Number ............................................................. 2-53

Enable Text Auto Resizing ..................................... 2-57
Text Style ................................................................... 2-47

U

The editing windows are displayed side by side ............. 2-52
Threshold ................................................................... 17-3
TIM/CNT preset value sum check error ......................... 30-4
Time Out (min) ........................................................... 23-6
Timer ....................................................................... 11-46
Timer FB .................................................................. 12-42
Timer Interrupt ........................................................... 3-84
Timer/Counter Preset Value Sum Check Error ................ 30-3

Upload Dialog Box ..................................................... 23-21
Upload Project Data from the Touch ........................... 23-18
Uploading ................................................................. 23-18
Uploading data
Downloader ......................................................... 26-6
USB flash drive ..................................................... 26-5
Uploading Project Data

TMC button ..................................................................A-3

USB flash drive ..................................................... 26-9
Uploading Project Files ................................................ 25-5

Toggle ..............................7-2, 7-5, 7-73, 11-2, 11-5, 11-35

USB ........................................................................... 23-6

Top Page .................................................................... 28-3

USB Autorun Definition File ........................................ 26-22

Touch ....................................................... 2-44, 23-5, 29-1

USB Autorun Function .......................................3-41, 26-18

Touch Panel Adjust ..................................................... 28-7

USB Autorun Function Security .................................. 26-26

Touch Setup ............................................................... 28-1

USB Flash Drive .......................................................... 26-1

Touch Sound .............................................................. 3-20

USB Interface ............................................................. 3-28

Touch switch .............................................................. 4-21

USB Popup Screen Function ....................................... 26-15

Transfer ..................................................................... 2-44

USB1 ......................................................................... 3-31

Transmission (TXD) Command

USB2 ......................................................................... 3-31

BCC (Block Check Code) ...................................... 22-47
Constant (Character) .......................................... 22-37
Constant (Hexadecimal) ...................................... 22-38
Device ............................................................... 22-39
Registering Constant (Character) ......................... 22-43
Registering Constant (Hexadecimal) ..................... 22-45
Transmission Wait ..................................................... 22-31

Use Device Cache ....................................................... 3-22
Use Large Font ........................................................... 3-20
Use System Area ......................................................... 3-22
User Accounts ............................................................ 21-1
User Accounts Dialog Box .......................................... 21-30
User Communication ................................................... 22-7
User Communication Protocol Settings Dialog Box ....... 22-23

Trigger Condition Settings ............................................ 2-63

User Communication Tab ............................................. 3-38

Trigger Condition Tab

Using a Library Screen ................................................ 4-31

Bar Chart ........................................................... 10-13
Bit Button ............................................................ 7-12
Bit Write Command .............................................. 11-6
Calendar ............................................................ 9-137
Character Input .................................................... 9-32
Global Script ....................................................... 20-13
Goto Screen Button .............................................. 7-44
Goto Screen Command ....................................... 11-22
Key Button ........................................................... 7-58
Line Chart .......................................................... 10-34
Message Display ................................................... 9-63
Multi-Button ......................................................... 7-85
Multi-Command .................................................. 11-43
Numerical Display ............................................... 9-123
Numerical Input ................................................... 9-14

Using the online function for Ethernet communication ... 23-7
Using the online function with an O/I Link Slave via
an O/I Link Master ............................................... 23-8

V
Vertical Installation Restrictions ................................... 4-28
Vertical Writing ............................................................. A-6
View .......................................................................... 2-46
Screens ............................................................... 2-47
Show/Hide ........................................................... 2-46
Window ............................................................... 2-47
Workspace ........................................................... 2-46
Zoom .................................................................. 2-47

SmartAXIS Touch User’s ManualIndex-9

Index

Trigger Condition ........................................................ 2-63

View Browser ............................................................... A-2
View Tab
Alarm List Display .................................................9-89
Alarm Log Display ...............................................9-105
Bar Chart .............................................................10-7
Bit Button .............................................................. 7-8
Calendar ............................................................9-134
Character Input ....................................................9-28
Goto Screen Button ...............................................7-40
Key Button ...........................................................7-54
Line Chart ..........................................................10-25
Message Display ...................................................9-58
Message Switching Display ....................................9-76
Meter .................................................................10-52
Multi-Button .........................................................7-81
Multi-State Lamp ...................................................8-18
Numerical Display ...............................................9-118
Numerical Input ..................................................... 9-8
Picture Display ......................................................9-46
Pie Chart ............................................................10-44
Pilot Lamp ............................................................. 8-5
Potentiometer .....................................................7-112
Selector Switch ...................................................7-101
Word Button .........................................................7-26

W
Watch Dog ..................................................................3-22
Watchdog timer error ..........................................30-3, 30-4
Watchdog Timer Setting ...............................................3-98
Week Programmer FB ................................................12-44
When a USB flash drive is inserted a popup window is
automatically displayed. ......................................26-15
WindO/I-NV3 ............................................................... 2-1
WindO/I-NV3 Options dialog box ..................................2-56
Window .............................................................2-47, 2-49
Windows Font ......................................................2-5, 2-12
Word Button ...............................................................7-17
Word Devices ..............................................................27-9
Word Functions .............................................. 20-16, 20-35
Word Write Command ..................................................11-9
Work Environment .......................................................2-56
Workspace ....................................... 2-46, 2-49, 2-57, 2-59
Write delay ...............................................................20-52

X
XOR .......................... 7-19, 7-22, 7-74, 11-10, 11-13, 11-36

Z
Zoom ........................................................ 2-47, 2-55, 2-59

Index-10

SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual